how much would sales have to drop under the status quo strategy for the two strategi 546322

Gillette Inc., the leading producer of grooming aids, was faced with a significant corporate strategy decision early in 1994 on whether it would continue its high-margin strategy or shift to a lower margin strategy to increase sales revenues in the face of intense generic competition. The two strategies are being considered.

Status Quo High-Margin Strategy

* Maintain profit margins at 1993 levels (In 1993, net income was $575 million on revenues of $5,750 million.) from 1994 to 2003.

* The sales/book value ratio, which was 3 in 1993, can then be expected to decline to 2.5 between 1994 and 2003.

* Reduce net profit margin to 8% from 1994 to 2003.

* The sales/book value ratio will then stay at 1993 levels from 1994 to 2003.

The book value per share at the end of 1993 is $9.75. The dividend payout ratio, which was 33% in 1993, is expected to remain unchanged from 1994 to 2003 under either strategy, as is the beta, which was 1.30 in 1993. (The T.Bond rate is 7%) After 2003, the earnings growth rate is expected to drop to 6% and the dividend payout ratio is expected to be 60% under either strategy. The beta will decline to 1.0.

a. Estimate the price/sales ratio under the status quo strategy.

b. Estimate the price/sales ratio under the low margin strategy.

c. Which strategy would you recommend and why.

d. How much would sales have to drop under the status quo strategy for the two strategies to be equivalent?

the following are prices of options traded on microsoft corporation which pays no di 546210

The following are prices of options traded on Microsoft Corporation, which pays no dividends.

Call

Put

K=85 K=90

K=85 K=90

1 month

2.75 1.00

4.50 7.50

3 month

4.00 2.75

5.75 9.00

6 month

7.75 6.00

8.00 12.00

The stock is trading at $83, and the annualized riskless rate is 3.8%. The standard deviation in In stock prices (based upon historical data) is 30%.

a. Estimate the value of a three-month call, with a strike price of 85.

b. Using the inputs from the Black-Scholes model, specify how you would replicate this call.

c. What is the implied standard deviation in this call?

d. Assume now that you buy a call with a strike price of 85 and sell a call with a strike price of 90. Draw the payoff diagram on this position.

e. Using put-call parity, estimate the value of a three-month put with a strike price of

how much would you be willing to pay for this security 546216

A new security on AT&T will entitle the investor to all dividends on AT&T over the next three years, limit upside potential to 20%, but also provide downside protection below 10%. AT&T stock is trading at $50, and three-year call and put options are traded on the exchange at the following prices

Call Options

Put Options

K

1 year

3 year

1 year

3 year

45

$8.69

$13.34

$1.99

$3.55

50

$5.86

$10.89

$3.92

$5.40

55

$3.78

$8.82

$6.59

$7.63

60

$2.35

$7.11

$9.92

$10.23

How much would you be willing to pay for this security?

evaluate whether the following actions are likely to increase stock market efficienc 546223

Evaluate whether the following actions are likely to increase stock market efficiency, decrease it or leave it unchanged, and explain why.

a. The government imposes a transaction tax of 1% on all stock transactions.

Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___

b. The securities exchange regulators impose a restriction on all short sales to prevent rampant speculation.

Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___

c. An options market, trading call and put options, is opened up, with options traded on many of the stocks listed on the exchange.

Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___

d. The stock market removes all restrictions on foreign investors acquiring and holding stock in companies.

Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___

how many years would you have to hold this fund to break even 546229

You are examining the performance of two mutual funds. AD VALUE Fund has been in existence since January 1, 1988 and invests primarily in low Price Earnings Ratio stocks, with high dividend yields. AD GROWTH Fund has also been in existence since January 1, 1988 but it invests primarily in high growth stocks, with high PE ratios and low or no dividends. The performance of these funds over the last five years is summarized below:

Average from 1988-1992

Price Appreciation

Dividend Yield

Beta

NYSE Composite

13%

3%

1

AD VALUE

11%

5%

0.8

AD GROWTH

15%

1%

1.2

The average risk free rate during the period was 6%. The current risk free rate is 3%.

a. How well or badly did these funds perform after adjusting for risk?

b. Assume that the front-end load on each of these funds is 5% (i.e. if you put $1000 in each of these funds today, you would only be investing $950 after the initial commission). Assume also that the excess returns you have calculated in part (a) will continue into the future and that you choose to invest in the fund that outperformed the market. How many years would you have to hold this fund to break even?

what is the expected return on heavytech over the next year 546245

You have just done a regression of monthly stock returns of HeavyTech Inc., a manufacturer of heavy machinery, on monthly market returns over the last five years and come up with the following regression:

RHeavyTech = 0.5% + 1.2 RM

The variance of the stock is 50% and the variance of the market is 20%. The current T.Bill rate is 3% (It was 5% one year ago). The stock is currently selling for $50, down $4 over the last year, and has paid a dividend of $2 during the last year and expects to pay a dividend of $2.50 over the next year. The NYSE composite has gone down 8% over the last year with a dividend yield of 3%. HeavyTech Inc. has a tax rate of 40%.

a. What is the expected return on HeavyTech over the next year?

b. What would you expect HeavyTech”s price to be one year from today?

c. What would you have expected HeavyTech”s stock returns to be over the last year?

d. What were the actual returns on HeavyTech over the last year?

e. HeavyTech has $100 million in equity and $5 million in debt. It plans to issue $50 million in new equity and retire $50 million in debt. Estimate the new beta.

estimate the beta for hewlett packard as a company is this beta going to be equal to 546248

You are analyzing the beta for Hewlett Packard and have broken down the company into four broad business groups with market values and betas for each group.

Business Group

Market Value of Equity

Beta

Mainframes

$ 2.0 billion

1.10

Personal Computers

$ 2.0 billion

1.50

Software

$ 1.0 billion

2.00

Printers

$ 3.0 billion

1.00

a. Estimate the beta for Hewlett Packard as a company. Is this beta going to be equal to the beta estimated by regressing past returns on HP stock against a market index. Why or Why not?

b. If the treasury bond rate is 7.5%, estimate the cost of equity for Hewlett Packard. Estimate the cost of equity for each division. Which cost of equity would you use to value the printer division?

c. Assume that HP divests itself of the mainframe business and pays the cash out as a dividend. Estimate the beta for HP after the divestiture. (HP had $1 billion in debt outstanding.)

calculate the degree of operating leverage for each of these firms 546249

The following table summarizes the percentage changes in operating income, percentage changes in revenue and betas for four pharmaceutical firms.

Firm

% Change in Revenue

% Change in Operating Income

Beta

PharmaCorp

27%

25%

1

SynerCorp

25%

32%

1.15

BioMed

23%

36%

1.3

Safemed

21%

40%

1.4

a. Calculate the degree of operating leverage for each of these firms.

b. Use the operating leverage to explain why these firms have different betas.

what will the beta of ad corporation be after divesting this division 546252

You have collected returns on AnaDone Corporation (AD Corp.), a large diversified manufacturing firm, and the NYSE index for five years:

Year

AD Corp

NYSE

1981

10%

5%

1982

5%

15%

1983

-5%

8%

1984

20%

12%

1985

-5%

-5%

a. Estimate the intercept (alpha) and slope (beta) of the regression.

b. If you bought stock in AD Corp. today, how much would you expect to make as a return over the next year? [The six month T.Bill rate is 6%]

c. Looking back over the last five years, how would you evaluate AD”s performance relative to the market?

d. Assume now that you are an undiversified investor and that you have all of your money invested in AD Corporation. What would be a good measure of the risk that you are taking on? How much of this risk would you be able to eliminate if you diversify?

e. AD is planning to sell off one of its divisions. The division under consideration has assets which comprise half of the book value of AD Corporation and 20% of the market value. Its beta is twice the average beta for AD Corp (before divestment). What will the beta of AD Corporation be after divesting this division?

what would an investor in mapco s stock require as a return if the t bond rate is 6 546253

You run a regression of monthly returns of Mapco Inc, an oil and gas producing firm, on the S&P 500 index and come up with the following output for the period 1991 to 1995.

Intercept of the regression = 0.06%

Slope of the regression = 0.46

Standard error of X-coefficient = 0.20

R squared = 5%

There are 20 million shares outstanding and the current market price is $2 per share. The firm has $20 million in debt outstanding. (The firm has a tax rate of 36%.)

a. What would an investor in Mapco”s stock require as a return if the T.Bond rate is 6%?

b. What proportion of this firm”s risk is diversifiable?

c. Assume now that Mapco has three divisions, of equal size (in market value terms). It plans to divest itself of one of the divisions for $20 million in cash and acquire another for $50 million (It will borrow $30 million to complete this acquisition). The division it is divesting is in a business line where the average unlevered beta is 0.20 and the division it is acquiring is in a business line where the average unlevered beta is 0.80. What will the beta of Mapco be after this acquisition?

you know the r squared of the regression is 0 36 and that your stock has a variance 546254

You have just run a regression of monthly returns of American Airlines (AMR) against the S&P 500 over the last five years. You have misplaced some of the output and are trying to derive it from what you have.

a. You know the R squared of the regression is 0.36 and that your stock has a variance of 67%. The market variance is 12%. What is the beta of AMR?

b. You also remember that AMR was not a very good investment during the period of the regression and that it did worse than expected (after adjusting for risk) by 0.39% a month for the five years of the regression. During this period, the average risk free rate was 4.84%. What was the intercept on the regression?

c. You are comparing AMR Inc. to another firm which also has an R squared of 0.48. Will the two firms have the same beta? If not, why not?

would your expected return estimate change if the purpose was to get a discount rate 546255

You have run a regression of monthly returns on Amgen, a large biotechnology firm, against monthly returns on the S&P 500 index, and come up with the following output.

Rstock = 3.28%+ 1.65 RMarket R2= 0.20

The current one-year treasury bill rate is 4.8% and the current thirty-year bond rate is 6.4%. The firm has 265 million shares outstanding selling for $30 per share.

a. What is the expected return on this stock over the next year?

b. Would your expected return estimate change if the purpose was to get a discount rate to analyze a thirty-year capital budgeting project?

c. An analyst has estimated, correctly, that the stock did 51.10% better than expected, annually, during the period of the regression. Can you estimate the annualized risk free rate that she used for her estimate?

d. The firm has a debt/equity ratio of 3%, and faces a tax rate of 40%. It is planning to issue $2billion in new debt and acquire a new business for that amount with the same risk level as the firm”s existing business. What will the beta be after the acquisition?

based upon the intercept how well or badly did mad do relative to expectations durin 546256

You have just run a regression of monthly returns on MAD Inc., a newspaper and magazine publisher, against returns on the S&P 500 and arrived at the following result.

RMAD = – 0.05% + 1.20 RS&P

The regression has an R-squared of 22%. The current T.Bill rate is 5.5% and the current T.Bond rate is 6.5%. The riskfree rate during the period of the regression was 6%.

Answer the following questions relating to the regression.

a. Based upon the intercept, how well or badly did MAD do, relative to expectations, during the period of the regression?

b. You now realize that MAD Inc. went through a major restructuring at the end of last month (which was the last month of your regression) and made the following changes:

  • The firm sold off its magazine division, which had an unlevered beta of 0.6, for $20 million.
  • It borrowed an additional $20 million and bought back stock worth $40 million.
  • After the sale of the division and the share repurchase, MAD Inc. had $40 million in debt and $120 million in equity outstanding.

If the firm’s tax rate is 40%, re-estimate the beta, after these changes.

what concerns if any would you have about using betas of comparable firms 546259

You are trying to estimate the beta of a private firm that manufactures home appliances. You have managed to obtain betas for publicly traded firms that also manufacture home appliances.

Firm

Beta

Debt

MV of Equity

Black & Decker

1.4

$ 2,500

$ 3,000

Fedders Corp.

1.2

$ 5

$ 200

Maytag Corp.

1.2

$ 540

$ 2250

National Presto

0.7

$ 8

$ 300

Whirlpool

1.5

$ 2900

$ 4000

The private firm has a debt equity ratio of 25%, and faces a tax rate of 40%. The publicly traded firms all have marginal tax rates of 40% as well.

a. Estimate the beta for the private firm.

b. What concerns, if any, would you have about using betas of comparable firms?

estimate the market value of debt for this firm 546264

You have been asked to estimate the cost of capital for NewTel, a telecomm firm. The firm has the following characteristics:

  • There are 100 million shares outstanding trading at $250 per share.
  • The firm has a book value of ten-year debt of $10 billion and interest expenses of $600 million on the debt. The firm is not rated, but it had operating income of $2.5 billion last year. Firms with an interest coverage ratio of 3.5 to 4.5 were rated BBB.
  • The unlevered beta of other telecomm firms is 0.80 The treasury bond rate is 6%, and the tax rate for the firm is 35%.

a. Estimate the market value of debt for this firm

b. Based upon the synthetic rating, estimate the cost of debt for this firm.

c. Estimate the cost of capital for this firm.

if the firm s current cost of borrowing is 7 estimate the debt value of operating le 546265

Derra Foods is a specialty food retailer. In its balance sheet, the firm reports $1 billion in book value of equity and no debt, but it has operating leases on all its stores. In the most recent year, the firm made $85 million in operating lease payments and its commitments to make lease payments for the next 5 years and beyond are summarized.

Year

Operating Lease Expense

1

$ 90 million

2

$ 90 million

3

$ 85 million

4

$ 80 million

5

$ 80 million

10-Jun

$ 75 million annually

If the firm”s current cost of borrowing is 7%, estimate the debt value of operating leases. Estimate the book value debt to equity ratio.

zif software is a firm with significant research and development expenses in the mos 546268

Zif Software is a firm with significant research and development expenses. In the most recent year, the firm had $100 million in research and development expenses. R&D expenses are amortizable over 5 years and the R& D expenses over the last 5 years are as follows:

Year

R&D expenses

-5

$ 50 million

-4

$ 60 million

-3

$ 70 million

-2

$ 80 million

-1

$ 90 million

Current year

$ 100 million

Assuming a linear amortization schedule (over 5 years), estimate

a. the value of the research asset.

b. the amount of R&D amortization this year.

c. the adjustment to operating income.

why is ford rsquo s working capital so high if you were told that ford capital the f 546270

The following is the balance sheet for Ford Motor Company as of December 31, 1994 (in millions).

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

$19,927

Accounts Payable

$11,635

Receivables

$132,904

Debt due within 1 year

$36,240

Inventory

$10,128

Other Current Liabilities

$2,721

Current Assets

$91,524

Current Liabilities

$50,596

Fixed Assets

$45,586

Short Term Debt

$36,200

Long Term Debt

$37,490

Equity

$12,824

Total Liabilities

$137,110

The firm had revenues of $154,951 million in 1994 and cost of goods sold of $103,817 million.

a. Estimate the net working capital

b. Estimate the non-cash working capital.

c. Why is Ford’s working capital so high? If you were told that Ford Capital (the financing arm of Ford) was consolidated into this balance sheet, would that help you with your explanation?

d. Estimate non-cash working capital as a percent of revenues. If you were asked to estimate the non-cash working capital needs for a new automobile factory that Ford was constructing, would you use this ratio? Why or why not?

estimate non cash working capital as a percent of revenues if you were asked to esti 546271

You are analyzing the balance sheet for Bed, Bath and Beyond, a retail firm that sells home furnishings, from February 26, 1995 (in millions).

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

$6.50

Accounts Payable

$27.50

Receivables

$0.00

Other Current Liabilities

$18.60

Inventory

$108.40

Current Assets

$118.00

Current Liabilities

$46.10

Fixed Assets

$53.80

Long Term Debt

$16.80

Total Assets

$171.80

Equity

$108.90

Total Liabilities

$171.80

The firm had revenues of $440.3 million in 1994 and cost of goods sold of $249.2 million.

a. Estimate the net working capital

b. Estimate the non-cash working capital.

c. Estimate non-cash working capital as a percent of revenues. If you were asked to estimate the non-cash working capital needs for a new store for Bed, Bath and Beyond, would you use this ratio? Why or why not?

you have been provided with the current assets and current liabilities of a retailin 546272

You have been provided with the current assets and current liabilities of a retailing firm each quarter for the last 5 years, together with the revenues in each quarter.

Period

Non-cash current assets

Non-debt current liabilities

Revenues

1990 – 1

$300

$150

$3,000

1990 – 2

$325

$160

$3,220

1990 – 3

$350

$180

$3,450

1990 – 4

$650

$300

$6,300

1991 – 1

$370

$170

$3,550

1991 – 2

$400

$200

$4,100

1991 – 3

$420

$220

$4,350

1991 – 4

$755

$380

$7,750

1992 – 1

$450

$220

$4,500

1992 – 2

$480

$240

$4,750

1992 – 3

$515

$265

$5,200

1992 – 4

$880

$460

$9,000

1993 – 1

$550

$260

$5,400

1993 – 2

$565

$285

$5,600

1993 – 3

$585

$300

$5,900

1993 – 4

$1,010

$500

$10,000

1994 – 1

$635

$330

$6,500

1994 – 2

$660

$340

$6,750

1994 – 3

$665

$340

$6,900

a. Based on this information, estimate the non-cash working capital each quarter.

b. Estimate non-cash working capital as a percent of revenues each quarter.

c. Assume that you are told that there are economies of scale, when it comes to inventories. How would you test to see if there are any? What would your conclusions be?

estimate the value per share using the three stage dividend discount model 546282

Medtronic Inc., the world”s largest manufacturer of implantable biomedical devices, reported earnings per share in 1993 of $3.95 and paid dividends per share of $0.68. Its earnings were expected to grow 16% from 1994 to 1998, but the growth rate was expected to decline each year after that to a stable growth rate of 6% in 2003. The payout ratio was expected to remain unchanged from 1994 to 1998, after which it would increase each year to reach 60% in steady state. The stock was expected to have a beta of 1.25 from 1994 to 1998, after which the beta would decline each year to reach 1.00 by the time the firm becomes stable. (The treasury bond rate was 6.25%)

a. Assuming that the growth rate declines linearly (and the payout ratio increases linearly) from 1999 to 2003, estimate the dividends per share each year from 1994 to 2003.

b. Estimate the expected price at the end of 2003.

c. Estimate the value per share, using the three-stage dividend discount model.

the payroll register for jaffrey company for the week ended may 16 indicated the fol 546185

EX 10-12 Payroll entries

The payroll register for Jaffrey Company for the week ended May 16 indicated the following:

Salaries

$1,250,000

Social security tax withheld

58,750

Medicare tax withheld

18,750

Federal income tax withheld

250,000

In addition, state and federal unemployment taxes were calculated at the rate of 5.4% and 0.8%, respectively, on $225,000 of salaries.

a. Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week of May 16.

b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll tax expense incurred for the week of

May 16.

the store employs 8 full time and 12 part time workers the store rsquo s weekly payr 546187

EX 10-14 Payroll internal control procedures

Big Howie’s Hot Dog Stand is a fast-food restaurant specializing in hot dogs and hamburgers.

The store employs 8 full-time and 12 part-time workers. The store’s weekly payroll averages $5,600 for all 20 workers.

Big Howie’s Hot Dog Stand uses a personal computer to assist in preparing paychecks.

Each week, the store’s accountant collects employee time cards and enters the hours worked into the payroll program. The payroll program calculates each employee’s pay and prints a paycheck. The accountant uses a check-signing machine to sign the paychecks.

Next, the restaurant’s owner authorizes the transfer of funds from the restaurant’s regular bank account to the payroll account.

For the week of May 12, the accountant accidentally recorded 100 hours worked instead of 40 hours for one of the full-time employees.

Does Big Howie’s Hot Dog Stand have internal controls in place to catch this error? If so, how will this error be detected?

whenever an employee receives a pay raise the supervisor must fill out a wage adjust 546188

EX 10-15 Internal control procedures

Dave’s Scooters is a small manufacturer of specialty scooters. The company employs 14 production workers and four administrative persons. The following procedures are used to process the company’s weekly payroll:

a. Whenever an employee receives a pay raise, the supervisor must fill out a wage adjustment form, which is signed by the company president. This form is used to change the employee’s wage rate in the payroll system.

b. All employees are required to record their hours worked by clocking in and out on a time clock. Employees must clock out for lunch break. Due to congestion around the time clock area at lunch time, management has not objected to having one employee clock in and out for an entire department.

c. Whenever a salaried employee is terminated, Personnel authorizes Payroll to remove the employee from the payroll system. However, this procedure is not required when an hourly worker is terminated. Hourly employees only receive a paycheck if their time cards show hours worked. The computer automatically drops an employee from the payroll system when that employee has six consecutive weeks with no hours worked.

d. Paychecks are signed by using a check-signing machine. This machine is located in the main office so that it can be easily accessed by anyone needing a check signed.

e. Dave’s Scooters maintains a separate checking account for payroll checks. Each week, the total net pay for all employees is transferred from the company’s regular bank account to the payroll account.

State whether each of the procedures is appropriate or inappropriate, after considering the principles of internal control. If a procedure is inappropriate, describe the appropriate procedure.

what two conditions must be met in order for a product warranty liability to be repo 546193

EX 10-20 Accrued product warranty

General Motors Corporation (GM) disclosed estimated product warranty payable for comparative years as follows:

(in millions)

Year 2

Year 1

Current estimated product warranty payable

$2,587

$2,965

Noncurrent estimated product warranty payable

4,202

4,065

Total

$6,789

$7,030

GM’s sales were $135,592 million in Year 2. Assume that the total paid on warranty claims during Year 2 was $3,000 million.

a. Why are short- and long-term estimated warranty liabilities separately disclosed?

b. Provide the journal entry for the Year 2 product warranty expense.

c. What two conditions must be met in order for a product warranty liability to be reported in the financial statements?

several months ago ayers industries inc experienced a hazardous materials spill at o 546194

EX 10-21 Contingent liabilities

Several months ago, Ayers Industries Inc. experienced a hazardous materials spill at one of its plants. As a result, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) fined the company $240,000. The company is contesting the fine. In addition, an employee is seeking $220,000 in damages related to the spill. Lastly, a homeowner has sued the company for $310,000.

The homeowner lives 35 miles from the plant, but believes that the incident has reduced the home’s resale value by $310,000.

Ayers’ legal counsel believes that it is probable that the EPA fine will stand. In addition, counsel indicates that an out-of-court settlement of $125,000 has recently been reached with the employee. The final papers will be signed next week. Counsel believes that the homeowner’s case is much weaker and will be decided in favor of Ayers. Other litigation related to the spill is possible, but the damage amounts are uncertain.

a. Journalize the contingent liabilities associated with the hazardous materials spill. Use the account “Damage Awards and Fines” to recognize the expense for the period.

b. Prepare a note disclosure relating to this incident.

gmeiner co had the following current assets and liabilities for two comparative year 546195

EX 10-22 Quick ratio

Gmeiner Co. had the following current assets and liabilities for two comparative years:

Current assets:

Cash

$ 486,000

$ 500,000

Accounts receivable

210,000

200,000

Inventory

375,000

350,000

Total current assets

$1,071,000

$1,050,000

Current liabilities:

Current portion of long-term debt

$ 145,000

$ 110,000

Accounts payable

175,000

150,000

Accrued and other current liabilities

260,000

240,000

Total current liabilities

$ 580,000

$ 500,000

a. Determine the quick ratio for December 31, 2014 and 2013.

b. Interpret the change in the quick ratio between the two balance sheet dates.

the current assets and current liabilities for apple inc and dell inc are shown as f 546196

EX 10-23 Quick ratio

The current assets and current liabilities for Apple Inc. and Dell, Inc., are shown as follows at the end of a recent fiscal period:

Current assets:

Cash and cash equivalents

$11,261

$13,913

Short-term investments

14,359

452

Accounts receivable

11,560

10,136

Inventories

1,051

1,301

Other current assets*

3,447

3,219

Total current assets

$41,678

$29,021

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$17,738

$15,474

Accrued and other current liabilities

2,984

4,009

Total current liabilities

$20,722

$19,483

*These represent prepaid expense and other nonquick current assets.

a. Determine the quick ratio for both companies.

b. Interpret the quick ratio difference between the two companies.

the following items were selected from among the transactions completed by warwick c 546197

The following items were selected from among the transactions completed by Warwick Co. during the current year:

Feb. 3. Purchased merchandise on account from Onifade Co., $410,000, terms n/30.

Mar. 3. Issued a 45-day, 6% note for $410,000 to Onifade Co., on account.

Apr. 17. Paid Onifade Co. the amount owed on the note of March 3.

June 1. Borrowed $250,000 from Aldhiezer Bank, issuing a 60-day, 7.5% note.

July 21. Purchased tools by issuing a $300,000, 60-day note to Nash Co., which discounted the note at the rate of 8%.

31. Paid Aldhiezer Bank the interest due on the note of June 1 and renewed the loan by issuing a new 30-day, 9% note for $250,000. (Journalize both the debit and credit to the notes payable account.)

Aug. 30. Paid Aldhiezer Bank the amount due on the note of July 31.

Sept. 19. Paid Nash Co. the amount due on the note of July 21.

Dec. 1. Purchased office equipment from Oso Co. for $340,000, paying $40,000 and issuing a series of ten 8% notes for $30,000 each, coming due at 30-day intervals.

12. Settled a product liability lawsuit with a customer for $165,000, payable in January.

Warwick accrued the loss in a litigation claims payable account.

31. Paid the amount due Oso Co. on the first note in the series issued on December 1.

Instructions

1. Journalize the transactions.

2. Journalize the adjusting entry for each of the following accrued expenses at the end of the current year:

a. Product warranty cost, $32,500.

b. Interest on the nine remaining notes owed to Oso Co.

the following information about the payroll for the week ended december 30 was obtai 546198

PR 10-2A Entries for payroll and payroll taxes

The following information about the payroll for the week ended December 30 was obtained from the records of Qualitech Co.:

Salaries:

Deductions:

Sales salaries

$350,000

Income tax withheld

$118,800

Warehouse salaries

180,000

Social security tax withheld

40,500

Office salaries

145,000

Medicare tax withheld

10,125

$675,000

U.S. savings bonds

14,850

Group insurance

12,150

$196,425

Tax rates assumed:

Social security, 6%

Medicare, 1.5%

State unemployment (employer only), 5.4%

Federal unemployment (employer only), 0.8%

Instructions

1. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on December 31, journalize the following entries:

a. December 30, to record the payroll.

b. December 30, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on December 31. Of the total payroll for the last week of the year, $35,000 is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.

2. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 5 of the following fiscal year, journalize the following entries:

a. December 30, to record the payroll.

b. January 5, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on January 5. Since it is a new fiscal year, all $675,000 in salaries is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.

ehrlich co began business on january 2 2013 salaries were paid to employees on the l 546199

PR 10-3A Wage and tax statement data on employer FICA tax

Ehrlich Co. began business on January 2, 2013. Salaries were paid to employees on the last day of each month, and social security tax, Medicare tax, and federal income tax were withheld in the required amounts. An employee who is hired in the middle of the month receives half the monthly salary for that month. All required payroll tax reports were filed, and the correct amount of payroll taxes was remitted by the company for the calendar year. Early in 2014, before the Wage and Tax Statements (Form W-2) could be prepared for distribution to employees and for filing with the Social Security Administration, the employees’ earnings records were inadvertently destroyed.

None of the employees resigned or were discharged during the year, and there were no changes in salary rates. The social security tax was withheld at the rate of 6.0% and Medicare tax at the rate of 1.5%. Data on dates of employment, salary rates, and employees’ income taxes withheld, which are summarized as follows, were obtained from personnel records and payroll records:

Monthly

Date First

Monthly

Income Tax

Employee

Employed

Salary

Withheld

Arnett

Nov. 16

$ 5,500

$1,008

Cruz

Jan. 2

4,800

833

Edwards

Oct. 1

8,000

1,659

Harvin

Dec. 1

6,000

1,133

Nicks

Feb. 1

10,000

2,219

Shiancoe

Mar. 1

11,600

2,667

Ward

Nov. 16

5,220

938

Instructions

1. Calculate the amounts to be reported on each employee’s Wage and Tax Statement

(Form W-2) for 2013, arranging the data in the following form:

Gross

Federal Income

Social Security

Medicare

Employee

Earnings

Tax Withheld

Tax Withheld

Tax Withheld

2. Calculate the following employer payroll taxes for the year: (a) social security; (b) Medicare; (c) state unemployment compensation at 5.4% on the first $10,000 of each employee’s earnings; (d) federal unemployment compensation at 0.8% on the first $10,000 of each employee’s earnings; (e) total.

the following data for throwback industries inc relate to the payroll for the week e 546200

PR 10-4A Payroll register

The following data for Throwback Industries Inc. relate to the payroll for the week ended December 7, 2014:

Hours

Hourly

Federal

Employee

Worked

Rate

Income Tax

Aaron

46

$68.00

$766.36

Cobb

41

62.00

553.20

Clemente

48

70.00

691.60

DiMaggio

35

56.00

411.60

Griffey, Jr.

45

62.00

618.45

Mantle

$1,800

432.00

Robinson

36

54.00

291.60

Williams

2000

440.00

Vaughn

42

62.00

533.20

Employees Mantle and Williams are office staff, and all of the other employees are sales personnel. All sales personnel are paid 1½ times the regular rate for all hours in excess of 40 hours per week. The social security tax rate is 6.0%, and Medicare tax is 1.5% of each employee’s annual earnings. The next payroll check to be used is No. 901.

Instructions

1. Prepare a payroll register for Throwback Industries Inc. for the week ended December 7, 2014. Use the following columns for the payroll register: Employee, Total Hours, Regular Earnings, Overtime Earnings, Total Earnings, Social Security Tax, Medicare Tax, Federal Income Tax, U.S. Savings Bonds, Total Deductions, Net Pay, Ck. No., Sales Salaries Expense, and Office Salaries Expense.

Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week.

the following accounts with the balances indicated appear in the ledger of garcon co 546201

PR 10-5A Payroll accounts and year-end entries

The following accounts, with the balances indicated, appear in the ledger of Garcon Co. on December 1 of the current year:

211

Salaries Payable

218

Bond Deductions Payable

$ 3,400

212

Social Security Tax Payable

$ 9,273

219

Medical Insurance Payable

27,000

213

Medicare Tax Payable

2,318

411

Operations Salaries Expense

950,000

214

Employees Federal Income Tax Payable

15,455

511

Officers Salaries Expense

600,000

215

Employees State Income Tax Payable

13,909

512

Office Salaries Expense

150,000

216

State Unemployment Tax Payable

1,400

519

Payroll Tax Expense

137,951

217

Federal Unemployment Tax Payable

500

The following transactions relating to payroll, payroll deductions, and payroll taxes occurred during December:

Dec. 2. Issued Check No. 410 for $3,400 to Jay Bank to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.

2. Issued Check No. 411 to Jay Bank for $27,046 in payment of $9,273 of social security tax, $2,318 of Medicare tax, and $15,455 of employees’ federal income tax due.

13. Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll record follows:

Salary distribution:

Operations

$43,200

Officers

27,200

Office

6,800

$77,200

Deductions:

Social security tax

$ 4,632

Medicare tax

1,158

Federal income tax withheld

15,440

State income tax withheld

3,474

Savings bond deductions

1,700

30,904

Medical insurance deductions

4,500

$46,296

Net amount

27. Issued Check No. 541 in payment of the net amount of the biweekly payroll.

27. Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December 27: social security tax, $4,668; Medicare tax, $1,167; state unemployment tax, $225; federal unemployment tax, $75.

27. Issued Check No. 543 for $20,884 to State Department of Revenue in payment of employees’ state income tax due on December 31.

31. Issued Check No. 545 to Jay Bank for $3,400 to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.

31. Paid $45,000 to the employee pension plan. The annual pension cost is $60,000.

(Record both the payment and unfunded pension liability.)

Instructions

1. Journalize the transactions.

2. Journalize the following adjusting entries on December 31:

a. Salaries accrued: operations salaries, $8,560; officers salaries, $5,600; office salaries, $1,400. The payroll taxes are immaterial and are not accrued.

b. Vacation pay, $15,000.

the following items were selected from among the transactions completed by aston mar 546202

PR 10-1B Liability transactions

The following items were selected from among the transactions completed by Aston Martin Inc. during the current year:

Apr. 15. Borrowed $225,000 from Audi Company, issuing a 30-day, 6% note for that amount.

May 1. Purchased equipment by issuing a $320,000, 180-day note to Spyder Manufacturing Co., which discounted the note at the rate of 6%.

15. Paid Audi Company the interest due on the note of April 15 and renewed the loan by issuing a new 60-day, 8% note for $225,000. (Record both the debit and credit to the notes payable account.)

July 14. Paid Audi Company the amount due on the note of May 15.

Aug. 16. Purchased merchandise on account from Exige Co., $90,000, terms, n/30.

Sept. 15. Issued a 45-day, 6% note for $90,000 to Exige Co., on account.

Oct. 28. Paid Spyder Manufacturing Co. the amount due on the note of May 1.

30. Paid Exige Co. the amount owed on the note of September 15.

Nov. 16. Purchased store equipment from Gallardo Co. for $450,000, paying $50,000 and issuing a series of twenty 9% notes for $20,000 each, coming due at 30-day intervals.

Dec. 16. Paid the amount due Gallardo Co. on the first note in the series issued on November 16.

28. Settled a personal injury lawsuit with a customer for $87,500, to be paid in January.

Aston Martin Inc. accrued the loss in a litigation claims payable account.

Instructions

1. Journalize the transactions.

2. Journalize the adjusting entry for each of the following accrued expenses at the end of the current year:

a. Product warranty cost, $26,800.

b. Interest on the 19 remaining notes owed to Gallardo Co.

january 4 to record the employer rsquo s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on 546203

PR 10-2B Entries for payroll and payroll taxes

The following information about the payroll for the week ended December 30 was obtained from the records of Saine Co.:

Salaries:

Deductions:

Sales salaries

$ 625,000

Income tax withheld

$232,260

Warehouse salaries

240,000

Social security tax withheld

71,100

Office salaries

320,000

Medicare tax withheld

17,775

$1,185,000

U.S. savings bonds

35,500

Group insurance

53,325

$409,960

Tax rates assumed:

Social security, 6%

Medicare, 1.5%

State unemployment (employer only), 5.4%

Federal unemployment (employer only), 0.8%

Instructions

1. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on December 31, journalize the following entries:

a. December 30, to record the payroll.

b. December 30, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on December 31. Of the total payroll for the last week of the year, $30,000 is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.

2. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 4 of the following fiscal year, journalize the following entries:

a. December 30, to record the payroll.

b. January 4, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on January 4. Since it is a new fiscal year, all $1,185,000 in salaries is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.

jocame inc began business on january 2 2013 salaries were paid to employees on the l 546204

PR 10-3B Wage and tax statement data and employer FICA tax

Jocame Inc. began business on January 2, 2013. Salaries were paid to employees on the last day of each month, and social security tax, Medicare tax, and federal income tax were withheld in the required amounts. An employee who is hired in the middle of the month receives half the monthly salary for that month. All required payroll tax reports were filed, and the correct amount of payroll taxes was remitted by the company for the calendar year. Early in 2014, before the Wage and Tax Statements (Form W-2) could be prepared for distribution to employees and for filing with the Social Security Administration, the employees’ earnings records were inadvertently destroyed.

None of the employees resigned or were discharged during the year, and there were no changes in salary rates. The social security tax was withheld at the rate of 6.0% and Medicare tax at the rate of 1.5% on salary. Data on dates of employment, salary rates, and employees’ income taxes withheld, which are summarized as follows, were obtained from personnel records and payroll records:

Monthly

Date First

Monthly

Income Tax

Employee

Employed

Salary

Withheld

Addai

July 16

$ 8,160

$1,704

Kasay

June 1

3,600

533

McGahee

Feb. 16

6,420

1,238

Moss

Jan. 1

4,600

783

Stewart

Dec. 1

4,500

758

Tolbert

Nov. 16

3,250

446

Wells

May 1

10,500

2,359

Instructions

1. Calculate the amounts to be reported on each employee’s Wage and Tax Statement

(Form W-2) for 2013, arranging the data in the following form:

Gross

Federal Income

Social Security

Medicare

Employee

Earnings

Tax Withheld

Tax Withheld

Tax Withheld

2. Calculate the following employer payroll taxes for the year: (a) social security;

(b) Medicare;

(c) state unemployment compensation at 5.4% on the first $10,000 of

each employee’s earnings; (d) federal unemployment compensation at 0.8% on the

first $10,000 of each employee’s earnings; (e) total.

the following data for flexco inc relate to the payroll for the week ended december 546205

PR 10-4B Payroll register

The following data for Flexco Inc. relate to the payroll for the week ended December 7, 2014:

Hours

Hourly

Weekly

Federal

U.S. Savings

Employee

Worked

Rate

Salary

Income Tax

Bonds

Carlton

52

$50.00

$667.00

$ 60

Grove

$4,000

860.00

100

Johnson

36

52.00

355.68

0

Koufax

45

58.00

578.55

44

Maddux

37

45.00

349.65

62

Seaver

3,200

768.00

120

Spahn

46

52.00

382.20

0

Winn

48

50.00

572.00

75

Young

43

54.00

480.60

80

Employees Grove and Seaver are office staff, and all of the other employees are sales personnel. All sales personnel are paid 1½ times the regular rate for all hours in excess of 40 hours per week. The social security tax rate is 6.0% of each employee’s annual earnings, and Medicare tax is 1.5% of each employee’s annual earnings. The next payroll check to be used is No. 328.

Instructions

1. Prepare a payroll register for Flexco Inc. for the week ended December 7, 2014. Use the following columns for the payroll register: Employee, Total Hours, Regular Earnings, Overtime Earnings, Total Earnings, Social Security Tax, Medicare Tax, Federal Income Tax, U.S. Savings Bonds, Total Deductions, Net Pay, Ck. No., Sales Salaries Expense, and Office Salaries Expense.

  1. Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week.

the following accounts with the balances indicated appear in the ledger of codigo co 546206

PR 10-5B Payroll accounts and year-end entries

The following accounts, with the balances indicated, appear in the ledger of Codigo Co. on December 1 of the current year:

101 Salaries Payable

108 Bond Deductions Payable

$ 2,300

102 Social Security Tax Payable

$2,913

109 Medical Insurance Payable

2,520

103 Medicare Tax Payable

728

201 Sales Salaries Expense

700,000

104 Employees Federal Income Tax Payable

4,490

301 Officers Salaries Expense

340,000

105 Employees State Income Tax Payable

4,078

401 Office Salaries Expense

125,000

106 State Unemployment Tax Payable

1,260

408 Payroll Tax Expense

59,491

107 Federal Unemployment Tax Payable

360

The following transactions relating to payroll, payroll deductions, and payroll taxes occurred during December:

Dec. 1. Issued Check No. 815 to Aberderas Insurance Company for $2,520, in payment of the semiannual premium on the group medical insurance policy.

1. Issued Check No. 816 to Alvarez Bank for $8,131, in payment for $2,913 of social security tax, $728 of Medicare tax, and $4,490 of employees’ federal income tax due.

2. Issued Check No. 817 for $2,300 to Alvarez Bank to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.

12. Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll record follows:

Salary distribution:

Sales

$14,500

Officers

7,100

Office

2,600

$24,200

Deductions:

Social security tax

$ 1,452

Medicare tax

363

Federal income tax withheld

4,308

State income tax withheld

1,089

Savings bond deductions

1,150

Medical insurance deductions

420

8,782

Net amount

$15,418

12. Issued Check No. 822 in payment of the net amount of the biweekly payroll.

12. Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December 12: social security tax, $1,452; Medicare tax, $363; state unemployment tax, $315; federal unemployment tax, $90.

15. Issued Check No. 830 to Alvarez Bank for $7,938, in payment of $2,904 of social security tax, $726 of Medicare tax, and $4,308 of employees’ federal income tax due.

26. Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll record follows:

Salary distribution:

Sales

$14,250

Officers

7,250

Office

2,750

$24,250

Deductions:

Social security tax

$ 1,455

Medicare tax

364

Federal income tax withheld

4,317

State income tax withheld

1,091

Savings bond deductions

1,150

8,377

Net amount

$15,873

Dec. 26. Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December 26: social security tax, $1,455; Medicare tax, $364; state unemployment tax, $150; federal unemployment tax, $40.

30. Issued Check No. 851 for $6,258 to State Department of Revenue, in payment of employees’ state income tax due on December 31.

30. Issued Check No. 852 to Alvarez Bank for $2,300 to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.

31. Paid $55,400 to the employee pension plan. The annual pension cost is $65,500. (Record both the payment and the unfunded pension liability.)

Instructions

1. Journalize the transactions.

2. Journalize the following adjusting entries on December 31:

a. Salaries accrued: sales salaries, $4,275; officers salaries, $2,175; office salaries, $825.

The payroll taxes are immaterial and are not accrued.

b. Vacation pay, $13,350.

tonya latirno is a certified public accountant cpa and staff accountant for kennedy 546207

CP 10-1 Ethics and professional conduct in business

Tonya Latirno is a certified public accountant (CPA) and staff accountant for Kennedy and Kennedy, a local CPA firm. It had been the policy of the firm to provide a holiday bonus equal to two weeks’ salary to all employees. The firm’s new management team announced on November 15 that a bonus equal to only one week’s salary would be made available to employees this year. Tonya thought that this policy was unfair because she and her coworkers planned on the full two-week bonus. The two-week bonus had been given for 10 straight years, so it seemed as though the firm had breached an implied commitment. Thus, Tonya decided that she would make up the lost bonus week by working an extra six hours of overtime per week over the next five weeks until the end of the year. Kennedy and Kennedy’s policy is to pay overtime at 150% of straight time.

Tonya’s supervisor was surprised to see overtime being reported, since there is generally very little additional or unusual client service demands at the end of the calendar year. However, the overtime was not questioned, since firm employees are on the “honor system” in reporting their overtime.

Discuss whether the firm is acting in an ethical manner by changing the bonus. Is Tonya behaving in an ethical manner?

the annual examination of felton company rsquo s financial statements by its externa 546208

CP 10-2 Recognizing pension expense

The annual examination of Felton Company’s financial statements by its external public accounting firm (auditors) is nearing completion. The following conversation took place between the controller of Felton Company (Francie) and the audit manager from the public accounting firm (Sumana).

Sumana: You know, Francie, we are about to wrap up our audit for this fiscal year. Yet, there is one item still to be resolved.

Francie: What’s that?

Sumana: Well, as you know, at the beginning of the year, Felton began a defined benefit pension plan. This plan promises your employees an annual payment when they retire, using a formula based on their salaries at retirement and their years of service. I believe that a pension expense should be recognized this year, equal to the amount of pension earned by your employees.

Francie: Wait a minute. I think you have it all wrong. The company doesn’t have apension expense until it actually pays the pension in cash when the employee retires. After all, some of these employees may not reach retirement, and if they don’t, the company doesn’t owe them anything.

Sumana: You’re not really seeing this the right way. The pension is earned by your employees during their working years. You actually make the payment much later—when they retire. It’s like one long accrual—much like incurring wages in one period and paying them in the next. Thus, I think that you should recognize the expense in the period the pension is earned by the employees.

Francie: Let me see if I’ve got this straight. I should recognize an expense this period for something that may or may not be paid to the employees in 20 or 30 years, when they finally retire. How am I supposed to determine what the expense is for the current year? The amount of the final retirement depends on many uncertainties: salary levels, employee longevity, mortality rates, and interest earned on investments to fund the pension. I don’t think that an amount can be determined, even if I accepted your arguments.

Evaluate Sumana’s position. Is she right or is Francie correct?

why does tina song want to conduct business transactions using cash not check or cre 546209

CP 10-3 Ethics and professional conduct in business

Marvin Turner was discussing summer employment with Tina Song, president of Motown

Construction Service:

Tina: I’m glad that you’re thinking about joining us for the summer. We could certainly use the help.

Marvin: Sounds good. I enjoy outdoor work, and I could use the money to help with next year’s school expenses.

Tina: I’ve got a plan that can help you out on that. As you know, I’ll pay you $14 per hour, but in addition, I’d like to pay you with cash. Since you’re only working for the summer, it really doesn’t make sense for me to go to the trouble of formally putting you on our payroll system. In fact, I do some jobs for my clients on a strictly cash basis, so it would be easy to just pay you that way.

Marvin: Well, that’s a bit unusual, but I guess money is money.

Tina: Yeah, not only that, it’s tax-free!

Marvin: What do you mean?

Tina: Didn’t you know? Any money that you receive in cash is not reported to the IRS on a W-2 form; therefore, the IRS doesn’t know about the income—hence, it’s the same as tax-free earnings.

a. Why does Tina Song want to conduct business transactions using cash (not check or credit card)?

b. How should Marvin respond to Tina’s suggestion?

jackie fox owns and operates platinum transport co during the past year jackie incur 546113

EX 9-5 Capital and revenue expenditures

Jackie Fox owns and operates Platinum Transport Co. During the past year, Jackie incurred the following costs related to an 18-wheel truck:

1. Changed engine oil.

2. Installed a television in the sleeping compartment of the truck.

3. Installed a wind deflector on top of the cab to increase fuel mileage.

4. Modified the factory-installed turbo charger with a special-order kit designed to add 50 more horsepower to the engine performance.

5. Replaced a headlight that had burned out.

6. Replaced a shock absorber that had worn out.

7. Replaced fog and cab light bulbs.

8. Replaced the hydraulic brake system that had begun to fail during his latest trip through the Rocky Mountains.

9. Removed the old CB radio and replaced it with a newer model with a greater range.

10. Replaced the old radar detector with a newer model that is fastened to the truck with a locking device that prevents its removal.

Classify each of the costs as a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditure.

list the errors you find in the following partial balance sheet 546130

EX 9-22 Balance sheet presentation

List the errors you find in the following partial balance sheet:

Burnt Red Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2014
Assets

Total current assets

$350,000

Replacement

Accumulated

Book

Cost

Depreciation

Value

Property, plant, and equipment:

Land

$ 250,000

$ 50,000

$200,000

Buildings

450,000

160,000

290,000

Factory equipment

375,000

140,000

235,000

Office equipment

125,000

60,000

65,000

Patents

90,000

90,000

Goodwill

60,000

10,000

50,000

Total property, plant, and equipment

$1,350,000

$420,000

$930,000

verizon communications is a major telecommunications company in the united states tw 546131

EX 9-23 Fixed asset turnover ratio

Verizon Communications is a major telecommunications company in the United States. Two recent balance sheets for Verizon disclosed the following information regarding fixed assets:

Year 2

Year 1

(in millions)

(in millions)

Plant, property, and equipment

$211,655

$229,743

Less accumulated depreciation

123,944

137,758

$ 87,711

$ 91,985

Verizon’s revenue for Year 2 was $106,565 million. Assume the fixed asset turnover for the telecommunications industry averages approximately 1.10.

a. Determine Verizon’s fixed asset turnover ratio for Year 2. Round to two decimal places.

b. Interpret Verizon’s fixed asset turnover ratio.

the following payments and receipts are related to land land improvements and buildi 546137

PR 9-1A Allocating payments and receipts to fixed asset accounts

The following payments and receipts are related to land, land improvements, and buildings acquired for use in a wholesale ceramic business. The receipts are identified by an asterisk.

a.

Fee paid to attorney for title search

$ 2,500

b.

Cost of real estate acquired as a plant site: Land

285,000

Building

55,000

c.

Delinquent real estate taxes on property, assumed by purchaser

15,500

d.

Cost of razing and removing building

5,000

e.

Proceeds from sale of salvage materials from old building

4,000*

f.

Special assessment paid to city for extension of water main to the property .

29,000

g.

Architect’s and engineer’s fees for plans and supervision

60,000

h.

Premium on one-year insurance policy during construction

6,000

i.

Cost of filling and grading land

12,000

j.

Money borrowed to pay building contractor

900,000*

k.

Cost of repairing windstorm damage during construction

5,500

l.

Cost of paving parking lot to be used by customers

32,000

m.

Cost of trees and shrubbery planted

11,000

n.

Cost of floodlights installed on parking lot

2,000

o.

Cost of repairing vandalism damage during construction

2,500

p.

Proceeds from insurance company for windstorm and vandalism damage

7,500*

q.

Payment to building contractor for new building

800,000

r.

Interest incurred on building loan during construction

34,500

s.

Refund of premium on insurance policy (h) canceled after 11 months

500*

Instructions

1. Assign each payment and receipt to Land (unlimited life), Land Improvements (limited life), Building, or Other Accounts. Indicate receipts by an asterisk. Identify each item by letter and list the amounts in columnar form, as follows:

Land

Other

Item

Land

Improvements

Building

Accounts

2. Determine the amount debited to Land, Land Improvements, and Building.

3. The costs assigned to the land, which is used as a plant site, will not be depreciated, while the costs assigned to land improvements will be depreciated. Explain this seemingly contradictory application of the concept of depreciation.

4. What would be the effect on the income statement and balance sheet if the cost of filling and grading land of $12,000 [payment (i)] was incorrectly classified as Land Improvements rather than Land? Assume Land Improvements are depreciated over a 20-year life using the double-declining-balance method.

waldum company purchased packaging equipment on january 5 2012 for 135 000 the equip 546138

PR 9-2A Comparing three depreciation methods

Waldum Company purchased packaging equipment on January 5, 2012, for $135,000. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of three years, or 18,000 operating hours, and a residual value of $13,500. The equipment was used for 8,600 hours during 2012, 5,300 hours in 2013, and 4,100 hours in 2014.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, and 2014, by (a) the straight-line method, (b) the units-of-output method, and (c) the double-declining-balance method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the three years by each method. The following columnar headings are suggested for recording the depreciation expense amounts:

Depreciation Expense

Straight-

Units-of-

Double-Declining-

Line

Output

Balance

Year

Method

Method

Method

2. What method yields the highest depreciation expense for 2012?

3. What method yields the most depreciation over the three-year life of the equipment?

new lithographic equipment acquired at a cost of 800 000 at the beginning of a fisca 546140

PR 9-4A Depreciation by two methods; sale of fixed asset

New lithographic equipment, acquired at a cost of $800,000 at the beginning of a fiscal year, has an estimated useful life of five years and an estimated residual value of $90,000. The manager requested information regarding the effect of alternative methods on the amount of depreciation expense each year. On the basis of the data presented to the manager, the double-declining-balance method was selected. In the first week of the fifth year, the equipment was sold for $135,000.

Instructions

1. Determine the annual depreciation expense for each of the estimated five years of use, the accumulated depreciation at the end of each year, and the book value of the equipment at the end of each year by (a) the straight-line method and (b) the double-declining-balance method. The following columnar headings are suggested for each schedule:

Accumulated

Depreciation

Depreciation,

Book Value,

Year

Expense

End of Year

End of Year

2. Journalize the entry to record the sale.

3. Journalize the entry to record the sale, assuming that the equipment was sold for $88,750 instead of $135,000.

the following transactions adjusting entries and closing entries were completed by l 546141

PR 9-5A Transactions for fixed assets, including sale

The following transactions, adjusting entries, and closing entries were completed by Legacy Furniture Co. during a three-year period. All are related to the use of delivery equipment. The double-declining-balance method of depreciation is used.

2012 Jan. 4. Purchased a used delivery truck for $28,000, paying cash.

Nov. 2. Paid garage $675 for miscellaneous repairs to the truck.

Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the truck for the year. The estimated useful life of the truck is four years, with a residual value of $5,000 for the truck.

2013 Jan. 6. Purchased a new truck for $48,000, paying cash.

Apr. 1. Sold the used truck for $15,000. (Record depreciation to date in 2013 for the truck.)

June 11. Paid garage $450 for miscellaneous repairs to the truck.

Dec. 31. Record depreciation for the new truck. It has an estimated residual value of $9,000 and an estimated life of five years.

2014 July 1. Purchased a new truck for $54,000, paying cash.

Oct. 2. Sold the truck purchased January 6, 2013, for $16,750. (Record depreciation to date for 2014 for the truck.)

Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the remaining truck. It has an estimated residual value of $12,000 and an estimated useful life of eight years.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions and the adjusting entries.

data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the cu 546142

PR 9-6A Amortization and depletion entries

Data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the current year ended December 31 are as follows:

a. Timber rights on a tract of land were purchased for $1,600,000 on February 22. The stand of timber is estimated at 5,000,000 board feet. During the current year, 1,100,000 board feet of timber were cut and sold.

b. On December 31, the company determined that $3,750,000 of goodwill was impaired.

c. Governmental and legal costs of $6,600,000 were incurred on April 3 in obtaining a patent with an estimated economic life of 12 years. Amortization is to be for threefourths of a year.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of the amortization, depletion, or impairment for the current year for each of the foregoing items.

2. Journalize the adjusting entries required to record the amortization, depletion, or impairment for each item.

the following payments and receipts are related to land land improvements and buildi 546143

PR 9-1B Allocating payments and receipts to fixed asset accounts

The following payments and receipts are related to land, land improvements, and buildings acquired for use in a wholesale apparel business. The receipts are identified by an asterisk.

a. Fee paid to attorney for title search

$

b. Cost of real estate acquired as a plant site: Land

720,000

Building

60,000

c. Finder’s fee paid to real estate agency

23,400

d. Delinquent real estate taxes on property, assumed by purchaser

15,000

e. Architect’s and engineer’s fees for plans and supervision

75,000

f. Cost of removing building purchased with land in (b)

10,000

g. Proceeds from sale of salvage materials from old building

3,400*

h. Cost of filling and grading land

18,000

i. Premium on one-year insurance policy during construction

8,400

j. Money borrowed to pay building contractor

800,000*

k. Special assessment paid to city for extension of water main to the property

13,400

l. Cost of repairing windstorm damage during construction

3,000

m. Cost of repairing vandalism damage during construction

2,000

n. Cost of trees and shrubbery planted

14,000

o. Cost of paving parking lot to be used by customers

21,600

p. Interest incurred on building loan during construction

40,000

q. Proceeds from insurance company for windstorm and vandalism damage .

4,500*

r. Payment to building contractor for new building

800,000

s. Refund of premium on insurance policy (i) canceled after 10 months

1,400*

Instructions

1. Assign each payment and receipt to Land (unlimited life), Land Improvements (limited life), Building, or Other Accounts. Indicate receipts by an asterisk. Identify each item by letter and list the amounts in columnar form, as follows:

Land

Other

Item

Land

Improvements

Building

Accounts

2. Determine the amount debited to Land, Land Improvements, and Building.

3. The costs assigned to the land, which is used as a plant site, will not be depreciated, while the costs assigned to land improvements will be depreciated. Explain this seemingly contradictory application of the concept of depreciation.

4. What would be the effect on the income statement and balance sheet if the cost of paving the parking lot of $21,600 [payment (o)] was incorrectly classified as Land rather than Land Improvements? Assume Land Improvements are depreciated over a 10-year life using the double-declining-balance method.

determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended december 31 2013 20 546144

PR 9-2B Comparing three depreciation methods

Waylander Coatings Company purchased waterproofing equipment on January 6, 2013, for $320,000. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of four years, or 20,000 operating hours, and a residual value of $35,000. The equipment was used for 7,200 hours during 2013, 6,400 hours in 2014, 4,400 hours in 2015, and 2,000 hours in 2016.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2014, 2015, and 2016, by (a) the straight-line method, (b) the units-of-output method, and (c) the double-declining-balance method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the four years by each method. The following columnar headings are suggested for recording the depreciation expense amounts:

Depreciation Expense

Year

Straight-Line Method

Units-of- Output Method

Double-Declining- Balance Method

2. What method yields the highest depreciation expense for 2013?

3. What method yields the most depreciation over the four-year life of the equipment?

journalize the entry to record the sale assuming that the equipment sold for 10 500 546146

PR 9-4B Depreciation by two methods; sale of fixed asset

New tire retreading equipment, acquired at a cost of $110,000 at the beginning of a fiscal year, has an estimated useful life of four years and an estimated residual value of $7,500. The manager requested information regarding the effect of alternative methods on the amount of depreciation expense each year. On the basis of the data presented to the manager, the double-declining-balance method was selected.

In the first week of the fourth year, the equipment was sold for $18,000.

Instructions

1. Determine the annual depreciation expense for each of the estimated four years of use, the accumulated depreciation at the end of each year, and the book value of the equipment at the end of each year by (a) the straight-line method and (b) the double-declining-balance method. The following columnar headings are suggested for

Accumulated

Depreciation

Depreciation,

Book Value,

Year

Expense

End of Year

End of Year

2. Journalize the entry to record the sale.

3. Journalize the entry to record the sale, assuming that the equipment sold for $10,500 instead of $18,000.

the following transactions adjusting entries and closing entries were completed by r 546147

PR 9-5B Transactions for fixed assets, including sale

The following transactions, adjusting entries, and closing entries were completed by Robinson Furniture Co. during a three-year period. All are related to the use of delivery equipment. The double-declining-balance method of depreciation is used.

2012 Jan. 8. Purchased a used delivery truck for $24,000, paying cash.

Mar. 7. Paid garage $900 for changing the oil, replacing the oil filter, and tuning the engine on the delivery truck.

Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the truck for the fiscal year. The estimated useful life of the truck is four years, with a residual value of $4,000 for the truck.

2013 Jan. 9. Purchased a new truck for $50,000, paying cash.

Feb. 28. Paid garage $250 to tune the engine and make other minor repairs on the used truck.

Apr. 30. Sold the used truck for $9,500. (Record depreciation to date in 2013 for the truck.)

Dec. 31. Record depreciation for the new truck. It has an estimated residual value of $12,000 and an estimated life of eight years.

2014 Sept. 1. Purchased a new truck for $58,500, paying cash.

4. Sold the truck purchased January 9, 2013, for $36,000. (Record depreciation to date for 2014 for the truck.)

Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the remaining truck. It has an estimated residual value of $16,000 and an estimated useful life of 10 years.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions and the adjusting entries.

data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the cu 546148

PR 9-6B Amortization and depletion entries

Data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the current year ended December 31 are as follows:

a. On December 31, the company determined that $3,400,000 of goodwill was impaired.

b. Governmental and legal costs of $4,800,000 were incurred on September 30 in obtaining a patent with an estimated economic life of eight years. Amortization is to be for one-fourth year.

c. Timber rights on a tract of land were purchased for $2,975,000 on February 4. The stand of timber is estimated at 12,500,000 board feet. During the current year, 4,150,000 board feet of timber were cut and sold.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of the amortization, depletion, or impairment for the current year for each of the foregoing items.

2. Journalize the adjusting entries to record the amortization, depletion, or impairment for each item.

what factors would you present for tim rsquo s consideration in the selection of a d 546151

CP 9-3 Effect of depreciation on net income

Tuttle Construction Co. specializes in building replicas of historic houses. Tim Newman, president of Tuttle Construction, is considering the purchase of various items of equipment on July 1, 2012, for $400,000. The equipment would have a useful life of five years and no residual value. In the past, all equipment has been leased. For tax purposes, Tim is considering depreciating the equipment by the straight-line method. He discussed the matter with his CPA and learned that, although the straight-line method could be elected, it was to his advantage to use the Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) for tax purposes. He asked for your advice as to which method to use for tax purposes.

1. Compute depreciation for each of the years (2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, and 2017) of useful life by (a) the straight-line method and (b) MACRS. In using the straight-line method, one-half year’s depreciation should be computed for 2012 and 2017. Use the MACRS rates presented on page 417.

2. Assuming that income before depreciation and income tax is estimated to be $750,000 uniformly per year and that the income tax rate is 40%, compute the net income for each of the years 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, and 2017 if (a) the straight-line method is used and (b) MACRS is used.

3. What factors would you present for Tim’s consideration in the selection of a depreciation method?

the following table shows the revenues and average net fixed assets for a recent fis 546153

CP 9-5 Fixed asset turnover: three industries

The following table shows the revenues and average net fixed assets for a recent fiscal year for three different companies from three different industries: retailing, manufacturing, and communications.

Average Net

Revenues

Fixed Assets

(in millions)

(in millions)

Walmart

$421,849

$105,093

Occidental Petroleum Corporation

19,045

33,837

Comcast Corporation

37,937

23,685

a. For each company, determine the fixed asset turnover ratio. Round to two decimal places.

b. Explain Walmart’s ratio relative to the other two companies.

nabors company reported the following current assets and liabilities for december 31 546172

PE 10-8A Quick ratio

Nabors Company reported the following current assets and liabilities for December 31, 2014 and 2013:

Dec. 31, 2014

Dec. 31, 2013

Cash

$ 650

$ 680

Temporary investments

1,500

1,550

Accounts receivable

700

770

Inventory

1,250

1,400

Accounts payable

2,375

2,000

a. Compute the quick ratio for December 31, 2014 and 2013.

b. Interpret the company’s quick ratio. Is the quick ratio improving or declining?

adieu company reported the following current assets and liabilities for december 31 546173

PE 10-8B Quick ratio

Adieu Company reported the following current assets and liabilities for December 31,

2014 and 2013:

Dec. 31, 2014

Dec. 31, 2013

Cash

$1,000

$1,140

Temporary investments

1,200

1,400

Accounts receivable

800

910

Inventory

2,200

2,300

Accounts payable

1,875

2,300

a. Compute the quick ratio for December 31, 2014 and 2013.

b. Interpret the company’s quick ratio. Is the quick ratio improving or declining?

if coca cola did not issue additional long term debt next year what would be the tot 546180

EX 10-7 Current portion of long-term debt

The Coca-Cola Company reported the following information about its long-term debt in the notes to a recent financial statement (in millions):

Long-term debt is comprised of the following:

December 31

Current Year

preceding Year

Total long term-debt

$15,317

$5,110

Less current portion

(1,276)

(51)

Long-term debt

$14,041

$5,059

a. How much of the long-term debt was disclosed as a current liability on the current year’s December 31 balance sheet?

b. How much did the total current liabilities change between the preceding year and the current year as a result of the current portion of long-term debt?

c. If Coca-Cola did not issue additional long-term debt next year, what would be the total long-term debt on December 31 of the upcoming year?

determine the gross pay and the net pay for each of the three employees for the curr 546182

EX 10-9 Calculate payroll

Snyder Company has three employees—a consultant, a computer programmer, and an administrator. The following payroll information is available for each employee:

Consultant

Computer Programmer

Administrator

Regular earnings rate

$3,800 per week

$40 per hour

$44 per hour

Overtime earnings rate*

Not applicable

1.5 times hourly rate

2 times hourly rate

Number of withholding allowances

2

2

1

* For hourly employees, overtime is paid for hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week.

For the current pay period, the computer programmer worked 60 hours and the administrator worked 50 hours. The federal income tax withheld for all three employees, who are single, can be determined from the wage bracket withholding table in Exhibit 3 in the chapter. Assume further that the social security tax rate was 6.0%, the Medicare tax rate was 1.5%, and one withholding allowance is $70.

Determine the gross pay and the net pay for each of the three employees for the current pay period.

in the following summary of data for a payroll period some amounts have been intenti 546183

EX 10-10 Summary payroll data

In the following summary of data for a payroll period, some amounts have been intentionally omitted:

Earnings:

1. At regular rate

?

2. At overtime rate

$80,000

3. Total earnings

Deductions:

?

4. Social security tax

32,400

5. Medicare tax

8,100

6. Income tax withheld

135,000

7. Medical insurance

18,900

8. Union dues

?

9. Total deductions

201,150

10. Net amount paid

338,850

Accounts debited:

11. Factory Wages

285,000

12. Sales Salaries

?

13. Office Salaries

120,000

a. Calculate the amounts omitted in lines (1), (3), (8), and (12).

b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll accrual.

c. Journalize the entry to record the payment of the payroll.

polo ralph lauren corporation designs markets and distributes a variety of apparel h 546063

EX 8-26 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables

Polo Ralph Lauren Corporation designs, markets, and distributes a variety of apparel, home decor, accessory, and fragrance products. The company’s products include such brands as Polo by Ralph Lauren, Ralph Lauren Purple Label, Ralph Lauren, Polo Jeans Co., and Chaps. Polo Ralph Lauren reported the following (in thousands) for two recent years:

For the Period Ending

Year 2

Year 1

Net sales

$5,660,300

$4,978,900

Accounts receivable

592,700

486,200

Assume that accounts receivable (in millions) were $576,700 at the beginning of Year 1.

a. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

b. Compute the days’ sales in receivables for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

c. What conclusions can be drawn from these analyses regarding Ralph Lauren’s efficiency in collecting receivables?

h j heinz company was founded in 1869 at sharpsburg pennsylvania by henry j heinz 546064

EX 8-27 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables

H.J. Heinz Company was founded in 1869 at Sharpsburg, Pennsylvania, by Henry J. Heinz. The company manufactures and markets food products throughout the world, including ketchup, condiments and sauces, frozen food, pet food, soups, and tuna. For two recent years, H.J. Heinz reported the following (in thousands):

Year 2

Year 1

Net sales

$10,706,588

$10,494,983

Accounts receivable

1,265,032

1,045,338

Assume that the accounts receivable (in thousands) were $1,171,797 at the beginning of Year 1.

a. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

b. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

c. What conclusions can be drawn from these analyses regarding Heinz’s efficiency in collecting receivables?

the limited brands inc sells women clothing and personal health care products throug 546065

EX 8-28 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables

The Limited Brands Inc. sells women’s clothing and personal health care products through specialty retail stores including Victoria’s Secret and Bath & Body Works stores. The Limited Brands reported the following (in millions) for two recent years:

Year 2

Year 1

Net sales

$9,613

$8,632

Accounts receivable

267

249

Assume that accounts receivable (in millions) were $313 at the beginning of Year 1.

a. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

b. Compute the day’s sales in receivables for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

c. What conclusions can be drawn from these analyses regarding The Limited Brands’ efficiency in collecting receivables?

the following transactions were completed by the irvine company during the current f 546066

PR 8-1A Entries related to uncollectible accounts

The following transactions were completed by The Irvine Company during the current fiscal year ended December 31:

Feb. 8. Received 40% of the $18,000 balance owed by DeCoy Co., a bankrupt business, and wrote off the remainder as uncollectible.

May 27. Reinstated the account of Seth Nelsen, which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $7,350 cash in full payment of Seth’s account.

Aug. 13. Wrote off the $6,400 balance owed by Kat Tracks Co., which has no assets.

Oct. 31. Reinstated the account of Crawford Co., which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $3,880 cash in full payment of the account.

Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (compound entry): Newbauer Co., $7,190; Bonneville Co., $5,500; Crow Distributors, $9,400; Fiber Optics, $1,110.

31. Based on an analysis of the $1,785,000 of accounts receivable, it was estimated that $35,700 will be uncollectible. Journalized the adjusting entry.

Instructions

1. Record the January 1 credit balance of $26,000 in a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

2. Journalize the transactions. Post each entry that affects the following selected T accounts and determine the new balances:

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Bad Debt Expense

3. Determine the expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.

4. Assuming that instead of basing the provision for uncollectible accounts on an analysis of receivables, the adjusting entry on December 31 had been based on an estimated expense of ¼ of 1% of the net sales of $18,200,000 for the year, determine the following:

a. Bad debt expense for the year.

b. Balance in the allowance account after the adjustment of December 31.

c. Expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.

call systems company a telephone service and supply company has just completed its f 546067

PR 8-3A Compare two methods of accounting for uncollectible receivables

Call Systems Company, a telephone service and supply company, has just completed its fourth year of operations. The direct write-off method of recording bad debt expense has been used during the entire period. Because of substantial increases in sales volume and the amount of uncollectible accounts, the company is considering changing to the allowance method. Information is requested as to the effect that an annual provision of 1% of sales would have had on the amount of bad debt expense reported for each of the past four years. It is also considered desirable to know what the balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts would have been at the end of each year. The following data have been obtained from the accounts:

Year of Origin of
Accounts Receivable Written
Off as Uncollectible

Year

Sales

Uncollectible Accounts Written Off

1st

1st

2nd

3rd

1st

$ 900,000

$ 4,500

$4,500

2nd

1,250,000

9,600

3,000

$6,600

3rd

1,500,000

12,800

1,000

3,700

$8,100

4th

2,200,000

16,550

1,500

4,300

$10,750

Instructions

  1. Assemble the desired data, using the following column headings:

Bad Debt Expense

Increase

Expense

Expense

(Decrease)

Balance of

Actually

Based on

in Amount

Allowance Account,

Year

Reported

Estimate

of Expense

End of Year

2. Experience during the first four years of operations indicated that the receivables were either collected within two years or had to be written off as uncollectible.

Does the estimate of 1% of sales appear to be reasonably close to the actual experience with uncollectible accounts originating during the first two years? Explain.

flush mate co wholesales bathroom fixtures during the current fiscal year flush mate 546068

PR 8-4A Details of notes receivable and related entries

Flush Mate Co. wholesales bathroom fixtures. During the current fiscal year, Flush Mate Co. received the following notes:

Date

Face Amount

Term

Interest Rate

1.

Mar. 6

$80,000

45 days

5%

2.

Apr. 23

24,000

60 days

9

3.

July 20

42,000

120 days

6

4.

Sept. 6

54,000

90 days

7

5.

Nov. 29

27,000

60 days

6

6.

Dec. 30

72,000

30 days

5

Instructions

1. Determine for each note (a) the due date and (b) the amount of interest due at maturity, identifying each note by number.

2. Journalize the entry to record the dishonor of Note (3) on its due date.

3. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on Notes (5) and (6) on December 31.

4. Journalize the entries to record the receipt of the amounts due on Notes (5) and (6) in January

the following data relate to notes receivable and interest for cgh cable co a cable 546069

PR 8-5A Notes receivable entries

The following data relate to notes receivable and interest for CGH Cable Co., a cable manufacturer and supplier. (All notes are dated as of the day they are received.)

Apr. 10. Received a $144,000, 5%, 60-day note on account.

May 15. Received a $270,000, 7%, 120-day note on account.

June 9. Received $145,200 on note of April 10.

Aug. 22. Received a $150,000, 4%, 45-day note on account.

Sept. 12. Received $276,300 on note of May 15.

30. Received a $210,000, 8%, 60-day note on account.

Oct. 6. Received $150,750 on note of August 22.

18. Received a 120,000, 5%, 60-day note on account.

Nov. 29. Received $212,800 on note of September 30.

Dec. 17. Received $121,000 on note of October 18.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions.

the following were selected from among the transactions completed by caldemeyer co d 546070

PR 8-6A Sales and notes receivable transactions

The following were selected from among the transactions completed by Caldemeyer Co. during the current year. Caldemeyer Co. sells and installs home and business security systems.

Jan. 3. Loaned $18,000 cash to Trina Gelhaus, receiving a 90-day, 8% note.

Feb. 10. Sold merchandise on account to Bradford & Co., $24,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $14,400.

13. Sold merchandise on account to Dry Creek Co., $60,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $54,000.

Mar. 12. Accepted a 60-day, 7% note for $24,000 from Bradford & Co. on account.

14. Accepted a 60-day, 9% note for $60,000 from Dry Creek Co. on account.

Apr. 3. Received the interest due from Trina Gelhaus and a new 120-day, 9% note as a renewal of the loan of January 3. (Record both the debit and the credit to the notes receivable account.)

May 11. Received from Bradford & Co. the amount due on the note of March 12.

13. Dry Creek Co. dishonored its note dated March 14.

July 12. Received from Dry Creek Co. the amount owed on the dishonored note, plus interest for 60 days at 12% computed on the maturity value of the note.

Aug. 1. Received from Trina Gelhaus the amount due on her note of April 3.

Oct. 5. Sold merchandise on account to Halloran Co., $13,500. The cost of the merchandise sold was $8,100.

15. Received from Halloran Co. the amount of the invoice of October 5, less 2% discount.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions.

the following transactions were completed by the wild trout gallery during the curre 546071

PR 8-1B Entries related to uncollectible accounts OBJ. 4

The following transactions were completed by The Wild Trout Gallery during the current fiscal year ended December 31:

Jan. 19. Reinstated the account of Arlene Gurley, which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $2,660 cash in full payment of Arlene’s account.

Apr. 3. Wrote off the $12,750 balance owed by Premier GS Co., which is bankrupt.

July 16. Received 25% of the $22,000 balance owed by Hayden Co., a bankrupt business, and wrote off the remainder as uncollectible.

Nov. 23. Reinstated the account of Harry Carr, which had been written off two years earlier as uncollectible. Recorded the receipt of $4,000 cash in full payment.

Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (compound entry): Cavey Co., $3,300; Fogle Co., $8,100; Lake Furniture, $11,400; Melinda Shryer, $1,200.

31. Based on an analysis of the $2,350,000 of accounts receivable, it was estimated that $60,000 will be uncollectible. Journalized the adjusting entry.

Instructions

1. Record the January 1 credit balance of $50,000 in a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

2. Journalize the transactions. Post each entry that affects the following T accounts and determine the new balances:

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Bad Debt Expense

3. Determine the expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.

4. Assuming that instead of basing the provision for uncollectible accounts on an analysis of receivables, the adjusting entry on December 31 had been based on an estimated expense of ½ of 1% of the net sales of $15,800,000 for the year, determine the following:

a. Bad debt expense for the year.

b. Balance in the allowance account after the adjustment of December 31.

c. Expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.

digital depot company which operates a chain of 40 electronics supply stores has jus 546072

PR 8-3B Compare two methods of accounting for uncollectible receivables

Digital Depot Company, which operates a chain of 40 electronics supply stores, has just completed its fourth year of operations. The direct write-off method of recording bad debt expense has been used during the entire period. Because of substantial increases in sales volume and the amount of uncollectible accounts, the firm is considering changing to the allowance method. Information is requested as to the effect that an annual provision of ¼% of sales would have had on the amount of bad debt expense reported for each of the past four years. It is also considered desirable to know what the balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts would have been at the end of each year. The following data have been obtained from the accounts:

Year of Origin of Accounts Receivable Written Off as Uncollectible

Year

Sales

Uncollectible Accounts Written Off

1st

2nd

3nd

4th

1st

$12,500,000

$18,000

$18,000

2nd

14,800,000

30,200

9,000

$21,200

3rd

18,000,000

39,900

3,600

9,300

$27,000

4th

24,000,000

52,600

5,100

12,500

$35,000

Instructions

1. Assemble the desired data, using the following column headings:

Bad Debt Expense

Increase

Expense

Expense

(Decrease)

Balance of

Actually

Based on

in Amount

Allowance Account,

Year

Reported

Estimate

of Expense

End of Year

2. Experience during the first four years of operations indicated that the receivables were either collected within two years or had to be written off as uncollectible.

Does the estimate of ¼% of sales appear to be reasonably close to the actual experience with uncollectible accounts originating during the first two years? Explain.

gen x ads co produces advertising videos during the current fiscal year gen x ads co 546073

PR 8-4B Details of notes receivable and related entries

Gen-X Ads Co. produces advertising videos. During the current fiscal year, Gen-X Ads Co. received the following notes:

Date

Face Amount

Term

Interest Rate

1.

Jan. 14

$33,000

30 days

4%

2.

Mar. 9

60,000

45 days

7

3.

July 12

48,000

90 days

5

4.

Aug. 23

16,000

75 days

6

5.

Nov. 15

36,000

60 days

8

6.

Dec. 10

24,000

60 days

6

Instructions

1. Determine for each note (a) the due date and (b) the amount of interest due at maturity, identifying each note by number.

2. Journalize the entry to record the dishonor of Note (3) on its due date.

3. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on Notes (5) and (6) on December 31.

4. Journalize the entries to record the receipt of the amounts due on Notes (5) and (6) in January and February.

the following data relate to notes receivable and interest for owens co a financial 546074

PR 8-5B Notes receivable entries

The following data relate to notes receivable and interest for Owens Co., a financial services company. (All notes are dated as of the day they are received.)

Mar. 8. Received a $33,000, 5%, 60-day note on account.

31. Received an $80,000, 7%, 90-day note on account.

May 7. Received $33,275 on note of March 8.

16. Received a $72,000, 7%, 90-day note on account.

June 11. Received a $36,000, 6%, 45-day note on account.

29. Received $81,400 on note of March 31.

July 26. Received $36,270 on note of June 11.

Aug. 4. Received a $48,000, 9%, 120-day note on account.

14. Received $73,260 on note of May 16.

Dec. 2. Received $49,440 on note of August 4.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions.

the following were selected from among the transactions completed during the current 546075

PR 8-6B Sales and notes receivable transactions

The following were selected from among the transactions completed during the current year by Danix Co., an appliance wholesale company:

Jan. 21. Sold merchandise on account to Black Tie Co., $28,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $16,800.

Mar. 18. Accepted a 60-day, 6% note for $28,000 from Black Tie Co. on account.

May 17. Received from Black Tie Co. the amount due on the note of March 18.

June 15. Sold merchandise on account to Pioneer Co. for $17,700. The cost of merchandise sold was $10,600.

21. Loaned $18,000 cash to JR Stutts, receiving a 30-day, 8% note.

25. Received from Pioneer Co. the amount due on the invoice of June 15, less 1% discount.

July 21. Received the interest due from JR Stutts and a new 60-day, 9% note as a renewal of the loan of June 21. (Record both the debit and the credit to the notes receivable account.)

Sept. 19. Received from JR Stutts the amount due on her note of July 21.

22. Sold merchandise on account to Wycoff Co., $20,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $12,000.

Oct. 14. Accepted a 30-day, 6% note for $20,000 from Wycoff Co. on account.

Nov. 13. Wycoff Co. dishonored the note dated October 14.

Dec. 28. Received from Wycoff Co. the amount owed on the dishonored note, plus interest for 45 days at 8% computed on the maturity value of the note.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions.

for several years xtreme co rsquo s sales have been on a ldquo cash only rdquo basis 546077

CP 8-2 Estimate uncollectible accounts

For several years, Xtreme Co.’s sales have been on a “cash only” basis. On January 1, 2011, however, Xtreme Co. began offering credit on terms of n/30. The amount of the adjusting entry to record the estimated uncollectible receivables at the end of each year has been ½ of 1% of credit sales, which is the rate reported as the average for the industry.

Credit sales and the year-end credit balances in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts for the past four years are as follows:

Year

Credit Sales

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

2011

$4,000,000

$ 5,000

2012

4,400,000

8,250

2013

4,800,000

10,200

2014

5,100,000

14,400

Laurie Jones, president of Xtreme Co., is concerned that the method used to account for and write off uncollectible receivables is unsatisfactory. She has asked for your advice in the analysis of past operations in this area and for recommendations for change.

1. Determine the amount of (a) the addition to Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and (b) the accounts written off for each of the four years.

2. a. Advise Laurie Jones as to whether the estimate of ½ of 1% of credit sales appears reasonable.

b. Assume that after discussing (a) with Laurie Jones, she asked you what action might be taken to determine what the balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts should be at December 31, 2014, and what possible changes, if any, you might recommend in accounting for uncollectible receivables. How would you respond?

best buy is a specialty retailer of consumer electronics including personal computer 546078

CP 8-3 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables

Best Buy is a specialty retailer of consumer electronics, including personal computers, entertainment software, and appliances. Best Buy operates retail stores in addition to the Best Buy, Media Play, On Cue, and Magnolia Hi-Fi Web sites. For two recent years, Best Buy reported the following (in millions):

Year 2

Year 1

Net sales

$50,272

$49,694

Accounts receivable at end of year

2,348

2,020

Assume that the accounts receivable (in millions) were $1,868 at the beginning of fiscal Year 1.

1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

2. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

3. What conclusions can be drawn from (1) and (2) regarding Best Buy’s efficiency in collecting receivables?

4. What assumption did we make about sales for the Best Buy ratio computations that might distort the ratios and therefore cause the ratios not to be comparable for Year 2 and Year 1?

apple inc designs manufactures and markets personal computers and related personal c 546079

CP 8-4 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables

Apple Inc. designs, manufactures, and markets personal computers and related personal computing and communicating solutions for sale primarily to education, creative, consumer, and business customers. Substantially all of the company’s net sales over the last five years are from sales of its Macs, iPods, iPads, and related software and peripherals. For two recent fiscal years, Apple reported the following (in millions):

Year 2

Year 1

Net sales

$65,225

$42,905

Accounts receivable at end of year

5,510

3,361

Assume that the accounts receivable (in millions) were $2,422 at the beginning of fiscal Year 1.

1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

2. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

3. What conclusions can be drawn from (1) and (2) regarding Apple’s efficiency in collecting receivables?

costco wholesale corporation operates membership warehouses that sell a variety of b 546080

CP 8-5 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables

Costco Wholesale Corporation operates membership warehouses that sell a variety of branded and private label products. Headquartered in Issaquah, Washington, it also sells merchandise online in the United States (Costco.com) and in Canada (Costco.ca). For two recent years, Costco reported the following (in millions):

Year 2

Year 1

Net sales

$77,946

$71,422

Accounts receivable at end of year

1,321

1,205

Assume that the accounts receivable (in thousands) were $1,009 at the beginning of Year 1.

1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

2. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

3. What conclusions can be drawn from (1) and (2) regarding Costco’s efficiency in collecting receivables?

4. Given the nature of Costco’s operations, do you believe Costco’s accounts receivable turnover ratio would be higher or lower than a typical manufacturing company, such as H.J. Heinz Company? Explain.

the accounts receivable turnover ratio will vary across companies depending on the n 546081

CP 8-6 Accounts receivable turnover

The accounts receivable turnover ratio will vary across companies, depending on the nature of the company’s operations. For example, an accounts receivable turnover of 6 for a retailer is unacceptable, but might be excellent for a manufacturer of specialty milling equipment. A list of well-known companies follows:

Alcoa Inc.

The Coca-Cola Company

Kroger

AutoZone, Inc.

Delta Air Lines

Procter & Gamble

Barnes & Noble, Inc.

The Home Depot

Walmart

Caterpillar

IBM

Whirlpool Corporation

1. Categorize each of the preceding companies as to whether its turnover ratio is likely

to be above or below 15.

2. Based on (1), identify a characteristic of companies with accounts receivable turnover ratios above 15.

financial statement data for years ending december 31 for depuy company are shown be 546107

PE 9-9A Fixed asset turnover ratio

Financial statement data for years ending December 31 for DePuy Company are shown below.

2014

2013

Net sales

$5,510,000

$4,880,000

Fixed assets:

Beginning of year

1,600,000

1,450,000

End of year

2,200,000

1,600,000

a. Determine the fixed asset turnover ratio for 2014 and 2013.

b. Does the change in the fixed asset turnover ratio from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?

dick gaines owns and operates gaines print co during february gaines print co incurr 546109

EX 9-1 Costs of acquiring fixed assets

Dick Gaines owns and operates Gaines Print Co. During February, Gaines Print Co. incurred the following costs in acquiring two printing presses. One printing press was new, and the other was used by a business that recently filed for bankruptcy.

Costs related to new printing press:

1. Fee paid to factory representative for installation

2. Freight

3. Insurance while in transit

4. New parts to replace those damaged in unloading

5. Sales tax on purchase price

6. Special foundation

Costs related to used printing press:

7. Fees paid to attorney to review purchase agreement

8. Freight

9. Installation

10. Repair of damage incurred in reconditioning the press

11. Replacement of worn-out parts

12. Vandalism repairs during installation

a. Indicate which costs incurred in acquiring the new printing press should be debited to the asset account.

b. Indicate which costs incurred in acquiring the used printing press should be debited to the asset account.

cedar springs company completed the following selected transactions during june 2014 546011

PR 7-2B Transactions for petty cash, cash short and over

Cedar Springs Company completed the following selected transactions during June 2014: June 1. Established a petty cash fund of $1,000.

12. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $9,440.

The actual cash received from cash sales was $9,506.

30. Petty cash on hand was $46. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following disbursements, each evidenced by a petty cash receipt:

June 2. Store supplies, $375.

10. Express charges on merchandise purchased, $105 (Merchandise Inventory).

14. Office supplies, $85.

15. Office supplies, $90.

18. Postage stamps, $33 (Office Supplies).

20. Repair to fax, $100 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).

21. Repair to office door lock, $25 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).

22. Postage due on special delivery letter, $9 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).

28. Express charges on merchandise purchased, $110 (Merchandise Inventory).

30. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $13,390. The actual cash received from cash sales was $13,350.

30. Increased the petty cash fund by $200.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions.

comparing the bank statement and the accompanying canceled checks and memos with the 546012

PR 7-3B Bank reconciliation and entries

The cash account for Stone Systems at July 31, 2014, indicated a balance of $17,750. The bank statement indicated a balance of $33,650 on July 31, 2014. Comparing the bank statement and the accompanying canceled checks and memos with the records reveals the following reconciling items:

a. Checks outstanding totaled $17,865.

b. A deposit of $9,150, representing receipts of July 31, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.

c. The bank had collected $6,095 on a note left for collection. The face of the note was $5,750.

d. A check for $390 returned with the statement had been incorrectly recorded by Stone Systems as $930. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Holland Co. for the purchase of office supplies on account.

e. A check drawn for $1,810 had been incorrectly charged by the bank as $1,180.

f. Bank service charges for July amounted to $80.

Instructions

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation.

2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.

3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Stone Systems on July 31, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?

the cash account for collegiate sports co on november 1 2014 indicated a balance of 546013

PR 7-4B Bank reconciliation and entries

The cash account for Collegiate Sports Co. on November 1, 2014, indicated a balance of $81,145. During November, the total cash deposited was $293,150, and checks written totaled $307,360. The bank statement indicated a balance of $112,675 on November 30, 2014. Comparing the bank statement, the canceled checks, and the accompanying memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:

a. Checks outstanding totaled $41,840.

b. A deposit of $12,200, representing receipts of November 30, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.

c. A check for $7,250 had been incorrectly charged by the bank as $2,750.

d. A check for $760 returned with the statement had been recorded by Collegiate Sports Co. as $7,600. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Ramirez Co. on account.

e. The bank had collected for Collegiate Sports Co. $7,385 on a note left for collection.

The face of the note was $7,000.

f. Bank service charges for November amounted to $125.

g. A check for $2,500 from Hallen Academy was returned by the bank because of insufficient funds.

Instructions

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of November 30.

2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.

3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Collegiate Sports Co. on November 30, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?

the following is an excerpt from a conversation between two sales clerks jean moen a 546015

CP 7-2 Internal controls

The following is an excerpt from a conversation between two sales clerks, Jean Moen and Sara Cheney. Jean and Sara are employed by Turpin Meadows Electronics, a locally owned and operated electronics retail store.

Jean: Did you hear the news?

Sara: What news?

Jean: Neal and Linda were both arrested this morning.

Sara: What? Arrested? You’re putting me on

Jean: No, really! The police arrested them first thing this morning. Put them in handcuffs, read them their rights the whole works. It was unreal

Sara: What did they do?

Jean: Well, apparently they were filling out merchandise refund forms for fictitious customers and then taking the cash.

Sara: I guess I never thought of that. How did they catch them?

Jean: The store manager noticed that returns were twice that of last year and seemed to be increasing. When he confronted

Neal, he became flustered and admitted to taking the cash, apparently over $9,000 in just three months. They’re going over the last six months’ transactions to try to determine how much Linda stole. She apparently started stealing first.

Suggest appropriate control procedures that would have prevented or detected the theft of cash.

the following is an excerpt from a conversation between the store manager of wholeso 546016

CP 7-3 Internal controls

The following is an excerpt from a conversation between the store manager of Wholesome Grocery Stores, Kara Dahl, and Lynn Shutes, president of Wholesome Grocery Stores.

Lynn: Kara, I’m concerned about this new scanning system.

Kara: What’s the problem?

Lynn: Well, how do we know the clerks are ringing up all the merchandise?

Kara: That’s one of the strong points about the system. The scanner automatically rings up each item, based on its bar code. We update the prices daily, so we’re sure that the sale is rung up for the right price.

Lynn: That’s not my concern. What keeps a clerk from pretending to scan items and then simply not charging his friends? If his friends were buying 10–15 items, it would be easy for the clerk to pass through several items with his finger over the bar code or just pass the merchandise through the scanner with the wrong side showing. It would look normal for anyone observing. In the old days, we at least could hear the cash register ringing up each sale.

Kara: I see your point.

Suggest ways that Wholesome Grocery Stores could prevent or detect the theft of merchandise as described.

doris tidwell and jo yost are both cash register clerks for fuller rsquo s organic m 546017

CP 7-4 Ethics and professional conduct in business

Doris Tidwell and Jo Yost are both cash register clerks for Fuller’s Organic Markets. Tom Ward is the store manager for Fuller’s Organic Markets. The following is an excerpt of a conversation between Doris and Jo:

Doris: Jo, how long have you been working for Fuller’s Organic Markets?

Jo: Almost five years this April. You just started two weeks ago . . . right?

Doris: Yes. Do you mind if I ask you a question?

Jo: No, go ahead.

Doris: What I want to know is, have they always had this rule that if your cash register is short at the end of the day, you have to make up the shortage out of your own pocket?

Jo: Yes, as long as I’ve been working here.

Doris: Well, it’s the pits. Last week I had to pay in almost $40.

Jo: It’s not that big a deal. I just make sure that I’m not short at the end of the day.

Doris: How do you do that?

Jo: I just shortchange a few customers early in the day. There are a few jerks that deserve it anyway. Most of the time, their attention is elsewhere and they don’t think to check their change.

Doris: What happens if you’re over at the end of the day?

Jo: Tom lets me keep it as long as it doesn’t get to be too large. I’ve not been short in over a year. I usually clear about $20 to $30 extra per day.

Discuss this case from the viewpoint of proper controls and professional behavior.

the records of parker company indicate a july 31 cash balance of 10 400 which includ 546018

CP 7-5 Bank reconciliation and internal control

The records of Parker Company indicate a July 31 cash balance of $10,400, which includes undeposited receipts for July 30 and 31. The cash balance on the bank statement as of July 31 is $10,575. This balance includes a note of $2,250 plus $150 interest collected by the bank but not recorded in the journal. Checks outstanding on July 31 were as follows: No. 2670, $1,050; No. 3679, $675; No. 3690, $1,650; No. 5148, $225; No. 5149, $750; and No. 5151, $800. On July 25, the cashier resigned, effective at the end of the month. Before leaving on July 31, the cashier prepared the following bank reconciliation:

Cash balance per books, July 31

$10,400

Add outstanding checks:

No. 5148

$225

5149

750

5151

800

1,675

$12,075

Less undeposited receipts

1,500

Cash balance per bank, July 31

$10,575

Deduct unrecorded note with interest

2,400

True cash, July 31

$ 8,175

Calculator Tape of Outstanding Checks:

0*

225+

750+

800+

1,675*

Subsequently, the owner of Parker Company discovered that the cashier had stolen an unknown amount of undeposited receipts, leaving only $1,500 to be deposited on July 31.

The owner, a close family friend, has asked your help in determining the amount that the former cashier has stolen.

1. Determine the amount the cashier stole from Parker Company. Show your computations in good form.

2. How did the cashier attempt to conceal the theft?

3. a. Identify two major weaknesses in internal controls, which allowed the cashier to steal the undeposited cash receipts.

b. Recommend improvements in internal controls, so that similar types of thefts of undeposited cash receipts can be prevented.

tearlab corp is a health care company that specializes in developing diagnostic devi 546020

CP 7-7 Cash to monthly cash expenses ratio

TearLab Corp. is a health care company that specializes in developing diagnostic devices for eye disease. TearLab reported the following data (in thousands) for three recent years:

Year 3

Year 2

Year 1

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 2,726

$ 106

$ 2,565

Net cash flows from operations

(4,540)

(4,098)

(9,435)

1. Determine the monthly cash expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

2. Determine the ratio of cash to monthly cash expenses as of December 31, for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

3. Based on (1) and (2), comment on TearLab’s ratio of cash to monthly operating expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1.

financial statement data for years ending december 31 for chiro solutions company ar 546040

PE 8-6A Accounts receivable turnover and number of days’ sales in receivables

Financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Chiro-Solutions Company are shown below.

2014

2013

Net sales

$2,912,000

$2,958,000

Accounts receivable:

Beginning of year

300,000

280,000

End of year

340,000

300,000

a. Determine the accounts receivable turnover for 2014 and 2013.

b. Determine the number of days’ sales in receivables for 2014 and 2013. Round to one decimal place.

c. Does the change in accounts receivable turnover and the number of days’ sales in receivables from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?

financial statement data for years ending december 31 for robinhood company are show 546041

PE 8-6B Accounts receivable turnover and number of days’ sales in receivables

Financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Robinhood Company are shown below.

2014

2013

Net sales

$7,906,000

$6,726,000

Accounts receivable:

Beginning of year

600,000

540,000

End of year

580,000

600,000

a. Determine the accounts receivable turnover for 2014 and 2013.

b. Determine the number of days’ sales in receivables for 2014 and 2013. Round to one decimal place.

c. Does the change in accounts receivable turnover and the number of days’ sales in receivables from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?

mgm resorts international owns and operates hotels and casinos including the mgm gra 546043

EX 8-2 Nature of uncollectible accounts

MGM Resorts International owns and operates hotels and casinos including the MGM Grand and the Bellagio in Las Vegas, Nevada. As of a recent year, MGM reported accounts receivable of $415,654,000 and allowance for doubtful accounts of $93,760,000. Johnson & Johnson manufactures and sells a wide range of healthcare products including Band-Aids and Tylenol. As of a recent year, Johnson & Johnson reported accounts receivable of $10,114,000,000 and allowance for doubtful accounts of $340,000,000.

a. Compute the percentage of the allowance for doubtful accounts to the accounts receivable for MGM Resorts International. Round to one decimal place.

b. Compute the percentage of the allowance for doubtful accounts to the accounts receivable, for Johnson & Johnson. Round to one decimal place.

c. Discuss possible reasons for the difference in the two ratios computed in (a) and (b).

at the end of the current year the accounts receivable account has a debit balance o 546047

EX 8-6 Providing for doubtful accounts

At the end of the current year, the accounts receivable account has a debit balance of $6,125,000 and net sales for the year total $66,800,000. Determine the amount of the adjusting entry to provide for doubtful accounts under each of the following assumptions:

a. The allowance account before adjustment has a debit balance of $18,000. Bad debt expense is estimated at ¾ of 1% of net sales.

b. The allowance account before adjustment has a debit balance of $18,000. An aging of the accounts in the customer ledger indicates estimated doubtful accounts of $475,000.

c. The allowance account before adjustment has a credit balance of $10,000. Bad debt expense is estimated at ½ of 1% of net sales.

d. The allowance account before adjustment has a credit balance of $10,000. An aging of the accounts in the customer ledger indicates estimated doubtful accounts of $360,000.

toot auto supply distributes new and used automobile parts to local dealers througho 546048

EX 8-7 Number of days past due

Toot Auto Supply distributes new and used automobile parts to local dealers throughout the Midwest. Toot’s credit terms are n/30. As of the end of business on October 31, the following accounts receivable were past due:

Account

Due Date

Amount

Avalanche Auto

August 8

$12,000

Bales Auto

October 11

2,400

Derby Auto Repair

June 23

3,900

Lucky’s Auto Repair

September 2

6,600

Pit Stop Auto

September 19

1,100

Reliable Auto Repair

July 15

9,750

Trident Auto

August 24

1,800

Valley Repair & Tow

May 17

4,000

traditional bikes co is a wholesaler of motorcycle supplies an aging of the company 546050

EX 8-11 Estimating doubtful accounts

Traditional Bikes Co. is a wholesaler of motorcycle supplies. An aging of the company’s accounts receivable on December 31, 2014, and a historical analysis of the percentage of uncollectible accounts in each age category are as follows:

Balance

Percent Uncollectible

Age Interval

$ 740,000

½%

Not past due

390,000

2

1–30 days past due

85,000

4

31–60 days past due

28,000

14

61–90 days past due

42,000

32

91–180 days past due

15,000

80

Over 180 days past due

$1,300,000

Estimate what the proper balance of the allowance for doubtful accounts should be as of December 31, 2014.

entries for bad debt expense under the direct write off and allowance 546051

EX 8-13 Entries for bad debt expense under the direct write-off and allowance

Methods The following selected transactions were taken from the records of Shipway Company for the first year of its operations ending December 31, 2014:

Apr. 13. Wrote off account of Dean Sheppard, $8,450.

May 15. Received $500 as partial payment on the $7,100 account of Dan Pyle. Wrote off

the remaining balance as uncollectible.

July 27. Received $8,450 from Dean Sheppard, whose account had been written off on April 13. Reinstated the account and recorded the cash receipt.

Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (record as one journal entry):

Paul Chapman

$2,225

Duane DeRosa

3,550

Teresa Galloway

4,770

Ernie Klatt

1,275

Marty Richey

1,690

31. If necessary, record the year-end adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.

a. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the direct write-off method.

b. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the allowance method. Shipway Company uses the percent of credit sales method of estimating uncollectible accounts expense. Based on past history and industry averages, ¾% of credit sales are expected to be uncollectible. Shipway Company recorded $3,778,000 of credit sales during 2014.

c. How much higher (lower) would Shipway Company’s net income have been under the direct write-off method than under the allowance method?

the following selected transactions were taken from the records of rustic tables com 546052

EX 8-14 Entries for bad debt expense under the direct write-off and allowance methods

The following selected transactions were taken from the records of Rustic Tables Company for the year ending December 31, 2014:

June 8. Wrote off account of Kathy Quantel, $8,440.

Aug. 14. Received $3,000 as partial payment on the $12,500 account of Rosalie Oakes.

Wrote off the remaining balance as uncollectible.

Oct. 16. Received the $8,440 from Kathy Quantel, whose account had been written off on June 8. Reinstated the account and recorded the cash receipt.

Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (record as one journal entry):

Wade Dolan

$4,600

Greg Gagne

3,600

Amber Kisko

7,150

Shannon Poole

2,975

Niki Spence

6,630

31. If necessary, record the year-end adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.

a. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the direct write-off method.

b. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the allowance method, assuming that the allowance account had a beginning balance of $36,000 on January 1, 2014, and the company uses the analysis of receivables method. Rustic Tables Company prepared the following aging schedule for its accounts receivable:

Aging Class (Number

Receivables Balance

Estimated Percent of

of Days Past Due)

on December 31

Uncollectible Accounts

0–30 days

$320,000

1%

31–60 days

110,000

3

61–90 days

24,000

10

91–120 days

18,000

33

More than 120 days

43,000

75

Total receivables

$515,000

c. How much higher (lower) would Rustic Tables’ 2014 net income have been under the direct write-off method than under the allowance method?

casebolt company wrote off the following accounts receivable as uncollectible for th 546055

EX 8-17 Entries for bad debt expense under the direct write-off and allowance methods

Casebolt Company wrote off the following accounts receivable as uncollectible for the first year of its operations ending December 31, 2014:

Customer

Amount

Shawn Brooke

$ 4,650

Eve Denton

5,180

Art Malloy

11,050

Cassie Yost

9,120

Total

$30,000

a. Journalize the write-offs for 2014 under the direct write-off method.

b. Journalize the write-offs for 2014 under the allowance method. Also, journalize the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts. The company recorded $5,250,000 of credit sales during 2014. Based on past history and industry averages, ¾% of credit sales are expected to be uncollectible.

c. How much higher (lower) would Casebolt Company’s 2014 net income have been under the direct write-off method than under the allowance method?

determine the due date and the amount of interest due at maturity on the following n 546057

EX 8-19 Determine due date and interest on notes

Determine the due date and the amount of interest due at maturity on the following notes dated in 2014:

Date of Note

Face Amount

Interest Rate

Term of Note

January 22

$55,000

8%

90 days

March 9

36,000

5

60 days

June 15

78,000

4

45 days

September 4

13,800

7

60 days

October 1

58,000

6

120 days

journalize the following transactions in the accounts of safari games co which opera 546061

EX 8-24 Entries for receipt and dishonor of notes receivable

Journalize the following transactions in the accounts of Safari Games Co., which operates a riverboat casino:

Apr. 18. Received a $60,000, 30-day, 7% note dated April 18 from Glenn Cross on account.

30. Received a $42,000, 60-day, 8% note dated April 30 from Rhoni Melville on account.

May 18. The note dated April 18 from Glenn Cross is dishonored, and the customer’s account is charged for the note, including interest.

June 29. The note dated April 30 from Rhoni Melville is dishonored, and the customer’s account is charged for the note, including interest.

Aug. 16. Cash is received for the amount due on the dishonored note dated April 18 plus interest for 90 days at 8% on the total amount debited to Glenn Cross on May 18.

Oct. 22. Wrote off against the allowance account the amount charged to Rhoni Melville on June 29 for the dishonored note dated April 30.

list any errors you can find in the following partial balance sheet 546062

EX 8-25 Receivables on the balance sheet

List any errors you can find in the following partial balance sheet:

Napa Vino Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2014

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

$ 78,500

Notes receivable

$ 300,000

Less interest receivable

4,500

295,500

Accounts receivable

$1,200,000

Plus allowance for doubtful accounts

11,500

1,211,500

managerial accounting 545715

Vega Foods, Inc., has recently purchased a small mill that it intends to operate as one of its subsidiaries. The newly acquired mill has three products that it offers for sale—wheat cereal, pancake mix, and flour. Each product sells for $10 per package. Materials, labor, and other variable production costs are $4.30 per bag of wheat cereal, $5.50 per bag of pancake mix, and $3.10 per bag of flour. Sales commissions are 10% of sales for any product. All other costs are fixed.

Document Preview:

Vega Foods, Inc., has recently purchased a small mill that it intends to operate as one of its subsidiaries. The newly acquired mill has three products that it offers for sale—wheat cereal, pancake mix, and flour. Each product sells for $10 per package. Materials, labor, and other variable production costs are $4.30 per bag of wheat cereal, $5.50 per bag of pancake mix, and $3.10 per bag of flour. Sales commissions are 10% of sales for any product. All other costs are fixed.??The mill’s income statement for the most recent month is given below:??  ? ? ? ?Product Line?? ?Total?Company?Wheat?Cereal?Pancake?Mix?Flour??  Sales?$?990,000? ?$?330,000? ?$?430,000? ?$?230,000? ?? ??????????????  Expenses:? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??       Materials, labor, and other? ?449,700? ? ?141,900? ? ?236,500? ? ?71,300? ??       Sales commissions? ?99,000? ? ?33,000? ? ?43,000? ? ?23,000? ??       Advertising? ?139,380? ? ?60,900? ? ?52,200? ? ?26,280? ??       Salaries? ?105,000? ? ?51,000? ? ?21,000? ? ?33,000? ??       Equipment depreciation? ?49,500? ? ?16,500? ? ?21,500? ? ?11,500? ??       Warehouse rent? ?19,800? ? ?6,600? ? ?8,600? ? ?4,600? ??       General administration? ?90,000? ? ?30,000? ? ?30,000? ? ?30,000? ?? ??????????????  Total expenses? ?952,380? ? ?339,900? ? ?412,800? ? ?199,680? ?? ??????????????  Net operating income (loss)?$?37,620? ?$?(9,900)? ?$?17,200? ?$?30,320? ?? ? ??This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

Attachments:

calculate the cost of coffee beans per ounce of coffee sold 545785

Calculate the cost of coffee beans per ounce of coffee sold. 2. Calculate the cost of cups, lids, sleeves, cream, and sugar per unit for small, medium, and large cups of coffee and in total. 3. Calculate the total labor costs for the year. 4. Prepare an income statement for The Daily Grind for the last year. You can assume that there are no inventories on hand at the end of the year. (All coffee and supplies purchased during the year are consumed.) 5. Determine whether the costs incurred by The Daily Grind are fixed, variable (with respect to number of cups of coffee sold), or mixed. 6. Use regression analysis and the high/low method to calculate the monthly fixed cost and the variable component of the utility expenses incurred by The Daily Grind. Use cups of coffee sold as the independent variable and utility expense as the dependent variable in your regression analysis. After calculating both numbers, round your final answers to two decimal places. 7. Compare the regression results with the high/low results. Which model would you suggest? 8. Calculate the contribution margin earned for each product (round to three decimal places) and the weighted-average contribution margin (round to four decimal places). 9. Assume the sales mix given in the problem. What is Daily Grind’s break-even point in terms of the number of cups of coffee sold during the year? 10. David is contemplating adding a new 20-ounce product for the coming year and discontinuing sales of the small 8-ounce cup. The new cup, lid, and sleeve cost the same as the 16-ounce cup, but cream and sugar is expected to cost $.06 per cup instead of $.04 per cup. The new extra-large cup would be priced at $2.40. David anticipates that the new sales mix would be 50% for the 12-ounce cup, 30% for the 16-ounce cup, and 20% for the new 20-ounce cup. Assume that material, labor, and overhead costs remain thesame in the upcoming year. How would this change in sales mix affect the company’s breakeven point? 11. David would like to increase sales in the second year of operations so that he may raise his salary to $50,000 (not including $15,000 of fringe benefits) while reducing his workload to 40 hours per week with two paid weeks of vacation during the year. Reducing his workload will require increasing the number of hours worked by parttime employees by 1,080 hours per year. Assume the introduction of the extra-large cup and the new sales mix as discussed in requirement 10. What level of annual sales would be required in order for David to reach his goal? 12. Write a short memo to David and discuss whether you think he will be able to reach his goal during the second year of operations.

Attachments:

abc company inc is a foreign corporation registered in the state of illinois 545792

ABC Company, Inc. is a foreign corporation registered in the State of Illinois.

Where are this firm’s official offices located (geographically) to have such a

designation?

2. Using the format shown in the Study Guide and in the Homework answers:

Cohn, Dole, Wojcik, Moore, and Murphy are partners in GSU Medical

Supply Company. The partnership agreement states that Cohn is to receive

a salary of $100,000, and Dole and Wojcik are to receive salaries of $85,000

apiece. Moore is to receive a sales commission of 1% of the firm’s gross

revenues. Murphy is to receive 3% on her investment at the

beginning of the year. Sales for fiscal 2013 were $10,000,000. Murphy’s

investment at the beginning of the year was $2,000,000. After paying salaries,

commissions, and interest on investment, the remaining profits/losses are to be

allocated on a 1:2:3:4:5 basis (Cohn, Dole, Wojcik, Moore, and Murphy).

The profit for 2013 before paying salaries, commissions, and interest is $900,000

Compute the allocation of partners’ total payments for 2013.

3. The ABC Medical Practice Plan, Inc., had 10,000 of $50 par value common stock

and 3,000 shares of $100 value, 3% cumulative preferred stock outstanding for

the years 2012 and 2013. The company declared cash dividends of $9,000 and

$15,000 respectively for the years 2012 and 2013. Compute the total dividends

That would be paid to the common and preferred shareholders for each year.

NOTE: Students must use the format shown in the Study Guide and in the

Homework answers.

4. ABC Company, Inc. is a foreign corporation registered in the State of Illinois.

Where are this firm’s official offices located (geographically) to have such a

designation?

5. ABF (Adkins, Bell and Fox) partnership is dissolving. Creditors are owed

$52,000. Each partner contributed $30,000 to the business as a capital invest-

ment. Partner Adkins loaned the business $20,000, Partner Bell loaned the

business $5,000, and Partner Fox did not make any loans. There is $83,000

in the firm’s bank account after all other assets have been liquidated. Allocate

the bank balance among all of the involved parties: Creditors, Partner Adkins,

Partner Bell, and Partner Fox.

Attachments:

financial reporting 545793

April 1

(balance on hand)

490

@

$7.30

April 5

690

4

790

@

7.40

12

590

11

690

@

7.70

27

1,580

18

590

@

7.80

28

150

26

990

@

8.10

30

590

@

8.40

Warning

Don’t show me this message again for the assignment

Ok

Cancel

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(a1)

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art3/questionFeedback/icon_wrong_lrg.png

Your answer is incorrect.

Calculate average cost per unit.(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621.)

Average cost per unit

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif7.4230

Warning

Don’t show me this message again for the assignment

Ok

Cancel

Click if you would like to Show Work for this question:

Open Show Work

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(a2) and (b)

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(a) Compute the inventory at April 30 on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. (1) First-in, first-out (FIFO). (2) Last-in, first-out (LIFO). (3) Average cost.(Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)

FIFO

LIFO

Average cost

Ending Inventory

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what amount would be shown as ending inventory under FIFO, LIFO and Average cost?(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)

FIFO

LIFO

Average cost

Ending Inventory

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

Warning

Don’t show me this message again for the assignment

Ok

Cancel

Click if you would like to Show Work for this question:

Open Show Work

Modify Show Work

problem 8 4 hull company s record of transactions concerning part x for the month of 545860

Problem 8-4

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

Hull Company’s record of transactions concerning part X for the month of April was as follows.

Purchases

Sales

April 1

(balance on hand)

490

@

$7.30

April 5

690

4

790

@

7.40

12

590

11

690

@

7.70

27

1,580

18

590

@

7.80

28

150

26

990

@

8.10

30

590

@

8.40

Warning

Don’t show me this message again for the assignment

Ok

Cancel

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(a1)

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art3/questionFeedback/icon_wrong_lrg.png

Calculate average cost per unit.(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621.)

Average cost per unit

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif7.4230

Warning

Don’t show me this message again for the assignment

Ok

Cancel

Click if you would like to Show Work for this question:

Open Show Work

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(a2) and (b)

http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(a) Compute the inventory at April 30 on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. (1) First-in, first-out (FIFO). (2) Last-in, first-out (LIFO). (3) Average cost.(Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)

FIFO

LIFO

Average cost

Ending Inventory

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what amount would be shown as ending inventory under FIFO, LIFO and Average cost?(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)

FIFO

LIFO

Average cost

Ending Inventory

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

$http://edugen.wileyplus.com/edugen/art2/common/pixel.gif

Warning

Don’t show me this message again for the assignment

Ok

Cancel

stockholders equity 545970

Penn Company was formed on July 1, 2012. It was authorized to issue309,700shares of $12par value common stock and104,100shares of9% $25par value, cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock. Penn Company has a July 1–June 30 fiscal year.

The following information relates to the stockholders’ equity accounts of Penn Company.

Common Stock

Prior to the 2014–2015 fiscal year, Penn Company had115,100shares of outstanding common stock issued as follows.

1. 91,700shares were issued for cash on July 1, 2012, at $32per share.
2. On July 24, 2012,5,000shares were exchanged for a plot of land which cost the seller $79,400in 2006 and had an estimated fair value of $228,100on July 24, 2012.
3. 18,400shares were issued on March 1, 2013, for $41per share.

During the 2014–2015 fiscal year, the following transactions regarding common stock took place.

November30,2014 Penn purchased2,900shares of its own stock on the open market at $38per share. Penn uses the cost method for treasury stock.
December15,2014 Penn declared a4% stock dividend for stockholders of record on January 15, 2015, to be issued on January 31, 2015. Penn was having a liquidity problem and could not afford a cash dividend at the time. Penn’s common stock was selling at $52per share on December 15, 2014.
June20,2015 Penn sold420shares of its own common stock that it had purchased on November 30, 2014, for $21,400.

Preferred Stock

Penn issued40,300shares of preferred stock at $44per share on July 1, 2013.

Cash Dividends

Penn has followed a schedule of declaring cash dividends in December and June, with payment being made to stockholders of record in the following month. The cash dividends which have been declared since inception of the company through June 30, 2015, are shown below.

Declaration
Date
Common
Stock
Preferred
Stock
12/15/13 $0.38per share $1per share
6/15/14 $0.38per share $1per share
12/15/14 $1per share

No cash dividends were declared during June 2015 due to the company’s liquidity problems.

Retained Earnings

As of June 30, 2014, Penn’s retained earnings account had a balance of $708,900. For the fiscal year ending June 30, 2015, Penn reported net income of $42,200.

Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet, for Penn Company as of June 30, 2015, as it should appear in its annual report to the shareholders.

this is the proof of the information that i received 545973

Your answer is partially correct.

Assume that
Amazon.comhas a stock-option plan for top management. Each stock option represents the right to purchase a share of Amazon $1 par value common stock in the future at a price equal to the fair value of the stock at the date of the grant. Amazon has 5,000 stock options outstanding, which were granted at the beginning of 2014. The following data relate to the option grant.

Exercise price for options $40
Market price at grant date (January 1, 2014) $40
Fair value of options at grant date (January 1, 2014) $6
Service period 5 years

(a)Prepare the journal entries for the first year of the stock-option plan.
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.)

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
1/1/14
12/31/14

(b)Prepare the journal entries for the first year of the plan assuming that, rather than options, 700 shares of restricted stock were granted at the beginning of 2012.
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.)

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
1/1/14
12/31/14

(c)Now assume that the market price of Amazon stock on the grant date was $45 per share. Prepare the journal entries for the first year of the plan assuming that, rather than options, 700 shares of restricted stock were granted at the beginning of 2012.
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.)

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
1/10/14
12/31/14

identify each of the following reconciling items as a an addition to the cash balanc 545994

EX 7-16 Bank reconciliation

Identify each of the following reconciling items as: (a) an addition to the cash balance according to the bank statement, (b) a deduction from the cash balance according to the bank statement, (c) an addition to the cash balance according to the company’s records, or (d) a deduction from the cash balance according to the company’s records. (None of the transactions reported by bank debit and credit memos have been recorded by the company.)

1. Bank service charges, $30.

2. Check of a customer returned by bank to company because of insufficient funds, $1,750.

3. Check for $390 incorrectly recorded by the company as $930.

4. Check for $50 incorrectly charged by bank as $500.

5. Deposit in transit, $9,700.

6. Outstanding checks, $33,110.

7. Note collected by bank, $24,600.

the following data were accumulated for use in reconciling the bank account of allen 545995

EX 7-18 Bank reconciliation

The following data were accumulated for use in reconciling the bank account of Allenby Co. for August:

1. Cash balance according to the company’s records at August 31, $31,080.

2. Cash balance according to the bank statement at August 31, $38,280.

3. Checks outstanding, $12,460.

4. Deposit in transit, not recorded by bank, $5,850.

5. A check for $180 in payment of an account was erroneously recorded in the check register as $810.

6. Bank debit memo for service charges, $40.

a. Prepare a bank reconciliation, using the format shown in Exhibit 7.

b. If the balance sheet were prepared for Allenby Co. on August 31, what amount should be reported for cash?

c. Must a bank reconciliation always balance (reconcile)?

an accounting clerk for chesner co prepared the following bank reconciliation 545997

EX 7-21 Bank reconciliation

An accounting clerk for Chesner Co. prepared the following bank reconciliation:

Cash balance according to company’s records

$11,100

Add: Outstanding checks

$ 3,585

Error by Chesner Co. in recording Check

No. 1056 as $950 instead of $590

360

Note for $12,000 collected by bank, including interest

12,480

16,425

Deduct: Deposit in transit on July 31

$ 7,200

$27,525

Bank service charges

25

Cash balance according to bank statement

7,225

$20,300

a. From the data in the above bank reconciliation, prepare a new bank reconciliation for Chesner Co., using the format shown in the illustrative problem.

b. If a balance sheet were prepared for Chesner Co. on July 31, 2014, what amount should be reported for cash?

identify the errors in the following bank reconciliation 545998

EX 7-22 Bank reconciliation

Identify the errors in the following bank reconciliation:

Poway Co.
Bank Reconciliation
For the Month Ended June 30, 2014

Cash balance according to bank statement

$16,185

Add outstanding checks:

No. 1067

$ 575

1106

470

1110

1,050

1113

910

3,005

$19,190

Deduct deposit of June 30, not recorded by bank

6,600

Adjusted balance

$12,590

Cash balance according to company’s records

$ 8,985

Add: Proceeds of note collected by bank:

Principal

$6,000

Interest

300

$6,300

Service charges

15

6,315

$15,300

Deduct: Check returned because of insufficient funds

$ 890

Error in recording June 17 deposit of $7,150 as $1,750

5,400

Adjusted balance

alaska impressions co records all cash receipts on the basis of its cash register ta 545999

EX 7-23 Using bank reconciliation to determine cash receipts stolen

Alaska Impressions Co. records all cash receipts on the basis of its cash register tapes.

Alaska Impressions Co. discovered during October 2014 that one of its sales clerks had stolen an undetermined amount of cash receipts by taking the daily deposits to the bank.

The following data have been gathered for October:

Cash in bank according to the general ledger

$11,680

Cash according to the October 31, 2014, bank statement

13,275

Outstanding checks as of October 31, 2014

3,670

Bank service charge for October

40

Note receivable, including interest collected by bank in October

2,100

No deposits were in transit on October 31.

a. Determine the amount of cash receipts stolen by the sales clerk.

b. What accounting controls would have prevented or detected this theft?

mattel inc designs manufactures and markets toy products worldwide mattel rsquo s to 546001

EX 7-25 Variation in cash flows

Mattel, Inc., designs, manufactures, and markets toy products worldwide. Mattel’s toys include Barbie™ fashion dolls and accessories, Hot Wheels™, and Fisher-Price brands.

For a recent year, Mattel reported the following net cash flows from operating activities (in thousands):

First quarter ending March 31

$ (41,844)

Second quarter ending June 30

(184,934)

Third quarter ending September 30

(55,548)

Fourth quarter ending December 31

955,600

Explain why Mattel reported negative net cash flows from operating activities during the first three quarters and a large positive cash flow for the fourth quarter, with overall net positive cash flow for the year.

capstone turbine corporation produces and sells turbine generators for such applicat 546003

EX 7-27 Cash to monthly cash expenses ratio

Capstone Turbine Corporation produces and sells turbine generators for such applications as charging electric, hybrid vehicles. Capstone Turbine reported the following financial data for a recent year (in thousands):

Net cash flows from operating activities

$(21,899)

Cash and cash equivalents

33,456

a. Determine the monthly cash expenses. Round to one decimal place.

b. Determine the ratio of cash to monthly cash expenses. Round to one decimal place.

c. Based on your analysis, do you believe that Capstone Turbine will remain in business?

allos therapeutics inc is a biopharmaceutical company that develops drugs for the tr 546004

EX 7-28 Cash to monthly cash expenses ratio

Allos Therapeutics, Inc., is a biopharmaceutical company that develops drugs for the treatment of cancer. Allos Therapeutics reported the following financial data (in thousands) for three recent years:

For Years Ended December 31

Year 3

Year 2

Year 1

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 48,402

$141,423

$ 30,696

Net cash flows from operations

(63,656)

(62,199)

(42,850)

a. Determine the monthly cash expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

b. Determine the ratio of cash to monthly cash expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1 as of December 31. Round to one decimal place.

c. Based on (a) and (b), comment on Allos Therapeutics’ ratio of cash to monthly operating expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1.

who works under the supervision of the treasurer 546005

PR 7-1A Evaluating internal control of cash

The following procedures were recently installed by Raspberry Creek Company:

a. After necessary approvals have been obtained for the payment of a voucher, the treasurer signs and mails the check. The treasurer then stamps the voucher and supporting documentation as paid and returns the voucher and supporting documentation to the accounts payable clerk for filing.

b. The accounts payable clerk prepares a voucher for each disbursement. The voucher along with the supporting documentation is forwarded to the treasurer’s office for approval.

c. Along with petty cash expense receipts for postage, office supplies, etc., several postdated employee checks are in the petty cash fund.

d. At the end of the day, cash register clerks are required to use their own funds to make up any cash shortages in their registers.

e. At the end of each day, all cash receipts are placed in the bank’s night depository.

f. At the end of each day, an accounting clerk compares the duplicate copy of the daily cash deposit slip with the deposit receipt obtained from the bank.

g. All mail is opened by the mail clerk, who forwards all cash remittances to the cashier.

The cashier prepares a listing of the cash receipts and forwards a copy of the list to the accounts receivable clerk for recording in the accounts.

h. The bank reconciliation is prepared by the cashier, who works under the supervision of the treasurer.

Instructions

Indicate whether each of the procedures of internal control over cash represents (1) a strength or (2) a weakness. For each weakness, indicate why it exists.

picasso restoration company completed the following selected transactions during may 546006

PR 7-2A Transactions for petty cash, cash short and over

Picasso Restoration Company completed the following selected transactions during May 2014:

May 1. Established a petty cash fund of $800.

10. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $3,345. The actual cash received from cash sales was $3,358.

31. Petty cash on hand was $275. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following disbursements, each evidenced by a petty cash receipt:

May 3. Store supplies, $290.

7. Express charges on merchandise sold, $70 (Delivery Expense).

9. Office supplies, $12.

13. Office supplies, $25.

19. Postage stamps, $18 (Office Supplies).

21. Repair to office file cabinet lock, $20 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).

May 22. Postage due on special delivery letter, $16 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).

24. Express charges on merchandise sold, $40 (Delivery Expense).

30. Office supplies, $10.

May 31. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $6,155. The actual cash received from cash sales was $6,125.

31. Decreased the petty cash fund by $50.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions.

the cash account for remedy medical co at april 30 2014 indicated a balance of 18 88 546007

PR 7-3A Bank reconciliation and entries

The cash account for Remedy Medical Co. at April 30, 2014, indicated a balance of $18,885.

The bank statement indicated a balance of $23,775 on April 30, 2014. Comparing the bank statement and the accompanying canceled checks and memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:

a. Checks outstanding totaled $7,840.

b. A deposit of $3,580, representing receipts of April 30, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.

c. The bank collected $3,780 on a note left for collection. The face of note was $3,600.

d. A check for $770 returned with the statement had been incorrectly recorded by Remedy Medical Co. as $700. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Copelin Co. for a purchase on account.

e. A check drawn for $330 had been erroneously charged by the bank as $3,300.

f. Bank service charges for April amounted to $110.

Instructions

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation.

2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.

3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Remedy Medical Co. on April 30, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?

the cash account for fit bike co at august 1 2014 indicated a balance of 12 190 546008

PR 7-4A Bank reconciliation and entries

The cash account for Fit Bike Co. at August 1, 2014, indicated a balance of $12,190.

During August, the total cash deposited was $28,100 and checks written totaled $33,010.

The bank statement indicated a balance of $12,550 on August 31. Comparing the bank statement, the canceled checks, and the accompanying memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:

a. Checks outstanding totaled $7,440.

b. A deposit of $2,880, representing receipts of August 31, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.

c. The bank had collected for Fit Bike Co. $2,080 on a note left for collection. The face of the note was $2,000.

d. A check for $580 returned with the statement had been incorrectly charged by the bank as $850.

e. A check for $640 returned with the statement had been recorded by Fit Bike Co. as $460. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Brown Co. on account.

f. Bank service charges for August amounted to $20.

g. A check for $900 from Murdock Co. was returned by the bank due to insufficient funds.

Instructions

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of August 31.

2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.

3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Fit Bike Co. on August 31, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?

all sales are rung up on the cash register and a receipt is given to the customer 546010

PR 7-1B Evaluating internal control of cash

The following procedures were recently installed by The China Shop:

a. All sales are rung up on the cash register, and a receipt is given to the customer. All sales are recorded on a record locked inside the cash register.

b. Each cashier is assigned a separate cash register drawer to which no other cashier has access.

c. At the end of a shift, each cashier counts the cash in his or her cash register, unlocks the cash register record, and compares the amount of cash with the amount on the record to determine cash shortages and overages.

d. Checks received through the mail are given daily to the accounts receivable clerk for recording collections on account and for depositing in the bank.

e. Vouchers and all supporting documents are perforated with a PAID designation after being paid by the treasurer.

f. Disbursements are made from the petty cash fund only after a petty cash receipt has been completed and signed by the payee.

g. The bank reconciliation is prepared by the cashier.

Instructions

Indicate whether each of the procedures of internal control over cash represents

(1) a strength or (2) a weakness. For each weakness, indicate why it exists.

centered publishing company specializes in health awareness books 544910

Cost-Based Pricing

P 2. Centered Publishing Company specializes in health awareness books. Because the field of health awareness is very competitive, Jay Rosenbek, the company’s president, maintains a strict policy about selecting manuscripts to publish. Rosenbek wants to publish only books whose projected earnings are 20 percent above total projected costs. Three titles were accepted for publication during the year. The authors of those books are Tone, Tyme, and Klay. Projected costs for each book and allocation percentages for common costs are shown here.

Cost Categories

Tone Book

Tyme Book

Klay Book

Projected Costs

Direct labor

$146,250

$243,750

$97,500

$487,500

Royalty costs

$36,000

$60,000

$24,000

120,000

Printing costs

$74,580

$124,300

$49,720

248,600

Supplies

$10,260

$17,100

$6,840

34,200

Variable production costs

$42,600

$71,000

$28,400

142,000

Fixed production costs

35%

40%

25%

168,000

Distribution costs

30%

50%

20%

194,000

Marketing costs

$61,670

$90,060

$42,270

194,000

General and administrative

35%

40%

25%

52,400

costs

Expected sales for the year are as follows: Tone, 26,000 copies; Tyme, 32,000 copies; and Klay, 20,000 copies.

Required

1. Prepare a cost analysis that computes the desired profit for each of the three books and in total.

2. Use gross margin pricing to compute the selling price for each book. (Hint: Treat royalty costs as production costs.)

3. If the competition’s average selling price for a book similar to Klay’s is $22, should this influence the pricing decision? Explain.

ace maintenance inc repairs heavy construction equipment and vehicles 544911

Time and Materials Pricing in a Service Business

P 3. Ace Maintenance, Inc., repairs heavy construction equipment and vehicles. Recently, the Shanti Construction Company had one of its giant earthmovers overhauled and its tires replaced. Repair work for a vehicle of that size usually takes from one week to ten days. The vehicle must be lifted up so that maintenance workers can gain access to the engine. Parts are normally so large that a crane must be used to put them into place.

The company uses the time and materials pricing system and data from the previous year to compute markup percentages for overhead related to parts and materials and overhead related to direct labor. It adds markups of 130 percent to the cost of materials and parts and 140 percent to the cost of direct labor to cover overhead and profit. The following materials, parts, and direct labor are needed to repair the giant earthmover:

Quantity

Unit Price

Hours

Hourly Rate

Materials and parts

Direct labor

24 Spark plugs

$ 3.40

42 Mechanic hours

$18.20

20 Oil, quarts

2.90

54 Assistant mechanic

12.00

12 Hoses

11.60

hours

1 Water pump

764.00

30 Coolant, quarts

6.50

18 Clamps

5.90

1 Distributor cap

128.40

1 Carburetor

214.10

4 Tires

820.00

Required

Prepare a complete billing for this job. Include itemized amounts for each type of materials, parts, and direct labor. Follow the time and materials pricing approach, and show the total price for the job.

prepares its master budget on a quarterly basis 545143

Hillyard Company, an office supplies specialty store, prepares its master budget on a quarterly basis. The following data have been assembled to assist in preparing the master budget for the first quarter:

  1. As of December 31, (the end of the prior quarter), the company’s general ledger showed the following account balances:

Cash $48,000 (debit)
Accounts receivable $224,000 (debit)
Inventory $60,000 (debit)
Buildings and equipment, net $370,000 (debit)
Accounts payable $93,000 (credit)
Capital stock $500,000 (credit)
Retained earnings $109,000 (credit)

  1. Actual sales for December and budgeted sales for the next four months are as follows: December $280,000, January $400,000, February $600,000, March $300,000 and April $200,000.
  2. Sales are 20% for cash and 80% on credit. All payments on credit sales are collected in the month following sale. The accounts receivable at December 31 are a result of December credit sales.
  3. The company’s gross margin is 40% of sales. (In other words, cost of goods sold is 60% of sales.)
  4. Monthly expenses are budgeted as follows: salaries and wages, $27,000 per month; advertising, $70,000 per month; shipping, 5% of sales; other expenses, 3% of sales. Depreciation, including depreciation on new assets acquired during the quarter, will be $42,000 per quarter.
  5. Each month’s ending inventory should equal 25% of the following month’s cost of goods sold.
  6. One half of the month’s inventory purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid in the following month.
  7. During February, the company will purchase a new copy machine for $1,700 cash. During March, other equipment will be purchased for cash at a cost of $84,500.
  8. During January, the company will declare and pay $45,000 in cash dividends.
  9. Management wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $30,000. The company has an agreement with a local bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. The company would, as far as it is able, repay the loan plus accumulated interest at the end of the quarter.

Attachments:

production of seagren industries inc 545145

Seagren Industries Inc. manufactures in separate processes furniture for homes. In each process, materials are entered at the beginning, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the first process in making two products in two different manufacturing plants are as follows.

Cutting Department

Production Data—July

Plant 1 T12-Tables

Plant 2 C10-Chairs

Work in process units, July 1

–0–

–0–

Units started into production

19,000

16,000

Work in process units, July 31

3,000

500

Work in process percent complete

60

80

Cost Data—July

Work in process, July 1

–0–??$

–0–??$

Materials

380,000

288,000

Labor

234,200

110,000

Overhead

104,000

96,700

Total

$718,200

$494,700

Instructions

(a)

For each plant:

1.

Compute the physical units of production.

2.

Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.

3.

Determine the unit costs of production.

4.

Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.

(b)

Prepare the production cost report for Plant 1 for July 2012.

as auditor for banquo amp associates you have been assigned to check duncan corporat 545201

As auditor for Banquo & Associates, you have been assigned to check Duncan Corporation’s computation of earnings per share for the current year. The controller, Mac Beth, has supplied you with the following computations.

Net income $3,374,960
Common shares issued and outstanding:

Beginning of year

1,285,000

End of year

1,200,000

Average

1,242,500
Earnings per share:
$3,374,960 = $2.72 per share
1,242,500

You have developed the following additional information.

  1. There are no other equity securities in addition to the common shares.
  2. There are no options or warrants outstanding to purchase common shares.
  3. There are no convertible debt securities.
  4. Activity in common shares during the year was as follows.
Outstanding, Jan. 1 1,285,000
Treasury shares acquired, Oct. 1 1,035,000
Shares reissued, Dec. 1 1,165,000
Outstanding, Dec. 31 1,200,000

Questions:

taxation 545222

ACT B415F (Jan 2014) TMA 1 You are an independent tax advisor and one of your clients, Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited, has provided you with the following information. Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited was incorporated in Hong Kong in 2002. The company was formed to take over the partnership business owned by the Cheung’s brothers, Albert Cheung and Bernard Cheung. Albert and Bernard each owns 40% of the shares of the company and the remaining 20% of the shares are owned by their sister, Crystal.

Document Preview:

B415F Taxation II Assignment 2 (January 2014 Term) Due Date: 31 March, 2014 For tax rates and personal allowances, please refer to your textbook or Inland Revenue Department’s website. Answer ALL of the following questions. Marks will be awarded for logical arguments, appropriate presentation, and original explanation in your answers. Outline where appropriate relevant tax provisions, guidelines published by the Inland Revenue Department and / or relevant tax cases in support. Question 1 (35 marks) You are an independent tax advisor and one of your clients, Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited, has provided you with the following information. Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited was incorporated in Hong Kong in 2002. The company was formed to take over the partnership business owned by the Cheung’s brothers, Albert Cheung and Bernard Cheung. Albert and Bernard each owns 40% of the shares of the company and the remaining 20% of the shares are owned by their sister, Crystal. The original Board of Directors consists of Cheung’s brothers and their sister, Crystal. In addition to being directors of the company, Albert and Bernard are responsible for the running of the company. Albert is the managing director and is responsible for the sales operations. Bernard holds the title of finance manager and is in charge of the compa ’s finance. Their brother-in-law, Dickson Tang is employed as the production manager to the manufacturing operations. The company has been profitable with the annual turnover over HK$20 million. The profits of the company have been mainly derived from exporting toys to overseas countries. The manufacturing operations had been carried out in Hong until 31 July 2012 when the company moved its manufacturing operations to Mainland China. The manufacturing operations in China began in August 2012. Although the manufacturing operations are now in China, the company maintains its purchase, sales and other…

Attachments:

the trial balance of james appliance company is given make further entries 545258

Attached is the trial balance of James Appliance Company, for the year ended December 31, 2012. It isn’t the final trial balance, but it does contain all the adjustments
except those relevant to the investments held by the company. JAMES’ POLICY IS TO ACCRUE INCOME GENERATED FROM CASH DIVIDENDS ON THE DECLARATION
DATE.
A. No entries had been made to the Investment account during 2012. The detail to support the balance on your trial balance follows:
Cost FV (per share) as of 12/31/2012
100 shares of $4 ABD Corp. Preferred Stock $4,450 43
300 shares of Banana Tabulators, Inc. Common 9,450 24
Five $1000 bonds of HAL Corporation (8% coupon rate, interest 5,000 96
payable 6/1 and 12/1, maturity 12/1/2020)
100 shares Consolidated Bell Common 7,400 70
1,000 shares of Red & Black Transportation Corp. Common Stock 25,000 23.5
Total $51,300
The ABD preferred stock was purchased for cash income. This stock is readily marketable, but there is no intention of selling this stock any time in the near future.
ABD declared the full stated dividend on December 15, 2012 and it is due to be paid January 16, 2013. James Corp. owns 40% of ABD’s preferred stock, and ABD’s
net income for the year was $24,000
The Banana Tabulator stock was originally purchased 3 years ago with the expectation that it would grow sharply in value; the recent fall in the fair value of the stock is
due, according to James’ stock advisor, on a temporary depression in the tabulator market so its value is expected to eventually recover. It is now the intention of the
owner to hold on to this security for probably two or three more years. No cash dividends were declared or paid this year by Banana Tabulator.
The HAL bonds and the Consolidated Bell common stock were both purchased in 2010 with excess cash and to generate income. If additional cash is needed, it is
likely that either security could be sold in the next year.
Interest was paid from the HAL bonds on schedule.
Consolidated Bell declared a stock dividend and distributed 20 shares of common stock to James on September 15, 2012, when the fair market value of the common
stock was at 72. On October 2, the corporation sold the 20 shares of stock from the stock dividend at 71.50 and total commissions from the sale were $30.
Consolidated Bell declared a cash dividend of $6.00 per share on December 5, 2012, which is payable January 7, 2013.
Red & Black Transportation, Inc. provides the majority of the transportation for James’ inventory and the owner sits on R&B’s Board of Directors. R&B has currently
issued and outstanding 3,000 shares of voting common stock and James paid book value for the stock. This year R&B reported $42,000 in net income. On November
10 it declared a total of $12,000 in cash dividends to all its shareholders. Date of record was November 30 and date of payment was December 9, 2012. There is no
intention on the part of management to sell any of this stock in the foreseeable future.
B. These new securities were purchased in 2012:
1 On September 1, 2012, James purchased 1,600 shares of Fermi Wholesale Television Incorporated, which is one of James’ major suppliers. At the time of
the purchase, Fermi had issued and outstanding 6,400 shares of voting common stock. The business paid $25.25 per share. Total commissions on the
purchase were $200. Fermi’s total net loss for 2012 was $27,000, which was incurred evenly throughout the year. Fermi declared no dividends during 2012
and the fair value of the stock was 24 by the end of the year. There is no intention to sell any Fermi common stock any time soon.
2 On June 1, 2012, the company purchased five $1,000 bonds issued by the City School District. These bonds were purchased at 105 plus purchased interest.
$100 in commissions and taxes were paid on the trade. The contract rate on these bonds is 6% with interest payable on 4/1 and 10/1; these bonds mature
4/1/2017. It is the intention of management to hold these bonds until they mature. On December 31, 2012, these bonds had a fair value of 104. James uses Straight-Line (SL) method to amortize premiums and discounts on its debt investments when appropriate.
3 On October 15, 2012, 100 shares of Granny Smith common stock were purchased at 35; commissions and taxes paid on the transaction were $125. This stock
trades OTC and is regularly reported on NASDAQ. Management plans to sell its holding in Granny Smith to take advantage of short-term price increases that
management believes will occur in the first couple months of 2013. On November 30, when the stock was trading at 50, it split 2:1. James sold 50 shares of the
shares it received from the split at 24.25 on December 28, 2012. The fees to transact the sale were $75. A cash dividend of $1 a share was declared December
20, 2012, with a date of record of January 12, 2013, and a date of distribution of January 23, 2013. On December 31, 2012, the fair value of Granny Smith was
26
C. The prepaid expenses include a $3,000 annual premium paid for a whole-life insurance policy on the life of the owner of the corporation with the
corporation as beneficiary. The policy was dated March 1, 2012, and, according to the information from the insurance company, as of December 31, 2012,
the investment portion of the $3,000 premium was $1,000. This is the first year the insurance policy has been in effect.

Attachments:

ace inc produces electronic components for sale to manufacturers of radios televisio 545276

“Concepts for Analysis” CA24-2 in Ch. 24 of Intermediate Accounting.

(the first 3 items only.)

(disclosures Required in Various Situations)

Ace Inc. produces electronic components for sale to manufacturers of radios, television sets, and digital sound systems. In connection with her examination of Ace’s financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2013, Gloria Rodd, CPA, completed field work 2 weeks ago. Ms. Rodd now is evaluating the significance of the following items prior to preparing her auditor’s report. Except as noted, none of these items have been disclosed in the financial statements or notes.

Item 1

A 10-year loan agreement, which the company entered into 3 years ago, provides that dividend payments may not exceed net income earned after taxes subsequent to the date of the agreement. The balance of retained earnings at the date of the loan agreement was $420,000. From that date through December 31, 2013, net income after taxes has totaled $570,000 and cash dividends have totaled $320,000. On the basis of these data, the staff auditor assigned to this review concluded that there was no retained earnings restriction at December 31, 2013.

Item 2

Recently Ace interrupted its policy of paying cash dividends quarterly to its stockholders. Dividends were paid regularly through 2012, discontinued for all of 2013 to finance purchase of equipment for the company’s new plant, and resumed in the first quarter of 2014. In the annual report, dividend policy is to be discussed in the president’s letter to stockholders.

Item 3

A major electronics firm has introduced a line of products that will compete directly with Ace’s primary line, now being produced in the specially designed new plant. Because of manufacturing innovations, the competitor’s line will be of comparable quality but priced 50% below Ace’s line. The competitor announced its new line during the week following completion of field work. Ms. Rodd read the announcement in the newspaper and discussed the situation by telephone with Ace executives. Ace will meet the lower prices that are high enough to cover variable manufacturing and selling expenses but will permit recovery of only a portion of fixed costs.

Item 4

The company’s new manufacturing plant building, which cost $2,400,000 and has an estimated life of 25 years, is leased from Wichita National Bank at an annual rental of $600,000. The company is obligated to pay property taxes, insurance, and maintenance. At the conclusion of its 10-year noncancelable lease, the company has the option of purchasing the property for $1. In Ace’s income statement, the rental payment is reported on a separate line.

Instructions

For each of the above items, discuss any additional disclosures in the financial statements and notes that the auditor should recommend to her client. (The cumulative effect of the four items should not be considered.)

Attachments:

green rider makes three types of electric scooters the company s total fixed cost is 545365

Green Rider makes three types of electric scooters. The company?s total fixed cost is $1,080,000,000. Selling prices, variable cost, and sales percentages for each type of scooter follow:

Selling Price Variable Cost

Percent of

Total Unit Sales

Mod $2,200 $1,900 30

Rad 3,700 3,000 50

X-treme 6,000 5,000 20

a. What is Green Rider?s break-even point in units and sales dollars?

b. If the company has an after-tax income goal of $1 billion and the tax rate is 50 percent,

how many units of each type of scooter must be sold for the goal to be reached

at the current sales mix?

c. Assume the sales mix shifts to 50 percent Mod, 40 percent Rad, and 10 percent

X-treme. How does this change affect your answer to (a)?

d. If Green Rider sold more X-treme scooters and fewer Mod scooters, how would your answers to (a) and (b) change? No calculations are needed.

 

identify a set of criteria for evaluating accounting theories drawing on your 545410

Theories should be evaluated against a criteria for evaluating knowledge.

a) Identify a set of criteria for evaluating accounting theories. Drawing on your understanding of accounting as a system of measurement;

b) Apply the criteria from part a) to the historical cost approach to accounting measurement.

c) Explain whether you think historical cost accounting is a sound system of measurement.

Question 2 – 10 marks (1,000 words)

Subject Learning Outcome(s):Be able to compare and contrast the diverse perspectives which can be used to explain historically the development of accounting; Be able to engage in the accounting discourse including critical analysis of its reflexive role in society

a) Describe the key historical events that have shaped the development of accounting between 1900 – 2014.

b) How do these events support the notion accounting is socially constructed?

c) What arguments and evidence is there to suggest that accounting can influence society?

d) Which perspective do you agree with? Justify your position.

Marking Criteria

Question 1:

Criteria Fail Pass Credit Distinction/High Distinction Mark
Identification of a set criteria for evaluating theories
Application of criteria to historical cost accounting that draws on knowledge of accounting as a system of measurement
Criteria not identified or ineffective/incorrect criteria provided
No application of criteria. Answer limited to a general discussion of historical cost accounting with no reference to measurement theory
Some criteria provided but other relevant criteria missing.
Basic application of the some of the criteria to HCA. Response may also include a discussion of HCA with minimal reference to measurement concepts.
Most relevant criteria identified with some description of each.
Each criteria applied with some critical evaluation of HCA as a system of measurement.
All of the relevant criteria are clearly described.
Each criteria is used to critically evaluate HCA drawing on elements of measurement theory to support the answer.
/3
/3
Critical Capacity:Has the student thoroughly evaluated HCA as a system of measurement? Response provided no evidence of critical thought in relation to HCA as a system of measurement. Response limited to a list of pros and cons with minimal evidence of independent critical thinking. Response provides a clear evaluation of HCA as a system of measurement that is largely drawn from source material. Response provides a deep and critical analysis of HCA as a system of measurement and demonstrates ability to provide independent and original thought. /2
Academic Writing:
Is the answer easy to follow and understand?
Use of source material
Adherence to referencing guidelines
Poor grammar and expression. Very difficult to follow.
Weak use of resources, if at all. Inadequate or no evidence of reading.
No proper use of APA in-text referencing.
An adequate style, answer is structured satisfactorily.
Limited but appropriate source consultation and background reading.
Reference list provided, but not in proper format. Some in-text referencing provided but incorrect formatting.
Clear expression and structure.
Breadth of reading of appropriate sources.
Reference list and in-text referencing performed largely in accordance with the guidelines.
Advanced expression and clear communication. Answer is logically structured with arguments coherently developed and supported.
Broad use of sources going beyond prescribed materials.
Reference list included with correct adherence to referencing guidelines. Proper in-text referencing is provided.
/2

Question 2:

Criteria Fail Pass Credit Distinction/High Distinction Mark
Identification of the key historical events that have shaped accounting
Application and evaluation of the ‘socially constructed’ perspective of accounting history to the key events.
Application and evaluation of the ‘socially constructing’ perspective of accounting history to the key events.
No historical events, or most of the crucial events are not addressed
No clear application of the socially constructed perspective of history to the events identified.
No clear application of the socially constructing perspective of history to the events identified.
A basic chronology of events is provided with little discussion of significance to accounting.
Basic articulation and application of the socially constructed perspective with a few events being used to support the perspective. Limited evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective.
Basic articulation and application of the socially constructing perspective with very few events being used to support the perspective. Limited evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective.
Most of the key events are identified with a reasonable discussion of the relevance to accounting.
Clear application of the perspective to most of the events with some evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective of history.
Clear application of the perspective to most of the events with some evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective of history.
All of the key events that are identified, along with a clear discussion of the relevance of these events to accounting.
Each of the key events are applied to the socially constructing perspective, with the response demonstrating strong ability to evaluate the perspective of history.
Each of the key events are applied to the socially constructing perspective, with the response demonstrating a strong ability to evaluate the perspective of history.
/2
2/
/2
Critical Capacity:
Does the response demonstrate any critical evaluation of the perspectives used to interpret accounting history?
Response provides no evidence of critical thought in relation to the two perspectives of history. Some evidence of basic critical thought in relation to the two perspectives that is based on only one source. Response provides a clear analysis and evaluation of the two perspectives that draws on a variety of source material. Response provides a clear, deep and critical analysis of the two perspectives of history that draws on source material as well as the students own thoughts. /2
Academic Writing:
Is the answer easy to follow and understand?
Use of source material
Adherence to referencing guidelines
Poor grammar and expression. Very difficult to follow.
Weak use of resources, if at all. Inadequate or no evidence of reading.
No proper use of APA in-text referencing.
An adequate style, answer is structured satisfactorily.
Limited but appropriate source consultation and background reading.
Reference list provided, but not in proper format. Some in-text referencing provided but incorrect formatting.
Clear expression and structure.
Breadth of reading of appropriate sources.
Reference list and in-text referencing performed largely in accordance with the guidelines.
Advanced expression and clear communication. Answer is logically structured with arguments coherently developed and supported.
Broad use of sources going beyond prescribed materials.
Reference list included with correct adherence to referencing guidelines. Proper in-text referencing is provided.
/2

Attachments:

exam i problem 1 recapture of depreciation 20 t square corporation purchases nonresi 545467

Exam I Problem. 1 Recapture of Depreciation (20%) T-Square Corporation purchases nonresidential real property on May 1, 2000 for $650,000. Straight-line depreciation is taken in the amount of $223,611 before the property is sold on October 1, 2013 for $1,500,000. Required: Determine ordinary income under § 1250, ordinary income under § 291 and § 1231 gain. Conclude with a schedule showing how the recognized gain is accounted for. Use the 4 step method as illustrated in chapter 17 of your text. Exam I Problem.2 Consequence to Shareholder Sale or Exchange Treatment (20%) During the current year, Elm Corporation is liquidated and distributes its only asset, land, to Jimmy, the sole shareholder. On the date of distribution, the land has a basis of $200,000, a fair market value of $550,000, and is subject to a liability of $300,000. Jimmy, who takes the land subject to the liability, has a basis of $75,000 in the Elm stock. Required: Determine Jimmy’s Recognized Gain or Loss. Prepare a schedule showing your computation in good form. (Hint, all you need to do is label 5 lines with appropriate amounts that produce the correct amount.) Print Name:______________________________________________________________ Sign:___________________________________________________________________ Date:___________________________________________________ 12. Vinnie owns 100% of the stock of Lime Corporation. In the current year Vinnie transfers an installment obligation, tax basis of $150,000 and fair market value of $300,000, for additional stock in Lime worth $300,000. A. Vinnie recognizes no taxable gain on the transfer. B. Vinnie has a taxable gain of $150,000. C. Vinnie has a taxable gain of $300,000. D. Vinnie has a basis of $300,000 in the additional stock she received in Lime Corporation. E. None of the above. 15. Willace incorporates his business by transferring property with a basis of $200,000 for 200 shares of stock. The stock qualifies as § 1244 stock. Willace later gives 100 shares to his daughter, Louisa, when the stock was worth $400,000. Eventually the business fails, and the corporation becomes bankrupt in the current year. Willace files a joint return in the current year. Louisa files as a single person. With respect to the worthless stock: A. Willace has ordinary loss of $200,000. B. Louisa has an ordinary loss of $100,000. C. Willace has a capital loss of $100,000. D. Willace has ordinary loss of $100,000. E. None of the above.

Attachments:

need answers 545478

Question 2(15 marks)

A firm operates a process, the details of which for the period were as follows.There was no opening work-in-progress.During the period 8,250 units were received from the previous process at a value of $453,750, labour and overheads were $350,060 and material introduced was $24,750.At the end of the period, the closing work-in-progress was 1,600 units, which were 100% complete in respect of materials, and 60% complete in respect of labour and overheads.The balance of units were transferred to finished goods.

Requirements:

a)Calculate the number of equivalent units produced.

(3 marks)

b)Calculate the cost per equivalent unit.

(2 marks)

c)Prepare the process account

(7 marks)

d)Distinguish between joint products, and by-products, and briefly explain the difference, in accounting treatment between them

(3 marks)

(Total 15 marks).

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Question 3(10 marks)

The management of Springer plc is considering next year’s production and purchase budget.

One of the components produced by the company, which is incorporated into another product before being sold, has budgeted manufacturing costs as follows:

$

Direct Material14

Direct labour (4 hours at $3 per hour)12

Variable overhead (4 hours at $2 per hour)8

Fixed overheads (4 hours at $5 per hour)20

Total Cost$54per unit

Trigger plc has offered to supply the above component at a guaranteed price of $50 per unit.

Required:

a)Considering cost criteria only, advise management whether the above component should be purchased from Trigger plc.Any calculation should be shown and assumptions made, or aspects which may require further investigation should be clearly stated.

(6 marks)

b)Explain how your advice would be affected by the following:

“As a result of recent government legislation if Springer plc continues to manufacture this component, the company will incur additional inspection and testing expenses of $56,000 per annum, which are not included in the above budgeted manufacturing costs.”

(4 marks)

perfect pies pp ltd makes pies pastries and pizzas which it sells to retailers under 545493

Perfect Pies (PP)ltd makes pies, pastries and pizzas, which it sells to retailers under its own brand name and also supplies a major super market chain. It has two sites: the bakery and its head office at Darlington, and a distribution depot in Wolverhampton.

PP’s year end is 31 March 2013 and its accounts are required to be ready for publication by 31 May 2013. It is now 8th May and the final audit work is due to be completed by 16th May. The manager in charge of the audit is reviewing the audit file with a view to identifying any unresolved problems.

(You may assume an interim audit has been performed and that its results were satisfactory except for any deficiencies specifically mentioned in the case study.)

Document Preview:

AUDITING Coursework 2014 Study the case below and answer the questions that follow it. PERFECT PIES LTD Perfect Pies (PP)ltd makes pies, pastries and pizzas, which it sells to retailers under its own brand name and also supplies a major super market chain. It has two sites: the bakery and its head office at Darlington, and a distribution depot in Wolverhampton. PP’s year end is 31 March 2013 and its accounts are required to be ready for publication by 31 May 2013. It is now 8th May and the final audit work is due to be completed by 16th May. The manager in charge of the audit is reviewing the audit file with a view to identifying any unresolved problems. (You may assume an interim audit has been performed and that its results were satisfactory except for any deficiencies specifically mentioned in the case study.) 1.0 Summary of results 2013 2012 £000 £000 Turnover 3768 3477 Gross Profit 1240 1199 GP% 32.9% 34.5% Net Profit 308 289 Corporation Tax 62 57 Dividend 138 120 Fixed Assets 1940 1745 Stock 140 195 Debtors 712 597 Bank balances 43 51 Current Liabilities (433) (494) Net Assets 2402 2094 £000 £000 Share Capital 1840 1840 Reserves 562 254 Shareholders’ funds 2402 2094 1.1 Stock summary 2013 2012 £000 £000 At Darlington Finished products 43 61 Raw materials 41 48 Packing materials 38 47 At Wolverhampton: Finished products 18 39 Total 140 195 Notes: The following audit work has been carried out on the stock at Darlington: – attended physical stocktake held on 31 March and performed test counts; – ensured that material items of stock had been valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value; – ensured that none of the stock on hand at 31 March was damaged or out of condition The…

Attachments:

my assignment please watch vedio first and finish all questions please watch vedio 545539

please watch vedio first, and finish all questions.please watch vedio first, and finish all questions.

Document Preview:

??Practice Case Workbook Exercise 5: TeamCentral ?Champion Pharmaceuticals, Inc.?? Watch the TeamCentral demonstration video and take notes. Use the information provided in the video to answer the following questions and critical thinking task. Multiple Choice The components of TeamCentral include which of the following? Implementation Tracking Management Dashboards Suite Wide Reporting All of the above Which of the following must be completed in the EWP issue for the TeamCentral recommendation tracking process to operate effectively? Entity, Auditor, and Estimated Date of Completion Entity, Recommendation Title, and Estimated Date of Completion Recommendation Title, Recommendation Owner, and Estimated Date of Completion Recommendation Title, Entity, and Recommendation Owner TeamCentral Implementation Tracking can be accessed by: Auditors and Contacts Auditors only Contacts only None of the above The Survey Templates created in TeamCentral may be initiated in: TeamSchedule and TeamEWP TeamRisk & TeamCentral TeamTEC TeamEWP & TeamCentral The four preset TeamCentral Dashboards are: Risk Matrix, Recommendation Aging by Quarter, Audit Plan Status, and Milestones Audit Plan Status, Recommendation Aging, Project Milestones, and KPI Tracking Grid KPI Tracking Grid, Risk Matrix, Audit Plan Status, and Project Milestones None of the above True/False Implementation Tracking is the only view in TeamCentral to which both auditors and contacts can be granted access. True False Comments are not considered status updates and do not affect the status of the recommendation. True False Documentation cannot be attached to recommendation status updates. True False Discussion Questions How does TeamMate facilitate the audit follow-up process? Explain the benefits of contacts accessing TeamCentral for implementation tracking. Critical Thinking Task Using the Project Status by Type TeamCentral Dashboard graph in Appendix A, explain CPI’s internal audit plan project status at the…

Attachments:

using the methodology developed in this course document and illustrate the system 545567

Technology Assignment (parts 1 and 2)

In addition to assessing your performance in this course, an assignment will be used to assess the accounting program’s achievement of program outcomes for the Technology Fluency (TECH) Core Learning Area (CLA), as described in the university’s Program Assessment Plan.

The TECH CLA is defined as follows: Demonstrate an understanding of information technology broadly enough to apply technology productively to academic studies, work, and everyday life. The accounting program outcomes are defined as the ability to utilize technology to facilitate and enhance the accessing, reporting, and critical analysis of accounting information and processes to improve the timing, accuracy, and quality of enterprise decision making.

Part 1 of this project will be a written analysis of the requirements needed to automate a firm’s accounting information system. Part 2 of this project will be an executive summary of part 1, done in Microsoft PowerPoint.

Project Description

Learning objective: Demonstrate an understanding of essential accounting information systems, standards, and controls.

Assume you are a CPA with a small local practice. You have three professional employees, all relatively new CPAs, and an office manager. Your practice consists primarily of tax and write-up work. You have a new client—a homeowners’ association consisting of 150 homeowners—and you have contracted to perform the following services:

  1. billing: Each quarter, you will send each homeowner an itemized bill. Dues are $50 per month ($150 per quarter). Late fees are one percent per month of the unpaid balance. The bills will be mailed the first day of the last month of the quarter. Payment is due by the end of the quarter.
  1. collection: You rent a post office box and will receive the checks there. You are responsible for depositing the checks (you have opened a checking account for the association).
  1. payment: You will write about five checks a month. Besides your own monthly fee, there are monthly checks to a lawn maintenance company and a refuse removal company. There are also checks written for taxes, postage, supplies, and the like.
  1. reporting: You will be responsible for reporting on all collections, all checks written, outstanding homeowners’ balances, and quarterly financial statements.
  1. tax payment: You will be responsible for preparing the association’s federal and state tax returns.
  1. advising: You will be responsible for advising the board on an as-needed basis, especially in the areas of budgeting, purchasing, and investment.

You are hoping to expand this new area of your practice. You want to computerize the main functions of this system, concentrating especially on the billing and reporting aspects. Assume that the tax preparation, financial statements, and checking account will not be computerized initially; only the billing and collections portions will be computerized for now.

Required: Using the methodology developed in this course, document and illustrate the system (describe inputs, outputs, controls, and so on); don’t overlook manual functions. Consider what reports will be necessary; what kinds of documents/forms will be needed (such as invoices and receipts); and what the reports, documents, and forms will look like. Design at least three documents (reports and/or forms), and provide them as appendices.

Include a discussion about problem areas that could arise, assuming that you will eventually have many more clients and several more employees.

Attachments:

accounting 545583

Johnson Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.

Document Preview:

Johnson Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing. ??Current Machine??New Machine???Original purchase cost??$15,000???$25,000????Accumulated depreciation??$  6,000???_????Estimated annual operating costs??$25,000???$20,000????Useful life??5 years???5 years???? If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $6,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after 5 years.

Attachments:

abc corporation is a new company that buys and sells office supplies busines 545611

ABC Corporation is a new company that buys and sells office supplies. Business began on January 1, 2012.
Given on the first two tabs are ABC’s 12/31/12 Unadjusted Trial Balance and a list of needed adjustments.
1. Make all 12 adjustments on the “Adjusting Journal Entries” tab. Remember to include a description under each journal entry.
2. Post the adjustments to the general ledger on the “12-31-12 T-Accounts” tab. You may have to add T-Accounts for new accounts.
Link your T-Account entries to your Journal Entries. PLEASE NOTE THAT THE “BB” (BEGINNING BALANCES) FOR THE
T-ACCOUNTS REPRESENT THE BALANCES AS OF 12/1/12.
3. Once the 12/31/12 T-Accounts are complete, prepare the Adjusted Trial Balance. There may be some accounts with zero dollars, and you
may have to insert lines for new accounts. Link the Adjusted Trial Balance to your T-Accounts.
4. Use the Adjusted Trial Balance numbers to complete the Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings, and Balance Sheet.
For purposes of the Income Statement, prepare using the multiple step format and assume that Rent Revenue, any Unrealized Holding Gains/Losses,
Interest Expense, Interest Revenue, and any other Gains/Losses are NOT part of the major central ongoing operations of the company. For purposes
of the Balance Sheet, be sure to prepare a classifed Balance Sheet. Link your financial statements to your Adjusted Trial Balance.
If necessary, review financial statement preparation in Chapters 4 and 5 of your textbook for a quick refresher.
5. When the Financial Statements are complete, make the closing entries on the “Closing Entries” tab.
6. When closing entries have been made, post the entries to the general ledger on the “Post-Close T-Accounts” tab. Make sure your adjusting
journal entries are also on your After-Close T-Accounts. They will not automatically flow from tab-to-tab. (Helpful hint: After you have completed
and posted all of your adjusting entries, you can make a duplicate copy of your “12-31-12 T-Accounts” tab to replace the existing blank
“Post-Close T Accounts”when posting your closing entries.)
7. The final step is the Post-Closing Trial Balance, which will use the ending balances from the 1/1/13 T-Accounts.
8. Double-check your work. Here are a few things to check for:
-Adjusted Trial Balance: Make sure debit column and credit column total to the same figure at the bottom.
-Net income from the income statement will flow through to the Statement of Retained Earnings.
-Ending Retained Earnings from the Statement of Retained Earnings will flow through to the Balance Sheet.
-The Post-Closing Trial Balance should not have any revenue, expense, gain, or loss accounts.
-Check figure 1: Gross profit = $465,250.
-Check figure 2: Income before income taxes = $290,298.
-Check figure 3: Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity = $988,302.
-Check figure 4: Adjusted Trial Balance debit and credit columns total $1,542,219.
-Remember: Neatness matters in Financial Statements. Print or Print Preview before submitting to make sure your statements are neat.
Otherwise, management may send back to you for revision!
-Include your work at the bottom of each tab as needed.
-Ask questions prior to the day/night before the due date. The due date is clearly indicated on the course schedule.
-Utilize formulas and worksheet linkings in your financial statements to improve accuracy and save time in completing the assignment.
-Please take advantage of Excel by using formulas to calculate groups of numbers (i.e. “Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity”).
Final comments: This project is intended to make sure that you understand the accounting cycle as well as several key financial accounting transactions that you have
studied during your Intermediate Accounting series. It is very important to take the necessary time on this project to master these concepts. The concepts mastered in this
comprehensive problem will serve you well in the rest of your accounting curriculum.

Attachments:

1 please present an income statement for the latter year 2 please present a statemen 545621

1. Please present an Income Statement for the latter year. 2. Please present a Statement of Retained Earnings for the latter year. 3. Please present a Statement of Owners Equity for the latter year. 4. Please present a Statement of (Net) Cash Flow for the latter year. 5. Please perform a vertical analysis for the latter year Income Statement. Be sure to explain what your vertical analysis figures “tell us”. 6. Please perform a Balance Sheet vertical analysis for the years presented. Be sure to explain what your vertical analysis figures “tell us”. Then perform an appropriate horizontal analysis for the Balance Sheet figures as presented. 7. Please perform an analysis of the firm’s Profitablity, Asset Utilization, Liquidity, and Solvency for the latter year. Bemire-to-explain-what-yew 8. Please specify thetapital Structure for the years presented. Which of the years presented has the more optimal Capital Structure, and why ? What is the Weighted Average Cost of Capital for the latter year ?

Attachments:

this is a managment control system question 545628

has to be an australian standard assgiment

Document Preview:

Management Control Systems 301  Semester 1, 2014  Portfolio questions  Question One  F.T. Electronics Company  manufactures GPS devices  for the fishing  industry. In recent  months,  demand for the company’s products has fallen and, as a result, the firm’s production has been  reduced  significantly.  Many  unskilled  workers  have  been  temporarily  laid  off.  However,  top  management has made a decision not to lay off any highly skilled employees, such as inspectors and  machinery operators. Management was concerned that these highly skilled employees would easily  find new jobs elsewhere and not return when production returned to normal levels.   To  occupy  the  skilled  employees  during  the  production  cutback,  they  have  been …

Attachments:

solution for this case study 545701

solution for this case study

Document Preview:

Appendix B 1 The Daily Grind accT Twelve months ago, David opened a coffee shop, The the first year of operations. Fringe benefits for David, Daily Grind, in Mercy Hospital’s former gift shop. including health insurance and payroll taxes, accounted David was confident that he had the knowledge to make for an additional $10,000 of costs for the company. a success of this new business. He produced a quality Part-time employees work an average of 24 hours product that people needed, had priced the product each week and are paid $9 per hour. Payroll taxes and to be very competitive, and had a great location in a other costs average about $1.00 per hour for part- high-traffic area of the hospital. time employees. As shown in the following table, part- time employees worked from 656 hours to 727 hours each month: Material Costs Part-time Employee Month Labor Hours he Daily Grind uses a specialty brand of Kona January 722 hours Tcoffee beans costing $8 per pound. Each pound February 656 hours of coffee beans produces 256 ounces of coffee. Coffee March 727 hours is sold in three sizes: a small cup holding 8 ounces, a April 705 hours medium cup holding 12 ounces, and a large cup hold- ing 16 ounces. May 727 hours The cups needed to serve the coffee cost $.05 for June 705 hours the small cup, $.06 for the medium cup, and $.07 July 727 hours for the large cup. Lids cost $.03 per cup and are the August 727 hours same regardless of cup size. Sleeves cost an additional September 705 hours $.04 per cup. On average, sugar and cream cost $.02 per October 727 hours cup for small cups, $.03 for medium cups, and $.04 for large cups. November 705 hours December 727 hours Labor Costs he Daily Grind is open 12 hours each day, 7 days Overhead Costs Ta week (365 days per year), and is staffed with three employees during the morning shift (7:00–11:00), uring the first year of operations, the hospital two employees from 11:00 until 3:00, and three em- Dcharged…

Attachments:

seven months ago naib publishing company published its first book book n 544835

Decision to Eliminate an Unprofitable Product

P 8. Seven months ago, Naib Publishing Company published its first book (Book N). Since then, Naib has added four more books to its product list (Books S, Q, X, and H). Management is considering proposals for three more new books, but editorial capacity limits the company to producing only seven books annually. Before deciding which of the proposed books to publish, management wants you to evaluate the performance of its existing book list. Recent revenue and cost data are as follows:

Naib Publishing Company

Product Profit and Loss Summary

For the Year Ended December 31

Book N

Book S

Book Q

Book X

Book H

Company Totals

Sales

$813,800

$782,000

$634,200

$944,100

$707,000

$3,881,100

Less variable costs

Materials and binding

$325,520

$312,800

$190,260

$283,230

$212,100

$1,323,910

Editorial services

71,380

88,200

73,420

57,205

80,700

370,905

Author royalties

130,208

125,120

101,472

151,056

113,120

620,976

Sales commissions

162,760

156,400

95,130

141,615

141,400

697,305

Other selling costs

50,682

44,740

21,708

18,334

60,700

196,164

Total variable costs

$740,550

$727,260

$481,990

$651,440

$608,020

$3,209,260

Contribution margin

$ 73,250

$ 54,740

$152,210

$292,660

$ 98,980

$ 671,840

Less total fixed costs

97,250

81,240

89,610

100,460

82,680

451,240

Operating income loss

($ 24,000)

($ 26,500)

$ 62,600

$192,200

$ 16,300

$ 220,600

Direct fixed costs included

in total fixed costs above

$ 51,200

$ 65,100

$ 49,400

$ 69,100

$ 58,800

$ 293,600

Projected data for the three proposed new books are as follows: Book P, sales, $450,000, and contribution margin, $45,000; Book T, sales, $725,000, and contribution margin, ($25,200); Book R, sales, $913,200, and contribution margin, $115,500. Projected direct fixed costs are Book P, $5,000; Book T, $6,000; Book R, $40,000.

Required

1. Analyze the performance of the five books that the company is currently publishing.

2. Should Naib Publishing Company eliminate any of its present products? If so, which one(s)?

3. Identify the new books you would use to replace those eliminated. Justify your answer.

dr massy who specializes in internal medicine wants to analyze his sales mix to find 544836

Sales Mix Decision

P 9. Dr. Massy, who specializes in internal medicine, wants to analyze his sales mix to find out how the time of his physician assistant, Consuela Ortiz, can be used to generate the highest operating income.

Ortiz sees patients in Dr. Massy’s office, consults with patients over the telephone, and conducts a daily weight-loss support group attended by up to 50 patients. Statistics for the three services are as follows:

Office Visits

Phone Calls

Weight-Loss Support Group

Maximum number of patient

billings per day

20

40

50

Hours per billing

0.25

0.10

1.0

Billing rate

$50

$25

$10

Variable costs

$25

$12

$5

Ortiz works seven hours a day.

Required

1. Determine the best sales mix. Rank the services offered in order of their profitability.

2. Based on the ranking in requirement 1, how much time should Ortiz spend on each service in a day? (Hint: Remember to consider the maximum number of patient billings per day.) What would be the daily total contribution margin generated by Ortiz?

3. Dr. Massy knows that the daily 60-minute meeting of the weight-loss support group has 50 patients and should continue to be offered. If the new ranking for the services is (1) weight-loss support group, (2) phone calls, and (3) office visits, how much time should Ortiz spend on each service in a day? What would be the total contribution margin generated by Ortiz, assuming the weight-loss support group has the maximum number of patient billings?

4. Which ranking would you recommend? What additional amount of total contribution margin would be generated if your recommendation were to be accepted?

marketeers inc developed a promotional program for a large shopping center in sunset 544837

Sell or Process-Further Decision

P 10. Marketeers, Inc., developed a promotional program for a large shopping center in Sunset Living, Arizona, a few years ago. Having invested $360,000 in developing the original promotion campaign, the firm is ready to present its client with an add-on contract offer that includes the original promotion areas of (1) a TV advertising campaign, (2) a series of brochures for mass mailing, and (3) a special rotating BIG SALE schedule for 10 of the 28 tenants in the shopping center. Presented below are the revenue terms from the original contract with the shopping center and the offer for the add-on contract, which extends the original contract terms.

Original Contract Terms

Extended Contract Including

Add-On Terms

TV advertising campaign

$520,000

$ 580,000

Brochure series

210,000

230,000

Rotating BIG SALE schedule

170,000

190,000

Totals

$900,000

$1,000,000

Marketeers, Inc., estimates that the following additional costs will be incurred by extending the contract:

TV Campaign

Brochures

BIG SALE Schedule

Direct labor

$30,000

$ 9,000

$7,000

Variable overhead costs

22,000

14,000

6,000

Fixed overhead costs*

12,000

4,000

2,000

Required

1. Compute the costs that will be incurred for each part of the add-on portion of the contract.

2. Should Marketeers, Inc., offer the add-on contract, or should it ask for a final settlement check based on the original contract only? Defend your answer.

3. If management of the shopping center indicates that the terms of the add-on contract are negotiable, how should Marketeers, Inc., respond?

bob s burgers is in the fast food restaurant business 544838

Defining and Identifying Relevant Information

C 1. Bob’s Burgers is in the fast-food restaurant business. One component of its marketing strategy is to increase sales by expanding in foreign markets. It uses both financial and nonfinancial quantitative and qualitative information when deciding whether to open restaurants abroad. Bob’s decided to open a restaurant in Prague (Czech Republic) five years ago. The following information helped the managers in making that decision:

Financial Quantitative Information

Operating information

Estimated food, labor, and other operating costs (e.g., taxes, insurance, utilities, and supplies)

Estimated selling price for each food item

Capital investment information

Cost of land, building, equipment, and furniture

Financing options and amounts

Nonfinancial Quantitative Information

Estimated daily number of customers, hamburgers to be sold, and number of employees

High-traffic time periods

Income of people living in the area

Ratio of population to number of restaurants in the market area

Traffic counts in front of similar restaurants in the area

Qualitative Information

Government regulations, taxes, duties, tariffs, political involvement in business operations

Property ownership restrictions

Site visibility

Accessibility of store location

Training process for local managers

Hiring process for employees

Local customs and practices

Bob’s Burgers has hired you as a consultant and given you an income statement comparing the operating incomes of its five restaurants in Eastern Europe.

You have noticed that the Prague location is operating at a loss (including

Un-allocated fixed costs) and must decide whether to recommend closing that restaurant.

Review the information used in making the decision to open the restaurant.

Identify the types of information that would also be relevant in deciding whether to close the restaurant. What period or periods of time should be reviewed in making your decision? What additional information would be relevant in making your decision?

select two destinations for a one week vacation and gather information about them fr 544839

Identifying Relevant Decision Information

C 2. Select two destinations for a one-week vacation, and gather information about them from brochures, magazines, travel agents, the Internet, and friends. Then list the relevant quantitative and qualitative information in order of its importance to your decision. Analyze the information, and select a destination.

Which factors were most important to your decision? Why? Which were least important? Why? How would the process of identifying relevant information differ if the president of your company asked you to prepare a budget for the next training meeting, to be held at a location of your choice?

Your instructor will divide the class into groups and ask each group to discuss this case. One student from each group will summarize his or her group’s findings and debrief the entire class.

tilly issac is the assistant controller for tagwell corporation a leading producer o 544840

Ethics of a Make-or-Buy Decision

C 3. Tilly Issac is the assistant controller for Tagwell Corporation, a leading producer of home appliances. Her friend Zack Marsh is the supervisor of the firm’s Cookware Department. Marsh has the authority to decide whether parts are purchased from outside vendors or manufactured in his department. Issac recently conducted an internal audit of the parts being manufactured in the Cookware Department, including a comparison of the prices currently charged by vendors for similar parts. She found more than a dozen parts that could be purchased for less than they cost the company to produce. When she approached Marsh about the situation, he replied that if those parts were purchased from outside vendors, two automated machines would be idle for several hours a week. Increased machine idle time would have a negative effect on his performance evaluation and could reduce his yearly bonus. He reminded Issac that he was in charge of the decision to make or purchase those parts and asked her not to pursue the matter any further.

What should Issac do in this situation? Discuss her options.

metallica can opener company is a subsidiary of maltz appliances inc 544841

Special Order Decision

C 4. Metallica Can Opener Company is a subsidiary of Maltz Appliances, Inc. The can opener that Metallica produces is in strong demand. Sales this year are expected to be 1,000,000 units. Full plant capacity is 1,150,000 units, but 1,000,000 units are considered normal capacity for the current year. The following unit price and cost breakdown is applicable:

Per Unit

Sales price

$22.50

Less manufacturing costs

Direct materials

$ 6.00

Direct labor

2.50

Overhead, variable

3.50

Overhead, fixed

1.50

Total manufacturing costs

$13.50

Gross margin

$ 9.00

Less selling and administrative expenses

Selling, variable

$ 1.50

Selling, fixed

1.00

Administrative, fixed

1.25

Packaging, variable*

0.75

Total selling and administrative expenses

$ 4.50

Operating income

$ 4.50

*Three types of packaging are available: deluxe, $0.75 per unit; plain, $0.50 per unit; and bulk pack, $0.25 per unit.

During November, the company received three requests for special orders from large chain-store companies. Those orders are not part of the budgeted 1,000,000 units for this year, but company officials think that sufficient capacity exists for one order to be accepted. Orders received and their terms are as follows: Order 1, 75,000 can openers @ $20.00 per unit, deluxe packaging; Order 2, 90,000 can openers @ $18.00 per unit, plain packaging; Order 3, 125,000 can openers @ $15.75 per unit, bulk packaging.

Because the orders were placed directly with company officials, no variable selling costs will be incurred

1. Analyze the profitability of each of the three special orders.

2. Which special order should be accepted?

the management at transco company is considering a proposal to install a third produ 544842

Decision to Add a New Department

C 5. The management at Transco Company is considering a proposal to install a third production department in its factory building. With the company’s existing production setup, direct materials are processed through the Mixing Department to produce Materials A and B in equal proportions. The Shaping Department then processes Material A to yield Product C. Material B is sold as is at $20.25 per pound. Product C has a selling price of $100.00 per pound. There is a proposal to add a Baking Department to process Material B into Product D. It is expected that any quantity of Product D can be sold for $30.00 per pound.

Costs per pound under this proposal appear at the top of the next page.

Mixing Department

(Materials A and B)

Shaping Department

(Product C)

Baking Department

(Product D)

Costs from Mixing

Department

$52.80

$13.20

Direct materials

$20.00

Direct labor

6.00

9.00

3.50

Variable overhead

4.00

8.00

4.00

Fixed overhead

Traceable (direct,

avoidable)

2.25

2.25

1.80

Allocated (common,

unavoidable)

0.75

0.75

0.75

$33.00

$72.80

$23.25

1. If (a) sales and production levels are expected to remain constant in the foreseeable future and (b) there are no foreseeable alternative uses for the factory space, should Transco Company add a Baking Department and produce Product D, if 100,000 pounds of D can be sold? Show calculations of incremental revenues and costs to support your answer.

2. List at least two qualitative reasons why Transco Company may not want to install a Baking Department and produce Product D, even if this decision appears profitable.

3. List at least two qualitative reasons why Transco Company may want to install a Baking Department and produce Product D, even if it appears that this decision is unprofitable. (CMA adapted)

old denim ltd is an international clothing company that retails medium priced goods 544895

Pricing Policy Objectives

E 1. Old Denim, Ltd., is an international clothing company that retails medium priced goods. Its retail outlets are located throughout the United States, France, Germany, and Great Britain. Management wants to maintain the company’s image of providing the highest possible quality at the lowest possible prices. Selling prices are developed to draw customers away from competitors’ stores. First of- the-month sales are regularly held at all stores, and customers are accustomed to this practice. Company buyers are carefully trained to seek out quality goods at inexpensive prices. Sales are targeted to increase a minimum of 5 percent per year. All sales should yield a 15 percent return on assets. Sales personnel are expected to wear Old Denim clothing while working, and all personnel can purchase clothing at 10 percent above cost. All stores are required to be clean and well organized. Competitors’ prices are checked daily. Identify the pricing policy objectives of Old Denim, Ltd.

mobile battery features more than a dozen brands of batteries in many sizes 544896

External and Internal Pricing Factors

E 2. Mobile Battery features more than a dozen brands of batteries in many sizes. Two of the brands are Power Plus and Super Power. The following information about the two brands was obtained:

Power Plus

Super Power

Selling price:

Battery, installed

$120

$110

Cost per battery

100

70

As shown, selling prices include installation costs. Each battery costs $10 to install.

1. Compute each brand’s net unit selling price after installation.

2. Was cost the main consideration in setting those prices?

3. What other factors could have influenced those prices?

texaza a product design firm has just completed a contract to develop a wireless pho 544897

Traditional Economic Pricing Theory

E 3. Texaza, a product design firm, has just completed a contract to develop a wireless phone keychain. The phone keychain needs to be recharged only once a week and can be used worldwide. Initial fixed costs for this product are $4,000. The designers estimate that the product will break even at the $5,000/100-unit mark. Total revenues will again equal total costs at the $25,000/900-unit point. Marginal cost is expected to equal marginal revenue when 550 units are sold.

1. Sketch total revenue and total cost curves for this product. Mark the vertical axis at each $5,000 increment and the horizontal axis at each 100-unit increment.

2. Based on your total revenue and total cost curves in 1, at what unit selling price will profits be maximized?

turley industries has just patented a new toothpaste called sparkle for lasting prot 544898

Price Determination

E 5. Turley Industries has just patented a new toothpaste called Sparkle for lasting protection against tooth decay. The company’s controller has developed the following annual information for use in price determination meetings:

Variable production costs

$ 900,000

Fixed overhead

500,000

Selling expenses

200,000

General and administrative expenses

125,000

Desired profit

375,000

Cost of assets employed

1,000,000

Annual demand for the product is expected to be 500,000 tubes. On average, the company now earns an 8 percent return on assets.

1. Compute the projected unit cost for one tube of Sparkle.

2. Using gross margin pricing, compute the markup percentage and selling price for one tube.

3. Using return on assets pricing, compute the unit price for one tube.

texas has just passed a law making it mandatory to have every head of cattle inspect 544899

Pricing a Service

E 6. Texas has just passed a law making it mandatory to have every head of cattle inspected at least once a year for a variety of communicable diseases. Big Springs Enterprises is considering entering this inspection business. After extensive studies, Tex Autry, the owner of Big Springs Enterprises, has developed the following annual projections:

Direct service labor

$525,000

Variable service overhead costs

250,000

Fixed service overhead costs

225,000

Selling expenses

142,500

General and administrative expenses

157,500

Minimum desired profit

120,000

Cost of assets employed

750,000

Autry believes his company could inspect 250,000 head of cattle per year. On average, the company now earns a 16 percent return on assets.

1. Compute the projected cost of inspecting each head of cattle.

2. Determine the price to charge for inspecting each head of cattle. Use gross margin pricing.

3. Using return on assets pricing, compute the unit price to charge for this inspection service.

hometown bank is determining the price for its newest mini debit card 544900

Cost-based Pricing

E 7. Hometown Bank is determining the price for its newest mini debit card. The card can be used at any retail outlet with a swipe reader and is small enough to attach to a key chain—no PIN number or signature is required. Sigrid Olmo has developed the following annual information for use in upcoming price determination meetings:

Variable processing costs

$50 million

Fixed processing costs

36 million

Selling expenses (fixed)

10 million

General and administrative expenses (fixed)

4 million

Desired profit

3 billion

Cost of assets employed

10 billion

Annual usage is expected to be 10 billion transactions. On average, the company now earns a 6 percent return on assets.

1. Compute the projected cost of one transaction.

2. Using gross margin pricing, compute the price to charge per transaction.

3. Using return on assets pricing, compute the price to charge per transaction.

cruz s home remodeling service specializes in refurbishing older homes 544902

Time and Materials Pricing

E 9. Cruz’s Home Remodeling Service specializes in refurbishing older homes. Last week Cruz was asked to bid on a remodeling job for the town’s mayor. His list of materials and labor needed to complete the job is as follows:

Materials

Labor

Lumber

$ 6,500

Carpenter

$2,000

Nails/bolts

160

Floor specialist

1,300

Paint

1,420

Painter

1,500

Glass

2,890

Supervisor

1,420

Doors

730

Helpers

1,680

Hardware

600

Total

$7,900

Supplies

400

Total

$12,700

The company uses an overhead markup percentage for materials (60 percent) and for labor (40 percent). Those markups cover all operating costs. In addition, Cruz expects to make at least a 25 percent profit on all jobs. Compute the price that Cruz should quote for the mayor’s job.

suppose that ikea the swedish retailer is developing a new chair targeted to sell fo 544905

Target Costing

E 12. Suppose that Ikea, the Swedish retailer, is developing a new chair targeted to sell for less than $100 and that it is considering the two production alternatives that follow. Rank the alternatives, assuming that the company’s minimum desired profit is 30 percent over total production costs.

Alternative A

Alternative B

Direct material costs

$35

$20

Direct labor cost

1 hour at $12 per hour

2 hours at $8 per hour

Overhead costs

200 percent of direct

labor costs

$2 per dollar of direct

materials

management at fox valley machine tool co is considering the development of a new aut 544906

Target Costing E 13. Management at Fox Valley Machine Tool Co. is considering the development of a new automated drill press called the AutoDrill. After conferring with the design engineers, the controller”s staff assembled the following data about this product: Target selling price $6,000 per unit Desired profit percentage 20% of total unit cost Projected unit demand 4,500 units Activity-based cost rates Materials handling 5% of direct materials and purchased parts cost Engineering $300 per unit for Auto Drill Production and assembly $50 per machine hour Delivery $570 per unit for Auto Drill Marketing $400 per unit for Auto Drill Per-unit data Direct materials cost $1,620 Purchased parts cost $200 Manufacturing labor Hours 6 Hourly labor rate $14 Assembly labor Hours 10 Hourly labor rate $15 Machine hours 30 1. Compute the product”s target cost. 2. Compute the product”s projected unit cost based on the design engineers” estimates. 3. Should management produce and market the Auto Drill? Defend your answer.

mary janus is developing a transfer price for the housing section of an automatic po 544907

Transfer Price Comparison

E 14. Mary Janus is developing a transfer price for the housing section of an automatic pool-cleaning device. The housing for the device is made in Department A. It is then passed on to Department D, where final assembly occurs. Unit costs for the housing are as follows:

Cost Categories

Unit Costs

Direct materials

$5.20

Direct labor

2.30

Variable overhead

1.30

Fixed overhead

2.60

Profit markup, 20% of cost

?

An outside vendor can supply the housing for $13.00 per unit.

1. Develop a cost-plus transfer price for the housing.

2. What should the transfer price be? Support your answer.

patch watch company s seconds store offers refurbished or factory seconds time keepi 544908

Transfer Pricing

E 15. Patch Watch Company’s Seconds Store offers refurbished or factory seconds time-keeping products to the public at substantially reduced prices. The factory controller is developing transfer price alternatives to present to management to determine the best price to use when transferring products from the factory to the store, using the following data:

Unit price if sold to outside retailers

$25

Variable product cost per unit

10

Fixed product cost per unit

5

Seconds store profit markup

40%

1. What is the market-based transfer price alternative?

2. What is the minimum transfer price alternative?

3. Compute the cost-plus transfer price alternative assuming cost includes variable costs only.

ed vetz company specializes in the assembly of home appliances 544909

Pricing Decision

P 1. Ed Vetz & Company specializes in the assembly of home appliances. One division focuses most of its efforts on assembling a standard toaster oven. Projected costs of this product are as follows:

Cost Description

Budgeted Costs

Toaster casings

$ 960,000

Electrical components

2,244,000

Direct labor

3,648,000

Variable indirect assembly costs

780,000

Fixed indirect assembly costs

1,740,000

Selling expenses

1,536,000

General operating expenses

840,000

Administrative expenses

816,000

The projected costs are based on an estimated demand of 600,000 toaster ovens per year. The company wants to make a $1,260,000 profit. Competitors have just published their wholesale prices for the coming year. They range from $21.60 to $22.64 per oven. The Vetz toaster oven is known for its high quality and modern look. It competes with products at the top end of the price range. Even with its reputation, however, every $.20 increase above the top competitor’s price causes a drop in demand of 60,000 units below the original estimate. Assume that all price changes are in $.20 increments.

Required

1. Prepare a schedule of total projected costs and unit costs.

2. Use gross margin pricing to compute the anticipated selling price.

3. Based on competitors’ prices, what should the Vetz toaster sell for (assume a constant unit cost)? Defend your answer.

4. Would your pricing structure in requirement 3 change if the company had only limited competition at its quality level? If so, in what direction? Explain why.

snow inc makes three kinds of snowboards but it has a limited number of machine hour 544811

Sales Mix Decision

SE 8. Snow, Inc., makes three kinds of snowboards, but it has a limited number of machine hours available to make them. Product line data are as follows:

Wood

Plastic

Graphite

Machine hours per unit

1.25

1.0

1.5

Selling price per unit

$100

$120

$200

Variable manufacturing cost per unit

$45

$50

$100

Variable selling costs per unit

$15

$26

$36

In what order should the snowboard product lines be produced?

in an attempt to provide superb customer service richard v meats is considering the 544813

Sell or Process-Further Decision

SE 10. In an attempt to provide superb customer service, Richard V. Meats is considering the expansion of its product offerings from whole hams and turkeys to complete ham and turkey dinners. Each dinner would include a carved ham or turkey, two side dishes, and six rolls or cornbread. The accountant for Richard V. Meats has compiled the following relevant information:

Sales Revenue if No Additional

Sales Revenue

if Processed

Additional

Processing

Product

Service

Further

Costs

Ham

$30

$50

$15

Turkey

20

35

15

A cooked, uncarved ham costs Richard V. Meats $20 to produce, and a cooked, un-carved turkey costs $15 to prepare. Use incremental analysis to determine which products Richard V. Meats should offer.

max wayco the business manager for essey industries must select a new computer syste 544814

Incremental Analysis

E 1. Max Wayco, the business manager for Essey Industries, must select a new computer system for his assistant. Rental of Model A, which is similar to the model now being used, is $2,200 per year. Model B is a deluxe system that rents for $2,900 per year and will require a new desk for the assistant. The annual desk rental charge is $750. The assistant’s salary of $1,200 per month will not change. If Model B is rented, $280 in annual software training costs will be incurred. Model B has greater capacity and is expected to save $1,550 per year in part-time wages. Upkeep and operating costs will not differ between the two models.

1. Identify the relevant data in this problem.

2. Prepare an incremental analysis to aid the business manager in his decision.

the managers of lennox company must decide which of two mill blade grinders y or z t 544815

Incremental Analysis

E 2. The managers of Lennox Company must decide which of two mill blade grinders—Y or Z—to buy. The grinders have the same purchase price but different revenue and cost characteristics. The company currently owns Grinder X, which it bought three years ago for $15,000 and which has accumulated depreciation of $9,000 and a book value of $6,000. Grinder X is now obsolete as a result of advances in technology and cannot be sold or traded in.

The accountant has collected the following annual revenue and operating cost estimates for the two new machines:

Grinder Y

Grinder Z

Increase in revenue

$16,000

$20,000

Increase in annual operating costs

Direct materials

4,800

4,800

Direct labor

3,000

4,100

Variable overhead

2,100

3,000

Fixed overhead (depreciation included)

5,000

5,000

1. Identify the relevant data in this problem.

2. Prepare an incremental analysis to aid the managers in their decision.

3. Should the company purchase Grinder Y or Grinder Z?

antiquities ltd produces antique looking books 544818

Special Order Decision

E 5. Antiquities, Ltd., produces antique-looking books. Management has just received a request for a special order for 2,000 books and must decide whether to accept it. Venus Company, the purchaser, is offering to pay $25.00 per book, which includes $3.00 per book for shipping costs.

The variable production costs per book include $9.20 for direct materials, $4.00 for direct labor, and $3.80 for variable overhead. The current year’s production is 22,000 books, and maximum capacity is 25,000 books. Fixed costs, including overhead, advertising, and selling and administrative costs, total $80,000. The usual selling price is $25.00 per book. Shipping costs, which are additional, average $3.00 per book.

Determine whether Antiquities should accept the special order.

jens sporting goods inc manufactures a complete line of sporting equipment 544819

Special Order Decision

E 6. Jens Sporting Goods, Inc., manufactures a complete line of sporting equipment. Leiden Enterprises operates a large chain of discount stores. Leiden has approached Jens with a special order for 30,000 deluxe baseballs. Instead of being packaged separately, the balls are to be packed in boxes containing 500 baseballs each. Leiden is willing to pay $2.45 per baseball. Jens knows that annual expected production is 400,000 baseballs. It also knows that the current year’s production is 410,000 baseballs and that the maximum production capacity is 450,000 baseballs.

The following additional information is available:

Standard unit cost data for 400,000 baseballs

Direct materials

$ 0.90

Direct labor

0.60

Overhead:

Variable

0.50

Fixed ($100,000 ÷400,000)

0.25

Packaging per unit

0.30

Advertising ($60,000÷400,000)

0.15

Other fixed selling and administrative expenses

($120,000÷400,000)

0.30

Product unit cost

$ 3.00

Unit selling price

$ 4.00

Total estimated bulk packaging costs for special order

(30,000 baseballs: 500 per box)

$2,500

1. Should Jens Sporting Goods, Inc., accept Leiden’s offer?

2. What would be the minimum order price per baseball if Jens would like to earn a profit of $3,000 from the special order?

guld s glass inc has three divisions commercial nonprofit and residential 544821

Elimination of Unprofitable Segment Decision

E 8. Guld’s Glass, Inc., has three divisions: Commercial, Nonprofit, and Residential. The segmented income statement for last year revealed the following:

Guld’s Glass, Inc.

Divisional Profit Summary and Decision Analysis

Commercial

Division

Nonprofit

Division

Residential

Division

Total

Company

Sales

$290,000

$ 533,000

$837,000

$1,660,000

Less variable costs

147,000

435,000

472,000

1,054,000

Contribution margin

$143,000

$ 98,000

$365,000

$ 606,000

Less direct fixed costs

124,000

106,000

139,000

369,000

Segment margin

$ 19,000

($ 8,000)

$226,000

$ 237,000

Less common fixed costs

168,000

Operating income

$ 69,000

1. How will Guld’s Glass be affected if the Nonprofit Division is dropped?

2. Assume the elimination of the Nonprofit Division causes the sales of the Residential Division to decrease by 10 percent. How will Guld’s Glass be affected if the Nonprofit Division is dropped?

url services has two divisions basic web pages and custom web pages 544822

Elimination of Unprofitable Segment Decision

E 9. URL Services has two divisions: Basic Web Pages and Custom Web Pages. Ricky Vega, manager of Custom Web Pages, wants to find out why Custom Web Pages is not profitable. He has prepared the reports that appear on the next page.

1. How will URL Services be affected if the Custom Web Pages Division is eliminated?

2. How will URL Services be affected if the Design segment of Custom Web Pages is eliminated?

3. What should Ricky Vega do? What additional information would be helpful to him in making the decision?

URL Services

Segmented Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31

Basic

Web Pages (1,000 units)

Custom

Web Pages

(200 units)

Total

Company

Service revenue

$200,000

$ 150,000

$350,000

Less variable costs

Direct professional labor:

Direct professional labor:

$ 32,000

$ 80,000

$112,000

Direct professional labor:

30,000

4,000

34,000

maintain

15,000

36,000

51,000

Total variable costs

$ 77,000

$ 120,000

$197,000

Contribution margin

$123,000

$ 30,000

$153,000

Less direct fixed costs

Depreciation on computer

equipment

$ 6,000

$ 12,000

$ 18,000

Depreciation on servers

10,000

20,000

30,000

Total direct fixed costs

$ 16,000

$ 32,000

$ 48,000

Segment margin

$107,000

($ 2,000)

$105,000

Less common fixed costs

Building rent

$ 24,000

Supplies

1,000

Insurance

3,000

Telephone

1,500

Website rental

500

Total common fixed costs

$ 30,000

Operating income

$ 75,000

Custom Web Pages Division

URL Services

Segment Profitability Decision

Incremental Analysis

Design

Install

Maintain

Total

Service revenue

$60,000

$25,000

$65,000

$150,000

Less variable costs

80,000

4,000

36,000

120,000

Contribution margin

($20,000)

$21,000

$29,000

$ 30,000

Less direct fixed costs

6,000

13,000

13,000

32,000

Segment margin

($26,000)

$ 8,000

$16,000

($ 2,000)

ez inc manufactures two products that require both machine processing and labor oper 544823

Scarce Resource Usage

E 10. EZ, Inc. manufactures two products that require both machine processing and labor operations. Although there is unlimited demand for both products, EZ could devote all its capacities to a single product. Unit prices, cost data, and processing requirements follow.

Product E

Product Z

Unit selling price

$70

$230

Unit variable costs

$30

$90

Machine hours per unit

0.4

1.4

Labor hours per unit

2.0

6.0

Next year, the company will be limited to 160,000 machine hours and 120,000 labor hours. Fixed costs for the year are $1,500,000.

1. Compute the most profitable combination of products to be produced next year.

2. Prepare an income statement using the contribution margin format for the product volume computed in 1.

grady enterprises manufactures three computer games 544824

Sales Mix Decision

E 11. Grady Enterprises manufactures three computer games. They are called Rising Star, Ghost Master, and Road Warrior. The product line data are as follows:

Rising Star

Ghost Master

Road Warrior

Current unit sales demand

20,000

30,000

18,000

Machine hours per unit

2.0

1.0

2.5

Selling price per unit

$24.00

$18.00

$32.00

Unit variable manufacturing costs

$12.50

$10.00

$18.75

Unit variable selling costs

$6.50

$5.00

$6.25

The current production capacity is 110,000 machine hours.

1. Which computer game should be manufactured first? Which should be manufactured second? Which last?

2. How many of each type of computer game should be manufactured and sold to maximize the company’s contribution margin based on the current production activity of 110,000 machine hours? What is the total contribution margin for that combination?

web services a small company owned by simon orozco provides web page services to sma 544825

Sales Mix Decision

E 12. Web Services, a small company owned by Simon Orozco, provides web page services to small businesses. His services include the preparation of basic pages and custom pages.

The following summary of information will be used to make several short-run decisions for Web Services:

Basic Pages

Custom Pages

Service revenue per page

$200

$750

Variable costs per page

77

600

Contribution margin per page

$123

$150

Total annual fixed costs are $78,000.

One of Web Services’ two graphic designers, Taylor Campbell, is planning to take maternity leave in July and August. As a result, there will be only one designer available to perform the work, and design labor hours will be a resource constraint. Orozco plans to help the other designer complete the projected 160 orders for basic pages and 30 orders for custom pages for those two months. However, he wants to know which type of page Web Services should advertise and market. Although custom pages have a higher contribution margin per service, each custom page requires 12.5 design hours, whereas basic pages require only 1 design hour per page. On which page type should his company focus? Explain your answer.

h l beef products inc processes cattle 544826

Sell or Process-Further Decision

E 13. H & L Beef Products, Inc., processes cattle. It can sell the meat as sides of beef or process it further into final cuts (steaks, roasts, and hamburger). As part of the company’s strategic plan, management is looking for new markets for meat or meat by-products. The production process currently separates hides and bones for sale to other manufacturers. However, management is considering whether it would be profitable to process the hides into leather and the bones into fertilizer. The costs of the cattle and of transporting, hanging, storing, and cutting sides of beef are $125,000. The company’s accountant provided these data:

Product

Sales Revenue if Sold at Split-Off

Sales Revenue if Sold After

Further Processing

Additional

Processing Costs

Meat

$100,000

$200,000

$80,000

Bones

20,000

40,000

15,000

Hides

50,000

55,000

10,000

Should the products be processed further? Explain your answer.

six star pizza manufactures frozen pizzas and calzones and sells them for 4 each it 544827

Sell or Process-Further Decision

E 14. Six Star Pizza manufactures frozen pizzas and calzones and sells them for $4 each. It is currently considering a proposal to manufacture and sell fully prepared products. The following relevant information has been gathered by management:

Product

Sales Revenue if No

Additional Processing

Sales Revenue if

Processed Further

Additional

Processing Costs

Pizza

$4

$ 8

$5

Calzone

4

10

5

Use incremental analysis to determine which products Six Star should offer.

stainless refrigerator company purchases ice makers and installs them in its product 544828

Outsourcing Decision

P 1. Stainless Refrigerator Company purchases ice makers and installs them in its products. The ice makers cost $138 per case, and each case contains 12 ice makers. The supplier recently gave advance notice that the price will rise by 50 percent immediately. Stainless Refrigerator Company has idle equipment that with only a few minor changes could be used to produce similar ice makers.

Cost estimates have been prepared under the assumption that the company could make the product itself. Direct materials would cost $100.80 per 12 ice makers. Direct labor required would be 10 minutes per ice maker at a labor rate of $18.00 per hour. Variable overhead would be $4.60 per ice maker. Fixed overhead, which would be incurred under either decision alternative, would be $32,420 a year for depreciation and $234,000 a year for other costs. Production and usage are estimated at 75,000 ice makers a year. (Assume that any idle equipment cannot be used for any other purpose.)

Required

1. Prepare an incremental analysis to determine whether the ice makers should be made within the company or purchased from the outside supplier at the higher price.

2. Compute the variable unit cost to (a) make one ice maker and (b) buy one ice maker.

on march 26 sinker industries received a special order request for 120 ten foot alum 544829

Special Order Decision

P 2. On March 26, Sinker Industries received a special order request for 120 ten-foot aluminum fishing boats. Operating on a fiscal year ending May 31, the company already has orders that will allow it to produce at budget levels for the period. However, extra capacity exists to produce the 120 additional boats. The terms of the special order call for a selling price of $675 per boat, and the customer will pay all shipping costs. No sales personnel were involved in soliciting the order.

The ten-foot fishing boat has the following cost estimates: direct materials, aluminum, two 4

8 sheets at $155 per sheet; direct labor, 14 hours at $15.00 per hour; variable overhead, $7.25 per direct labor hour; fixed overhead, $4.50 per direct labor hour; variable selling expenses, $46.50 per boat; and variable shipping expenses, $57.50 per boat.

Required

1. Prepare an analysis for the management of Sinker Industries to use in deciding whether to accept or reject the special order. What decision should be made?

2. To make an $8,000 profit on this order, what would be the lowest possible price that Sinker Industries could charge per boat?

sports inc is a nationwide distributor of sporting equipment 544830

Segment Profitability Decision

P 3. Sports, Inc., is a nationwide distributor of sporting equipment. The corporate president, Wesley Coldwell, is dissatisfied with corporate operating results, particularly those of the Spring Branch, and has asked the controller for more information. The controller prepared the following segmented income statement (in thousands of dollars) for the Spring Branch:

Sports, Inc., Spring Branch

Segmented Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31

(Amounts in Thousands)

Football Line

Baseball Line

Basketball Line

Spring Branch

Sales

$3,500

$2,500

$2,059

$8,059

Less variable costs

2,900

2,395

1,800

7,095

Contribution margin

$ 600

$ 105

$ 259

$ 964

Less direct fixed costs

300

150

159

609

Segment margin

$ 300

($ 45)

$ 100

$ 355

Less common fixed costs

450

Operating income (loss)

($ 95)

Coldwell is considering adding a new product line, Kite Surfing. The controller estimates that adding this line to the Spring Branch will increase sales by $300,000, variable costs by $150,000, and direct fixed costs by $20,000. The new product line will have no effect on common fixed costs.

Required

1. How will operating income be affected if the Baseball line is dropped?

2. How will operating income be affected if the Baseball line is kept and a Kite Surfing line is added?

3. If the Baseball line is dropped and the Kite Surfing line is added, sales of the Football line will decrease by 10 percent and sales of the Basketball line will decrease by 5 percent. How will those changes affect operating income?

4. What decision do you recommend? Explain.

management at generic chemical company is evaluating its product mix in an attempt t 544831

Sales Mix Decision

P 4. Management at Generic Chemical Company is evaluating its product mix in an attempt to maximize profits. For the past two years, Generic has produced four products, and all have large markets in which to expand market share. Heinz Bexer, Generic’s controller, has gathered data from current operations and wants you to analyze them for him. Sales and operating data are as follows:

Product AZ1

Product BY7

Product CX5

Product DW9

Variable production costs

$71,000

$91,000

$91,920

$97,440

Variable selling costs

$10,200

$5,400

$12,480

$30,160

Fixed production costs

$20,400

$21,600

$29,120

$18,480

Fixed administrative costs

$3,400

$5,400

$6,240

$10,080

Total sales

$122,000

$136,000

$156,400

$161,200

Units produced and sold

85,000

45,000

26,000

14,000

Machine hours used*

17,000

18,000

20,800

16,800

Required

1. Compute the machine hours needed to produce one unit of each product.

2. Determine the contribution margin per machine hour for each product.

3. Which product line(s) should be targeted for market share expansion?

bagels inc produces and sells 20 types of bagels by the dozen 544832

Sell or Process-Further Decision

P 5. Bagels, Inc., produces and sells 20 types of bagels by the dozen. Bagels are priced at $6.00 per dozen (or $0.50 each) and cost $0.20 per unit to produce. The company is considering processing the bagels further into two products: bagels with cream cheese and bagel sandwiches. It would cost an additional $0.50 per unit to produce bagels with cream cheese, and the new selling price would be $2.50 each. It would cost an additional $1.00 per sandwich to produce bagel sandwiches, and the new selling price would be $3.50 each.

Required

1. Identify the relevant per unit costs and revenues for the alternatives. Are there any sunk costs?

2. Based on the information in requirement 1, should Bagels, Inc., expand its product offerings?

3. Suppose that Bagels, Inc., did expand its product line to include bagels with cream cheese and bagel sandwiches. Based on customer feedback, the company determined that it could further process those two products into bagels with cream cheese and fruit and bagel sandwiches with cheese. The company’s accountant compiled the following information:

Product

(per unit)

Sales Revenue

if Sold with No

Further Processing

Sales Revenue

if Processed

Further

Additional

Processing

Costs

Bagels with

cream cheese

$2.50

$3.50

Fruit: $1.00

Bagel sandwiches

$3.50

$4.50

Cheese: $0.50

Perform an incremental analysis to determine if Bagels, Inc., should process its products further. Explain your findings.

three brothers restaurant purchases cheesecakes and offers them as dessert items on 544833

Outsourcing Decision

P 6. Three Brothers Restaurant purchases cheesecakes and offers them as dessert items on its menu. The cheesecakes cost $24 each, and a cake contains 8 pieces. The supplier recently gave advance notice that the price will rise by 20 percent immediately. Three Brothers Restaurant has idle equipment that with only a few minor changes could be used to produce similar cheesecakes.

Cost estimates have been prepared under the assumption that the company could make the product itself. Direct materials would cost $7.00 per cheesecake. Direct labor required would be 0.5 hour per cheesecake at a labor rate of $24.00 per hour. Variable overhead would be $9.00 per cheesecake. Fixed overhead, which would be incurred under either decision alternative, would be $35,200 a year for depreciation and $230,000 a year for other costs. Production and usage are estimated at 3,600 cheesecakes a year. (Assume that any idle equipment cannot be used for any other purpose.)

Required

1. Prepare an incremental analysis to determine whether the cheesecakes should be made within the company or purchased from the outside supplier at the higher price.

2. Compute the variable unit cost to (a) make one cheesecake and (b) buy one cheesecake.

keystone resorts ltd has approached crystal printers inc with a special order to pro 544834

Special Order Decision

P 7. Keystone Resorts, Ltd., has approached Crystal Printers, Inc., with a special order to produce 300,000 two-page brochures. Most of Crystal’s work consists of recurring short-run orders. Keystone Resorts is offering a one-time order, and Crystal has the capacity to handle the order over a two-month period. The management of Keystone Resorts has stated that the company would be unwilling to pay more than $48 per 1,000 brochures. Crystal Printers’ controller assembled the following cost data for this decision analysis: Direct materials (paper) would be $26.80 per 1,000 brochures; direct labor costs would be $6.80 per 1,000 brochures; direct materials (ink) would be $4.40 per 1,000 brochures; variable production overhead would be $6.20 per 1,000 brochures; machine maintenance (fixed cost) is $1.00 per direct labor dollar. Other fixed production overhead amounts to $2.40 per direct labor dollar. Variable packing costs would be $4.30 per 1,000 brochures. Also, the share of general and administrative expenses (fixed costs) to be allocated would be $5.25 per direct labor dollar.

Required

1. Prepare an analysis for Crystal Printers’ management to use in deciding whether to accept or reject Keystone Resorts’ offer. What decision should be made?

2. What is the lowest possible price Crystal Printers can charge per thousand and still make a $6,000 profit on the order?

marc company assembles products from a group of interconnecting parts 544806

Outsourcing Decision

SE 3. Marc Company assembles products from a group of interconnecting parts. The company produces some of the parts and buys some from outside vendors. The vendor for Part X has just increased its price by 35 percent, to $10 per unit for the first 5,000 units and $9 per additional unit ordered each year. The company uses 7,500 units of Part X each year. Unit costs if the company makes the part are as follows:

Direct materials

$3.50

Direct labor

2.00

Variable overhead

4.00

Variable selling costs for the assembled product

3.75

Should Marc continue to purchase Part X or begin making it?

smith accounting services is considering a special order that it received from one o 544809

Special Order Decision

SE 6. Smith Accounting Services is considering a special order that it received from one of its corporate clients. The special order calls for Smith to prepare the individual tax returns of the corporation’s four-largest shareholders. The company has idle capacity that could be used to complete the special order. The following data have been gathered about the preparation of individual tax returns:

Materials cost per page

$1

Average hourly labor rate

$60

Standard hours per return

4

Standard pages per return

10

Variable overhead cost per page

$0.50

Fixed overhead cost per page

$0.50

Smith Accounting Services would be satisfied with a $40 gross profit per return. Compute the minimum bid price for the entire order.

normal corporation uses standard costing and is in the process of updating its direc 544774

Computing Standard Costs

E 2. Normal Corporation uses standard costing and is in the process of updating its direct materials and direct labor standards for Product 20B. The following data have been accumulated:

Direct materials In the previous period, 20,500 units were produced, and 32,800 square yards of direct materials at a cost of $122,344 were used to produce them.

Direct labor During the previous period, 57,400 direct labor hours were worked—34,850 hours on machine H and 22,550 hours on machine K. Machine H operators earned $9.40 per hour, and machine K operators earned $9.20 per hour last period. A new labor union contract calls for a 10 percent increase in labor rates for the coming period.

Using this information as the basis for the new standards, compute the direct materials quantity and price standards and the direct labor time and rate standards for each machine for the coming accounting period.

weather aerodynamics inc makes electronically equipped weather detecting balloons fo 544775

Computing a Standard Unit Cost

E 3. Weather Aerodynamics, Inc., makes electronically equipped weather-detecting balloons for university meteorology departments. Because of recent nationwide inflation, the company’s management has ordered that standard costs be recomputed. New direct materials price standards are $700 per set for electronic components and $14.00 per square meter for heavy-duty canvas. Direct materials quantity standards include one set of electronic components and 100 square meters of heavy-duty canvas per balloon. Direct labor time standards are 26 hours per balloon for the Electronics Department and 21 hours per balloon for the Assembly Department. Direct labor rate standards are $21 per hour for the Electronics Department and $18 per hour for the Assembly Department. Standard overhead rates are $16 per direct labor hour for the standard variable overhead rate and $12 per direct labor hour for the standard fixed overhead rate. Using these production standards, compute the standard unit cost of one weather balloon.

prefabricated houses are the specialty of affordable homes inc of corsicana texas 544788

Computing and Using Standard Costs

P 1. Prefabricated houses are the specialty of Affordable Homes, Inc., of Corsicana, Texas. Although Affordable Homes produces many models, the company’s best-selling model is the Welcome Home, a three-bedroom, 1,400-square-foot house with an impressive front entrance. Last year, the standard costs for the six basic direct materials used in manufacturing the entrance were as follows:

wood framing materials, $2,140; deluxe front door, $480; door hardware, $260; exterior siding, $710; electrical materials, $580; and interior finishing materials, $1,520. Three types of direct labor are used to build the entrance: carpenter, 30 hours at $12 per hour; door specialist, 4 hours at $14 per hour; and electrician, 8 hours at $16 per hour. Last year, the company used an overhead rate of 40 percent of total direct materials cost.

This year, the cost of wood framing materials is expected to increase by 20 percent, and a deluxe front door will cost $496. The cost of the door hardware will increase by 10 percent, and the cost of electrical materials will increase by 20 percent. Exterior siding cost should decrease by $16 per unit. The cost of interior finishing materials is expected to remain the same. The carpenter’s wages will increase by $1 per hour, and the door specialist’s wages should remain the same. The electrician’s wages will increase by $0.50 per hour. Finally, the overhead rate will decrease to 25 percent of total direct materials cost.

Required

1. Compute the total standard cost of direct materials per entrance for last year.

2. Using your answer to requirement 1, compute the total standard unit cost per entrance for last year.

3. Compute the total standard unit cost per entrance for this year.

home products company manufactures a complete line of kitchen glassware 544789

Preparing a Flexible Budget and Evaluating Performance

P 2. Home Products Company manufactures a complete line of kitchen glassware. The Beverage Division specializes in 12-ounce drinking glasses. Erin Fisher, the superintendent of the Beverage Division, asked the controller to prepare a report of her division’s performance in April. The following report was handed to her a few days later:

Budgeted

Actual

Difference Under

Cost Category

Costs*

Costs

(Over) Budget

(Variable Unit Cost)

$ 5,000

$ 4,975

$ 25

Direct materials ($0.10)

6,000

5,850

150

Direct labor ($0.12)

Variable overhead

Indirect labor ($0.03)

1,500

1,290

210

Supplies ($0.02)

1,000

960

40

Heat and power ($0.03)

1,500

1,325

175

Other ($0.05)

2,500

2,340

160

Fixed overhead

Heat and power

3,500

3,500

Depreciation

4,200

4,200

Insurance and taxes

1,200

1,200

Other

1,600

1,600

Totals

$28,000

$27,240

$760

In discussing the report with the controller, Fisher stated, “Profits have been decreasing in recent months, but this report indicates that our production process is operating efficiently.”

Required

1. Prepare a flexible budget for the Beverage Division using production levels of 45,000 units, 50,000 units, and 55,000 units.

2. What is the flexible budget formula?

3. Assume that the Beverage Division produced 46,560 units in April and that all fixed costs remained constant. Prepare a revised performance report similar to the one above, using actual production in units as a basis for the budget column.

4. Which report is more meaningful for performance evaluation, the original one above or the revised one? Why?

winners trophy company produces a variety of athletic awards most of them in the for 544790

Direct Materials and Direct Labor Variances

P 3. Winners Trophy Company produces a variety of athletic awards, most of them in the form of trophies. Its deluxe trophy stands 3 feet tall above the base. The company’s direct materials standards for the deluxe trophy include 1 pound of metal and 8 ounces of wood for the base. Standard prices for the year were $3.30 per pound of metal and $0.45 per ounce of wood. Direct labor standards for the deluxe trophy specify 0.2 hour of direct labor in the Molding Department and 0.4 hour in the Trimming/Finishing Department. Standard direct labor rates are $10.75 per hour in the Molding Department and $12.00 per hour in the Trimming/Finishing Department. During January, the company made 16,400 deluxe trophies. Actual production data are as follows:

Direct materials

Metal

16,640 pounds @ $3.25 per pound

Wood

131,400 ounces @ $0.48 per ounce

Direct labor

Molding

3,400 hours @ $10.60 per hour

Trimming Finishing

6,540 hours @ $12.10 per hour

Required

1. Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances for metal and wood.

2. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for the Molding and the Trimming/Finishing Departments.

the doormat division of clean sweep company produces all vinyl mats 544791

Direct Materials, Direct Labor, and Overhead Variances

P 4. The Doormat Division of Clean Sweep Company produces all-vinyl mats. Each doormat calls for 0.4 meter of vinyl material; the material should cost $3.10 per meter. Standard direct labor hours and labor cost per doormat are 0.2 hour and $1.84 (0.2 hour×$9.20 per hour), respectively. Currently, the division’s standard variable overhead rate is $1.50 per direct labor hour, and its standard fixed overhead rate is $0.80 per direct labor hour.

In August, the division manufactured and sold 60,000 doormats. During the month, it used 25,200 meters of vinyl material; the total cost of the material was $73,080. The total actual overhead costs for August were $28,200, of which $18,200 was variable. The total number of direct labor hours worked was 10,800, and the factory payroll for direct labor for the month was $95,040. Budgeted fixed overhead for August was $9,280. Normal monthly capacity for the year was set at 58,000 doormats.

Required

1. Compute for August the (a) direct materials price variance, (b) direct materials quantity variance, (c) direct labor rate variance, (d) direct labor efficiency variance, (e) variable overhead spending variance, (f) variable overhead efficiency variance, (g) fixed overhead budget variance, and (h) fixed overhead volume variance.

2. Prepare a performance report based on your variance analysis, and suggest possible causes for each variance

celine corporation s accountant left for vacation before completing the monthly cost 544792

Overhead Variances

P 5. Celine Corporation’s accountant left for vacation before completing the monthly cost variance report. George Celine, the corporation’s president, has asked you to complete the report. The following data are available to you (capacities are expressed in machine hours):

Actual machine hours

17,100

Standard machine hours allowed

17,500

Actual variable overhead

a

Standard variable overhead rate

$2.50

Variable overhead spending variance

$250 (F)

Variable overhead efficiency variance

b

Actual fixed overhead

c

Budgeted fixed overhead

$153,000

Fixed overhead budget variance

$1,300 (U)

Fixed overhead volume variance

$4,500 (F)

Normal capacity in machine hours

d

Standard fixed overhead rate

e

Fixed overhead applied

f

Required

Analyze the data and fill in the missing amounts.

cassen realtors inc specializes in the sale of residential properties 544794

Flexible Budgets and Performance Evaluation

P 7. Cassen Realtors, Inc., specializes in the sale of residential properties. It earns its revenue by charging a percentage of the sales price. Commissions for sales persons, listing agents, and listing companies are its main costs. Business has improved steadily over the last 10 years. Bonnie Cassen, the managing partner of Cassen Realtors, receives a report summarizing the company’s performance each year. The report for the most recent year appears below.

Cassen Realtors, Inc. Performance Report For the Year Ended December 31

Budgeted*

Actual†

Difference Under (Over) Budget

Total selling fees

$2,052,000

$2,242,200

($190,200)

Variable costs

Sales commissions

$1,102,950

$1,205,183

($102,233)

Automobile

36,000

39,560

(3,560)

Advertising

93,600

103,450

(9,850)

Home repairs

77,400

89,240

(11,840)

General overhead

656,100

716,970

(60,870)

$1,966,050

$2,154,403

($188,353)

Fixed costs

General overhead

60,000

62,300

(2,300)

Total costs

$2,026,050

$2,216,703

($190,653)

Operating income

$ 25,950

$ 25,497

$ 453

Required

1. Analyze the performance report. What does it say about the company’s performance? Is the performance report reliable? Explain your answer.

2. Calculate the budgeted selling fee and budgeted variable costs per home sale.

3. Prepare a performance report using a flexible budget based on the actual number of home sales.

4. Analyze the report you prepared in requirement 3. What does it say about the company’s performance? Is the report reliable? Explain your answer.

5. What recommendations would you make to improve the company’s performance next year?

fruit packaging company makes plastic baskets for food wholesalers 544795

Direct Materials and Direct Labor Variances

P 8. Fruit Packaging Company makes plastic baskets for food wholesalers. Each basket requires 0.8 gram of liquid plastic and 0.6 gram of an additive that includes color and hardening agents. The standard prices are $0.15 per gram of liquid plastic and $0.09 per gram of additive. Two kinds of direct labor—molding and trimming/packing—are required to make the baskets. The direct labor time and rate standards for a batch of 100 baskets are as follows: molding, 1.0 hour per batch at an hourly rate of $12; and trimming/packing, 1.2 hours per batch at $10 per hour.

During the year, the company produced 48,000 baskets. It used 38,600 grams of liquid plastic at a total cost of $5,404 and 28,950 grams of additive at $2,895. Actual direct labor included 480 hours for molding at a total cost of $5,664 and 560 hours for trimming/packing at $5,656.

Required

1. Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances for both the liquid plastic and the additive.

2. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for the molding and trimming packing processes.

last year biomed laboratories inc researched and perfected a cure for the common col 544796

Computing Variances and Evaluating Performance

P 9. Last year, Biomed Laboratories, Inc., researched and perfected a cure for the common cold. Called Cold-Gone, the product sells for $28.00 per package, each of which contains five tablets. Standard unit costs for this product were developed late last year for use this year. Per package, the standard unit costs were as follows:

chemical ingredients, 6 ounces at $1.00 per ounce; packaging, $1.20; direct labor, 0.8 hour at $14.00 per hour; standard variable overhead, $4.00 per direct labor hour; and standard fixed overhead, $6.40 per direct labor hour. Normal capacity is 46,875 units per week. In the first quarter of this year, demand for the new product rose well beyond the expectations of management. During those three months, the peak season for colds, the company produced and sold over 500,000 packages of Cold-Gone.

During the first week in April, it produced 50,000 packages but used materials for 50,200 packages costing $60,240. It also used 305,000 ounces of chemical ingredients costing $292,800. The total cost of direct labor for the week was $579,600; direct labor hours totaled 40,250. Total variable overhead was $161,100, and total fixed overhead was $242,000. Budgeted fixed overhead for the week was $240,000.

Required

1. Compute for the first week of April (a) all direct materials price variances, (b) all direct materials quantity variances, (c) the direct labor rate variance, (d) the direct labor efficiency variance, (e) the variable overhead spending variance, (f) the variable overhead efficiency variance, (g) the fixed overhead budget variance, and (h) the fixed overhead volume variance.

2. Prepare a performance report based on your variance analysis, and suggest possible causes for each significant variance.

meantime corporation s accountant left for vacation before completing the monthly co 544797

Overhead Variances

P 10. Meantime Corporation’s accountant left for vacation before completing the monthly cost variance report. Gillian Thornton, the corporation’s president, has asked you to complete the report. The following data are available to you:

Actual machine hours

20,100

Standard machine hours allowed

20,500

Actual variable overhead

a

Standard variable overhead rate

$2.00

Variable overhead spending variance

$200 (F)

Variable overhead efficiency variance

b

Actual fixed overhead

c

Budgeted fixed overhead

$153,000

Fixed overhead budget variance

$500 (U)

Fixed overhead volume variance

$750 (F)

Normal capacity in machine hours

d

Standard fixed overhead rate

e

Fixed overhead applied

f

Required

Analyze the data and fill in the missing amounts.

taylor industries inc develops standard costs for all its direct materials direct la 544798

An Ethical Question Involving Standard Costs

C 1. Taylor Industries, Inc., develops standard costs for all its direct materials, direct labor, and overhead costs. It uses these costs to price products, cost inventories, and evaluate the performance of purchasing and production managers. It updates the standard costs whenever costs, prices, or rates change by 3 percent or more. It also reviews and updates all standard costs each December; this practice provides current standards that are appropriate for use in valuing year-end inventories on the company’s financial statements.

Jody Elgar is in charge of standard costing at Taylor Industries. On November 30, she received a memo from the chief financial officer informing her that Taylor Industries was considering purchasing another company and that she and her staff were to postpone adjusting standard costs until late February; they were instead to concentrate on analyzing the proposed purchase.

In the third week of November, prices on more than 20 of Taylor Industries’ direct materials had been reduced by 10 percent or more, and a new labor union contract had reduced several categories of labor rates. A revision of standard costs in December would have resulted in lower valuations of inventories, higher cost of goods sold because of inventory write-downs, and lower net income for the year. Elgar believed that the company was facing an operating loss and that the assignment to evaluate the proposed purchase was designed primarily to keep her staff from revising and lowering standard costs. She questioned the chief financial officer about the assignment and reiterated the need for updating the standard costs, but she was again told to ignore the update and concentrate on the proposed purchase. Elgar and her staff were relieved of the evaluation assignment in early February. The purchase never materialized.

Assess Jody Elgar’s actions in this situation. Did she follow all ethical paths to solving the problem? What are the consequences of failing to adjust the standard costs?

domino s pizza is a major purveyor of home delivered pizzas 544799

Standard Costs and Variance Analysis

C 2. Domino’s Pizza is a major purveyor of home-delivered pizzas. Although customers can pick up their orders at the shops where Domino’s makes its pizzas, employees deliver most orders to customers’ homes, and they use their own cars to do it.

Specify what standard costing for a Domino’s pizza shop would entail. Where would you obtain the information for determining the cost standards? In what ways would the standards help in managing a pizza shop? If necessary to gain a better understanding of the operation, visit a pizzeria. (It does not have to be a Domino’s.)

Your instructor will divide the class into groups to discuss the case. Summarize your group’s discussion, and select one person from your group to report the group’s findings to the class.

troy corrente the president of forest valley spa is concerned about the spa s operat 544800

Preparing Performance Reports

C 3. Troy Corrente, the president of Forest Valley Spa, is concerned about the spa’s operating performance during March. He budgeted his costs carefully so that he could reduce the annual membership fees. He now needs to evaluate those costs to make sure that the spa’s profits are at the level he expected. He has asked you, the spa’s controller, to prepare a performance report on labor and overhead costs for March. He also wants you to analyze the report and suggest possible causes for any problems that you find. He wants to attend to any problems quickly, so he has asked you to submit your report as soon as possible. The following information for the month is available to you:

Variable costs

Budgeted Costs

Actual Costs

Operating labor

$10,880

$12,150

Utilities

2,880

3,360

Repairs and maintenance

5,760

7,140

Fixed overhead costs

Depreciation, equipment

2,600

2,680

Rent

3,280

3,280

Other

1,704

1,860

Totals

$27,104

$30,470

Corrente’s budget allows for eight employees to work 160 hours each per month. During March, nine employees worked an average of 150 hours each.

1. Answer the following questions:

a. Why are you preparing this performance report?

b. Who will use the report?

c. What information do you need to develop the report? How will you obtain that information?

d. When are the performance report and the analysis needed?

2. With the limited information available to you, compute the labor rate variance, the labor efficiency variance, and the variable and fixed overhead variances.

3. Prepare a performance report for the spa for March. Analyze the report, and suggest causes for any problems that you find.

ezelda marva is the controller at fh industries 544801

Developing a Flexible Budget and Analyzing Overhead Variances

C 4. Ezelda Marva is the controller at FH Industries. She has asked you, her new assistant, to analyze the following data related to projected and actual overhead costs for October:

Standard Variable Costs per Machine Hour (MH)

Actual Variable Costs in October

Indirect materials

and supplies

$1.10

$ 2,380

Indirect machine setup labor

2.50

5,090

Materials handling

1.40

3,950

Maintenance and repairs

1.50

2,980

Utilities

0.80

1,490

Miscellaneous

0.10

200

Totals

$7.40

$16,090

Budgeted Fixed Overhead

Actual Fixed Overhead in October

Supervisory salaries

$ 3,630

$ 3,630

Machine depreciation

8,360

8,580

Other

1,210

1,220

Totals

$13,200

$13,430

For October, the number of good units produced was used to compute the 2,100 standard machine hours allowed.

1. Prepare a monthly flexible budget for operating activity at 2,000 machine hours, 2,200 machine hours, and 2,500 machine hours.

2. Develop a flexible budget formula.

3. The company’s normal operating capacity is 2,200 machine hours per month. Compute the fixed overhead rate at this level of activity. Then break the rate down into rates for each element of fixed overhead.

4. Prepare a detailed comparative cost analysis for October. Include all variable and fixed overhead costs. Format your analysis by using columns for the following five elements: cost category, cost per machine hour, costs applied, actual costs incurred, and variance.

5. Develop an overhead variance analysis for October that identifies the variable overhead spending and efficiency variances and the fixed overhead budget and volume variances.

6. Prepare an analysis of the variances. Could a manager control some of the fixed costs? Defend your answer.

annuity life insurance company alic markets several types of life insurance policies 544802

Standard Costing in a Service Company

C 5. Annuity Life Insurance Company (ALIC) markets several types of life insurance policies, but P20A—a permanent, 20-year life annuity policy—is its most popular. This policy sells in $10,000 increments and features variable percentages of whole life insurance and single-payment annuities, depending on the policyholder’s needs and age. ALIC devotes an entire department to supporting and marketing the P20A policy. Because both the support staff and the sales persons contribute to each P20A policy, ALIC categorizes them as direct labor for purposes of variance analysis, cost control, and performance evaluation. For unit costing, each $10,000 increment is considered one unit; thus, a $90,000 policy is counted as nine units. Standard unit cost information for January is as follows:

Direct labor

Policy support staff

$ 36.00

3 hours at $12.00 per hour

Policy sales person

8.5 hours at $14.20 per hour

120.70

Operating overhead

Variable operating overhead

11.5 hours at $26.00 per hour

299.00

Fixed operating overhead

11.5 hours at $18.00 per hour

207.00

Standard unit cost

$662.70

Actual costs incurred for the 265 units sold during January were as follows:

Direct labor

Policy support staff

848 hours at $12.50 per hour

$10,600

Policy sales persons

2,252.5 hours at $14.00 per hour

31,535

Operating overhead

Variable operating overhead

78,440

Fixed operating overhead

53,400

Normal monthly capacity is 260 units, and the budgeted fixed operating overhead for January was $53,820.

1. Compute the standard hours allowed in January for policy support staff and policy sales persons.

2. What should the total standard costs for January have been? What were the total actual costs that the company incurred in January? Compute the total cost variance for the month.

3. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for policy support staff and policy sales persons.

4. Compute the variable and fixed operating overhead variances for January.

5. Identify possible causes for each variance and suggest possible solutions.

in this segment of our continuing case assume that you have been using standard cost 544803

Cookie Company (Continuing Case)

C 6. In this segment of our continuing case, assume that you have been using standard costing to plan and control costs at your cookie store. In a meeting with your budget team, which includes managers and employees from the Purchasing, Product Design, and Production departments, you ask all team members to describe any operating problems they encountered in the last quarter. You explain that you will use this information to analyze the causes of significant cost variances that occurred during the quarter.

For each of the following situations, identify the direct materials and/or direct labor variance(s) that could be affected, and indicate whether the variances are favorable or unfavorable:

1. The production department uses highly skilled, highly paid workers.

2. Machines were improperly adjusted.

3. Direct labor personnel worked more carefully than they had in the past to manufacture the product.

4. The Product Design Department replaced a direct material with one that was less expensive and of lower quality.

5. The Purchasing Department bought higher-quality materials at a higher price.

6. A major supplier used a less-expensive mode of transportation to deliver the raw materials.

7. Work was halted for 2 hours because of a power failure.

pices corporation has assembled the following information related to the purchase of 544805

Using Incremental Analysis

SE 2. Pices Corporation has assembled the following information related to the purchase of a new automated postage machine:

Posen Machine

Value Machine

Increase in revenue

$44,200

$49,300

Increase in annual operating costs

Direct materials

12,200

12,200

Direct labor

10,200

10,600

Variable overhead

24,500

26,900

Fixed overhead (including depreciation)

12,400

12,400

Using incremental analysis and only relevant information, compute the difference in favor of the Value machine.

momence associates is evaluating the performance of three divisions 544745

Investment Center Performance

E 12. Momence Associates is evaluating the performance of three divisions: Maple, Oaks, and Juniper. Using the following data, compute the return on investment and residual income for each division, compare the divisions’ performance, and comment on the factors that influenced performance:

Maple

Oaks

Juniper

Sales

$100,000

$100,000

$100,000

Operating income

$10,000

$10,000

$20,000

Assets invested

$25,000

$12,500

$25,000

Desired ROI

40%

40%

40%

leesburg llp is evaluating the performance of three divisions 544746

Economic Value Added

E 13. Leesburg, LLP, is evaluating the performance of three divisions: Lake, Sumter, and Poe. Using the data that appear on the next page, compute the economic value added by each division, and comment on each division’s performance.

Lake

Sumter

Poe

Sales

$100,000

$100,000

$100,000

After-tax operating income

$10,000

$10,000

$20,000

Total assets

$25,000

$12,500

$25,000

Current liabilities

$5,000

$5,000

$5,000

Cost of capital

15%

15%

15%

serious toys inc has adopted the balanced scorecard to motivate its managers to work 544748

Goal Congruence

E 15. Serious Toys, Inc., has adopted the balanced scorecard to motivate its managers to work toward the companywide goal of leading its industry in innovation. Identify the four stakeholder perspectives that would link to the following objectives, measures, and targets:

Perspective

Objective

Measure

Target

Profitable

New product RI

New-product RI of

new products

at least $100,000

Work force with cutting edge skills

Percentage of employees cross- trained on work-group tasks

group cross-trained on new tasks within 10 days

Agile production

Time to market

Time to market less

processes

(the time between

than 6 months for

a product idea

80% of product

and its first sales)

introductions

Successful product

New-product

Capture 75% of new

introductions

market share

product market

within 6 months

beverage products llc manufactures metal beverage containers 544749

Evaluating Cost Center Performance

P 1. Beverage Products, LLC, manufactures metal beverage containers. The division that manufactures soft-drink beverage cans for the North American market has two plants that operate 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The plants are evaluated as cost centers. Small tools and supplies are considered variable overhead. Depreciation and rent are considered fixed overhead. The master budget for a plant and the operating results of the two North American plants, East Coast and West Coast, are as follows:

Center costs

Master Budget

East Coast

West Coast

Rolled aluminum ($0.01)

$4,000,000

$3,492,000

$5,040,000

Lids ($0.005)

2,000,000

1,980,000

2,016,000

Direct labor ($0.0025)

1,000,000

864,000

1,260,000

Small tools and supplies ($0.0013)

520,000

432,000

588,000

Depreciation and rent

480,000

480,000

480,000

Total cost

$8,000,000

$7,248,000

$9,384,000

Performance measures

Cans processed per hour

45,662

41,096

47,945

Average daily pounds of scrap metal

5

6

7

Cans processed (in millions)

400

360

420

Required

1. Prepare a performance report for the East Coast plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.

2. Prepare a performance report for the West Coast plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.

3. Compare the two plants, and comment on their performance.

4. Explain why a flexible budget should be prepared. Traditional and Variable Costing Income Statements

roofing tile is the major product of the tops corporation 544750

Traditional and Variable Costing Income Statements

P 2. Roofing tile is the major product of the Tops Corporation. The company had a particularly good year, as shown by its operating data. It sold 88,400 cases of tile. Variable cost of goods sold was $848,640; variable selling expenses were $132,600; fixed overhead was $166,680; fixed selling expenses were $152,048; and fixed administrative expenses were $96,450. Selling price was $18 per case. There were no partially completed jobs in process at the beginning or the end of the year. Finished goods inventory had been used up at the end of the previous year.

Required

1. Prepare the calendar year-end income statement for the Tops Corporation using the traditional reporting format.

2. Prepare the calendar year-end income statement for the Tops Corporation using the variable costing format.

bobbie howell the managing partner of the law firm howell bagan and clark llp makes 544751

Evaluating Profit Center and Investment Center Performance

P 3. Bobbie Howell, the managing partner of the law firm Howell, Bagan, and Clark, LLP, makes asset acquisition and disposal decisions for the firm. As managing partner, she supervises the partners in charge of the firm’s three branch offices. Those partners have the authority to make employee compensation decisions. The partners’ compensation depends on the profitability of their branch office. Victoria Smith manages the City Branch, which has the following master budget and actual results for the year:

Master Budget

Actual Results

Billed hours

5,000

4,900

Revenue

$250,000

$254,800

Controllable variable costs

Direct labor

120,000

137,200

Variable overhead

40,000

34,300

Contribution margin

$ 90,000

$ 83,300

Controllable fixed costs

Rent

30,000

30,000

Other administrative expenses

45,000

42,000

Branch operating income

$ 15,000

$ 11,300

Required

1.Assume that the City Branch is a profit center. Prepare a performance report that includes a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget.

2. Evaluate Victoria Smith’s performance as manager of the City Branch.

3. Assume that the branch managers are assigned responsibility for capital expenditures and that the branches are thus investment centers. City Branch is expected to generate a desired ROI of at least 30 percent on average invested assets of $40,000.

a. Compute the branch’s return on investment and residual income.

b. Using the ROI and residual income, evaluate Victoria Smith’s performance as branch manager.

the balance sheet for the new products division of nubone corporation showed investe 544752

Return on Investment and Economic Value Added

P 5. The balance sheet for the New Products Division of NuBone Corporation showed invested assets of $200,000 at the beginning of the year and $300,000 at the end of the year. During the year, the division’s operating income was $12,500 on sales of $500,000.

Required

1. Compute the division’s residual income if the desired ROI is 6 percent.

2. Compute the following performance measures for the division: (a) profit margin, (b) asset turnover, and (c) return on investment

3. Recompute the division’s ROI under each of the following independent assumptions:

a. Sales increase from $500,000 to $600,000, causing operating income to rise from $12,500 to $30,000.

b. Invested assets at the beginning of the year are reduced from $200,000 to $100,000.

c. Operating expenses are reduced, causing operating income to rise from $12,500 to $20,000.

4. Compute NuBone’s EVA if total corporate assets are $500,000, current liabilities are $80,000, after-tax operating income is $50,000, and the cost of capital is 8 percent.

plastic products llc manufactures plastic beverage bottles 544753

Evaluating Cost Center Performance

P 6. Plastic Products, LLC, manufactures plastic beverage bottles. The division that manufactures water bottles for the North American market has two plants that operate 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The plants are evaluated as cost centers. Small tools and supplies are considered variable overhead. Depreciation and rent are considered fixed overhead. The master budget for a plant and the operating results of the two North American plants, North and South, are as follows:

Center costs

Master Budget

North Actual

South Actual

Plastic pellets ($0.009)

$4,500,000

$3,880,000

$5,500,000

Caps ($0.004)

2,000,000

1,990,000

2,000,000

Direct labor ($0.002)

1,000,000

865,000

1,240,000

Small tools and

supplies ($0.0005)

250,000

198,000

280,000

Depreciation and rent

450,000

440,000

480,000

Total cost

$8,200,000

$7,373,000

$9,500,000

Performance measures

Bottles processed per hour

69,450

62,000

70,250

Average daily pounds of scrap

5

6

7

Bottles processed (in millions)

500

450

520

Required

1. Prepare a performance report for the North plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.

2. Prepare a performance report for the South plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.

3. Compare the two plants, and comment on their performance.

4. Explain why a flexible budget should be prepared.

interior designers often use the deluxe carpet products of lux mills inc 544754

Traditional and Variable Costing Income Statements

P 7. Interior designers often use the deluxe carpet products of Lux Mills, Inc. The Maricopa blend is the company’s top product line. In March, Lux produced and sold 174,900 square yards of Maricopa blend. Factory operating data for the month included variable cost of goods sold of $2,623,500 and fixed overhead of $346,875. Other expenses were variable selling expenses, $166,155; fixed selling expenses, $148,665; and fixed general and administrative expenses, $231,500. Total sales revenue equaled $3,935,250. All production took place in March, and there was no work in process at month end. Goods are usually shipped when completed.

Required

1. Prepare the March income statement for Lux Mills, Inc., using the traditional reporting format.

2. Prepare the March income statement for Lux Mills, Inc., using the variable costing format.

portia carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters 544755

Return on Investment and Residual Income

P 8. Portia Carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters. Carter has delegated decision-making authority to the theater managers for all decisions except those relating to capital expenditures and film selection. The theater managers’ compensation depends on the profitability of their theaters. Max Burgman, the manager of the Park Theater, had the following master budget and actual results for the month:

Master Budget

Actual Results

Tickets sold

120,000

110,000

Revenue–tickets

$ 840,000

$ 880,000

Revenue–concessions

480,000

330,000

Total revenue

$1,320,000

$1,210,000

Controllable variable costs

Concessions

120,000

99,000

Direct labor

420,000

330,000

Variable overhead

540,000

550,000

Contribution margin

$ 240,000

$ 231,000

Controllable fixed costs

Rent

55,000

55,000

Other administrative expenses

45,000

50,000

Theater operating income

$ 140,000

$ 126,000

Required

1. Assuming that the theaters are profit centers, prepare a performance report for the Park Theater. Include a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget.

2. Evaluate Burgman’s performance as manager of the Park Theater.

3. Assume that the managers are assigned responsibility for capital expenditures and that the theaters are thus investment centers. Park Theater is expected to generate a desired ROI of at least 6 percent on average invested assets of $2,000,000.

a. Compute the theater’s return on investment and residual income.

b. Using the ROI and residual income, evaluate Burgman’s performance as manager.

the financial results for the past two years for abb company 544756

Return on Investment and Residual Income

P 9. The financial results for the past two years for ABB Company, follow.

ABB Company

Balance Sheet

December 31

This Year

Last Year

Cash

Assets

$ 9,000

$ 4,000

Accounts receivable

40,000

50,000

Inventory

30,000

25,000

Other current

1,000

1,000

Plant assets

120,000

100,000

Total assets

$200,000

$180,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities

$ 10,000

$ 10,000

Long-term Liabilities

20,000

10,000

Stockholders’ equity

170,000

160,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$200,000

$180,000

ABB Company

Income Statement

For the Years Ended December 31

This Year

Last Year

Sales

$250,000

$200,000

Cost of goods sold

150,000

115,000

Selling and administrative expenses

30,000

25,000

Operating income

$ 70,000

$ 60,000

Income taxes expense

21,000

18,000

Net income

$ 49,000

$ 42,000

Required

1.Compute the company’s profit margin, asset turnover, and return on investment for this year and last year. Beginning total assets for last year were $160,000. Round to two decimal places.

2. The desired return on investment for the company has been set at 10 percent. Compute ABB’s residual income for this year and last year.

3. The cost of capital for the company is 5 percent. Compute the company’s economic value added for this year and last year.

4. Before drawing conclusions about this company’s performance, what additional information would you want?

it inc has adopted the balanced scorecard approach to motivate the managers of its p 544758

Balanced Scorecard Results

C 1. IT, Inc., has adopted the balanced scorecard approach to motivate the managers of its product divisions to work toward the companywide goal of leading its industry in innovation. The corporation’s selected performance measures and scorecard results are as follows:

Division

Performance

Measure

A

B

C

Target

New product ROI

80%

75%

70%

75%

Employees cross-trained in new tasks

within 30 days

95

96

94

100

New product’s time to market less than

one year

85

90

86

80

New product’s market share one year

after introduction

50

100

80

80

Can you effectively compare the performance of the three divisions against the targets? What other measures mentioned in this chapter are needed to evaluate performance effectively?

wood4fun makes wooden playground equipment for the institutional and consumer market 544759

Responsibility Centers

C 2. Wood4Fun makes wooden playground equipment for the institutional and consumer markets. The company strives for low-cost, high-quality production because it operates in a highly competitive market in which product price is set by the marketplace and is not based on production costs. The company is organized into responsibility centers. The vice president of manufacturing is responsible for three manufacturing plants. The vice president of sales is responsible for four sales regions. Recently, these two vice presidents began to disagree about whether the manufacturing plants are cost centers or profit centers. The vice president of manufacturing views the plants as cost centers because the managers of the plants control only product-related costs. The vice president of sales believes the plants are profit centers because product quality and product cost strongly affect company profits.

1. Identify the controllable performance that Wood4Fun values and wants to measure. Give at least three examples of performance measures that Wood4- Fun could use to monitor such performance.

2. For the manufacturing plants, what type of responsibility center is most consistent with the controllable performance Wood4Fun wants to measure?

3. For the sales regions, what type of responsibility center is most appropriate?

yuma foods acquired aldo s tortillas several years ago 544760

Types of Responsibility Centers

C 3. Yuma Foods acquired Aldo’s Tortillas several years ago. Aldo’s has continued to operate as an independent company, except that Yuma Foods has exclusive authority over capital investments, production quantity, and pricing decisions because Yuma has been Aldo’s only customer since the acquisition. Yuma uses return on investment to evaluate the performance of Aldo’s manager. The most recent performance report is as follows:

Yuma Foods

Performance Report for Aldo’s Tortillas

For the Year Ended June 30

Sales

$6,000

Variable cost of goods sold

3,000

Variable administrative expenses

1,000

Variable corporate expenses (% of sales)

600

Contribution margin

$1,400

Fixed overhead (includes depreciation of $100)

400

Fixed administrative expenses

500

Operating income

$ 500

Average assets invested

$5,500

Return on investment

9.09%

1. Analyze the items listed in the performance report, and identify the items that Aldo controls and those that Yuma controls. In your opinion, what type of responsibility center is Aldo’s Tortillas? Explain your response.

2. Prepare a revised performance report for Aldo’s Tortillas and an accompanying memo to the president of Yuma Foods that explains why it is important to change the content of the report. Cite some basic principles of responsibility accounting to support your recommendation.

sevilla consulting offers environmental consulting services worldwide 544761

Economic Value Added and Performance

C 4. Sevilla Consulting offers environmental consulting services worldwide. The managers of branch offices are rewarded for superior performance with bonuses based on the economic value that the office adds to the company. Last year’s operating results for the entire company and for its three offices, expressed in millions of U.S. dollars, are as follows:

Worldwide

Europe

Americas

Asia

Cost of capital

9%

10%

8%

12%

Total assets

$210

$70

$70

$70

Current liabilities

$80

$10

$40

$30

After-tax operating income

$15

$5

$5

$5

1. Compute the economic value added for each office worldwide. What factors affect each office’s economic value added? How can an office improve its economic value added?

2. If managers’ bonuses are based on economic value added to office performance, what specific actions will managers be motivated to take?

3. Is economic value added the only performance measure needed to evaluate investment centers adequately? Explain your response.

as we continue with this case assume that your cookie store is now part of a nationa 544762

Cookie Company (Continuing Case)

C 6. As we continue with this case, assume that your cookie store is now part of a national chain. The store has been consistently profitable, and sales remain satisfactory despite a temporary economic downturn in your area.

At the first of the year, corporate headquarters set a targeted return on investment of 20 percent for your store. The store currently averages $140,000 in invested assets (beginning invested assets, $130,000; ending invested assets, $150,000) and is projected to have an operating income of $30,800. You are considering whether to take one or both of the following actions before the end of the year:

  • Hold off recording and paying $5,000 in bills owed until the start of the next fiscal year.
  • Write down to zero value $3,000 in store inventory (nonperishable containers) that you have been unable to sell.

Currently, your bonus is based on store profits. Next year, corporate headquarters is changing its performance incentive program so that bonuses will be based on a store’s actual return on investment.

1.What effect would each of the actions that you are considering have on the store’s operating income this year? (Hint: Use Figure 8-3 to trace the effects.) In your opinion, is either action unethical?

2. Independent of question 1, how would the inventory write-down affect next year’s income and return on investment if the inventory is sold for $4,000 next year, when corporate headquarters changes its performance incentive plan for store managers? In your opinion, do you have an ethical dilemma?

using the information that follows compute the standard unit cost of product mzw 544765

Computing a Standard Unit Cost

SE 3. Using the information that follows, compute the standard unit cost of Product MZW:

Direct materials quantity standard

5 pounds per unit

Direct materials price standard

$10.20 per pound

Direct labor time standard

0.2 hour per unit

Direct labor rate standard

$10.75 per hour

Variable overhead rate standard

$7.00 per machine hour

Fixed overhead rate standard

$11.00 per machine hour

Machine hour standard

3 hours per unit

garden metal works produces lawn sculptures 544766

Analyzing Cost Variances

SE 4. Garden Metal Works produces lawn sculptures. The company analyzes only variances that differ by more than 5 percent from the standard cost. The controller computed the following direct labor efficiency variances for March:

Direct Labor Efficiency Variance

Standard Direct Labor Cost

Product 4

$1,240 (U)

$26,200

Product 6

3,290 (F)

41,700

Product 7

2,030 (U)

34,300

Product 9

1,620 (F)

32,560

Product 12

2,810 (U)

59,740

For each product, determine the variance as a percentage of the standard cost (round to one decimal place). Then identify the products whose variances should be analyzed and suggest possible causes for the variances.

weather all products uses standard costing 544770

Overhead Variances

SE 8. Weather all Products uses standard costing. The following information about overhead was generated during August:

Standard variable overhead rate

$3.00 per machine hour

Standard fixed overhead rate

$3.10 per machine hour

Actual variable overhead costs

$680,100

Actual fixed overhead costs

$698,800

Budgeted fixed overhead costs

$700,000

Standard machine hours per unit produced

12

Good units produced

18,940

Actual machine hours

228,400

Compute the variable overhead spending and efficiency variances and the fixed overhead budget and volume variances.

raul tempest the controller at goto products gave jim dodds the production manager a 544772

Evaluating Managerial Performance

SE 10. Raul Tempest, the controller at GoTo Products, gave Jim Dodds, the production manager, a report containing the following information:

Actual Cost

Standard Cost

Variance

Direct materials

$40,200

$38,200

$2,000 (U)

Direct labor

17,550

17,000

550 (U)

Variable overhead

52,860

50,000

2,860 (U)

Tempest asked for a response. If you were Dodds, how would you respond? What additional information might you need to prepare your response?

hector corporation is a manufacturing company with annual sales of 25 million 544719

Hector Corporation is a manufacturing company with annual sales of $25 million. Its budget committee has created the following policy that the company uses each year in developing its master budget for the following calendar year:

May

The company’s controller and other members of the budget committee meet to discuss plans and objectives for next year.

The controller conveys all relevant information from this meeting to division managers and department heads.

June

Division managers, department heads, and the controller meet to discuss the corporate plans and objectives for next year. Theydevelop a timetable for developing next year’s budget data.

July

Division managers and department heads develop budget data. The vice president of sales provides them with final sales estimates, and they complete monthly sales estimates for each product line.

August

Estimates of next year’s monthly production activity and inventory levels are completed. Division managers and departmentheads communicate these estimates to the controller,who distributes them to other operating areas.

September

All operating areas submit their revised budget data. The controller integrates their labor requirements, direct materials requirements, unit cost estimates, cash requirements, and profit estimates into a preliminary master budget.

October

The budget committee meets to discuss the preliminary master budget and to make any necessary corrections, additions, or deletions. The controller incorporates all authorized changes into a final draft of the master budget.

November

The controller submits the final draft to the budget committee for approval. If the committee approves it, it is distributed to all corporate officers, division managers, and department heads.

1. Comment on this policy.

2. What changes would you recommend?

javier gonzales is the manager of the repairs and maintenance department of jg indus 544720

Ethical Considerations in Budgeting

Javier Gonzales is the manager of the Repairs and Maintenance Department of JG Industries. He is responsible for preparing his department’s annual budget. Most managers in the company inflate their budget numbers by at least 10 percent because their bonuses depend upon how much below budget their departments operate. Gonzales turned in the following information for his department’s budget for next year to the company’s budget committee:

Budget This Year

Actual This Year

Budget Next Year

Supplies

$ 20,000

$ 16,000

$ 24,000

Labor

80,000

82,000

96,000

Utilities

8,500

8,000

10,200

Tools

12,500

9,000

15,000

Hand-carried

equipment

25,000

16,400

30,000

Cleaning materials

4,600

4,200

5,520

Miscellaneous

2,000

2,100

2,400

Totals

$152,600

$137,700

$183,120

Because the figures for next year are 20 percent above those in this year’s budget, the budget committee questioned them. Gonzales defended them by saying that he expects a significant increase in activity in his department next year.

What do you think are the real reasons for the increase in the budgeted amounts? What ethical considerations enter into this situation?

the nature of a company s business affects its need to budget for cash flows h r blo 544721

Budgeting for Cash Flows

The nature of a company’s business affects its need to budget for cash flows. H&R Block is a service company whose main business is preparing tax returns. Most tax returns are prepared after January 31 and before April 15. For a fee and interest, the company will advance cash to clients who are due refunds. The clients are expected to repay the cash advances when they receive their refunds. Although H&R Block has some revenues throughout the year, it devotes most of the nontax season to training potential employees in tax preparation procedures and to laying the groundwork for the next tax season.

Toys “R” Us is a toy retailer whose sales are concentrated in October, November, and December of one year and January of the next year. Sales continue at a steady but low level during the rest of the year. The company purchases most of its inventory between July and September.

Johnson & Johnson sells the many health care products that it manufactures to retailers, and the retailers sell them to the final customer. Johnson & Johnson offers retailers credit terms.

Discuss the nature of cash receipts and cash disbursements over a calendar year in the three companies we have just described. What are some key estimates that the management of these companies must make when preparing a cash budget?

since rood enterprises inaugurated participative budgeting 10 years ago everyone in 544722

Budgeting Procedures

Since Rood Enterprises inaugurated participative budgeting 10 years ago, everyone in the organization—from maintenance personnel to the president’s staff—has had a voice in the budgeting process. Until recently, participative budgeting has worked in the best interests of the company as a whole. Now, however, it is becoming evident that some managers are using the practice solely to benefit their own divisions. The budget committee has therefore asked you, the company’s controller, to analyze this year’s divisional budgets carefully before incorporating them into the company’s master budget.

The Motor Division was the first of the company’s six divisions to submit its budget request for next year. The division’s budgeted income statement appears at the top of the next page.

Rood Enterprises
Motor Division
Budgeted Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31

Budget for This Year

Budget for Next Year

Increase (Decrease)

Net sales

Radios

$ 850,000

$ 910,000

$ 60,000

Appliances

680,000

740,000

60,000

Telephones

270,000

305,000

35,000

Miscellaneous

84,400

90,000

5,600

Net sales

$1,884,400

$2,045,000

$160,600

Less cost of goods sold

750,960

717,500*

(33,460)

Gross margin

$1,133,440

$1,327,500

$194,060

Operating expenses

Wages

Warehouse

$ 94,500

$ 102,250

$ 7,750

Purchasing

77,800

84,000

6,200

Delivery/shipping

69,400

74,780

5,380

Maintenance

42,650

45,670

3,020

Salaries

Supervisory

60,000

92,250

32,250

Executive

130,000

164,000

34,000

Purchases, supplies

17,400

20,500

3,100

Maintenance

72,400

82,000

9,600

Depreciation

62,000

74,750†

12,750

Building rent

96,000

102,500

6,500

Sales commissions

188,440

204,500

16,060

Insurance

Fire

12,670

20,500

7,830

Liability

18,200

20,500

2,300

Utilities

14,100

15,375

1,275

Taxes

Property

16,600

18,450

1,850

Payroll

26,520

41,000

14,480

Miscellaneous

4,610

10,250

5,640

Total operating expenses

$1,003,290

$1,173,275

$169,985

Income from operations

$ 130,150

$ 154,225

$ 24,075

*Less expensive merchandise will be purchased in the next year to boost profits. †Depreciation is increased because additional equipment must be bought to handle increased sales.

1. Recast the Motor Division’s budgeted income statement in the following format (round percentages to two places):

Budget for This Year

Budget for Next Year

Account

Amount

Percentage of Net Sales

Amount

Percentage of Net Sales

1.Actual results for this year revealed the following information about revenues and cost of goods sold:

Amount

Percentage of Net Sales

Net sales

Radios

$ 780,000

43.94

Appliances

640,000

36.06

Telephones

280,000

15.77

Miscellaneous

75,000

4.23

Net sales

$1,775,000

100.00

Less cost of goods sold

763,425

43.01

Gross margin

$1,011,575

56.99

On the basis of this information and your analysis in 1, what do you think the budget committee should say to the managers of the Motor Division? Identify any specific areas of the budget that may need to be revised, and explain why the revision is needed.

refer to our development of frame craft company s master budget in this chapter 544723

The Budgeting Process

C 5. Refer to our development of Frame craft Company’s master budget in this chapter. Suppose that because of a new customer in Canada, the company’s management has decided to increase budgeted sales in the first quarter by 5,000 units. The expenses for this sale will include direct materials, direct labor, variable overhead, and variable selling and administrative expenses. The delivery expense for the Canadian customer will be $0.18 per unit rather than the regular $0.08 per unit. The desired units of beginning finished goods inventory will remain at 1,000 units.

1. Using an Excel spreadsheet, revise Frame craft Company’s budgeted income statement and the operating budgets that support it to reflect the changes described above. (Round manufactured cost per unit to three decimals.)

2. What was the change in income from operations? Would you recommend accepting the order from the Canadian customer? If so, why?

in this segment of our continuing case you have decided to open a store where you w 544724

Cookie Company (Continuing Case)

C 6. In this segment of our continuing case, you have decided to open a store where you will sell your company’s cookies, as well as coffee, tea, and other beverages. You believe that the store will be able to provide excellent service and undersell the local competition. To fund operations, you are applying for a loan from the Small Business Administration. The loan application requires you to submit two financial budgets—a pro forma income statement and a pro forma balance sheet—within six weeks.

How do the four w’s of preparing an accounting report apply in this situation— that is, why are you preparing these financial budgets, who needs them, what information do you need to prepare them, and when are they due?

one of your college s overall goals is customer satisfaction 544725

Balanced Scorecard

SE 1. One of your college’s overall goals is customer satisfaction. In light of that goal, match each of the following stakeholders’ perspectives with the appropriate objective:

Perspective

Objective

1. Financial (investors)

a. Customer satisfaction means that the faculty (employees) engages in cutting-edge research.

2. Learning and growth

b. Customer satisfaction means that students receive their degrees in four years.

3. Internal business processes

c. Customer satisfaction means that the college has a winning athletics program.

4. Customers

d. Customer satisfaction means that fund-raising campaigns are successful.

identify each of the following as a cost center a discretionary cost center 544726

Responsibility Centers

SE 2. Identify each of the following as a cost center, a discretionary cost center, a revenue center, a profit center, or an investment center:

1. The manager of center A is responsible for generating cash inflows and incurring costs with the goal of making money for the company. The manager has no responsibility for assets.

2. Center B produces a product that is not sold to an external party but transferred to another center for further processing.

3. The manager of center C is responsible for the telephone order operations of a large retailer.

4. Center D designs, produces, and sells products to external parties. The manager makes both long-term and short-term decisions.

5. Center E provides human resource support for the other centers in the company.

profit center performance report 544729

Profit Center Performance Report

SE 5. Complete this performance report for profit center P for the month ended December 31:

Actual Results

Variance

Master Budget

Sales

$ ?

$ 20 (F)

$ 120

Controllable variable costs

Variable cost of goods sold

25

10 (U)

?

Variable selling and

administrative expenses

15

?

5

Contribution margin

$100

$ ?

$ 100

Controllable fixed costs

?

20 (F)

60

Profit center operating income

$ 60

$ 20 (F)

$ ?

Performance measures

Number of orders processed

50

20 (F)

?

Average daily sales

$?

$0.68 (F)

$4.00

Number of units sold

100

40 (F)

?

complete the average assets invested profit margin asset turnover and return on inve 544731

Return on Investment

SE 7. Complete the average assets invested, profit margin, asset turnover, and return on investment calculations for investment centers J and K on the next page.

Subsidiary J

Subsidiary K

Sales

$2,000

$2,000

Operating income

$500

$800

Beginning assets invested

$4,000

$500

Ending assets invested

$6,000

$1,500

Average assets invested

$?

$?

Profit margin

25%

?

Asset turnover

?

2 times

ROI

?

?

complete the operating income ending assets invested average assets invested and res 544732

Residual Income

SE 8. Complete the operating income, ending assets invested, average assets invested, and residual income calculations for investment centers H and F:

Subsidiary H

Subsidiary F

Sales

$20,000

$25,000

Operating income

$1,500

$?

Beginning assets invested

$4,000

$500

Ending assets invested

$6,000

$?

Average assets invested

$?

$1,000

Desired ROI

20%

20%

Residual income

$?

$600

complete the current liabilities total assets current liabilities and economic value 544733

Economic Value Added

SE 9. Complete the current liabilities, total assets

current liabilities, and economic value added calculations for investment centers M and N:

Subsidiary M

Subsidiary N

Sales

$15,000

$18,000

After-tax operating income

$1,000

$1,100

Total assets

$4,000

$5,000

Current liabilities

$1,000

$?

Total assets current

liabilities

$?

$3,500

Cost of capital

15%

15%

Economic value added

$?

$?

biggs industries is considering adopting the balanced scorecard and has compiled the 544735

Balanced Scorecard

E 1. Biggs Industries is considering adopting the balanced scorecard and has compiled the following list of possible performance measures. Select the balanced scorecard perspective that best matches each performance measure.

Performance Measure

Balanced Scorecard Perspective

1. Residual income

a. Financial (investors)

2. Customer satisfaction rating

b. Learning and growth (employees)

3. Employee absentee rate

c. Internal business processes

4. Growth in profits

d. Customers

5. On-time deliveries

6. Manufacturing processing time

valient online products is considering adopting the balanced scorecard and has compi 544736

Balanced Scorecard

E 2. Valient Online Products is considering adopting the balanced scorecard and has compiled the following list of possible performance measures. Select the balanced scorecard perspective that best matches each performance measure.

Performance Measure

Balanced Scorecard Perspective

1. Economic value added

a. Financial (investors)

2. Employee turnover

b. Learning and growth (employees)

3. Average daily sales

c. Internal business processes

4. Defect-free units

d. Customers

5. Number of repeat customer visits

6. Employee training hours

beva washington wants to measure her division s product quality 544737

Performance Measures

E 3. Beva Washington wants to measure her division’s product quality. Link an appropriate performance measure with each balanced scorecard perspective.

Product Quality

Possible Performance Measures

1. Financial (investors)

a. Number of defective products

2. Learning and growth

returned

(employees)

b. Number of products failing

3. Internal business processes

inspection

4. Customers

c. Increased market share

d. Savings from employee suggestions

sam yu wants to measure customer satisfaction within his region 544738

Performance Measures

E 4. Sam Yu wants to measure customer satisfaction within his region. Link an appropriate performance measure with each balanced scorecard perspective.

Customer Satisfaction

Possible Performance Measures

1. Financial (investors)

a. Number of staff promotions

2. Learning and growth

b. Number of repeat customers

(employees)

c. Number of process improvements

3. Internal business processes

d. Percentage sales increase over last

4. Customers

period

vegan llc owns a chain of gourmet vegetarian take out markets 544742

Variable Costing Income Statement

E 9. Vegan, LLC, owns a chain of gourmet vegetarian take-out markets. Last month, Store Q generated the following information: sales, $890,000; direct materials, $220,000; direct labor, $97,000; variable overhead, $150,000; fixed overhead, $130,000; variable selling and administrative expenses, $44,500; and fixed selling expenses, $82,300. There were no beginning or ending inventories. Average daily sales (25 business days) were $35,600. Customer orders processed totaled 15,000.

Vegan had budgeted monthly sales of $900,000; direct materials, $210,000; direct labor, $100,000; variable overhead, $140,000; fixed overhead, $140,000; variable selling and administrative expenses, $45,000; and fixed selling expenses, $60,000. Store Q had been projected to do $36,000 in daily sales and process 16,000 customer orders. Using this information, prepare a performance report for Store Q.

the income statement in the traditional reporting format for green products inc for 544743

Variable Costing Income Statement

E 10. The income statement in the traditional reporting format for Green Products, Inc., for the year ended December 31, is as follows:

Sales

$296,400

Cost of goods sold

112,750

Gross margin

$183,650

Selling expenses

Variable

69,820

Fixed

36,980

Administrative expenses

27,410

Operating income

$ 49,440

Total fixed manufacturing costs for the year were $16,750. All administrative expenses are considered to be fixed.

Using this information, prepare an income statement for Green Products, Inc., for the year ended December 31, using the variable costing format.

archer llc owns a blueberry processing plant 544744

Performance Report for a Cost Center

E 11. Archer, LLC, owns a blueberry processing plant. Last month, the plant generated the following information: blueberries processed, 50,000 pounds; direct materials, $50,000; direct labor, $10,000; variable overhead, $12,000; and fixed overhead, $13,000. There were no beginning or ending inventories. Average daily pounds processed (25 business days) were 2,000. Average rate of processing was 250 pounds per hour.

At the beginning of the month, Archer had budgeted costs of blueberries, $45,000; direct labor, $10,000; variable overhead, $14,000; and fixed overhead, $14,000. The monthly master budget was based on producing 50,000 pounds of blueberries each month. This means that the plant had been projected to process 2,000 pounds daily at the rate of 240 pounds per hour.

Using this information, prepare a performance report for the month for the blueberry processing plant. Include a flexible budget and a computation of variances in your report. Indicate whether the variances are favorable (F) or un favorable (U) to the performance of the plant.

refer to the information in c 3 in january 2011 sophia callas the president of datur 544685

C-V-P Analysis Applied

Refer to the information in C 3. In January 2011, Sophia Callas, the president of Datura, Ltd., conducted a strategic planning meeting. During the meeting, Phillipe Mazzeo, vice president of distribution, noted that because of a new contract with an international shipping line, the company’s fixed distribution costs for 2011 would be reduced by 10 percent and its variable distribution costs by 4 percent. Gino Roma, vice president of sales, offered the following information:

We plan to sell 15,000 sets of pottery again in 2011, but based on review of the competition, we are going to lower the selling price to €890 per set. To encourage increased sales, we will raise sales commissions to 12 percent of the selling price.

Sophia Callas is concerned that the changes described by Roma and Mazzeo may not improve operating income sufficiently in 2011. If operating income does not increase by at least 10 percent, she will want to find other ways to reduce the company’s costs. She asks you to evaluate the situation in a written report. Because it is already January of 2011 and changes need to be made quickly, she requests your report within five days.

1. Prepare a budgeted contribution margin income statement for 2011. Your report should show the budgeted (estimated) operating income based on the information provided above and in C 3. Will the changes improve operating income sufficiently? Explain.

2. In preparation for writing your report, answer the following questions:

a. Why are you preparing the report?

b. Who needs the report?

c. What sources of information will you use?

d. When is the report due?

as noted in c 3 datura ltd sold 15 000 sets of pottery in 2010 544686

Planning Future Sales

As noted in C 3, Datura, Ltd., sold 15,000 sets of pottery in 2010. As noted in C 4, in 2011, Datura’s strategic planning team targeted sales of 15,000 sets of pottery, reduced the selling price to €890 per set, increased sales commissions to 12 percent of the selling price, and decreased fixed distribution costs by 10 percent and variable distribution costs by 4 percent. It was assumed that all other costs would stay the same.

Based on an analysis of these changes, Sophia Callas, Datura’s president, is concerned that the proposed strategic plan will not meet her goal of increasing Datura’s operating income by 10 percent over last year’s income and that the operating income will be less than last year’s income. She has come to you for spreadsheet analysis of the proposed strategic plan and for analysis of a special order she just received from an Australian distributor for 4,500 sets of pottery. The order’s selling price, variable purchases cost per unit, sales commission, and total fixed costs will be the same as for the rest of the business, but the variable distribution costs will be €160 per unit.

Using an Excel spreadsheet, complete the following tasks:

1. Calculate the targeted operating income for 2011 using just the proposed strategic plan.

2. Prepare a budgeted contribution margin income statement for 2011 based on just the strategic plan. Do you agree with Datura’s president that the company’s projected operating income for 2011 will be less than the operating income for 2010? Explain your answer.

3. Calculate the total contribution margin from the Australian sales.

4. Prepare a revised budgeted contribution margin income statement for 2011 that includes the Australian order. (Hint: Combine the information from 2 and 3 above.)

5. Does Datura need the Australian sales to achieve its targeted operating income for 2011?

in this segment of our continuing cookie company case you will classify the costs of 544687

Cookie Company

In this segment of our continuing “cookie company” case, you will classify the costs of the business as variable, fixed, or mixed; use the high-low method to evaluate utility costs; and prepare a contribution margin income statement.

1.Review your cookie recipe and the overhead costs you identified in Chapter 16, and classify the costs as variable, fixed, or mixed costs.

2. Obtain your electric bills for three months, and use the high-low method’s cost formula to determine the monthly cost of electricity—that is, monthly electric cost =variable rate per kilowatt-hour + monthly fixed cost. If you do not receive an electric bill, use the following information:

Month

Kilowatt-Hours Used

Electric Costs

August

1,439

$202

September

1,866

230

October

1,146

158

3. Prepare a daily contribution margin income statement based on the following assumptions:

Cookie Company makes only one kind of cookie and sells it for $1.00 per unit. The company projects sales of 500 units per day. Projected daily costs are as follows:

Type of Cost

Manufacturing

Nonmanufacturing

Variable

$100

$50

Non variable

120

60

a. What is the contribution margin ratio?

b. What volume, in terms of units, must the company sell to break even each day?

isobel law the controller for aberdeen lock company is preparing a production budget 544691

Production Budget

Isobel Law, the controller for Aberdeen Lock Company, is preparing a production budget for the year. The company’s policy is to maintain a finished goods inventory equal to one-half of the following month’s sales. Sales of 7,000 locks are budgeted for April. Complete the monthly production budget for the first quarter:

January

February

March

Sales in units

5,000

4,000

6,000

Add desired units of ending

finished goods inventory

2,000

?

?

Desired total units

7,000

Less desired units of beginning

finished goods inventory

?

?

?

Total production units

4,500

?

?

the projections of direct materials purchases that follow are for the stromboli corp 544695

Cash Budget

The projections of direct materials purchases that follow are for the Stromboli Corporation.

Purchases on Account

Cash Purchases

December, 2010

$40,000

$20,000

January, 2011

60,000

30,000

February, 2011

50,000

25,000

March, 2011

70,000

35,000

The company pays for 60 percent of purchases on account in the month of purchase and 40 percent in the month following the purchase. Prepare a monthly schedule of expected cash payments for direct materials for the first quarter of 2011.

alberta limited needs a cash budget for the month of november the following informat 544696

Cash Budget

Alberta Limited needs a cash budget for the month of November. The following information is available:

a. The cash balance on November 1 is $6,000.

b. Sales for October and November are $80,000 and $60,000, respectively. Cash collections on sales are 30 percent in the month of sale and 65 percent in the month after the sale; 5 percent of sales are uncollectible.

c. General expenses budgeted for November are $25,000 (depreciation represents $2,000 of this amount).

d. Inventory purchases will total $30,000 in October and $40,000 in November. The company pays for half of its inventory purchases in the month of purchase and for the other half the month after purchase.

e. The company will pay $4,000 in cash for office furniture in November. Sales commissions for November are budgeted at $12,000.

f. The company maintains a minimum ending cash balance of $4,000 and can borrow from the bank in multiples of $100. All loans are repaid after 60 days.

Prepare a cash budget for Alberta Limited for the month of November.

quarterly and annual sales for this year for steen manufacturing company follow 544702

Sales Budget

Quarterly and annual sales for this year for Steen Manufacturing Company follow. Prepare a sales budget for next year for the company based on the estimated percentage increases shown by product class. Show both quarterly and annual totals for each product class.

Steen Manufacturing Company

Actual Sales Revenue

For the Year Ended December 31

Product Class

January– March

April– June

July– September

October– December

Annual by Totals

Estimated Percent Increases by Product Class

Marine

products

$ 44,500

$ 45,500

$ 48,200

$ 47,900

$ 186,100

10%

Mountain

products

36,900

32,600

34,100

37,200

140,800

5%

River

products

29,800

29,700

29,100

27,500

116,100

30%

Hiking

products

38,800

37,600

36,900

39,700

153,000

15%

Running

products

47,700

48,200

49,400

49,900

195,200

25%

Biking

products

65,400

65,900

66,600

67,300

265,200

20%

Totals

$263,100

$259,500

$264,300

$269,500

$1,056,400

paige metals company has two departments cutting and grinding and manufactures three 544706

Direct Labor Budget

Paige Metals Company has two departments—Cutting and Grinding—and manufactures three products. Budgeted unit production for the coming year is 21,000 of Product T, 36,000 of Product M, and 30,000 of Product B. The company is currently analyzing direct labor hour requirements for the coming year. Data for each department are as follows:

Estimated hours per unit

Cutting

Grinding

Product T

1.1

0.5

Product M

0.6

2.9

Product B

3.2

1.0

Hourly labor rate

$9

$7

Prepare a direct labor budget for the coming year that shows the budgeted direct labor costs for each department and for the company as a whole.

carole dahl is chief financial officer of the phoenix division of dahl corporation a 544707

Overhead Budget

Carole Dahl is chief financial officer of the Phoenix Division of Dahl Corporation, a multinational company with three operating divisions. As part of the budgeting process, Dahl’s staff is developing the overhead budget for next year. The division estimates that it will manufacture 50,000 units during the year. The budgeted cost information is as follows:

Variable Rate per Unit

Total Fixed Costs

Indirect materials

$1.00

Indirect labor

4.00

Supplies

0.40

Repairs and maintenance

3.00

$ 40,000

Electricity

0.10

20,000

Factory supervision

180,000

Insurance

25,000

Property taxes

35,000

Depreciation–machinery

82,000

Depreciation–building

72,000

Using these data, prepare the division’s overhead budget for next year.

dacahr bros inc is an automobile maintenance and repair company with outlets through 544708

Cash Collections

Dacahr Bros., Inc., is an automobile maintenance and repair company with outlets throughout the western United States. Henley Turlington, the company controller, is starting to assemble the cash budget for the fourth quarter. Projected sales for the quarter are as follows:

On Account

Cash

October

$452,000

$196,800

November

590,000

214,000

December

720,500

218,400

Cash collection records pertaining to sales on account indicate the following collection pattern:

Month of sale

40%

First month following sale

30

Second month following sale

28

Uncollectible

2

Sales on account during August were $346,000. During September, sales on account were $395,000.

Compute the amount of cash to be collected from customers during each month of the fourth quarter.

xyz company collects payment on 50 percent of credit sales in the month of sale 544709

Cash Collections

XYZ Company collects payment on 50 percent of credit sales in the month of sale, 40 percent in the month following sale, and 5 percent in the second month following the sale. Its sales budget is as follows:

Month

Cash Sales

Credit Sales

May

$20,000

$ 40,000

June

40,000

60,000

July

60,000

80,000

August

80,000

100,000

Compute XYZ Company’s total cash collections in July and its total cash collections in August.

saba enterprises needs a cash budget for the month of june 544710

Cash Budget

SABA Enterprises needs a cash budget for the month of June. The following information is available:

a. The cash balance on June 1 is $4,000.

b. Sales for May and June are $50,000 and $40,000, respectively. Cash collections on sales are 40 percent in the month of sale and 50 percent in the month after the sale; 10 percent of sales are uncollectible.

c. General expenses budgeted for June are $20,000 (depreciation represents $1,000 of this amount).

d. Inventory purchases will total $40,000 in May and $30,000 in June. The company pays for half of its inventory purchases in the month of purchase and for the other half the month after purchase.

e. The company will pay $5,000 in cash for office furniture in June. Sales commissions for June are budgeted at $6,000.

f. The company maintains a minimum ending cash balance of $4,000 and can borrow from the bank in multiples of $100. All loans are repaid after 60 days.

Prepare a cash budget for SABA Enterprises for the month of June.

tex kinkaid s dream was to develop the biggest produce operation with the widest sel 544711

Cash Budget

Tex Kinkaid’s dream was to develop the biggest produce operation with the widest selection of fresh fruits and vegetables in northern Texas. Within three years of opening Mini garden Produce, Inc., Kincaid accomplished his objective. Kinkaid has asked you to prepare monthly cash budgets for Mini garden Produce for the quarter ended September 30.

Credit sales to retailers in the area constitute 80 percent of Mini garden Produce’s business; cash sales to customers at the company’s retail outlet make up the other 20 percent. Collection records indicate that Mini garden Produce collects payment on 50 percent of all credit sales during the month of sale, 30 percent in the month after the sale, and 20 percent in the second month after the sale.

The company’s total sales in May were $66,000; in June, they were $67,500. Anticipated sales in July are $69,500; in August, $76,250; and in September, $84,250. The company’s purchases are expected to total $43,700 in July, $48,925 in August, and $55,725 in September. The company pays for all purchases in cash.

Projected monthly costs for the quarter include $1,040 for heat, light, and power; $375 for bank fees; $1,925 for rent; $1,120 for supplies; $1,705 for depreciation of equipment; $1,285 for equipment repairs; and $475 for miscellaneous expenses. Other projected costs for the quarter are salaries and wages of $18,370 in July, $19,200 in August, and $20,300 in September.

The company’s cash balance at June 30 was $2,745. It has a policy of maintaining a minimum monthly cash balance of $1,500.

1. Prepare a monthly cash budget for Mini garden Produce, Inc., for the quarter ended September 30.

2. Should Mini garden Produce anticipate taking out a loan during the quarter? If so, how much should it borrow, and when?

delft house inc a multinational company based in amsterdam organizes and coordinates 544712

Budgeted Income Statement

Delft House, Inc., a multinational company based in Amsterdam, organizes and coordinates art shows and auctions throughout the world. Its budgeted and actual costs for last year are as follows:

Budgeted Cost

Actual Cost

Salaries expense, staging

€ 480,000

€ 512,800

Salaries expense, executive

380,000

447,200

Travel costs

640,000

652,020

Auctioneer services

540,000

449,820

Space rental costs

251,000

246,580

Printing costs

192,000

182,500

Advertising expense

169,000

183,280

Insurance, merchandise

84,800

77,300

Insurance, liability

64,000

67,100

Home office costs

209,200

219,880

Shipping costs

105,000

112,560

Miscellaneous

25,000

25,828

Total operating expenses

€3,140,000

€3,176,868

Net receipts

€6,200,000

€6,369,200

Delft House, Inc., has budgeted the following fixed costs for the coming year: executive salaries, €440,000; advertising expense, €190,000; merchandise insurance, €80,000; and liability insurance, €68,000. Additional information pertaining to the operations of Delft House, Inc., in the coming years is as follows:

a. Net receipts are estimated at €6,400,000.

b. Salaries expense for staging will increase 20 percent over the actual figures for the last year.

c. Travel costs are expected to be 11 percent of net receipts.

d. Auctioneer services will be billed at 9.5 percent of net receipts.

e. Space rental costs will be 20 percent higher than the amount budgeted in the last year.

f. Printing costs are expected to be €190,000.

g. Home office costs are budgeted for €230,000.

h. Shipping costs are expected to be 20 percent higher than the amount budgeted in the last year.

i. Miscellaneous expenses for the coming year will be budgeted at €28,000.

Because the company sells only services, it has expenses only and no cost of sales.

(Net receipts equal gross margin.)

1. Using a 40 percent income tax rate, prepare the company’s budgeted income statement for the coming year.

2. Should the budget committee be worried about the trend in the company’s operations? Explain your answer.

the principal product of yangsoo enterprises inc is a multipurpose hammer that carri 544713

Preparing Operating Budgets

The principal product of Yangsoo Enterprises, Inc., is a multipurpose hammer that carries a lifetime guarantee. Listed next are cost and production data for the Yangsoo hammer.

Direct materials

Anodized steel: 2 kilograms per hammer at $1.60 per kilogram

Leather strapping for the handle: 0.5 square meter per hammer at $4.40 per square meter

Direct labor

Forging operation: $12.50 per labor hour; 6 minutes per hammer

Leather-wrapping operation: $12.00 per direct labor hour; 12 minutes per hammer Overhead

Forging operation: rate equals 70 percent of department’s direct labor dollars

Leather-wrapping operation: rate equals 50 percent of department’s direct labor dollars In October, November, and December, Yangsoo Enterprises expects to produce 108,000, 104,000, and 100,000 hammers, respectively. The company has no beginning or ending balances of direct materials inventory or work in process inventory for the year.

Required

1. For the three-month period ending December 31, prepare monthly production cost information for the Yangsoo hammer. Classify the costs as direct materials, direct labor, or overhead, and show your computations.

2. Prepare a cost of goods manufactured budget for the hammer. Show monthly cost data and combined totals for the quarter for each cost category.

felasco nurseries inc has been in business for six years and has four divisions 544714

Basic Cash Budget

Felasco Nurseries, Inc.has been in business for six years and has four divisions. Ethan Poulis, the corporation’s controller, has been asked to prepare a cash budget for the Southern Division for the first quarter. Projected data supporting this budget follow.

Sales (60% on credit)

Purchases

November

$160,000

December

$ 86,800

December

200,000

January

124,700

January

120,000

February

99,440

February

160,000

March

104,800

March

140,000

Collection records of accounts receivable have shown that 30 percent of all credit sales are collected in the month of sale, 60 percent in the month following the sale, and 8 percent in the second month following the sale; 2 percent of the sales are uncollectible. All purchases are paid for in the month after the purchase. Salaries and wages are projected to be $25,200 in January, $33,200 in February, and $21,200 in March. Estimated monthly costs are utilities, $4,220; collection fees, $1,700; rent, $5,300; equipment depreciation, $5,440; supplies, $2,480; small tools, $3,140; and miscellaneous, $1,900.

Each of the corporation’s divisions maintains a $6,000 minimum cash balance. As of December 31, the Southern Division had a cash balance of $9,600.

Required

1. Prepare a monthly cash budget for Felasco Nurseries’ Southern Division for the first quarter.

2. Should Felasco Nurseries anticipate taking out a loan for the Southern Division during the quarter? If so, how much should it borrow, and when?

security services company provides security monitoring services 544715

Cash Budget

Security Services Company provides security monitoring services. It employs five security specialists. Each specialist works an average of 160 hours a month. The company’s controller has compiled the following information:

Actual Data for Last Year

Forecasted Data for Next Year

Security

November

December

January

February

March

billings (sales)

$30,000

$35,000

$25,000

$20,000

$30,000

Selling and

administrative

10,000

11,000

9,000

8,000

10,500

expenses

Operating

supplies

Service

2,500

3,500

2,500

2,000

3,000

overhead

3,000

3,500

3,000

2,500

3,000

Sixty percent of the client billings are cash sales collected during the month of sale; 30 percent are collected in the first month following the sale; and 10 percent are collected in the second month following the sale. Operating supplies are paid for in the month of purchase. Selling and administrative expenses and service overhead are paid in the month following the cost’s incurrence.

The company has a bank loan of $12,000 at a 12 percent annual interest rate. Interest is paid monthly, and $2,000 of the loan principal is due on February 28. Income taxes of $4,500 for the last calendar year are due and payable on March 15. The five security specialists each earn $8.50 an hour, and all payroll-related employee benefit costs are included in service overhead. The company anticipates no capital expenditures for the first quarter of the coming year. It expects its cash balance on December 31 to be $13,000.

Required

Prepare a monthly cash budget for Security Services Company for the three month period ended March 31.

moon trust bank has asked the president of wish ware products inc for a budgeted inc 544716

Budgeted Income Statement and Budgeted Balance Sheet

Moon trust Bank has asked the president of Wish ware Products, Inc., for a budgeted income statement and budgeted balance sheet for the quarter ended June 30. These pro forma financial statements are needed to support Wish ware Products’ request for a loan.

Wish ware Products routinely prepares a quarterly master budget. The operating budgets prepared for the quarter ending June 30 have provided the following information: Projected sales for April are $220,400; for May, $164,220; and for June, $165,980. Direct materials purchases for the period are estimated at $96,840; direct materials usage, at $102,710; direct labor expenses, at $71,460; overhead, at $79,940; selling and administrative expenses, at $143,740; capital expenditures, at $125,000 (to be spent on June 29); cost of goods manufactured, at $252,880; and cost of goods sold, at $251,700.

Balance sheet account balances at March 31 were as follows: Accounts Receivable, $26,500; Materials Inventory, $23,910; Work in Process Inventory, $31,620; Finished Goods Inventory, $36,220; Prepaid Expenses, $7,200; Plant, Furniture, and Fixtures, $498,600; Accumulated Depreciation–Plant, Furniture, and Fixtures, $141,162; Patents, $90,600; Accounts Payable, $39,600; Notes Payable, $105,500; Common Stock, $250,000; and Retained Earnings, $207,158.

Projected monthly cash balances for the second quarter are as follows: April 30, $20,490; May 31, $35,610; and June 30, $45,400. During the quarter, accounts receivable are expected to increase by 30 percent, patents to go up by $6,500, prepaid expenses to remain constant, and accounts payable to go down by 10 percent (Wish ware Products will make a $5,000 payment on a note payable, $4,100 of which is principal reduction). The federal income tax rate is 34 percent, and the second quarter’s tax is paid in July. Depreciation for the quarter will be $6,420, which is included in the overhead budget. The company will pay no dividends.

Required

1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the quarter ended June 30. Round answers to the nearest dollar.

2. Prepare a budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.

fm company provides fraud monitoring services 544717

Cash Budget

FM Company provides fraud monitoring services. It employs four fraud specialists. Each specialist works an average of 200 hours a month. The company’s controller has compiled the following information:

Actual Data for Last Year

Forecasted Data for Next Year

November

December

January

February

March

Billings (sales)

$100,000

$80,000

$60,000

50,000

$70,000

Selling and

administrative

expenses

15,000

12,000

8,000

7,000

10,000

Operating

supplies

2,500

3,500

2,500

2,000

3,000

Service

overhead

14,000

13,500

13,000

12,500

13,000

Seventy percent of the client billings are cash sales collected during the month of sale; 20 percent are collected in the first month following the sale; and 10 percent are collected in the second month following the sale. Operating supplies are paid in the month of purchase. Selling and administrative expenses and service overhead are paid in the month the cost is incurred.

The company has a bank loan of $12,000 at a 6 percent annual interest rate. Interest is paid monthly, and $2,000 of the loan principal is due on February 28. Income taxes of $6,500 for last calendar year are due and payable on March 15. The four security specialists each earn $48.00 an hour, and all payroll-related employee benefit costs are included in service overhead. The company anticipates no capital expenditures for the first quarter of the coming year. It expects its cash balance on December 31 to be $10,000.

Required

Prepare a monthly cash budget for FM Company for the three-month period ended March 31.

stillwater video company inc produces and markets two popular video games high range 544718

Budgeted Income Statement and Budgeted Balance Sheet

Stillwater Video Company, Inc., produces and markets two popular video games, High Range and Star Boundary. The closing account balances on the company’s balance sheet for last year are as follows: Cash, $18,735; Accounts Receivable, $19,900; Materials Inventory, $18,510; Work in Process Inventory, $24,680; Finished Goods Inventory, $21,940; Prepaid Expenses, $3,420; Plant and Equipment, $262,800; Accumulated Depreciation–Plant and Equipment, $55,845; Other Assets, $9,480; Accounts Payable, $52,640; Mortgage Payable, $70,000; Common Stock, $90,000; and Retained Earnings, $110,980.

Operating budgets for the first quarter of the coming year show the following estimated costs: direct materials purchases, $58,100; direct materials usage, $62,400; direct labor expense, $42,880; overhead, $51,910; selling expenses, $35,820; general and administrative expenses, $60,240; cost of goods manufactured, $163,990; and cost of goods sold, $165,440. Estimated ending cash balances are as follows: January, $34,610; February, $60,190; and March, $54,802. The company will have no capital expenditures during the quarter.

Sales are projected to be $125,200 in January, $105,100 in February, and $112,600 in March. Accounts receivable are expected to double during the quarter, and accounts payable are expected to decrease by 20 percent. Mortgage payments for the quarter will total $6,000, of which $2,000 will be interest expense. Prepaid expenses are expected to go up by $20,000, and other assets are projected to increase by 50 percent over the budget period. Depreciation for plant and equipment (already included in the overhead budget) averages 5 percent of total plant and equipment per year. Federal income taxes (34 percent of profits) are payable in April. The company pays no dividends.

mc lennon company has a plant capacity of 100 000 units per year 544663

Breakeven Analysis and Pricing

Mc Lennon Company has a plant capacity of 100,000 units per year, but its budget for this year indicates that only 60,000 units will be produced and sold. The entire budget for this year is as follows:

Sales (60,000 units at $4)

$240,000

Less cost of goods produced (based on

production of 60,000 units)

Direct materials (variable)

60,000

Direct labor (variable)

30,000

Variable over head costs

45,000

Fixed overhead costs

75,000

Total cost of goods produced

$210,000

Gross margin

$30,000

Less selling and administrative expenses

Selling (fixed)

$24,000

Administrative (fixed)

$36,000

Total selling and administrative expenses

60,000

Operating income (loss)

($30,000)

1. Given the budgeted selling price and cost data, how many units would McLennon have to sell to break even? (Hint: Be sure to consider selling and administrative expenses.)

2. Market research indicates that if Mc Lennon were to drop its selling price to $3.80 per unit, it could sell 100,000 units. Would you recommend the drop in price? What would the new operating income or loss be?

saline aquarium inc manufactures and sells aquariums water pumps and air filters 544664

Breakeven Point for Multiple Products

Saline Aquarium, Inc. manufactures and sells aquariums, water pumps, and air filters. The sales mix is 1:2:2 (i.e., for every one aquarium sold, two water pumps and two air filters are sold). Using the contribution margin approach, find the breakeven point in units for each product. The company’s fixed costs are $26,000. Other information is as follows:

Selling Price per Unit

Variable Costs per Unit

Aquariums

$60

$25

Water pumps

20

$12

Air filters

10

3

hamburgers and more inc sells hamburgers drinks and fries the sales mix is 1 3 2 i e 544665

Breakeven Point for Multiple Products

Hamburgers and More, Inc., sells hamburgers, drinks, and fries. The sales mix is 1:3:2 (i.e., for every one hamburger sold, three drinks and two fries are sold). Using the contribution margin approach, find the breakeven point in units for each product. The company’s fixed costs are $2,040. Other information is as follows:

Selling Price per Unit

Variable Costs per Unit

Hamburgers

$0.99

$0.27

Drinks

$1

$0

Fries

$1

$0

ella mae simpson is the owner of a hairdressing salon in palm coast florida 544666

Sales Mix Analysis

Ella Mae Simpson is the owner of a hairdressing salon in Palm Coast, Florida. Her salon provides three basic services: shampoo and set, permanents, and cut and blow dry. The following are its operating results from the past quarter:

Type of Service

Number of Customers

Total Sales

Contribution Margin in Dollars

Shampoo and set

$1,200.00

$24,000.00

$14,700

Permanents

$420

$21,000

15,120

Cut and blow dry

$1,000

$15,000

$10,000

Total fixed costs

2,620

$60,000

$39,820

Profit

30,000

9,820

Compute the breakeven point in units based on the weighted-average contribution margin for the sales mix.

target systems inc makes heat seeking missiles 544667

Contribution Margin and Profit Planning

Target Systems, Inc., makes heat-seeking missiles. It has recently been offered a government contract from which it may realize a profit. The contract purchase price is $130,000 per missile, but the number of units to be purchased has not yet been decided. The company’s fixed costs are budgeted at $3,973,500, and variable costs are $68,500 per unit.

1. Compute the number of units the company should agree to make at the stated contract price to earn a profit of $1,500,000.

2. Using a lighter material, the variable unit cost can be reduced by $1,730, but total fixed overhead will increase by $27,500. How many units must be produced to make $1,500,000 in profit?

3. Given the figures in 2, how many additional units must be produced to increase profit by $1,264,600?

short term automobile rentals are the specialty of asap auto rentals inc 544668

Planning Future Sales

Short-term automobile rentals are the specialty of ASAP Auto Rentals, Inc. Average variable operating costs have been $12.50 per day per automobile. The company owns 60 automobiles. Fixed operating costs for the next year are expected to be $145,500. Average daily rental revenue per automobile is expected to be $34.50. Management would like to earn a profit of $47,000 during the year.

1. Calculate the total number of daily rentals the company must have during the year to earn the targeted profit.

2. On the basis of your answer to 1, determine the average number of days each automobile must be rented.

3. Determine the total revenue needed to achieve the targeted profit of $47,000.

4. What would the total rental revenue be if fixed operating costs could be lowered by $5,180 and the targeted profit increased to $70,000?

luke ricci cpa is the owner of a firm that provides tax services 544669

Cost Behavior in a Service Business

Luke Ricci, CPA, is the owner of a firm that provides tax services. The firm charges $50 per return for the direct professional labor involved in preparing standard short-form tax returns. In January, the firm prepared 850 such returns in February, 1,000; and in March, 700. Service overhead (telephone and utilities, depreciation on equipment and building, tax forms, office supplies, and wages of clerical personnel) for January was $18,500; for February, $20,000; and for March, $17,000.

1. Determine the variable and fixed cost components of the firm’s Service Overhead account.

2. What would the estimated total cost per tax return be if the firm prepares 825 standard short-form tax returns in April?

power brite painting company specializes in refurbishing exterior painted surfaces t 544671

Cost Behavior and Projection for a Service Business

Power Brite Painting Company specializes in refurbishing exterior painted surfaces that have been hard hit by humidity and insect debris. It uses a special technique, called pressure cleaning, before priming and painting the surface. The refurbishing process involves the following steps:

1. Unskilled laborers trim all trees and bushes within two feet of the structure.

2. Skilled laborers clean the building with a high-pressure cleaning machine, using about 6 gallons of chlorine per job.

3. Unskilled laborers apply a coat of primer.

4. Skilled laborers apply oil-based exterior paint to the entire surface.

On average, skilled laborers work 12 hours per job, and unskilled laborers work 8 hours. The refurbishing process generated the following operating results during the year on 628 jobs:

Skilled labor

$20 per hour

Unskilled labor

$8 per hour

Gallons of chlorine used

3,768 gallons at $5.50 per gallon

Paint primer

7,536 gallons at $15.50 per gallon

Paint

6,280 gallons at $16 per gallon

Depreciation of paint-spraying

$600 per month depreciation

equipment

Lease of two vans

$800 per month total

Rent on storage building

$450 per month

Data on utilities for the year are as follows:

Month

Number of Jobs

Cost

Hours Worked

January

42

$3,950

$840

February

37

3,550

$740

March

44

4,090

880

April

49

4,410

$980

May

54

4,720

1,080

June

62

5,240

$1,240

July

71

$5,820

1,420

August

73

$5,890

$1,460

September

63

5,370

1,260

October

48

$4,340

960

November

45

4,210

900

December

40

3,830

800

Totals

628

$55,420

12,560

Required

1. Classify the costs as variable, fixed, or mixed.

2. Using the high-low method, separate mixed costs into their variable and fixed components. Use total hours worked as the basis.

3. Compute the average cost per job for the year. (Hint: Divide the total of all costs for the year by the number of jobs completed.)

4. Project the average cost per job for next year if variable costs per job increase 20 percent.

5. Why can actual utility costs vary from the amount computed using the utilities cost formula (requirement 2)?

luce morgan a law firm in downtown jefferson city is considering opening a legal cli 544672

Breakeven Analysis

Luce & Morgan, a law firm in downtown Jefferson City, is considering opening a legal clinic for middle- and low-income clients. The clinic would bill at a rate of $18 per hour. It would employ law students as paraprofessional help and pay them $9 per hour. Other variable costs are anticipated to be $5.40 per hour, and annual fixed costs are expected to total $27,000.

Required

1. Compute the breakeven point in billable hours.

2. Compute the breakeven point in total billings.

3. Find the new breakeven point in total billings if fixed costs should go up by $2,340.

4. Using the original figures, compute the breakeven point in total billings if the billing rate decreases by $1 per hour, variable costs decrease by $0.40 per hour, and fixed costs go down by $3,600.

icon industries is considering a new product for its trophy division 544673

Planning Future Sales: Contribution Margin Approach

Icon Industries is considering a new product for its Trophy Division. The product, which would feature an alligator, is expected to have global market appeal and to become the mascot for many high school and university athletic teams. Expected variable unit costs are as follows: direct materials, $18.50; direct labor, $4.25; production supplies, $1.10; selling costs, $2.80; and other, $1.95. Annual fixed costs are depreciation, building, and equipment, $36,000; advertising, $45,000; and other, $11,400. Icon Industries plans to sell the product for $55.00.

Required

1.Using the contribution margin approach, compute the number of units the company must sell to (a) break even and (b) earn a profit of $70,224.

2. Using the same data, compute the number of units that must be sold to earn a profit of $139,520 if advertising costs rise by $40,000.

3. Using the original information and sales of 10,000 units, compute the selling price the company must use to make a profit of $131,600. (Hint: Calculate contribution margin per unit first.)

4. According to the vice president of marketing, Albert Flora, the most optimistic annual sales estimate for the product would be 15,000 units, and the highest competitive selling price the company can charge is $52 per unit. How much more can be spent on fixed advertising costs if the selling price is $52, if the variable costs cannot be reduced, and if the targeted profit for 15,000 unit sales is $251,000?

write company has a maximum capacity of 200 000 units per year 544674

Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales

Write Company has a maximum capacity of 200,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs are $12 per unit. Fixed overhead is $600,000 per year. Variable selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $23 per unit.

Required

1. What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?

2. How many units must Write Company sell to earn a profit of $240,000 per year?

3. A strike at one of the company’s major suppliers has caused a shortage of materials, so the current year’s production and sales are limited to 160,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is planning to reduce fixed costs to $841,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $23 per unit.

a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution margin of the first 30,000 units sold?

b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 130,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $210,000 this year?

lending hand financial corporation is a subsidiary of gracey enterprises 544675

Planning Future Sales for a Service Business

Lending Hand Financial Corporation is a subsidiary of Gracey Enterprises. Its main business is processing loan applications. Last year, Bettina Brent, the manager of the corporation’s loan department, established a policy of charging a $250 fee for every loan application processed. Next year’s variable costs have been projected as follows: loan consultant’s wages, $15.50 per hour (a loan application takes 5 hours to process); supplies, $2.40 per application; and other variable costs, $5.60 per application. Annual fixed costs include depreciation of equipment, $8,500; building rental, $14,000; promotional costs, $12,500; and other fixed costs, $8,099.

Required

1. Using the contribution margin approach, compute the number of loan applications the company must process to (a) break even and (b) earn a profit of $14,476.

2. Using the same approach and assuming promotional costs increase by $5,662, compute the number of applications the company must process to earn a profit of $20,000.

3. Assuming the original information and the processing of 500 applications, compute the loan application fee the company must charge if the targeted profit is $41,651.

4. Brent’s staff can handle a maximum of 750 loan applications. How much more can be spent on promotional costs if the highest fee tolerable to the customer is $280, if variable costs cannot be reduced, and if the targeted profit for the loan applications is $50,000?

officials of the hidden hills golf and tennis club are in the process of preparing a 544676

Mixed Costs

Officials of the Hidden Hills Golf and Tennis Club are in the process of preparing a budget for the year ending December 31. Because Ramon Saud, the club treasurer, has had difficulty with two expense items, the process has been delayed by more than four weeks. The two items are mixed costs—expenses for electricity and for repairs and maintenance—and Saud has been having trouble breaking them down into their variable and fixed components. An accountant friend has suggested that he use the high-low method to divide the costs into their variable and fixed parts. The spending patterns and activity measures related to each cost during the past year are as follows:

Electricity Expense

Repairs and Maintenance

Month

Amount

Kilowatt- Hours

Amount

Labor Hours

January

$ 7,500

210,000

$ 7,578

220

February

8,255

240,200

7,852

230

March

8,165

236,600

7,304

210

April

8,960

268,400

7,030

200

May

7,520

210,800

7,852

230

June

7,025

191,000

8,126

240

July

6,970

188,800

8,400

250

August

6,990

189,600

8,674

260

September

7,055

192,200

8,948

270

October

7,135

195,400

8,674

260

November

8,560

252,400

8,126

240

December

8,415

246,600

7,852

230

Totals

$92,550

2,622,000

$96,416

2,840

Required

1. Using the high-low method, compute the variable cost rates used last year for each expense. What was the monthly fixed cost for electricity and for repairs and maintenance?

2. Compute the total variable cost and total fixed cost for each expense category for last year.

3. Saud believes that in the coming year, the electricity rate will increase by $0.005 and the repairs rate, by $1.20. Usage of all items and their fixed cost amounts will remain constant. Compute the projected total cost for each category. How will the cost increases affect the club’s profits and cash flow?

officials of the hidden hills golf and tennis club are in the process of preparing a 544677

Mixed Costs

Officials of the Hidden Hills Golf and Tennis Club are in the process of preparing a budget for the year ending December 31. Because Ramon Saud, the club treasurer, has had difficulty with two expense items, the process has been delayed by more than four weeks. The two items are mixed costs—expenses for electricity and for repairs and maintenance—and Saud has been having trouble breaking them down into their variable and fixed components. An accountant friend has suggested that he use the high-low method to divide the costs into their variable and fixed parts. The spending patterns and activity measures related to each cost during the past year are as follows:

Electricity Expense

Repairs and Maintenance

Month

Amount

Kilowatt- Hours

Amount

Labor Hours

January

$ 7,500

210,000

$ 7,578

220

February

8,255

240,200

7,852

230

March

8,165

236,600

7,304

210

April

8,960

268,400

7,030

200

May

7,520

210,800

7,852

230

June

7,025

191,000

8,126

240

July

6,970

188,800

8,400

250

August

6,990

189,600

8,674

260

September

7,055

192,200

8,948

270

October

7,135

195,400

8,674

260

November

8,560

252,400

8,126

240

December

8,415

246,600

7,852

230

Totals

$92,550

2,622,000

$96,416

2,840

Required

1. Using the high-low method, compute the variable cost rates used last year for each expense. What was the monthly fixed cost for electricity and for repairs and maintenance?

2. Compute the total variable cost and total fixed cost for each expense category for last year.

3. Saud believes that in the coming year, the electricity rate will increase by $0.005 and the repairs rate, by $1.20. Usage of all items and their fixed cost amounts will remain constant. Compute the projected total cost for each category. How will the cost increases affect the club’s profits and cash flow?

at the beginning of each year the accounting department at moon glow lighting ltd mu 544678

Breakeven Analysis

At the beginning of each year, the Accounting Department at Moon Glow Lighting, Ltd., must find the point at which projected sales revenue will equal total budgeted variable and fixed costs. The company produces custom-made, low voltage outdoor lighting systems. Each system sells for an average of $435. Variable costs per unit are $210. Total fixed costs for the year are estimated to be $166,500.

Required

1. Compute the breakeven point in sales units.

2. Compute the breakeven point in sales dollars.

3. Find the new breakeven point in sales units if the fixed costs go up by $10,125.

4. Using the original figures, compute the breakeven point in sales units if the selling price decreases to $425 per unit, fixed costs go up by $15,200, and variable costs decrease by $15 per unit.

peerless company has a maximum capacity of 500 000 units per year 544680

Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales

Peerless Company has a maximum capacity of 500,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs are $25 per unit. Fixed overhead is $900,000 per year. Variable selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $36 per unit.

Required

1. What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?

2. How many units must Peerless Company sell to earn a profit of $600,000 per year?

3. A strike at one of the company’s major suppliers has caused a shortage of materials, so the current year’s production and sales are limited to 400,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is planning to reduce fixed costs to $1,000,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $36 per unit.

a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution margin of the first 30,000 units sold?

b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 370,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $300,000 this year?

home mortgage inc s primary business is processing mortgage loan applications 544681

Planning Future Sales for a Service Business

Home Mortgage Inc.’s primary business is processing mortgage loan applications. Last year, Jenna Jason, the manager of the mortgage application department, established a policy of charging a $500 fee for every loan application processed. Next year’s variable costs have been projected as follows: mortgage processor wages, $30 per hour (a mortgage application takes 3 hours to process); supplies, $10 per application; and other variable costs, $15 per application. Annual fixed costs include depreciation of equipment, $5,000; building rental, $34,000; promotional costs, $45,000; and other fixed costs, $20,000.

Required

1. Using the contribution margin approach, compute the number of loan applications the company must process to (a) break even and (b) earn a profit of $50,000.

2. Using the same approach and assuming promotional costs increase by $5,400, compute the number of applications the company must process to earn a profit of $60,000.

3. Assuming the original information and the processing of 500 applications, compute the loan application fee the company must charge if the targeted profit is $40,000.

4. Jason’s staff can handle a maximum of 750 loan applications. How much more can be spent on promotional costs if the highest fee tolerable to the customer is $400, if variable costs cannot be reduced, and if the targeted profit for the loan applications is $50,000?

lesley chomski is the supervisor of the new product division of mco corporation 544682

Breaking Even and Ethics

Lesley Chomski is the supervisor of the New Product Division of MCO Corporation. Her annual bonus is based on the success of new products and is computed on the number of sales that exceed each new product’s projected breakeven point. In reviewing the computations supporting her most recent bonus, Chomski found that although an order for 7,500 units of a new product called R56 had been refused by a customer and returned to the company, the order had been included in the bonus calculations. She later discovered that the company’s accountant had labeled the return an overhead expense and had charged the entire cost of the returned order to the plant wide Overhead account. The result was that product R56 appeared to exceed breakeven by more than 5,000 units and Chomski’s bonus from this product amounted to over $1,000. What actions should Chomski take? Be prepared to discuss your response in class.

visit a local fast food restaurant observe all aspects of the operation and take not 544683

Cost Behavior and Contribution Margin

Visit a local fast-food restaurant. Observe all aspects of the operation and take notes on the entire process. Describe the procedures used to take, process, and fill an order and deliver the order to the customer. Based on your observations, make a list of the costs incurred by the operation. Identify at least three variable costs and three fixed costs. Can you identify any potential mixed costs? Why is the restaurant willing to sell a large drink for only a few cents more than a medium drink? How is the restaurant able to offer a “value meal” (e.g., sandwich, drink, and fries) for considerably less than those items would cost if they were bought separately? Bring your notes to class and be prepared to discuss your findings.

Your instructor will divide the class into groups to discuss the case. Summarize your group’s discussion, and ask one member of the group to present the summary to the rest of the class.

based in italy datura ltd is an international importer exporter of pottery with dist 544684

C-V-P Analysis

Based in Italy, Datura, Ltd., is an international importer-exporter of pottery with distribution centers in the United States, Europe, and Australia. The company was very successful in its early years, but its profitability has since declined. As a member of a management team selected to gather information for Datura’s next strategic planning meeting, you have been asked to review its most recent contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010, which appears below.

Datura, Ltd.

Contribution Margin Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales revenue

€13,500,000

Less variable costs

Purchases

€6,000,000

Distribution

2,115,000

Sales commissions

1,410,000

Total variable costs

9,525,000

Contribution margin

€ 3,975,000

Less fixed costs

Distribution

€ 985,000

Selling

1,184,000

General and administrative

871,875

Total fixed costs

3,040,875

Operating income

€ 934,125

In 2010, Datura sold 15,000 sets of pottery.

1. For each set of pottery sold in 2010, calculate the (a) selling price, (b) variable purchases cost, (c) variable distribution cost, (d) variable sales commission, and (e) contribution margin.

2. Calculate the breakeven point in units and in sales euros.

3. Historically, Datura’s variable costs have been about 60 percent of sales. What was the ratio of variable costs to sales in 2010? List three actions Datura could take to correct the difference.

4. How would fixed costs have been affected if Datura had sold only 14,000 sets of pottery in 2010?

boulware products inc produces printers for wholesale distributors 544633

Activity-Based Costing

Boulware Products, Inc. produces printers for wholesale distributors. It has just completed packaging an order from Shawl Company for 450 printers. Before the order is shipped, the controller wants to compare the unit costs computed under the company’s new activity-based costing system with the unit costs computed under its traditional costing system. Boulware’s traditional costing system assigned overhead costs at a rate of 240 percent of direct labor cost.

Data for the Shawl order are as follows: direct materials, $17,552; purchased parts, $14,856; direct labor hours, 140; and average direct labor pay rate per hour, $17.

Data for activity-based costing related to processing direct materials and purchased parts for the Shawl order are as follows:

Activity

Cost Driver

Activity Cost Rate

Activity Usage

Engineering

Engineering

$28 per engineering

18 engineering

systems design

hours

hour

hours

Setup

Number of

$36 per setup

12 setups

setups

82 machine

Parts production

Machine hours

$37 per machine hour

hours

Product assembly

Assembly hours

$42 per assembly hour

96 assembly hours

Packaging

Number of

$5.60 per package

150 packages

packages

Building

Machine hours

$10 per machine

82 machine

occupancy

hour

hours

Required

1. Use the traditional costing approach to compute the total cost and the product unit cost of the Shawl order.

2. Using the cost hierarchy, identify each activity as unit level, batch level, product level, or facility level.

3. Prepare a bill of activities for the activity costs.

4. Use ABC to compute the total cost and product unit cost of the Shawl order.

5. What is the difference between the product unit cost you computed using the traditional approach and the one you computed using ABC? Does the use of ABC guarantee cost reduction for every order?

noir company produces four versions of its model j17 21 bicycle seat 544634

Activity Cost Rates

Noir Company produces four versions of its model J17-21 bicycle seat. The four versions have different shapes, but their processing operations and production costs are identical. During July, these costs were incurred:

Direct materials

Leather

$25,430

Metal frame

39,180

Bolts

3,010

Materials handling

Labor

8,232

Equipment depreciation

4,410

Electrical power

2,460

Maintenance

5,184

Assembly

Direct labor

Engineering design

4,116

Labor

1,176

Electrical power

7,644

Engineering overhead

Overhead

Equipment depreciation

7,056

Indirect labor

30,870

Supervision

17,640

Operating supplies

4,410

Electrical power

10,584

Repairs and maintenance

21,168

Building occupancy overhead

52,920

July’s output totaled 29,400 units. Each unit requires three machine hours of effort. Materials handling costs are allocated to the products based on direct materials cost, engineering design costs are allocated based on units produced, and overhead is allocated based on machine hours. Assembly costs are allocated based on direct labor hours, which are estimated at 882 for July.

During July, Noir Company completed 520 bicycle seats for Job 142. The activity usage for Job 142 was as follows: direct materials, $1,150; direct labor hours, 15.

Required

1.Compute the following activity cost rates: (a) materials handling cost rate; (b) assembly cost rate, (c) engineering design cost rate, and (d) overhead rate.

2. Prepare a bill of activities for Job 142.

3. Use activity-based costing to compute the job’s total cost and product unit cost.

funz company which produces wooden toys is about to adopt a lean operating environme 544635

Direct and Indirect Costs in Lean and Traditional Manufacturing Environments

Funz Company, which produces wooden toys, is about to adopt a lean operating environment. In anticipation of the change, Letty Hernandez, Funz’s controller, prepared the following list of costs for December:

Wood

$1,200

Insurance–plant

$ 324

Bolts

32

President’s salary

4,000

Small tools

54

Engineering labor

2,700

Depreciation–plant

450

Utilities

1,250

Depreciation–machinery

275

Building occupancy

1,740

Direct labor

2,675

Supervision

2,686

Indirect labor

890

Operating supplies

254

Purchased parts

58

Repairs and maintenance

198

Materials handling

74

Employee benefits

2,654

Required

1. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a traditional manufacturing setting.

2. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a lean environment.

3. Assume that the costs incurred in the lean environment are for a work cell that completed 1,250 toy cars in December. Compute the total direct cost and the direct cost per unit for the cars produced.

automotive parts company produces 12 parts for car bodies and sells them to three au 544636

Back flush Costing

Automotive Parts Company produces 12 parts for car bodies and sells them to three automobile assembly companies in the United States. The company implemented lean operating and costing procedures three years ago. Overhead is applied at a rate of $26 per work cell hour used. All direct materials and purchased parts are used as they are received.

One of the company’s work cells produces automobile fenders that are completely detailed and ready to install when received by the customer. The cell is operated by four employees and involves a flexible manufacturing system with 14 workstations. Operating details for February for this cell are as follows:

Beginning work in process inventory

Beginning finished goods inventory

$420

Cost of direct materials purchased

on account and used

$213,400

Cost of parts purchased on account

and used

$111,250

Direct labor costs incurred

$26,450

Overhead costs assigned

?

Work cell hours used

8,260

Costs of goods completed during

February

$564,650

Ending work in process inventory

$1,210

Ending finished goods inventory

$670

Required

1. Using T accounts, show the cost flows through a back flush costing system.

2. Using T accounts, show the cost flows through a traditional costing system.

3. What is the total cost of goods sold for the month?

direct marketing inc dmi offers database marketing strategies to help companies incr 544637

The Value Chain and Process Value Analysis

Direct Marketing Inc. (DMI) offers database marketing strategies to help companies increase their sales. DMI’s basic package of services includes the design of a mailing piece (either a Direct Mailer or a Store Mailer), creation and maintenance of marketing databases containing information about the client’s target group, and a production process that prints a promotional piece and prepares it for mailing. In its marketing strategies, DMI targets working women ages 25 to 54 who are married with children and who have an annual household income in excess of $50,000. DMI has adopted activity-based management, and its controller is in the process of developing an ABC system. The controller has identified the following primary activities of the company:

Use database of customers

Accounting

Service sales

Mailer assembly

Deliver mailers to post office

Process orders

Supplies storage

Purchase supplies

Client follow-up

Design mailer

Database research trends

Building maintenance

Schedule order processing

Processing cleanup

Personnel

Mailer rework

Required

1. Identify the activities that do not add value to DMI’s services.

2. Assist the controller’s analysis by grouping the value-adding activities into the activity areas of the value chain

3. State whether each non-value-adding activity is necessary or unnecessary. Suggest how each unnecessary activity could be reduced or eliminated.

kauli company produces cellular phones 544638

Activity-Based Costing

Kauli Company produces cellular phones. It has just completed an order for 10,000 phones placed by Stay Connect, Ltd. Kauli recently shifted to an activity based costing system, and its controller is interested in the impact that the ABC system had on the Stay Connect order. Data for that order are as follows: direct materials, $36,950; purchased parts, $21,100; direct labor hours, 220; average direct labor pay rate per hour, $15.

Under Kauli’s traditional costing system, overhead costs were assigned at a rate of 270 percent of direct labor cost.

Data for activity-based costing for the Stay Connect order are as follows:

Activity

Cost Driver

Activity Cost Rate

Activity Usage

Electrical

Engineering hours

$19 per engineering

32 engineering

engineering design

hour

hours

Setup

Number of setups

$29 per setup

11 setups

Parts production

Machine hours

$26 per machine

134 machine

hour

hours

Product testing

Number of tests

$32 per test

52 tests

Packaging

Number of

$0.0374 per package

10,000

packages

packages

Building occupancy

Machine hours

$9.80 per machine

134 machine

hour

hours

Assembly

Direct labor hours

$15 per direct labor

220 direct

hour

labor hours

Required

1. Use the traditional costing approach to compute the total cost and the product unit cost of the Stay Connect order.

2. Using the cost hierarchy, identify each activity as unit level, batch level, product level, or facility level.

3. Prepare a bill of activities for the activity costs.

4. Use ABC to compute the total cost and product unit cost of the Stay Connect order.

5. What is the difference between the product unit cost you computed using the traditional approach and the one you computed using ABC? Does the use of ABC guarantee cost reduction for every order?

meanwhile company produces three models of aluminum skateboards 544639

Activity Cost Rates

Meanwhile Company produces three models of aluminum skateboards. The models have minor differences, but their processing operations and production costs are identical. During June, these costs were incurred:

Direct materials

Aluminum frame

$162,524

Bolts

3,876

Purchased parts

Wheels

74,934

Decals

5,066

Materials handling (assigned based on direct materials cost)

Labor

17,068

Utilities

4,438

Maintenance

914

Depreciation

876

Assembly line (assigned based on labor hours)

Labor

Labor

Setup (assigned based on number of setups)

Labor

6,385

Supplies

762

Overhead

3,953

Product testing (assigned based on number of tests)

Labor

2,765

Supplies

435

Building occupancy (assigned based on machine hours)

Insurance

5,767

Depreciation

2,452

Repairs and maintenance

3,781

For June, output totaled 32,000 skateboards. Each board required 1.5 machine hours of effort. During June, Mean while’s assembly line worked 2,304 hours, performed 370 setups and 64,000 product tests, and completed an order for 1,000 skateboards placed by Whatever Toys Company. The job incurred costs of $5,200 for direct materials and $2,500 for purchased parts. It required 3 setups, 2,000 tests, and 72 assembly line hours.

Required

1. Compute the following activity cost rates:

a. Materials handling cost rate

b. Assembly line cost rate

c. Setup cost rate

d. Product testing cost rate

e. Building occupancy cost rate

2. Prepare a bill of activities for the Whatever Toys job.

3. Use activity-based costing to compute the job’s total cost and product unit cost. (Round your answer to two decimal places.)

caffene company which processes coffee beans into ground coffee is about to adopt a 544640

Direct and Indirect Costs in Lean and Traditional Manufacturing Environments

Caffene Company, which processes coffee beans into ground coffee, is about to adopt a lean operating environment. In anticipation of the change, Hattie Peralto, Caffene’s controller, prepared the following list of costs for the month:

Coffee beans

$5,000

Insurance–plant

$ 300

Bags

100

President’s salary

4,000

Small tools

80

Engineering labor

1,700

Depreciation–plant

400

Utilities

1,250

Depreciation–grinder

200

Building occupancy

1,940

Direct labor

1,000

Supervision

400

Indirect labor

300

Operating supplies

205

Labels

20

Repairs and maintenance

120

Materials handling

75

Employee benefits

500

Required

1. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a traditional manufacturing setting.

2. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a just-in-time (JIT) environment.

3. Assume that the costs incurred in the JIT environment are for a work cell that completed 5,000 1-pound bags of coffee during the month. Compute the total direct cost and the direct cost per unit for the bags produced.

reilly corporation produces metal fasteners using six work cells one for each of its 544641

Back flush Costing

Reilly Corporation produces metal fasteners using six work cells, one for each of its product lines. It implemented just-in-time operations and costing methods two years ago. Overhead is assigned using a rate of $14 per machine hour for the Machine Snap Work Cell. There were no beginning inventories on April 1. All direct materials and purchased parts are used as they are received. Operating details for April for the Machine Snap Work Cell are as follows:

Cost of direct materials purchased on account and used

$104,500

Cost of parts purchased on account and used

$78,900

Direct labor costs incurred

$39,000

Overhead costs assigned

?

Machine hours used

12,220

Costs of goods completed during April

$392,540

Ending work in process inventory

$940

Ending finished goods inventory

$1,020

Required

1. Using T accounts, show the flow of costs through a back flush costing system.

2. Using T accounts, show the flow of costs through a traditional costing system.

3. What is the total cost of goods sold for April using a traditional costing system?

muf a cpa firm has provided audit and tax services to businesses in the london area 544642

ABM and ABC in a Service Business

MUF, a CPA firm, has provided audit and tax services to businesses in the London area for over 50 years. Recently, the firm decided to use ABM and activity-based costing to assign its overhead costs to those service functions. Gemma Fior, the company’s controller, is interested in seeing how the change from the traditional to the activity-based costing approach affects the average cost per audit job. The following information has been provided to assist in the comparison:

Total direct labor costs

£400,000

Other direct costs

120,000

Total direct costs

£520,000

The traditional costing approach assigned overhead costs at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor costs.

Data for activity-based costing of the audit function are as follows:

Activity

Cost Driver

Activity Cost Rate

Activity Usage

Professional

Number of

£2,000 per

50 employees

development

employees

employee

Administration

Number of jobs

£1,000 per job

50 jobs

Client

Number of new

£5,000 per new

29 new clients

development

clients

client

1. Using direct labor cost as the cost driver, calculate the total costs for the audit function. What is the average cost per job?

2. Using activity-based costing to assign overhead, calculate the total costs for the audit function. What is the average cost per job?

3. Calculate the difference in total costs between the two approaches. Why would activity-based costing be the better approach for assigning over head to the audit function?

4. Your instructor will divide the class into groups to work through the case. One student from each group should present the group’s findings to the class.

sandee star the owner of star bakery wants to know the profitability of each of her 544643

ABC and Selling and Administrative Expenses

Sandee Star, the owner of Star Bakery, wants to know the profitability of each of her bakery’s customer groups. She is especially interested in the State Institutions customer group, which is one of the company’s largest. Currently, the bakery is selling doughnuts and snack foods to ten state institutions in three states. The controller has prepared the following income statement for the State Institutions customer group:

Star Bakery

Income Statement for State Institutions Customer Group

For the Year Ended December 31

Sales ($5 per case × 50,000 cases)

$250,000

Cost of goods sold ($3.50 per case ×50,000 cases)

175,000

Gross margin

$75,000

Less: Selling and administrative activity costs

94,750

Operating income (loss) contributed by State Institutions

customer group

($19,750)

Activity

Activity Cost Rate

Actual Cost Driver Level

Activity Cost

Make sales calls

$60 per sales call

60 sales calls

$3,600

Prepare sales orders

10 per sales order

900 sales orders

9,000

Handle inquiries

5 per minute

1,000 minutes

5,000

Ship products

1 per case sold

50,000 cases

50,000

Process invoices

20 per invoice

950 invoices

19,000

Process credits

20 per notice

40 notices

800

Process billings and collections

7 per billing

1,050 billings

7,350

Total selling and administrative activity costs

$94,750

The controller has also provided budgeted information about selling and administrative activities for the State Institutions customer group. For this year, the planned activity cost rates and the annual cost driver levels for each selling and administrative activity are as follows:

Activity

Planned Activity Cost Rate

Planned Annual Cost Driver Level

Make sales calls

$60 per sales call

59 sales calls

Prepare sales orders

10 per sales order

850 sales orders

Handle inquiries

5.10 per minute

1,000 minutes

Ship products

0.60 per case sold

50,000 cases

Process invoices

1 per invoice

500 invoices

Process credits

10 per notice

5 notices

Process billings and

4 per billing

600 billings

collections

You have been called in as a consultant on the State Institutions customer group.

1. Calculate the planned activity cost for each activity.

2. Calculate the differences between the planned activity cost and the State Institutions customer group’s activity costs for this year.

3. From your evaluation of the differences calculated in 2 and your review of the income statement, identify the non-value-adding activities and state which selling and administrative activities should be examined.

4. What actions might the company take to reduce the costs of non-value adding selling and administrative activities?

refer to the income statement in c 2 for the state institutions customer group for t 544644

ABC in Planning and Control

Refer to the income statement in C 2 for the State Institutions customer group for the year ended December 31. Sandee Star, the owner of Star Bakery, is in the process of budgeting income for next year. She has asked the controller to prepare a budgeted income statement for the State Institutions customer group. She estimates that the selling price per case, the number of cases sold, the cost of goods sold per case, and the activity costs for making sales calls, preparing sales orders, and handling inquiries will remain the same next year. She has contracted with a new freight company to ship the 50,000 cases at $0.60 per case sold. She has also analyzed the procedures for invoicing, processing credits, billing, and collecting and has decided that it would be less expensive for a customer service agency to do the work. The agency will charge the bakery 1.5 percent of the total sales revenue.

1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the State Institutions customer group for next year; the year ends December 31.

2. Assuming that the planned activity cost rate and planned annual cost driver level for each selling and administrative activity remain the same next year, calculate the planned activity cost for each activity.

3. Calculate the differences between the planned activity costs (determined in 2) and the State Institutions customer group’s budgeted activity costs for next year (determined in 1) .4. Evaluate the results of changing freight companies and outsourcing the customer service activities.

the initiation banquet for new members of your business club is being held at an exc 544645

Lean in a Service Business

The initiation banquet for new members of your business club is being held at an excellent restaurant. You are sitting next to two college students who are majoring in marketing. In discussing the accounting course they are taking, they mention that they are having difficulty understanding the lean philosophy. They have read that the elements of a company’s operating system support the concepts of simplicity, continuous improvement, waste reduction, timeliness, and efficiency. They realize that to understand lean thinking in a complex manufacturing environment, they must first understand lean in a simpler context. They ask you to explain the philosophy and provide an example. Briefly explain the lean philosophy. Apply the elements of a JIT operating system to the restaurant where the banquet is being held. Do you believe the lean philosophy applies in all restaurant operations? Explain your answer.

fifteen years ago bruce sable together with 10 financial supporters founded sable co 544646

Activities, Cost Drivers, and JIT

Fifteen years ago, Bruce Sable, together with 10 financial supporters, founded Sable Corporation. Located in Atlanta, the company originally manufactured roller skates, but 12 years ago, on the advice of its marketing department, it switched to making skateboards. More than 4 million skateboards later, Sable Corporation finds itself an industry leader in both volume and quality. To retain market share, it has decided to automate its manufacturing process. It has ordered flexible manufacturing systems for wheel assembly and board shaping. Manual operations will be retained for board decorating because some hand painting is involved. All operations will be converted to a just-in-time environment.

Bruce Sable wants to know how the JIT approach will affect the company’s product costing practices and has called you in as a consultant.

1. Summarize the elements of a JIT environment.

2. How will the automated systems change product costing?

3. What are some cost drivers that the company should employ? In what situations should it employ them?

as we continue with this case assume that your company has been using a continuous m 544647

Cookie Company

As we continue with this case, assume that your company has been using a continuous manufacturing process to make chocolate chip cookies. Demand has been so great that the company has built a special plant that makes only custom ordered cookies. The cookies are shaped by machines but vary according to the customer’s specific instructions. Ten basic sizes of cookies are produced and then customized. Slight variations in machine setup produce the different sizes.

In the past six months, several problems have developed. Even though a computer- controlled machine is used in the manufacturing process, the company’s backlog is growing rapidly, and customers are complaining that delivery is too slow. Quality is declining because cookies are being pushed through production without proper inspection. Working capital is tied up in excessive amounts of inventory and storage space. Workers are complaining about the pressure to produce the backlogged orders. Machine breakdowns are increasing. Production control reports are not useful because they are not timely and contain irrelevant information. The company’s profitability and cash flow are suffering.

Assume that you have been appointed CEO and that the company has asked you to analyze its problems. The board of directors asks that you complete your preliminary analysis quickly so that you can present it to the board at its midyear meeting.

1. In memo form, prepare a preliminary report recommending specific changes in the manufacturing processes.

2. In preparing the report, answer the following questions:

a. Why are you preparing the report? What is its purpose?

b. Who is the audience for this report?

c. What kinds of information do you need to prepare the report, and where will you find it (i.e., what sources will you use)?

d. When do you need to obtain the information?

identify the following as a fixed costs b variable costs or c mixed costs 544649

Identification of Variable, Fixed, and Mixed Costs

Identify the following as (a) fixed costs, (b) variable costs, or (c) mixed costs:

1. Direct materials

4. Personnel manager’s salary

2. Electricity

5. Factory building rent

3. Operating supplies

Mixed Costs: High-Low Method

Using the high-low method and the following information, compute the monthly variable cost per telephone hour and total fixed costs for Sadiko Corporation

Month

Telephone Hours Used

Telephone Costs

April

96

$4,350

May

93

$4,230

June

105

4,710

indicate whether each of the following costs of productive output is usually a varia 544657

Identification of Variable and Fixed Costs

Indicate whether each of the following costs of productive output is usually (a) variable or (b) fixed:

1. Packing materials for stereo components

2. Real estate taxes

3. Gasoline for a delivery truck

4. Property insurance

5. Depreciation expense of buildings (calculated with the straight-line method)

6. Supplies

7. Indirect materials

8. Bottles used to package liquids

9. License fees for company cars

10. Wiring used in radios

11. Machine helper’s wages

12. Wood used in bookcases

13. City operating license

14. Machine depreciation based on machine hours used

15. Machine operator’s hourly wages

16. Cost of required outside inspection of each unit produced

zero time oil change has been in business for six months 544658

Variable Cost Analysis

Zero Time Oil Change has been in business for six months. The company pays $0.50 per quart for the oil it uses in servicing cars. Each job requires an average of 4 quarts of oil. The company estimates that in the next three months, it will service 240, 288, and 360 cars.

1.Compute the cost of oil for each of the three months and the total cost for all three months.

Month

Volume in Machine Hours

Electricity Cost

July

6,000

$60,000

August

5,000

53,000

September

4,500

49,500

October

4,000

46,000

November

3,500

42,500

December

3,000

39,000

Six-month total

26,000

$290,000

Using the high-low method, determine the variable electricity cost per machine hour and the monthly fixed electricity cost. Estimate the total variable electricity costs and fixed electricity costs if 4,800 machine hours are projected to be used next month.

senora company manufactures a single product that sells for 110 per unit 544660

Contribution Margin Income Statement and Ratio

Senora Company manufactures a single product that sells for $110 per unit. The company projects sales of 500 units per month. Projected costs are as follows:

Type of Cost

Manufacturing

Non manufacturing

Variable

$10,000

$5,000

Non variable

12,500

$7,500

1. Prepare a contribution margin income statement for the month.

2. What is the contribution margin ratio?

3. What volume, in terms of units, must the company sell to break even?

using the data in the contribution margin income statement for sedona inc 544661

Contribution Margin Income Statement and C-V-P Analysis

Using the data in the contribution margin income statement for Sedona, Inc., that appears at the top of the next page, calculate (1) selling price per unit, (2) variable costs per unit, and (3) breakeven point in units and in sales dollars.

Sedona, Inc. Contribution Margin Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31

Sales (10,000 units)

$16,000,000

Less variable costs

Cost of goods sold

8,000,000

Selling, administrative, and general

$4,000,000

Total variable costs

12,000,000

Contribution margin

$4,000,000

Less fixed costs

Overhead

$1,200,000

Selling, administrative, and general

800,000

Total fixed costs

2,000,000

Operating income

$2,000,000

prepare a schedule of change from an accrual basis to a cash basis income statement 544530

The income statement and other selected data for the Boyer Company are shown below:

BOYER COMPANY
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Sales

$19,000

Operating expenses:

Depreciation expense

$ 2,300

Other operating expenses

12,000

14,300

Operating income

4,700

Loss on sale of land

1,500

Income before tax expense

3,200

Tax expense

1,000

Net income

$2,200

Supplemental information:

a. Dividends declared and paid

$ 800

b. Land purchased

3,000

c. Land sold

500

d. Equipment purchased

2,000

e. Bonds payable retired

2,000

f. Common stock sold

1,400

g. Land acquired in exchange for common stock

3,000

h. Increase in accounts receivable

400

i. Increase in inventories

800

j. Increase in accounts payable

500

k. Decrease in income taxes payable

400

Required a. Prepare a schedule of change from an accrual basis to a cash basis income statement.

b. Using the schedule of change from accrual basis to cash basis income statement computed in (a), present the cash provided by operations, using (1) the direct approach and (2) the indirect approach.

the change in the accumulated depreciation account is the depreciation expense for t 544531

Sampson Company’s balance sheet for December 31, 2002, as well as the income statement, for the year ended December 31, 2002, are on the following page.

Required a. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, using the indirect method for net cash flow from operating activities.

b. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, using the direct method for net cash flow from operating activities.

c. Comment on significant items disclosed in the statement of cash flows.

SAMPSON COMPANY
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2002 and 2001

2002

2001

Assets

Cash

$ 38,000

$ 60,000

Net receivables

72,000

65,000

Inventory

98,000

85,000

Plant assets

195,000

180,000

Accumulated depreciation

(45,000)

(35,000)

Total assets

$358,000

$355,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 85,000

$ 80,000

Accrued liabilities (related to cost of sales)

44,000

61,000

Mortgage payable

11,000

Common stock

180,000

174,000

Retained earnings

38,000

40,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$358,000

$355,000

SAMPSON COMPANY
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Net sales

$145,000

Cost of sales

108,000

Gross profit

37,000

Other expenses

6,000

Profit before taxes

31,000

Tax expense

12,000

Net income

$ 19,000

Other data:

1. Dividends paid in cash during 2002 were $21,000.

2. Depreciation is included in the cost of sales.

3. The change in the accumulated depreciation account is the depreciation expense for the year.

the arrowbell company is a growing company two years ago it decided to expand in ord 544532

The Arrowbell Company is a growing company. Two years ago, it decided to expand in order to increase its production capacity. The company anticipates that the expansion program can be completed in another two years. Financial information for Arrowbell is on the following pages.

Required a. Comment on the short-term debt position, including computations of current ratio, acid-test ratio, cash ratio, and operating cash flow/current maturities of long-term debt and current notes payable.

b. If you were a supplier to this company, what would you be concerned about?

c. Comment on the long-term debt position, including computations of the debt ratio, debt/equity, debt to tangible net worth, and operating cash flow/total debt. Review the statement of operating cash flows.

d. If you were a banker, what would you be concerned about if this company approached you for a long-term loan to continue its expansion program?

e. What should management consider doing at this point in regard to the company’s expansion program?

ARROWBELL COMPANY
Sales and Net Income

Year

Sales

Net Income

1998

$2,568,660

$145,800

1999

2,660,455

101,600

2000

2,550,180

52,650

2001

2,625,280

86,800

2002

3,680,650

151,490

ARROWBELL COMPANY
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2002 and 2001

2002

2001

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

$ 250,480

$ 260,155

Accounts receivable (net)

760,950

690,550

Inventories at lower-of-cost-or-market

725,318

628,238

Prepaid expenses

18,555

20,250

Total current assets

1,755,303

1,599,193

Plant and equipment:

Land, buildings, machinery, and equipment

3,150,165

2,646,070

Less: Accumulated depreciation

650,180

525,650

Net plant and equipment

2,499,985

2,120,420

Other assets:

Cash surrender value of life insurance

20,650

18,180

Other

40,660

38,918

Total other assets

61,310

57,098

Total assets

$4,316,598

$3,776,711

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Notes and mortgages payable, current portion

$ 915,180

$ 550,155

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

1,160,111

851,080

Total current liabilities

2,075,291

1,401,235

Long-term notes and mortgages payable,

less current portion above

550,000

775,659

Total liabilities

2,625,291

2,176,894

Stockholders’ equity:

Capital stock, par value $1.00; authorized,

800,000; issued and outstanding,

600,000 (1997 and 1996)

600,000

600,000

Paid in excess of par

890,000

890,000

Retained earnings

201,307

109,817

Total stockholders’ equity

1,691,307

1,599,817

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$4,316,598

$3,776,711

ARROWBELL COMPANY
Statement of Cash Flows
For Years Ended December 31, 2002 and 2001

2002

2001

Cash flows from operating activities:

Net income

$151,490

$ 86,800

Noncash expenses, revenues, losses,

and gains included in income:

Depreciation

134,755

102,180

Increase in accounts receivable

(70,400)

(10,180)

Increase in inventories

(97,080)

(15,349)

Decrease in prepaid expenses

in 2002, increase in 2001

1,695

(1,058)

Increase in accounts payable

and accrued liabilities

309,031

15,265

Net cash provided by operating activities

429,491

177,658

Cash flows from investing activities:

Proceeds from retirement of

property, plant, and equipment

10,115

3,865

Purchases of property, plant, and equipment

(524,435)

(218,650)

Increase in cash surrender

value of life insurance

(2,470)

(1,848)

Other

(1,742)

(1,630)

Net cash used for investing activities

(518,532)

(218,263)

Cash flows from financing activities:

Retirement of long-term debt

(225,659)

(50,000)

Increase in notes and mortgages payable

365,025

159,155

Cash dividends

(60,000)

(60,000)

Net cash provided by financing activities

79,366

49,155

Net increase (decrease) in cash

$ (9,675)

$ 8,550

the president of the bernett company cannot understand why bernett is having trouble 544533

The balance sheet for December 31, 2002, income statement for the year ended December 31, 2002, and the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, of the Bernett Company are on the next two pages.

The president of the Bernett Company cannot understand why Bernett is having trouble paying current obligations. He notes that business has been very good, as sales have more than doubled, and the company achieved a profit of $69,000 in 2002.

Required:

a. Comment on the statement of cash flows.

b. Compute the following liquidity ratios for 2002:

1. Current ratio

2. Acid-test ratio

3. Operating cash flow/current maturities of long-term debt and current notes payable

4. Cash ratio

c. Compute the following debt ratios for 2002:

1. Times interest earned

2. Debt ratio

3. Operating cash flow/total debt

d. Compute the following profitability ratios for 2002:

1. Return on assets (using average assets)

2. Return on common equity (using average common equity)

e. Compute the following investor ratio for 2002: Operating cash flow/cash dividends.

f. Give your opinion as to the liquidity of Bernett.

g. Give your opinion as to the debt position of Bernett.

h. Give your opinion as to the profitability of Bernett.

i. Give your opinion as to the investor ratio.

j. Give your opinion of the alternatives Bernett has in order to ensure that it can pay bills as they come due.

BERNETT COMPANY
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2002 and 2001

2002

2001

Assets

Cash

$ 5,000

$ 28,000

Accounts receivable, net

92,000

70,000

Inventory

130,000

85,000

Prepaid expenses

4,000

6,000

Land

30,000

10,000

Building

170,000

30,000

Accumulated depreciation

(20,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$411,000

$219,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 49,000

$ 44,000

Income taxes payable

5,000

4,000

Accrued liabilities

6,000

5,000

Bonds payable (current $10,000 at 12/31/02)

175,000

20,000

Common stock

106,000

96,000

Retained earnings

70,000

50,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$411,000

$219,000

BERNETT COMPANY
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Sales

$500,000

Less expenses:

Cost of goods sold

(includes depreciation of $4,000)

310,000

Selling and administrative expenses

(includes depreciation of $6,000)

80,000

Interest expense

11,000

Total expenses

401,000

Income before taxes

99,000

Income tax expense

30,000

Net income

$ 69,000

BERNETT COMPANY
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2002

Net cash flow from operating activities:

Net income

$ 69,000

Noncash expenses, revenues, losses and gains

included in income:

Depreciation

10,000

Increase in receivables

(22,000)

Increase in inventory

(45,000)

Decrease in prepaid expenses

2,000

Increase in accounts payable

5,000

Increase in income taxes payable

1,000

Increase in accrued liabilities

1,000

Net cash flow from operating activities

$ 21,000

Cash flows from investing activities:

Increase in land

$ (20,000)

Increase in buildings

(140,000)

Net cash used by investing activities

(160,000)

Cash flows from financing activities:

Bond payable increase

$ 155,000

Common stock increase

10,000

Cash dividends paid

(49,000)

Net cash provided by financing activities:

116,000

Net decrease in cash

($23,000)

the szabo company presented the following data with the 2002 financial statements 544534

The Szabo Company presented the following data with the 2002 financial statements:

SZABO COMPANY
Statements of Cash Flows
Years Ended December 31, 2002, 2001, and 2000

2002

2001

2000

Increase (Decrease) in Cash:

Cash flows from operating activities:

Cash received from customers

$173,233

$176,446

$158,702

Cash paid to suppliers

and employees

(150,668)

(157,073)

(144,060)

Interest received

132

105

89

Interest paid

(191)

(389)

(777)

Income taxes paid

(6,626)

(4,754)

(845)

Net cash provided by operations

15,880

14,335

13,109

Cash flows from investing

activities:

Capital expenditures

(8,988)

(5,387)

(6,781)

Proceeds from property, plant,

and equipment disposals

1,215

114

123

Net cash used in investing activities

(7,773)

(5,273)

(6,658)

Cash flows from financing

activities:

Net increase (decrease) in

short-term debt

5,100

7,200

Increase in long-term debt

4,100

3,700

5,200

Dividends paid

(6,050)

(8,200)

(8,000)

Purchase of common stock

(8,233)

(3,109)

(70)

Net cash used in financing activities

(10,183)

(2,509)

4,330

Net increase (decrease) in cash

and cash equivalents

(2,076)

6,553

10,781

Cash and cash equivalents at

beginning of year

24,885

18,332

7,551

Cash and cash equivalents at

end of year

$ 22,809

$ 24,885

$ 18,332

Reconciliation of Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities

2002

2001

2000

Net income

$ 7,610

$ 3,242

$ 506

Provision for depreciation

and amortization

12,000

9,700

9,000

Provision for losses on accounts

receivable

170

163

140

Gain on property, plant,

and equipment disposals

(2,000)

(1,120)

(1,500)

Changes in operating assets

and liabilities:

Accounts receivable

(2,000)

(1,750)

(1,600)

Inventories

(3,100)

(2,700)

(2,300)

Other assets

(57)

Accounts payable

5,100

7,200

Accrued income taxes

1,200

Deferred income taxes

2,000

1,700

1,720

Net cash provided by

operating activities

$15,880

$14,335

$13,109

Required a. Prepare a statement of cash flows with a three-year total column for 2000–2002.

b. Comment on significant trends you detect in the statement prepared in (a).

c. Prepare a statement of cash flows, with inflow/outflow for the year ended December 31, 2002.

d. Comment on significant trends you detect in the statement prepared in (c).

select the growth firm the firm in danger of bankruptcy and the firm that is the old 544535

Consider the following data for three different companies:

($000 Omitted)

Owens

Arrow

Alpha

Net cash provided (used) by:

Operating activities

$(2,000)

$2,700

$(3,000)

Investing activities

(6,000)

(600)

(400)

Financing activities

9,000

(400)

(2,600)

Net increase (decrease) in cash

$ 1,000

$1,700

$(6,000)

The patterns of cash flows for these firms differ. One firm is a growth firm that is expanding rapidly, another firm is in danger of bankruptcy, while another firm is an older firm that is expanding slowly.

Required Select the growth firm, the firm in danger of bankruptcy, and the firm that is the older firm expanding slowly. Explain your selection.

what amount of cash did webster receive from customers during the year ended decembe 544537

Webster Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, was prepared using the indirect method, and it included the following items:

Net income

$100,000

Noncash adjustments:

Depreciation expense

20,000

Decrease in accounts receivable

8,000

Decrease in inventory

25,000

Increase in accounts payable

10,000

Net cash flows from operating activities

$163,000

Note: Webster Corporation reported revenues from customers of $150,000 in its 2002 income statement.

Required:

a. What amount of cash did Webster receive from customers during the year ended December 31, 2002?

b. Did depreciation expense provide cash inflow? Comment.

indicate which of the following accounting policies are conservative by placing an x 544565

Indicate which of the following accounting policies are conservative by placing an X under Yes or No. Assume inflationary conditions exist.

Conservative

Yes

No

a.LIFO inventory

________

________

b. FIFO inventory

________

________

c. Completed-contract method

________

________

d. Percentage-of-completion method

________

________

e. Accelerated depreciation method

________

________

f. Straight-line depreciation method

________

________

g. A relatively short estimated life for a fixed asset

________

________

h. Short period for expensing intangibles

________

________

i.Amortization of goodwill over 5 years

________

________

j. High interest rate used to compute the present value of accumulated benefit obligation

________

________

k. High rate of compensation increase used in computing the projected benefit obligation

________

________

using the ratios provided what conclusion s can be drawn regarding the company rsquo 544567

The Thorpe Company is a wholesale distributor of professional equipment and supplies.

The company’s sales have averaged about $900,000 annually for the three-year period 1999-2001. The firm’s total assets at the end of 2001 amounted to $850,000.

The president of the Thorpe Company has asked the controller to prepare a report that summarizes the financial aspects of the company’s operations for the past three years.

This report will be presented to the board of directors at its next meeting.

In addition to comparative financial statements, the controller has decided to present a number of relevant financial ratios that can assist in the identification and interpretation of trends. At the request of the controller, the accounting staff has calculated the following ratios for the three-year period 1999–2001:

Ratio

1999

2000

2001

Current ratio

2.00

2.13

2.18

Acid-test (quick) ratio

1.20

1.10

0.97

Accounts receivable turnover

9.72

8.57

7.13

Inventory turnover

5.25

4.80

3.80

Percent of total debt to total assets

44.00%

41.00%

38.00%

Percent of long-term debt to

total assets

25.00%

22.00%

19.00%

Sales to fixed assets (fixed

asset turnover)

1.75

1.88

1.99

Sales as a percent of 1999 sales

100.00%

103.00%

106.00%

Gross profit percentage

40.0%

33.6%

38.5%

Net income to sales

7.8%

7.8%

8.0%

Return on total assets

8.5%

8.6%

8.7%

Return on stockholders’ equity

15.1%

14.6%

14.1%

In preparing his report, the controller has decided first to examine the financial ratios independently of any other data to determine if the ratios themselves reveal any significant trends over the three-year period.

Required a. The current ratio is increasing, while the acid-test (quick) ratio is decreasing. Using the ratios provided, identify and explain the contributing factor(s) for this apparently divergent trend.

b. In terms of the ratios provided, what conclusion(s) can be drawn regarding the company’s use of financial leverage during the 1999–2001 period?

c. Using the ratios provided, what conclusion(s) can be drawn regarding the company’s net investment in plant and equipment?

l konrath company is considering extending credit to d hawk company konrath estimate 544568

L. Konrath Company is considering extending credit to D. Hawk Company. Konrath estimated that sales to D. Hawk Company would amount to $2,000,000 each year. L. Konrath Company, a wholesaler, sells throughout the Midwest. D. Hawk Company, a retail chain operation, has a number of stores in the Midwest. L. Konrath Company has had a gross profit of approximately 60% in recent years and expects to have a similar gross profit on the D.

Hawk Company order. The D. Hawk Company order is approximately 15% of L. Konrath Company”s present sales. Data from recent statements of D. Hawk Company are shown on the next page.

(In millions)

1999

2000

2001

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

$ 2.6

$ 1.8

$ 1.6

Government securities (cost)

.4

.2

Accounts and notes receivable (net)

8.0

8.5

8.5

Inventories

2.8

3.2

2.8

Prepaid assets

.7

.6

.6

Total current assets

14.5

14.3

13.5

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

4.3

5.4

5.9

Total assets

$18.8

$19.7

$19.4

Liabilities and Equities

Current liabilities

$ 6.9

$ 8.5

$ 9.3

Long-term debt, 6%

3.0

2.0

1.0

Total liabilities

9.9

10.5

10.3

Shareholders’ equity

8.9

9.2

9.1

Total liabilities and equities

$18.8

$19.7

$19.4

Income

Net sales

$24.2

$24.5

$24.9

Cost of goods sold

16.9

17.2

18.0

Gross margin

7.3

7.3

6.9

Selling and administrative expenses

6.6

6.8

7.3

Earnings (loss) before taxes

.7

.5

(.4)

Income taxes

.3

.2

(.2)

Net income

$ .4

$ .3

$ (.2)

Required a.Calculate the following for D. Hawk Company for 2001:

1. Rate of return on total assets

2. Acid-test ratio

3. Return on sales

4. Current ratio

5. Inventory turnover

b. As part of the analysis to determine whether or not Konrath should extend credit to Hawk, assume the ratios were calculated from Hawk Company statements. For each ratio, indicate whether it is a favorable, unfavorable, or neutral statistic in the decision to grant Hawk credit. Briefly explain your choice in each case.

Ratio

1999

2000

2001

Rate of return on total assets

1.96%

1.12%

(.87)%

Return on sales

1.69%

.99%

(.69)%

Acid-test ratio

1.73

1.36

1.19

Current ratio

2.39

1.92

1.67

Inventory turnover (times per year)

4.41

4.32

4.52

Equity relationships:

Current liabilities

36.0%

43.0%

48.0%

Long-term liabilities

16.0

10.5

5.0

Shareholders

48.0

46.5

47.0

100.0%

100.0%

100.0%

Asset relationships:

Current assets

77.0%

72.5%

69.5%

Property, plant, and equipment

23.0

27.5

30.5

100.0%

100.0%

100.0%

c. Would you grant credit to D. Hawk Company? Support your answer with facts given in the problem.

d. What additional information, if any, would you want before making a final decision?

your company is considering the possible acquisition of growth inc financial stateme 544569

Your company is considering the possible acquisition of Growth Inc. Financial statements of Growth Inc. are shown below and on the following page.

GROWTH INC.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2001 and 2000

2001

2002

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

Accounts receivable, less allowance

of $750 for doubtful accounts

99,021

83,575

Inventories, FIFO

63,414

74,890

Prepaid expenses

834

1,170

Total current assets

227,615

171,599

Investments and other assets

379

175

Property, plant, and equipment:

Land and land improvements

6,990

6,400

Buildings

63,280

59,259

Machinery and equipment

182,000

156,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

252,270

221,659

Net property, plant, and equipment

110,000

98,000

Total assets

142,270

123,659

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$370,264

$295,433

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$ 32,730

$ 26,850

Federal income taxes

5,300

4,800

Accrued liabilities

30,200

24,500

Current portion of long-term debt

5,500

5,500

Total current liabilities

73,730

61,650

Long-term debt

76,750

41,900

Other long-term liabilities

5,700

4,300

Deferred federal income taxes

16,000

12,000

Total liabilities

172,180

119,850

Stockholders’ equity:

Capital stock

44,000

43,500

Retained earnings

154,084

132,083

Total stockholders’ equity

198,084

175,583

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$ 370,264

$ 295,433

GROWTH INC.
Statement of Income
Years Ended December 31, 2001, 2000, and 1999

2001

2000

1999

Revenues

$578,530

$523,249

$556,549

Costs and expenses:

Cost of products sold

495,651

457,527

482,358

Selling, general, and administrative

35,433

30,619

29,582

Interest and debt expense

4,308

3,951

2,630

535,392

492,097

514,570

Income before income taxes

43,138

31,152

41,979

Provision for income taxes

20,120

12,680

17,400

Net income

$ 23,018

$ 18,472

$ 24,579

Net income per share

$ 2.27

$ 1.85

$ 2.43

Partial footnotes: Under the LIFO method, inventories have been reduced by approximately $35,300 and $41,100 at December 31, 2001 and 2000, respectively, from current cost, which would be reported under the first-in, first-out method.

The effective tax rates were 36.6%, 30.7%, and 31.4%, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2001, 2000, and 1999.

Required a. Compute the following for 2001, without considering the LIFO reserve:

Liquidity

1. Days’ sales in inventory

2. Merchandise inventory turnover

3. Inventory turnover in days

4. Operating cycle

5. Working capital

6. Current ratio

7. Acid-test ratio

8. Cash ratio

Debt

1. Debt ratio

2. Debt/equity ratio

3. Times interest earned

Profitability

1. Net profit margin

2. Total asset turnover

3. Return on assets

4. Return on total equity

b. Compute the ratios in part (a), considering the LIFO reserve.

c. Comment on the apparent liquidity, debt, and profitability, considering both sets of ratios.

you are to select the lettered item s that indicate s its effect s on the corporatio 544570

Required For each of the following numbered items, you are to select the lettered item(s) that indicate(s) its effect(s) on the corporation’s statements. If more than one effect is applicable to a particular item, be sure to indicate all applicable letters. (Assume that the state statutes do not permit declaration of no liquidating dividends except from earnings.)

Item

Effects

1.Declaration of a cash

a. Reduces working capital

dividend due in one month

B .Increases working capital

on noncumulative preferred

c. Reduces current ratio

d.Increases current ratio

2.Declaration and payment

e. Reduces the dollar amount of

of an ordinary stock

total capital stock

f.Increases the dollar amount of

3.Receipt of a cash dividend,

total capital stock

not previously recorded,

g. Reduces total retained

on stock of another

earnings

h.Increases total retained

4.Passing of a dividend on

earnings

cumulative preferred

i.Reduces equity per share

stocks.of

common stock

5.Receipt of preferred

j. Reduces equity of each

shares as a dividend on

common stockholder

stock held as a temporary

investment. This was not

argo sales corporation has in recent prior years maintained the following relationsh 544571

Argo Sales Corporation has in recent prior years maintained the following relationships among the data on its financial statements:

Gross profit rate on net sales

40%

Net profit rate on net sales

10%

Rate of selling expenses to net sales

20%

Accounts receivable turnover

8 per year

Inventory turnover

6 per year

Acid-test ratio

2 to 1

Current ratio

3 to 1

Quick-asset composition: 8% cash, 32%

marketable securities, 60% accounts

Receivable

Asset turnover

2 per year

Ratio of total assets to intangible assets

20 to 1

Ratio of accumulated depreciation to

cost of fixed assets

1 to 3

Ratio of accounts receivable to accounts

Payable

1.5 to 1

Ratio of working capital to stockholders’ equity

1 to 1.6

Ratio of total debt to stockholders’ equity

1 to 2

The corporation had a net income of $120,000 for 2001, which resulted in earnings of $5.20 per share of common stock. Additional information includes the following:

Capital stock authorized, issued (all in 1970), and outstanding:

Common, $10 per share par value, issued at 10% premium.

Preferred, 6% nonparticipating, $100 per share par value, issued at a 10% premium.

Market value per share of common at December 31, 2001: $78.

Preferred dividends paid in 2001: $3,000. Times interest earned in 2001: 33.

The amounts of the following were the same at December 31, 2001, as at January 1, 2001: inventory, accounts receivable, 5% bonds payable—due 2010, and total stockholders’ equity.

All purchases and sales were on account.

Required a. Prepare in good form the condensed balance sheet and income statement for the year ending December 31, 2001, presenting the amounts you would expect to appear on Argo’s financial statements (ignoring income taxes). Major captions appearing on Argo’s balance sheet are current assets, fixed assets, intangible assets, current liabilities, long-term liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. In addition to the accounts divulged in the problem, you should include accounts for prepaid expenses, accrued expenses, and administrative expenses. Supporting computations should be in good form.

b. Compute the following for 2001. (Show your computations.):

1. Rate of return on stockholders’ equity

2. Price/earnings ratio for common stock

3. Dividends paid per share of common stock

4. Dividends paid per share of preferred stock

5. Yield on common stock

the commercial loan officer of bell national bank requested financial reports for th 544572

Warford Corporation was formed five years ago through a public subscription of common stock. Lucinda Street, who owns 15% of the common stock, was one of the organizers of Warford and is its current president. The company has been successful but currently is experiencing a shortage of funds. On June 10, Street approached Bell National Bank, asking for a 24-month extension on two $30,000 notes, which are due on June 30, 2001, and September 30, 2001. Another note of $7,000 is due on December 31, 2001, but Street expects no difficulty in paying this note on its due date. Street explained that Warford’s cash flow problems are due primarily to the company’s desire to finance a $300,000 plant expansion over the next two fiscal years through internally generated funds.

The commercial loan officer of Bell National Bank requested financial reports for the last two fiscal years. These reports are reproduced below and on the following page.

WARFORD CORPORATION
Statement of Financial Position
March 31

2000

2001

Assets:

Cash

$ 12,500

$ 16,400

Notes receivable

104,000

112,000

Accounts receivable (net)

68,500

81,600

Inventories (at cost)

50,000

80,000

Plant and equipment (net of depreciation)

646,000

680,000

Total assets

$881,000

$970,000

2000

2001

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity:

Accounts payable

$ 72,000

$ 69,000

Notes payable

54,500

67,000

Accrued liabilities

6,000

9,000

Common stock (60,000 shares, $10 par)

600,000

600,000

Retained earnings**

148,500

225,000

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$881,000

$970,000

Cash dividends were paid at the rate of $1.00 per share in fiscal year 2000 and $1.25 per share in fiscal

year 2001.

WARFORD CORPORATION
Income Statement
For the Fiscal Years Ended March 31, 2000 and 2001

2000

2001

Sales

$2,700,000

$3,000,000

Cost of goods sold*

1,720,000

1,902,500

Gross profit

980,000

1,097,500

Operating expenses

780,000

845,000

Net income before taxes

200,000

252,500

Income taxes (40%)

80,000

101,000

Income after taxes

$ 120,000

$ 151,500

Depreciation charges on the plant and equipment of $100,000 and $102,500 for fiscal years ended March

31, 2000 and 2001, respectively, are included in cost of goods sold.

Required a.Calculate the following items for Warford Corporation:

1. Current ratio for fiscal years 2000 and 2001

2. Acid-test (quick) ratio for fiscal years 2000 and 2001

3. Inventory turnover for fiscal year 2001

4. Return on assets for fiscal years 2000 and 2001

5. Percentage change in sales, cost of goods sold, gross profit, and net income after taxes from fiscal year 2000 to 2001

b.Identify and explain what other financial reports and/or financial analyses might be helpful to the commercial loan officer of Bell National Bank in evaluating Street’s request for a time extension on Warford’s notes.

c.Assume that the percentage changes experienced in fiscal year 2001, as compared with fiscal year 2000 for sales, cost of goods sold, gross profit, and net income after taxes, will be repeated in each of the next two years. Is Warford’s desire to finance the plant expansion from internally generated funds realistic? Explain.

d. Should Bell National Bank grant the extension on Warford’s notes, considering Street’s statement about financing the plant expansion through internally generated funds? Explain.

total liabilities and equities 544573

The following data apply to items (a) through (g):

JOHANSON COMPANY
Statement of Financial Position
December 31, 2000 and 2001

(In thousands)

Assets

Current assets:

Cash and temporary investments

$ 380

$ 400

Accounts receivable (net)

1,500

1,700

Inventories

2,120

2,200

Total current assets

4,000

4,300

Long-term assets:

Land

500

500

Building and equipment (net)

4,000

4,700

Total long-term assets

4,500

5,200

Total assets

$8,500

$9,500

Liabilities and Equities

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$ 700

$1,400

Current portion of long-term debt

500

1,000

Total current liabilities

1,200

2,400

Long-term debt

4,000

3,000

Total liabilities

5,200

5,400

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock

3,000

3,000

Retained earnings

300

1,100

Total stockholders’ equity

3,300

4,100

Total liabilities and equities

$8,500

$9,500

JOHANSON COMPANY
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
For the Year Ended December 31, 2001

(In thousands)

Net sales

$28,800

Less: Cost of goods sold

$15,120

Selling expenses

7,180

Administrative expenses

4,100

Interest

400

Income taxes

800

27,600

Net income

1,200

Retained earnings, January 1

300

Subtotal

1,500

Cash dividends declared and paid

400

Retained earnings, December 31

$ 1,100

Answer the following multiple-choice questions:

Required:

Answer the following multiple-choice questions:

a. The acid-test ratio for 2001 is

1. 1.1 to 1

2. .9 to 1

3.1. 8 to 1

4. .2 to 1

5. .17 to 1

b.The average number of days’ sales outstanding in 2001 is

1.18 days 4. 4.4 days

2.360 days 5. 80 days

3.20 days

c.The times interest earned ratio for 2001 is

1. 3.0 times

2. 1.0 times

3.72. 0 times

4. 2.0 times

5. 6.0 times

d.The asset turnover in 2001 is

1. 3.2 times

2. 1.7 times

3.. 4 times

4. 1.1 times

5. .13 times

e.The inventory turnover in 2001 is

1. 13.6 times

2. 12.5 times

3.. 9 times

4. 7.0 times

5. 51.4 times

f.The operating income margin in 2001 is

1. 2.7%

2. 91.7%

3.52. 5%

4. 95.8%

5. 8.3%

g.The dividend payout ratio in 2001 is

1.100%

2.36%

3.20%

4. 8.8%

5. 33.3%

the statement of financial position for paragon corporation at november 30 2001 the 544574

The statement of financial position for Paragon Corporation at November 30, 2001, the end of its current fiscal year, is presented below. The market price of the company’s common stock was $4 per share on November 30, 2001.

Assets

Current assets:

In thousands

Cash

$ 6,000

Accounts receivable

$ 7,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

400

6,600

Merchandise inventory

16,000

Supplies on hand

400

Prepaid expenses

1,000

Total current assets

$30,000

Property, plant, and equipment:

Land

27,500

Building

36,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

13,500

22,500

Total property, plant, and equipment

50,000

Total assets

$80,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$ 6,400

Accrued interest payable

800

Accrued income taxes payable

2,200

Accrued wages payable

600

Deposits received from customers

2,000

Total current liabilities

$12,000

Long-term debt:

Bonds payable—20-year, 8% convertible

debentures due December 1, 2007 (Note 7)

20,000

Less: Unamortized discount

200

19,800

Total liabilities

31,800

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock—authorized 40,000,000 shares

of $1 par value; 20,000,000 shares issued

and outstanding

20,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par value

12,200

Total paid-in capital

32,200

Retained earnings

16,000

Total stockholders’ equity

48,200

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$80,000

All items are to be considered independent of one another, and any transactions given in the items are to be considered the only transactions to affect Paragon Corporation during the just-completed current or coming fiscal year. Average balance sheet account balances are used in computing ratios involving income statement accounts. Ending balance sheet account balances are used in computing ratios involving only balance sheet items.

Required Answer the following multiple-choice questions:

a.If Paragon paid back all of the deposits received from customers, its current ratio would be

1. 2.50 to 1.00

2. 2.80 to 1.00

3. 2.33 to 1.00

4. 3.00 to 1.00

5. 2.29 to 1.00

b.If Paragon paid back all of the deposits received from customers, its quick (acid- test) ratio would be

1. 1.06 to 1.00

2. 1.00 to 1.00

3. 0.88 to 1.00

4. 1.26 to 1.00

5. 1.20 to 1.00

c.A 2-for-1 common stock split by Paragon would

1. Result in each $1,000 bond being convertible into 600 new shares of Paragon common stock

2. Decrease the retained earnings due to the capitalization of retained earnings

3. Not affect the number of common shares outstanding

4. Increase the total paid-in capital

5. Increase the total stockholders’ equity

d. Paragon Corporation’s building is being depreciated using the straight-line method, salvage value of $6,000,000, and life of 20 years.

The number of years the building has been depreciated by Paragon as of November 30, 2001, is

1. 7.5 years

2.12. 5 years

3.9. 0 years

4. 15.0 years

5. None of these.

e.Paragon’ s book value per share of common stock as of November 30, 2001, is

1.$4.00

2.$1. 61

3.$1. 00

4. $2.41

5. None of these

f.If, during the current fiscal year ending November 30, 2001, Paragon had sales of $90,000,000 with a gross profit of 20% and an inventory turnover of five times per year, the merchandise inventory balance on December 1, 2000, was

1.$14,400,000

2.$12,800,000

3.$18,000,000

4. $20,000,000

5. $16,000,000

g.If Paragon has a payout ratio of 80% and declared and paid $4,000,000 of cash dividends during the current fiscal year ended November 30, 2001, the retained earnings balance on December 1, 2000, was

1.$20,000,000

2.$17,000,000

3.$15,000,000

4. $11,000,000

5. None of these

the following numbered items are concepts that underlie value based systems such as 544625

Elements of a Lean Operating Environment

The following numbered items are concepts that underlie value-based systems, such as ABM and lean. Match each concept to the related lettered element(s) of a lean operating environment.

1. Business processes are simplified.

2. The quality of the product or service is critical.

3. Employees are cross-trained.

4. Large inventories waste resources and may hide bad work.

5. Goods should be produced only when needed.

6. Equipment downtime is minimized.

a. Minimum inventory levels

b. Pull-through production

c. Quick machine setups and flexible work cells

d. A multi skilled work force

e. High levels of product quality

f. Effective preventive maintenance

the cost categories in this list are typical of many manufacturing operations 544627

Direct and Indirect Costs in JIT and Traditional Manufacturing Environments

The cost categories in this list are typical of many manufacturing operations:

Direct materials:

Direct labor

Depreciation–machinery

Sheet steel

Engineering labor

Supervisory salaries

Iron castings

Indirect labor

Electrical power

Assembly parts:

Operating supplies

Insurance and taxes–plant

Part 24RE6

Small tools

President’s salary

Part 15RF8

Depreciation–plant

Employee benefits

Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in (1) a traditional manufacturing setting and (2) a JIT environment. State the reasons for changes in classification.

good morning enterprises produces digital alarm clocks 544629

Back flush Costing

Good Morning Enterprises produces digital alarm clocks. It has a just-in-time assembly process and uses back flush costing to record production costs. Overhead is assigned at a rate of $17 per assembly labor hour. There were no beginning inventories in March. During March, the following operating data were generated:

Cost of direct materials purchased and used

$53,200

Direct labor costs incurred

$27,300

Overhead costs assigned

?

Assembly hours worked

3,840 hours

Ending work in process inventory

$1,050

Ending finished goods inventory

$960

Using T accounts, show the flow of costs through the back flush costing system. What is the total cost of goods sold in March?

the following are excerpts from a conversation between two managers about their comp 544631

Comparison of ABM and Lean

The following are excerpts from a conversation between two managers about their companies’ activity-based systems. Identify the manager who works for a company that emphasizes ABM and the one who works for a company that emphasizes a lean system.

Manager 1: We try to manage our resources effectively by monitoring operating activities. We analyze all major operating activities, and we focus on reducing or eliminating the ones that don’t add value to our products. Our product costs are more accurate since we allocate activity costs to products and services.

Manager 2: We’re very concerned with eliminating waste to reduce costs. We’ve designed our operations in flexible work cells to reduce the time it takes to move, store, queue, and inspect materials. We’ve also reduced our inventories by buying and using materials only when we need them.

the following data relate to inventory for the year ended december 31 2000 544355

The following data relate to inventory for the year ended December 31, 2000:

Date

Description

Number of Units

Cost per unit

Total Cost

January 1

Beginning inventory

400

$5.00

$ 2,000

March 1

Purchase

1,000

6.00

6,000

August 1

Purchase

200

7.00

1,400

November 1

Purchase

200

7.50

1,500

1,800

$10,900

A physical inventory on December 31, 2000, indicates that 400 units are on hand and that they came from the March 1 purchase.

Required Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended December 31, 2000, and the ending inventory under the following cost assumptions:

a. First-in, first-out (FIFO) c. Average cost (weighted average)

b. Last-in, first-out (LIFO) d. Specific identification

the following data relate to inventory for the year ended december 31 2001 a physica 544356

The following data relate to inventory for the year ended December 31, 2001. A physical inventory on December 31, 2001, indicates that 600 units are on hand and that they came from the July 1 purchase.

Date

Description

Number of Units

Cost Per Unit

Total
Cost

January 1

Beginning inventory

1,000

$4.00

$ 4,000

February 20

Purchase

800

4.50

3,600

April 1

Purchase

900

4.75

4,275

July 1

Purchase

700

5.00

3,500

October 22

Purchase

500

4.90

2,450

December 10

Purchase

500

5.00

2,500

4,400

$20,325

Required Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended December 31, 2001, and the ending inventory under the following cost assumptions:

a. First-in, first-out (FIFO)

b. Last-in, first-out (LIFO)

c. Average cost (weighted average)

d. Specific identification

the j a appliance company has supplied you with the following data regarding working 544357

The J.A. Appliance Company has supplied you with the following data regarding working capital and sales for the years 2001, 2000, and 1999.

2001

2000

1999

Working capital

$270,000

$260,000

$240,000

Sales

$650,000

$600,000

$500,000

Industry average for the ratio

sales to working capital

4.10 times

4.05 times

4.00 times

Required a. Compute the sales to working capital ratio for each year.

b. Comment on the sales to working capital ratio for J.A. Appliance in relation to the industry average and what this may indicate.

the depoole company manufactures industrial products and employs a calendar year for 544358

The Depoole Company manufactures industrial products and employs a calendar year for financial reporting purposes. Items (a) through (e) present several of Depoole’s transactions during 2001. The total of cash equivalents, marketable securities, and net receivables exceeded total current liabilities both before and after each transaction described. Depoole has positive profits in 2001 and a credit balance throughout 2001 in its retained earnings account.

Required Answer the following multiple-choice questions.

a. Payment of a trade account payable of $64,500 would:

1. Increase the current ratio, but the acid-test ratio would not be affected.

2. Increase the acid-test ratio, but the current ratio would not be affected.

3. Increase both the current and acid-test ratios.

4. Decrease both the current and acid-test ratios.

5. Have no effect on the current and acid-test ratios.

b. The purchase of raw materials for $85,000 on open account would:

1. Increase the current ratio.

2. Decrease the current ratio.

3. Increase net working capital.

4. Decrease net working capital.

5. Increase both the current ratio and net working capital.

c. The collection of a current accounts receivable of $29,000 would:

1. Increase the current ratio.

2. Decrease the current ratio.

3. Increase the acid-test ratio.

4. Decrease the acid-test ratio.

5. Not affect the current or acid-test ratios.

d. Obsolete inventory of $125,000 was written off during 2001. This would:

1. Decrease the acid-test ratio

2. Increase the acid-test ratio3. Increase net working capital.

4. Decrease the current ratio.

5. Decrease both the current and acid-test ratios.

e. The early liquidation of a long-term note with cash would:

1. Affect the current ratio to a greater degree than the acid-test ratio.

2. Affect the acid-test ratio to a greater degree than the current ratio.

3. Affect the current and acid-test ratios to the same degree.

4. Affect the current ratio, but not the acid-test ratio.

5. Affect the acid-test ratio, but not the current ratio.

compute the cash basis times interest earned 544439

Consider the following operating figures:

Net sales

Cost and deductions:

Cost of sales

792,755

Selling and administration

264,566

Interest expense, net

4,311

Income taxes

5,059

1,066,691

$ 12,452

Note: Depreciation expense totals $40,000.

Required a. Compute the times interest earned.

b. Compute the cash basis times interest earned.

depreciation expense totals 200 operating lease payments total 150 and preferred div 544440

The Jones Petro Company reports the following consolidated statement of income:

Operating revenues

$2,989

Costs and expenses:

Cost of rentals and royalties

543

Cost of sales

314

Selling, service, administrative,

and general expense

1,424

Total costs and expenses

2,281

Operating income

708

Other income

27

Other deductions (interest)

60

Income before income taxes

675

Income taxes

309

Income before outside shareholders’ interests

366

Outside shareholders’ interests

66

Net income

$ 300

Note: Depreciation expense totals $200; operating lease payments total $150; and preferred dividends total

$50. Assume that 1/3 of operating lease payments is for interest.

Required a. Compute the times interest earned.

b. Compute the fixed charge coverage.

the sherwill statement of consolidated income is as follows 544441

The Sherwill statement of consolidated income is as follows:

Net sales

$658

Other income

8

666

Costs and expenses:

Cost of products sold

418

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

196

Interest

16

630

Income before income taxes and extraordinary charges

36

Income taxes

18

Income before extraordinary charge

18

Extraordinary charge—losses on tornado damage (net)

4

Net income

$ 14

Note: Depreciation expense totals $200; operating lease payments total $150; and preferred dividends total

$50. Assume that 1/3 of operating lease payments is for interest.

Required a. Compute the times interest earned.

b. Compute the fixed charge coverage.

the kaufman company balance sheet is shown on the next page 544442

The Kaufman Company balance sheet is shown on the next page.

Requireda. Compute the debt ratio.

b. Compute the debt/equity ratio.

c. Compute the ratio of total debt to tangible net worth.

d. Comment on the amount of debt that the Kaufman Company has.

Assets

Current assets

Cash

$ 13,445

Short-term investments—at cost (approximate market)

5,239

Trade accounts receivable, less allowance of $ 1,590

88,337

Inventories—at lower of cost (average method) or market:

Finished merchandise

$113,879

Work in process, raw materials and supplies

47,036

160,915

Prepaid expenses

8,221

Total current assets

276,157

Other assets:

Receivables, advances, and other assets

4,473

Intangibles

2,324

Total other assets

6,797

Property, plant, and equipment:

Land

5,981

Buildings

78,908

Machinery and equipment

162,425

247,314

Less allowances for depreciation

106,067

Net property, plant, and equipment

141,247

Total assets

$424,201

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Notes payable

$ 2,817

Trade accounts payable

23,720

Pension, interest, and other accruals

33,219

Taxes, other than income taxes

4,736

Income taxes

3,409

Total current liabilities

67,901

Long-term debt, 12% debentures

86,235

Deferred income taxes

8,768

Minority interest in subsidiaries

12,075

Total liabilities

174,979

Stockholders’ equity:

Serial preferred

9,154

Common $5.25 par value

33,540

Additional paid-in capital

3,506

Retained earnings

203,712

249,912

Less cost of common shares in treasury

690

Total shareholders’ equity

249,222

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$424,201

individual transactions often have a significant impact on ratios this problem will 544443

Individual transactions often have a significant impact on ratios. This problem will consider the direction of such an impact.

Ratio Transaction

Times Interest
Earned

Debt Ratio

Debt/ Equity
Ratio

Debt to Tangible
Net Worth

a. Purchase of buildings
financed by mortgage.

______

______

______

______

b. Purchase of inventory on
short-term loan at 1% over
prime rate.

______

______

______

______

c. Declaration and payment of
cash dividend.

______

______

______

______

d. Declaration and payment of
stock dividend.

______

______

______

______

e. Firm increases profits by
cutting cost of sales.

______

______

______

______

f. Appropriation of
retained earnings.

______

______

______

______

g. Sale of common stock.

______

______

______

______

h. Repayment of long-term
bank loan.

______

______

______

______

i. Conversion of bonds to
common stock outstanding.

______

______

______

______

j. Sale of inventory at greater
than cost.

______

______

______

______

Required Indicate the effect of each of the transactions on the ratios listed. Use + to indicate an increase, -to indicate a decrease, and 0 to indicate no effect.

Assume an initial times interest earned of more than 1, and a debt ratio, debt/equity ratio, and a total debt to tangible net worth of less than 1.

mr parks has asked you to advise him on the long term debt paying ability of the aro 544444

Mr. Parks has asked you to advise him on the long-term debt-paying ability of the Arodex Company. He provides you with the following ratios:

2001

2000

1999

8.2

6.0

5.5

40%

39%

40%

80%

81%

81%

Required a. Give the implications and the limitations of each item separately and

then the collective influence that could be drawn from them about the

Arodex Company’s long-term debt position.

b. What warnings should you offer Mr. Parks about the limitations of

ratio analysis for the purpose stated here?

for the year ended june 30 2001 a e g enterprises presented the financial statements 544445

For the year ended June 30, 2001, A.E.G. Enterprises presented the financial statements shown on the next page.

Early in the new fiscal year, the officers of the firm formalized a substantial expansion plan. The plan will increase fixed assets by $190,000,000. In addition, extra inventory will be needed to support expanded production. The increase in inventory is purported to be $10,000,000.

A.E.G. ENTERPRISES

Balance Sheet for June 30, 2001 (In thousands)

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

$ 50,000

Accounts receivable

60,000

Inventory

106,000

Total current assets

Property, plant, and equipment

$504,000

Less: accumulated depreciation

140,000

364,000

Patents and other intangible assets

20,000

Total assets

$600,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$ 46,000

Taxes payable

15,000

Other current liabilities

32,000

Total current liabilities

$ 93,000

Long-term debt

100,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Preferred stock ($100 par, 10% cumulative, 500,000 shares

authorized and issued)

50,000

Common stock ($1 par, 200,000,000 shares authorized,

100,000,000 issued)

100,000

Premium on common stock

120,000

Retained earnings

137,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$600,000

A.E.G. ENTERPRISES

Income Statement

For the Year Ended June 30, 2001

(In thousands except earnings per share)

Sales

$936,000

Cost of sales

671,000

Gross profit

$265,000

Operating expenses

Selling

$ 62,000

General

41,000

103,000

Operating income

$162,000

Other items:

Interest expense

20,000

Earnings before provision for income tax

$142,000

Provision for income tax

56,800

Net income

$ 85,200

Earnings per share

$ .83

The firm’s investment bankers have suggested the following three alternative financing plans:

Plan A: Sell preferred stock at par.

Plan B: Sell common stock at $10 per share.

Plan C: Sell long-term bonds, due in 20 years, at par ($1,000), with a stated interest rate of 16%.

Required a. For the year ended June 30, 2001, compute:

1. Times interest earned

2. Debt ratio

3. Debt/equity ratio

4. Debt to tangible net worth ratio

b. Assuming the same financial results and statement balances, except for the increased assets and financing, compute the same ratios as in (a) under each financing alternative. Do not attempt to adjust retained earnings for the next year’s profits.

c. Changes in earnings and number of shares will give the following earnings per share: Plan A—.73 Plan B—.69 Plan C—.73. Based on the information given, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each alternative.

d. Why does the 10% preferred stock cost the company more than the 16% bonds?

the consolidated statement of earnings of anonymous corporation for the year ended d 544446

The consolidated statement of earnings of Anonymous Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2001 is as follows:

Net sales

$1,550,010,000

Other income, net

10,898,000

1,560,908,000

Costs and expenses:

Cost of goods sold

1,237,403,000

Depreciation and amortization

32,229,000

Selling, general and administrative

178,850,000

Interest

37,646,000

1,486,128,000

Earnings from continuing operations before

income taxes and equity earnings

74,780,000

Income taxes

37,394,000

Earnings from continuing operations before equity earnings

37,386,000

Equity in net earnings of unconsolidated

subsidiaries and affiliated companies

27,749,000

Earnings from continuing operations

65,135,000

Earnings (losses) from discontinued operations,

net of applicable income taxes

6,392,000

Net earnings

$ 71,527,000

Required a. Compute the times interest earned for 2001.

b. Compute the times interest earned for 2001, including the equity income in the coverage.

c. What is the impact of including equity earnings from the coverage?

Why should equity income be excluded from the times interest earned coverage?

the allen company and the barker company are competitors in the same industry 544447

The Allen Company and the Barker Company are competitors in the same industry.

Selected financial data from their 2001 statements are shown below.

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2001

Allen

Barker

Company

Company

Cash

$ 10,000

$ 35,000

Accounts receivable

45,000

120,000

Inventory

70,000

190,000

Investments

40,000

100,000

Intangibles

11,000

20,000

Property, plant, and equipment

180,000

520,000

Total assets

$356,000

$985,000

Accounts payable

$ 60,000

$165,000

Bonds payable

100,000

410,000

Preferred stock, $1 par

50,000

30,000

Common Stock, $10 par

100,000

280,000

Retained earnings

46,000

100,000

Total liabilities and capital

$356,000

$985,000

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2001

Allen Company

Barker Company

Sales

$1,050,000

$2,800,000

Cost of goods sold

725,000

2,050,000

Selling and administrative expenses

230,000

580,000

Interest expense

10,000

32,000

Income taxes

42,000

65,000

Net income

$ 43,000

$ 73,000

Industry Averages:

Times interest earned

7.2 times

Debt ratio

40.3%

Debt/equity

66.6%

Debt to tangible net worth

72.7%

Required a. Compute the following ratios for each company:

1. Times interest earned 3. Debt/equity ratio

2. Debt ratio 4. Debt to tangible net worth

b. Is Barker Company in a position to take on additional long-term debt? Explain.

c. Which company has the better long-term debt position? Explain.

the zaro company rsquo s balance sheet for december 31 2002 income statement for the 544523

The Zaro Company’s balance sheet for December 31, 2002, income statement for the year ended December 31, 2002, and the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, are shown below and on the following page.

ZARO COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2002 and 2001

2002

2001

Assets

Cash

$ 30,000

$ 15,000

Accounts receivable, net

75,000

87,000

Inventory

90,000

105,000

Prepaid expenses

3,000

2,000

Land

25,000

25,000

Building and equipment

122,000

120,000

Accumulated depreciation

(92,000)

(80,000)

Total assets

$253,000

$274,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 25,500

$ 32,000

Income taxes payable

2,500

3,000

Accrued liabilities

5,000

5,000

Bonds payable (current $20,000 at 12/31/02)

90,000

95,000

Common stock

85,000

85,000

Retained earnings

45,000

54,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$253,000

$274,000

ZARO COMPANY
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Sales

$400,000

Less expense:

Cost of goods sold (includes depreciation of $5,000)

$280,000

Selling and administrative expenses

(includes depreciation expenses of $7,000)

78,000

Interest expense

8,000

Total expenses

$366,000

Income before taxes

34,000

Income tax expense

14,000

Net income

$ 20,000

ZARO COMPANY
Statement of Cash Flows
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Net cash flow from operating activities:

Net income

$ 20,000

Noncash expenses, revenues, losses, and

gains included in income:

Depreciation

12,000

Decrease in accounts receivable

12,000

Decrease in inventory

15,000

Increase in prepaid expenses

(1,000)

Decrease in accounts payable

(6,500)

Decrease in income taxes payable

(500)

Net cash flow from operating activities

$ 51,000

Cash flows from investing activities:

Increase in buildings and equipment

$ (2,000)

Net cash used by investing activities

(2,000)

Cash flows from financing activities:

Decrease in bonds payable

$ (5,000)

Cash dividends paid

(29,000)

Net cash used for financing activities:

(34,000)

Net increase in cash

$ 15,000

The president of the Zaro Company cannot understand how the company was able to pay cash dividends that were greater than net income and at the same time increase the cash balance. He notes that business was down slightly in 2002.

Required

a. Comment on the statement of cash flows.

b. Compute the following liquidity ratios for 2002:

1. Current ratio

2. Acid-test ratio

3. Operating cash flow/current maturities of long-term debt and current notes payable

4. Cash ratio

c. Compute the following debt ratios for 2002:

1. Times interest earned

2. Debt ratio

d. Compute the following profitability ratios for 2002:

1. Return on assets (using average assets)

2. Return on common equity (using average common equity)

e. Give your opinion as to the liquidity of Zaro.

f. Give your opinion as to the debt position of Zaro.

g. Give your opinion as to the profitability of Zaro.

h. Explain to the president how Zaro was able to pay cash dividends that were greater than net income and at the same time increase the cash balance.

the ladies store presented the statement of cash flows for the year ended december 3 544524

The Ladies Store presented the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, shown below.

THE LADIES STORE
Statement of Cash Flows
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Cash received:

From sales to customers

$150,000

From sales of bonds

100,000

From issuance of notes payable

40,000

From interest on bonds

5,000

Total cash received

295,000

Cash payments:

For merchandise purchases

110,000

For purchase of truck

20,000

For purchase of investment

80,000

For purchase of equipment

45,000

For interest

2,000

For income taxes

15,000

Total cash payments

272,000

Net increase in cash

$ 23,000

Note: Depreciation expense was $15,000.

Required a. Prepare a statement of cash flows in proper form.

b. Comment on the major flows of cash.

which of the following could lead to cash flow problems 544525

Answer the following multiple-choice questions:

a. Which of the following could lead to cash flow problems?

1. Tightening of credit by suppliers

2. Easing of credit by suppliers

3. Reduction of inventory

4. Improved quality of accounts receivable

5. Selling of bonds

b. Which of the following would not contribute to bankruptcy of a profitable firm?

1. Substantial increase in inventory

2. Substantial increase in receivables

3. Substantial decrease in accounts payable

4. Substantial decrease in notes payable

5. Substantial decrease in receivables

c. Which of the following current asset or current liability accounts is not included in the computation of cash flows from operating activities?

1. Change in accounts receivable

2. Change in inventory

3. Change in accounts payable

4. Change in accrued wages

5. Change in notes payable to banks

d. Which of the following items is not included in the adjustment of net income to cash flows from operating activities?

1. Increase in deferred taxes

2. Amortization of goodwill

3. Depreciation expense for the period

4. Amortization of premium on bonds payable

5. Proceeds from selling land

e. Which of the following represents an internal source of cash?

1. Cash inflows from financing activities

2. Cash inflows from investing activities

3. Cash inflows from selling land

4. Cash inflows from operating activities

5. Cash inflows from issuing stock

f. How would revenue from services be classified?

1. Investing inflow

2. Investing outflow

3. Operating inflow

4. Operating outflow

5. Financing outflow

g. What type of account is inventory?

1. Investing

2. Financing

3. Operating

4. Noncash

5. Sometimes operating and sometimes investing

h. How would short-term investments in marketable securities be classified?

1. Operating activities

2. Financing activities

3. Investing activities

4. Noncash activities

5. Cash and cash equivalents

the following material relates to the darrow company 544526

The following material relates to the Darrow Company:

Cash Flows classification

Effect on Cash

Operating
Activity

Investing
Activity

Financing
Activity

Increase

Decrease

Noncash
Trans-
actions

a. Net loss

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

b. Increase in inventory

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

c. Decrease in receivables

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

d. Increase in prepaid insurance

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

e. Issuance of common stock

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

f. Acquisition of land, using notes payable

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

g. Purchase of land, using cash

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

h. Paid cash dividend

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

i. Payment of income taxes

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

j. Retirement of bonds, using cash

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

k. Sale of equipment for cash

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

Required Place an X in the appropriate columns for each of the situations.

retired bonds using common stock 544527

Cash Flows Classification

Effect on Cash

Operating
Activity

Investing
Activity

Financing
Activity

Increase

Decrease

Noncash
Trans-
actions

a. Net income

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

b. Paid cash dividend

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

c. Increase in receivables

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

d. Retirement of debt—paying cash

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

e. Purchase of treasury stock

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

f. Purchase of equipment

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

g. Sale of equipment

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

h. Decrease in inventory

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

i. Acquisition of land, using common stock

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

j. Retired bonds, using common stock

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

k. Decrease in accounts payable

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

Required Place an X in the appropriate columns for each of the situations.

the bbb company balance sheet and income statement follow 544528

The BBB Company balance sheet and income statement follow:

BBB COMPANY
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2002 and 2001

2002

2003

Assets

Cash

$ 4,500

$ 4,000

Marketable securities

2,500

2,000

Accounts receivable

6,800

7,200

Inventories

7,500

8,000

Total current assets

21,300

21,200

Land

11,000

12,000

Equipment

24,000

20,500

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(3,800)

(3,000)

Building

70,000

70,000

Accumulated depreciation—building

(14,000)

(12,000)

Total assets

$108,500

$108,700

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 7,800

$ 7,000

Wages payable

1,050

1,000

Taxes payable

500

1,500

Total current liabilities

9,350

9,500

Bonds payable

30,000

30,000

Common stock, $10 par

32,000

30,000

Additional paid-in capital

21,000

19,200

Retained earnings

16,150

20,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$108,500

$108,700

BBB COMPANY
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Sales

$38,000

Operating expenses:

Depreciation expense

$ 2,800

Other operating expenses

35,000

37,800

Operating income

200

Gain on sale of land

800

Income before tax expense

1,000

Tax expense

500

Net income

$ 500

Supplemental information:

Dividends declared and paid

$ 4,350

Land sold for cash

1,800

Equipment purchased for cash

3,500

Common stock sold for cash

3,800

Required a. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002.

(Present the cash flows from operations, using the indirect method.)

b. Comment on the statement of cash flows.

the income statement and other selected data for the frish company are shown below 544529

The income statement and other selected data for the Frish Company are shown below:

FRISH COMPANY
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2002

Net sales

$640,000

Expenses:

Cost of goods sold

360,000

Selling and administrative expense

43,000

Other expense

2,000

Total expenses

405,000

Income before income tax

235,000

Income tax

92,000

Net income

$143,000

Other data:

a. Cost of goods sold, including depreciation expense of $15,000

b. Selling and administrative expense,

including depreciation expense of $5,000

c. Other expense, representing amortization of goodwill, $3,000, and

amortization of bond premium, $1,000

d. Increase in accounts receivable

$ 27,000

e. Increase in accounts payable

15,000

f. Increase in inventories

35,000

g. Decrease in prepaid expenses

1,000

h. Increase in accrued liabilities

3,000

i. Decrease in income taxes payable

10,000

Required a. Prepare a schedule of change from accrual basis to cash basis

income statement.

b. Using the schedule of change from accrual basis to cash basis income

statement computed in (a), present the cash provided by operations,

using (1) the direct approach and (2) the indirect approach.

the aggarwal company has had 10 000 shares of 10 100 par value preferred stock and 8 544232

The Aggarwal Company has had 10,000 shares of 10%, $100 par-value preferred stock and 80,000 shares of $5 stated-value common stock outstanding for the last three years.

During that period, dividends paid totaled $0, $200,000, and $220,000 for each year, respectively.

Required Compute the amount of dividends that must have been paid to preferred stockholders and common stockholders in each of the three years, given the following four independent assumptions:

a. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and cumulative.

b. Preferred stock participates up to 12% of its par value and is cumulative.

c. Preferred stock is fully participating and cumulative.

d. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and noncumulative.

the following information for decher automotives covers the year ended 2000 544255

The following information for Decher Automotives covers the year ended 2000:

Administrative expense

$ 62,000

Dividend income

10,000

Income taxes

100,000

Interest expense

20,000

Merchandise inventory, 1/1

650,000

Merchandise inventory, 12/31

440,000

Flood loss (net of tax)

30,000

Purchases

460,000

Sales

1,000,000

Selling expenses

43,000

Required

a. Prepare a multiple-step income statement.

b. Assuming that 100,000 shares of common stock are outstanding, calculate the earnings per share before extraordinary items and the net earnings per share.

c. Prepare a single-step income statement.

change this statement to a multiple step format as illustrated in this chapter 544256

The following information for Lesky Corporation covers the year ended December 1,2000.

LESKY CORPORATION
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2000

Revenue:

Revenues from sales

$362,000

Rental income

1,000

Interest

2,400

Total revenue

365,400

Expenses:

Cost of products sold

$242,000

Selling expenses

47,000

Administrative and general expenses

11,400

Interest expense

2,200

Federal and state income taxes

20,300

Total expenses

322,900

Net income

$ 42,500

Required Change this statement to a multiple-step format, as illustrated in this chapter.

the accounts of consolidated can contain the following amounts at december 31 2000 544257

The accounts of Consolidated Can contain the following amounts at December 31, 2000:

Cost of products sold

$410,000

Dividends

3,000

Extraordinary gain (net of tax)

1,000

Income taxes

9,300

Interest expense

8,700

Other income

1,600

Retained earnings, 1/1

270,000

Sales

480,000

Selling and administrative expense

42,000

Required Prepare a multiple-step income statement combined with a reconciliation of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2000.

the following items are from taper line corporation on december 31 2000 assume a fla 544258

The following items are from Taper line Corporation on December 31, 2000. Assume a flat 40% corporate tax rate on all items, including the casualty loss.

Sales

$670,000

Rental income

3,600

Gain on the sale of fixed assets

3,000

General and administrative expenses

110,000

Selling expenses

97,000

Interest expense

1,900

Depreciation for the period

10,000

Extraordinary item (casualty loss—pretax)

30,000

Cost of sales

300,000

Common stock (30,000 shares outstanding)

150,000

Required

a. Prepared a single-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2000. Include earnings per share for earnings before extraordinary items and net income.

b. Prepare a multiple-step income statement. Include earnings per share for earnings before extraordinary items and net income.

the income statement of rawl company for the year ended december 31 2000 shows 544259

The income statement of Rawl Company for the year ended December 31, 2000 shows:

Net sales

$360,000

Cost of sales

190,000

Gross profit

170,000

Selling, general, and administrative expense

80,000

Income before unusual write-offs

90,000

Provision for unusual write-offs

50,000

Earnings from operations before income taxes

40,000

Income taxes

20,000

Net earnings from operations before extraordinary charge

20,000

Extraordinary charge, net of tax of $10,000

(50,000)

Net earnings (loss)

$(30,000)

Required. Compute the net earnings remaining after removing unusual write-off stand the extraordinary charge. Remove these items net of tax. Estimate the tax rate for unusual write-offs based on the taxes on operating income.

the following information applies to bowling green metals corporation for the year e 544261

The following information applies to Bowling Green Metals Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2000.

Total revenues from regular operations

$832,000

Total expenses from regular operations

776,000

Extraordinary gain, net of applicable income taxes

30,000

Dividends paid

20,000

Number of shares of common stock

outstanding during the year

10,000

Required . Compute earnings per share before extraordinary items and net earnings.

Show how this might be presented in the financial statements.

you were recently hired as the assistant treasurer for victor inc yesterday the trea 544262

You were recently hired as the assistant treasurer for Victor, Inc. Yesterday the treasurer was injured in a bicycle accident and is now hospitalized, unconscious. Your boss, Mr. Fernandes, just informed you that the financial statements are due today. Searching through the treasurer’s desk, you find the following notes:

a.Income from continuing operations, based on computation, s isd on$e4 00s,0o0 0. Far No taxes are accounted for yet. The tax rate is 30%.

b. Dividends declared and paid were $20,000. During the year, 100,000 shares of stock were outstanding.

c. The corporation experienced an uninsured $20,000 pretax loss from a freak hailstorm.

Such a storm is considered to be unusual and infrequent.

d. The company decided to change its inventory pricing method from average cost to the FIFO method. The effect of this change is to increase prior years’ income by $30,000 pretax. The FIFO method has been used for 2000. (Hint: This adjustment should be placed just prior to net income.)

e. In 2000, the company settled a lawsuit against it for $10,000 pretax. The settlement was not previously accrued and is due for payment in February 2001.

f. In 2000, the firm sold a portion of its long-term securities at a gain of $30,000 pretax.

g. The corporation disposed of its consumer products division in August 2000, at a loss of $90,000 pretax. The loss from operations through August was $60,000 pretax.

Required Prepare an income statement for 2000, in good form, starting with income from continuing operations. Compute earnings per share for income from continuing operations, discontinued operations, extraordinary loss, cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle, and net income.

list where each of the following items may appear choose from a income statement b b 544264

List where each of the following items may appear. Choose from (A) income statement, (B) balance sheet, or (C) reconciliation of retained earnings.

a. Dividends paid

b. Notes payable

c. Minority share of earnings

d. Accrued payrolls

e. Loss on disposal of equipment

f. Minority interest in consoli-dated subsidiary

g. Adjustments of prior periods

h. Redeemable preferred stock

i. Treasury stock

j. Extraordinary loss

k. Unrealized exchange gains and losses

l. Equity in net income of affiliates

m. Goodwill

n. Unrealized decline in market value of equity investment

o. Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

p. Common stock

q. Costs of good sold

r. Supplies

s. Land

uranium mining company founded in 1970 to mine and market uranium purchased a mine i 544267

Uranium Mining Company, founded in 1970 to mine and market uranium, purchased a mine in 1971 for $900 million. It estimated that the uranium had a market value of $150 per ounce. By 2000, the market value had increased to $300 per ounce. Records for 2000 indicate the following:

Production

200,000 ounces

Sales

230,000 ounces

Deliveries

190,000 ounces

Cash collection

210,000 ounces

Costs of production including depletion*

$50,000,000

Selling expense

$2,000,000

Administrative expenses

$1,250,000

Tax rate

50%

*Production cost per ounce has remained constant over the last few years, and the company has maintained the same production level.

Required a.Compute the income for 2000, using each of the following bases:

1. Receipt of cash

2. Point of sale

3. End of production

4. Based on delivery

b. Comment on when each of the methods should be used. Which method should be used by Uranium Mining Company?

each of the following statements represents a decision made by the accountant of gro 544268

Each of the following statements represents a decision made by the accountant of Growth Industries:

  1. A tornado destroyed $200,000 in uninsured inventory. This loss is included in the cost of goods sold.
  2. Land was purchased ten years ago for $50,000. The accountant adjusts the land account to $100,000, which is the estimated current value.
  3. The cost of machinery and equipment is charged to a fixed asset account. The machinery and equipment will be expensed over the period of use.
  4. The value of equipment increased this year, so no depreciation of equipment was recorded this year.
  5. During the year, inventory that cost $5,000 was stolen by employees. This loss has been included in the cost of goods sold for the financial statements. The total amount of the cost of goods sold was $1,000,000.
  6. The president of the company, who owns the business, used company funds to buy a car for personal use. The car was recorded on the company’s books.

Required .State whether you agree or disagree with each decision.

the following information for gaffney corporation covers the year ended december 31 544269

The following information for Gaffney Corporation covers the year ended December 31, 2000:

GAFFNEY CORPORATION
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2000

Revenue:

Revenues from sales

$450,000

Other

5,000

Total revenue

455,000

Expenses:

Cost of products sold

$280,000

Selling expenses

50,000

Administrative and general expenses

20,000

Federal and state income taxes

30,000

Total expenses

380,000

Net income

75,000

Other comprehensive income

Available-for-sale securities adjustment,

net of $5,000 income tax

$ 7,000

Foreign currency translation adjustment,

net of $3,000 income tax

8,000

Other comprehensive income

15,000

Comprehensive income

$ 90,000

Required a.Will net income or comprehensive income tends to be more volatile? Comment.

b. Which income figure will be used to compute earnings per share?

c. What is the total tax expense reported?

d. Will the items within other comprehensive income always net out as an addition to net income? Comment.

compute the number of days rsquo sales in receivables at december 31 2000 and 1999 544340

The Hawk Company wants to determine the liquidity of its receivables. It has supplied you with the following data regarding selected accounts for December 31, 2000, and 1999:

2000

1999

Net sales

$1,180,178

$2,200,000

Receivables, less allowance for losses and discounts

Beginning of year (allowance for losses and

discounts, 2000—$12,300; 1999—$7,180)

240,360

230,180

End of year (allowance for losses and

discounts, 2000—$11,180; 1999—$12,300)

220,385

240,360

Required a. Compute the number of days’ sales in receivables at December 31, 2000, and 1999.

b. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for 2000 and 1999. (Use year-end gross receivables.)

c. Comment on the liquidity of the Hawk Company receivables.

compute the accounts receivable turnover for the period ended july 544341

Mr. Williams, the owner of Williams Produce, wants to maintain control over accounts receivable. He understands that days’ sales in receivables and accounts receivable turnover will give a good indication of how well receivables are being managed. Williams Produce does 60% of its business during June, July, and August. Mr. Williams provided the pertinent data:

For Year Ended

For Year

December 31,

Ended

2000

July 31, 2000

Net sales

$800,000

$790,000

Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts

Beginning of period (allowance

January 1, $3,000; August 1, $4,000)

50,000

89,000

End of period (allowance December 31,

$3,500; July 31, $4,100)

55,400

90,150

Required a. Compute the days’ sales in receivables for July 31, 2000, and December 31, 2000, based on the accompanying data.

b. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for the period ended July

31, 2000, and December 31, 2000. (Use year-end gross receivables.)

c. Comment on the results from (a) and (b).

the l solomon company would like to compare its days rsquo sales in receivables with 544342

The L. Solomon Company would like to compare its days’ sales in receivables with that of a competitor, L. Konrath Company. Both companies have had similar sales results in the past, but the L. Konrath Company has had better profit results. The L. Solomon Company suspects that one reason for the better profit results is that the L. Konrath Company did a better job of managing receivables. The L. Solomon Company uses a calendar year that ends on December 31, while the L. Konrath Company uses a fiscal year that ends on July 31. Information related to sales and receivables of the two companies follows:

For Year Ended
December 31,
20XX

L. Solomon Company

Net sales

$1,800,000

Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $8,000

110,000

L. Konrath Company
Net sales
Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $4,000

L. Konrath Company

Net sales

$1,850,000

Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $4,000

60,000

Required a. Compute the days’ sales in receivables for both companies. (Use yearend gross receivables.) b. Comment on the results.

the following inventory and sales data for this year for the g rabbit company are 544346

The following inventory and sales data for this year for the G. Rabbit Company are:

End

Beginning

of Year

of Year

Net sales

$3,150,000

Gross receivables

180,000

$160,000

Inventory

480,000

390,000

Cost of goods sold

2,250,000

Required Using the above data from the G. Rabbit Company, compute:

a. The accounts receivable turnover in days

b. The inventory turnover in days

c. The operating cycle

a partial balance sheet and income statement for the king corporation are shown belo 544349

A partial balance sheet and income statement for the King Corporation are shown below and on the next page.

KING CORPORATION
Partial Balance Sheet
December 31, 2001

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

$ 33,493

Marketable securities

215,147

Trade receivables, less allowance of $6,000

255,000

Inventories, LIFO

523,000

Prepaid expenses

26,180

Total current assets

$1,052,820

Liabilities

Current liabilities:

Trade accounts payable

$ 103,689

Notes payable (primarily to banks) and commercial paper

210,381

Accrued expenses and other liabilities

120,602

Income taxes payable

3,120

Current maturities of long-term debt

22,050

Total current liabilities

$ 459,842

Required Compute the following:

a. Working capital.

b. Current ratio

c. Acid-test ratio

d. Cash ratio

e. Days’ sales in receivables

f. Accounts receivable turnover in days

g. Days’ sales in inventory

h. Inventory turnover in days

i. Operating cycle

KING CORPORATION
Partial Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2001

Net sales

$3,050,600

Miscellaneous income

45,060

$3,095,660

Costs and expenses:

Cost of sales

2,185,100

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

350,265

Interest expense

45,600

Income taxes

300,000

2,880,965

Net income

$ 214,695

Note: The trade receivables at December 31, 2000, were $280,000, net of an allowance of $8,000, for a gross receivables figure of $288,000. The inventory at

December 31, 2000, was $565,000.

individual transactions often have a significant impact on ratios this problem will 544350

Individual transactions often have a significant impact on ratios. This problem will consider the direction of such an impact.

Total
Current
Assets

Total
Current
Liabilities

Net
Working
Capital

Current
Ratio

a. Cash is acquired through issuance of additional
common stock.

_______

_______

_______

_______

b. Merchandise is sold for cash. (Assume a profit.)

_______

_______

_______

_______

c. A fixed asset is sold for more than book value.

_______

_______

_______

_______

d. Payment is made to trade creditors for previous
purchases.

_______

_______

_______

_______

e. A cash dividend is declared and paid.

_______

_______

_______

_______

f. A stock dividend is declared and paid.

_______

_______

_______

_______

g. Cash is obtained through long-term bank loans.

_______

_______

_______

_______

h. A profitable firm increases its fixed assets depreciation allowance account.

_______

_______

_______

_______

i. Current operating expenses are paid.

_______

_______

_______

_______

j. Ten-year notes are issued to
pay off accounts payable.

_______

_______

_______

_______

k. Accounts receivable are collected.

_______

_______

_______

_______

l. Equipment is purchased with short-term notes.

_______

_______

_______

_______

m. Merchandise is purchased on credit.

_______

_______

_______

_______

n. The estimated taxes payable are increased.

_______

_______

_______

_______

o. Marketable securities are sold below cost.

_______

_______

_______

_______

Required Indicate the effects of the transactions listed above on each of the following: total current assets, total current liabilities, net working capital, and current ratio. Use ??to indicate an increase, -?to indicate a decrease, and 0 to indicate no effect. Assume an initial current ratio of more than 1 to 1.

the following financial data were taken from the annual financial statements of the 544353

The following financial data were taken from the annual financial statements of the Smith Corporation:

1999

2000

2001

Current assets

$450,000

$400,000

$ 500,000

Current liabilities

390,000

300,000

340,000

Sales

1,450,000

1,500,000

1,400,000

Cost of goods sold

1,180,000

1,020,000

1,120,000

Inventory

280,000

200,000

250,000

Accounts receivable

120,000

110,000

105,000

Required a. Based on these data, calculate the following for 2000 and 2001:

1. Working capital

2. Current ratio

3. Acid-test ratio

4. Accounts receivable turnover

5. Merchandise inventory turnover

6. Inventory turnover in days

b. Evaluate the results of your computations in regard to the short-term liquidity of the firm.

the anne elizabeth corporation is engaged in the business of making toys a high perc 544354

The Anne Elizabeth Corporation is engaged in the business of making toys. A high percentage of its products are sold to consumers during November and December. Therefore, retailers need to have the toys in stock prior to November. The corporation produces on a relatively stable basis during the year in order to retain its skilled employees and to minimize its investment in plant and equipment. The seasonal nature of its business requires a substantial capacity to store inventory.

The gross receivables balance at April 30, 2000, was $75,000, and the inventory balance was $350,000 on this date. Sales for the year ended April 30, 2001, totaled $4,000,000, and the cost of goods sold totaled $1,800,000. The Anne Elizabeth Corporation uses a natural business year that ends on April 30.

Inventory and accounts receivable data are given in the following table for the year ended April 30, 2001.

Month-End Balance

Month

Gross Receivables

Inventory

May, 2000

$ 60,000

$525,000

June, 2000

40,000

650,000

July, 2000

50,000

775,000

August, 2000

60,000

900,000

September, 2000

200,000

975,000

October, 2000

800,000

700,000

November, 2000

1,500,000

400,000

December, 2000

1,800,000

25,000

January, 2001

1,000,000

100,000

February, 2001

600,000

150,000

March, 2001

200,000

275,000

April, 2001

50,000

400,000

Required a. Using averages based on the yearend figures, compute the following:

1. Accounts receivable turnover in days

2. Accounts receivable turnover per year

3. Inventory turnover in days

4. Inventory turnover per year

b. Using averages based on monthly figures, compute the following:

1. Accounts receivable turnover in days

2. Accounts receivable turnover per year

3. Inventory turnover in days

4. Inventory turnover per year

c. Comment on the difference between the ratios computed in (a) and (b).

d. Compute the days’ sales in receivables.

e. Compute the days’ sales in inventory.

f. How realistic are the days’ sales in receivables and the days’ sales in inventory that were computed in (d) and (e)?

the discount rate is 20 percent what is the net present value of the project 544065

Project Evaluation. The following table presents sales forecasts for Golden Gelt Giftware. The unit price is $40. The unit cost of the giftware is $25.

Year

Unit Sales

1

22,000

2

30,000

3

14,000

4

5,000

Thereafter

0

It is expected that net working capital will amount to 25 percent of sales in the following year. For example, the store will need an initial (Year 0) investment in working capital of.25 x 22,000 x $40 = $220,000. Plant and equipment necessary to establish the giftware business will require an additional investment of$200,000.

This investment will bedepreciated in an asset class with a CCA rate of 25 percent. We will assume that the firm has other assets in this asset class. After four years, the equipment will have an economic and book value of zero. The firm”s tax rate is 35 percent. The discount rate is 20 percent. What is the net present value of the project?

would you pursue the project under these new conditions explain your answer 544068

Project Evaluation. You are considering investing in a new line of entertainment products. The project has an estimated economic life of five years. You anticipate some immediate stand-up costs amounting to $25,000. In addition, you will be investing $ 100,000 in new plant and equipment. Assume, for tax purposes, that the machinery and equipment will be depreciated straight-line over its economic life. Also assume that the initial tan-up costs are fully tax-deductible.

In the first year of operation you are ant incepting sales revenues of $60,000. These revenues are expected to grow by five percent per year until Year 4, however, the revenues are expected to decline by five percent in the fifth year. First year operating costs will be $10,000; in subsequent years, these are expected to grow in proportion to sales revenues. The tax rate applicable to your business will be 34 percent. Also, at the end of the project”s economic life, your plant and equipment will not have any salvage value. Your cost of capital is 12 percent?

Assuming that you will be able to expense the project’s standup costs.

a. Calculate its payback period discounted payback period. Internal rate of return, net present value, and profitability index.

b. Using the net present value and internal rate of return criteria, do you think it is worthwhile for you to pursue this project”! Explain your answer.

c. Now, assume that for CCA purposes, your plant and equipment belong to asset Class 39, which carries a CCA rate of 25 percent. Recomputed the project”s net present value, assuming that you have other assets in asset Class 39 that will be continued even after the economic life of this project is over. Work out your calculations separately assuming ( I) a zero salvage value and (2) a $ 10,000 salvage value, al the end of the project”s economic life. Would you pursue the project under these new conditions? Explain your answer.

what is the npv of the replacement project for this part assume that the new equipme 544070

Project Evaluation. PC Shopping Network may upgrade it is modem pool. It last upgraded 2 years ago, when it spent $115 million on equipment with an assumed life of 5 years and an assumed salvage value of $ 15 million for tax purposes. The firm uses straight-line depredation. The old equipment can be sold today for $80 million A new modem pool can be installed today for $150 million. This will have a 3-year life, and will be depreciated to zero using straight-line depreciation. The new equipment will enable the firm to increase sales by $25 million per year and decrease operating costs by $ 10 million per year. At the end of 3 years, the new equipment will be worthless. Assume the firm”s tax rate is 35 percent and the discount rate for projects of this sort is 12 percent.

a. What is the net cash now at time 0 if the old equipment is replaced”!

b. What are the incremental cash flows in Years 1, 2, and 3?

c. What are the NPV and IRR of the replacement project?

d. Now ignore straight-line depreciation and assume that both new and old equipment are in an asset class with a CCA rate of 30 percent. PC Shopping Network has other assets in this asset class. What is the NPV of the replacement project”! For this part, assume that the new equipment will have a salvage value of $30 million at the end of3 years.

conduct an npv analysis to determine whether your decision to go ahead with the proj 544071

Integrative You are exploring the possibility of starting a project involving production of an assortment of spicy curried pickles. You had approached a marketing consultant to conduct market research and do a one-year feasibility study for $25,000. The recommendations of the study ore positive, and you have decided to begin work on the project. You expect the life of the project to be six years. The initial investment in the project is expected 10 be as follows:

Land: $150,000

Buildings: $350,000

Manufacturing equipment: $250,000

Net working capital: $40,000

For CCA computation, the belong to asset Class I and the manufacturing equipment is in asset Class 39, with applicable CCA rates of 4 percent and 25 percent, respectively. At the end of the project”s economic life, you expect to be able to sell the buildings and land for $450,000 (the value of the land is expected to remain unchanged). The manufacturing equipment is, however, expected to have a salvage value of only $125,000. Net working capital requirements for each year are expected to increase by 10 percent from the previous year. Your business will be taxed at 35 percent.

In the first year, you expect to sell 30,000 units of the gannet pickles in bol1lcdjors. In each subsequent year, unit sales are expected to increase by 4 percent. You ha”e decided to price the pickles at S8.50 for each jar in the first year. You intend to adjust the price in subsequent years to keep up with inflation

would you pursue the project under these new conditions explain your answer 544072

Project Evaluation. Virtual Printing Inc. has devised a new technology based on which it plans to launch a new line of print media products. The firm intends to spend $160,000 in new plan! And equipment land $40,000 in expanding its building facilities to house the project. The project has an estimated economic life of eight years. Assume, for tax purposes, that the machinery and equipment and building will be depreciated straight-line over its economic life.

In the first year of operation, Virtual Printing expects to generate sales revenues of $60,000. These revenues are expected to stay at the same level until Year 3 but are subsequently expected to grow by 10 percent annually until Year 6, after which the revenues are expected to decline by 5 percent per year. First-year operating costwill be $15,000; in subsequent years, these are expected to grow in proportion to sales revenue.

The tax rate applicable to Virtual Printing”s business will be J4 percent. Also, at the end of the project”s economic life, the plant and equipment will not have any salvage value. The expanded building facilities also cannot be sold, leased or rented to another business entity without compromising the firm”s existing operations. Virtual Printing”s cost of capital is 12 percent.

a. Should Virtual Printing”s finance manager recommend accepting the project if the firm”s objective is to accept projects only when they are worth more than their cost?

b. Explain your answer to pan (a) above. What technique did you use in your answer to pan (a)?

c. By what time frame can Virtual Printing expect to recover its initial investment in the project:

(I) ignoring the lime value of money, and (2) taking into account the time value of money”! Name the techniques you have used for your computation. What arc the benefits and drawbacks to these techniques?

d. What is the IRR for this project?

e. Now, assume that for CCA purposes, the plan and equipment actually belong to asset Class 39 and the buildings belong to asset Class 1. with applicable CCA rates of 25 percent and 4 percent, respectively. Recomputed the project”s net present value, assuming that Virtual Printing has other assets in both asset classes that will be continued even after the economic life of this project is over. Work out your calculations assuming a zero salvage value for the building expansion and a $10,000 salvage value for the plant and equipment, at the end of the project”s economic life. Would you pursue the project under these new conditions? Explain your answer.

zero corporation is being sued for 1 000 000 for breach of contract its lawyers beli 544134

Identify the accounting principle(s) applicable to each of the following situations:

a. Tim Roberts owns a bar and a rental apartment and operates a consulting service. He has separate financial statements for each.

b. An advance collection for magazine subscriptions is reported as a liability titled Unearned Subscriptions.

c. Purchases for office or store equipment for less than $25 are entered in Miscellaneous Expense.

d. A company uses the lower of cost or market for valuation of its inventory.

e. Partially completed television sets are carried at the sum of the cost incurred to date.

f. Land purchased 15 years ago for $40,500 is now worth $346,000. It is still carried on the books at $40,500.

g. Zero Corporation is being sued for $1,000,000 for breach of contract. Its lawyers believe that the damages will be minimal. Zero reports the possible loss in a footnote.

a quality requiring that the information be timely and that it also have predictive 544139

FASB Statement of Concepts No. 2 indicates several qualitative characteristics of useful accounting information. Below is a list of some of these qualities, as well as a list of statements and phrases describing the qualities?

a. Benefits costs

b. Decision usefulness representational faithfulness

c. Relevance

d. Reliability

e. Predictive value, feedback value, timeliness

f. Verifiability, neutrality,

g. Comparability

h. Materiality

i. Relevance, reliability

1. Without usefulness, there would be no benefits from information to set against its cost.

2. Pervasive constraint imposed upon financial accounting information.

3. Constraint that guides the threshold for recognition.

4. A quality requiring that the information be timely and that it also have predictive value, or feedback value, or both.

5. A quality requiring that the information have representational faithfulness and that it be verifiable and neutral.

6. These are the two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making.

7. These are the ingredients needed to ensure that the information is relevant.

8. These are the ingredients needed to ensure that the information is reliable.

9. Includes consistency and interacts with relevance and reliability to contribute to the usefulness of information.

Required Place the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the statement or phrase describing the quality.

the business for which the financial statements are prepared is separate and distinc 544140

Certain underlying considerations have had an important impact on the development of generally accepted accounting principles. Below is a list of these underlying considerations, as well as a list of statements describing them

a. Going concern or continuity

b. Monetary unit

c. Conservatism

d. Matching

e. Full disclosure

f. Materiality

g. Transaction approach

h. Accrual basis

i. Industry practices

j. Verifiability

k. Consistency

l. Realization

m. Historical cost

n. Time period

o. Business entity

1. The business for which the financial statements are prepared is separate and distinct from the owners.

2. The assumption is made that the entity will remain in business for an indefinite period of time.

3. Accountants need some standard of measure to bring financial transactions together in a meaningful way.

4. Revenue should be recognized when the earning process is virtually complete and the exchange value can be objectively determined.

5. This concept deals with when to recognize the costs that are associated with the recognized revenue.

6. Accounting reports must disclose all facts that may influence the judgment of an informed reader.

7. This concept involves the relative size and importance of an item to a firm.

8. The accountant is required to adhere as closely as possible to verifiable data.

9. Some companies use accounting reports that do not conform to the general theory that underlies accounting.

10. The accountant records only events that affect the financial position of the entity and, at the same time, can be reasonably determined in monetary terms.

11. Revenue must be recognized when it is realized (realization concept), and expenses are recognized when incurred (matching concept).

12. The entity must give the same treatment to comparable transactions from period to period.

13. The measurement with the least favorable effect on net income and financial position in the current period must be selected.

14. Of the various values that could be used, this value has been selected because it is objective and determinable.

15. With this assumption, inaccuracies of accounting for the entity short of its complete life span are accepted.

RequiredPlace the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the statement describing the quality.

which pronouncements are not issued by the financial accounting standards board 544141

RequiredAnswer the following multiple-choice questions:

a. Which of the following is a characteristic of information provided by external financial reports?

1. The information is exact and not subject to change.

2. The information is frequently the result of reasonable estimates.

3. The information pertains to the economy as a whole.

4. The information is provided at the least possible cost.

5. None of the above.

b. Which of the following is not an objective of financial reporting?

1. Financial reporting should provide information that is useful to present and potential investors and creditors and other users in making rational investment, credit, and similar decisions.

2. Financial reporting should provide information to help present and potential investors and creditors and other users in assessing the amounts, timing, and uncertainty of prospective cash receipts from dividends or interest and the proceeds from the sale, redemption, or maturity of securities or loans.

3. Financial reporting should provide information about the economic resources of an enterprise, the claims against those resources, and the effects of transactions, events, and circumstances that change the resources and claims against those resources.

4. Financial accounting is designed to measure directly the value of a business enterprise.

5. None of the above.

c. According to FASB Statement of Concepts No. 2, which of the following is an ingredient of the quality of relevance?

1. Verifiability

2. Representational faithfulness

3. Neutrality

4. Timeliness

5. None of the above

d. The primary current source of generally accepted accounting principles for nongovernment operations is the

1. New York Stock Exchange

2. Financial Accounting Standards Board Certified Public Accountants

3. Securities and Exchange Commission

4. American Institute of

5. None of the above

e. What is the underlying concept that supports the immediate recognition of a loss?

1. Matching

2. Consistency

3. Judgment

4. Conservatism

5. Going concern

f. Which statement is not true?

1. The Securities and Exchange Commission is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.

2. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.

3. The Internal Revenue Service is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.

4. The Financial Accounting Standards Board is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.

5. Numbers 1, 2, and 4 are sources of generally accepted accounting principles.

g. Which pronouncements are not issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board?

1. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards

2. Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts

3. Technical bulletins

4. Interpretations

5. Opinions

sfac no 5 identifies five different measurement attributes currently used in practic 544142

RequiredAnswer the following multiple-choice questions:

a. Which of the following does the Financial Accounting Standards Board not issue?

1. Statements of Position (SOPs)

2. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards (SFASs)

3. Interpretations

4. Technical bulletins

5. Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts (SFACs)

b. According to SFAC No. 6, assets can be defined by which of the following?

1. Probable future sacrifices of economic benefits arising from present obligations of a particular entity to transfer assets or provide services to other entities in the future as a result of past transactions or events.

2. Probable future economic benefits obtained or controlled by a particular entity as a result of past transactions or events.

3. Residual interest on the assets of an entity that remains after deducting its liabilities.

4. Increases in equity of a particular business enterprise resulting from transfers to the enterprise from other entities of something of value to obtain or increase ownership interests (or equity) in it.

5. Decrease in equity of a particular business enterprise resulting from transferring assets, rendering services, or incurring liabilities by the enterprise.

c. According to SFAC No. 6, expenses can be defined by which of the following?

1. Inflows or other enhancements of assets of an entity or settlements of its liabilities (or a combination of both) from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or other activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations.

2. Outflows or other consumption or using up of assets or incurrences of liabilities (or a combination of both) from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or carrying out other activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations.

3. Increases in equity (net assets) from peripheral or incidental transactions of an entity and from all other transactions and other events and circumstances affecting the entity during a period, except those that result from revenues or investments.

4. Decreases in equity (net assets) from peripheral or incidental transactions of an entity and from all other transactions and other events and circumstances affecting the entity during a period, except those that result from expenses or distributions to owners.

5. Probable future economic benefits obtained or controlled by a particular entity as a result of past transactions or events.

d. SFAC No. 5 indicates that an item, to be recognized, should meet four criteria, subject to the cost-benefit constraint and the materiality threshold. Which of the following is not one of the four criteria?

1. The item fits one of the definitions of the elements.

2. The item has a relevant attribute measurable with sufficient reliability.

3. The information related to the item is relevant.

4. The information related to the item is reliable.

5. The item has comparability, including consistency.

e. SFAC No. 5 identifies five different measurement attributes currently used in practice Which of the following is not one of the measurement attributes currently used in practice?

1. Historical cost

2. Future cost

3. Current market value

4. Net realizable value

5. Present, or discounted, value of future cash flows

f. Which of the following indicates how revenue is usually recognized?

1. Point of sale

2. End of production

3. Receipt of cash

4. During production

5. Cost recovery

g. Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 1, “Objectives of Financial

Reporting by Business Enterprises,” includes all of the following objectives, except one. Which objective does it not include?

1. Financial accounting is designed to measure directly the value of a business enterprise.

2. Investors, creditors, and others may use reported earnings and information about the elements of financial statements in various ways to assess the prospects for cash flows.

3. The primary focus of financial reporting is information about earnings and its components.

4. Financial reporting should provide information that is useful to present and potential investors and creditors and other users in making rational investment, credit, and similar decisions.

5. The objectives are those of general-purpose external financial reporting by business enterprises.

determine income on a cash basis 544143

The following data relate to Jones Company for the year ended December 31, 1999:

Sales on credit

$80,000

Cost of inventory sold on credit

65,000

Collections from customers

60,000

Purchase of inventory on credit

50,000

Payment for purchases

55,000

Cash collections for common stock

30,000

Dividends paid

10,000

Payment to salesclerk

10,000

Required

a. Determine income on an accrual basis.

b. Determine income on a cash basis.

the following information was obtained from the accounts of airlines international d 544225

The following information was obtained from the accounts of Airlines International dated December 31, 2000. It is presented in alphabetical order.

Accounts payable

$ 77,916

Accounts receivable

67,551

Accrued expenses

23,952

Accumulated depreciation

220,541

Allowance for doubtful accounts

248

Capital in excess of par

72,913

Cash

28,837

Common stock (par $.50, authorized 20,000

shares, issued 14,304 shares)

7,152

Current installments of long-term debt

36,875

Deferred income tax liability (long term)

42,070

Inventory

16,643

Investments and special funds

11,901

Long-term debt, less current portion

393,808

Marketable securities

10,042

Other assets

727

Prepaid expenses

3,963

Property, plant, and equipment at cost

809,980

Retained earnings

67,361

Unearned transportation revenue (airline

tickets expiring within one year)

6,808

RequiredPrepare a classified balance sheet in report form.

the following information was obtained from the accounts of lukes inc as of december 544226

The following information was obtained from the accounts of Lukes, Inc. as of December 31, 2000. It is presented in scrambled order. Common stock, no par value, 10,000 shares

authorized, 5,724 shares issued

$ 3,180

Retained earnings

129,950

Deferred income tax liability (long term)

24,000

Long-term debt

99,870

Accounts payable

35,000

Buildings

75,000

Machinery and equipment

300,000

Land

11,000

Accumulated depreciation

200,000

Cash

3,000

Receivables, less allowance of $3,000

58,000

Accrued income taxes

3,000

Inventory

54,000

Other accrued expenses

8,000

Current portion of long-term debt

7,000

Prepaid expenses

2,000

Other assets (long term)

7,000

Required Prepare a classified balance sheet in report form. For assets, use the classifications of current assets, plant and equipment, and other assets. For liabilities, use the classifications of current liabilities and long-term liabilities.

presented below is the balance sheet of rubber industries 544228

Presented below is the balance sheet of Rubber Industries.

RUBBER INDUSTRIES

Balance Sheet

For the Year Ended December 31, 2000

Assets

Current assets:

Cash

$50,000

Marketable equity securities

19,000

Accounts receivable, net

60,000

Inventory

30,000

Treasury stock

20,000

Total current assets

179,000

Plant assets:

Land and buildings, net

160,000

Investments:

Short-term U.S. notes

20,000

Other assets:

Supplies

4,000

Total assets

$363,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Liabilities:

Bonds payable

$120,000

Accounts payable

40,000

Wages payable

10,000

Premium on bonds payable

3,000

Total liabilities

173,000

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($20 par, 20,000 shares

authorized, 6,000 shares outstanding)

120,000

Retained earnings

30,000

Minority interest

20,000

Redeemable preferred stock

20,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$363,000

Required Indicate your criticisms of the balance sheet and briefly explain the proper treatment of any item criticized.

presented below is the balance sheet of mcdonald company 544229

Presented below is the balance sheet of McDonald Company.

McDONALD COMPANY

December 31, 2000

Assets

Current assets:

Cash (including $10,000 restricted

for payment of note)

$40,000

Marketable equity securities

20,000

Accounts receivable, less allowance

for doubtful accounts of $12,000

70,000

Inventory

60,000

Total current assets

Plant assets:

$190,000

Land

40,000

Buildings, net

100,000

Equipment

$80,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

20,000

60,000

Patent

20,000

Organizational costs

15,000

235,000

Other assets:

Prepaid insurance

5,000

Total assets

$430,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities:

Accounts payable

$60,000

Wages payable

10,000

Notes payable, due July 1, 2003

20,000

Bonds payable, due December 2010

100,000

Total current liabilities

Dividends payable

Deferred tax liability, long term

Stockholders’ equity:

Common stock ($10 par, 10,000

shares authorized, 5,000 shares outstanding)

50,000

Retained earnings

156,000

Total stockholders’ equity

206,000

total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$430,000

Required Indicate your criticisms of the balance sheet and briefly explain the proper treatment of any item criticized.

you have just started as a staff auditor for a small cpa firm during the course of t 544230

You have just started as a staff auditor for a small CPA firm. During the course of the audit, you discover the following items related to a single client firm:

a. During the year, the firm declared and paid $10,000 in dividends.

b. Your client has been named defendant in a legal suit involving a material amount. You have received from the client’s counsel a statement indicating little likelihood of loss.

c. Because of cost control actions and general employee dissatisfaction, it is likely that the client will suffer a costly strike in the near future.

d. Twenty days after closing, the client suffered a major fire in one of its plants.

e. The cash account includes a substantial amount set aside for payment of pension obligations.

f. Marketable securities include a large quantity of shares of stock purchased for control purposes.

g. Land is listed on the balance sheet at its market value of $1,000,000. It cost $670,000 to purchase 12 years ago.

h. During the year, the government of Uganda expropriated a plant located in that country. There was substantial loss.

Required .How would each of these items be reflected in the year-end balance sheet, including footnotes?

corvallis corporation owns 80 of the stock of little harrisburg inc at december 31 2 544231

Corvallis Corporation owns 80% of the stock of Little Harrisburg, Inc. At December 31, 2000, Little Harrisburg had the following summarized balance sheet:

LITTLE HARRISBURG,

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2000

Current assets

$100,000

Current liabilities

$ 50,000

Property, plant, and

Long-term debt

150,000

equipment (net)

400,000

Capital stock

50,000

Retained earnings

250,000

$500,000

$500,000

The earnings of Little Harrisburg, Inc. for 2000 were $50,000 after tax.

Required

a. What would be the amount of minority interest on the balance sheet of Corvallis Corporation? How should minority interest be classified for financial statement analysis purposes?

b. What would be the minority share of earnings on the income statement of Corvallis Corporation?

what would be the increase in the current cost of majikstan enterprise rsquo s equip 543820

Now assume that Majikstan Enterprises is a foreign subsidiary of a U.S.-based multinational corporation and that its financial statements are consolidated with those of its U.S. parent. Relevant exchange rate and

Exchange rate:

General Price Level Index:

Majikstan

U.S.

12/31/2010

MJR 4,400 = $1

30,000

281.5

Average 2011

MJR 4,800 = $1

32,900

292.5

12/31/2011

MJR 5,290 = $1

36,000

303.5

Required: What would be the increase in the current cost of Majikstan Enterprise’s equipment, net of inflation, when expressed in U.S. dollars under the restate-translate methodology? Under the translate restate method?

assuming that changes in the producer rsquo s price index are a satisfactory measure 543821

The balance sheet of Rackett & Ball plc., a U.K.-based sporting goods manufacturer, is presented here. Figures are stated in millions of pounds (?m). During the year, the producer’s price index increased from 100 to 120, averaging.

£2010 m

£2011 m

Fixed Assets:

Intangible assets

56

150

Tangible assets

260

318

Investments

4

5

320

479

Current Assets:

Inventory

175

220

Trade receivable

242

270

Marketable securities

30

50

Cash

25

25

472

565

Current Liabilities:

Trade payables

-170

-160

Net current assets

302

405

Total assets less current liabilities

622

884

Long-term liabilities

85

128

Total net assets

237

356

Owner’s Equity:

Common stock

42

42

Premium on common stock

87

87

Retained earnings

108

227

Total owner’s equity

237

356

110.The aggregate current cost of sales, depreciation, and monetary working capital adjustment is assumed to be ?216m. Required: Assuming that changes in the producer’s price index are a satisfactory measure of the change in R&B’s purchasing power, calculate, as best as you can, R&B’s monetary working capital adjustment and its gearing adjustment.

which dollar figure do you think provides the more useful information 543822

Ninsuvaan Corporation, a U.S. subsidiary in Bangkok, Thailand, begins and ends its calendar year with an inventory balance of BHT500 million. The dollar/baht exchange rate on January 1 was $0.02 = BHT1. During the year, the U.S. general price level advances from 180 to 198, while the Thai general price level doubles. The exchange rate on December 31 was $0.015 = BHT1.

Required:

a. Using the temporal method of translation, calculate the dollar equivalent of the inventory balance by first restating for Thai inflation, then translating to U.S. dollars.

b. Repeat part (a), but translate the nominal baht balances to dollars before restating for U.S. inflation.

c. Which dollar figure do you think provides the more useful information?

d. If you are dissatisfied with either result, suggest a method that would provide more useful information than those in parts (a) and (b).

Balance Sheet Year Ended 2011

Cash

EUR2,000

Short-term debt

EUR8,000

Inventory

8,000

Long-term debt

25,000

Plant & equipment, net

20,000

Other assets

5,000

Owners’ equity

2,000

Total

EUR35,000

EUR35,000

Exchange rate and price information:

January 1: General price index = 300

EUR1.5 = £1

December 31: General price index = 390

EUR1.95 = £1

how will u s interests be protected if standard setting is the responsibility of a n 543840

The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) roadmap issued in 2008 may eventually move U.S. issuers to report under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Consider the following critical questions of such a move:

a. IFRS lack detailed rules when compared to U.S. GAAP. Shouldn’t IFRS be further developed and improved before mandating them?

b. An effort is already under way to converge U.S. GAAP and IFRS. Why not just keep converging?

c. How will U.S. interests be protected if standard setting is the responsibility of a non-U.S. organization?

Required: As one who believes that U.S. companies should use IFRS instead of U.S. GAAP in their financial statement filings with the SEC, how would you answer each of the above critical questions?

did infosys create value for its shareholders 543853

Infosys Technologies, introduced in Chapter 1, regularly provides investors with a performance measure called economic value-added (EVA). Originally pioneered by GE, EVA measures the profitability of a company after deducting not just the cost of borrowing but also the firm’s cost of equity capital. So EVA is the after-tax return on capital employed (adjusted for the tax shield on debt) less the cost of capital employed. Companies that earn a higher return on capital employed than its cost of capital create value for its shareholders. Those that do not destroy shareholder value. Reproduced below is EVA calculations for Infosys for 2006.

Required:

1. Did Infosys create value for its shareholders?

2. Is EVA a useful performance metric relative to net income? (Compare PAT or profit after tax, and EVA to average capital employed.)

Cost of capital:

Cost of risk-free debt (%)

7.5

Market premium

7

Beta variant

0.78

Cost of equity (%)

12.96

Average debt/Total capital (%)

Cost of debt – net of tax (%)

NA

Weighted average cost of capital (%)

12.96

Average capital employed

6,177

PAT as a percentage of average capital employed (%)

40.14

Economic Value Added:

Operating profit (excluding extraordinary income)

2,654

Less: Taxes

313

Less: Cost of capital

801

EVA

1,540

Ratios:

EVA as a percentage of average capital employed (%)

24.93

compare the year to year percentage changes in sales revenues in pounds and in u s d 543855

The following sales revenue pattern for a British trading concern was cited earlier in the chapter:

2009

2010

2011

Sales revenue

£23,500

£28,650

£33,160

Required:

a: Perform a convenience translation into U.S. dollars for each year given the following year-end exchange rates:

2009

£1 = $2.10

2010

£1 = $2.20

2011

£1 = $1.60

b. Compare the year-to-year percentage changes in sales revenues in pounds and in U.S. dollars. Do the two time series move in parallel fashion? Why or why not?

c. Suggest a method for minimizing the effect of exchange rate changes on foreign currency trend data.

what would be slovenia corporation rsquo s selling price per unit if it wants a gros 543870

Slovenia Corporation manufactures a product that is marketed in North America, Europe, and Asia. Its total manufacturing cost to produce 100 units of product X is €=2,250, detailed as follows:

Raw materials

€500

Direct labor

1,000

Overhead

750

Total

€2,250

The company bases its selling price on a cost plus formula.

Required:

a. What would be Slovenia Corporation’s selling price per unit if it wants a gross profit of 10 percent above cost?

b. Slovenia Corporation wants to be price competitive on an international basis. To accomplish this it must be able to price its product no higher than $21.50. Using the target costing methodology described in this chapter, what would be Slovenia Corporation’s allowable costs? Assume that the company still wants a profit margin of 10 percent of its allowable costs. What does your calculation imply about its manufacturing costs?

management insists on a risk premium of 10 percent when evaluating foreign projects 543872

Assume that management is considering whether to make the foreign direct investment described in Exercise 3. Investment will require $6,000,000 in equity capital. Cash flows to the parent are expected to increase by 5 percent over the previous year for each year after year 2 (through year 6). Exchange rate forecasts are as follows:

Year

Rate

1

RUB 26 = $1

2

RUB 27 = $1

3

RUB 29 = $1

4–6

RUB 31 = $1

Management insists on a risk premium of 10 percent when evaluating foreign projects.

Required: Assuming a weighted average cost of capital of 10 percent and no expected changes in differential tax rates, evaluate the desirability of the Russian investment using a traditional discounted cash flow analysis.

inflation and zambian kwacha zmk devaluation is 30 percent per month or 1 2 percent 543874

Assume the following:

  • Inflation and Zambian kwacha (ZMK) devaluation is 30 percent per month, or 1.2 percent per workday.
  • Foreign exchange rates at selected intervals for the current month are:

1-Jan

100

10-Jan

109.6

20-Jan

119.6

30-Jan

130

  • The real rate of interest is 1.5 percent per month, or 20 percent per year.
  • Cash balances are kept in hard currency (dollars).
  • Month-end rates are used to record expense transactions.

Required: Based on these assumptions, prepare a table showing the distortions that can occur when expense transactions totaling ZMK 1,000,000 are recorded using conventional measurement rules (i.e., month-end rates in this example) instead of the internal reporting structure recommended in this chapter.

Transactions:

Invoice Date

Payment Terms

1

Cash

5

15 days

5

25 days

exchange risk management is also centralized at corporate treasury required based on 543875

Global Enterprises, Inc. uses a number of performance criteria to evaluate its overseas operations, including return on investment. Compagnie de Calais, its Belgian subsidiary,

Compagnie de Calais Performance Report

Sales

$4,200,000

Other income

120,000

$4,320,000

Costs and expenses:

Cost of sales

$3,200,000

Selling and administrative

330,000

Depreciation

160,000

Interest

162,000

Exchange losses

368,000

4,220,000

Income before taxes

$100,000

Income taxes

42,000

Net income

$58,000

submits the performance report shown in Exhibit 10-13 for the current fiscal year (translated to U.S. dollar equivalents). Included in sales are $500,000 worth of components sold by Compagnie de Calais to its sister subsidiary in Brussels at a transfer price set by corporate headquarters at 40 percent above an arms-length price. Cost of goods sold includes excess labor costs of $150,000 owing to local labor laws. Administrative expenses include $50,000 of headquarters expenses, which are allocated by Global Enterprises to its Belgian affiliate. The parent company holds all of its subsidiaries responsible for their fair share of corporate expenses. Local financing decisions are centralized at corporate treasury, as are all matters related to tax planning. At the same time, Global Enterprises thinks that all subsidiaries should be able to cover reasonable financing costs. Moreover, it thinks that foreign managers should be motivated to use local resources as efficiently as possible. Hence, Compagnie de Calais is assessed a capital charge based on its net assets and the parent company’s average cost of capital. This figure, which amounts to $120,000, is included in the $162,000 interest expense figure. One-half of the exchange gains and losses figure is attributed to transactions losses resulting from the Belgian subsidiary’s export activities. The balance is due to translating the Belgian accounts to U.S. dollars for consolidation purposes. Exchange risk management is also centralized at corporate treasury. Required: Based on the foregoing information, prepare a performance report that isolates those elements that should be included in performance appraisals of the foreign unit.

based on the foregoing information did the mexican manager perform well support your 543877

To encourage its foreign managers to incorporate expected exchange rate changes into their operating decisions, Vancouver Enterprises requires that all foreign currency budgets be set in Canadian dollars using exchange rates projected for the end of the budget period. To further motivate its local managers to react to unexpected rate changes, operating results at period’s end are translated to dollars at the actual spot rate prevailing at that time. Deviations between actual and budgeted exchange rates are discarded in judging the manager’s performance. At the start of the 2010 fiscal year, budgeted results for a Mexican affiliate, the Cuernavaca Corporation, were as follows (amounts in thousands):

Sales

MXP 8,000,000

CAD 2,560

Expenses

6,400,000

2,048

Income

MXP 1,600,000

CAD 512

Actual results for the year in dollars were: sales, CAD2,160,000; expenses, CAD1,680,000; and net

Jan. 1, 2010 spot rate:

CAD.00040

Global Enterprise’s one-year forecast

CAD.00032

Dec. 31, 2010 spot rate

CAD.00024

Required: Based on the foregoing information, did the Mexican manager perform well? Support your answer using the variance analysis suggested in the chapter. (Refer to Exhibit 10-6.)

parent company establishes three wholly owned affiliates in countries x y and z its 543879

Parent Company establishes three wholly owned affiliates in countries X, Y, and Z. Its total investment in each of the respective affiliates at the beginning of the year together with year-end returns in parent currency (PC), appear here:

Subsidiary

Total Assets

Returns

X

PC 1,000,000

PC 250,000

Y

PC 3,000,000

PC 900,000

Z

PC 1,500,000

PC 600,000

income, CAD480,000. Relevant exchange rates for the peso during the year were as follows:

Parent Company requires a return on its domestic investments of 10 percent and is evaluating the annual performance of its three foreign affiliates. To establish an appropriate performance benchmark, Parent Company subscribes to a country risk evaluation service that compiles an unweighted risk index for various countries around the world. The risk scores for each of the n countries are:

Country Risk Score (out of 60)

X

30

Y

21

Z

15

Other things being equal, the higher the score, the lower the country’s risk.

Required: Prepare an analysis for Parent Company’s management indicating which affiliate performed best.

required calculate the foreign and u s taxes paid on each foreign source income 543912

Sweden has a classical system of taxation. Calculate the total taxes that would be paid by a company headquartered in Stockholm that earns 1,500,000 Swedish krona (SEK) and distributes 50 percent of its earnings as a dividend to its shareholders. Assume that the company’s shareholders are in the 40 percent

Country A

Country B

Country C

Country D

Royalty from Country A operations

$20

Pretax income

$90

$90

$54

Income taxes (20%/40%)

18

36

-0-

Net income

$72

$54

$54

Required: Calculate the foreign and U.S. taxes paid on each foreign-source income.

what issues does your pricing decision raise 543916

Alubar, a U.S. multinational, receives royalties from Country A, foreign-branch earnings from Country B, and dividends equal to 50 percent of net income from subsidiaries in Countries C and D. There is a 10 percent withholding tax on the royalty from Country A and a 10 percent withholding tax on the dividend from Country C. Income tax rates are 20 percent in Country B and 40 percent in Country C. Country D assesses indirect taxes of 40 percent instead of direct taxes on income. Selected data are as follows: unit, and a reasonable profit margin on such cross-border sales is 20 percent of cost. Now suppose that Country B levies a corporate income tax of 40 percent on taxable income (vs. 30 percent in Country A) and a tariff of 20 percent on the declared value of the imported goods. The minimum declared value legally allowed in Country B is $100 per unit with no upper limit. Import duties are deductible for income tax purposes in Country B.

Required: a. Based on the foregoing information, formulate

a transfer pricing strategy that would minimize Global Enterprise’s overall tax burden.

b. What issues does your pricing decision raise?

based on this information at what price would the lund manufacturing company invoice 543917

The partial income statement of the Lund Manufacturing Company, a Swedish-based concern producing pharmaceutical products, is presented below:

During the year, short-term interest rates in Sweden averaged 7 percent, while net operating assets averaged SEK 45,000,000.

Sales

SEK 75,000,000

Cost of goods manufactured and sold:

Finished goods, beginning inventory

-0-

Cost of goods manufactured: (100,000 units)

Direct materials used

SEK 22,500,000

Direct labor

11,600,000

Overhead

6,000,000

Cost of goods available for sale

40,100,000

Finished goods, ending inventory

8,000,000

Cost of goods sold

32,100,000

Gross Margin

SEK 42,900,000

The company is entitled to a government subsidy of 5 percent. Its required margin to provide a profit and cover other expenses is 8 percent. All affiliates receive credit terms of 60 days.

Required: Based on this information, at what price would the Lund Manufacturing Company invoice its distribution affiliate in neighboring Finland?

recommend and justify a long term asset allocation that is consistent with the inves 543956

CFA Examination Level III

Mr. Franklin is 70 years of age, is in excellent health, pursues a simple but active lifestyle, and has no children. He has interest in a private company for $90 million and has decided that a medical research foundation will receive half the proceeds now; it will also be the primary beneficiary of his estate upon his death. Mr. Franklin is committed to the foundation’s well-being because he believes strongly that, through it, a cure will be found for the disease that killed his wife. He now realizes that an appropriate investment policy and asset allocations are required if his goals are to be met through investment of his considerable assets. Currently, the following assets are available for use in building an appropriate portfolio:

$45.0 million cash (from sale of the private company interest, net of pending
$45 million gift to the foundation)

10.0 million stocks and bonds ($5 million each)

9.0 million warehouse property (now fully leased)

1.0 million Franklin residence

$65.0 million total available assets

a. Formulate and justify an investment policy statement setting forth the appropriate guidelines within which future investment actions should take place. Your policy statement must encompass all relevant objective and constraint considerations.

b. Recommend and justify a long-term asset allocation that is consistent with the investment policy statement you created in Part a. Briefly explain the key assumptions you made in generating your allocation.

what will the npv and irr be if the firm uses straight line depreciation with a 6 ye 544056

CCA, Depreciation, and Project Value. Bottoms up Diaper Service is considering the purchase of a new industrial washer, It can purchase the washer for $6,000 and sell its old washer for $2,000. The new washer will last for 6 years and save $1,500 a year in expenses. If the old washer is retained it will also last for 6 more years after which it will have to be junked. The washers fall into an asset class with a CCA rate of 30 percent. Bottoms Up owns other wash ing machines that also fall into this asset class. The opportunity cost of capital is 15 percent. and the firms tax rate is 40 percent.

a. If the salvage value of the washer is expected to bezero at the end of its six year life, what are the cash flows of the project in years 0 to 6?

b. What is the project NPV”!

e. What will the NPV and IRR be if the firm uses straight-line depreciation with a 6-year tax life?

if the opportunity cost of capital is 10 percent what is the project np f 544059

Project Evaluation. Revenues generated by a new fad product are forecast as follows:

Year

Revenues

1

$40,000

2

30,000

3

20,000

4

10,000

Thereafter

0

Expenses are expected to be 40 percent of revenues, and working capital required in each year is expected to be 20 percent of revenues in the following year. The product requires an immediate investment of$50,000 in plant and equipment.

a. What is the initial investment in the product”! Remember working capital.

b. If the plant and equipment are in an asset class that has a CCA rate of 25 percent, and the firm’s tax rate is 40 percent, what are the project cash flows in each year?

c. If the opportunity cost of capital is 10 percent, what is the project NPf?

the net working capital requirement including the initial working capital needed in 544062

Project Evaluation. Fireplaces Etc. is about to launch a new range of wood stoves, priced at $ 110 per unit. The unit cost of the wood stoves is $65. The firm expects to sell the wood stoves over the next five years. The venture will require an initial investment in plant and equipment of$25,000. Assume that the investment will be in an asset class with a CCA rate of 15 percent. At the end office years, the plant and equipment will have a zero salvage value but Fireplaces Etc. will continue 10 have other assets in this asset class. Sales projections for the wood stoves arc as follows:

Year

Unit Sales

1

300

2

350

3

400

4

500

5

500

The net working capital requirement (including the initial working capital needed in Year 0) is expected to be20 percent of the following year”s sales. The firm”s tax rate is 35 percent. Using a discount rate of 15 percent, calculate the net present value of the project.

what is project npv 544064

Project Evaluation. Beller Mousetraps has developed a new trap. It can go into production for an initial investment in equipment of $6 million. The equipment will be depreciated straight-line over 5 years to a value of 7.ero, but in fact it can be sold after 5 years for $500.000. The firm believes that working capital at each date must be maintained at a level of 10 percent of next year”s forecast sales. The firm estimates production costs equal to $ 1.50 per trap and believes that the traps can be sold for $4 each. Sales forecasts are given in the following table. The project will come to an end in years, when the trap becomes technologically obsoleted. The firm “S tax bracket is 35 percent, and the required rate of return on the project is 12 percent.

What is project NPV?

Year

0

1

2 3

4

5

Thereafter

Sales(millions of traps)

0

.5

.6

1.0

1.0

.6

0

net income is currently 600 million net income will grow by 20 percent annually 543660

An aggressive financial planner who claims to have a superior method for picking undervalued stocks is courting one of your clients. The planner claims that the best way to find the value of a stock is to divide EBITDA by the risk-free bond rate. The planner is urging your client to invest in Alcan, Inc. (NYSE: AL). Alcan is the parent of a group of companies engaged in all aspects of the aluminum business. The planner says that Alcan”s EBITDA of $1,580 million divided by the long-term government bond rate of 7 percent gives a total value of $22,571 million. With 318 million outstanding shares, Alcan”s value per share using this method is $70.98. Shares of Alcan currently trade for $36.50, and the planner wants your client to make a large investment in Alcan through him. A. Provide your client with an alternative valuation of Alcan based on a two-stage FCFE valuation approach. Use the following assumptions:

  • Net income is currently $600 million. Net income will grow by 20 percent annually

for the next three years.

  • The net investment in operating assets (capital expenditures less depreciation plus investment in working capital) will be $1,150 million next year and grow at 15 percent for the following two years.
  • Forty percent of the net investment in operating assets will be financed with net new debt financing.
  • Alcan”s beta is 1.3, the risk-free bond rate is 7 percent, and the equity risk premium is 4 percent.
  • After three years, the growth rate of net income will be 8 percent and the net investment in operating assets (capital expenditures minus depreciation plus increase in working capital) each year will drop to 30 percent of net income.
  • Debt is, and will continue to be, 40 percent of total assets.
  • Alcan has 3 18 million outstanding shares. Find the value per share of Alcan.

B. Criticize the valuation approach that the aggressive financial planner used.

bron has earnings per share of 3 00 in 2002 and expects earnings per share to increa 543661

Bron has earnings per share of $3.00 in 2002 and expects earnings per share to increase by 21 percent in 2003. Earnings per share are expected to grow at a decreasing rate for the following five years, as shown in the table below. In 2008, the growth rate will be 6 percent and is expected to stay at that rate thereafter. Net capital expenditures (capital expenditures minus depreciation) will be $5.00 per share in 2002 and then follow the pattern predicted in the table. In 2008, net capital expenditures are expected to be $1.50 and will then grow at 6 percent annually. The investment in working capital parallels the increase in net capital expenditures and is predicted to equal 25 percent of net capital expenditures each year. In 2008, investment in working capital will be $0.375 and is predicted to grow at 6 percent thereafter. Bron will use debt financing to fund 40 percent of net capital expenditures and 40 percent of the investment in working capital.

Year

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

Growth rate for earnings per share

21%

18%

15%

12%

9%

6%

Net capital expenditure per share

$5.00

$5.00

$4.50

$4.00

$3.50

$1.50

what is the real required rate of return for sk telecom 543662

SK Telecom Co. is a cellular telephone paging and computer communication services company in Seoul, South Korea. The company is traded on the Korea, New York, and

London stock exchanges (NYSE: SKM). Sol Kim has estimated the normalized FCFE for SK Telecom to be 1,300 Korean won (per share) for the year just ended. The real country return for South Korea is 6.50 percent. To estimate the required return for SK Telecom, the adjustments to the real country return are an industry adjustment of +0.60 percent, a size adjustment of -0.10 percent, and a leverage adjustment of +0.25 percent. The long-term real growth rate for South Korea is estimated at 3.5 percent, and Kim expects the real growth rate of SK Telecom to track the country rate.

A. What is the real required rate of return for SK Telecom?

B. Using the single-stage FCFE valuation model and real values for the discount rate

and FCFE growth rate, estimate the value of one share of SK Telecom.

calculate return on equity and use it as an input to the residual income model to ca 543691

Simonson Investment Trust International (SITI) is expected to earn $4.00, $5.00, and $8.00 for the next three years. SITI will pay annual dividends of $2.00, $2.50, and 20.50 in each of these years. The last dividend includes the liquidating payment to shareholders at the end of Year 3 when the trust terminates. SITI”s book value is $8 per share and its required return on equity is 10 percent.

A. What is the current value per share of SITI according to the dividend discount model?

B. Calculate per-share book value and residual income for SITI for each of the next 3 years and use those results to find the stock”s value using the residual income model.

C. Calculate return on equity and use it as an input to the residual income model to calculate SITI”s value.

how if at all should this observation about le s other comprehensive income affect t 543693

Lendex Electronics (LE) has had a great deal of turnover of top management for several years and was not followed by analysts during this period of turmoil. Because the company”s performance has been improving steadily for the past three years, technology analyst Steve Kent recently reinitiated coverage of LE. A meeting with management confirmed Kent”s positive impression of LE”s operations and strategic plan. Kent decides LE merits further analysis. Careful examination of LE”s financial statements revealed that the company had negative other comprehensive income from changes in the value of available-for-sale securities in each of the past five years. How, if at all, should this observation about LE”s other comprehensive income affect the figures that Kent uses for the company”s ROE and book value for those years?

how does this value compare with the estimate from the residual income model 543698

Shunichi Kobayashi is valuing United Parcel Service (NYSE: UPS). Kobayashi has made the following assumptions:

  • Book value per share is estimated at $9.62 on 3 1 December 2001.
  • EPS will be 22 percent of the beginning book value per share for the next eight years.
  • Cash dividends paid will be 30 percent of EPS.
  • At the end of the eight-year period, the market price per share will be three times the book value per share.
  • The beta for UPS is 0.60, the risk-free rate is 5.00 percent, and the equity risk premium is 5.50 percent.

The current market price of UPS is $59.38, which indicates a current PIB of 6.2.

A. Prepare a table showing the beginning and ending book values, net income, and cash dividends annually for the eight-year period.

B. Estimate the residual income and the present value of residual income for the eight years.

C. Estimate the value per share of UPS stock using the residual income model.

D. Estimate the value per share of UPS stock using the dividend discount model.How does this value compare with the estimate from the residual income model?

consider the development factors in the following five countries france india japan 543732

Consider the development factors in the following five countries: France, India, Japan, the United States, and the United Kingdom:

Development
Factor

France

India

Japan

United
Kingdom

United States

Main source
of finance

Banks;
government

Government;
Stock market

Banks

Stock market

Stock market

Legal system

Code law

Common law

Code law

Common law

Common law

Taxation (link to
accounting)

Linked

Separate

Linked

Separate

Separate

Political and
economic ties

Europe

U.K., U.S.,
China

U.S., China

U.S., Europe

Canada,
Mexico

Inflation

Low

Low

Low

Low

Low

Level of economic
development

High

Low

High

High

High

Educational level

High

Low

High

High

High

Required: Based on the information provided in this chapter, prepare a profile of accounting in each of the countries.

required complete a matrix indicating whether each of the above groups significantly 543750

In most countries, accounting standard setting involves a combination of private- and public-sector groups. The private sector includes the accounting profession and other groups affected by the financial reporting process, such as users and preparers of financial statements, and organized labor. The public sector includes government agencies, such as tax authorities, ministries responsible for commercial law, and securities commissions. The stock market is another potential influence.

Required: Complete a matrix indicating whether each of the above groups significantly influences accounting standard setting in the five countries discussed in this chapter.

List the groups across the top and the countries down the side; indicate the influence of each group with a yes or a no.

identify the major changes that have occurred in japanese accounting since the big b 543767

The following describes Japanese accounting before the Big Bang:

The preparation of consolidated financial statements is based on the Securities and Exchange Law. Individual-company accounts are the basis for the consolidated statements, and normally the same principles are used at both levels. Subsidiaries are consolidated if a parent directly or indirectly owns more than 50 percent of the shares. (However, Japanese regulations have materiality tests that can lead to the exclusion of significant subsidiaries in consolidation.) The purchase method of accounting for business combinations is normally used for business combinations. Goodwill is measured on the basis of the book value of the net assets acquired, not the fair market value as is common in most other countries. Goodwill is amortized over five years.

The equity method is used in consolidated statements for investments in nonconsolidated subsidiaries and 20 percent- to 50 percent-owned affiliated companies, but the cost method is used in individual company statements. The equity method is also used to account for joint ventures; proportional consolidation is not allowed. Under the foreign currency translation standard, assets and liabilities of foreign subsidiaries are translated at the current (year-end) exchange rate, revenues and expenses at either the year-end or average rate, and translation adjustments are carried as an asset or liability on the balance sheet. Accounting measurements based on historical cost are pervasive. Inventory may be valued at cost or the lower of cost or market; cost is most often used. However, in the event of a significant and permanent decline in value, inventory must be written down to market. FIFO, LIFO, and average are all acceptable cost-flow methods, with average the most popular. Fixed assets are valued at cost and depreciated in accordance with the tax laws. Research and development costs may be capitalized if they relate to new products or techniques, the exploitation of resources, or the development of markets. When capitalized, research and development is amortized over five years. Finance leases, those transferring the risks and rewards of ownership to the lessee, are capitalized, while lease payments on operating leases are charged to income when incurred. Deferred taxes are not provided for (or needed) in individual company accounts. They are permitted in consolidated financial statements, but normally not provided there, either. Contingent losses are provided for when they are probable and can be reasonably estimated. Tax regulations limit the deductibility of employee retirement and severance benefits to 40 percent of the amount and so are normally only accrued up to this amount. Pension costs are expensed as paid, and unfunded obligations are not accrued. Legal reserves are required: Each year a company must allocate an amount equal to at least 10 percent of cash dividends and bonuses paid to directors and statutory auditors until the legal reserve reaches 25 percent of capital stock.

Required: Identify the major changes that have occurred in Japanese accounting since the Big Bang.

required identify the major changes that have occurred in chinese accounting since t 543768

The following describes Chinese accounting in the late 1990s:

Financial statements consist of the balance sheet, income statement, statement of changes in financial position (or cash flow statement), notes, and supporting schedules. Consolidated financial statements are required. The purchase method must be used to account for business combinations, and goodwill is amortized over the period benefited. The equity method is used when ownership of another enterprise exceeds 25 percent. When ownership exceeds 50 percent, the accounts of the subsidiary are consolidated. For overseas subsidiaries, the balance sheet is translated at the year-end exchange rate, the income statement is translated at the average-for-the-year exchange rate, and any translation difference is shown as a reserve in equity. Accounting measurements sometime have a tax orientation. For example, straight-line depreciation is used because tax laws specify this method. Tax law is also referred to in specifying the useful lives of assets and salvage value. Compared to international practice, historical cost is more strictly adhered to and the principle of conservatism is practiced on a more limited basis. These practices also reflect a tax law influence. For example,

1. The lower of cost or market inventory valuation method is not allowed.

2. Provisions for bad debts are allowed only up to 3 percent of the receivables balance.

3. Long-term investments are not written down for permanent declines in value. Historical cost is the basis for valuing tangible assets. FIFO, average, and LIFO are acceptable costing methods. Acquired intangibles are also recorded at cost and amortized over the periods benefited. Since land and much of the industrial property in China is owned by the state, companies that acquire the right to use land and industrial property rights show them as intangibles.

Costs associated with research and development can be capitalized in some circumstances. Guidance is neither provided on accounting for capital versus operating leases, nor for deferred taxes. Contingent losses are not accrued; however, contingency funds may be set up as appropriations of retained earnings. Reserves for future expansion may also be appropriated out of retained earnings.

Required: Identify the major changes that have occurred in Chinese accounting since the 1990s.

complete a matrix indicating whether each of these groups significantly influences a 543769

Accounting standard setting in most countries involves a combination of private- and public-sector groups. The private sector includes the accounting profession and other groups affected by the financial reporting process, such as users and preparers of financial statements and organized labor. The public sector includes government agencies, such as tax authorities, ministries responsible for commercial law, and securities commissions. The stock market is another potential influence.

Required: Complete a matrix indicating whether each of these groups significantly influences accounting standard setting in the five countries discussed in this chapter. List the groups across the top and the countries down the side; indicate the influence of each group with a yes or no.

what is the relevance of csr disclosures for outside investors 543783

Corporate social responsibility (CSR), as practiced by business, means many different things. Consider the following: “At one end of the broad span of CSR lie corporate policies that any wellrun company ought to have in place anyway, policies that are called for on any sensible view of business ethics or good management practice.

These include not lying to your employees, for instance, not paying bribes, and looking farther ahead than the next few weeks. At the other end of the range are the more ambitious and distinctive policies that differentiate between leaders and laggards in the CSR race—large expenditures of time and resources on charitable activities, for instance, or binding commitments to ‘ethical investment,’ or spending on environmental protection beyond what regulators demand.”33

Required:

a. Discuss the meaning of corporate social responsibility.

b. Do companies have an obligation to do more than the law requires? Why or why not?

c. Should companies report on their social responsibility activities? Why or why not?

d. What is the relevance of CSR disclosures for outside investors?

would your answer change if the functional currency were the canadian dollar please 543797

On January 1, the wholly-owned Mexican affiliate of a Canadian parent company acquired an inventory of computer hard drives for its assembly operation. The cost Incurred was 15,000,000 pesos when the exchange rate was MXN11.3 = C$1. By year end, the Mexican affiliate had used three fourths of the acquired hard drives. Due to advances in hardware technology, the remaining inventory was marked down to its net realizable value of MXN1,750,000. The year-end exchange rate was MXN12.3 = C$1. The average rate during the year was MXN11.8 = C$1.

Required:

a. Translate the ending inventory to Canadian dollars assuming the Mexican affiliate’s functional currency is the Mexican peso.

b. Would your answer change if the functional currency were the Canadian dollar?Please explain.

translate the chinese dollar balance sheet of shanghai corporation into u s dollars 543800

Shanghai Corporation, the Chinese affiliate of

a U.S. manufacturer, has the balance sheet shown below. The current exchange rate is $.0.15 = CNY1.

Balance Sheet of Shanghai Corporation (000’s)

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

CNY 5,000

Accounts payable

CNY21,000

Accounts receivable

14,000

Long-term debt

27,000

Inventoriesa (cost = 24,000)

22,000

Fixed assets, net

39,000

Stockholders’ equity

32,000

Total assets

CNY80,000

Total liab & SE

CNY80,000

Required:

a. Translate the Chinese dollar balance sheet of Shanghai Corporation into U.S. dollars at the current exchange rate of $.0.15 12 = CNY1. All monetary accounts in Shanhai’s balance sheet are denominated in Chinese yuan.

b. Assume the Chinese yuan revalues from $0.15 = CNY1 to $0.1875 = CNY1. What would be the translation effect if Shanghai’s balance sheet is translated by the current–noncurrent method? By the monetary-nonmonetary method?

c. Assume instead that the Chinese yuan weakens from $0.15 = CNY1 to $0.1125 = CNY1. What would be the translation effect under each of the two translation methods?

what is the lesson for statement readers from all of this is it all a shell game 543802

Company A is headquartered in Country A and reports in the currency unit of Country A, the Apeso. Company B is headquartered in Country B and reports in the currency unit of Country B, the Bol. Company A and B hold identical assets, Apeso100 and Bol100, at the beginning and end of the year. At the beginning of the year, the exchange rate is Apeso1 = Bol1.25. At the end of the year, the exchange rate is Apeso1 = Bol 2. No transactions occur during the year.

Required:

a. Calculate total assets reported by Company A and Company B at the beginning and at the end of the year. Which company has a gain and which has a loss for the year?

b. Does your answer to part a. make sense? Would it matter if Companies A and B intended to repatriate their respective foreign assets rather than keep them invested permanently abroad?

c. What is the lesson for statement readers from all of this? Is it all a shell game?

which rates would be used if the parent currency were the functional currency 543803

A 100 percent–owned foreign subsidiary’s trial balance consists of the accounts listed as follows. Which exchange rate—current, historical, or average—would be used to translate these accounts to parent currency assuming that the foreign currency is the functional currency? Which rates would be used if the parent currency were the functional currency?

Trial Balance Accounts

Cash

Common stock

Marketable securities (cost)

Premium on common stock

Accounts receivable

Retained earnings

Inventory (market)

Sales

Equipment

Purchases

Accumulated depreciation

Cost of sales

Prepaid expenses

General and administrative expenses

Goodwill

Selling expenses

Accounts payable

Depreciation

Due to parent (denominated in dollars)

Amortization of goodwill

Bonds payable

Income tax expense

Income taxes payable

Intercompany interest expense

Deferred income taxes

what adjustments to armaselah rsquo s accounts would you make to enable you to compa 543804

On December 15, MSC Corporation acquires its first foreign affiliate by acquiring 100 percent of the net assets of the Armaselah Oil Company based in Saudi Arabia for 930,000,000 Saudi Arabian riyals.(SAR). At the time, the exchange rate was $1.00 = SAR3.750. The acquisition price is traceable to the following identifiable assets:

Cash

SAR 60,000,000

Inventory

120,000,000

Fixed assets

750,000,000

As a calendar-year company, MSC Corporation prepares consolidated financial statements every December 31. However, by the consolidation date, the Saudi Arabian riyal depreciates such that the new spot rate is $1.00 = SAR4.125.

Required:

a. Assuming no transactions took place before consolidation, what would be the translation gain or loss if Armaselah’s balance sheet were translated to dollars by the temporal rate method?

b. How does the translation adjustment affect MSC’s cash flows?

c. What adjustments to Armaselah’s accounts would you make to enable you to compare its financial statements with another company of comparable size in the same industry that is employing the current rate translation method per IAS 21?

following are the remarks of a prominent member of the u s congress explain why you 543808

Following are the remarks of a prominent member of the U.S. Congress. Explain why you agree or disagree.

The plain fact of the matter is that inflation accounting is a premature, imprecise, and under developed method of recording basic business facts. To insist that any system of inflation accounting can afford the accuracy and fairness needed for the efficient operation of our tax system is simply foolish. My years on the Ways and Means Committee have exposed me to the many appeals of business from corporate tax “reform” to the need for capital formation-which have served as a guise for reducing the tax contributions of American business. In this respect, I see inflation accounting as another in a long line of attempts to minimize corporate taxation through backdoor gimmickry.

compare and evaluate the information content of rate of return statistics computed u 543815

Sobrero Corporation, a Mexican affiliate of a major U.S.-based hotel chain, starts the calendar year with 1 billion pesos (P) cash equity investment. It immediately acquires a refurbished hotel in Acapulco for P 900million. Owing to a favorable tourist season, Sobrero Corporation’s rental revenues were P 144 million for the year. Operating expenses of P 86,400,000 together with rental revenues were incurred uniformly throughout the year. The building, comprising 80 percent of the original purchase price (balance attributed to land), has an estimated useful life of 20 years and is being depreciated in straight-line fashion. By yearend, the Mexican consumer price index rose to 420 from an initial level of 263, averaging 340 during the year.

Required:

a. Prepare financial statements for Sobrero Corporation’s first year of operations in terms of the historical-cost model and the historical-cost-constant dollar model.

b. Compare and evaluate the information content of rate-of-return statistics computed using each of these models.

using this information calculate the increse in the current cost of majikstan enterp 543819

Majikstan Enterprises has equipment on its books that it acquired at the start of 2009 . The equipment is being depreciated in straight-line fashion over a 10-year period and has no salvage value. The current cost of this equipment at the end of 2010 was MJR8,000,000,000. During 2011 , the specific price index for equipment increased from 100 to 137.5. General price-level index information for the period was as follows:

12/31/2010

30,000

Average

32,900

12/31/2011

36,000

Required: Using this information, calculate the increse in the current cost of Majikstan Enterprise’s equipment, net of inflation. 6. Now assume that Majikstan Enterprises is foreign subsidiary of a U.S.-based multinational corporation and that its financial statements are consolidated with those of its U.S. parent. Relevant exchange rate and

a characterize the effect of the xmi expensing policies with respect to acquisitions 543630

You are researching XMI Corporation (XMI). XMI has shown steady earnings per share growth (18 percent a year during the last seven years) and trades at a very high multiple to earnings (its PIE ratio is currently 40 percent above the average PIE ratio for a group of the most comparable stocks). XMI has generally grown through acquisition, by using XMI stock to purchase other companies. These companies usually trade at lower PIE ratios than XMI.

In investigating the financial disclosures of these acquired companies and in talking to industry contacts, you conclude that XMI has been forcing the companies it acquires to accelerate the payment of expenses before the acquisition deals are closed. Such acceleration drives down the acquired companies” last reported cash flow and earnings per share numbers. As one example, XMI asks acquired companies to immediately pay all pending accounts payable, whether or not they are due. Subsequent to the acquisition, XMI reinstitutes normal expense payment patterns. After it acquires a

company, XMI appears to have a pattern of speeding up revenue recognition as well. For example, one overseas telecommunications subsidiary changed its accounting to recognize up front the expected revenue from sales of network capacity that spanned decades. The above policies and accounting facts do not appear to be have been adequately disclosed in XMI”s shareholder communications.

A. Characterize the effect of the XMI expensing policies with respect to acquisitions on XMI”s post-acquisition earnings per share growth rate.

B. Characterize the quality of XMI earnings based on its expensing and revenuerecognition policies with respect to acquisitions.

C. In discussing the current price of XMI, the question states that XMI”s “PIE ratio is currently 40 percent above the average PIE ratio for a group of the most comparable stocks.” Characterize the type of valuation model implicit in such a statement.

D. State two risk factors in investing in XMI, in the sense in which that term was used in the discussion of quality of earnings.

the estimated factor sensitivities of terra energy to the five macroeconomic factors 543632

The estimated factor sensitivities of Terra Energy to the five macroeconomic factors in the Burmeister, Roll, and Ross (1994) article are given in the table below. The table also gives the market risk premiums to each of these same factors.

Factor Sensitivity

Risk Premium (%)

Confidence risk

0.25

2.59

Time horizon risk

0.3

-0.66

Inflation risk

-0.45

-4.32

Business-cycle risk

1.6

1.49

Market-timing risk

0.8

3.61

Use the 5-factor BIRR APT model to calculate the required rate of return for Terra Energy using these estimates. The Treasury bill rate is 4.1 percent.

the expression for the value of a stock given a single period investment horizon has 543634

The expression for the value of a stock given a single-period investment horizon has four variables: Vo, Dl, PI, and I: Solve for the value of the missing variable for each of the four stocks in the table below.

Stock

Estimated
Value (Vo)

Expected
Dividend (D1)

Expected
Price (P1)

Required Rate
of Return (r)

1

$0.30

$21.00

10.00%

2

$30.00

32

10

3

92

2.7

12

4

16

0.3

17.9

the current market prices of three stocks are given below the current dividends divi 543637

The current market prices of three stocks are given below. The current dividends, dividend growth rates, and required rates of return are also given. The dividend growth rates are perpetual.

Stock

Current
Price

Current
Dividend (t = 0)

Dividend
Growth Rate

Required Rate
of Return

Que Corp.

$25.00

$0.50

7.00%

10.00%

SHS Company

$40.00

$1.20

6.5

10.5

True Corp.

$20.00

$0.88

5

10

A. Find the value of each stock with the Gordon growth model.

B. Which stock”s current market price has the smallest premium or largest discount relative to its DDM valuation?

calculate the expected rate of return for each stock using the gordon growth model 543638

For five utility stocks, the table below provides the expected dividend for next year, the current market price, the expected dividend growth rate, and the beta. The risk free rate is currently 5.3 percent, and the market risk premium is 6.0 percent.

Stock

Dividend(D1)

Price(Po)

Dividend Growth
Rate (g)

Beta (ß)

American Electric (NYSE: AEP)

2.4

46.17

5.00%

0.6

Consolidated Edison (NYSE: ED)

2.2

39.8

5

0.6

Exelon Corp. (NYSE: EXC)

1.69

64.12

7

0.8

Southern Co. (NYSE: SO)

1.34

23.25

5.5

0.65

Dominion Resources (NYSE: D)

2.58

60.13

5.5

0.65

A. Calculate the expected rate of return for each stock using the Gordon growth model.

B. Calculate the required rate of return for each stock using the CAPM.

vicente garcia is a buy side analyst for a large pension fund he frequently uses div 543639

Vicente Garcia is a buy-side analyst for a large pension fund. He frequently uses dividend discount models such as the Gordon growth model for the consumer noncyclical stocks that he covers. The current dividend for Procter & Gamble Co. (NYSE: PG) is $1.46, and the dividend eight years ago was $0.585. The current stock price is $80.00.

A. What is the historical dividend growth rate for Procter & Gamble?

B. Garcia assumes that the future dividend growth rate will be exactly half of the historical rate. What is Procter & Gamble”s expected rate of return using the GGM?

C. Garcia uses a beta of 0.53 (computed versus the S&P 500 index) for Procter & Gamble. The risk-free rate of return is 5.56 percent and the equity risk premium is 3.71 percent. If Garcia continues to assume that the future dividend growth rate will be exactly half of the historical rate, what is the value of the stock with the Gordon growth model?

the company has sales of 210 million net income of 3 million and 300 million outstan 543641

R.A. Nixon put out a “strong buy” on DuPoTex (DPT). This company has a current stock price of $88.00 per share. The company has sales of $210 million, net income of $3 million, and 300 million outstanding shares. DPT is not paying a dividend. Dorothy Josephson has argued with Nixon that DPT”s valuation is excessive relative to its sales, profits, and any reasonable assumptions about future possible dividends. Josephson also asserts that DPT has a market value equal to that of many large blue-chip companies, which it does not deserve. Nixon feels that Josephson”s concerns reflect an archaic attitude about equity valuation and a lack of understanding about DPT”s industry.

A. What is the total market value of DPT”s outstanding shares? What are the price-to earnings and price-to-sales ratios?

B. Nixon and Josephson have agreed on a scenario for future earnings and dividends for DPT. Their assumptions are that sales grow at 60 percent annually for four years, and then at 7 percent annually thereafter. In Year 5 and thereafter, earnings will be 10 percent of sales. No dividends will be paid for four years, but in Year 5 and after, dividends will be 40 percent of earnings. Dividends should be discounted at a 12 percent rate. What is the value of a share of DPT using the discounted dividend approach to valuation?

C. Nixon and Josephson explore another scenario for future earnings and dividends for DPT. They assume that sales will grow at 7 percent in Year 5 and thereafter. Earnings will be 10 percent of sales, and dividends will be 40 percent of earnings. Dividends will be initiated in Year 5, and dividends should be discounted at 12 percent. What level of sales is required in Year 4 to achieve a discounted dividend valuation equal to the current stock price?

hansen has a beta of 0 83 against the ftse 100 index and the current dividend is gbp 543646

Hanson PLC (LSE: HNS) is selling for GBP 472. Hansen has a beta of 0.83 against the FTSE 100 index, and the current dividend is GBP 13.80. The risk-free rate of return is 4.66 percent, and the equity risk premium is 4.92 percent. An analyst covering this stock expects the Hanson dividend to grow initially at 14 percent but to decline linearly to 5 percent over a 10-year period. After that, the analyst expects the dividend to grow at 5 percent.

A. Compute the value of the Hanson dividend stream using the H-model. According to the H-model valuation, is Hanson overpriced or underpriced?

B. Assume that Hanson”s dividends follow the H-model pattern the analyst predicts. If an investor pays the current GBP 472 price for the stock, what will be the rate of return?

calculate the expected return over the next year of the common stock of lcc and aoc 543647

(Adapted from 1995 CFA Level I1 exam) Your supervisor has asked you to evaluate the relative attractiveness of the stocks of two very similar chemical companies: Litchfield Chemical Corp. (LCC) and Arninochem Company (AOC). AOC and LCC have June 30 fiscal year ends. You have compiled the data in Exhibit 17-1 for this purpose. Use a one-year time horizon and assume the following:

  • Real gross domestic product is expected to rise 5 percent;
  • S&P 500 expected total return of 20 percent;
  • U.S. Treasury bills yield 5 percent; and
  • 30-year U.S. Treasury bonds yield 8 percent.

EXHIBIT 17-1 Selected Data for Litchfield and Aminochem

Litchfield Chemical
(LCC)

Aminochem
(AOC)

Current stock price

$50

$30

Shares outstanding (millions)

10

$20

Projected earnings per share (N 1996)

$4.00

$3.20

Projected dividend per share (EY 1996)

$0.90

$1.60

Projected dividend growth rate

8%

7%

Stock beta

1.2

1.4

Investors” required rate of return Balance sheet data (millions)

10%

11%

Long-term debt

$100

$130

Stockholders” equity

$300

$320

A. Calculate the value of the common stock of LCC and AOC using the constant growth DDM. Show your work.

B. Calculate the expected return over the next year of the common stock of LCC and AOC using the CAPM. Show your work.

C. Calculate the internal (implied, normalized, or sustainable) growth rate of LCC and AOC. Show your work.

D. Recommend LCC or AOC for investment. Justify your choice using your answers to A, B, and C and the information in Exhibit 17- 1.

calculate the roe for 1999 using the three components of the dupont formula 543648

(Adapted from 1999 CFA Level I1 exam) Scott Kelly is reviewing MasterToy”s financial statements in order to estimate its sustainable growth rate. Using the information presented in Exhibit 18- 1,

A. i. Identify the three components of the DuPont formula.

ii. Calculate the ROE for 1999 using the three components of the DuPont formula.

iii. Calculate the sustainable growth rate for 1999

Kelly has calculated actual and sustainable growth for each of the past four years and finds in each year that its calculated sustainable growth rate substantially exceeds its actual growth rate.

B. Cite one course of action (other than ignoring the problem) Kelly should encourage Master Toy to take, assuming the calculated sustainable growth rate continues to exceed the actual growth rate.

EXHIBIT 18-1 Master Toy Inc. Actual 1998 and Estimated 1999 Financial Statements For N Ending December 31 ($ millions, except per-share data)

1998

1999e

Change (%)

Income Statement

Revenue

$4,750

$5,140

8.2

Cost of goods sold

$2,400

$2,540

Selling, general, and administrative

1,400

1,550

Depreciation

180

210

Goodwill amortization

10

10

Operating income

$760

$830

9.2

Interest expense

20

25

Income before taxes

$740

$805

Income taxes

265

295

Net income

$475

$510

Earnings per share

$1.79

$1.96

9.5

Average shares outstanding (millions)

265

260

Balance Sheet

Cash

$400

$400

Accounts receivable

680

700

Inventories

570

600

Net property, plant, and equipment

800

870

Intangibles

500

530

Total assets

$2,950

$3,100

Current liabilities

$550

$600

Long-term debt

300

300

Total liabilities

$850

$900

Stockholders” equity

2100

2.200

Total liabilities and equity

$2,950

$3,100

Book value per share

$7.92

$8.46

Annual dividend per share

$0.55

$0.60

to assist her analysts carroll has gathered the information shown in exhibits 19 1 a 543649

(Adapted from 2000 CFA Level I1 exam) The management of Telluride, an international diversified conglomerate based in the United States, believes that the recent strong performance of its wholly owned medical supply subsidiary, Sundanci, has gone unnoticed. In order to realize Sundanci”s full value, Telluride has announced that it will divest Sundanci in a tax-free spin-off Sue Carroll, CFA, is Director of Research at Kesson and Associates. In developing an investment recommendation for Sundanci, Carroll has directed four of her analysts to determine a valuation of Sundanci using various valuation disciplines. To assist her analysts, Carroll has gathered the information shown in Exhibits 19-1 and 19-2 below.

EXHIBIT 19-1 Sundanci Actual 1999 and 2000 Financial Statements For FY Ending May 31 ($ millions, except per-share data)

Income Statement

1999

2 000

Revenue

$474

$598

Depreciation

20

23

Other operating costs

368

460

Income before taxes

86

115

Taxes

26

35

Net income

60

80

Dividends

18

24

Earnings per share

$0.71

$0.95

Dividends per share

$0.21

$0.29

Common shares outstanding (millions)

84

84

Balance Sheet

1999

2000

Current assets

$201

$326

Net property, plant and equipment

474

489

Total assets

675

815

Current liabilities

57

141

Long-term debt

0

0

Total liabilities

618

141

Shareholders” equity

675

674

Total liabilities and equity

34

815

Capital expenditures

38

EXHIBIT 19-2 Selected Financial Information

Required rate of return on equity

14%

Growth rate of industry

13%

Industry PIE

26

Prior to determining Sundanci”s valuation, Carroll analyzes Sundanci”s return on equity (ROE) and sustainable growth.

A. i. Calculate the three components of ROE in the DuPont formula for the year 2000.

ii. Calculate ROE for the year 2000.

iii. Calculate the sustainable rate of growth. Show your work.

Carroll learns that Sundanci”s Board of Directors is considering the following policy changes that will affect Sundanci”s sustainable growth rate:

  • Director A proposes an increase in the quarterly dividend by $0.15 per share.
  • Director B proposes a bond issue of $25 million, the proceeds of which will be used to increase production capacity.
  • Director C proposes a 2-for-1 stock split.

B. Indicate the effect of each of these proposals on Sundanci”s sustainable rate of growth, given that the other factors remain unchanged. Identify which components of the sustainable growth model, if any, are directly affected by each proposal.

Helen Morgan, CFA, has been asked by Carroll to determine the potential valuation for Sundanci using the DDM. Morgan anticipates that Sundanci”s earnings and dividends will grow at 32 percent for two years and 13 percent thereafter.

C. Calculate the current value of a share of Sundanci stock using a two-stage dividend discount model and the data from Exhibits 19-1 and 19-2. Show your work.

determine whether each of the fundamental factors in exhibit 20 2 would cause pies t 543650

(Adapted from 2001 CFA Level I1 exam) Peninsular Research is initiating coverage of a mature manufacturing industry. John Jones, CFA, head of the research department, gathers the information given in Exhibit 20-1 to help in his analysis.

EXHIBIT 20-1 Fundamental industry and Market Data

Forecasted industry earnings retention rate

40%

Forecasted industry return on equity

25%

Industry beta

1.2

Government bond yield

6%

Equity risk premium

5%

A. Compute the price to earnings (Po/EI) ratio for the industry based on the fundamental data in Exhibit 20-1. Show your work. Jones wants to analyze how fundamental PIES might differ among countries. He gathers the data given in Exhibit 20-2:

EXHIBIT 20-2 Economic and Market Data

Fundamental Factors

Country A

Country B

Forecasted growth in real gross domestic product

5%

2%

Government bond yield

10%

6%

Equity risk premium

5%

4%

B. Determine whether each of the fundamental factors in Exhibit 20-2 would cause PIES to be generally higher for Country A or higher for Country B. Justify each of your conclusions with one reason. Note: Consider each fundamental factor in isolation, with all else remaining equal.

estimate the intrinsic value of smilewhite using the data above and the two stage dd 543651

(Adapted from 1998 CFA Level I1 exam) Janet Ludlow”s company requires all its analysts to use a two-stage DDM and the CAPM to value stocks. Using these models, Ludlow has valued Quick Brush Company at $63 per share. She now must value Smile White Corporation.

EXHIBIT 21-1 Valuation Information: December 1997

Quick Brush

Smile White

Beta

1.35

1.15

Market price

$45.00

$30.00

Intrinsic value

$63.00

?

Notes:

Risk-free rate

4.50%

Expected market return

14.50%

A. Calculate the required rate of return for SmileWhite using the information in Exhibit 21-1 and the CAPM. Show your work.

Ludlow estimates the following EPS and dividend growth rates for Smile White:

First three years:

12% per year

Years thereafter:

9% per year

The 1997 dividend per share is $1.72.

B. Estimate the intrinsic value of SmileWhite using the data above and the two-stage DDM. Show your work.

C. Recommend Quick Brush or Smile White stock for purchase by comparing each company”s intrinsic value with its current market price. Show your work.

D. Describe one strength of the two-stage DDM in comparison with the constant growth DDM. Describe one weakness inherent in all DDMs.

what is the value of one ordinary share of taiwan semiconductor manufacturing co ltd 543655

Quinton Johnston is evaluating Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd., (NYSE: TSM) headquartered in Hsinchu, Taiwan. In 2001, when Johnston is performing his analysis, the company-and indeed, the whole industry-is unprofitable. Furthermore, TSM pays no dividends on its common shares. Johnston decides to value TSM using his forecasts of FCFE and makes the following assumptions:

  • The company has 17.0 billion outstanding shares.
  • Sales will be $5.5 billion in 2002, increasing at 28 percent annually for the next four years (through 2006).
  • Net income will be 32 percent of sales.
  • Investment in fixed assets will be 35 percent of sales, investment in working capital will be 6 percent of sales, and depreciation will be 9 percent of sales.
  • 20 percent of the investment in assets will be financed with debt.
  • Interest expenses will be only 2 percent of sales.
  • The tax rate will be 10 percent.
  • TSM”s beta is 2.1, the risk-free government bond rate is 6.4 percent, and the equity risk premium is 5.0 percent.
  • At the end of 2006, Johnston projects TSM will sell for 18 times earnings.

What is the value of one ordinary share of Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd.?

interest expenses are 150 million the current market value of phaneuf s outstanding 543656

Do Pharn is evaluating Phaneuf Accelerateur using the FCFF and FCFE valuation approaches. Pham has collected the following information (currently in Euro):

  • Phaneuf has net income of 250 million, depreciation of 90 million, capital expenditures of 170 million, and an increase in working capital of 40 million.
  • Phaneuf will finance 40 percent of the increase in net fixed assets (capital expenditures less depreciation) and 40 percent of the increase in working capital with debt financing.
  • Interest expenses are 150 million. The current market value of Phaneuf”s outstanding debt is 1,800 million.
  • FCFF is expected to grow at 6.0 percent indefinitely, and FCFE is expected to grow at 7.0 percent.
  • The tax rate is 30 percent.
  • Phaneuf is financed with 40 percent debt and 60 percent equity. The before-tax cost of debt is 9 percent and the before-tax cost of equity is 13 percent.
  • Phaneuf has 10 million outstanding shares.

A. Using the FCFF valuation approach, estimate the total value of the firm, the total market value of equity, and the value per share.

B. Using the FCFE valuation approach, estimate the total market value of equity and the value per share.

phb company currently sells for 32 50 per share in an attempt to determine if phb is 543657

PHB Company currently sells for $32.50 per share. In an attempt to determine if PHB is fairly priced, an analyst has assembled the following information:

  • The before-tax required rates of return on PHB debt, preferred stock, and common stock are 7.0 percent, 6.8 percent, and 11.0 percent, respectively.
  • The company”s target capital structure is 30 percent debt, 15 percent preferred stock, and 55 percent common stock.
  • The market value of the company”s debt is $145 million, and its preferred stock is valued at $65 million.
  • PHB”s FCFF for the year just ended is $28 million. FCFF is expected to grow at a constant rate of 4 percent for the foreseeable future.
  • The tax rate is 35 percent.
  • PHB has 8 million outstanding common shares.

What is PHB”s estimated value per share? Is PHB”s stock underpriced?

bhp billiton headquartered in melbourne australia provides a variety of industrial m 543658

Watson Dunn is planning to value BHP Billiton Ltd. (NYSE: BHP) using a single stage FCFF approach. BHP Billiton, headquartered in Melbourne, Australia, provides a variety of industrial metals and minerals. The financial information Dunn has assembled for his valuation is as follows:

  • The company has 1,852 million shares outstanding.
  • Market value of debt is $3.192 billion.
  • FCFF is currently $1.1559 billion.
  • Equity beta is 0.90, the equity risk premium is 5.5 percent, and the risk-free rate is 5.5 percent.
  • The before-tax cost of debt is 7.0 percent.
  • The tax rate is 40 percent.
  • To calculate WACC, assume the company is financed 25 percent with debt.
  • FCFF growth rate is 4 percent.

Using Dunn”s information, calculate the following:

A. WACC

B. Value of the firm

C. Total market value of equity

D. Value per share

use the base case values to estimate the current value of mcdonald s corporation 543659

Kenneth McCoin is valuing McDonald”s Corporation and performing a sensitivity analysis on his valuation. He uses a single-stage FCFE growth model. The “base case” values for each of the parameters in the model are given in the table below, along with possible “low” and “high” estimates for each variable.

Variable

Base Case Value

Low Estimate

High Estimate

Normalized FCFE,

$0.88

$0.70

$1.14

Risk-free rate

5.08%

5.00%

5.20%

Equity risk premium

5.50%

4.50%

6.50%

Beta

0.7

0.6

0.8

FCFE perpetual growth rate

6.40%

4.00%

7.00%

A. Use the base case values to estimate the current value of McDonald”s Corporation.

B. Calculate the range of stock prices that would occur if the base case value for FCFEo were replaced by the low and high estimate for FCFEo. Similarly, using the base case values for all other variables, calculate the range of stock prices caused by the using the low and high values for beta, the risk-free rate, the equity risk premium, and the growth rate. Rank the sensitivity of the stock price to each of the five variables based on these ranges.

on the last trading day of 2000 29 december 2000 an analyst is reviewing his valuati 543626

On the last trading day of 2000 (29 December 2000), an analyst is reviewing his valuation of Wal-Mart Stores (NYSE: WMT). The analyst has the following information and assumptions:

  • The current price is $53.12.
  • The analyst”s estimate of WMT”s intrinsic value is $56.00.
  • In addition to the full correction of the difference between WMT”s current price and its intrinsic value, the analyst forecasts additional price appreciation of $4.87 and a cash dividend of $0.28 over the next year.
  • The required rate of return for Wal-Mart is 9.2 percent.

A. What is the analyst”s expected holding-period return on WMT?

B. What is WMT”s ex ante alpha?

C. Calculate ex post alpha, given the following additional information.

Over the next year, 29 December 2000 through 3 1 December 2001, Wal-Mart”s actual rate of return was 8.9 percent.

In 2001, the realized rate of return for stocks of similar risk was – 10.4 percent.

define ex ante alpha 543627

The table below gives information on the expected and required rates of return based on the CAPM for three securities an analyst is valuing:

Expected Rate

CAPM Required Rate

Security 1

0.2

0.21

Security 2

0.18

0.08

Security 3

0.11

0.1

A. Define ex ante alpha.

B. Calculate the expected alpha of Securities 1, 2, and 3 and rank them from most attractive to least attractive.

C. Based on your answer to Part B, what risks attach to selecting among Securities 1, 2, and 3?

oliver company uses the columnar cash journals illustrated in the textbook in 543524

Oliver Company uses the columnar cash journals illustrated in the textbook. In April, the following selected cash transactions occurred.

1. Made a refund to a customer for the return of damaged goods.

2. Received collection from customer within the 3% discount period.

3. Purchased merchandise for cash.

4. Paid a creditor within the 3% discount period.

5. Received collection from customer after the 3% discount period had expired.

6. Paid freight on merchandise purchased.

7. Paid cash for office equipment.

8. Received cash refund from supplier for merchandise returned.

9. Paid cash dividend to stockholders.

10. Made cash sales.

Instructions

Indicate (a) the cash journal, and (b) the columns in the cash journal that should be used in recording each transaction.

ramirez company has the following selected transactions during march 543525

Ramirez Company has the following selected transactions during March.

Mar. 2 Purchased equipment costing $6,000 from Briggs Company on account.

5 Received credit memorandum for $300 from Redbone Company for merchandise damaged in shipment to Ramirez.

7 Issued a credit memorandum for $400 to Sparks Company for merchandise the customer returned. The returned merchandise had a cost of $260. Ramirez Company uses a one-column purchases journal, a sales journal, the columnar cash journals used in the text, and a general journal.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions in the general journal.

(b) In a brief memo to the president of Ramirez Company, explain the postings to the control and subsidiary accounts.

below are some typical transactions incurred by costello company 543526

Below are some typical transactions incurred by Costello Company.

1. Payment of creditors on account.

8. Sales discount taken on goods sold.

2. Return of merchandise sold for credit.

9. Payment of employee wages.

3. Collection on account from customers.

10. Paid a cash dividend to stockholders.

4. Sale of land for cash.

11. Depreciation on building.

5. Sale of merchandise on account.

12. Purchase of office supplies for cash.

6. Sale of merchandise for cash.

13. Purchase of merchandise on account.

7. Received credit for merchandise

purchased on credit.

Instructions

For each transaction, indicate whether it would normally be recorded in a cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, sales journal, single-column purchases journal, or general journal.

selected accounts from the ledgers of jose gomez company at july 31 showed the follo 543528

Selected accounts from the ledgers of Jose Gomez Company at July 31 showed the following.

Store Equipment

No. 153

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

1-Jul

G1

3,600

3,600

Merchandise Inventory

No. 120

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

15-Jul

G1

400

400

18

G1

100

300

25

G1

200

100

31

P1

8,400

8,500

Accounts Payable

No. 201

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

1-Jul

G1

3,600

3,600

15

G1

400

4,000

18

G1

100

3,900

25

G1

200

3,700

31

P1

8,400

12,100

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE LEDGER

Agler Equipment Co.

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

1-Jul

G1

3,600

3,600

Benton Co.

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

3-Jul

P1

2,000

2,000

20

P1

700

2,700

Cerner Materials

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

17-Jul

P1

1,400

1,400

18

G1

100

1,300

29

P1

2,100

3,400

Dunlap Co.

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

14-Jul

P1

1,100

1,100

25

G1

200

900

Fogelson Co.

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

12-Jul

P1

500

500

21

P1

600

1,100

Galant Transit

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

15-Jul

G1

400

400

Instructions

From the data, prepare:

(a) the single-column purchases journal for July.

(b) the general journal entries for July.

moreno products uses both special journals and a general journal as described in thi 543529

Moreno Products uses both special journals and a general journal as described in this appendix. Moreno also posts customers’ accounts in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. The postings for the most recent month are included in the subsidiary T accounts below.

Dolan

340

250

200

Rambo

150

150

290

Moses

–0–

145

145

Voris

120

120

190

170

Instructions

Determine the correct amount of the end-of-month posting from the sales journal to the

Accounts Receivable control account.

moran company s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts 543530

Moran Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.

101 Cash

401 Sales

112 Accounts Receivable

414 Sales Discounts

120 Merchandise Inventory

505 Cost of Goods Sold

311 Common Stock

On April 1 the accounts receivable ledger of Moran Company showed the following balances: Collins $1,550, Harris $1,200, Fleetwood Co. $2,900, and Smith $1,700. The April transactions involving the receipt of cash were as follows.

Apr. 1 Stockholders invested additional cash in the business, $6,000, for common stock.

4 Received check for payment of account from Smith less 2% cash discount.

5 Received check for $620 in payment of invoice no. 307 from Fleetwood Co.

8 Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $7,245. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,347.

10 Received check for $800 in payment of invoice no. 309 from Collins.

11 Received cash refund from a supplier for damaged merchandise $550.

23 Received check for $1,500 in payment of invoice no. 310 from Fleetwood Co.

29 Received check for payment of account from Harris.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a six-column cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Merchandise Inventory Cr. Foot and cross foot the journal.

(b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Receivable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the April transactions to these accounts.

(c) Prove the agreement of the control account and subsidiary account balances.

manilow company s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts 543531

Manilow Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.

101 Cash

201 Accounts Payable

120 Merchandise Inventory

332 Dividends

130 Prepaid Insurance

505 Cost of Goods Sold

157 Equipment

On October 1 the accounts payable ledger of Manilow Company showed the following balances: Gibson Company $1,700, Milo Co. $2,500, Newsome Co. $1,400, and Pagan Company $3,700. The October transactions involving the payment of cash were as follows.

Oct. 1 Purchased merchandise, check no. 63, $700.

3 Purchased equipment, check no. 64, $800.

5 Paid Gibson Company balance due of $1,700, less 2% discount, check no. 65, $1,666.

10 Purchased merchandise, check no. 66, $2,250.

15 Paid Newsome Co. balance due of $1,400, check no. 67.

16 A cash dividend is paid in the amount of $400, check no. 68.

19 Paid Milo Co. in full for invoice no. 610, $1,400 less 2% cash discount, check no. 69, $1,372.

29 Paid Pagan Company in full for invoice no. 264, $2,600, check no. 70.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a four-column cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Merchandise Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr. Foot and crossfoot the journal. (b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Payable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the October transactions to these accounts. (c) Prove the agreement of the control account and the subsidiary account balances.

the chart of accounts of renteria company includes the following selected accounts 543532

The chart of accounts of Renteria Company includes the following selected accounts.

112 Accounts Receivable

401 Sales

120 Merchandise Inventory

412 Sales Returns and Allowances

126 Supplies

505 Cost of Goods Sold

157 Equipment

610 Advertising Expense

201 Accounts Payable

In July the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account. The cost of all merchandise sold was 70% of the sales price.

July 1 Purchased merchandise from Carlin Company $7,000.

2 Received freight bill from Johnson Shipping on Carlin purchase $400.

3 Made sales to Nance Company $1,300, and to Franklin Bros. $1,900.

5 Purchased merchandise from Flynn Company $3,200.

8 Received credit on merchandise returned to Flynn Company $300.

13 Purchased store supplies from Beran Supply $720.

15 Purchased merchandise from Carlin Company $3,600 and from Ruiz Company $2,900.

16 Made sales to Martin Company $3,450 and to Franklin Bros. $1,570.

18 Received bill for advertising from Marlin Advertisements $600.

21 Made sales to Nance Company $310 and to Randee Company $2,300.

22 Granted allowance to Nance Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $40.

24 Purchased merchandise from Flynn Company $3,000.

26 Purchased equipment from Beran Supply $600.

28 Received freight bill from Johnson Shipping on Flynn purchase of July 24, $380.

30 Made sales to Martin Company $4,900.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal. The purchases journal should have the following column headings: Date, Account Credited (Debited), Ref., Other Accounts Dr., and Merchandise Inventory Dr., Accounts Payable Cr. (b) Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.) (c) Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts.

selected accounts from the chart of accounts of cross company are shown below 543533

Selected accounts from the chart of accounts of Cross Company are shown below.

101 Cash

401 Sales

112 Accounts Receivable

412 Sales Returns and Allowances

120 Merchandise Inventory

414 Sales Discounts

126 Supplies

505 Cost of Goods Sold

157 Equipment

726 Salaries and Wages Expense

201 Accounts Payable

The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price. During January, Cross completed the following transactions.

Jan. 3 Purchased merchandise on account from Carr Co. $10,000.

4 Purchased supplies for cash $80.

4 Sold merchandise on account to Hartman $7,250, invoice no. 371, terms 1/10, n/30.

5 Issued a debit memorandum to Carr Co. and returned $300 worth of damaged goods.

6 Made cash sales for the week totaling $3,150.

8 Purchased merchandise on account from Law Co. $4,500.

9 Sold merchandise on account to Mays Corp. $5,800, invoice no. 372, terms 1/10, n/30.

Jan. 11 Purchased merchandise on account from Hoble Co. $3,700.

13 Paid in full Carr Co. on account less a 2% discount.

13 Made cash sales for the week totaling $5,340.

15 Received payment from Mays Corp. for invoice no. 372.

15 Paid semimonthly salaries of $14,300 to employees.

17 Received payment from Hartman for invoice no. 371.

17 Sold merchandise on account to Piper Co. $1,200, invoice no. 373, terms 1/10, n/30.

19 Purchased equipment on account from Johnson Corp. $5,500.

20 Made cash sales for the week totaling $3,200.

20 Paid in full Law Co. on account less a 2% discount.

23 Purchased merchandise on account from Carr Co. $7,800.

24 Purchased merchandise on account from Levine Corp. $4,690.

27 Made cash sales for the week totaling $3,730.

30 Received payment from Piper Co. for invoice no. 373.

31 Paid semimonthly salaries of $13,200 to employees.

31 Sold merchandise on account to Hartman $9,330, invoice no. 374, terms 1/10, n/30.

Clark Company uses the following journals.

1. Sales journal.

2. Single-column purchases journal.

3. Cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Merchandise Inventory Cr.

4. Cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Merchandise Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr.

5. General journal.

Instructions

Using the selected accounts provided:

(a) Record the January transactions in the appropriate journal noted.

(b) Foot and cross-foot all special journals.

(c) Show how postings would be made by placing ledger account numbers and checkmarks as needed in the journals. (Actual posting to ledger accounts is not required.)

presented below are the purchases and cash payments journals for garison co for its 543534

Presented below are the purchases and cash payments journals for Garison Co. for its first month of operations.

PURCHASES JOURNAL

Date

Account Credited

Merchandise Inventory Dr.
Accounts Payable Cr.

4-Jul

J. Eaton

6,800

5

W. Foley

7,500

11

R. Gamble

3,920

13

M. Hill

15,300

20

D. Jacob

8,800

42,320

CASH PAYMENTS JOURNAL

Date

Account
Debited

Other
Accounts
Dr.

Accounts
Payable
Dr.

Merchandise
Inventory
Cr.

Cash
Cr.

4-Jul

Store Supplies

600

600

10

W. Foley

7500

75

7,425

11

Prepaid Rent

6000

6,000

15

J. Eaton

6800

6,800

19

Dividends

2500

2,500

21

M. Hill

15,300

153

15,147

9100

29,600

228

38,472

In addition, the following transactions have not been journalized for July. The cost of all merchandise sold was 65% of the sales price.

July 1 The founder, R. Garison, invests $80,000 in cash in exchange for common stock.

6 Sell merchandise on account to Hardy Co. $5,400 terms 1/10, n/30.

7 Make cash sales totaling $4,000.

8 Sell merchandise on account to D. Marlowe $3,600, terms 1/10, n/30.

10 Sell merchandise on account to L. Clinton $4,900, terms 1/10, n/30.

13 Receive payment in full from D. Marlowe.

16 Receive payment in full from L. Clinton.

20 Receive payment in full from Hardy Co.

21 Sell merchandise on account to S. Kane $4,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

29 Returned damaged goods to J. Eaton and received cash refund of $450.

Instructions

(a) Open the following accounts in the general ledger.

101 Cash

332 Dividends

112 Accounts Receivable

401 Sales

120 Merchandise Inventory

414 Sales Discounts

127 Store Supplies

505 Cost of Goods Sold

131 Prepaid Rent

631 Supplies Expense

201 Accounts Payable

729 Rent Expense

311 Common Stock

(b) Journalize the transactions that have not been journalized in the sales journal, the cash receipts journal (see Illustration G-8), and the general journal.

(c) Post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers. Follow the sequence of transactions as shown in the problem.

(d) Post the individual entries and totals to the general ledger.

(e) Prepare a trial balance at July 31, 2012.

(f) Determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.

(g) The following adjustments at the end of July are necessary.

(1) A count of supplies indicates that $140 is still on hand.

(2) Recognize rent expense for July, $500.

Prepare the necessary entries in the general journal. Post the entries to the general ledger.

(h) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at July 31, 2012.

the post closing trial balance for rivera co is as follows 543535

The post-closing trial balance for Rivera Co. is as follows.

RIVERA CO.
Post-Closing Trial Balance
December 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$41,500

Accounts Receivable

15,000

Notes Receivable

45,000

Merchandise Inventory

23,000

Equipment

6,450

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$1,500

Accounts Payable

43,000

Common Stock

86,450

$130,950

$130,950

The subsidiary ledgers contain the following information: (1) accounts receivable—

N. Alspar $2,500, B. Cole $7,500, S. Devine $5,000; (2) accounts payable—S. Field $10,000,

A. Gantler $18,000, and D. Harms $15,000. The cost of all merchandise sold was 65% of the sales price.

The transactions for January 2013 are as follows.

Jan. 3 Sell merchandise to B. Terrel $4,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

5 Purchase merchandise from S. Warren $2,500, terms 2/10, n/30.

7 Receive a check from S. Devine $3,500.

11 Pay freight on merchandise purchased $300.

12 Pay rent of $1,000 for January.

13 Receive payment in full from B. Terrel.

14 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Issue a credit memo to acknowledge receipt of damaged merchandise of $700 returned by N. Alspar.

15 Send D. Harms a check for $14,850 in full payment of account, discount $150.

17 Purchase merchandise from D. Milton $1,600, terms 2/10, n/30.

18 Pay salaries of $4,300.

20 Give A. Gantler a 60-day note for $18,000 in full payment of account payable.

23 Total cash sales amount to $8,600.

24 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Sell merchandise on account to B. Cole $7,700, terms 1/10, n/30.

27 Send S. Warren a check for $950.

29 Receive payment on a note of $40,000 from S. Lava (short-term, non-interest-bearing note).

30 Return merchandise of $500 to D. Milton for credit. Post all journals to the subsidiary ledger.

Instructions

(a) Open general and subsidiary ledger accounts for the following.

101 Cash

311 Common Stock

112 Accounts Receivable

401 Sales

115 Notes Receivable

412 Sales Returns and Allowances

120 Merchandise Inventory

414 Sales Discounts

157 Equipment

505 Cost of Goods Sold

158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

726 Salaries and Wages Expense

200 Notes Payable

727 Office Salaries Expense

201 Accounts Payable

729 Rent Expense

(b) Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single-column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal (see Illustration G-8), a cash payments journal (see Illustration G-15), and a general journal.

(c) Post the appropriate amounts to the general ledger.

(d) Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2013.

(e) Determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with controlling accounts in the general ledger.

c held and g kamp decide to merge their proprietorships into a partnership 543551

C. Held and G. Kamp decide to merge their proprietorships into a partnership called Heldkamp Company. The balance sheet of Kamp Co. shows:

Accounts receivable

$16,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,200

$14,800

Equipment

20,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

8,000

12,000

The partners agree that the net realizable value of the receivables is $12,500 and that the fair value of the equipment is $10,000. Indicate how the four accounts should appear in the opening balance sheet of the partnership.

the post closing trial balances of two proprietorships on january 1 2012 are 543562

The post-closing trial balances of two proprietorships on January 1, 2012, are presented below.

High Company

Lowe Company

Cash

$14,000

$13,000

Accounts receivable

17,500

26,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

$3,000

$4,400

Merchandise inventory

26,500

18,400

Equipment

45,000

28,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

24,000

12,000

Notes payable

20,000

15,000

Accounts payable

20,000

31,000

High, Capital

36,000

Lowe, Capital

23,000

$103,000

$103,000

$85,400

$85,400

High and Lowe decide to form a partnership, High Lowe Company, with the following agreed upon valuations for noncash assets.

High Company

Lowe Company

Accounts receivable

$17,500

$26,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

4,500

4,000

Merchandise inventory

30,000

20,000

Equipment

25,000

18,000

All cash will be transferred to the partnership, and the partnership will assume all the liabilities of the two proprietorships. Further, it is agreed that High will invest $3,000 in cash, and Lowe will invest $18,000 in cash.

Instructions

(a) Prepare separate journal entries to record the transfer of each proprietorship’s assets and liabilities to the partnership.

(b) Journalize the additional cash investment by each partner.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet for the partnership on January 1, 2012.

at the end of its first year of operations on december 31 2012 lmn company s 543563

At the end of its first year of operations on December 31, 2012, LMN Company’s accounts show the following.

Partner

Drawings

Capital

Lois Lang

$23,000

$48,000

Mary Miley

14,000

30,000

Sue Norton

10,000

25,000

The capital balance represents each partner’s initial capital investment. Therefore, net income or net loss for 2012 has not been closed to the partners’ capital accounts.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the entry to record the division of net income for the year 2012 under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Net income is $28,000. Income is shared 6:3:1.

(2) Net income is $34,000. Lang and Miley are given salary allowances of $18,000 and $10,000, respectively. The remainder is shared equally.

(3) Net income is $22,000. Each partner is allowed interest of 10% on beginning capital balances. Lang is given a $15,000 salary allowance. The remainder is shared equally.

(b) Prepare a schedule showing the division of net income under assumption (3) above.

(c) Prepare a partners’ capital statement for the year under assumption (3) above.

the partners in jrs company decide to liquidate the firm when the balance sheet 543564

The partners in JRS Company decide to liquidate the firm when the balance sheet shows the following.

JRS COMPANY
Balance Sheet
May 31, 2012

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Cash

$27,500

Notes payable

$13,500

Accounts receivable

25,000

Accounts payable

27,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

-1,000

Wages payable

3,800

Merchandise inventory

34,500

S. Jenner, Capital

36,000

Equipment

21,000

J. Richards, Capital

20,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

-5,500

Mick Sutter, Capital

1,200

Total

$101,500

Total

$101,500

The partners share income and loss 5 :3 :2. During the process of liquidation, the following transactions were completed in the following sequence.

1. A total of $53,000 was received from converting noncash assets into cash.

2. Gain or loss on realization was allocated to partners.

3. Liabilities were paid in full.

4. Mick Sutter paid his capital deficiency.

5. Cash was paid to the partners with credit balances.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the entries to record the transactions.

(b) Post to the cash and capital accounts.

(c) Assume that Sutter is unable to pay the capital deficiency.

(1) Prepare the entry to allocate Sutter’s debit balance to Jenner and Richards.

(2) Prepare the entry to record the final distribution of cash.

the adjusted trial balance of hanlon company at the end of its fiscal year is 543576

The adjusted trial balance of Hanlon Company at the end of its fiscal year is:

HANLON COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
July 31, 2012

Account Titles

Debits

Credits

101

Cash

$14,940

112

Accounts Receivable

8,780

157

Equipment

15,900

167

Accumulated Depreciation

$5,400

201

Accounts Payable

4,220

208

Unearned Rent Revenue

1,800

301

J. D. Hanlon, Capital

45,200

306

J. D. Hanlon, Drawing

14,000

404

Commission Revenue

65,100

429

Rent Revenue

6,500

711

Depreciation Expense

4,000

720

Salaries Expense

55,700

732

Utilities Expense

14,900

$128,220

$128,220

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the year. Hanlon

did not make any capital investments during the year.

(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet at July 31.

on may 1 robert neupert started skyline flying school a company that provides flying 543577

On May 1, Robert Neupert started Skyline Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, by investing $45,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2012, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.

Cash

$6,500

Notes Payable

$30,000

Accounts Receivable

7,200

Rent Expense

1,200

Equipment

64,000

Repair Expense

400

Lesson Revenue

8,600

Fuel Expense

2,500

Advertising Expense

500

Insurance Expense

400

Accounts Payable

800

Robert Neupert made no additional investment in May, but he withdrew $1,700 in cash for personal use.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.

(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for May assuming that the data above need to be adjusted for the following items: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $3,300 of fuel expense was incurred but not paid.

the following are the projected cash flows to equity and to the firm over the next f 543583

The following are the projected cash flows to equity and to the firm over the next five years:

Year

CF to Equity

Int (1-t)

CF to Firm

1

$250.00

$90.00

$340.00

2

$262.50

$94.50

$357.00

3

$275.63

$99.23

$374.85

4

$289.41

$104.19

$393.59

5

$303.88

$109.40

$413.27

Terminal Value

$3,946.50

$6,000.00

(The terminal value is the value of the equity or firm at the end of year 5.) The firm has a cost of equity of 12% and a cost of capital of 9.94%. Answer the following

questions:

A. What is the value of the equity in this firm?

B. What is the value of the firm?

you are estimating the price earnings multiple to use to value paramount corporation 543584

You are estimating the price/earnings multiple to use to value Paramount Corporation by looking at the average price/earnings multiple of comparable firms. The following are the price/earnings ratios of firms in the entertainment business.

Firm

P/E Ratio

Firm

P/E Ratio

Disney (Walt)

22.09

PLG

23.33

Time Warner

36

CIR

22.91

King World Productions

14.1

GET

97.6

New Line Cinema

26.7

GTK

26

A. What is the average P/E ratio?

B. Would you use all the comparable firms in calculating the average? Why or why not?

C. What assumptions are you making when you use the industry-average P/E ratio to value Paramount Communications?

an analyst has been following ken mcgee corporation nyse kmg for several years 543625

An analyst has been following Ken-McGee Corporation (NYSE: KMG) for several years. He has consistently felt that the stock is undervalued and has always recommended a strong buy. Another analyst who has been following Nucor Corporation (NYSE: NUE) has been similarly bullish. The tables below summarize the prices, dividends, total returns, and estimates of the contemporaneous required returns for KMG and NUE from 1998 to 2001.

Data for KMG

Year

Price at
Year-End

Dividends

Total Annual
Return

Contemporaneous
Required Return

1997

$54.22

1998

33.97

$1.80

-34.00%

26.60%

1999

54.38

1.8

65.4

19.6

2000

63.96

1.8

20.9

-8.5

2001

53.93

1.8

-12.9

-11

Data for NUE

Year

Price at
Year-End

Dividends

Total Annual
Return

Contemporaneous
Required Return

1997

$45.66

1998

41.31

$0.48

-8.50%

29.20%

1999

52.93

0.52

29.4

21.5

2000

38.96

0.6

25.3

-9.3

200 1

52.8

0.68

37.3

12.1

The total return is the price appreciation and dividends for the year divided by the price at the end of the previous year. The contemporaneous required return is the average actual return for the year realized by stocks that were of the same risk as KMG and NUE, respectively.

A. Without reference to any numerical data, what can be said about each analyst”s ex ante alpha for KMG and NUE, respectively?

B. Calculate the ex post alphas for each year 1998 through 2001 for KMG and for

colorado clinic is considering investing in new heart monitoring equipment it has tw 543363

Colorado Clinic is considering investing in new heart-monitoring equipment. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 4 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were made of the cash flows. The company’s cost of capitalis 8%.

Option A

Option B

Initial cost

$135,000

$203,000

Net annual cash flows

$31,000

$40,000

Cost to rebuild (end of year 4)

$50,000

$0

Salvage value

$0

$10,000

Estimated useful life

8 years

8 years

Instructions

(a) Compute the (1) net present value and (2) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint:To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)

(b) Which option should be accepted?

you would like to start a business manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet 543364

You would like to start a business manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. In preparation for an interview with the bank to discuss your financing needs, you develop answers to the following questions. A number of assumptions are required; clearly note all assumptions that you make.

Instructions

(a) Identify the types of costs that would likely be involved in making this product.

(b) Set up five columns as indicated.

Product Costs

Item

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Period Costs

Classify the costs you identified in (a) into the manufacturing cost classifications of product costs (direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead) and period costs.

(c) Assign hypothetical monthly dollar figures to the costs you identified in (a) and (b).

(d) Assume you have no raw materials or work in process beginning or ending inventories. Prepare a projected cost of goods manufactured schedule for the first month of operations.

(e) Project the number of helmets you expect to produce the first month of operations. Compute the cost to produce one bicycle helmet. Review the result to ensure it is reasonable; if not, return to part (c) and adjust the monthly dollar figures you assigned accordingly.

(f ) What type of cost accounting system will you likely use—job order or process costing?

(g) Explain how you would assign costs in either the job order or process costing system you plan to use.

(h) Classify your costs as either variable or fixed costs. For simplicity, assign all costs to either variable or fixed, assuming there are no mixed costs, using the format shown.

Item

Variable Costs

Fixed Costs

Total Costs

(i) Compute the unit variable cost, using the production number you determined in (e).

( j) Project the number of helmets you anticipate selling the first month of operations. Set a unit selling price, and compute both the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio.

(k) Determine your break-even point in dollars and in units.

( l ) Prepare projected operating budgets (sales, production, direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling and administrative expense, and income statement).

You will need to make assumptions for each of the following:

Direct materials budget:

Quantity of direct materials required to produce one helmet; cost per unit of quantity; desired ending direct materials (assume none).

Direct labor budget:

Direct labor time required per helmet; direct labor cost per hour.

Budgeted income statement:

Income tax expense is 45% of income from operations.

(m) Prepare a cash budget for the month. Assume the percentage of sales that will be collected from customers is 75%, and the percentage of direct materials that will be paid in the current month is 75%.

(n) Determine a relevant range of activity, using the number of helmets produced as your activity index. Recast your manufacturing overhead budget into a flexible monthly budget for two additional activity levels.

(o) Identify one potential cause of materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead variances for your product.

(p) Assume that you wish to purchase production equipment that costs $720,000. Determine the cash payback period, utilizing the monthly cash flow that you computed in part (m) multiplied by 12 months (for simplicity).

(q) Identify any nonfinancial factors that should be considered before commencing your business venture.

shellhammer company is considering the purchase of a new machine the invoice 543366

Shellhammer Company is considering the purchase of a new machine. The invoice price of the machine is $170,000, freight charges are estimated to be $4,000, and installation costs are expected to be $6,000. Salvage value of the new equipment is expected to be zero after a useful life of 4 years. Existing equipment could be retained and used for an additional 4 years if the new machine is not purchased. At that time, the salvage value of the equipment would be zero. If the new machine is purchased now, the existing machine would be scrapped. Shellhammer’s accountant, Tracy Greene, has accumulated the following data regarding annual sales and expenses with and without the new machine.

1. Without the new machine, Shellhammer can sell 10,000 units of product annually at a per unit selling price of $100. If the new unit is purchased, the number of units produced and sold would increase by 20%. The selling price would remain the same.

2. The new machine is faster than the old machine, and it is more efficient in its usage of materials. With the old machine, the gross profit rate will be 25% of sales. With the new machine, the rate will be 28% of sales.

3. Annual selling expenses are $135,000 with the current equipment. Because the new equipment would produce a greater number of units to be sold, annual selling expenses are expected to increase by 10% if it is purchased.

4. Annual administrative expenses are expected to be $100,000 with the old machine and $113,000 with the new machine.

5. The current book value of the existing machine is $36,000. Shellhammer uses straight-line depreciation.

6. Shellhammer’s management wants a minimum rate of return of 15% on its investment and a payback period of no more than 3 years.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following. (Ignore income tax effects.)

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the 4 years showing whether Shellhammer should keep the existing machine or buy the new machine.

(b) Calculate the annual rate of return for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the payback period for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)

(d) Compute the net present value of the new machine. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(e) On the basis of the foregoing data, would you recommend that Shellhammer buy the machine? Why?

koonce company manufactures private label small electronic products 543367

Koonce Company manufactures private-label small electronic products, such as alarm clocks, calculators, kitchen timers, stopwatches, and automatic pencil sharpeners. Some of the products are sold as sets, and others are sold individually. Products are studied as to their sales potential, and then cost estimates are made. The Engineering Department develops productionplans, and then production begins. The company has generally had very successful product introduction.Only two products introduced by the company have been discontinued.One of the products currently sold is a multi-alarm clock. The clock has four alarms that canbe programmed to sound at various times and for varying lengths of time. The company has experienceda great deal of difficulty in making the circuit boards for the clocks. The productionprocess has never operated smoothly. The product is unprofitable at the present time, primarilybecause of warranty repairs and product recalls. Two models of the clocks were recalled, for example,because they sometimes caused an electric shock when the alarms were being shut off. TheEngineering Department is attempting to revise the manufacturing process, but the revision willtake another 6 months at least.The clocks were very popular when they were introduced, and since they are private-label, thecompany has not suffered much from the recalls. Presently, the company has a very large order forseveral items from Kmart Stores. The order includes 5,000 of the multi-alarm clocks. When thecompany suggested that Kmart purchase the clocks from another manufacturer, Kmart threatenedto rescind the entire order unless the clocks were included.The company has therefore investigated the possibility of having another company make theclocks for them. The clocks were bid for the Kmart order, based on an estimated $5.50 cost to manufacture,as follows.

Circuit board, 1 each @ $1.00

$1.00

Plastic case, 1 each @ $0.50

0.5

Alarms, 4 @ $0.15 each

0.6

Labor, 15 minutes @ $12/hour

3

Overhead, $1.60 per labor hour

0.4

Koonce could purchase clocks to fill the Kmart order for $9 from Silver Star, a Korean manufacturer with a very good quality record. Silver Star has offered to reduce the price to $7.50 after Koonce has been a customer for 6 months, placing an order of at least 1,000 units per month. If Koonce becomes a “preferred customer” by purchasing 15,000 units per year, the price would be reduced still further to $4.50. Alpha Products, a local manufacturer, has also offered to make clocks for Koonce. It has offered to sell 5,000 clocks for $5 each. However, Alpha Products has been in business for only 6 months. It has experienced significant turnover in its labor force, and the local media have reported that the owner may soon face tax-evasion charges. The owner of Alpha Products is an electronic engineer, however, and the quality of the clocks is likely to be good. If Koonce decides to purchase the clocks from either Silver Star or Alpha, all the costs to manufacturer could be avoided, except a total of $5,000 in overhead costs for machine depreciation. The machinery is fairly new and has no alternate use.

Instructions

(a) What is the difference in profit under each of the alternatives if the clocks are to be sold for $13.00 each to Kmart?

(b) What are the most important nonfinancial factors that Koonce should consider when making this decision?

(c) What should Koonce do in regard to the Kmart order? What should it do in regard to continuing to manufacture the multi alarm clocks? Be prepared to defend your answer.

donna garland s regular hourly wage rate is 16 00 and she receives a wage of 11 2 543468

Donna Garland’s regular hourly wage rate is $16.00, and she receives a wage of 11/2 times the regular hourly rate for work in excess of 40 hours. During a March weekly pay period, Donna worked 42 hours. Her gross earnings prior to the current week were $8,000. Donna is married and claims three withholding allowances. Her only voluntary deduction is for group hospitalization insurance at $15.00 per week.

Instructions

(a) Compute the following amounts for Donna’s wages for the current week.

(1) Gross earnings.

(2) FICA taxes. (Assume an 8% rate on maximum of $100,000.)

(3) Federal income taxes withheld. (Use the withholding table in the text, page F-6.)

(4) State income taxes withheld. (Assume a 2.0% rate.)

(5) Net pay.

(b) Record Donna’s pay, assuming she is an office computer operator.

gonzalez company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending january 31 543470

Gonzalez Company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending January 31.

Federal

Hourly

Income Tax

Health

Employee

M

T

W

T

F

S

Rate

Withholding

Insurance

M. Mozart

8

8

9

8

10

3

$10

$34

$10

E. Donnelly

8

8

8

8

8

2

12

37

15

K. Renn

9

10

8

8

9

0

13

58

15

Employees are paid 11/2 times the regular hourly rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week. FICA taxes are 8% on the first $100,000 of gross earnings. Gonzalez Company is subject to 5.4% state unemployment taxes and 0.8% federal unemployment taxes on the first $7,000 of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the payroll register for the weekly payroll.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the payroll and Gonzalez’s payroll tax expense.

selected data from a february payroll register for skywalker company are presented 543471

Selected data from a February payroll register for Skywalker Company are presented below. Some amounts are intentionally omitted.

Gross earnings:

State income taxes

($3)

Regular

$8,900

Union dues

100

Overtime

-1

Total deductions

-4

Total

-2

Net pay

$7,660

Deductions:

Accounts debited:

FICA taxes

$800

Warehouse wages

-5

Federal income taxes

1,140

Store wages

$4,000

FICA taxes are 8%. State income taxes are 3% of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Fill in the missing amounts.

(b) Journalize the February payroll and the payment of the payroll.

selected payroll procedures of waegelein company are described below 543473

Selected payroll procedures of Waegelein Company are described below.

1. Department managers interview applicants, and on the basis of the interview either hire or reject the applicants. When an applicant is hired, the applicant fills out a W-4 form (Employee’s Withholding Allowance Certificate). One copy of the form is sent to the human resources department, and one copy is sent to the payroll department as notice that the individual has been hired. On the copy of the W-4 sent to payroll, the managers manually indicate the hourly pay rate for the new hire.

2. The payroll checks are manually signed by the chief accountant and given to the department managers for distribution to employees in their department. The managers are responsible for seeing that any absent employees receive their checks.

3. There are two clerks in the payroll department. The payroll is divided alphabetically; one clerk has employees A to L and the other has employees M to Z. Each clerk computes the gross earnings, deductions, and net pay for employees in the section and posts the data to the employee earning records.

Instructions

(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal control.

(b) For each weakness, describe the control procedures that will provide effective internal control. Use the following format for your answer:

(a) Weaknesses

(b) Recommended Procedures

the payroll liability accounts shown below are included in the ledger of ludwick 543475

The payroll liability accounts shown below are included in the ledger of Ludwick Company on January 1, 2012.

FICA Taxes Payable

$760.00

Federal Income Taxes Payable

1,004.60

State Income Taxes Payable

108.95

Federal Unemployment Taxes Payable

288.95

State Unemployment Taxes Payable

1,954.40

Union Dues Payable

870

U.S. Savings Bonds Payable

360

In January, the following transactions occurred.

Jan. 10 Sent check for $870.00 to union treasurer for union dues.

12 Deposited check for $1,764.60 in Federal Reserve bank for FICA taxes and federal income taxes withheld.

15 Purchased U.S. Savings Bonds for employees by writing check for $360.00.

17 Paid state income taxes withheld from employees.

20 Paid federal and state unemployment taxes.

31 Completed monthly payroll register, which shows office salaries $14,600, store wages $28,400, FICA taxes withheld $3,440, federal income taxes payable $1,684, state income taxes payable $360, union dues payable $400, United Fund contributions payable $1,888, and net pay $35,228.

31 Prepared payroll checks for the net pay and distributed checks to employees.

At January 31, the company also makes the following accrued adjustments pertaining to employee compensation.

1. Employer payroll taxes: FICA taxes 8%, federal unemployment taxes 0.8%, and state unemployment taxes 5.4%.

2. Vacation pay: 6% of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the January transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjustments pertaining to employee compensation at January 31.

for the year ended december 31 2012 bradburn electrical repair company 543476

For the year ended December 31, 2012, Bradburn Electrical Repair Company reports the following summary payroll data.

Gross earnings:

Administrative salaries

$180,000

Electricians’ wages

470,000

Total

$650,000

Deductions:

FICA taxes

$45,200

Federal income taxes withheld

188,000

State income taxes withheld (2.6%)

16,900

United Fund contributions payable

32,500

Hospital insurance premiums

20,300

Total

$302,900

Bradburn Company’s payroll taxes are: FICA 8%, state unemployment 2.5% (due to a stable employment record), and 0.8% federal unemployment. Gross earnings subject to FICA taxes total $565,000, and gross earnings subject to unemployment taxes total $145,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a summary journal entry at December 31 for the full year’s payroll.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entry at December 31 to record the employer’s payroll taxes.

(c) The W-2 Wage and Tax Statement requires the following dollar data.

Wages, Tips,
Other Compensation

Federal Income
Tax Withheld

State Income
Tax Withheld

FICA
Wages

FICA Tax
Withheld

Complete the required data for the following employees.

Employee

Gross Earnings

Federal Income Tax Withheld

Anna Hillman

$59,000

$28,500

Sharon Wainwright

28,000

10,800

gonzalez company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending january 31 543493

Gonzalez Company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending January 31.

Federal

Hourly

Income Tax

Health

Employee

M

T

W

T

F

S

Rate

Withholding

Insurance

M. Mozart

8

8

9

8

10

3

$10

$34

$10

E. Donnelly

8

8

8

8

8

2

12

37

15

K. Renn

9

10

8

8

9

0

13

58

15

Employees are paid 11/2 times the regular hourly rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week. FICA taxes are 8% on the first $100,000 of gross earnings. Gonzalez Company is subject to 5.4% state unemployment taxes and 0.8% federal unemployment taxes on the first $7,000 of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the payroll register for the weekly payroll.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the payroll and Gonzalez’s payroll tax expense.

selected data from a february payroll register for skywalker company are presented 543494

Selected data from a February payroll register for Skywalker Company are presented below. Some amounts are intentionally omitted.

Gross earnings:

State income taxes

($3)

Regular

$8,900

Union dues

100

Overtime

(1.00)

Total deductions

(4.00)

Total

(2.00)

Net pay

$7,660

Deductions:

Accounts debited:

FICA taxes

$800

Warehouse wages

(5.00)

Federal income taxes

1,140

Store wages

$4,000

FICA taxes are 8%. State income taxes are 3% of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Fill in the missing amounts.

(b) Journalize the February payroll and the payment of the payroll.

selected payroll procedures of waegelein company are described below 543496

Selected payroll procedures of Waegelein Company are described below.

1. Department managers interview applicants, and on the basis of the interview either hire or reject the applicants. When an applicant is hired, the applicant fills out a W-4 form (Employee’s Withholding Allowance Certificate). One copy of the form is sent to the human resources department, and one copy is sent to the payroll department as notice that the individual has been hired. On the copy of the W-4 sent to payroll, the managers manually indicate the hourly pay rate for the new hire.

2. The payroll checks are manually signed by the chief accountant and given to the department managers for distribution to employees in their department. The managers are responsible for seeing that any absent employees receive their checks.

3. There are two clerks in the payroll department. The payroll is divided alphabetically; one clerk has employees A to L and the other has employees M to Z. Each clerk computes the gross earnings, deductions, and net pay for employees in the section and posts the data to the employee earning records.

Instructions

(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal control.

(b) For each weakness, describe the control procedures that will provide effective internal control. Use the following format for your answer:

(a) Weaknesses (b) Recommended Procedures

stine hardware has four employees who are paid on an hourly basis plus timeand 543497

Stine Hardware has four employees who are paid on an hourly basis plus timeand- a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 a week. Payroll data for the week ended March 15, 2012, are presented below.

Employee

Hours
Worked

Hourly
Rate

Federal
Income Tax
Withholdings

United
Fund

Joe Feldon

40

$14.00

$ ?

$5.00

Mary Norten

42

13.00

?

5.00

Andy Renfro

44

13.00

60

8.00

Kim Cheng

46

13.00

51

5.00

Feldon and Norten are married. They claim 0 and 4 withholding allowances, respectively. The following tax rates are applicable: FICA 8%, state income taxes 3%, state unemployment taxes 5.4%, and federal unemployment 0.8%. The first three employees are sales clerks (store wages expense). The fourth employee performs administrative duties (office wages expense).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a payroll register for the weekly payroll. (Use the wage-bracket withholding table in the text for federal income tax withholdings.)

(b) Journalize the payroll on March 15, 2012, and the accrual of employer payroll taxes.

(c) Journalize the payment of the payroll on March 16, 2012.

(d) Journalize the deposit in a Federal Reserve bank on March 31, 2012, of the FICA and federal income taxes payable to the government.

presented on the next page is information related to varberg company for its 543512

Presented on the next page is information related to Varberg Company for its first month of operations. Identify the balances that appear in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and the accounts receivable balance that appears in the general ledger at the end of January.

Credit Sales

Cash Collections

Jan. 7

Brown Co.

$8,000

Jan. 17

Brown Co.

$7,000

15

Ford Co.

6,000

24

Ford Co.

5,000

23

Jones Co.

9,000

29

Jones Co.

9,000

wei company uses both special journals and a general journal as described in 543519

Wei Company uses both special journals and a general journal as described in this appendix. On June 30, after all monthly postings had been completed, the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger had a debit balance of $350,000; the Accounts Payable control account had a credit balance of $87,000. The July transactions recorded in the special journals are summarized below. No entries affecting accounts receivable and accounts payable were recorded in the general journal for July.

Sales journal

Total sales $161,400

Purchases journal

Total purchases $54,360

Cash receipts journal

Accounts receivable column total $141,000

Cash payments journal

Accounts payable column total $47,500

Instructions

(a) What is the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?

(b) What is the balance of the Accounts Payable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?

(c) To what account(s) is the column total of $161,400 in the sales journal posted?

(d) To what account(s) is the accounts receivable column total of $141,000 in the cash receipts journal posted?

on september 1 the balance of the accounts receivable control account in the general 543521

On September 1 the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger of Albert Company was $11,960. The customers’ subsidiary ledger contained account balances as follows: Fleming $2,440, Park $2,640, Stiner $2,060, Zander $4,820. At the end of September the various journals contained the following information.

Sales journal:

Sales to Zander $800; to Fleming $1,350; to Henry $1,030; to Stiner $1,100.

Cash receipts journal:

Cash received from Stiner $1,310; from Zander $2,300; from Henry $410; from Park $1,800; from Fleming $1,240.

General journal: An allowance is granted to Zander $220.

Instructions

(a) Set up control and subsidiary accounts and enter the beginning balances. Do not construct the journals.

(b) Post the various journals. Post the items as individual items or as totals, whichever would be the appropriate procedure. (No sales discounts given.)

(c) Prepare a list of customers and prove the agreement of the controlling account with the subsidiary ledger at September 30, 2012.

spears company uses special journals and a general journal the following transaction 543522

Spears Company uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during September 2012. Sept. 2 Sold merchandise on account to S. Daily, invoice no. 101, $480, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $300.

10 Purchased merchandise on account from L. Dayne $600, terms 2/10, n/30.

12 Purchased office equipment on account from B. Shafer $6,500.

21 Sold merchandise on account to L. Perez, invoice no. 102 for $800, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $480.

25 Purchased merchandise on account from F. Trent $900, terms n/30.

27 Sold merchandise to M. Deitrich for $700 cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $420.

Instructions

(a) Draw a sales journal (see Illustration G-6) and a single-column purchase journal (see Illustration G-12). (Use page 1 for each journal.)

(b) Record the transaction(s) for September that should be journalized in the sales journal and the purchases journal.

cole co uses special journals and a general journal the following transactions 543523

Cole Co. uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during May 2012.

May 1 R. Cole invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

2 Sold merchandise to J. Simon for $6,000 cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,200.

3 Purchased merchandise for $9,000 from L. M. Howe using check no. 101.

14 Paid salary to S. Little $700 by issuing check no. 102.

16 Sold merchandise on account to B. Jones for $900, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $630.

22 A check of $9,000 is received from R. Wyatt in full for invoice 101; no discount given.

Instructions

(a) Draw a multiple-column cash receipts journal (see Illustration G-8) and a multiple column cash payments journal (see Illustration G-15). (Use page 1 for each journal.)

(b) Record the transaction(s) for May that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal and cash payments journal.

the information shown on the next page was taken from the annual manufacturing overh 543254

The information shown on the next page was taken from the annual manufacturing overhead cost budget of Marantha Company.

Variable manufacturing overhead costs

$33,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead costs

$19,800

Normal production level in labour hours

16,500

Normal production level in units

4,125

Standard labour hours per unit

4

During the year, 4,000 units were produced, 16,100 hours were worked, and the actual manufacturing overhead was $54,000. Actual fixed manufacturing overhead costs equaled budgeted fixed manufacturing overhead costs. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labour hours.

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, fixed, and variable predetermined manufacturing overhead rates.

(b) Compute the total, controllable, and volume overhead variances.

(c) Briefly interpret the overhead controllable and volume variances computed in (b).

the loan department of ottawa bank uses standard costs to determine the overhead cos 543255

The loan department of Ottawa Bank uses standard costs to determine the overhead cost of processing loan applications. During the current month a fire occurred, and the accounting records for the department were mostly destroyed. The following data were salvaged from the ashes.

Standard variable overhead rate per hour

$9

Standard hours per application

2

Standard hours allowed

2,000

Standard fixed overhead rate per hour

$6

Actual fixed overhead cost

$13,200

Variable overhead budget based on standard hours allowed

$18,000

Fixed overhead budget

$13,200

Overhead controllable variance

$ 1,500 U

Instructions

(a) Determine the following.

(1) Total actual overhead cost.

(2) Actual variable overhead cost.

(3) Variable overhead cost applied.

(4) Fixed overhead cost applied.

(5) Overhead volume variance.

(b) Determine how many loans were processed.

rondello corporation manufactures a single product the standard cost per unit of pro 543257

Rondello Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.

Direct materials—1 pound plastic at $7.00 per pound

$7.00

Direct labour—1.5 hours at $12.00 per hour

18

Variable manufacturing overhead

11.25

Fixed manufacturing overhead

3.75

Total standard cost per unit

$40.00

The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $10 per direct labour hour ($15.00 _ 1.5). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 7,500 direct labour hours (5,000 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $56,250 ($7.50 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $18,750 ($2.50 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,900 units were as follows.

Direct materials (5,100 pounds)

$37,230

Direct labour (7,000 hours)

87,500

Variable overhead

56,170

Fixed overhead

19,680

Total manufacturing costs

$200,580

The purchasing department buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.

Instructions

(a) Compute all of the materials and labour variances.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

martinez manufacturing corporation accumulates the following data relative 543258

2A Martinez Manufacturing Corporation accumulates the following data relative to jobs started and finished during the month of June 2012.

Costs and Production Data

Actual

Standard

Raw materials unit cost

$2.25

$2.00

Raw materials units used

10,600

10,000

Direct labour payroll

$122,400

$120,000

Direct labour hours worked

14,400

15,000

Manufacturing overhead incurred

$184,500

Manufacturing overhead applied

$189,000

Machine hours expected to be used at normal capacity

42,500

Budgeted fixed overhead for June

$51,000

Variable overhead rate per machine hour

$3.00

Fixed overhead rate per machine hour

$1.20

Overhead is applied on the basis of standard machine hours. Three hours of machine time are required for each direct labour hour. The jobs were sold for $400,000. Selling and administrative expenses were $40,000. Assume that the amount of raw materials purchased equaled the amount used.

Instructions

(a) Compute all of the variances for (1) direct materials and (2) direct labour.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Prepare an income statement for management. Ignore income taxes.

deskins clothiers is a small company that manufactures tall men s suits 543259

Deskins Clothiers is a small company that manufactures tall-men’s suits. The company has used a standard cost accounting system. In May 2012, 11,200 suits were produced. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of May when normal capacity was 14,000 direct labour hours. All materials purchased were used.

Cost Element

Standard (per unit)

Actual

Direct materials

8 yards at $4.30 per yard

$371,050 for 90,500 yards ($4.10 per yard)

Direct labour

1.2 hours at $13.50 per hour

$201,630 for 14,300 hours ($14.10 per hour)

Overhead

1.2 hours at $6.00 per hour

$49,000 fixed overhead

(fixed $3.50; variable $2.50)

$37,000 variable overhead

Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labour hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $49,000, and budgeted variable overhead was $35,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for (1) materials and (2) labour.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Which of the materials and labour variances should be investigated if management considers a variance of more than 4% from standard to be significant?

korte corporation manufactures a single product the standard cost per unit of produc 543268

Korte Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is as follows.

Direct materials—2 pounds of plastic at $5 per pound

$10

Direct labor—2 hours at $12 per hour

24

Variable manufacturing overhead

8

Fixed manufacturing overhead

6

Total standard cost per unit

$48

The master manufacturing overhead budget for the month based on normal productive capacity of 20,000 direct labor hours (10,000 units) shows total variable costs of $80,000 ($4 per labor hour) and total fixed costs of $60,000 ($3 per labor hour). Normal productive capacity is 20,000 direct labor hours. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Actual costs for November in producing 9,700 units were as follows.

Direct materials (20,000 pounds)

$98,000

Direct labor (19,600 hours)

239,120

Variable overhead

79,100

Fixed overhead

59,000

Total manufacturing costs

$475,220

The purchasing department normally buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.

Instructions

(a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

vasquez manufacturing company uses a standard cost accounting system to account for 543269

Vasquez Manufacturing Company uses a standard cost accounting system to account for the manufacture of exhaust fans. In July 2012, it accumulates the following data relative to 1,800 units started and finished.

Cost and Production Data

Actual

Standard

Raw materials

Units purchased

21,000

Units used

21,000

22,000

Unit cost

$3.40

$3.00

Direct labor

Hours worked

3,450

3,600

Hourly rate

$11.80

$12.50

Manufacturing overhead

Incurred

$101,500

Applied

$108,000

Manufacturing overhead was applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Normal capacity for the month was 3,400 direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted overhead costs were $20 per labor hour variable and $10 per labor hour fixed. Total budgeted fixed overhead costs were $34,000. Jobs finished during the month were sold for $280,000. Selling and administrative expenses were $25,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute all of the variances for (1) direct materials and (2) direct labor.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Prepare an income statement for management. Ignore income taxes.

herzog clothiers manufactures women s business suits the company uses a 543270

Herzog Clothiers manufactures women’s business suits. The company uses a standard cost accounting system. In March 2012, 15,700 suits were made. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of March when normal capacity was 20,000 direct labor hours. All materials purchased were used in production.

Cost Element

Standard (per unit)

Actual

Direct materials

5 yards at $6.80 per yard

$547,200 for 76,000 yards
($7.20 per yard)

Direct labor

1.0 hours at $11.50 per hour

$166,880 for 14,900 hours
($11.20 per hour)

Overhead

1.0 hours at $9.30 per hour

$120,000 fixed overhead

(fixed $6.30; variable $3.00)

$49,000 variable overhead

Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $126,000, and budgeted variable overhead costs were $60,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for (1) materials and (2) labor.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Which of the materials and labor variances should be investigated if management considers a variance of more than 5% from standard to be significant?

crone labs performs steroid testing services to high schools colleges 543272

Crone Labs performs steroid testing services to high schools, colleges, and universities. Because the company deals solely with educational institutions, the price of each test is strictly regulated. Therefore, the costs incurred must be carefully monitored and controlled. Shown below are the standard costs for a typical test.

Direct materials (1 petri dish @ $2 per dish)

$2.00

Direct labor (0.5 hours @ $20 per hour)

10

Variable overhead (0.5 hours @ $8 per hour)

4

Fixed overhead (0.5 hours @ $4 per hour)

2

Total standard cost per test

$18.00

The lab does not maintain an inventory of petri dishes. Therefore, the dishes purchased each month are used that month. Actual activity for the month of May 2012, when 2,500 tests were conducted, resulted in the following.

Direct materials (2,530 dishes)

$5,313

Direct labor (1,240 hours)

26,040

Variable overhead

10,100

Fixed overhead

5,700

Monthly budgeted fixed overhead is $6,000. Revenues for the month were $58,000, and selling and administrative expenses were $2,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the price and quantity variances for direct materials and direct labor.

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

(c) Prepare an income statement for management.

(d) Provide possible explanations for each unfavorable variance.

glassmaster co is organized as two divisions and one subsidiary 543281

Glassmaster Co. is organized as two divisions and one subsidiary. One division focuses on the manufacture of filaments such as fishing line and sewing thread; the other division manufactures antennas and specialty fiberglass products. Its subsidiary manufactures flexible steel wire controls and molded control panels. The annual report of Glassmaster provides the following information.

GLASSMASTER COMPANY

Management Discussion

Gross profit margins for the year improved to 20.9% of sales compared to last year’s 18.5%. All operations reported improved margins due in large part to improved operating efficiencies as a result of cost reduction measures implemented during the second and third quarters of the fiscal year and increased manufacturing throughout due to higher unit volume sales. Contributing to the improved margins was a favorable materials price variance due to competitive pricing by suppliers as a result of soft demand for petrochemical-based products. This favorable variance is temporary and will begin to reverse itself as stronger worldwide demand for commodity products improves in tandem with the economy. Partially offsetting these positive effects on profit margins were competitive pressures on sales prices of certain product lines. The company responded with pricing strategies designed to maintain and/or increase market share.

Instructions

(a) Is it apparent from the information whether Glassmaster utilizes standard costs?

(b) Do you think the price variance experienced should lead to changes in standard costs for the next fiscal year?

winters inc has been manufacturing its own shades for its table lamps 543340

Winters Inc. has been manufacturing its own shades for its table lamps. The company is currently operating at 100% of capacity. Variable manufacturing overhead is charged to production at the rate of 50% of direct labor cost. The direct materials and direct labor cost per unit to make the lamp shades are $4.00 and $6.00, respectively. Normal production is 40,000 table lamps per year. A supplier offers to make the lamp shades at a price of $13.50 per unit. If Winters Inc. accepts the supplier’s offer, all variable manufacturing costs will be eliminated, but the $40,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead currently being charged to the lamp shades will have to be absorbed by other products.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the incremental analysis for the decision to make or buy the lamp shades.

(b) Should Winters Inc. buy the lamp shades?

(c) Would your answer be different in (b) if the productive capacity released

by not making the lamp shades could be used to produce income of $35,000?

angie donohue recently opened her own basket weaving studio she sells finished baske 543341

Angie Donohue recently opened her own basket weaving studio. She sells finished baskets in addition to the raw materials needed by customers to weave baskets of their own. Angie has put together a variety of raw material kits, each including materials at various stages of completion. Unfortunately, owing to space limitations, Angie is unable to carry all varieties of kits originally assembled and must choose between two basic packages. The basic introductory kit includes undyed, uncut reeds (with dye included) for weaving one basket. This basic package costs Angie $12 and sells for $27. The second kit, called Stage 2, includes cut reeds that have already been dyed. With this kit the customer need only soak the reeds and weave the basket. Angie is able to produce the second kit by using the basic materials included in the first kit and adding one hour of her own time (to produce two kits), which she values at $18 per hour. Because she is more efficient at cutting and dying reeds than her average customer, Angie is able to make two kits of the dyed reeds, in one hour, from one kit of undyed reeds. The kit of dyed and cut reeds sells for $33.

Instructions

Determine whether Angie’s basket weaving shop should carry the basic introductory kit with undyed and uncut reeds, or the Stage 2 kit with reeds already dyed and cut. Prepare an incremental analysis to support your answer.

brown enterprises uses a word processing computer to handle its sales invoices 543343

Brown Enterprises uses a word processing computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.

Current Machine

New Machine

Original purchase cost

$15,000

$21,000

Accumulated depreciation

6,000

Estimated operating costs

24,000

20,000

Useful life

5 years

5 years

If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $5,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after 5 years.

Instructions

Should the current machine be replaced? (Ignore the time value of money.)

buford manufacturing company is considering three new projects 543348

Buford Manufacturing Company is considering three new projects, each requiring an equipment investment of $22,000. Each project will last for 3 years and produce the following cash inflows.

Year

AA

BB

CC

1

$7,000

$9,500

$13,000

2

9,000

9,500

10,000

3

15,000

9,500

9,000

Total

$31,000

$28,500

$32,000

The equipment’s salvage value is zero. Buford uses straight-line depreciation. Buford will not accept any project with a payback period over 2 years. Buford’s minimum required rate of return is 12%.

Instructions

(a) Compute each project’s payback period, indicating the most desirable project and the least desirable project using this method. (Round to two decimals.)

(b) Compute the net present value of each project. Does your evaluation change? (Round to nearest dollar.)

house company is considering three capital expenditure projects 543350

House Company is considering three capital expenditure projects. Relevant data for the projects are as follows.

Annual

Life of

Project

Investment

Income

Project

22A

$240,000

$13,300

6 years

23A

270,000

21,000

9 years

24A

288,000

20,000

8 years

Annual income is constant over the life of the project. Each project is expected to have zero salvage value at the end of the project. House Company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

Instructions

(a) Determine the internal rate of return for each project. Round the internal rate of return factor to three decimals.

(b) If House Company’s minimum required rate of return is 11%, which projects are acceptable?

pfeifer corporation is considering investing in two different projects 543351

Pfeifer Corporation is considering investing in two different projects. It could invest in both, neither, or just one of the projects. The forecasts for the projects are as follows.

Project A

Project B

Capital investment

$200,000

$300,000

Net annual cash flows

$50,000

$65,000

Length of project

5 years

7 years

The minimum rate of return acceptable to Pfeifer is 10%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the net present value of the two projects.

(b) What capital budgeting decision should Pfeifer make?

(c) Project A could be modified. By spending $20,000 more initially, the net annual cash flows could be increased by $10,000 per year. Would this change Pfeifer’s decision?

marin company is currently producing 16 000 units per month which is 80 543352

1A Marin Company is currently producing 16,000 units per month, which is 80% of its production capacity. Variable manufacturing costs are currently $8.00 per unit. Fixed manufacturing costs are $56,000 per month. Marin pays a 9% sales commission to its sales people, has $30,000 in fixed administrative expenses per month, and is averaging $320,000 in sales per month. A special order received from a foreign company would enable Marin Company to operate at 100% capacity. The foreign company offered to pay 75% of Marin’s current selling price per unit. If the order is accepted, Marin will have to spend an extra $2.00 per unit to package the product for overseas shipping. Also, Marin Company would need to lease a new stamping machine to imprint the foreign company’s logo on the product, at a monthly cost of $2,500. The special order would require a sales commission of $3,500.

Instructions

(a) Compute the number of units involved in the special order and the foreign company’s offered price per unit.

(b) What is the manufacturing cost of producing one unit of Marin’s product for regular customers?

(c) Prepare an incremental analysis of the special order. Should management accept the order?

(d) What is the lowest price that Marin could accept for the special order to earn net income of $1.20 per unit?

(e) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

sanchez corporation is considering three long term capital investment proposals 543355

Sanchez Corporation is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Relevant data on each project are as follows.

Project

Brown

Red

Yellow

Capital investment

$190,000

$220,000

$250,000

Annual net income:

Year 1

25,000

20,000

26,000

2

16,000

20,000

24,000

3

13,000

20,000

23,000

4

10,000

20,000

17,000

5

8,000

20,000

20,000

Total

$72,000

$100,000

$110,000

Salvage value is expected to be zero at the end of each project. Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method. The company’s minimum rate of return is the company’s cost of capital which is 12%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to one decimal.)

(b) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?

stratton testing is considering investing in a new testing device it has two option 543357

Stratton Testing is considering investing in a new testing device. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 5 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were provided. The company’s cost of capital is 9%.

Option A

Option B

Initial cost

$90,000

$170,000

Net annual cash flows

$20,000

$32,000

Cost to rebuild (end of year 5)

$26,500

$0

Salvage value

$0

$27,500

Estimated useful life

8 years

8 years

Instructions

(a) Compute the (1) net present value, and (2) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint: To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)

(b) Which option should be accepted?

sadler corporation is considering three long term capital investment proposals 543361

Sadler Corporation is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Each investment has a useful life of 5 years. Relevant data on each project are as follows.

Project Ric

Project Rac

Project Roe

Capital investment

$140,000

$150,000

$180,000

Annual net income:

Year 1

13,000

18,000

27,000

2

13,000

17,000

22,000

3

13,000

13,000

16,000

4

13,000

12,000

13,000

5

13,000

9,000

12,000

Total

$65,000

$69,000

$90,000

Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method with no salvage value. The company’s cost of capital is 15%.

Instructions

(a) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to one decimal.)

(b) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?

paula woodward is the head of the information systems department at moreno manufactu 542878

Continuing Professional Education

Paula Woodward is the head of the Information Systems Department at Moreno Manufacturing Company. Roland Randolph, the company’s controller, is meeting with her to discuss changes in data gathering that relate to the company’s new flexible manufacturing system. Woodward opens the conversation by saying, “Roland, the old job order costing methods just will not work with the new flexible manufacturing system. The new system is based on continuous product flow, not batch processing. We need to change to a process costing system for both data gathering and product costing. Otherwise, our product costs will be way off, and it will affect our pricing decisions. I found out about the need for this change at a professional seminar I attended last month. You should have been there with me.” Randolph responds, “Paula, who is the accounting expert here? I know what product costing approach is best for this situation. Job order costing has provided accurate information for this product line for more than 15 years. Why should we change just because we’ve purchased a new machine? We’ve purchased several machines for this line over the years. And as for your seminar, I don’t need to learn about costing methods. I was exposed to them all when I studied management accounting back in the late 1970s.”

Is Randolph’s behavior ethical? If not, what has he done wrong? What can Woodward do if Randolph continues to refuse to update the product costing system?

ready tire corporation makes several lines of automobile and truck tires 542879

Analysis of Product Cost

Ready Tire Corporation makes several lines of automobile and truck tires. The company operates in a competitive marketplace, so it relies heavily on cost data from its FIFO-based process costing system. It uses that information to set prices for its most competitive tires. The company’s radial line has lost some of its market share during each of the past four years. Management believes that price breaks allowed by the company’s three biggest competitors are the main reason for the decline in sales.

The company controller, Sara Birdsong, has been asked to review the product costing information that supports pricing decisions on the radial line. In preparing her report, she collected the following data for last year, the most recent full year of operations:

Units

Dollars

Equivalent units

Direct materials

84,200

Conversion costs

82,800

Manufacturing costs:

Direct materials

Direct labor

Overhead

$1,978,700

Direct materials

800,400

Unit cost data:

Conversion costs

1,600,800

Work in process inventory:

23.50

Beginning (70% complete)

4,200

29.00

Ending (30% complete)

3,800

Units started and completed last year totaled 80,400. Attached to the beginning Work in Process Inventory account were direct materials costs of $123,660 and conversion costs of $57,010. Birdsong found that little spoilage had occurred. The proper cost allowance for spoilage was included in the predetermined overhead rate of $2 per direct labor dollar. The review of direct labor cost revealed, however, that $90,500 had been charged twice to the production account, the second time in error. This resulted in overly high overhead costs being charged to the production account. The radial has been selling for $92 per tire. This price was based on last year’s unit data plus a 75 percent markup to cover operating costs and profit. The company’s three main competitors have been charging about $87 for a tire of comparable quality. The company’s process costing system adds all direct materials at the beginning of the process, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process.

1. Identify what inaccuracies in costs, inventories, and selling prices result from

the company’s cost-charging error.

2. Prepare a revised process cost report for last year. Round unit costs to two decimal places. Round total costs to whole dollars.

3. What should have been the minimum selling price per tire this year?

4. Suggest ways of preventing such errors in the future.

for the past four years three companies have dominated the soft drink industry holdi 542880

Setting a Selling Price

For the past four years, three companies have dominated the soft drink industry, holding a combined 85 percent of market share. Wonder Cola, Inc., ranks second nationally in soft drink sales. Its management is thinking about introducing a new low-calorie drink called Null Cola. Wonder soft drinks are processed in a single department. All ingredients are added at the beginning of the process. At the end of the process, the beverage is poured into bottles that cost $0.24 per case produced. Direct labor and overhead costs are applied uniformly throughout the process. Corporate controller Adam Daneen believes that costs for the new cola will be very much like those for the company’s Cola Plus drink. Last year, he collected the following data about Cola Plus:

Units*

Costs

Work in process inventory

January 1†

2,200

Direct materials costs

Conversion costs

$ 2,080

December 31‡

2,000

620

Direct materials costs

1,880

Conversion costs

600

Units started during year

458,500

Costs for year

Liquid materials added

430,990

Direct labor and overhead

229,400

Bottles

110,068

The company’s variable general administrative and selling costs are $1.10 per unit. Fixed administrative and selling costs are assigned to products at the rate of $0.50 per unit. Each of Wonder Cola’s two main competitors is already marketing a diet cola. Company A’s product sells for $4.10 per unit; Company B’s, for $4.05. All costs are expected to increase by 10 percent in the next three years. Wonder Cola tries to earn a profit of at least 15 percent on the total unit cost.

1. What factors should Wonder Cola, Inc., consider in setting a unit selling price for a case of Null Cola?

2. Using the FIFO costing method, compute (a) equivalent units for direct materials, cases of bottles, and conversion costs; (b) the total production cost per unit; and (c) the total cost per unit of Cola Plus for the year.

3. What is the expected unit cost of Null Cola for the year?

4. Recommend a unit selling price range for Null Cola, and give the reason(s) for your choice.

you are the production manager for great grain corporation a manufacturer of four ce 542881

Using the Process Costing System

You are the production manager for Great Grain Corporation, a manufacturer of four cereal products. The company’s best-selling product is Smackaroos, a sugar-coated puffed rice cereal. Yesterday, Clark Winslow, the controller, reported that the production cost for each box of Smackaroos has increased approximately 22 percent in the last four months. Because the company is unable to increase the selling price for a box of Smackaroos, the increased production costs will reduce profits significantly.

Today, you received a memo from Gilbert Rom, the company president, asking you to review your production process to identify inefficiencies or waste that can be eliminated. Once you have completed your analysis, you are to write a memo presenting your findings and suggesting ways to reduce or eliminate the problems. The president will use your information during a meeting with the top management team in ten days.

You are aware of previous problems in the Baking Department and the Packaging Department. Winslow has provided you with process cost reports for the two departments. He has also given you the following detailed summary of the cost per equivalent unit for a box of Smackaroos cereal:

April

May

June

July

Baking Department

Direct materials

$1.25

$1.26

$1.24

$1.25

Direct labor

0.50

0.61

0.85

0.90

Overhead

0.25

0.31

0.34

0.40

Department totals

$2.00

$2.18

$2.43

$2.55

Packaging Department

Direct materials

$0.35

$0.34

$0.33

$0.33

Direct labor

0.05

0.05

0.04

0.06

Overhead

0.10

0.16

0.15

0.12

Department totals

$0.50

$0.55

$0.52

$0.51

Total cost per equivalent unit

$2.50

$2.73

$2.95

$3.06

1. In preparation for writing your memo, answer the following questions: a. For whom are you preparing the memo? Does this affect the length of the memo? Explain.

b. Why are you preparing the memo?

c. What actions should you take to gather information for the memo? What information is needed? Is the information that Winslow provided sufficient for analysis and reporting?

d. When is the memo due? What can be done to provide accurate, reliable, and timely information?

2. Based on your analysis of the information that Winslow provided, where is the main problem in the production process?

3. Prepare an outline of the sections you would want in your memo.

the reports that follow are from a department in an insurance company 542893

Management Reports

The reports that follow are from a department in an insurance company. Which report would be used for financial purposes, and which would be used for activity-based decision making? Why?

Salaries

$1,400

Enter claims into system

$2,000

Equipment

1,200

Analyze claims

1,000

Travel expenses

8,000

Suspend claims

1,500

Supplies

300

Receive inquiries

1,500

Use and occupancy

3,000

Resolve problems

400

Process batches

3,000

Determine eligibility

4,000

Make copies

200

Write correspondence

100

Attend training

200

Total

$13,900

Total

$13,900

libbel enterprises has been in business for 30 years 542895

Value Analysis

Libbel Enterprises has been in business for 30 years. Last year, the company purchased Chemcraft Laboratory and entered the chemical processing business. Libbel’s controller prepared a process value analysis of the new operation and identified the following activities:

New product research

Product sales

Product bottling process

Design testing

Packaging process

Product warranty work

Materials storage

Materials inspection

Product engineering

Product curing

New product

Purchasing of direct

process

marketing

materials

Product scheduling

Product inspection

Finished goods storage

Product spoilage

Product delivery

Cleanup of processing areas

Customer follow-up

Materials delivery

Product mixing process

Identify the value-adding activities in this list, and classify them into the activity areas of the value chain. Prepare a separate list of the non-value-adding activities.

copia electronics makes speaker systems its customers range from new hotels and rest 542897

The Cost Hierarchy

Copia Electronics makes speaker systems. Its customers range from new hotels and restaurants that need specifically designed sound systems to nationwide retail outlets that order large quantities of similar products. The following activities are part of the company’s operating process:

New retail product

Purchasing of

Assembly labor

design

materials

Assembly line setup

Retail product

Building repair

Building security

marketing

Retail sales commissions

Facility supervision

Unique system design

Bulk packing of

Unique system packaging

orders

Classify each activity as unit level (UL), batch level (BL), product level (PL), or facility level (FL).

lake corporation has received an order for handheld computers from union llc 542898

Bill of Activities

Lake Corporation has received an order for handheld computers from Union, LLC. A partially complete bill of activities for that order appears below. Fill in the missing data.

Activity

Activity Cost Rate

Cost Driver Level

Activity Cost

Unit level

Parts production

$50 per machine hour

200 machine hours

$ ?

Assembly

$20 per direct labor hour

100 direct labor hours

?

Packaging and shipping

$12.50 per unit

400 units

?

Batch level

Work cell setup

$100 per setup

16 setups

?

Product level

Product design

$60 per engineering hour

80 engineering hours

?

Product simulation

$80 per testing hour

30 testing hours

?

Facility level

Building occupancy

200% of assembly labor cost

?

?

Total activity costs

assigned to job

$ ?

Total job units

÷ 400

Activity costs per unit

(total activity costs÷ total units)

$ ?

Cost summary

Direct materials

$60,000

Purchased parts

80,000

Activity costs

?

Total cost of order

$ ?

Product unit cost (total cost ÷400 units)

$ ?

income statementangelo diaz has decided to go into business 542908

  • Angelo Diaz has decided to go into business selling colourful scarves which are popular among university students. He will operate the business out of a flea market, mostly on weekends. He is trying to get himself organised for the start of the first quarter. In order to do so, he will have to prepare a few budgets. Use the follow?ing information to help him achieve his goal.

Angelo estimates expected sales for January to be £800, February £1200, March £2000 and April £3,000. Gross profit ratio is 0.4. Sixty percent of the next month’s sales should be kept in ending finished goods inventory.

Angelo has decided to pay himself a monthly salary of £150. He will pay his best friend £60 to help him with miscellaneous errands. He estimates that general operating costs will be £130 monthly. In addition, since his cousin is the owner of the flea market, he will only pay £100 per month in rent. Upgrading of the space will cost £500, of which £200 will be paid in January and £300 in February. All other costs must be paid for as incurred. He will begin January with £400 in the bank. Forty percent of sales are paid for in cash. The rest is put on credit: 5% of credit sales will not be received, 30% will be paid in the month of sale and 10% of those who pay in the month of sale will qualify for a 20% discount. Another 20% will be received the month following the sale and 5% the second month following the sale.

Thirty percent of the payments for merchandise are made in the month of purchase and the remaining 70% are made in the month following the purchase.

Interest is charged at a rate of 24% per year and payments of interest only are due at the end of each quarter. All loans are borrowed at the very beginning of the month and payments are made at the very end of the month. Angelo must maintain a minimum cash balance of £1,000.

Complete the following:

Help Angelo by completing the following:

  1. Prepare a schedule of cash receipts for the first quarter.
  2. Prepare a schedule of inventory purchases for the first quarter.
  3. Prepare a schedule of cash disbursements for the first quarter.
  4. Prepare a cash budget for January and February.
  5. How much interest is owed on February 28?

Hand-in Assignment Question

The income statement for ABC’s 2012 fiscal year is presented below. ABC manufactures one type of street lamp used on municipal roads.

Sales 2,400,000
Variable cost of goods sold 1,680,000
Variable sales commissions 120,000
Contribution margin 600,000
Selling expense 105,000
Sales commissions expense 48,000
Administrative expense 212,000
Net income 235,000

Variable costs per unit are £6.

Complete the following:

Please note:Round all answers to two decimal places.

  1. Calculate break-even in pounds.
  2. Calculate break-even in units.
  3. Calculate break-even in pounds if the sales price increases by 10% and fixed costs increase by £12,000.
  4. Calculate break-even in pounds if total sales increases by 10% and fixed costs increase by 10%.
  5. Calculate sales (in pounds) to achieve £600,000 after tax. (Note:Thetax rate is 40%.)

Attachments:

accounting 543009

our task is to prepare an income statement and a balance sheet ingood formatafter adjusting for the two errors below.

  • A physical count of inventory indicates $70,500 on hand.
  • There’s a check for $5,000 from a customer that has not been recorded in the working trial balance. The sale was never recorded in the first place, so the transaction relating to this sale is missing.

In addition:

  1. Describe the effect of the errors on the income statement and balance sheet.
  2. Is this company profitable? How do you determine whether or not this is the case?
  3. Is the company in a solid financial position? (Comment on balance sheet.)
Document Preview:

12/31/2012 14500 14500 18000 18000 41500 41500 10000 10000 18250 18250 402610 402610 325000 325000 1500 1500 80500 80500 105000 105000 5600 5600 4500 4500 90000 90000 6500 6500 22000 22000 156400 245500 619400 619400 61940 61940 7400 7400 995300 995300 465000 465000 530300 619400 Costa Company Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order) Accounts Working Trial Balance Balance Sheet Income Statement Debit Credit Accounts payable Accounts receivable Cash Common stock Depreciation expense Cost of goods sold Equipment (net of depreciation) Insurance Inventory Long-term debt Marketing Misc. expenses Paid-in capital Property taxes Rent Retained earnings Revenues Salaries Utilities Total   Net Income $89,100

Attachments:

cost accounting problems name type your name to sign date 543102

I solemnly affirm that my answers to this examination/problem set are based on my solo effort. I understand that receiving or providing help from/to others or discussing the exam or comparing answers with others and reference to any material that is beyond what is permitted by the instructor is a violation of the University of Pittsburgh code of ethics.

Name: type your name to sign.

Date:

Problem 1

“Blast it!” said David Wilson, president of Teledex Company. “We’ve just lost the bid on the Koopers job by $2,000. It seems we’re either too high to get the job or too low to make any money on half the jobs we bid.”

Teledex Company manufactures products to customers’ specifications and operates a job-order costing system. Manufacturing overhead cost is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. The following estimates were made at the beginning of the year:

Department


_______________________________________________________________________

Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant

Direct labor $200,000 $100,000 $300,000 $600,000

Manufacturing overhead $350,000 $400,000 $ 90,000 $840,000

Jobs require varying amounts of work in the three departments. The Koopers job, for example, would have required manufacturing costs in the three departments as follows:

Department

______________________________________________________________________

Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant

Direct materials $3,000 $200 $1,400 $4,600

Direct labor $2,800 $500 $6,200 $9,500

Manufacturing overhead ? ? ? ?

The company uses a plantwide overhead rate to apply manufacturing overhead cost to jobs.

REQUIRED:

1. Assuming use of a plantwide overhead rate:

a. Compute the rate for the current year.

b. Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would have been applied to the

Koopers job.

2. Suppose that instead of using a plantwide overhead rate, the company had used a separate

predetermined overhead rate in each department. Under these conditions:

a. Compute the rate for each department for the current year.

b. Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would have been applied to the

Koopers job.

3. Explain the difference between the manufacturing overhead that would have been applied to

the Koopers job using the plantwide rate in question 1 (b) above and using the departmental

rates in question 2 (b).

4. Assume that it is customary in the industry to bid jobs at 150% of total manufacturing cost

(direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead). What was the company’s bid price on

the Koopers job? What would the bid price have been if departmental overhead rates had been

used to apply overhead cost?

5. At the end of the year, the company assembled the following
actual cost data relating to all

jobs worked on during the year.

Department

_______________________________________________________________________

Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant

Direct materials $190,000 $ 16,000 $114,000 $320,000

Direct labor $210,000 $108,000 $262,000 $580,000

Manufacturing overhead $360,000 $420,000 $ 84,000 $864,000

Compute the under- or overapplied overhead for the year (a) assuming that a plantwide

overhead rate is used, and (b) assuming that departmental overhead rates are used.

Problem 2

Selected ledger accounts of Moore Company are given below for the just completed year:

Raw Materials Manufacturing Overhead

_________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________

Bal. 1/1 15,000 Credits ? Debits 230,000 Credits ?

Debits 120,000

————————————————————————————–

Bal. 12/31 25,000

Work in Process Factory Wages Payable

_________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________

Bal. 1/1 20,000 Credits 470,000 Debits 185,000 Bal. 1/1 9,000

Direct materials 90,000 Credits 180,000

Direct labor 150,000 ————————————————————————————-

Overhead 240,000 Bal. 12/31 4,000

——————————————————–

Bal. 12/31 ?

Finished Goods Cost of Goods Sold

________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________

Bal. l/1 40,000 Credits ? Debits ?

Debits ?

————————————————————————————

Bal. 12/31 60,000

REQUIRED:

1. What was the cost of raw materials put into production during the year?

2. How much of the materials in (1) above consisted of indirect materials?

3. How much of the factory labor cost for the year consisted of indirect labor?

4. What was the cost of goods manufactured for the year?

5. What was the cost of goods sold for the year (before considering under- or overapplied

overhead)?

6. If overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor cost, what rate was in effect

during the year?

7. Was manufacturing overhead under- or overapplied? By how much?

8. Compute the ending balance in the Work in Process inventory account. Assume that this

balance consists entirely of goods started during the year. If $8,000 of this balance is direct

labor cost, how much of it is direct materials cost? Manufacturing overhead cost?

Problem 3

Neptune Company produces toys and other items for use in beach and resort areas. A small, inflatable toy has come onto the market that the company is anxious to produce and sell. The new toy will sell for $3 per unit. Enough capacity exists in the company’s plant to produce 16,000 units of the toy each month. Variable costs to manufacture and sell one unit would be $1.25, and fixed costs associated with the toy would total $35,000 per month.

The company’s Marketing Department predicts that demand for the new toy will exceed the 16,000 units that the company is able to produce. Additional manufacturing space can be rented from another company at a fixed cost of $1,000 per month. Variable costs in the rented facility would total $1.40 per unit, due to somewhat less efficient operations than in the main plant.

REQUIRED:

1. Compute the monthly break-even point for the new toy in units and in total sales dollars.

Show all computations in good form.

2. How many units must be sold each month to make a monthly profit of $12,000?

3. If the sales manager receives a bonus of 10 cents for each unit sold in excess of the break-

even point, how many units must be sold each month to earn a return of 25% on the monthly

investment in fixed costs?

Problem 4

Consider the decision by National Airlines, Inc. regarding the number of flights to operate per day on the air shuttle route between New York and Boston. Its advertising, personnel, and other expenditures to support the operation in New York and Boston amount to $24,000 per day. Flying crew, fuel, and other flight-related expenditures amount to $3,000 per round-trip flight. Landing and airport gate fees are $1,800 per round-trip flight. In addition, ground support personnel cost $2,000 per round-trip flight as company policy seeks to maintain quality service even as volume increases. National pays a commission of 5% to travel agents on a round-trip fare of $200 per passenger. A full flight carries 100 passengers.

  1. How many flights in a day must National Airlines operate to make 25% profit margin if it expects the average load factor (number of passengers to the seating capacity) to be 70% per flight?
  1. Suppose the load factor for National Airlines is not expected to equal 70% for each flight. Instead, the load factor is expected to be 90% for the first round-trip flight of the day and is expected to decline by 10% for each additional round-trip flight introduced in the same day. How many round-trip flights per day should National Airlines operate to maximize profit?

Hint: This problem is analogous to a bank/retailer deciding on the number of branches/stores in a geographical area. You need to think about how total revenue, total costs and profits change with the addition of flights. You can either use Excel to create a scenario analysis or use the incremental cost versus incremental revenue approach or formulate this as a profit maximization problem and solve for the optimum.

Problem 5

Gallatin Carpet Cleaning is a small, family-owned business operating out of Bozeman, Montana. For its services, the company has always charged a flat fee per hundred square feet of carpet cleaned. The current fee is $28 per hundred square feet. However, there is some question about whether the company is actually making any money on jobs for some customers—particularly those located on remote ranches that require considerable travel time. The owner’s daughter, home for the summer from college, has suggested investigating this question using activity-based costing. After some discussion, a simple system consisting of four activity cost pools seemed to be adequate. The activity cost pools and their activity measures appear below:

Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Activity for the Year

Cleaning carpets Square feet cleaned (00s) 20,000 hundred square feet

Travel to jobs Miles driven 60,000 miles

Job support Number of jobs 2,000 jobs

Other (costs of idle capacity and

organization-sustaining costs) None Not applicable

The total cost of operating the company for the year is $430,000, which includes the following costs:

Wages $150,000

Cleaning supplies 40,000

Cleaning equipment depreciation 20,000

Vehicle expenses 80,000

Office expenses 60,000

President’s compensation 80,000

Total cost $430,000

Resource consumption is distributed across the activities as follows:

Distribution of Resource Consumption Across Activities

Cleaning Travel Job

Carpets to Jobs Support Other Total

Wages 70% 20% 0% 10% 100%

Cleaning supplies 100% 0% 0% 0% 100%

Cleaning equipment depreciation 80% 0% 0% 20% 100%

Vehicle expenses 0% 60% 0% 40% 100%

Office expenses 0% 0% 45% 55% 100%

President’s compensation 0% 0% 40% 60% 100%

Job support consists of receiving calls from potential customers at the home office, scheduling jobs, billing, resolving issues, and so on.

REQUIRED:

1. Prepare the first-stage allocation of costs to the activity cost pools.

2. Compute the activity rates for the activity cost pools.

3. The company recently completed a 5 hundred square foot carpet-cleaning job at the Flying N

ranch—a 75-mile round-trip journey from the company’s offices in Bozeman. Compute the

cost of this job using the activity-based costing system.

4. The revenue from the Flying N ranch was $140 (5 hundred square feet @ $28 per hundred

square feet). Prepare a report showing the margin from this job.

5. What do you conclude concerning the profitability of the Flying N ranch job? Explain.

6. What advice would you give the president concerning pricing jobs in the future?

Problem 6 Barney Toy Company manufactures large and small stuffed animals. It has a long-term contract with a large chain of discount stores to sell 3000 large and 6000 small stuffed animals each month. The following cost information is available for large and small stuffed animals: Item Large Small Price per unit $32 $21

Variable costs per units:

Direct material $12 $10

Direct labor 6 3

Support 2 1

Fixed mfg. costs per unit 3 3

Fixed S&A cost per unit 4 6

Total unit costs $27 $23

Total monthly demand

(inclusive of long-term contract) 15,000 25,000

Production occurs in batches of 100 large or 200 small stuffed animals. Each batch takes a total of 100 labor hours to manufacture. The monthly capacity of 30,000 labor hours cannot be increased for at least a year.

Required

  1. Determine which size is more profitable to produce. How many units should Barney produce of each size?

Because of an unexpected high demand for stuffed dinosaurs, the discount store chain has requested an additional order of 5000 large stuffed dinosaurs. It is willing to pay $37 for this special order.

b. What is the opportunity cost for this special order? Should the order be accepted? Show calculations and explain.

c. Now assume that the company can increase the capacity by making its employees work overtime. What is the maximum overtime premium that can be paid to the workers if the special order is accepted.

Attachments:

feldkamp services inc is trying to establish the standard labour cost of a typical o 543237

Feldkamp Services, Inc. is trying to establish the standard labour cost of a typical oil change. The following data have been collected from time and motion studies conducted over the past month.

Actual time spent on the oil change

1.0 hour

Hourly wage rate

$10

Payroll taxes

10% of wage rate

Setup and downtime

10% of actual labour time

Cleanup and rest periods

30% of actual labour time

Fringe benefits

25% of wage rate

Instructions

(a) Determine the standard direct labour hours per oil change.

(b) Determine the standard direct labour hourly rate.

(c) Determine the standard direct labour cost per oil change.

(d) If an oil change took 1.5 hours at the standard hourly rate, what was the direct labour quantity variance?

compute the total price and quantity variances for materials and labour 543241

The following direct materials and direct labour data pertain to the operations of Engles Manufacturing Company for the month of August.

Costs

Quantities

Actual labour rate

$13 per hour

Actual hours incurred and used

4,200 hours

Actual materials price

$128 per ton

Actual quantity of materials purchased and used

1,225 tons

Standard labour rate

$12 per hour

Standard hours used

4,300 hours

Standard materials price

$130 per ton

Standard quantity of materials used

1,200 tons

Instructions

(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labour.

(b) Provide two possible explanations for each of the unfavorable variances calculated above, and suggest where responsibility for the unfavorable result might be placed.

how many pounds of raw material were purchased and used during the period 543242

You have been given the following information about the production of Adler Co., and are asked to provide the plant manager with information for a meeting with the vice president of operations.

Standard Cost Card

Direct materials (6 pounds at $3 per pound)

$18.00

Direct labour (0.8 hours at $5)

4

Variable overhead (0.8 hours at $3 per hour)

2.4

Fixed overhead (0.8 hours at $7 per hour)

5.6

$30.00

The following is a variance report for the most recent period of operations.

Variances

Costs

Total Standard Cost

Price

Quantity

Direct materials

$405,000

$6,900 F

$9,000 U

Direct labour

90,000

4,850 U

7,000 U

Instructions

(a) How many units were produced during the period?

(b) How many pounds of raw material were purchased and used during the period?

(c) What was the actual cost per pound of raw materials?

(d) How many actual direct labour hours were worked during the period?

(e) What was the actual rate paid per direct labour hour?

during march 2012 mcguire tool amp die company worked on four jobs a review of direc 543243

During March 2012, McGuire Tool & Die Company worked on four jobs. A review of direct labour costs reveals the following summary data.

Actual

Standard

Job
Number

Hours

Costs

Hours

Costs

Total
Variance

A257

220

$4,400

225

$4,500

$ 100 F

A258

450

9,900

430

8,600

1,300 U

A259

300

6,150

300

6,000

150 U

A260

115

2,070

110

2,200

130 F

Total variance

$1,220 U

Analysis reveals that Job A257 was a repeat job. Job A258 was a rush order that required overtime work at premium rates of pay. Job A259 required a more experienced replacement worker on one shift. Work on Job A260 was done for one day by a new trainee when a regular worker was absent.

Instructions

Prepare a report for the plant supervisor on direct labour cost variances for March. The report should have columns for (1) Job No., (2) Actual Hours, (3) Standard Hours, (4) Quantity Variance, (5) Actual Rate, (6) Standard Rate, (7) Price Variance, and (8) Explanation.

horak company produces one product a putter called go putter horak uses a standard c 543245

Horak Company produces one product, a putter called GO-Putter. Horak uses a standard cost system and determines that it should take one hour of direct labour to produce one GO-Putter. The normal production capacity for this putter is 100,000 units per year. The total budgeted overhead at normal capacity is $800,000 comprised of $200,000 of variable costs and $600,000 of fixed costs. Horak applies overhead on the basis of direct labour hours. During the current year, Horak produced 90,000 putters, worked 94,000 direct labour hours, and incurred variable overhead costs of $186,000 and fixed overhead costs of $600,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the predetermined variable overhead rate and the predetermined fixed overhead rate.

(b) Compute the applied overhead for Horak for the year.

(c) Compute the total overhead variance.

shatner landscaping plants grass seed as the basic landscaping for business campuses 543247

Shatner Landscaping plants grass seed as the basic landscaping for business campuses. During a recent month the company worked on three projects (Remington, Chang, and Wyco). The company is interested in controlling the material costs, namely the grass seed, for these plantings projects. In order to provide management with useful cost control information, the company uses standard costs and prepares monthly variance reports. Analysis reveals that the purchasing agent mistakenly purchased poor-quality seed for the Remington project. The Chang project, however, received higher-than standard-quality seed that was on sale. The Wyco project received standard-quality seed; however, the price had increased and a new employee was used to spread the seed.

Shown below are quantity and cost data for each project.

Actual

Standard

Project

Quantity

Costs

Quantity

Costs

Total
Variance

Remington

500 lbs.

$1,175

460 lbs.

$1,150

$ 25 U

Chang

400

960

410

1,025

65 F

Wyco

500

1,300

480

1,200

100 U

Total variance

$ 60 U

Instructions

(a) Prepare a variance report for the purchasing department with the following columns:

(1) Project, (2) Actual pounds purchased, (3) Actual price, (4) Standard price, (5) Price variance, and (6) Explanation.

(b) Prepare a variance report for the production department with the following columns:

(1) Project, (2) Actual pounds, (3) Standard pounds, (4) Standard price, (5) Quantity variance, and (6) Explanation.

barney corporation prepared the following variance report 543248

Barney Corporation prepared the following variance report.

BARNEY CORPORATION
Variance Report—Purchasing Department
For the Week Ended January 9, 2013

Type of

Quantity

Actual

Standard

Price

Materials

Purchased

Price

Price

Variance

Explanation

Rogue11

? lbs.

$5.20

$5.00

$5,200 ?

Price increase

Storm17

7,000 oz.

?

3.25

1,050 U

Rush order

Beast29

22,000 units

0.45

?

440 F

Bought larger quantity

Instructions

Fill in the appropriate amounts or letters for the question marks in the report.

carlton company uses a standard cost accounting system during january the company re 543249

Carlton Company uses a standard cost accounting system. During January, the company reported the following manufacturing variances.

Materials price variance

$1,250 U

Labour quantity variance

$725 U

Materials quantity variance

700 F

Overhead variance

800 U

Labour price variance

525 U

In addition, 8,000 units of product were sold at $8.00 per unit. Each unit sold had a standard cost of $6.00. Selling and administrative expenses were $6,000 for the month.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement for management for the month ended January 31, 2012.

the following is a list of terms related to performance evaluation 543250

The following is a list of terms related to performance evaluation.

(1) Balanced scorecard

(2) Variance

(3) Learning and growth perspective

(4) Nonfinancial measures

(5) Customer perspective

(6) Internal process perspective

(7) Ideal standards

(8) Normal standards

Instructions

Match each of the following descriptions with one of the terms above.

(a) The difference between total actual costs and total standard costs.

(b) An efficient level of performance that is attainable under expected operating conditions.

(c) An approach that incorporates financial and nonfinancial measures in an integrated system that links performance measurement and a company’s strategic goals.

(d) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate how well a company develops and retains its employees.

(e) An evaluation tool that is not based on dollars.

(f) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate the company from the perspective of those people who buy and use its products or services.

(g) An optimum level of performance under perfect operating conditions.

(h) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate the efficiency and effectiveness of the company’s value chain.

jordan smith the president of eagle manufacturing wants to improve the quality of th 542836

Product Costing Systems and Nonfinancial Data

Jordan Smith, the president of Eagle Manufacturing, wants to improve the quality of the company’s operations and products. She believes waste exists in the design and manufacture of standard engine parts. To begin the improvement process, she has asked you to (1) identify the sources of such waste, (2) develop performance measures to account for the waste, and (3) estimate the current costs associated with the waste. She has asked you to submit a memo of your findings within two weeks so that she can begin strategic planning to revise the price at which Eagle sells engine parts to Cherokee.

You have identified two sources of costly waste. The Production Department is redoing work that was not done correctly the first time, and the Engineering Design Department is redesigning products that were not initially designed to customer specifications. Having improper designs has caused the company to buy parts that are not used in production. You have also obtained the following information from the product costing system:

Direct labor costs

$673,402

Engineering design costs

124,709

Indirect labor costs

67,200

Depreciation on production equipment

84,300

Supervisors’ salaries

98,340

Direct materials costs

432,223

Indirect materials costs

44,332

1. In preparation for writing your memo, answer the following questions: a. For whom are you preparing the memo? What is the appropriate length of the memo?

b. Why are you preparing the memo?

c. What information is needed for the memo? Where can you get this information? What performance measure would you suggest for each activity? Is the accounting information sufficient for your memo?

d. When is the memo due? What can be done to provide accurate and timely information?

2. Prepare an outline of the sections you would want to include in your memo.

kevin rogers the production manager of stitts metal products company entered the off 542838

Costing Procedures and Ethics

Kevin Rogers, the production manager of Stitts Metal Products Company, entered the office of controller Ed Harris and asked, “Ed, what gives here? I was charged for 330 direct labor hours on Job AD22, and my records show that we spent only 290 hours on that job. That 40-hour difference caused the total cost of direct labor and overhead for the job to increase by over $5,500. Are my records wrong, or was there an error in the direct labor assigned to the job?”

Harris replied, “Don’t worry about it, Kevin. This job won’t be used in your quarterly performance evaluation. Job AD22 was a federal government job, a cost-plus contract, so the more costs we assign to it, the more profit we make. We decided to add a few hours to the job in case there is some follow-up work to do. You know how fussy the feds are.” What should Kevin Rogers do? Discuss Ed Harris’s costing procedure.

software development companies frequently have a problem 542839

Role of Cost Information in Software Development

Software development companies frequently have a problem: When is “good enough” good enough? How many hours should be devoted to developing a new product? The industry’s rule of thumb is that developing and shipping new software takes six to nine months. To be the first to market, a company must develop and ship products much more quickly than the industry norm. One performance measure that is used to answer the “good enough” question is a calculation based on the economic value (not cost) of what a company’s developers create. The computation takes the estimated current market valuation of a firm and divides it by the number of product developers in the firm, to arrive at the market value created per developer. Some companies refine this calculation further to determine the value that each developer creates per workday. One company has estimated this value to be $10,000. Thus, for one software development company, “good enough” focuses on whether a new product’s potential justifies an investment of time by someone who is worth $10,000 per day.

The salary cost of the company’s developers is not used in the “good enough” calculation. Why is that cost not relevant?

your team selected a cookie recipe for your company 542840

Cookie Company (Continuing Case)

your team selected a cookie recipe for your company. In this chapter, your team will use that recipe to bake a batch of cookies, collect cost and time performance data related to the baking, create a marketing display for your company, and vote for the class’s favorite cookie during an in-class cookie taste test. The goal of the taste test is to have your team’s product voted the “best in class.” One rule of the contest is that you may not vote for your own team’s product.

1.Design a job measurement document that includes at least the following measures: cost per cookie; number of cookies produced (= number meeting specs + number rejected+ number sampled for quality control +unexplained differences); size of cookies before baking; size of cookies after baking; and total throughput time (=mix time + [bake time for one cookie sheet ×number of cookie sheets processed] + packaging time +downtime +cleanup time).

2. Design a job order cost card for your company that resembles one of those displayed in this chapter.

3. Using the recipe your team selected and assigning duties as described in the last chapter, bake a batch of cookies, and complete the job measurement document and job order cost card.

• Assume an overhead rate of $2 for every $1 of direct material cost.

• Assign direct labor cost for each production task based on the hourly rate or a monthly salary previously determined by your team.

4. Create a marketing display for your cookie product, and bring it to class on the day of the taste test. The marketing display should include 20 cookies on a plate or napkin and a poster that displays your company’s name and mission statement, cookie recipe, job measurement document, and job order cost card.

5. During class, each student should look at all the marketing displays, taste 2 or 3 cookies and, on a ballot provided by your instructor, rank taste test results by giving 1 to the best cookie tasted, 2 to the next best, and so on. Students must sign their ballots before they turn them in to the instructor. (Remember, you cannot cast a vote for your own team’s entry.) Your instructor will tabulate the ballots and announce the winning team.

blue blaze adds direct materials at the beginning of its production process and adds 542844

Equivalent Production: FIFO Costing Method

Blue Blaze adds direct materials at the beginning of its production process and adds conversion costs uniformly throughout the process. Given the following information from Blue Blaze’s records for July and using Steps 1 and 2 of the FIFO costing method, compute the equivalent units of production:

Units in beginning inventory

3,000

Units started during the period

17,000

Units partially completed

2,500

Percentage of completion of ending

100% for direct materials;

work in process inventory

70% for conversion costs

Percentage of completion of beginning

100% for direct materials;

inventory

40% for conversion costs

tom rsquo s bakery makes a variety of cakes cookies and pies for distribution to fiv 542852

Use of Process Costing Information

Tom’s Bakery makes a variety of cakes, cookies, and pies for distribution to five major chains of grocery stores in the area. The company uses a standard manufacturing process for all items except special-order cakes. It currently uses a process costing system. Tom, the owner of the company, has some urgent questions, which are listed at the top of the next page. Which of these questions can be answered using information from a process costing system? Which can be best answered using information from a job order costing system? Explain your answers.

1. How much does it cost to make one chocolate cheesecake?

2. Did the cost of making special-order cakes exceed the cost budgeted for this month?

3. What is the value of the pie inventory at the end of June?

4. What were the costs of the cookies sold during June?

5. At what price should Tom’s Bakery sell its famous brownies to the grocery store chains?

6. Were the planned production costs of $3,000 for making pies in June exceeded?

gilbert inc which uses a process costing system makes a chemical used as a food pres 542853

Work in Process Inventory Accounts in Process Costing Systems

Gilbert, Inc., which uses a process costing system, makes a chemical used as a food preservative. The manufacturing process involves Departments A and B. The company had the following total costs and unit costs for completed production last month, when it manufactured 10,000 pounds of the chemical. Neither Department A nor Department B had any beginning or ending work in process inventories.

Total Cost

Unit Cost

Department A

Direct materials

$10,000

$1.00

Direct labor

2,600

0.26

Overhead

1,300

0.13

Total costs

$13,900

$1.39

Department B

Direct materials

$ 3,000

$0.30

Direct labor

700

0.07

Overhead

1,000

0.10

Total costs

$ 4,700

$0.47

Totals

$18,600

$1.86

1. How many Work in Process Inventory accounts would Gilbert use?

2. What dollar amount of the chemical’s production cost was transferred from Department A to Department B last month?

3. What dollar amount was transferred from Department B to the Finished Goods Inventory account?

4. What dollar amount is useful in determining a selling price for 1 pound of the chemical?

mcquary stone company produces bricks 542854

Equivalent Production: FIFO Costing Method

McQuary Stone Company produces bricks. Although the company has been in operation for only 12 months, it already enjoys a good reputation. During its first 12 months, it put 600,000 bricks into production and completed and transferred 586,000 bricks to finished goods inventory. The remaining bricks were still in process at the end of the year and were 60 percent complete.

The company’s process costing system adds all direct materials costs at the beginning of the production process; conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. From this information, compute the equivalent units of production for direct materials and conversion costs for the company’s first year, which ended December 31. Use the FIFO costing method.

the bakery produces tea cakes it uses a process costing system 542859

Assigning Costs: FIFO Costing Method

The Bakery produces tea cakes. It uses a process costing system. In March, its beginning inventory was 450 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 10 percent complete for conversion costs. The cost of beginning inventory was $655. Units started and completed during the month totaled 14,200. Ending inventory was 410 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 70 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs per equivalent unit for March were $1.40 for direct materials costs and $0.80 for conversion costs.

From this information, compute the cost of goods transferred to the Finished Goods Inventory account, the cost remaining in the Work in Process Inventory account, and the total costs to be accounted for. Use the FIFO costing method.

toy country corporation produces children rsquo s toys using a liquid plastic formul 542860

Process Cost Report: FIFO Costing Method

Toy Country Corporation produces children’s toys using a liquid plastic formula and a continuous production process. In the company’s toy truck work cell, the plastic is heated and fed into a molding machine. The molded toys are then cooled and trimmed and sent to the packaging work cell. All direct material are added at the beginning of the process. In November, the beginning work in process inventory was 420 units, which were 40 percent complete; the ending balance was 400 units, which were 70 percent complete.

During November, 15,000 units were started into production. The Work in Process Inventory account had a beginning balance of $937 for direct materials costs and $370 for conversion costs. In the course of the month, $35,300 of direct materials were added to the process, and $31,760 of conversion costs were assigned to the work cell. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report that computes the equivalent units for November, the product unit cost for the toys, and the ending balance in the Work in Process Inventory account.

lightning industries specializes in making flash a high moisture low alkaline wax us 542866

Process Costing: FIFO Costing and Average Costing Methods

Lightning Industries specializes in making Flash, a high-moisture, low-alkaline wax used to protect and preserve skis. The company began producing a new, improved brand of Flash on January 1. Materials are introduced at the beginning of the production process. During January, 15,300 pounds were used at a cost of $46,665. Direct labor of $17,136 and overhead costs of $25,704 were incurred uniformly throughout the month. By January 31, 13,600 pounds of Flash had been completed and transferred to the finished goods inventory (1 pound of input equals 1 pound of output). Since no spoilage occurred, the leftover materials remained in production and were 40 percent complete on average.

Required

1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for January.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

3. Repeat requirements 1 and 2 using the average costing method.

liquid extracts company produces a line of fruit extracts for home use in making win 542867

Process Costing: FIFO Costing Method

Liquid Extracts Company produces a line of fruit extracts for home use in making wine, jams and jellies, pies, and meat sauces. Fruits enter the production process in pounds; the product emerges in quarts (1 pound of input equals 1 quart of output). On May 31, 4,250 units were in process. All direct materials had been added, and the units were 70 percent complete for conversion costs. Direct materials costs of $4,607 and conversion costs of $3,535 were attached to the units in beginning work in process inventory. During June, 61,300 pounds of fruit were added at a cost of $71,108. Direct labor for the month totaled $19,760, and overhead costs applied were $31,375. On June 30, 3,400 units remained in process. All direct materials for these units had been added, and 50 percent of conversion costs had been incurred.

Required

1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for June.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

lid corporation produces a line of beverage lids 542869

Process Costing: Average Costing Method and Two Time Periods

Lid Corporation produces a line of beverage lids. The production process has been automated, so the product can now be produced in one operation rather than in the three operations that were needed before the company purchased the automated machinery. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. Operating data for May and June are as follows:

May

June

Beginning work in process inventory

Units (May: 40% complete)

220,000

?

Direct materials

$ 3,440

$ 400

Conversion costs

$ 6,480

$ 420

Production during the month

Units started

24,000,000

31,000,000

Direct materials

$45,000

$93,200

Conversion costs

$66,000

$92,796

Ending work in process inventory

Units (May: 70% complete; June:

60% complete)

200,000

320,000

1. Using the average costing method, prepare process cost reports for May and June. (Round unit costs to three decimal places; round all other costs to the nearest dollar.)

2. From the information in the process cost report for May, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

3. Compare the product costing results for June with the results for May. What is the most significant change? What are some of the possible causes of this change?

hurricane products inc makes high vitamin calorie packed wafers that are popular amo 542870

Process Costing: Average Costing Method

Hurricane Products, Inc., makes high-vitamin, calorie-packed wafers that are popular among professional athletes because they supply quick energy. The company produces the wafers in a continuous flow, and it uses a process costing system based on the average costing method. It recently purchased several automated machines so that the wafers can be produced in a single department. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. The costs for the machine operators’ labor and production-related overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the process. In February, the company put a total of 231,200 liters of direct materials into production at a cost of $294,780. Two liters of direct materials were used to produce one unit of output (one unit 144 wafers). Direct labor costs for February were $60,530, and overhead was $181,590. The beginning work in process inventory for February was 14,000 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials and 20 percent complete for conversion costs. The total cost of those units was $55,000, $48,660 of which was assigned to the cost of direct materials. The ending work in process inventory of 12,000 units was fully complete for direct materials but only 30 percent complete for conversion costs.

Required

1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for February.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

the company produces the wafers in a continuous flow and it uses a process costing s 542871

Process Costing: Average Costing Method

Hurricane Products, Inc., makes high-vitamin, calorie-packed wafers that are popular among professional athletes because they supply quick energy. The company produces the wafers in a continuous flow, and it uses a process costing system based on the average costing method. It recently purchased several automated machines so that the wafers can be produced in a single department. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. The costs for the machine operators’ labor and production-related overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the process. In February, the company put a total of 231,200 liters of direct materials into production at a cost of $294,780. Two liters of direct materials were used to produce one unit of output (one unit 144 wafers). Direct labor costs for February were $60,530, and overhead was $181,590. The beginning work in process inventory for February was 14,000 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials and 20 percent complete for conversion costs. The total cost of those units was $55,000, $48,660 of which was assigned to the cost of direct materials. The ending work in process inventory of 12,000 units was fully complete for direct materials but only 30 percent complete for conversion costs.

Required

1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for February.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

sunshine soda company manufactures and sells several different kinds of soft drinks 542872

Process Costing: FIFO Costing and Average Costing Methods

Sunshine Soda Company manufactures and sells several different kinds of soft drinks. Direct materials (sugar syrup and artificial flavor) are added at the beginning of production in the Mixing Department. Direct labor and overhead costs are applied to products throughout the process. For August, beginning inventory for the citrus flavor was 2,400 gallons, 80 percent complete. Ending inventory was 3,600 gallons, 50 percent complete. Production data show 240,000 gallons started during August. A total of 238,800 gallons was completed and transferred to the Bottling Department. Beginning inventory costs were $600 for direct materials and $676 for conversion costs. Current period costs were $57,600 for direct materials and $83,538 for conversion costs.

Required

1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for the Mixing Department for August.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

3. Repeat requirements 1 and 2 using the average costing method.

canned fruits and vegetables are the main products made by good foods inc 542873

Process Costing: FIFO Costing Method

Canned fruits and vegetables are the main products made by Good Foods, Inc. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the Mixing Department’s process. When the ingredients have been mixed, they go to the Cooking Department. There the mixture is heated to 100° Celsius and simmered for 20 minutes. When cooled, the mixture goes to the Canning Department for final processing. Throughout the operations, direct labor and overhead costs are incurred uniformly. No direct materials are added in the Cooking Department. Cost data and other information for the Mixing Department for January are as follows:

Direct Materials

Conversion Costs

Production Cost Data

Mixing Department

Beginning inventory

$ 28,560

$ 5,230

Current period costs

450,000

181,200

Work in process inventory

Beginning inventory

Mixing Department (40% complete)

5,000 liters

Ending inventory

Mixing Department (60% complete)

6,000 liters

Unit production data

Units started during January

90,000 liters

Units transferred out during January

89,000 liters

Assume that no spoilage or evaporation loss took place during January.

Required

1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for the Mixing Department for January.

2. Explain how the analysis for the Cooking Department will differ from the analysis for the Mixing Department.

honey dews company produces organic honey which it sells to health food stores and r 542874

Process Costing: One Process and Two Time Periods—FIFO Costing Method

Honey Dews Company produces organic honey, which it sells to health food stores and restaurants. The company owns thousands of beehives. No direct materials other than honey are used. The production operation is a simple one. Impure honey is added at the beginning of the process and flows through a series of filterings, leading to a pure finished product. Costs of labor and overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the filtering process. Production data for April and May are as follows:

April

May

Beginning work in process inventory

Units (liters)

7,100

12,400

Direct materials

$ 2,480

?*

Conversion costs

$ 5,110

?*

Production during the period

Units started (liters)

288,000

310,000

Direct materials

$100,800

$117,800

Conversion costs

$251,550

$277,281

Ending work in process inventory

Units (liters)

12,400

16,900

The beginning work in process inventory for April was 80 percent complete for conversion costs, and ending work in process inventory was 20 percent complete. The ending work in process inventory for May was 30 percent complete for conversion costs. Assume that there was no loss from spoilage or evaporation.

Required

1. Using the FIFO method, prepare a process cost report for April.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

3. Repeat requirements 1 and 2 for May.

carton corporation produces a line of beverage cartons 542875

Process Costing: Average Costing Method and Two Time Periods

Carton Corporation produces a line of beverage cartons. The production process has been automated, so the product can now be produced in one operation rather than in the three operations that were needed before the company purchased the automated machinery. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. Operating data for July and August are as follows:

July

August

Beginning work in process inventory

Units (July: 20% complete)

20,000

?

Direct materials

$20,000

$6,000

Conversion costs

$30,000

$6,000

Production during the month

Units started

70,000

90,000

Direct materials

$34,000

$59,000

Conversion costs

$96,000

$130,800

Ending work in process inventory

Units (July: 40% complete; August:

60% complete)

10,000

25,000

1. Using the average costing method, prepare process cost reports for July and August. (Round unit costs to two decimal places; round all other costs to the nearest dollar.)

2. From the information in the process cost report for July, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

3. Compare the product costing results for August with the results for July. What is the most significant change? What are some of the possible causes of this change?

many of the products made by wireless plastics company are standard telephone replac 542876

Process Costing: Average Costing Method

Many of the products made by Wireless Plastics Company are standard telephone replacement parts that require long production runs and are produced continuously. A unit for Wireless Plastics is a box of parts. During April, direct materials for 25,250 units were put into production. Total cost of direct materials used during April was $2,273,000. Direct labor costs totaled $1,135,000, and overhead was $2,043,000. The beginning work in process inventory contained 1,600 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 60 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs attached to the units in beginning inventory totaled $232,515, which included $143,500 of direct materials costs. At the end of the month, 1,250 units were in ending inventory; all direct materials had been added, and the units were 70 percent complete for conversion costs.

Required

1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for April.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.

partial operating data for charing cross company are presented below 542816

T Account Analysis with Unknowns

Partial operating data for Charing Cross Company are presented below. Charing Cross Company’s management has set the predetermined overhead rate for the current year at 80 percent of direct labor costs.

Account/Transaction

December

Beginning Materials Inventory

$ 42,000

Beginning Work in Process Inventory

66,000

Beginning Finished Goods Inventory

29,000

Direct materials used

168,000

Direct materials purchased

a

Direct labor costs

382,000

Overhead applied

b

Cost of units completed

c

Cost of Goods Sold

808,000

Ending Materials Inventory

38,000

Ending Work in Process Inventory

138,600

Ending Finished Goods Inventory

d

Using T accounts and the data provided, compute the unknown values. Show all your computations.

in january the cabinet company worked on six job orders for specialty kitchen cabine 542817

Job Order Cost Card and Computation of Product Unit Cost

Job Order Cost Card and Computation of Product Unit Cost

In January, the Cabinet Company worked on six job orders for specialty kitchen cabinets. It began Job A-62 for Zeke Cabinets, Inc., on January 10, 2011 and completed it on January 24, 2011. Partial data for Job A-62 are as follows:

Costs

Machine Hours Used

Direct materials

Cedar

$7,900

Pine

6,320

Hardware

2,930

Assembly supplies

988

Direct labor

Sawing

2,840

120

Shaping

2,200

220

Finishing

2,250

180

Assembly

2,890

50

The Cabinet Company produced a total of 34 cabinets for Job A-62. Its current predetermined overhead rate is $21.60 per machine hour. From the information given, prepare a job order cost card and compute the job order’s product unit cost. (Round to whole dollars.)

using job order costing determine the product unit cost based on the following costs 542818

Computation of Product Unit Cost

Using job order costing, determine the product unit cost based on the following costs incurred during March: liability insurance, manufacturing, $2,500; rent, sales office, $2,900; depreciation, manufacturing equipment, $6,100; direct materials, $32,650; indirect labor, manufacturing, $3,480;indirect materials, $1,080; heat, light, and power, manufacturing, $1,910; fire insurance, manufacturing, $2,600; depreciation, sales equipment, $4,250; rent, manufacturing, $3,850; direct labor, $18,420; manager’s salary, manufacturing, $3,100; president’s salary, $5,800; sales commissions, $8,250; and advertising expenses, $2,975. The Inspection Department reported that 48,800

good units were produced during March. Carry your answer to two decimal places.

wild things inc manufactures custom made stuffed animals last month the company prod 542819

Computation of Product Unit Cost

Wild Things, Inc., manufactures custom-made stuffed animals. Last month the company produced 4,540 stuffed bears with stethoscopes for the local children’s hospital to sell at a fund-raising event. Using job order costing, determine the product unit cost of a stuffed bear based on the following costs incurred during the month: manufacturing utilities, $500; depreciation on manufacturing equipment, $450; indirect materials, $300; direct materials, $1,300; indirect labor, $800; direct labor, $2,400; sales commissions, $3,000; president’s salary, $4,000; insurance on manufacturing plant, $600; advertising expense, $500; rent on manufacturing plant, $5,000; rent on sales office, $4,000; and legal expense, $250. Carry your answer to two decimal places.

arch corporation manufactures specialty lines of women rsquo s apparel 542820

Computation of Product Unit Cost

Computation of Product Unit Cost

Arch Corporation manufactures specialty lines of women’s apparel. During February, the company worked on three special orders: A-25, A-27, and B-14. Cost and production data for each order are as follows:

Job A-25

Job A-27

Job B-14

Direct materials

Fabric Q

$10,840

$12,980

$17,660

Fabric Z

11,400

12,200

13,440

Fabric YB

5,260

6,920

10,900

Direct labor

Garment maker

8,900

10,400

16,200

Layout

6,450

7,425

9,210

Packaging

3,950

4,875

6,090

Overhead

(120% of direct labor costs)

?

?

?

Number of units produced

700

775

1,482

1. Compute the total cost associated with each job. Show the subtotals for each cost category.

2. Compute the product unit cost for each job. (Round your computations to the nearest cent.)

a job order cost card for hal rsquo s computer services appears at the top of the ne 542821

Job Order Costing in a Service Organization

A job order cost card for Hal’s Computer Services appears at the top of the next page. Complete the missing information. The profit factor in the organization’s cost-plus contract is 30 percent of total cost.

Job Order Cost Card Hal’s Computer Services

Customer:

James Lowe

Job Order No.:

8-324

Contract Type:

Cost-Plus

Type of Service:

Software Installation and Internet Interfacing

Date of Completion:

October 6, 2011

Costs Charged to Job

Total Cost

Software installation services

Installation labor

$300

Service overhead (? % of installation labor costs)

?

Total

$450

Internet services

Internet labor

$200

Service overhead (20% of Internet labor costs)

40

Total

$ ?

Cost Summary to Date

Total Cost

Software installation services

$ ?

Internet services

?

Total

$ ?

Profit margin (30% of total cost)

?

Contract revenue

$ ?

a job order cost card for mini blinds by jenny appears below 542822

Job Order Costing in a Service Organization

A job order cost card for Mini blinds by Jenny appears below. Complete the missing information. The profit factor in the company’s cost-plus contract is 50 percent of total cost.

Job Order Cost Card Miniblinds by Jenny

Customer:

Carmen Sawyer

Job Order No.:

8-482

Contract Type:

Cost-Plus

Type of Service:

Miniblind Installation and Design

Date of Completion:

June 12, 2011

Costs Charged to Job

Total Cost

Installation services

Installation labor

$445

Service overhead (80% of installation labor costs)

?

Total

$?

Designer services

Designer labor

$200

Service overhead (? % of designer labor costs)

?

Total

$400

Cost Summary to Date

Total Cost

Installation services

$ ?

Designer services

?

Total

$ ?

Profit margin (50% of total cost)

?

Contract revenue

$ ?

personal shoppers inc relieves busy women executives of the stress of shopping for c 542823

Job Order Costing in a Service Organization

Personal Shoppers, Inc., relieves busy women executives of the stress of shopping for clothes by taking an inventory of a client’s current wardrobe and shopping for her needs for the next season or a special event. The company charges clients $30 per hour for the service plus the cost of the clothes purchased. It pays its employees various hourly wage rates.

During September, Personal Shoppers worked with three clients. It began Job 9-3, for Lucinda Map ley, on September 3, 2011 and completed the job on September 30, 2011. Using the partial data that follow, prepare the job order cost card. What amount of profit will Personal Shoppers make on this job?

Costs Charged to Job

Costs

Hours

Other

In-person consultation

Supplies

$ 30

Labor ($10 per hour)

4

Overhead (10% of in-person labor costs)

Shopping

Purchases

$560

Labor ($15 per hour)

8

Overhead (25% of shopping labor costs)

Telephone consultations

Cell phone calls ($1 per call)

6 calls

Labor ($6 per hour)

2

Overhead (50% of telephone labor costs)

flagstaff enterprises makes flagpoles 542824

T Account Analysis with Unknowns

Flagstaff Enterprises makes flagpoles. Dan Dal ripple, the company’s new controller, can find only the following partial information for the past two months:

Account/Transaction

May

June

Beginning Materials Inventory

$ 36,240

$ e

Beginning Work in Process Inventory

56,480

f

Beginning Finished Goods Inventory

44,260

g

Materials purchased

a

96,120

Direct materials requested

82,320

h

Direct labor costs

b

72,250

Overhead applied

53,200

i

Cost of units completed

c

221,400

Cost of Goods Sold

209,050

j

Ending Materials Inventory

38,910

41,950

Ending Work in Process Inventory

d

k

Ending Finished Goods Inventory

47,940

51,180

The current year’s predetermined overhead rate is 80 percent of direct labor cost.

Required

Using the data provided and T accounts, compute the unknown values.

purchased direct materials on account 215 400 542825

Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis

Par Carts, Inc., produces special-order golf carts, so Par Carts uses a job order costing system. Overhead is applied at the rate of 90 percent of direct labor cost. The following is a list of transactions for January, 2011:

Jan.

1 Purchased direct materials on account, $215,400.

2 Purchased indirect materials on account, $49,500.

4 Requested direct materials costing $193,200 (all used on Job X) and indirect materials costing $38,100 for production.

10 Paid the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,400; manufacturing rent, $3,800; and maintenance charges, $3,900.

15 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $120,000 (all for Job X); indirect labor, $60,620.

15 Applied overhead to production.

19 Purchased indirect materials costing $27,550 and direct materials costing $190,450 on account.

21 Requested direct materials costing $214,750 (Job X, $178,170; Job Y, $18,170; and Job Z, $18,410) and indirect materials costing $31,400 for production.

31 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $132,000 (Job X, $118,500; Job Y, $7,000; Job Z, $6,500); indirect labor, $62,240.

31 Applied overhead to production.

31 Completed and transferred Job X (375 carts) and Job Y (10 carts) to finished goods inventory; total cost was $855,990.

31 Shipped Job X to the customer; total production cost was $824,520 and sales price was $996,800.

31 Recorded these overhead costs (adjusting entries): prepaid insurance expired, $3,700; property taxes (payable at year end), $3,400; and depreciation–machinery, $15,500.

Required

1. Record the entries for all transactions in January using T accounts for the following: Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Prepaid Insurance, Accumulated Depreciation–Machinery, Accounts Payable, Payroll Payable, Property Taxes Payable, Sales, and Cost of Goods Sold. Use job order cost cards for Job X, Job Y, and Job Z. Determine the partial account balances. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Also assume that when the payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account.

2. Compute the amount of under applied or over applied overhead as of January 31, 2011 and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account.

3. Why should the Overhead account’s under applied or over applied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?

the inventory balances of princess designs a manufacturer of high quality children r 542826

Job Order Cost Flow

On May 31, the inventory balances of Princess Designs, a manufacturer of high-quality children’s clothing, were as follows: Materials Inventory, $21,360; Work in Process Inventory, $15,112; and Finished Goods Inventory, $17,120. Job order cost cards for jobs in process as of June 30 had these totals:

Job No.

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Overhead

24-A

$1,596

$1,290

$1,677

24-B

1,492

1,380

1,794

24-C

1,984

1,760

2,288

24-D

1,608

1,540

2,002

The predetermined overhead rate is 130 percent of direct labor costs. Materials purchased and received in June were as follows:

June 4

$33,120

June 16

28,600

June 22

31,920

Direct labor costs for June were as follows:

$23,680

June 29 payroll

25,960

Direct materials requested by production during June were as follows:

June 6

$37,240

June 23

38,960

On June 30, Princess Designs sold on account finished goods with a 75 percent markup over cost for $320,000.

Required

1. Using T accounts for Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Accounts Receivable, Payroll Payable, Sales, and Cost of Goods Sold, reconstruct the transactions in June.

2. Compute the cost of units completed during the month.

3. What was the total cost of goods sold during June?

4. Determine the ending inventory balances.

5. Jobs 24-A and 24-C were completed during the first week of July. No additional materials costs were incurred, but Job 24-A required $960 more of direct labor, and Job 24-C needed an additional $1,610 of direct labor. Job 24-A was composed of 1,200 pairs of trousers; Job 24-C, of 950 shirts. Compute the product unit cost for each job. (Round your answers to two decimal places.)

riley amp associates is a cpa firm located in clinton kansas 542827

Job Order Costing in a Service Organization

Riley & Associates is a CPA firm located in Clinton, Kansas. The firm deals primarily in tax and audit work. For billing of major audit engagements, it uses cost-plus contracts, and its profit factor is 25 percent of total job cost. Costs are accumulated for three primary activities: preliminary analysis, fieldwork, and report development. Current service overhead rates based on billable hours are preliminary analysis, $12 per hour; fieldwork, $20 per hour; and report development, $16 per hour. Supplies are treated as direct materials and are traceable to each engagement. Audits for three clients—Fulcrum, Inc., Rainy Day Bakeries, and Our Place Restaurants—are currently in process. During March, 2011 costs related to these projects were as follows:

Fulcrum, Inc.

Rainy Day Bakeries

Our Place Restaurants

Beginning Balances

Preliminary analysis

$1,160

$2,670

$2,150

Fieldwork

710

1,980

3,460

Report development

1,020

420

Costs During March

Preliminary analysis

Supplies

$ 710

$ 430

$ 200

Labor: hours

60

10

12

dollars

$1,200

$ 200

$ 240

Fieldwork

Supplies

$ 450

$1,120

$ 890

Labor: hours

120

240

230

dollars

$4,800

$9,600

$9,200

Report development

Supplies

$ 150

$ 430

$ 390

Labor: hours

30

160

140

dollars

$ 900

$4,800

$4,200

Required

1. Using the format shown in this chapter’s Review Problem, create the job order cost card for each of the three audit engagements.

2. Riley & Associates will complete the audits of Rainy Day Bakeries and Our Place Restaurants by the end of March. What will the billing amount for each of those audit engagements be?

3. What is the March ending balance of Riley & Associates’ Audit in Process account?

peruga engineering company specializes in designing automated characters and display 542828

Job Order Costing in a Service Organization

Peruga Engineering Company specializes in designing automated characters and displays for theme parks. It uses cost-plus profit contracts, and its profit factor is 30 percent of total cost. Peruga uses a job order costing system to track the costs of developing each job. Costs are accumulated for three primary activities: bid and proposal, design, and prototype development. Current service overhead rates based on engineering hours are as follows: bid and proposal, $18 per hour; design, $22 per hour; and prototype development, $20 per hour. Supplies are treated as direct materials, traceable to each job. Peruga worked on three jobs, P-12, P-15, and P-19, during January, 2011. The following table shows the costs for those jobs:

P-12

P-15

P-19

Beginning Balances

Bid and proposal

$2,460

$2,290

$ 940

Design

1,910

460

Prototype development

2,410

1,680

Costs During January

Bid and proposal

Supplies

$ —

$ 280

$2,300

Labor: hours

12

$ 20

68

dollars

$ 192

$ 320

$1,088

Design

Supplies

$ 400

$460

$ 290

Labor: hours

64

42

26

dollars

$1,280

$ 840

$ 520

Prototype development

Supplies

$6,744

$7,216

$ 2,400

Labor: hours

120

130

25

dollars

$2,880

$3,120

$ 600

Required

1. Using the format in the answer to requirement 1 of this chapter’s Review Problem, create the job order cost card for each of the three jobs.

2. Peruga completed Jobs P-12 and P-15, and the customers approved the prototype products. Customer A plans to produce 12 special characters using the design and specifications created by Job P-12. Customer B plans to make 18 displays from the design developed by Job P-15. What dollar amount will each customer use as the cost of design for each of those products (i.e., what is the product unit cost for Jobs P-12 and P-15)? (Round to the nearest dollar.)

3. What is the January ending balance of Peruga’s Contract in Process account for the three jobs?

4. Rank the jobs in order from most costly to least costly based on each job’s total cost. From the rankings of cost, what observations can you make?

5. Speculate on the price that Peruga should charge for such jobs.

hard core enterprises makes peripheral equipment for computers 542829

T Account Analysis with Unknowns

Hard Core Enterprises makes peripheral equipment for computers. Emily Vit, the company’s new controller, can find only the following partial information for the past two months:

Account/Transaction

July

August

Beginning Materials Inventory

$ 52,000

$ e

Beginning Work in Process Inventory

24,000

f

Beginning Finished Goods Inventory

36,000

g

Materials purchased

a

31,000

Direct materials requested

77,000

h

Direct labor costs

b

44,000

Overhead applied

53,200

i

Cost of units completed

C

167,000

Cost of Goods Sold

188,000

j

Ending Materials Inventory

27,000

8,000

Ending Work in Process Inventory

D

k

Ending Finished Goods Inventory

12,000

19,000

The current year’s predetermined overhead rate is 110 percent of direct labor cost.

Required

Using the data provided and T accounts, compute the unknown values.

rhile industries inc produces colorful and stylish nursing uniforms duringseptember 542830

Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis

Rhile Industries, Inc., produces colorful and stylish nursing uniforms. DuringSeptember, 2011 Rhile Industries completed the following transactions:

Sept. 1 Purchased direct materials on account, $59,400.3 Requested direct materials costing $26,850 for production (allfor Job A).

4 Purchased indirect materials for cash, $22,830.

8 Issued checks for the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,310; manufacturing insurance, $1,925; and repairs, $4,640.

Sept. 10 Requested direct materials costing $29,510 (all used on Job A) and indirect materials costing $6,480 for production.

15 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $62,900 (all for Job A); indirect labor, $31,610; manufacturing supervision, $26,900; and sales commissions, $32,980.

15 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.

22 Paid the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,270; maintenance, $3,380; and rent, $3,250.

23 Recorded the purchase on account and receipt of $31,940 of direct materials and $9,260 of indirect materials.

27 Requested $28,870 of direct materials (Job A, $2,660; Job B, $8,400; Job C, $17,810) and $7,640 of indirect materials for production.

30 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $64,220 (Job A, $44,000; Job B, $9,000; Job C, $11,220); indirect labor, $30,290; manufacturing supervision, $28,520; and sales commissions, $36,200.

30 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.

30 Completed and transferred Job A (58,840 units) and Job B (3,525 units) to finished goods inventory; total cost was $322,400.

30 Shipped Job A to the customer; total production cost was $294,200, and sales price was $418,240.

30 Recorded the following adjusting entries: $2,680 for depreciation–manufacturing equipment; and $1,230 for property taxes, manufacturing, payable at month end.

Required

1. Record the entries for all Rhile’s transactions in September using T accounts for the following: Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Accumulated Depreciation–Manufacturing Equipment, Accounts Payable, Payroll Payable, Property Taxes Payable, Sales, Cost of Goods Sold, and Selling and Administrative Expenses. Use job order cost cards for Job A, Job B, and Job C. Determine the partial account balances. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Assume also that when payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account. (Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

2. Compute the amount of under applied or over applied overhead for September and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account.

3. Why should the Overhead account’s under applied or over applied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?

15 recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees 542831

Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis

Rhile Industries, Inc., produces colorful and stylish nursing uniforms. DuringSeptember, 2011 Rhile Industries completed the following transactions:

Sept. 1 Purchased direct materials on account, $59,400.3 Requested direct materials costing $26,850 for production (allfor Job A).

4 Purchased indirect materials for cash, $22,830.

8 Issued checks for the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,310; manufacturing insurance, $1,925; and repairs, $4,640.

Sept. 10 Requested direct materials costing $29,510 (all used on Job A) and indirect materials costing $6,480 for production.

15 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $62,900 (all for Job A); indirect labor, $31,610; manufacturing supervision, $26,900; and sales commissions, $32,980.

15 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.

22 Paid the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,270; maintenance, $3,380; and rent, $3,250.

23 Recorded the purchase on account and receipt of $31,940 of direct materials and $9,260 of indirect materials.

27 Requested $28,870 of direct materials (Job A, $2,660; Job B, $8,400; Job C, $17,810) and $7,640 of indirect materials for production.

30 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $64,220 (Job A, $44,000; Job B, $9,000; Job C, $11,220); indirect labor, $30,290; manufacturing supervision, $28,520; and sales commissions, $36,200.

30 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.

30 Completed and transferred Job A (58,840 units) and Job B (3,525 units) to finished goods inventory; total cost was $322,400.

30 Shipped Job A to the customer; total production cost was $294,200, and sales price was $418,240.

30 Recorded the following adjusting entries: $2,680 for depreciation–manufacturing equipment; and $1,230 for property taxes, manufacturing, payable at month end.

Required

1. Record the entries for all Rhile’s transactions in September using T accounts for the following: Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Accumulated Depreciation–Manufacturing Equipment, Accounts Payable, Payroll Payable, Property Taxes Payable, Sales, Cost of Goods Sold, and Selling and Administrative Expenses. Use job order cost cards for Job A, Job B, and Job C. Determine the partial account balances. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Assume also that when payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account. (Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

2. Compute the amount of under applied or over applied overhead for September and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account.

3. Why should the Overhead account’s under applied or over applied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?

laurence norton is the chief financial officer of rotham industries a company that m 542832

Job Order Cost Flow

Laurence Norton is the chief financial officer of Rotham Industries, a company that makes special-order sound systems for home theaters. His records for February revealed the following information:

Beginning inventory balances

Materials Inventory

$27,450

Work in Process Inventory

22,900

Finished Goods Inventory

19,200

Direct materials purchased and received

February 6

$ 7,200

February 12

8,110

February 24

5,890

Direct labor costs

February 14

$13,750

February 28

13,230

Direct materials requested for production

February 4

$ 9,080

February 13

5,940

February 25

7,600

Job order cost cards for jobs in process on February 28 had the following totals:

Job No.

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Overhead

AJ-10

$3,220

$1,810

$2,534

AJ-14

3,880

2,110

2,954

AJ-15

2,980

1,640

2,296

AJ-16

4,690

2,370

3,318

The predetermined overhead rate for the month was 140 percent of direct labor costs. Sales for February totaled $152,400, which represented a 70 percent markup over the cost of production.

Required

1. Using T accounts for Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Accounts Receivable, Payroll Payable, Sales, and Cost of Goods Sold, reconstruct the transactions in February.

2. Compute the cost of units completed during the month.

3. What was the total cost of goods sold during February?

4. Determine the ending balances in the inventory accounts.

5. During the first week of March, Jobs AJ-10 and AJ-14 were completed.

No additional direct materials costs were incurred, but Job AJ-10 needed $720 more of direct labor, and Job AJ-14 needed an additional $1,140 of direct labor. Job AJ-10 was 40 units; Job AJ-14, 55 units. Compute the product unit cost for each completed job (round to two decimal places).

locust lodge a restored 1920s lodge located in alabama caters and serves special eve 542833

Job Order Costing in a Service Organization

Locust Lodge, a restored 1920s lodge located in Alabama, caters and serves special events for businesses and social occasions. The company earns 60 percent of its revenue from weekly luncheon meetings of local clubs like Rotary. The remainder of its business comes from bookings for weddings and receptions.

Locust Lodge uses job order cost cards to keep track of the costs incurred. Job costs are separated into three categories: food and beverage, labor, and facility overhead. The facility overhead cost for weekly events is 10 percent of food and beverage costs, the facility overhead cost for sit-down receptions is 40 percent of food and beverage costs, and the facility overhead cost for stand-up receptions is 20 percent of food and beverage costs. Accumulated costs for three Locust Lodge clients in the current quarter are as follows:

Food and Beverage

Labor

Facility Overhead

Tuesday Club

Last month: $2,000

Last month: $200

Last month: ?

meetings

This month: $2,500

This month: $250

This month: ?

Doar-Turner

Last month: $3,000

Last month: $1,000

Last month: ?

engagement and

This month: $8,000

This month: $2,000

This month: ?

wedding parties

Both sit-down affairs

Reception for the

This month: $5,000

This month: $1,000

This month: ?

new president

A stand-up affair

The number of attendees served at Tuesday Club meetings is usually 200 per month. The Doar- Turner parties paid for 500 guests. The organizers of the reception for the new president paid for 1,000 invitees.

Required

1. Using the format shown in this chapter’s Review Problem, create a job order cost card for each of the three clients.

2. Calculate the total cost of each of the three jobs on its job order cost card.

3. Calculate the cost per attendee for each job.

4. Rank the jobs in order from most costly to least costly based on each job’s total cost and on the cost per attendee. From the rankings of cost, what observations are you able to make?

5. Speculate on the price that Locust Lodge should charge for such jobs.

refer to assignment p 5 in this chapter 542834

Job Order Costing in a Service Organization

Peruga Engineering Company needs to analyze its jobs in process during the month of January.

Required

1.Using Excel’s Chart Wizard and the job order cost cards that you created for Jobs P-12, P-15, and P-19, prepare a bar chart that compares the bid and proposal costs, design costs, and prototype development costs of the jobs. The suggested format to use for the information table necessary to complete the bar chart is as follows:

1

P-12

P-15

P-19

2

Bid and Proposal

3

Design

4

Prototype Development

5

Total Job Cost

2.Examine the chart you prepared in requirement 1. List some reasons for the differences between the costs of the various jobs.

eagle manufacturing supplies engine parts to cherokee cycle company a major u s manu 542835

Interpreting Nonfinancial Data

Eagle Manufacturing supplies engine parts to Cherokee Cycle Company, a major U.S. manufacturer of motorcycles. Like all of Cherokee’s suppliers, Eagle has always added a healthy profit margin to its cost when quoting selling prices to Cherokee. Recently, however, several companies have offered to supply engine parts to Cherokee for lower prices than Eagle has been charging.

Because Eagle Manufacturing wants to keep Cherokee Cycle Company’s business, a team of Eagle’s managers analyzed their company’s product costs and decided to make minor changes in the company’s manufacturing process. No new equipment was purchased, and no additional labor was required. Instead, the machines were rearranged, and some of the work was reassigned.

To monitor the effectiveness of the changes, Eagle introduced three new performance measures to its information system: inventory levels, lead time (total time required for a part to move through the production process), and productivity (number of parts manufactured per person per day). Eagle’s goal was to reduce the quantities of the first two performance measures and to increase the quantity of the third.

A section of a recent management report, shown below, summarizes the quantities for each performance measure before and after the changes in the manufacturing process

were made.

Measure

Before

After

Improvement

Inventory in dollars

$21,444

$10,772

50%

Lead time in minutes

17

11

35%

Productivity (parts per person

515

1,152

124%

per day)

1. Do you believe that Eagle improved the quality of its manufacturing process and the quality of its engine parts? Explain your answer.

2. Can Eagle lower its selling price to Cherokee? Explain your answer.

3. Did the introduction of the new measures affect the design of the product costing system? Explain your answer.

4. Do you believe that the new measures caused a change in Eagle’s cost per engine part? If so, how did they cause the change?

21 4 the service division of raney industries reported the following results for 201 542099

The service division of Raney Industries reported the following results for 2012.

Sales

$500,000

Variable costs

300,000

Controllable fixed costs

75,000

Average operating assets

450,000

Management is considering the following independent courses of action in 2013 in order to maximize the return on investment for this division.

1. Reduce average operating assets by $50,000, with no change in controllable margin.

2. Increase sales $100,000, with no change in the contribution margin percentage.

(a) Compute the controllable margin and the return on investment for 2012. (b) Compute the controllable margin and the expected return on investment for each proposed alternative.

the actual selling expenses incurred in march 2012 by dewitt company are as follows 542105

The actual selling expenses incurred in March 2012 by DeWitt Company are as follows.

Variable Expenses

Fixed Expenses

Sales commissions

$9,200

Sales salaries

$34,000

Advertising

7,000

Depreciation

7,000

Travel

5,100

Insurance

1,000

Delivery

3,500

Instructions

(a) Prepare a flexible budget performance report for March using the budget data in E21-5, assuming that March sales were $170,000. Expected and actual sales are the same.

(b) Prepare a flexible budget performance report, assuming that March sales were $180,000. Expected sales and actual sales are the same.

(c) Comment on the importance of using flexible budgets in evaluating theperformance of the sales manager.

kitchen help inc khi is a manufacturer of toaster ovens 542106

Kitchen Help Inc. (KHI) is a manufacturer of toaster ovens. To improve control over operations, the president of KHI wants to begin using a flexible budgeting system, rather than use only the current master budget. The following data are available for KHI’s expected costs at production levels of 90,000, 100,000, and 110,000 units.

Variable costs

Manufacturing

$6 per unit

Administrative

$3 per unit

Selling

$1 per unit

Fixed costs

Manufacturing

$150,000

Administrative

$80,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a flexible budget for each of the possible production levels: 90,000, 100,000, and 110,000 units.

(b) If KHI sells the toaster ovens for $15 each, how many units will it have to sell to make a profit of $250,000 before taxes?

what do you think of the dividend policies of the following companies 542208

What do you think of the dividend policies of the following companies.

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

2003

A

EPS

100

115

131

150

160

165

167

DPS

20

23

26

30

35

41

60

B

EPS

350

402

458

524

559

577

584

DPS

70

80

92

105

112

115

117

C

EPS

100

50

0

-50

-50

0

-50

DPS

5

5

5

5

5

5

6

D

EPS

500

520

550

600

500

400

300

DPS

100

80

70

100

120

150

200

calculate rowak s after tax roce and roe in each year what do you think 542210

Rowak plc is a Syldavian industrial company listed on the Klow Stock Exchange. The number of shares in issue has been constant over the period at one million. The corporate income tax rate is 33%.

(a) Calculate Rowak’s after-tax ROCE and ROE in each year. What do you think?

(b) What do you think of the fact that Rowak has never paid a dividend?

(c) In early September 2000, the company’s market capitalisation is 200 million, and its managers believe the shares are worth 150 each. Rowak’s chairman proposes to the board of directors that 50 million be devoted to buying back (and cancelling) outstanding shares. The programme is to be financed by borrowing at 10% before tax. The board of directors refuses. Why, in your opinion?

(d) In December 2002, the company’s market capitalisation has fallen to 90 million (still with the same number of shares in issue) and the estimated value of the share is 120. Rowak’s chairman puts forward his proposal again. What do you think now?

(figures in
millions)

Revenue

Net
profit

Pre-tax
interest
expenses

Book
value of
equity

Net
debt

Market
capitalisation

1997

170

8

9

50

60

55

1998

130

10

10

60

70

90

1999

170

11

10

71

75

152

2000

220

13

9

84

76

195

2001

230

13

7

97

70

210

2002

240

13

6

110

65

90

what were the firm s net incomes cash flows from operations and cash flow from asset 542624

Profits versus Cash Flow. Butterfly Tractors had $14 million in sales last year. Cost of goods sold was S8 million, depreciation expense was $2 million, interest payment on outstanding debt was $1 million, capital expenditures were $1 million, and the firn’s tax rate was 35 percent.

a. What were the firm’s net incomes? Cash flows from operations, and cash flow from assets?.

b. What would happen to net income and cash flows if depreciation were increased by $1 million? How do you explain the differing impact of depreciation on income versus cash flow?

c. Would you expect the change in income and cash flows from the change in depreciation to have a positive or negative impact on the firm’s stock price?

d. Now consider the impact on net income and cash flow if the firm s interest expense were $1I million higher. Why is this case different from part (b)?

the following information is from the trial balance of mills manufacturing company 542787

A Manufacturing Organization’s Balance Sheet

The following information is from the trial balance of Mills Manufacturing Company:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 34,000

Accounts Receivable

27,000

Materials Inventory, ending

31,000

Work in Process Inventory, ending

47,900

Finished Goods Inventory, ending

54,800

Production Supplies

5,700

Small Tools

9,330

Land

160,000

Factory Building

575,000

Accumulated Depreciation–Factory Building

$ 199,000

Factory Equipment

310,000

Accumulated Depreciation–

Factory Equipment

137,000

Patents

33,500

Accounts Payable

26,900

Insurance Premiums Payable

6,700

Income Taxes Payable

41,500

Mortgage Payable

343,000

Common Stock

200,000

Retained Earnings

334,130

$1,288,230

$1,288,230

Required

1. Manufacturing organizations use asset accounts that are not needed by retail organizations.

a. List the titles of the asset accounts that are specifically related to manufacturing organizations.

b. List the titles of the asset, liability, and equity accounts that you would see on the balance sheets of both manufacturing and retail organizations.

2. Assuming that the following information reflects the results of operations for the year, calculate the (a) gross margin, (b) cost of goods sold, (c) cost of goods available for sale, and (d) cost of goods manufactured:

Operating income

$138,130

Operating expenses

53,670

Sales

500,000

Finished goods inventory, beginning

50,900

3. Does Mills manufacturing use the periodic or perpetual inventory system?

carola industries inc manufactures discs for several of the leading recording studio 542788

Computation of Unit Cost

Carola Industries, Inc., manufactures discs for several of the leading recording studios in the United States and Europe. Department 60 is responsible for the electronic circuitry within each disc. Department 61 applies the plastic-like surface to the discs and packages them for shipment. Carola recently produced 4,000 discs for the Milo Company. In fulfilling this order, the departments incurred the following costs:

Department

60

61

Direct materials used

$29,440

$3,920

Direct labor

6,800

2,560

Overhead

7,360

4,800

1. Compute the unit cost for each department.

2. Compute the total unit cost for the Milo Company order.

3. The selling price for this order was $14 per unit. Was the selling price adequate? List the assumptions and/or computations upon which you based your answer. What suggestions would you make to Carola Industries’ management about the pricing of future orders?

4. Compute the prime costs and conversion costs per unit for each department.

byte computer company a manufacturing organization has just completed 542790

Allocation of Overhead

Byte Computer Company, a manufacturing organization, has just completed an order that Grater, Ltd., placed for 80 computers. Direct materials, purchased parts, and direct labor costs for the Grater order are as follows:

Cost of direct materials

$36,750.00

Direct labor hours

220

Cost of purchased parts

$21,300.00

Average direct labor pay rate

$15.25

Overhead costs were applied at a single, plant wide overhead rate of 270 percent of direct labor dollars.

Required

Using the traditional costing method, compute the total cost of the Grater order.

statement of cost of goods manufactured 542791

Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured

Dillo Vineyards, a large winery in Texas, produces a full line of varietal wines. The company, whose fiscal year begins on November 1, has just completed a record-breaking year. Its inventory account balances on October 31 of this year were Materials Inventory, $1,803,800; Work in Process Inventory, $2,764,500; and Finished Goods Inventory, $1,883,200. At the beginning of the year, the inventory account balances were Materials Inventory, $2,156,200; Work in Process Inventory, $3,371,000; and Finished Goods Inventory, $1,596,400.

During the fiscal year, the company’s purchases of direct materials totaled $6,750,000. Direct labor hours totaled 142,500, and the average labor rate was $8.20 per hour. The following overhead costs were incurred during the year: depreciation–plant and equipment, $685,600; indirect labor, $207,300; property tax, plant and equipment, $94,200; plant maintenance, $83,700; small tools, $42,400; utilities, $96,500; and employee benefits, $76,100.

Required

Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for the fiscal year ended October 31.

municipal hospital relies heavily on cost data to keep its pricing structures in lin 542792

Unit Costs in a Service Business

Municipal Hospital relies heavily on cost data to keep its pricing structures in line with those of its competitors. The hospital provides a wide range of services, including intensive care, intermediate care, and a neonatal nursery. Joo Young, the hospital’s controller, is concerned about the profits generated by the 30-bed intensive care unit (ICU), so she is reviewing current billing procedures for that unit. The focus of her analysis is the hospital’s billing per ICU patient day. This billing equals the per diem cost of intensive care plus a 40 percent markup to cover other operating costs and generate a profit. ICU patient costs include the following:

Doctors’ care

2 hours per day @ $360 per hour (actual)

Special nursing care

4 hours per day @ $85 per hour (actual)

Regular nursing care

24 hours per day @ $28 per hour (average)

Medications

$237 per day (average)

Medical supplies

$134 per day (average)

Room rental

$350 per day (average)

Food and services

$140 per day (average)

One other significant ICU cost is equipment, which is about $185,000 per room. Young has determined that the cost per patient day for the equipment is $179. Wiley Dix, the hospital director, has asked Young to compare the current billing procedure with another that uses industry averages to determine the billing per patient day.

Required

1. Compute the cost per patient per day.

2. Compute the billing per patient day using the hospital’s existing markup rate. (Round answers to whole dollars.)

3. Industry averages for markup rates are as follows:

Equipment

30%

Medications

50%

Doctors’ care

50

Medical supplies

50

Special nursing care

40

Room rental

30

Regular nursing care

50

Food and services

25

Using these rates, compute the billing per patient day. (Round answers to the nearest whole dollars.)

4. Based on your findings in requirements 2 and 3, which billing procedure would you recommend? Why?

land products inc uses a predetermined overhead rate in its production assembly and 542793

Allocation of Overhead

Land Products, Inc., uses a predetermined overhead rate in its production, assembly, and testing departments. One rate is used for the entire company; it is based on machine hours. The rate is determined by analyzing data from the previous year to determine the percentage change in costs. Thus this year’s overhead rate will be based on the percentage change multiplied by last year’s costs. Lise Jensen is about to compute the rate for this year using the following data:

Last Year’s Costs

Machine hours

41,800

Overhead costs

Indirect materials

$ 57,850

Indirect labor

25,440

Supervision

41,580

Utilities

11,280

Labor-related costs

9,020

Depreciation, factory

10,780

Depreciation, machinery

27,240

Property taxes

2,880

Insurance

1,920

Miscellaneous overhead

4,840

Total overhead

$192,830

This year the cost of indirect materials is expected to increase by 30 percent over the previous year. The cost of indirect labor, utilities, machinery depreciation, property taxes, and insurance is expected to increase by 20 percent over the previous year. All other expenses are expected to increase by 10 percent over the previous year. Machine hours for this year are estimated at 45,980.

Required

1. Compute the projected costs and the overhead rate for this year using the information about expected cost increases. (Round your answer to three decimal places.)

2. During this year, Lund Products completed the following jobs using the machine hours shown:

Job No.

Machine Hours

Job No.

Machine Hours

H–142

7,840

H–201

10,680

H–164

5,260

H–218

12,310

H–175

8,100

H–304

2,460

Determine the amount of overhead applied to each job. What was the total overhead applied during this year? (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)

3. Actual overhead costs for this year were $234,485. Was overhead under applied or over applied this year? By how much? Should the Cost of Goods Sold account be increased or decreased to reflect actual overhead costs?

4. At what point during this year was the overhead rate computed? When was it applied? Finally, when was under applied or over applied overhead determined and the Cost of Goods Sold account adjusted to reflect actual costs?

tarbox manufacturing company makes sheet metal products for heating and air conditio 542796

Financial Performance Measures

Financial Performance Measures

Tarbox Manufacturing Company makes sheet metal products for heating and air conditioning installations. Its statements of cost of goods manufactured and income statements for the last two years are presented below and on the next page.

Tarbox Manufacturing Company Statements of Cost of Goods
Manufactured For the Years
Ended December 31

This Year

This Year

Direct materials used

Materials inventory,

beginning

$ 91,240

$93,560

Direct materials purchased

987,640

959,940

(net)

Cost of direct materials

available for use

$1,078,880

$1,053,500

Less materials inventory,

ending

95,020

91,240

Cost of direct

materials used

$ 983,860

$ 962,260

Direct labor

571,410

579,720

Overhead

Indirect labor

$ 182,660

$171,980

Power

34,990

32,550

Insurance

22,430

18,530

Supervision

125,330

120,050

Depreciation

75,730

72,720

Other overhead costs

41,740

36,280

Total overhead

482,880

452,110

Total manufacturing costs

$2,038,150

$1,994,090

Add work in process

inventory, beginning

148,875

152,275

Total cost of work in

process during the period

$2,187,025

$2,146,365

Less work in process

inventory, ending

146,750

148,875

Cost of goods

manufactured

$2,040,275

$1,997,490

Tarbox Manufacturing Company
Income Statements For the Years
Ended December 31

This Year

Last Year

Sales

$2,942,960

$3,096,220

Cost of goods sold

Finished goods

inventory, beginning

$ 142,640

$ 184,820

Cost of goods

manufactured

2,040,275

1,997,490

Cost of goods

available for sale

$2,182,915

$2,182,310

Less finished goods

inventory, ending

186,630

142,640

Total cost of goods sold

1,996,285

2,039,670

Gross margin

$ 946,675

$1,056,550

Selling and

administrative expenses

Sales salaries and

commission expense

$ 394,840

$ 329,480

Advertising expense

116,110

194,290

Other selling expenses

82,680

72,930

Administrative expenses

242,600

195,530

Total selling and

administrative expenses

836,230

792,230

Income from operations

$ 110,445

$ 264,320

Other revenues and

expenses

Interest expense

54,160

56,815

Income before income

taxes

$ 56,285

$ 207,505

Income taxes expense

19,137

87,586

Net income

$ 37,148

$ 119,919

For the past several years, the company’s income has been declining. You have been asked to comment on why the ratios for Tarbox’s profitability have deteriorated.

1. In preparing your comments, compute the following ratios for each year:

a. Ratios of cost of direct materials used to total manufacturing costs, direct labor to total manufacturing costs, and total overhead to total manufacturing costs. (Round to one decimal place.)

b. Ratios of sales salaries and commission expense, advertising expense, other selling expenses, administrative expenses, and total selling and administrative expenses to sales. (Round to one decimal place.)

c. Ratios of gross margin to sales and net income to sales. (Round to one decimal place.)

2. From your evaluation of the ratios computed in 1, state the probable causes of the decline in net income.

3. What other factors or ratios do you believe should be considered in determining the cause of the company’s decreased income?

as the manager of grounds maintenance for latchey a large insurance company in misso 542797

Management Decision about a Supporting Service Function

As the manager of grounds maintenance for Latchey, a large insurance company in Missouri, you are responsible for maintaining the grounds surrounding the company’s three buildings, the six entrances to the property, and the recreational facilities, which include a golf course, a soccer field, jogging and bike paths, and tennis, basketball, and volleyball courts. Maintenance includes gardening (watering, planting, mowing, trimming, removing debris, and so on) and land improvements (e.g., repairing or replacing damaged or worn concrete and gravel areas).

Early in January, you receive a memo from the president of Latchey requesting information about the cost of operating your department for the last 12 months. She has received a bid from Xeriscape Landscapes, Inc., to perform the gardening activities you now perform. You are to prepare a cost report that will help her decide whether to keep gardening activities within the company or to outsource the work.

1. Before preparing your report, answer the following questions:

a. What kinds of information do you need about your department?

b. Why is this information relevant?

lake weir power plant provides power to a metropolitan area of 4 million people 542798

Preventing Pollution and the Costs of Waste Disposal

Lake Weir Power Plant provides power to a metropolitan area of 4 million people. Sundeep Guliani, the plant’s controller, has just returned from a conference on the Environmental Protection Agency’s regulations concerning pollution prevention. She is meeting with Alton Guy, the president of the company, to discuss the impact of the EPA’s regulations on the plant.

“Alton, I’m really concerned. We haven’t been monitoring the disposal of the radioactive material we send to the Willis Disposal Plant. If Willis is disposing of our waste material improperly, we could be sued,” said Guliani. “We also haven’t been recording the costs of the waste as part of our product cost. Ignoring those costs will have a negative impact on our decision about the next rate hike.”

“Sundeep, don’t worry. I don’t think we need to concern ourselves with the waste we send to Willis. We pay the company to dispose of it. The company takes it off our hands, and it’s their responsibility to manage its disposal. As for the cost of waste disposal, I think we would have a hard time justifying a rate increase based on a requirement to record the full cost of waste as a cost of producing power. Let’s just forget about waste and its disposal as a component of our power cost. We can get our rate increase without mentioning waste disposal,” replied Guy.

What responsibility for monitoring the waste disposal practices at the Willis Disposal Plant does Lake Weir Power Plant have? Should Guliani take Guy’s advice to ignore waste disposal costs in calculating the cost of power? Be prepared to discuss your response.

you prepared a mission statement for your company 542799

Cookie Company (Continuing Case)

you prepared a mission statement for your company. You also set its strategic, tactical, and operating objectives; decided on its name; and identified the tools you might use to run it. Here, you will form a company team and assign roles to team members, set cookie specifications, decide on a cookie recipe, and answer some questions about product costs.

1. Join with 4 or 5 other students in the class to form a company team. (Your instructor may assign groups or allow students to organize their own teams.)

• Determine team members’ tasks, and make team assignments (e.g., mixer, baker, quality controller, materials purchaser, accountant, marketing manager).

• Assign each task an hourly pay rate or monthly salary based on your team’s perception of the job market for the task involved.

• Give the plan compiled thus far to your instructor and all team members in writing.

2. As a team, determine cookie specifications: quality, size, appearance, and special features (such as types of chips or nuts), as well as quantity and packaging.

3. As a team, select a cookie recipe that best fits the company’s mission.

4. As a team, answer the following questions and submit the answers to your instructor:

• Will your company use actual or normal costing when computing the cost per cookie? Explain your answer.

• List the types of costs that your company will classify as overhead.

complete the following job order cost card for six custom built computer systems 542807

Computation of Product Unit Cost

Computation of Product Unit Cost

Complete the following job order cost card for six custom-built computer systems:

Job Order Cost Card Keeper 3000 Apache City, North Dakota

Customer:

Brian Patcher

Batch: ____

Custom:

X

Specifications:

6 Custom-Built Computer Systems

Date of Order:

4/4/2011

Date of Completion:

6/8/2011

Costs Charged to Job

Previous Months

Current Month

Cost Summary

Direct materials

$3,540

$2,820

$ ?

Direct labor

2,340

1,620

?

Overhead applied

2,880

2,550

?

Totals

$ ?

$ ?

$ ?

Units completed

÷ ?

Product unit cost

$ ?

complete the following job order cost card for an individual tax return 542809

Job Order Costing with Cost-Plus Contracts

Job Order Costing with Cost-Plus Contracts

Complete the following job order cost card for an individual tax return:

Job Order 2011-A7

Job Order Cost Card Doremus Tax Service Puyallup, Washington

Customer:

Arthur Farnsworth

Batch:

Custom:

X

Specifications:

Annual Individual Tax Return

Date of Order:

3/24/2011

Date of Completion:

4/8/2011

Costs Charged to Job

Previous Months

Current Month

Total Cost

Client interview

Supplies

$10

$ —

$ ?

Labor

50

60

?

Overhead (40% of interview labor costs)

20

24

?

Totals

$ ?

$ ?

$ ?

Preparation of return

Supplies

$—

$ 16

$ ?

Computer time

12

?

Labor

240

?

Overhead (50% of preparation labor costs)

120

?

Totals

$—

$ ?

$ ?

Delivery

Postage

$—

$ 12

$ ?

Totals

$—

$ ?

$ ?

Cost Summary to Date

Total Cost

Client interview

$ ?

Preparation of return

?

Delivery

?

Total

$ ?

Profit margin (25% of total cost)

?

Job revenue

$ ?

on june 30 new haven company rsquo s work in process inventory account showed a begi 542814

Work in Process Inventory: T Account Analysis

On June 30, New Haven Company’s Work in Process Inventory account showed a beginning balance of $29,400. The Materials Inventory account showed a beginning balance of $240,000. Production activity for July was as follows: Direct materials costing $238,820 were requested for production; total manufacturing payroll was $140,690, of which $52,490 was used to pay for indirect labor; indirect materials costing $28,400 were purchased and used; and overhead was applied at a rate of 150 percent of direct labor costs.

1. Record New Haven’s materials, labor, and overhead costs for July in T accounts.

2. Compute the ending balance in the Work in Process Inventory account.

Assume a transfer of $461,400 to the Finished Goods Inventory account during the period.

partial operating data for merton company are presented below 542815

T Account Analysis with Unknowns

Partial operating data for Merton Company are presented below. Management has set the predetermined overhead rate for the current year at 120 percent of direct labor costs.

Account/Transaction

June

July

Beginning Materials Inventory

a

e

Beginning Work in Process Inventory

$ 89,605

f

Beginning Finished Goods Inventory

79,764

$ 67,660

Direct materials requested

59,025

g

Materials purchased

57,100

60,216

Direct labor costs

48,760

54,540

Overhead applied

b

h

Cost of units completed

c

231,861

Cost of Goods Sold

166,805

i

Ending Materials Inventory

32,014

27,628

Ending Work in Process Inventory

d

j

Ending Finished Goods Inventory

67,660

30,515

Using T accounts and the data provided, compute the unknown values. Show all your computations.

p19 4b the cubbie inn is a restaurant in dekalb illinois 541944

P19-4B The Cubbie Inn is a restaurant in DeKalb, Illinois. It specializes in deluxe sandwiches in a moderate price range. Bill Michael, the manager of Cubbie Inn, has determined that during the last 2 years the sales mix and contribution margin ratio of its offerings are as follows.

Percent of
Total Sales

Contribution
Margin Ratio

Appetizers

15%

60%

Main entrees

60%

25%

Desserts

10%

60%

Beverages

15%

80%

Bill is considering a variety of options to try to improve the profitability of the restaurant. His goal is to generate a target net income of $120,000. The company has fixed costs of $300,000 per year.

Instructions

(a) Calculate the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income.

(b) Bill believes the restaurant could greatly improve its profitability by reducing the complexity and selling price of its entrees to increase the number of clients that it serves. It would then more heavily market its appetizers and beverages. He is proposing to reduce the contribution margin ratio on the main entrees to 10% by dropping the average selling price. He envisions an expansion of the restaurant that would increase fixed costs by 40%. At the same time, he is proposing to change the sales mix to the following.

Percent of
Total Sales

Contribution
Margin Ratio

Appetizers

25%

60%

Main entrees

40%

10%

Desserts

10%

60%

Beverages

25%

80%

Compute the total restaurant sales, and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income.

(c) Suppose that Bill reduces the selling price on entrees and increases fixed costs as proposed in part (b), but customers are not swayed by the marketing efforts and the sales mix remains what it was in part (a). Compute the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. Comment on the potential risks and benefits of this strategy.

p19 5b the following variable costing income statements are available for american c 541945

P19-5B The following variable costing income statements are available for American Company and National Company.

American Company

National Company

Sales

$1,000,000

$1,000,000

Variable costs

500,000

150,000

Contribution margin

500,000

850,000

Fixed costs

300,000

650,000

Net income

$200,000

$200,000

Instructions

(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars and the margin of safety ratio for each company.

(b) Compute the degree of operating leverage for each company and interpret your results.

(c) Assuming that sales revenue increases by 30%, prepare a variable costing income statement for each company.

(d) Assuming that sales revenue decreases by 30%, prepare a variable costing income statement for each company.

(e) Discuss how the cost structure of these two companies affects their operating leverage and profitability.

p19 7b wku produces fabrics that are used for clothing and other applications 541947

*P19-7B WKU produces fabrics that are used for clothing and other applications. In 2012, the first year of operations, WKU produced 500,000 yards of fabric and sold 400,000 yards. In 2013, the production and sales results were exactly reversed. In each year, selling price per yard was $2, variable manufacturing costs were 25% of the sales price of units produced, variable selling expenses were 10% of the selling price of units sold, fixed manufacturing costs were $300,000, and fixed administrative expenses were $100,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare income statements for each year using variable costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-10.)

(b) Prepare income statements for each year using absorption costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-11.)

(c) Reconcile the differences each year in income from operations under the two costing approaches.

(d) Comment on the effects of production and sales on net income under the two costing approaches.

p19 8b electricswitch is a division of harclerode products corporation 541948

P19-8B Electricswitch is a division of Harclerode Products Corporation. The division manufactures and sells an electric switch used in a wide variety of applications. During the coming year it expects to sell 200,000 units for $8 per unit. Mike Short is the division manager. He is considering producing either 200,000 or 250,000 units during the period.Other information is presented in the schedule.

Division Information for 2012

Beginning inventory

0

Expected sales in units

200,000

Selling price per unit

$8

Variable manufacturing cost per unit

$3

Fixed manufacturing overhead cost (total)

$480,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead costs per unit:

Based on 200,000 units

$2.40 per unit ($480,000 + 200,000)

Based on 250,000 units

$1.92 per unit ($480,000 + 250,000)

Manufacturing cost per unit:

Based on 200,000 units

$5.40 per unit ($3 variable + $2.40 fixed)

Based on 250,000 units

$4.92 per unit ($3 variable + $1.92 fixed)

Variable selling and administrative expense

$0.50

Fixed selling and administrative expense (total)

$12,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare an absorption costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 200,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 250,000 units are produced.

(b) Prepare a variable costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 200,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 250,000 units are produced.

(c) Reconcile the difference in net incomes under the two approaches and explain what accounts for this difference.

(d) Discuss the relative usefulness of the variable costing income statements versus the absorption costing income statements for decision making and for evaluating the manager’s performance.

byp19 1 comfortcraft manufactures swivel seats for customized vans 541949

BYP19-1 ComfortCraft manufactures swivel seats for customized vans. It currently manufactures 10,000 seats per year, which it sells for $480 per seat. It incurs variable costs of $180 per seat and fixed costs of $2,200,000. It is considering automating the upholstery process, which is now largely manual. It estimates that if it does so, its fixed costs will be $3,200,000, and its variable costs will decline to $80 per seat.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.

(a) Prepare a CVP income statement based on current activity.

(b) Compute contribution margin ratio, break-even point in dollars, margin of safety ratio, and degree of operating leverage based on current activity.

(c) Prepare a CVP income statement assuming that the company invests in the automated upholstery system.

(d) Compute contribution margin ratio, break-even point in dollars, margin of safety ratio, and degree of operating leverage assuming the new upholstery system is implemented.

(e) Discuss the implications of adopting the new system.

byp19 3 in a recent report the del monte foods company reported three separate opera 541951

BYP19-3 In a recent report, the Del Monte Foods Company reported three separate operating segments: consumer products (which includes a variety of canned foods including tuna, fruit, and vegetables); pet products (which includes pet food and snacks and veterinary products); and soup and infant-feeding products (which includes soup, broth, and infant feeding and pureed products). In its annual report, Del Monte uses absorption costing. As a result, information regarding the relative composition of its fixed and variable costs is not available. We have assumed that $860.3 million of its total operating expenses of $1,920.3 million are fixed and have allocated the remaining variable costs across the three divisions. Sales data, along with assumed expense data, are provided on the next page.

(in millions)

Sales

Variable Costs

Consumer products

$1,031.80

$610

Pet products

837.3

350

Soup and infant-feeding products

302

100

$2,171.10

$1,060

Instructions

(a) Compute each segment’s contribution margin ratio and the sales mix.

(b) Using the information computed in part (a), compute the company’s break-even point in dollars, and then determine the amount of sales that would be generated by each division at the break-even point.

byp19 5 mortonson corporation makes two different boat anchors 541952

BYP19-5 Mortonson Corporation makes two different boat anchors—a traditional fishing anchor and a high-end yacht anchor—using the same production machinery. The contribution margin of the yacht anchor is three times as high as that of the other product. The company is currently operating at full capacity and has been doing so for nearly two years. Steve Gantner, the company’s CEO, wants to cut back on production of the fishing anchor so that the company can make more yacht anchors. He says that this is a “no-brainer” because the contribution margin of the yacht anchor is so much higher.

Instructions

Write a short memo to Steve Gantner describing the analysis that the company should do before it makes this decision and any other considerations that would affect the decision.

20 3 ash creek company is preparing its master budget for 2012 542004

Ash Creek Company is preparing its master budget for 2012. Relevant data pertaining to its sales, production, and direct materials budgets are as follows.

Sales:Sales for the year are expected to total 1,000,000 units. Quarterly sales are 20%, 25%, 25%, and 30%, respectively. The sales price is expected to be $40 per unit for the first three quarters and $45 per unit beginning in the fourth quarter. Sales in the first quarter of 2013 are expected to be 10% higher than the budgeted sales for the first quarter of 2012.

Production:Management desires to maintain the ending finished goods inventories at 20% of the next quarter’s budgeted sales volume.

Direct materials:Each unit requires 2 pounds of raw materials at a cost of $10 per pound. Management desires to maintain raw materials inventories at 10% of the next quarter’s production requirements. Assume the production requirements for first quarter of 2013 are 500,000 pounds.

Prepare the sales, production, and direct materials budgets by quarters for 2012.

e20 9 donnegal company makes and sells artistic frames for pictures 542015

Donnegal Company makes and sells artistic frames for pictures. The controller is responsible for preparing the master budget and has accumulated the following information for 2012.

January

February

March

April

May

Estimated unit sales

10,000

12,000

8,000

9,000

9,000

Sales price per unit

$50.00

$47.50

$47.50

$47.50

$47.50

Direct labor hours per unit

2

2

1.5

1.5

1.5

Wage per direct labor hour

$8.00

$8.00

$8.00

$9.00

$9.00

Donnegal has a labor contract that calls for a wage increase to $9.00 per hour on April 1. New labor-saving machinery has been installed and will be fully operational by March 1.Donnegal expects to begin the year with 16,000 frames on hand and has a policy of carrying an end-of-month inventory of 100% of the following month’s sales, plus 50% of the second following month’s sales.

Instructions

Prepare a production budget and a direct labor budget for Donnegal Company by month and for the first quarter of the year. The direct labor budget should include direct labor hours

e20 17 lrf company s budgeted sales and direct materials purchases are as follows 542023

LRF Company’s budgeted sales and direct materials purchases are as follows.

Budgeted Sales

Budgeted D.M. Purchases

January

$200,000

$30,000

February

220,000

35,000

March

270,000

41,000

LRF’s sales are 40% cash and 60% credit. Credit sales are collected 10% in the month of sale, 50% in the month following sale, and 36% in the second month following sale; 4% are uncollectible. LRF’s purchases are 50% cash and 50% on account. Purchases on account are paid 40% in the month of purchase, and 60% in the month following purchase.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a schedule of expected collections from customers for March.

(b) Prepare a schedule of expected payments for direct materials for March.

p20 5a the budget committee of litwin company collects the following data 542031

The budget committee of Litwin Company collects the following data for its San Miguel Store in preparing budgeted income statements for May and June 2013.

1. Sales for May are expected to be $800,000. Sales in June and July are expected to be 10% higher than the preceding month.

2. Cost of goods sold is expected to be 75% of sales.

3. Company policy is to maintain ending merchandise inventory at 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold.

4. Operating expenses are estimated to be:

Sales salaries

$30,000 per month

Advertising

5% of monthly sales

Delivery expense

3% of monthly sales

Sales commissions

4% of monthly sales

Rent expense

$5,000 per month

Depreciation

$800 per month

Utilities

$600 per month

Insurance

$500 per month

5. Income taxes are estimated to be 30% of income from operations.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for each month in columnar form.

(b) Prepare budgeted income statements for each month in columnar form. Show in the statements the details of cost of goods sold.

p20 6a krause industries balance sheet at december 31 2012 is presented below 542032

Krause Industries’ balance sheet at December 31, 2012, is presented below.

KRAUSE INDUSTRIES
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2012
Assets

Current assets

Cash

$7,500

Accounts receivable

82,500

Finished goods inventory (2,000 units)

30,000

Total current assets

120,000

Property, plant, and equipment

Equipment

$40,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

10,000

30,000

Total assets

$150,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Liabilities

Notes payable

$25,000

Accounts payable

45,000

Total liabilities

70,000

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock

$50,000

Retained earnings

30,000

Total stockholders’ equity

80,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$150,000

Additional information accumulated for the budgeting process is as follows.

Budgeted data for the year 2013 include the following.

4th Qtr.
of 2013

Year
2013
Total

Sales budget (8,000 units at $35)

$84,000

$280,000

Direct materials used

17,000

69,400

Direct labor

12,500

56,600

Manufacturing overhead applied

10,000

54,000

Selling and administrative expenses

18,000

76,000

To meet sales requirements and to have 3,000 units of finished goods on hand at December 31, 2013, the production budget shows 9,000 required units of output. The total unit cost of production is expected to be $20. Krause Industries uses the first-in, first-out (FIFO) inventory costing method. Selling and administrative expenses include $4,000 for depreciation on equipment. Interest expense is expected to be $3,500 for the year. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income before income taxes. All sales and purchases are on account. It is expected that 60% of quarterly sales are collected in cash within the quarter and the remainder is collected in the following quarter. Direct materials purchased from suppliers are paid 50% in the quarter incurred and the remainder in the following quarter. Purchases in the fourth quarter were the same as the materials used. In 2013, the company expects to purchase additional equipment costing $19,000. It expects to pay $8,000 on notes payable plus all interest due and payable to December 31 (included in interest expense $3,500, above). Accounts payable at December 31, 2013, includes amounts due suppliers (see above) plus other accounts payable of $5,700. In 2013, the company expects to declare and pay a $5,000 cash dividend. Unpaid income taxes at December 31 will be $5,000. The company’s cash budget shows an expected cash balance of $7,950 at December 31, 2013.

Instructions

Prepare a budgeted income statement for 2013 and a budgeted balance sheet at December 31, 2013. In preparing the income statement, you will need to compute cost of goods manufactured (direct materials +direct labor+manufacturing overhead) and finished goods inventory (December 31, 2013).

p20 3b ogleby industries has sales in 2012 of 5 600 000 800 000 units 542035

Ogleby Industries has sales in 2012 of $5,600,000 (800,000 units) and gross profit of $1,344,000. Management is considering two alternative budget plans to increase its gross profit in 2013. Plan A would increase the selling price per unit from $7.00 to $7.60. Sales volume would decrease by 10% from its 2012 level. Plan B would decrease the selling price per unit by 5%. The marketing department expects that the sales volume would increase by 100,000 units. At the end of 2012, Ogleby has 70,000 units on hand. If Plan A is accepted, the 2013 ending inventory should be equal to 90,000 units. If Plan B is accepted, the ending inventory should be equal to 100,000 units. Each unit produced will cost $2.00 in direct materials, $1.50 in direct labor, and $0.50 in variable overhead. The fixed overhead for 2013 should be $925,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a sales budget for 2013 under (1) Plan A and (2) Plan B.

(b) Prepare a production budget for 2013 under (1) Plan A and (2) Plan B.

(c) Compute the cost per unit under (1) Plan A and (2) Plan B. Explain why the cost per unit is different for each of the two plans. (Round to two decimals.)

(d) Which plan should be accepted? (Hint:Compute the gross profit under each plan.)

p20 4b derby company prepares monthly cash budgets relevant data from operating budg 542036

Derby Company prepares monthly cash budgets. Relevant data from operating budgets for 2013 are:

January

February

Sales

$350,000

$400,000

Direct materials purchases

120,000

110,000

Direct labor

85,000

115,000

Manufacturing overhead

60,000

75,000

Selling and administrative expenses

75,000

80,000

All sales are on account. Collections are expected to be 60% in the month of sale, 30% in the first month following the sale, and 10% in the second month following the sale. Thirty percent (30%) of direct materials purchases are paid in cash in the month of purchase, and the balance due is paid in the month following the purchase. All other items above are paid in the month incurred. Depreciation has been excluded from manufacturing overhead and selling and administrative expenses.

Other data:

1. Credit sales: November 2012, $200,000; December 2012, $280,000.

2. Purchases of direct materials: December 2012, $90,000.

3. Other receipts: January—Collection of December 31, 2012, interest receivable $3,000; February—Proceeds from sale of securities $5,000.

4. Other disbursements: February—payment of $20,000 for land.

The company’s cash balance on January 1, 2013, is expected to be $50,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare schedules for (1) expected collections from customers and (2) expected payments for direct materials purchases.

(b) Prepare a cash budget for January and February in columnar form.

byp20 1 palmer corporation operates on a calendar year basis it begins the annual bu 542039

Palmer Corporation operates on a calendar-year basis. It begins the annual budgeting process in late August when the president establishes targets for the total dollar sales and net income before taxes for the next year.

The sales target is given first to the marketing department. The marketing manager formulates a sales budget by product line in both units and dollars. From this budget, sales quotas by product line in units and dollars are established for each of the corporation’s sales districts. The marketing manager also estimates the cost of the marketing activities required to support the target sales volume and prepares a tentative marketing expense budget. The executive vice president uses the sales and profit targets, the sales budget by product line, and the tentative marketing expense budget to determine the dollar amounts that can be devoted to manufacturing and corporate office expense. The executive vice president prepares the budget for corporate expenses. She then forwards to the production department the product-line sales budget in units and the total dollar amount that can be devoted to manufacturing. The production manager meets with the factory managers to develop a manufacturing plan that will produce the required units when needed within the cost constraints set by the executive vice president. The budgeting process usually comes to a halt at this point because the production department does not consider the financial resources allocated to be adequate.

When this standstill occurs, the vice president of finance, the executive vice president, the marketing manager, and the production manager meet together to determine the final budgets for each of the areas. This normally results in a modest increase in the total amount available for manufacturing costs and cuts in the marketing expense and corporate office expense budgets. The total sales and net income figures proposed by the president are seldom changed. Although the participants are seldom pleased with the compromise, these budgets are final. Each executive then develops a new detailed budget for the operations in his or her area.

None of the areas has achieved its budget in recent years. Sales often run below the target. When budgeted sales are not achieved, each area is expected to cut costs so that the president’s profit target can be met. However, the profit target is seldom met because costs are not cut enough.

In fact, costs often run above the original budget in all functional areas (marketing, production, and corporate office). The president is disturbed that Palmer has not been able to meet the sales and profit targets. He hired a consultant with considerable experience with companies in Palmer’s industry. The consultant reviewed the budgets for the past 4 years. He concluded that the product line sales budgets were reasonable and that the cost and expense budgets were adequate for the budgeted sales and production levels.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Discuss how the budgeting process employed by Palmer Corporation contributes to the failure to achieve the president’s sales and profit targets.

(b) Suggest how Palmer Corporation’s budgeting process could be revised to correct the problems.

(c) Should the functional areas be expected to cut their costs when sales volume falls below budget? Explain your answer.

byp20 3 network computing devices inc was founded in 1988 in mountain view californi 542041

Network Computing Devices, Inc. was founded in 1988 in Mountain View, California. The company develops software products such as X-terminals, Z-mail, PC X-ware, and related hardware products. Presented below is a discussion by management in its annual report.

NETWORK COMPUTING DEVICES, INC.

Management Discussion

The Company’s operating results have varied significantly, particularly on a quarterly basis, as a result of a number of factors, including general economic conditions affecting industry demand for computer products, the timing and market acceptance of new product introductions by the Company and its competitors, the timing of significant orders from large customers, periodic changes in product pricing and discounting due to competitive factors, and the availability of key components, such as video monitors and electronic subassemblies, some of which require substantial order lead times. The Company’s operating results may fluctuate in the future as a result of these and other factors, including the Company’s success in developing and introducing new products, its product and customer mix, and the level of competition which it experiences. The Company operates with a small backlog. Sales and operating results, therefore, generally depend on the volume and timing of orders received, which are difficult to forecast. The Company has experienced slowness in orders from some customers during the first quarter of each calendar year due to budgeting cycles common in the computer industry. In addition, sales in Europe typically are adversely affected in the third calendar quarter as many European customers reduce their business activities during the month of August. Due to the Company’s rapid growth rate and the effect of new product introductions on quarterly revenues, these seasonal trends have not materially impacted the Company’s results of operations to date. However, as the Company’s product lines mature and its rate of revenue growth declines, these seasonal factors may become more evident. Additionally, the Company’s international sales are denominated in U.S. dollars, and an increase or decrease in the value of the U.S. dollar relative to foreign currencies could make the Company’s products less or more competitive in those markets.

Instructions

(a) Identify the factors that affect the budgeting process at Network Computing Devices, Inc.

(b) Explain the additional budgeting concerns created by the international operations of the company.

byp20 6 you are an accountant in the budgetary projections and special projects depa 542043

You are an accountant in the budgetary, projections, and special projects department of Fernetti Conductor, Inc., a large manufacturing company. The president, Richard Brown, asks you on very short notice to prepare some sales and income projections covering the next 2 years of the company’s much heralded new product lines. He wants these projections for a series of speeches he is making while on a 2-week trip to eight East Coast brokerage firms. The president hopes to bolster Fernetti’s stock sales and price. You work 23 hours in 2 days to compile the projections, hand deliver them to the president, and are swiftly but graciously thanked as he departs. A week later, you find time to go over some of your computations and discover a miscalculation that makes the projections grossly overstated. You quickly inquire about the president’s itinerary and learn that he has made half of his speeches and has half yet to make. You are in a quandary as to what to do.

Instructions

(a) What are the consequences of telling the president of your gross miscalculations?

(b) What are the consequences of not telling the president of your gross miscalculations?

(c) What are the ethical considerations to you and the president in this situation?

byp20 7 in order to get your personal finances under control you need to prepare a p 542044

In order to get your personal finances under control, you need to prepare a personal budget. Assume that you have compiled the following information regarding your expected cash flows for a typical month.

Rent payment

$400

Miscellaneous costs

$110

Interest income

50

Savings

50

Income tax withheld

300

Eating out

150

Electricity bill

22

Telephone and Internet costs

90

Groceries

80

Student loan payments

275

Wages earned

2,000

Entertainment costs

250

Insurance

100

Transportation costs

150

Instructions

Using the information above, prepare a personal budget. Just skip any unused line items.

be21 6 in the assembly department of hannon company budgeted and actual manufacturin 542089

In the Assembly Department of Hannon Company, budgeted and actual manufacturing overhead costs for the month of April 2012 were as follows.

Budget

Actual

Indirect materials

$15,000

$14,300

Indirect labor

20,000

20,600

Utilities

10,000

10,750

Supervision

5,000

5,000

All costs are controllable by the department manager. Prepare a responsibility report for April for the cost center.

pacific bank provides loans to businesses in the community through its commercial le 541908

EX 7-4 Internal controls for bank lending

Pacific Bank provides loans to businesses in the community through its Commercial Lending Department. Small loans (less than $100,000) may be approved by an individual loan officer, while larger loans (greater than $100,000) must be approved by a board of loan officers. Once a loan is approved, the funds are made available to the loan applicant under agreed-upon terms. Pacific Bank has instituted a policy whereby its president has the individual authority to approve loans up to $5,000,000. The president believes that this policy will allow flexibility to approve loans to valued clients much quicker than under the previous policy.

As an internal auditor of Pacific Bank, how would you respond to this change in policy?

e19 7 quick auto has over 200 auto maintenance service outlets nationwide it provide 541920

E19-7 Quick Auto has over 200 auto-maintenance service outlets nationwide. It provides primarily two lines of service: oil changes and brake repair. Oil change–related services represent 65% of its sales and provide a contribution margin ratio of 20%. Brake repair represents 35% of its sales and provides a 60% contribution margin ratio. The company’s fixed costs are $16,000,000 (that is, $80,000 per service outlet).

Instructions

(a) Calculate the dollar amount of each type of service that the company must provide in order to break even.

(b) The company has a desired net income of $60,000 per service outlet. What is the dollar amount of each type of service that must be provided by each service outlet to meet its target net income per outlet?

e19 8 rathke delivery is a rapidly growing delivery service 541921

E19-8 Rathke Delivery is a rapidly growing delivery service. Last year, 80% of its revenue came from the delivery of mailing “pouches” and small, standardized delivery boxes (which provides a 10% contribution margin). The other 20% of its revenue came from delivering non-standardized boxes (which provides a 60% contribution margin). With the rapid growth of Internet retail sales, Rathke believes that there are great opportunities for growth in the delivery of non-standardized boxes. The company has fixed costs of $12,000,000.

Instructions

(a) What is the company’s break-even point in total sales dollars? At the break-even point, how much of the company’s sales are provided by each type of service?

(b) The company’s management would like to hold its fixed costs constant, but shift its sales mix so that 60% of its revenue comes from the delivery of non-standardized boxes and the remainder from pouches and small boxes. If this were to occur, what would be the company’s break-even sales, and what amount of sales would be provided by each service type?

e19 9 green golf accessories sells golf shoes gloves and a laser 541922

E19-9 Green Golf Accessories sells golf shoes, gloves, and a laser-guided range-finder that measures distance. Shown below are unit cost and sales data.

Pairs of shoes

Pairs of
Gloves

Range-
Finder

Unit sales price

$100

$30

$250

Unit variable costs

60

10

200

Unit contribution margin

$40

$20

$50

Sales mix

40%

50%

10%

Fixed costs are $620,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the break-even point in units for the company.

(b) Determine the number of units to be sold at the break-even point for each product line.

(c) Verify that the mix of sales units determined in (b) will generate a zero net income.

e19 10 lake electronix sells television sets and dvd players 541923

E19-10 Lake Electronix sells television sets and DVD players. The business is divided binto two divisions along product lines. CVP income statements for a recent quarter’s activity are presented below.

TV Division

DVD Division

Total

Sales

$600,000

$400,000

$1,000,000

Variable costs

450,000

240,000

690,000

Contribution margin

$150,000

$160,000

310,000

Fixed costs

124,000

Net income

$186,000

Instructions

(a) Determine sales mix percentage and contribution margin ratio for each division.

(b) Calculate the company’s weighted-average contribution margin ratio.

(c) Calculate the company’s break-even point in dollars.

(d) Determine the sales level in dollars for each division at the break-even point.

e19 11 shore company manufactures and sells three products 541924

E19-11 Shore Company manufactures and sells three products. Relevant per unit data concerning each product are given below.

Product

A

B

C

Selling price

$9

$12

$14

Variable costs and expenses

$3

$9.50

$12

Machine hours to produce

2

1

2

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin per unit of the limited resource (machine hours) for each product.

(b) Assuming 1,500 additional machine hours are available, which product should be manufactured?

(c) Prepare an analysis showing the total contribution margin if the additional hours are

(1) divided equally among the products, and (2) allocated entirely to the product identified in (b) above.

e19 12 billings inc produces and sells three products 541925

E19-12 Billings Inc. produces and sells three products. Unit data concerning each product is shown below.

Product

D

E

F

Selling price

$200

$300

$250

Direct labor costs

25

75

30

Other variable costs

105

90

148

The company has 2,000 hours of labor available to build inventory in anticipation of the company’s peak season. Management is trying to decide which product should be produced. The direct labor hourly rate is $10.

Instructions

(a) Determine the number of direct labor hours per unit.

(b) Determine the contribution margin per direct labor hour.

(c) Determine which product should be produced and the total contribution margin for that product.

e19 13 feld company manufactures and sells two products 541926

E19-13 Feld Company manufactures and sells two products. Relevant per unit data concerning each product follow.

Product

Basic

Deluxe

Selling price

$40

$52

Variable costs

$18

$24

Machine hours

0.5

0.7

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin per machine hour for each product.

(b) If 1,000 additional machine hours are available, which product should Feld manufacture?

(c) Prepare an analysis showing the total contribution margin if the additional hours are:

(1) Divided equally between the products.

(2) Allocated entirely to the product identified in part (b).

e19 16 an investment banker is analyzing two companies that specialize in the produc 541929

E19-16 An investment banker is analyzing two companies that specialize in the production and sale of candied apples. Old Fashion Apples uses a labor-intensive approach, and Mech-Apple uses a mechanized system. CVP income statements for the two companies are shown below.

Old-Fashion
Apples

Mech-Apple

Sales

$400,000

$400,000

Variable costs

320,000

160,000

Contribution margin

80,000

240,000

Fixed costs

20,000

180,000

Net income

$60,000

$60,000

The investment banker is interested in acquiring one of these companies. However, she is concerned about the impact that each company’s cost structure might have on its profitability.

Instructions

(a) Calculate each company’s degree of operating leverage. Determine which company’s cost structure makes it more sensitive to changes in sales volume.

(b) Determine the effect on each company’s net income if sales decrease by 10% and if sales increase by 5%. Do not prepare income statements.

(c) Which company should the investment banker acquire? Discuss.

e19 17 polk company builds custom fishing lures for sporting goods stores 541930

*E19-17 Polk Company builds custom fishing lures for sporting goods stores. In its first year of operations, 2012, the company incurred the following costs.

Variable Cost per Unit

Direct materials

$7.50

Direct labor

$2.45

Variable manufacturing overhead

$5.75

Variable selling and administrative expenses

$3.90

Fixed Costs per Year

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$234,650

Fixed selling and administrative expenses

$240,100

Polk Company sells the fishing lures for $25. During 2012, the company sold 80,000 lures and produced 95,000 lures.

Instructions

(a) Assuming the company uses variable costing, calculate Polk’s manufacturing cost per unit for 2012.

(b) Prepare a variable costing income statement for 2012.

(c) Assuming the company uses absorption costing, calculate Polk’s manufacturing cost per unit for 2012.

(d) Prepare an absorption costing income statement for 2012.

e19 18 langdon company produced 10 000 units during the past year 541931

*E19-18 Langdon Company produced 10,000 units during the past year, but only 9,000 of the units were sold. The following additional information is also available.

Direct materials used

$90,000

Direct labor incurred

$30,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

$24,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$50,000

Fixed selling and administrative expenses

$70,000

Variable selling and administrative expenses

$10,000

There was no work in process inventory at the beginning of the year, nor did Langdon have any beginning finished goods inventory.

Instructions

(a) What would be Langdon Company’s finished goods inventory cost on December 31 under variable costing?

(b) Which costing method, absorption or variable costing, would show a higher net income for the year? By what amount?

e19 19 pearson inc produces wooden crates used for shipping products by ocean liner 541932

*E19-19 Pearson Inc. produces wooden crates used for shipping products by ocean liner. In 2012, Pearson incurred the following costs.

Wood used in crate production

$54,000

Nails (considered insignificant and a variable expense)

$340

Direct labor

$37,000

Utilities for the plant:

$2,000 each month,

plus $0.45 for each kilowatt-hour used each month

Rent expense for the plant for the year

$21,400

Assume Pearson used an average 500 kilowatt-hours each month over the past year.

Instructions

(a) What is Pearson’s total manufacturing cost if it uses a variable costing approach?

(b) What is Pearson’s total manufacturing cost if it uses an absorption costing approach?

(c) What accounts for the difference in manufacturing costs between these two costing approaches?

p19 2a casper corporation has collected the following information after its first ye 541934

P19-2A Casper Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,600,000 on 100,000 units; selling expenses $240,000 (40% variable and 60% fixed); direct materials $511,000; direct labor $285,000; administrative expenses $280,000 (20% variable and 80% fixed); manufacturing overhead $360,000 (70% variable and 30% fixed). Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 10% next year.

Instructions

(a) Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and (2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.)

(b) Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the first year.

(c) The company has a target net income of $310,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target?

(d) If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio?

(e) The company is considering a purchase of equipment that would reduce its direct labor costs by $104,000 and would change its manufacturing overhead costs to 30% variable and 70% fixed (assume total manufacturing overhead cost is $360,000, as above). It is also considering switching to a pure commission basis for its sales staff. This would change selling expenses to 90% variable and 10% fixed (assume total selling expense is $240,000, as above). Compute (1) the contribution margin and (2) the contribution margin ratio, and recompute (3) the break-even point in sales dollars. Comment on the effect each of management’s proposed changes has on the break-even point.

p19 5a the following cvp income statements are available for red company and blue co 541937

P19-5A The following CVP income statements are available for Red Company and Blue Company.

Red Company

Blue Company

Sales

$400,000

$400,000

Variable costs

180,000

80,000

Contribution margin

220,000

320,000

Fixed costs

170,000

270,000

Net income

$50,000

$50,000

Instructions

(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars and the margin of safety ratio for each company.

(b) Compute the degree of operating leverage for each company and interpret your results.

(c) Assuming that sales revenue increases by 20%, prepare a CVP income statement for each company.

(d) Assuming that sales revenue decreases by 20%, prepare a CVP income statement for each company.

(e) Discuss how the cost structure of these two companies affects their operating leverage and profitability.

p19 6a long beauty corporation manufactures cosmetic products that are sold through 541938

P19-6A Long Beauty Corporation manufactures cosmetic products that are sold through a network of sales agents. The agents are paid a commission of 18% of sales. The income statement for the year ending December 31, 2012, is as follows.

LONG BEAUTY CORPORATION
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Sales

$78,000,000

Cost of goods sold

Variable

$35,100,000

Fixed

8,610,000

43,710,000

Gross margin

$34,290,000

Selling and marketing expenses

Commissions

$14,040,000

Fixed costs

10,260,000

24,300,000

Operating income

$9,990,000

The company is considering hiring its own sales staff to replace the network of agents. It will pay its salespeople a commission of 8% and incur additional fixed costs of $7.8 million.

Instructions

(a) Under the current policy of using a network of sales agents, calculate the Long Beauty Corporation’s break-even point in sales dollars for the year 2012.

(b) Calculate the company’s break-even point in sales dollars for the year 2012 if it hires its own sales force to replace the network of agents.

(c) Calculate the degree of operating leverage at sales of $78 million if (1) Long Beauty uses sales agents, and (2) Long Beauty employs its own sales staff. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of each alternative.

(d) Calculate the estimated sales volume in sales dollars that would generate an identical net income for the year ending December 31, 2012, regardless of whether Long Beauty Corporation employs its own sales staff and pays them an 8% commission or continues to use the independent network of agents. (CMA-Canada adapted)

p19 7a coswell company produces plastic that is used for injection molding applicat 541939

P19-7A Coswell Company produces plastic that is used for injection-molding applications such as gears for small motors. In 2011, the first year of operations, Coswell produced 4,000 tons of plastic and sold 3,000 tons. In 2012, the production and sales results were exactly reversed. In each year, the selling price per ton was $2,000, variable manufacturing costs were 15% of the sales price of units produced, variable selling expenses were 10% of the selling price of units sold, fixed manufacturing costs were $2,400,000, and fixed administrative expenses were $600,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare income statements for each year using variable costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-5.)

(b) Prepare income statements for each year using absorption costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-4.)

(c) Reconcile the differences each year in net income under the two costing approaches.

(d) Comment on the effects of production and sales on net income under the two costing approaches.

p19 8a tanck electric motors is a division of tanck electric products corporation 541940

*P19-8A Tanck Electric Motors is a division of Tanck Electric Products Corporation. The division manufactures and sells an electric motor used in a wide variety of applications. During the coming year it expects to sell 50,000 units for $30 per unit. Kerry Starr is the division manager. She is considering producing either 50,000 or 80,000 units during the period. Other information is presented in the schedule.

Division Information for 2012

Beginning inventory

0

Expected sales in units

50,000

Selling price per unit

$30

Variable manufacturing costs per unit

$12

Fixed manufacturing overhead costs (total)

$400,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead costs per unit:

$8 per unit ($400,000 + 50,000)

Based on 50,000 units

$5 per unit ($400,000 + 80,000)

Based on 80,000 units

Manufacturing cost per unit:

Based on 50,000 units

$ 20 per unit ($12 variable + $8 fixed)

Based on 80,000 units

$ 17 per unit ($12 variable + $5 fixed)

Variable selling and administrative expenses

$2

Fixed selling and administrative expenses (total)

$40,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare an absorption costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 50,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 80,000 units are produced.

(b) Prepare a variable costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 50,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 80,000 units are produced.

(c) Reconcile the difference in net incomes under the two approaches and explain what accounts for this difference.

(d) Discuss the relative usefulness of the variable costing income statements versus the absorption costing income statements for decision making and for evaluating the manager’s performance.

p19 1b keppel manufacturing had a bad year in 2012 operating at a loss for the first 541941

P19-1B Keppel Manufacturing had a bad year in 2012, operating at a loss for the first time in its history. The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 200,000 units of product: net sales $2,000,000; total costs and expenses $2,120,000; and net loss $120,000. Costs and expenses consisted of the following.

Total

Variable

Fixed

Cost of goods sold

$1,295,000

$975,000

$320,000

Selling expenses

575,000

325,000

250,000

Administrative expenses

250,000

100,000

150,000

$2,120,000

$1,400,000

$720,000

Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2013.

1. Increase unit selling price 30% with no change in costs and expenses.

2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $170,000 to total salaries of $50,000 plus a 6% commission on net sales.

3. Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 40:60.

Instructions

(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.

(b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action. Which course of action do you recommend? (Round to the nearest dollar.)

p19 2b mccune corporation has collected the following information after its first ye 541942

P19-2B McCune Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,000,000 on 50,000 units; selling expenses $200,000 (30% variable and 70% fixed); direct materials $300,000; direct labor $170,000; administrative expenses $250,000 (30% variable and 70% fixed); manufacturing overhead $240,000 (20% variable and 80% fixed). Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 20% next year.

Instructions

(a) Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and

(2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.)

(b) Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the current year.

(c) The company has a target net income of $187,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target?

(d) If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio?

(e) The company is considering a purchase of equipment that would reduce its direct labor costs by $70,000 and would change its manufacturing overhead costs to 10% variable and 90% fixed (assume total manufacturing overhead cost is $240,000, as above). It is also considering switching to a pure commission basis for its sales staff. This would change selling expenses to 80% variable and 20% fixed (assume total selling expense is $200,000, as above). Compute (1) the contribution margin and (2) the contribution margin ratio, and (3) recompute the break-even point in sales dollars. Comment on the effect each of management’s proposed changes has on the break-even point.

p19 3b lorge corporation manufactures and sells three different models of exterior d 541943

P19-3B Lorge Corporation manufactures and sells three different models of exterior doors. Although the doors vary in terms of quality and features, all are good sellers. Lorge is currently operating at full capacity with limited machine time. Sales and production information relevant to each model is shown on the next page.

Product

Economy

Standard

Deluxe

Selling price

$270

$450

$650

Variable costs and expenses

$150

$261

$425

Machine hours required

0.6

0.9

1.2

Instructions

(a) Ignoring the machine time constraint, which single product should Lorge produce?

(b) What is the contribution margin per unit of limited resource for each product?

(c) If additional machine time could be obtained, how should the additional time be used?

the following selected transactions were completed by air systems company during jan 541790

EX 5-38 Journal entries using the periodic inventory system

The following selected transactions were completed by Air Systems Company during January of the current year. Air Systems Company uses the periodic inventory system.

Jan. 2. Purchased $18,200 of merchandise on account, FOB shipping point, terms 2/15, n/30.

5. Paid freight of $190 on the January 2 purchase.

6. Returned $2,750 of the merchandise purchased on January 2.

13. Sold merchandise on account, $37,300, FOB destination, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $22,400.

15. Paid freight of $215 for the merchandise sold on January 13.

17. Paid for the purchase of January 2 less the return and discount.

23. Received payment on account for the sale of January 13 less the discount.

Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Air Systems Company.

united rug company is a small rug retailer owned and operated by pat kirwan after th 541792

Ex 5-40 Closing entries using periodic inventory system

United Rug Company is a small rug retailer owned and operated by Pat Kirwan. After the accounts have been adjusted on December 31, the following selected account balances were taken from the ledger:

Advertising Expense

$36,000

Depreciation Expense

13,000

Dividends

65,000

Freight In

17,000

Merchandise Inventory, December

375,000

Merchandise Inventory, December

460,000

Miscellaneous Expense

9,000

Purchases

1,760,000

Purchases Discounts

35,000

Purchases Returns and Allowances

45,000

Salaries Expense

375,000

Sales

2,300,000

Sales Discounts

30,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

50,000

the following selected transactions were completed by capers company during october 541793

PR 5-1A Purchase-related transactions

The following selected transactions were completed by Capers Company during October of the current year:

Oct. 1.

Purchased merchandise from UK Imports Co., $14,448, terms FOB destination,
n/30.

3

Purchased merchandise from Hoagie Co., $9,950, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/eom. Prepaid freight of $220 was added to the invoice.

4

Purchased merchandise from Taco Co., $13,650, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.

6

Issued debit memo to Taco Co. for $4,550 of merchandise returned from purchase on October 4.

13

Paid Hoagie Co. for invoice of October 3, less discount.

14

Paid Taco Co. for invoice of October 4, less debit memo of October 6 and discount.

19

Purchased merchandise from Veggie Co., $27,300, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom.

19

Paid freight of $400 on October 19 purchase from Veggie Co.

20

Purchased merchandise from Caesar Salad Co., $22,000, terms FOB destination, 1/10, n/30.

30

Paid Caesar Salad Co. for invoice of October 20, less discount.

31

Paid UK Imports Co. for invoice of October 1.

31

Paid Veggie Co. for invoice of October 19.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Capers Company for October.

the following selected transactions were completed by amsterdam supply co which sell 541794

PR 5-2A Sales-related transactions

The following selected transactions were completed by Amsterdam Supply Co., which sells office supplies primarily to wholesalers and occasionally to retail customers:

Mar. 2.

Sold merchandise on account to Equinox Co., $18,900, terms FOB destination, 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $13,300.

3

Sold merchandise for $11,350 plus 6% sales tax to retail cash customers. The cost of merchandise sold was $7,000.

4

Sold merchandise on account to Empire Co., $55,400, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of merchandise sold was $33,200.

5

Sold merchandise for $30,000 plus 6% sales tax to retail customers who used MasterCard. The cost of merchandise sold was $19,400.

12

Received check for amount due from Equinox Co. for sale on March 2.

14

Sold merchandise to customers who used American Express cards, $13,700. The cost of merchandise sold was $8,350.

16

Sold merchandise on account to Targhee Co., $27,500, terms FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $16,000.

18

Issued credit memo for $4,800 to Targhee Co. for merchandise returned from sale on March 16. The cost of the merchandise returned was $2,900.

19

Sold merchandise on account to Vista Co., $8,250, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30. Added $75 to the invoice for prepaid freight. The cost of merchandise sold was $5,000.

26

Received check for amount due from Targhee Co. for sale on March 16 less credit memo of March 18 and discount.

28

Received check for amount due from Vista Co. for sale of March 19.

31

Received check for amount due from Empire Co. for sale of March 4.

31

Paid Fleetwood Delivery Service $5,600 for merchandise delivered during March to customers under shipping terms of FOB destination.

Apr. 3

Paid City Bank $940 for service fees for handling MasterCard and American Express sales during March.

15.

Paid $6,544 to state sales tax division for taxes owed on sales.

the following were selected from among the transactions completed by babcock company 541795

PR 5-3A Sales-related and purchase-related transactions

The following were selected from among the transactions completed by Babcock Company during November of the current year:

Nov. 3.

Purchased merchandise on account from Moonlight Co., list price $85,000, trade discount 25%, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.

4

Sold merchandise for cash, $37,680. The cost of the merchandise sold was $22,600.

5

Purchased merchandise on account from Papoose Creek Co., $47,500, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30, with prepaid freight of $810 added to the invoice.

6

Returned $13,500 ($18,000 list price less trade discount of 25%) of merchandise purchased on November 3 from Moonlight Co.

11

Sold merchandise on account to Quinn Co., list price $24,000, trade discount 35%, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $9,400.

13

Paid Moonlight Co. on account for purchase of November 3, less return of November 6 and discount.

14

Sold merchandise on VISA, $236,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $140,000.

15

Paid Papoose Creek Co. on account for purchase of November 5, less discount.

21

Received cash on account from sale of November 11 to Quinn Co., less discount.

24

Sold merchandise on account to Rabel Co., $56,900, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $34,000.

28

Paid VISA service fee of $3,540.

30

Received merchandise returned by Rabel Co. from sale on November 24, $8,400. The cost of the returned merchandise was $5,000.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions.

the following selected transactions were completed during august between summit comp 541796

PR 5-4A Sales-related and purchase-related transactions for seller and buyer

The following selected transactions were completed during August between Summit Company and Beartooth Co.:

Aug. 1. Summit Company sold merchandise on account to Beartooth Co., $48,000, terms FOB destination, 2/15, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $28,800.

2. Summit Company paid freight of $1,150 for delivery of merchandise sold to Beartooth Co. on August 1.

5. Summit Company sold merchandise on account to Beartooth Co., $66,000, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $40,000.

6. Beartooth Co. returned $10,500 of merchandise purchased on account on August 1 from Summit Company. The cost of the merchandise returned was $6,300.

9. Bear tooth Co. paid freight of $2,300 on August 5 purchase from Summit Company.

15. Summit Company sold merchandise on account to Bear tooth Co., $58,700, terms FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30. Summit Company paid freight of $1,675, which was added to the invoice. The cost of the merchandise sold was $35,000.

16. Bear tooth Co. paid Summit Company for purchase of August 1, less discount and less return of August 6.

25. Bear tooth Co. paid Summit Company on account for purchase of August 15, less discount.

31. Bear tooth Co. paid Summit Company on account for purchase of August 5.

Instructions

Journalize the August transactions for (1) Summit Company and (2) Bear tooth Co.

the following selected accounts and their current balances appear in the ledger of g 541797

PR 5-5A Multiple-step income statement and report form of balance sheet

The following selected accounts and their current balances appear in the ledger of Gloucester Co. for the fiscal year ended August 31, 2014:

Cash

$125,000

Sales

$4,576,000

Accounts Receivable

335,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

31,000

Merchandise Inventory

380,000

Sales Discounts

28,000

Office Supplies

12,000

Cost of Merchandise Sold

2,650,000

Prepaid Insurance

9,000

Sales Salaries Expense

745,000

Office Equipment

275,000

Advertising Expense

205,000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Depreciation Expense—

Office Equipment

187,000

Store Equipment

40,000

Store Equipment

859,000

Miscellaneous Selling Expense

18,000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Office Salaries Expense

410,000

Store Equipment

293,000

Rent Expense

60,000

Accounts Payable

193,000

Depreciation Expense—

Salaries Payable

12,000

Office Equipment

30,000

Note Payable

Insurance Expense

18,000

(final payment due 2037)

400,000

Office Supplies Expense

11,000

Capital Stock

125,000

Miscellaneous Administrative Exp.

8,000

Retained Earnings

550,000

Interest Expense

12,000

Dividends

75,000

Instructions

1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement.

2. Prepare a retained earnings statement.

3. Prepare a report form of balance sheet, assuming that the current portion of the note payable is $16,000.

4. Briefly explain (a) how multiple-step and single-step income statements differ and (b) how report-form and account-form balance sheets differ.

periodic inventory accounts multiple step income statement closing entries on decemb 541799

PR 5-10A Periodic inventory accounts, multiple-step income statement, closing entries On December 31, 2014, the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of Wyman Company are as follows:

Cash

$13,500

Sales Returns and Allowances

$46,000

Accounts Receivable

72,000

Sales Discounts

29,000

Merchandise Inventory,

Purchases

$2,650,000

1-Jan-14

257,000

Purchases Returns and Allowances

93,000

Office Supplies

3,000

Purchases Discounts

37,000

Prepaid Insurance

4,500

Freight In

48,000

Land

150,000

Sales Salaries Expense

300,000

Store Equipment

270,000

Advertising Expense

45,000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Delivery Expense

9,000

Store Equipment

55,900

Depreciation Expense—

Office Equipment

78,500

Store Equipment

6,000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Miscellaneous Selling Expense

12,000

Office Equipment

16,000

Office Salaries Expense

175,000

Accounts Payable

27,800

Rent Expense

28,000

Salaries Payable

3,000

Insurance Expense

3,000

Unearned Rent

8,300

Office Supplies Expense

2,000

Notes Payable

50,000

Depreciation Expense—

Capital Stock

150,000

Office Equipment

1,500

Retained Earnings

430,500

Miscellaneous Administrative Expense

3,500

Dividends

25,000

Rent Revenue

7,000

Sales

3,355,000

Interest Expense

2,000

Instructions

1. Does Wyman Company use a periodic or perpetual inventory system? Explain.

2. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for Wyman Company for the year ended December 31, 2014. The merchandise inventory as of December 31, 2014, was $305,000.

3. Prepare the closing entries for Wyman Company as of December 31, 2014.

4. What would be the net income if the perpetual inventory system had been used?

the following selected transactions were completed by niles co during march of the c 541800

PR 5-1B Purchase-related transactions

The following selected transactions were completed by Niles Co. during March of the current year:

Mar. 1.

Purchased merchandise from Haas Co., $43,250, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/eom. Prepaid freight of $650 was added to the invoice.

5.

Purchased merchandise from Whitman Co., $19,175, terms FOB destination, n/30.

10.

Paid Haas Co. for invoice of March 1, less discount.

13.

Purchased merchandise from Jost Co., $15,550, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.

14.

Issued debit memo to Jost Co. for $3,750 of merchandise returned from purchase on March 13.

18.

Purchased merchandise from Fairhurst Company, $13,560, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom.

18.

Paid freight of $140 on March 18 purchase from Fairhurst Company.

19.

Purchased merchandise from Bickle Co., $6,500, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.

23.

Paid Jost Co. for invoice of March 13, less debit memo of March 14 and discount.

29.

Paid Bickle Co. for invoice of March 19, less discount.

31.

Paid Fairhurst Company for invoice of March 18.

31.

Paid Whitman Co. for invoice of March 5.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Niles Co. for March.

the following selected transactions were completed by green lawn supplies co which s 541801

PR 5-2B Sales-related transactions

The following selected transactions were completed by Green Lawn Supplies Co., which sells irrigation supplies primarily to wholesalers and occasionally to retail customers:

July 1.

Sold merchandise on account to Landscapes Co., $33,450, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of merchandise sold was $20,000.

2.

Sold merchandise for $86,000 plus 8% sales tax to retail cash customers. The cost of merchandise sold was $51,600.

5.

Sold merchandise on account to Peacock Company, $17,500, terms FOB destination, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $10,000.

8.

Sold merchandise for $112,000 plus 8% sales tax to retail customers who used VISA cards. The cost of merchandise sold was $67,200.

13.

Sold merchandise to customers who used MasterCard cards, $96,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $57,600.

14.

Sold merchandise on account to Loeb Co., $16,000, terms FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $9,000.

15.

Received check for amount due from Peacock Company for sale on July 5.

16.

Issued credit memo for $3,000 to Loeb Co. for merchandise returned from sale on July 14. The cost of the merchandise returned was $1,800.

18.

Sold merchandise on account to Jennings Company, $11,350, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30. Paid $475 for freight and added it to the invoice. The cost of merchandise sold was $6,800.

24.

Received check for amount due from Loeb Co. for sale on July 14 less credit memo of July 16 and discount.

28.

Received check for amount due from Jennings Company for sale of July 18.

31.

Paid Black Lab Delivery Service $8,550 for merchandise delivered during July to customers under shipping terms of FOB destination.

31.

Received check for amount due from Landscapes Co. for sale of July 1.

Aug. 3.

Paid Hays Federal Bank $3,770 for service fees for handling MasterCard and VISA sales during July.

10.

Paid $41,260 to state sales tax division for taxes owed on sales.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Green Lawn Supplies Co.

the following were selected from among the transactions completed by essex company d 541802

PR 5-3B Sales-related and purchase-related transactions

The following were selected from among the transactions completed by Essex Company during July of the current year:

July 3.

Purchased merchandise on account from Hamling Co., list price $72,000, trade discount 15%, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30, with prepaid freight of $1,450 added to the invoice.

5.

Purchased merchandise on account from Kester Co., $33,450, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.

6.

Sold merchandise on account to Parsley Co., list price $45,000, trade discount 33%, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $25,000.

7.

Returned $6,850 of merchandise purchased on July 5 from Kester Co.

13.

Paid Hamling Co. on account for purchase of July 3, less discount.

15.

Paid Kester Co. on account for purchase of July 5, less return of July 7 and discount.

16.

Received cash on account from sale of July 6 to Parsley Co., less discount.

19.

Sold merchandise on MasterCard, $108,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $64,800.

22.

Sold merchandise on account to Tabor Co., $16,650, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $10,000.

23.

Sold merchandise for cash, $91,200. The cost of the merchandise sold was $55,000.

28.

Received merchandise returned by Tabor Co. from sale on July 22, $3,600.

31.

The cost of the returned merchandise was $2,000. Paid MasterCard service fee of $1,650.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions

the following selected transactions were completed during april between swan company 541803

PR 5-4B Sales-related and purchase-related transactions for seller and buyer

The following selected transactions were completed during April between Swan Company and Bird Company:

Apr. 2.

Swan Company sold merchandise on account to Bird Company, $32,000, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30. Swan Company paid freight of $330, which was added to the invoice. The cost of the merchandise sold was $19,200.

8.

Swan Company sold merchandise on account to Bird Company, $49,500, terms FOB destination, 1/15, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $29,700.

8.

Swan Company paid freight of $710 for delivery of merchandise sold to Bird Company on April 8.

12.

Bird Company returned $7,500 of merchandise purchased on account on April 8 from Swan Company. The cost of the merchandise returned was $4,800.

12.

Bird Company paid Swan Company for purchase of April 2, less discount.

23.

Bird Company paid Swan Company for purchase of April 8, less discount and less return of April 12.

24.

Swan Company sold merchandise on account to Bird Company, $67,350, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $40,400.

26.

Bird Company paid freight of $875 on April 24 purchase from Swan Company.

30.

Bird Company paid Swan Company on account for purchase of April 24.

Instructions

Journalize the April transactions for (1) Swan Company and (2) Bird Company.

palisade creek co is a merchandising business the account balances for palisade cree 541810

Palisade Creek Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Palisade Creek Co. as of May 1, 2014 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:

110

Cash

$ 83,600

112

Accounts Receivable

233,900

115

Merchandise Inventory

602,400

116

Prepaid Insurance

16,800

117

Store Supplies

11,400

123

Store Equipment

569,500

124

Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment

56,700

210

Accounts Payable

96,600

211

Salaries Payable

310

Capital Stock

100,000

311

Retained Earnings

585,300

312

Dividends

135,000

313

Income Summary

410

Sales

5,221,100

411

Sales Returns and Allowances

92,700

412

Sales Discounts

59,400

510

Cost of Merchandise Sold

2,823,000

520

Sales Salaries Expense

664,800

521

Advertising Expense

281,000

522

Depreciation Expense

523

Store Supplies Expense

529

Miscellaneous Selling Expense

12,600

530

Office Salaries Expense

382,100

531

Rent Expense

83,700

532

Insurance Expense

539

Miscellaneous Administrative Expense

7,800

During May, the last month of the fiscal year, the following transactions were completed:

May 1. Paid rent for May, $5,000.

3. Purchased merchandise on account from Martin Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $36,000.

4. Paid freight on purchase of May 3, $600.

6. Sold merchandise on account to Korman Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $68,500. The cost of the merchandise sold was $41,000.

7. Received $22,300 cash from Halstad Co. on account, no discount.

10. Sold merchandise for cash, $54,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $32,000.

13. Paid for merchandise purchased on May 3, less discount.

14. Received merchandise returned on sale of May 6, $13,500. The cost of the merchandise returned was $8,000.

15. Paid advertising expense for last half of May, $11,000.

16. Received cash from sale of May 6, less return of May 14 and discount.

19. Purchased merchandise for cash, $18,700.

19. Paid $33,450 to Buttons Co. on account, no discount.

Record the following transactions on Page 21 of the journal.

20. Sold merchandise on account to Crescent Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $110,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $70,000.

21. For the convenience of Crescent Co., paid freight on sale of May 20, $2,300.

21. Received $42,900 cash from Gee Co. on account, no discount.

21. Purchased merchandise on account from Osterman Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $88,000.

24. Returned $5,000 of damaged merchandise purchased on May 21, receiving credit from the seller.

May 26. Refunded cash on sales made for cash, $7,500. The cost of the merchandise returned was $4,800.

28. Paid sales salaries of $56,000 and office salaries of $29,000.

29. Purchased store supplies for cash, $2,400.

30. Sold merchandise on account to Turner Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $78,750. The cost of the merchandise sold was $47,000.

30. Received cash from sale of May 20, less discount, plus freight paid on May 21.

31. Paid for purchase of May 21, less return of May 24 and discount.

Instructions

1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account. Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (*) in the Posting Reference column. Journalize the transactions for July, starting on Page 20 of the journal.

2. Post the journal to the general ledger, extending the month-end balances to the appropriate balance columns after all posting is completed. In this problem, you are not required to update or post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers.

3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.

4. At the end of May, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete (5) and (6).

a. Merchandise inventory on May 31

$550,000

b. Insurance expired during the year

12,000

c. Store supplies on hand on May 31

4,000

d. Depreciation for the current year

14,000

e. Accrued salaries on May 31:

Sales salaries

$7,000

Office salaries

6,600

13,600

5. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on a 10-column end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet), and complete the spreadsheet.

6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.

7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

8. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.

9. Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries on Page 23 of the journal. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry. Insert the new balance in the retained earnings account.

10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

rustic furniture co is owned and operated by cam pfeifer the following is an excerpt 541812

CP 5-2 Purchases discounts and accounts payable

Rustic Furniture Co. is owned and operated by Cam Pfeifer. The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Cam Pfeifer and Mitzi Wheeler, the chief accountant for Rustic Furniture Co. Cam: Mitzi, I’ve got a question about this recent balance sheet.

Mitzi: Sure, what’s your question? Cam: Well, as you know, I’m applying for a bank loan to finance our new store in Garden Grove, and I noticed that the accounts payable are listed as $320,000.

Mitzi: That’s right. Approximately $275,000 of that represents amounts due our suppliers, and the remainder is miscellaneous payables to creditors for utilities, office equipment, supplies, etc.

Cam: That’s what I thought. But as you know, we normally receive a 2% discount from our suppliers for earlier payment, and we always try to take the discount.

Mitzi: That’s right. I can’t remember the last time we missed a discount.

Cam: Well, in that case, it seems to me the accounts payable should be listed minus the 2% discount. Let’s list the accounts payable due suppliers as $314,500, rather than $320,000. Every little bit helps. You never know. It might make the difference between getting the loan and not.

How would you respond to Cam Pfeifer’s request?

mark is debating whether to buy a stereo system from tru sound systems a locally own 541813

CP 5-3 Determining cost of purchase

The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Mark Loomis and Krista Huff.

Mark is debating whether to buy a stereo system from Tru-Sound Systems, a locally owned electronics store, or Wholesale Stereo, an online electronics company.

Mark: Krista, I don’t know what to do about buying my new stereo.

Krista: What’s the problem?

Mark: Well, I can buy it locally at Tru-Sound Systems for $1,175.00. However, Wholesale Stereo has the same system listed for $1,200.00.

Krista: What’s the big deal? Buy it from Tru-Sound Systems.

Mark: It’s not quite that simple. Wholesale Stereo charges $49.99 for shipping and handling. If I have them send it next-day air, it’ll cost $89.99 for shipping and handling.

Krista: So?

Mark: But, that’s not all. Tru-Sound Systems will give an additional 2% discount if I pay cash. Otherwise, they will let me use my VISA, or I can pay it off in three monthly installments. In addition, if I buy it from Tru-Sound Systems, I have to pay 9% sales tax. I won’t have to pay sales tax if I buy it from Wholesale Stereo, since they are out of state.

Krista: Anything else?

Mark: Well . . . Wholesale Stereo says I have to charge it on my VISA. They don’t accept checks.

Krista: I am not surprised. Many online stores don’t accept checks.

Mark: I give up. What would you do?

1. Assuming that Wholesale Stereo doesn’t charge sales tax on the sale to Mark, which company is offering the best buy?

2. What might be some considerations other than price that might influence Mark’s decision on where to buy the stereo system?

your sister operates watercraft supply company an online boat parts distributorship 541814

CP 5-4 Sales discounts

Your sister operates Watercraft Supply Company, an online boat parts distributorship that is in its third year of operation. The income statement shown on the next page was recently prepared for the year ended October 31, 2014.

Watercraft Supply Company
Income Statement
For the Year Ended October 31, 2014

Revenues:

Net sales

$1,350,000

Interest revenue

15,000

Total revenues

$1,365,000

Expenses:

Cost of merchandise sold

$810,000

Selling expenses

140,000

Administrative expenses

90,000

Interest expense

4,000

Total expenses

1,044,000

Net income

$ 321,000

Your sister is considering a proposal to increase net income by offering sales discounts of 2/15, n/30, and by shipping all merchandise FOB shipping point. Currently, no sales discounts are allowed and merchandise is shipped FOB destination. It is estimated that these credit terms will increase net sales by 10%. The ratio of the cost of merchandise sold to net sales is expected to be 60%. All selling and administrative expenses are expected to remain unchanged, except for store supplies, miscellaneous selling, office supplies, and miscellaneous administrative expenses, which are expected to increase proportionately with increased net sales. The amounts of these preceding items for the year ended October 31, 2014, were as follows:

Store supplies expense

$12,000

Miscellaneous selling expense

6,000

Office supplies expense

3,000

Miscellaneous administrative expense

2,500

The other income and other expense items will remain unchanged. The shipment of all merchandise FOB shipping point will eliminate all delivery expenses, which for the year ended October 31, 2014, were $12,000.

1. Prepare a projected single-step income statement for the year ending October 31, 2015, based on the proposal. Assume all sales are collected within the discount period.

2. a. Based on the projected income statement in (1), would you recommend the implementation of the proposed changes?

b. Describe any possible concerns you may have related to the proposed changes described in (1).

the following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of eves comp 541900

PE 7-3A Bank reconciliation

The following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of Eves Company:

Balance per bank

$13,450

Balance per company records

11,655

Bank service charges

45

Deposit in transit

3,000

NSF check

1,800

Outstanding checks

6,640

a. What is the adjusted balance on the bank reconciliation?

b. Journalize any necessary entries for Eves Company based on the bank reconciliation.

the following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of conway co 541901

PE 7-3B Bank reconciliation

The following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of Conway Company:

Balance per bank

$23,900

Balance per company records

8,700

Bank service charges

50

Deposit in transit

5,500

Note collected by bank with $450 interest

9,450

Outstanding checks

11,300

a. What is the adjusted balance on the bank reconciliation?

b. Journalize any necessary entries for Conway Company based on the bank reconciliation.

madonna epstein has recently been hired as the manager of beans coffee shop beans co 541906

EX 7-2 Internal controls

Madonna Epstein has recently been hired as the manager of Beans Coffee Shop. Beans Coffee Shop is a national chain of franchised coffee shops. During her first month as store manager, Madonna encountered the following internal control situations:

a. Beans Coffee Shop has one cash register. Prior to Madonna’s joining the coffee shop, each employee working on a shift would take a customer order, accept payment, and then prepare the order. Madonna made one employee on each shift responsible for taking orders and accepting the customer’s payment. Other employees prepare the orders.

b. Since only one employee uses the cash register, that employee is responsible for counting the cash at the end of the shift and verifying that the cash in the drawer matches the amount of cash sales recorded by the cash register. Madonna expects each cashier to balance the drawer to the penny every time—no exceptions.

c. Madonna caught an employee putting a case of 500 single-serving tea bags in her car. Not wanting to create a scene, Madonna smiled and said, “I don’t think you’re putting those tea bags on the right shelf. Don’t they belong inside the coffee shop?”

The employee returned the tea bags to the stockroom.

State whether you agree or disagree with Madonna’s method of handling each situation and explain your answer.

clothing is a retail store specializing in women rsquo s clothing the store has esta 541907

EX 7-3 Internal controls

Ramona’s Clothing is a retail store specializing in women’s clothing. The store has established a liberal return policy for the holiday season in order to encourage gift purchases. Any item purchased during November and December may be returned through January 31, with a receipt, for cash or exchange. If the customer does not have a receipt, cash will still be refunded for any item under $75. If the item is more than $75, a check is mailed to the customer.

Whenever an item is returned, a store clerk completes a return slip, which the customer signs. The return slip is placed in a special box. The store manager visits the return counter approximately once every two hours to authorize the return slips. Clerks are instructed to place the returned merchandise on the proper rack on the selling floor as soon as possible.

This year, returns at Ramona’s Clothing have reached an all-time high. There are a large number of returns under $75 without receipts.

a. How can sales clerks employed at Ramona’s Clothing use the store’s return policy to steal money from the cash register?

b. What internal control weaknesses do you see in the return policy that make cash thefts easier?

c. Would issuing a store credit in place of a cash refund for all merchandise returned without a receipt reduce the possibility of theft? List some advantages and disadvantages of issuing a store credit in place of a cash refund.

d. Assume that Ramona’s Clothing is committed to the current policy of issuing cash refunds without a receipt. What changes could be made in the store’s procedures regarding customer refunds in order to improve internal control?

for the past several years jeff horton has operated a part time consulting business 541730

Complete accounting cycle

For the past several years, Jeff Horton has operated a part-time consulting business from his home. As of April 1, 2014, Jeff decided to move to rented quarters and to operate the business, which was to be known as Rosebud Consulting, on a full-time basis. Rosebud Consulting entered into the following transactions during April:

Apr. 1. The following assets were received from Jeff Horton in exchange for capital stock: cash, $20,000; accounts receivable, $14,700; supplies, $3,300; and office equipment, $12,000. There were no liabilities received.

1. Paid three months’ rent on a lease rental contract, $6,000.

2. Paid the premiums on property and casualty insurance policies, $4,200.

4. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $9,400.

5. Purchased additional office equipment on account from Smith Office Supply Co.,$8,000.

6. Received cash from clients on account, $11,700.

10. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $350.

12. Paid Smith Office Supply Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $6,400.

12. Recorded services provided on account for the period April 1–12, $21,900.

14. Paid receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $1,650.

Record the following transactions on Page 2 of the journal.

17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period April 1–16, $6,600.

18. Paid cash for supplies, $725.

20. Recorded services provided on account for the period April 13–20, $16,800.

24. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period April 17–24, $4,450.

26. Received cash from clients on account, $26,500.

27. Paid receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $1,650.

29. Paid telephone bill for April, $540.

30. Paid electricity bill for April, $760.

30. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period April 25–30, $5,160.

30. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of April, $2,590.

30. Paid dividends of $18,000.

Instructions

1. Journalize each transaction in a two-column journal starting referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited.

(Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.)

11 Cash

31 Capital Stock

12 Accounts Receivable

32 Retained Earnings

14 Supplies

33 Dividends

15 Prepaid Rent

41 Fees Earned

16 Prepaid Insurance

51 Salary Expense

18 Office Equipment

52 Supplies Expense

19 Accumulated Depreciation

53 Rent Expense

21 Accounts Payable

54 Depreciation Expense

22 Salaries Payable

55 Insurance Expense

23 Unearned Fees

59 miscellaneous Expense

2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts.

  1. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.
  2. At the end of April, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete parts (5) and (6).
  3. Insurance expired during April is $350.
  4. Supplies on hand on April 30 are $1,225.
  1. Depreciation of office equipment for April is $400.
  2. Accrued receptionist salary on April 30 is $275.
  3. Rent expired during April is $2,000.
  4. Unearned fees on April 30 are $2,350.
  5. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet.
  6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Record the adjusting entries of the journal.
  7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
  8. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
  9. Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries of the journal. (Income Summary is account #34 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry.

Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

the unadjusted trial balance of ps music as of july 31 2014 along with the adjustmen 541731

The unadjusted trial balance of PS Music as of July 31, 2014, along with the adjustment data for the two months ended July 31, 2014, are shown in Chapter 3. Based upon the adjustment data, the adjusted trial balance shown below was prepared.

PS Music Adjusted Trial Balance July 31, 2014

Debits Balances

Credit Balances

Cash

9,945

Accounts Receivable

4,150

Supplies

275

Prepaid Insurance

2,475

Office Equipment

7,500

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

50

Accounts Payable

8,350

Wages Payable

140

Unearned Revenue

3,600

Capital Stock

9,000

Dividends

1,750

Fees Earned

21,200

Music Expense

3,610

Wages Expense

2,940

Office Rent Expense

2,550

Advertising Expense

1,500

Equipment Rent Expense

1,375

Utilities Expense

1,215

Supplies Expense

925

Insurance Expense

225

Depreciation Expense

50

Miscellaneous Expense

1,855

42,340

42,340

Instructions

  1. Prepare an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet).
  2. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
  3. Journalize and post the closing entries. The income summary account is #34 in the ledger of PS Music. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
  4. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

kelly pitney began her consulting business kelly consulting p c on april 1 2014 the 541732

Kelly Pitney began her consulting business, Kelly Consulting, P.C., on April 1, 2014. The accounting cycle for Kelly Consulting for April, including financial statements, During May, Kelly Consulting entered into the following transactions:

May 3. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $4,500.

5. Received cash from clients on account, $2,450.

9. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $225.

13. Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $640.

15. Recorded services provided on account for the period May 1–15, $9,180.

16. Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary including the amount owed on April 30, $750.

17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period May 1–16, $8,360.

Record the following transactions on Page 6 of the journal.

20. Purchased supplies on account, $735.

21. Recorded services provided on account for the period May 16–20, $4,820.

25. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 17–23, 7,900.

27. Received cash from clients on account, $9,520.

28. Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.

30. Paid telephone bill for May, $260.

31. Paid electricity bill for May, $810.

31. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 26–31, $3,300.

31. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of May, $2,650.

31. Paid dividends, $10,500.

Instructions

1. The chart of accounts for Kelly Consulting and the post-closing trial balance as of April 30, 2014, is shown on page 171. For each account in the post-closing trial balance, enter the balance in the appropriate Balance column of a four-column account. Date the balances May 1, 2014, and place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column. Journalize each of the May transactions in a two column journal starting on Page 5 of the journal and using Kelly Consulting’s chart of accounts. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.)

2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts.

3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.

4. At the end of May, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete parts (5) and (6).a. Insurance expired during May is $275.b. Supplies on hand on May 31 are $715. c. Depreciation of office equipment for May is $330. d. Accrued receptionist salary on May 31 is $325. e. Rent expired during May is $1,600. f. Unearned fees on May 31 are $3,210.

5. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet.

6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Record the adjusting entries of the journal.

7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

8. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.

9. Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries of the journal. (Income Summary is account #34 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry.

10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

picasso graphics is a graphics arts design consulting firm pablo taylor its treasure 541733

Ethics and professional conduct in business

Picasso Graphics is a graphics arts design consulting firm. Pablo Taylor, its treasurer and vice president of finance, has prepared a classified balance sheet as of July 31, 2014, the end of its fiscal year. This balance sheet will be submitted with Picasso Graphics’ loan application to Paris Trust & Savings Bank. In the Current Assets section of the balance sheet, Pablo reported a $56,000 receivable from Becky Holt, the president of Picasso Graphics, as a trade account receivable.

Becky borrowed the money from Picasso Graphics in January 2012 for a down payment on a new home. She has orally assured Pablo that she will pay off the account receivable within the next year. Pablo reported the $56,000 in the same manner on the preceding year’s balance sheet. Evaluate whether it is acceptable for Pablo to prepare the July 31, 2014, balance sheet in the manner indicated above.

the following is an excerpt from a telephone conversation between ben simpson presid 541734

Financial statements

The following is an excerpt from a telephone conversation between Ben Simpson, president of Main Street Co., and Tami Lundgren, owner of Reliable Employment Co. Ben: Tami, you’re going to have to do a better job of finding me a new computer programmer. That last guy was great at programming, but he didn’t have any common sense.

Tami: What do you mean? The guy had a master’s degree with straight A’s.

Ben: Yes, well, last month he developed a new financial reporting system. He said we could do away with manually preparing an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and financial statements. The computer would automatically generate our financial statements with “a push of a button.”

Tami: So what’s the big deal? Sounds to me like it would save you time and effort.

Ben: Right! The balance sheet showed a minus for supplies!

Tami: Minus supplies? How can that be?

Ben: That’s what I asked.

Tami: So, what did he say?

Ben: Well, after he checked the program, he said that it must be right. The minuses were greater than the pluses

Tami: Didn’t he know that Supplies can’t have a credit balance—it must have a debit balance?

Ben: He asked me what a debit and credit were.

Tami: I see your point.

a. Comment on (a) the desirability of computerizing Main Street Co.’s financial reporting system, (b) the elimination of the end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) in a computerized accounting system, and (c) the computer programmer’s lack of accounting knowledge.

b. Explain to the programmer why Supplies could not have a credit balance.

assume that you recently accepted a position with five star national bank amp trust 541735

Financial statements

Assume that you recently accepted a position with Five Star National Bank & Trust as an assistant loan officer. As one of your first duties, you have been assigned the responsibility of evaluating a loan request for $300,000 from West Gate Auto Co., a small corporation. In support of the loan application, Joan Whalen, owner and sole stockholder, submitted a “Statement of Accounts” (trial balance) for the first year of operations ended October 31, 2014.

West Gate Auto Co. Statement of Accounts October 31, 2014

Debits Balances

Credit Balances

Cash

5,000

Billings Due from Others

40,000

Supplies (chemicals, etc.)

7,500

Building

222,300

Equipment

50,000

Amounts Owed to Others

31,000

Investment in Business

179,000

Service Revenue

215,000

Wages Expense

75,000

Utilities Expense

10,000

Rent Expense

8,000

Insurance Expense

6,000

Other Expenses

1,200

425,000

425,000

  1. Explain to Joan Whalen why a set of financial statements (income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet) would be useful to you in evaluating the loan request.
  2. In discussing the “Statement of Accounts” with Joan Whalen, you discovered that the accounts had not been adjusted at October 31. Analyze the “Statement of Accounts” and indicate possible adjusting entries that might be necessary before an accurate set of financial statements could be prepared.
  3. Assuming that an accurate set of financial statements will be submitted by Joan Whalen in a few days, what other considerations or information would you require before making a decision on the loan request?

    determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of two invoices a and b a 541749

    Freight terms

    Determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of two invoices, (a) and (b), assuming that credit for returns and allowances was received prior to payment and that all invoices were paid within the discount period.

    Merchandise

    Freight Paid by Seller

    Freight Terms

    Returns and Allowances

    a.

    $180,000

    $3,000

    FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30

    $20,000

    b.

    88,000

    1,250

    FOB destination, 2/10, n/30

    9,000

      the following financial statement data for years ending december 31 for latchkey 541755

      Ratio of net sales to assets

      The following financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Latchkey

      Company are shown below.

      2014

      2013

      Net sales

      $1,734,000

      $1,645,000

      Total assets:

      Beginning of year

      480,000

      460,000

      End of year

      540,000

      480,000

      1. Determine the ratio of net sales to assets for 2014 and 2013.
      2. Does the change in the ratio of net sales to assets from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?

        the following financial statement data for years ending december 31 for edison compa 541756

        Ratio of net sales to assets

        The following financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Edison Company are shown below.

        2014

        2013

        Net sales

        $1,884,000

        $1,562,000

        Total assets:

        Beginning of year

        770,000

        650,000

        End of year

        800,000

        770,000

        a. Determine the ratio of net sales to assets for 2014 and 2013.

        b. Does the change in the ratio of net sales to assets from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?

          determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of the following invoices 541766

          Determining amounts to be paid on invoices

          Determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of the following invoices, assuming that credit for returns and allowances was received prior to payment and that all invoices were paid within the discount period.

          Merchandise

          Freight Paid by seller

          Returns and Allowances

          a.

          $52,300

          ____

          FOB destination, n/30

          $2,700

          b.

          14,800

          $200

          FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30

          1,600

          c.

          19,100

          ____

          FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30

          1,300

          d.

          6,700

          80

          FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30

          300

          e.

          22,600

          ____

          FOB destination, 1/10, n/30

            monet paints co is a newly organized business with a list of accounts arranged in al 541769

            Chart of accounts

            Monet Paints Co. is a newly organized business with a list of accounts arranged in alphabetical order below.

            Accounts Payable

            Miscellaneous Selling Expense

            Accounts Receivable

            Notes Payable

            Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

            Office Equipment

            Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment

            Office Salaries Expense

            Advertising Expense

            Office Supplies

            Capital Stock

            Office Supplies Expense

            Cash

            Prepaid Insurance

            Cost of Merchandise Sold

            Rent Expense

            Delivery Expense

            Retained Earnings

            Depreciation Expense—Office Equipment

            Salaries Payable

            Depreciation Expense—Store Equipment

            Sales

            Dividends

            Sales Discounts

            Income Summary

            Sales Returns and Allowances

            Insurance Expense

            Sales Salaries Expense

            Interest Expense

            Store Equipment

            Land

            Store Supplies

            Merchandise Inventory

            Store Supplies Expense

            Miscellaneous Administrative Expense

            balance sheet and income statement order, as illustrated in. Each account number is three digits: the first digit is to indicate the major classification (1 for assets, and so on); the second digit is to indicate the sub classification (11 for current assets, and so on); and the third digit is to identify the specific account (110 for Cash, 112 for Accounts Receivable, 114 for Merchandise Inventory, 115 for Store Supplies, and so on).

              two items are omitted in each of the following four lists of income statement data d 541775

              Determining amounts for items omitted from income statement

              Two items are omitted in each of the following four lists of income statement data. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.

              Sales

              $525,000

              $733,000

              $1,440,000

              $ (g)

              Sales returns and allowances

              (a)

              28,000

              (e)

              85,000

              Sales discounts

              41,350

              17,500

              100,000

              65,000

              Net sales

              463,400

              (c)

              1,295,000

              (h)

              Cost of merchandise sold

              (b)

              410,000

              (f )

              900,000

              Gross profit

              83,500

              (d)

              275,000

              600,000

                on february 28 2014 the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of foldaway 541776

                Multiple-step income statement

                On February 28, 2014, the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of Foldaway Furnishings Company, a furniture wholesaler, are as follows:

                Accumulated Depreciation—Building

                $ 150,000

                Notes Payable

                400,000

                Administrative Expenses

                290,000

                Office Supplies

                20,000

                Building

                1,130,000

                Retained Earnings

                416,000

                Capital Stock

                175,000

                Salaries Payable

                6,000

                Cash

                97,000

                Sales

                2,850,000

                Cost of Merchandise Sold

                1,641,000

                Sales Discounts

                25,000

                Dividends

                50,000

                Sales Returns and Allowances

                90,000

                Interest Expense

                29,000

                Selling Expenses

                300,000

                Merchandise Inventory

                $ 260,000

                Store Supplies

                65,000

                1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended February 28, 2014.
                2. Compare the major advantages and disadvantages of the multiple-step and single-step forms of income statements.

                  identify the errors in the following income statement 541777

                  Multiple-step income statement

                  Identify the errors in the following income statement:

                  Curbstone Company Income Statement For the Year Ended August 31, 2014

                  Revenue from sales:

                  Sales

                  $9,132,000

                  Add: Sales returns and allowances

                  $422,000

                  Sales discounts

                  115,000

                  537,000

                  $9,669,000

                  Gross sales

                  6,110,000

                  Cost of merchandise sold

                  Income from operations

                  Expenses:

                  Selling expenses

                  $800,000

                  Administrative expenses

                  575,000

                  Delivery expense

                  425,000

                  Total expenses

                  1,800,000

                  $1,759,000

                  Other expense:

                  Interest revenue

                  45,000

                  Gross profit

                  $1,714,000

                    on october 31 2014 the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of acorn int 541781

                    Closing entries

                    On October 31, 2014, the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of Acorn Interiors Company, a furniture wholesaler, are as follows:

                    Accumulated Depr.—Building

                    $142,000

                    Notes Payable

                    $ 125,000

                    Administrative Expenses

                    300,000

                    Retained Earnings

                    105,000

                    Building

                    446,000

                    Sales

                    1,375,000

                    Capital Stock

                    75,000

                    Sales Discounts

                    20,000

                    Cash

                    60,000

                    Sales Returns and Allow.

                    13,000

                    Cost of Merchandise Sold

                    650,000

                    Sales Tax Payable

                    3,000

                    Dividends

                    25,000

                    Selling Expenses

                    140,000

                    Interest Expense

                    10,000

                    Store Supplies

                    23,000

                    Merchandise Inventory

                    126,000

                    Store Supplies Expense

                    12,000

                    Prepare the October 31, 2014, closing entries for Acorn Interiors Company.

                      the home depot reported the following data in millions in its recent financial state 541782

                      Ratio of net sales to assets

                      The Home Depot reported the following data (in millions) in its recent financial statements:

                      Year 2

                      Year 1

                      Net sales

                      $67,997

                      $66,176

                      Total assets at the end of the year

                      40,125

                      40,877

                      Total assets at the beginning of the year

                      40,877

                      41,164

                      1. Determine the ratio of net sales to assets for The Home Depot for Year 2 and Year 1.Round to two decimal places.
                      2. What conclusions can be drawn from these ratios concerning the trend in the ability of The Home Depot to effectively use its assets to generate sales?

                        kroger a national supermarket chain reported the following data in millions in its f 541783

                        Ratio of net sales to assets

                        Kroger, a national supermarket chain, reported the following data (in millions) in its financial statements for a recent year:

                        Total revenue

                        $82,189

                        Total assets at end of year

                        23,505

                        Total assets at beginning of year

                        23,126

                        1. Compute the ratio of net sales to assets. Round to two decimal places.
                        2. Tiffany & Co. is a large North American retailer of jewelry, with a ratio of net sales to assets of 0.85. Why would Tiffany’s ratio of net sales to assets be lower than that of Kroger?

                          the following data were extracted from the accounting records of harkins company for 541785

                          EX 5-33 Cost of merchandise sold and related items

                          The following data were extracted from the accounting records of Harkins Company for the year ended April 30, 2014:

                          Merchandise inventory, May 1, 2013

                          $380,000

                          Merchandise inventory, April 30, 2014

                          415,000

                          Purchases

                          3,800,000

                          Purchases returns and allowances

                          150,000

                          Purchases discounts

                          80,000

                          Sales

                          5,850,000

                          Freight in

                          16,600

                          a. Prepare the cost of merchandise sold section of the income statement for the year ended April 30, 2014, using the periodic inventory system.

                          b. Determine the gross profit to be reported on the income statement for the year ended April 30, 2014.

                          c. Would gross profit be different if the perpetual inventory system was used instead of the periodic inventory system?

                          identify the errors in the following schedule of the cost of merchandise sold for th 541788

                          EX 5-36 Cost of merchandise sold

                          Identify the errors in the following schedule of the cost of merchandise sold for the current year ended May 31, 2014:

                          Cost of merchandise sold:

                          Merchandise inventory, May 31, 2014

                          $105,000

                          Purchases

                          Plus: Purchases returns and allowances

                          $55,000

                          Purchases discounts

                          30,000

                          85,000

                          Gross purchases

                          $1,195,000

                          Less freight in

                          22,000

                          Cost of merchandise purchased

                          1,173,000

                          Merchandise available for sale

                          $1,278,000

                          Less merchandise inventory, June 1, 2013

                          91,300

                          Cost of merchandise sold

                          $1,186,700

                          rules of debit and credit for periodic inventory accounts complete the following tab 541789

                          EX 5-37 Rules of debit and credit for periodic inventory accounts Complete the following table by indicating for (a) through (g) whether the proper answer is debit or credit.

                          Account

                          Increase

                          Decrease

                          Normal Balance

                          Purchases

                          debit

                          (a)

                          (b)

                          Purchases Discounts

                          credit

                          (c)

                          credit

                          Purchases Returns and Allowances

                          (d)

                          (e)

                          (f )

                          Freight In

                          debit

                          (g)

                          debit

                          after the accounts have been adjusted at april 30 the end of the fiscal year the fol 541697

                          Closing entries

                          After the accounts have been adjusted at April 30, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Nuclear Landscaping Co.:

                          Retained Earnings

                          $643,600

                          Dividends

                          10,500

                          Fees Earned

                          356,500

                          Wages Expense

                          283,100

                          Rent Expense

                          56,000

                          Supplies Expense

                          11,500

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          13,000

                          Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.

                          holism consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by scott cutler the end of 541704

                          Financial statements from the end-of-period spreadsheet

                          Holism Consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by Scott Cutler. The end-of period spreadsheet shown below was prepared for the year ended May 31, 2014.

                          Holism Consulting

                          End-of-Period Spreadsheet

                          For the Year Ended May 31, 2014

                          Unadjusted

                          Adjusted

                          Trial Balance

                          Adjusted

                          Trial Balance

                          Account Title

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Cash

                          38,000

                          38,000

                          Accounts Receivable

                          90,000

                          90,000

                          Supplies

                          9,600

                          (a) 6,000

                          3,600

                          Office Equipment

                          74,000

                          74,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation

                          10,000

                          (b) 4,800

                          14,800

                          Accounts Payable

                          24,400

                          24,400

                          Salaries Payable

                          (c ) 1,500

                          1,500

                          Capital Stock

                          10,000

                          10,000

                          Retained Earnings

                          80,400

                          80,400

                          Dividends

                          12,000

                          12,000

                          Fees Earned

                          175,200

                          175,200

                          Salary Expense

                          69,000

                          (c) 1,500

                          70,500

                          Supplies Expense

                          (a) 6,000

                          6,000

                          Depreciation Expense

                          (b) 4,800

                          4,800

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          7,400

                          7,400

                          300,000

                          300,000

                          12,300

                          12,300

                          306,300

                          306,300

                          Based on the preceding spreadsheet, prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet for Holism Consulting.

                          olympia consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by raul hann the followin 541705

                          Financial statements from the end-of-period spreadsheet

                          Olympia Consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by Raul Hann. The following end-of-period spreadsheet was prepared for the year ended April 30, 2014.

                          Olympia Consulting

                          End-of-Period Spreadsheet

                          For the Year Ended April 30, 2014

                          Unadjusted

                          Adjusted

                          Trial Balance

                          Adjusted

                          Trial Balance

                          Account Title

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Cash

                          27,500

                          27,500

                          Accounts Receivable

                          53,500

                          53,500

                          Supplies

                          3,000

                          (a) 1,800

                          1,200

                          Office Equipment

                          30,500

                          30,500

                          Accumulated Depreciation

                          4,500

                          (b) 750

                          5,250

                          Accounts Payable

                          3,300

                          3,300

                          Salaries Payable

                          (c ) 450

                          450

                          Capital Stock

                          30,000

                          30,000

                          Retained Earnings

                          52,200

                          52,200

                          Dividends

                          2,000

                          2,000

                          Fees Earned

                          60,000

                          60,000

                          Salary Expense

                          32,000

                          32,450

                          Supplies Expense

                          1,800

                          Depreciation Expense

                          750

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          1,500

                          1,500

                          150,000

                          150,000

                          3,000

                          3,000

                          151,200

                          151,200

                          Based on the preceding spreadsheet, prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet for Olympia Consulting.

                          the following account balances were taken from the adjusted trial balance for shangh 541706

                          Income statement

                          The following account balances were taken from the adjusted trial balance for Shanghai Messenger Service, a delivery service firm, for the current fiscal year ended September 30, 2014:

                          Depreciation Expense

                          $ 7,250

                          Rent Expense

                          $ 36,000

                          Fees Earned

                          440,000

                          Salaries Expense

                          265,150

                          Insurance Expense

                          1,200

                          Supplies Expense

                          2,200

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          7,100

                          Utilities Expense

                          28,500

                          Prepare an income statement.

                          the following revenue and expense account balances were taken from the ledger of veg 541707

                          Income statement; net loss

                          The following revenue and expense account balances were taken from the ledger of Veggie Health Services Co. after the accounts had been adjusted on February 28, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year:

                          Depreciation Expense

                          $ 9,000

                          Service Revenue

                          $270,900

                          Insurance Expense

                          4,000

                          Supplies Expense

                          3,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          6,000

                          Utilities Expense

                          17,600

                          Rent Expense

                          42,000

                          Wages Expense

                          213,100

                          Prepare an income statement.

                          fedex corporation had the following revenue and expense account balances in millions 541708

                          Income statement

                          FedEx Corporation had the following revenue and expense account balances (in millions) for a recent year ending May 31, 2011:

                          Depreciation

                          $1,973

                          Purchased Transportation

                          $ 5,674

                          Fuel

                          4,151

                          Rentals and Landing Fees

                          2,462

                          Maintenance and Repairs

                          1,979

                          Revenues

                          39,304

                          Other Expense (Income) Net

                          5,524

                          Salaries and Employee Benefits

                          15,276

                          Provision for Income Taxes

                          813

                          a. Prepare an income statement.

                          b. Compare your income statement with the related income statement that is available at the FedEx Corporation, What similarities and differences do you see?

                          well systems co offers its services to residents in the dallas area selected account 541709

                          Retained earnings statement

                          Well Systems Co. offers its services to residents in the Dallas area. Selected accounts from the ledger of Well Systems Co. for the current fiscal year ended October 31, 2014, are as follows:

                          Retained Earnings

                          Dividends

                          Oct. 31

                          48,000

                          Nov. 1 (2013)

                          475,000

                          Jan. 31

                          12,000

                          Oct. 31

                          48,000

                          Oct. 31

                          90,000

                          Apr. 30

                          12,000

                          July 31

                          12,000

                          Oct. 31

                          12,000

                          Income Summary

                          Oct. 31

                          270,000

                          Oct. 31

                          360,000

                          31

                          90,000

                          Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year.

                          selected accounts from the ledger of weird sports for the current fiscal year ended 541710

                          Retained earnings statement; net loss

                          Selected accounts from the ledger of Weird Sports for the current fiscal year ended June 30, 2014, are as follows:

                          Retained Earnings

                          Dividends

                          June 30

                          20,900

                          July 1 (2013)

                          115,800

                          Sept. 30

                          6,000

                          June 30

                          24,000

                          30

                          24,000

                          Dec. 31

                          6,000

                          March 31

                          6,000

                          June 30

                          6,000

                          Income Summary

                          June 30

                          201,400

                          June 30

                          180,500

                          30

                          20,900

                          Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year.

                          labrador weight loss co offers personal weight reduction consulting services to indi 541713

                          Balance sheet

                          Labrador Weight Loss Co. offers personal weight reduction consulting services to individuals. After all the accounts have been closed on June 30, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year, the balances of selected accounts from the ledger of Labrador Weight Loss Co. are as follows:

                          Accounts Payable

                          $ 18,500

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          $ 19,200

                          Accounts Receivable

                          78,250

                          Prepaid Rent

                          18,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          103,300

                          Retained Earnings

                          509,000

                          Capital Stock

                          100,000

                          Salaries Payable

                          8,500

                          Cash

                          ?

                          Supplies

                          5,350

                          Equipment

                          300,000

                          Unearned Fees

                          9,000

                          Land

                          290,000

                          Prepare a classified balance sheet that includes the correct balance for Cash.

                          list the errors you find in the following balance sheet prepare a corrected balance 541714

                          Balance sheet

                          List the errors you find in the following balance sheet. Prepare a corrected balance sheet.

                          Labyrinth Services Co.

                          Balance Sheet

                          For the Year Ended August 31, 2014

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          Current assets:

                          Current liabilities:

                          Cash

                          $18,500

                          Accounts receivable . .

                          $ 41,400

                          Accounts payable . .

                          31,300

                          Accum. depr.—building

                          155,000

                          Supplies

                          6,500

                          Accum. depr.—equipment

                          25,000

                          Prepaid insurance . .

                          16,600

                          Net income .

                          118,200

                          Land

                          225,000

                          Total liabilities

                          $339,600

                          Total current

                          $297,900

                          Property, plant, and equipment

                          Stockholders’ Equity

                          Building .

                          $400,000

                          Wages payable . .

                          $6,500

                          Equipment ?

                          97,000

                          Capital stock . ????????

                          75,000

                          Total property, Plant and equipment

                          635,400

                          Retained earnings

                          512,200

                          Total stockholders’ equity

                          593,700

                          Total assets .

                          $933,300

                          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity .

                          $933,300

                          from the list at the top of the next page identify the accounts that should be close 541715

                          Identifying accounts to be closed

                          From the list at the top of the next page, identify the accounts that should be closed to Income Summary at the end of the fiscal year:

                          a. Accounts Payable

                          g. Fees Earned

                          b. Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          h. Land

                          c. Capital Stock

                          i. Supplies

                          d. Depreciation Expense—Equipment

                          j. Supplies Expense

                          e. Dividends

                          k. Wages Expense

                          f. Equipment

                          l. Wages Payable

                          grande services co offers its services to individuals desiring to improve their pers 541718

                          Closing entries with net loss

                          Grande Services Co. offers its services to individuals desiring to improve their personal images. After the accounts have been adjusted at July 31, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Grande Services Co.

                          Retained Earnings

                          $842,500

                          Rent Expense

                          $54,000

                          Dividends

                          45,000

                          Supplies Expense

                          14,300

                          Fees Earned

                          337,900

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          16,200

                          Wages Expense

                          277,500

                          Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.

                          an accountant prepared the following post closing trial balance 541720

                          Post-closing trial balance

                          An accountant prepared the following post-closing trial balance:

                          Igloo Treasures Co. Post-Closing Trial Balance January 31, 2014

                          Debits Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash

                          21,350

                          Accounts Receivable

                          56,700

                          Supplies

                          7,500

                          Equipment

                          74,450

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          12,400

                          Accounts Payable

                          29,600

                          Salaries Payable

                          3,200

                          Unearned Rent

                          11,000

                          Capital Stock

                          25,000

                          Retained Earnings

                          78,800

                          234,850

                          85,150

                          Prepare a corrected post-closing trial balance. Assume that all accounts have normal balances and that the amounts shown are correct.

                          the following data in thousands were taken from recent financial statements of under 541722

                          Working capital and current ratio OBJ.7

                          The following data (in thousands) were taken from recent financial statements of Under Armour, Inc.:

                          December 31

                          Year 2

                          Year 1

                          Current assets

                          $555,850

                          $448,000

                          Current liabilities

                          149,147

                          120,162

                          a. Compute the working capital and the current ratio as of December 31, Year 2 and Year 1. Round to two decimal places.

                          b. What conclusions concerning the company’s ability to meet its financial obligations can you draw from part (a)?

                          completing an end of period spreadsheet work sheet list a through j in the order the 541724

                          Completing an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) List (a) through (j) in the order they would be performed in preparing and completing an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet).

                          a. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.

                          b. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Balance Sheet and Income Statement columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.

                          c. Add or deduct adjusting entry data to trial balance amounts, and extend amounts to the Adjusted Trial Balance columns.

                          d. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Adjustments columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.

                          e. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Balance Sheet and Income Statement columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to determine the amount of net income or net loss for the period.

                          f. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Adjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.

                          g. Enter the adjusting entries into the spreadsheet (work sheet), based on the adjustment data.

                          h. Enter the amount of net income or net loss for the period in the proper Income Statement column and Balance Sheet column.

                          i. Enter the unadjusted account balances from the general ledger into the Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet).

                          j. Extend the adjusted trial balance amounts to the Income Statement columns and the Balance Sheet columns.

                          a financial statements and closing entries obj 2 3 ironside security services is an 541725

                          A Financial statements and closing entries OBJ. 2, 3 Ironside Security Services is an investigative services firm that is owned and operated by Don Chadwell. On April 30, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year, the accountant for Ironside Security Services prepared an end-of-period spreadsheet, a part of which is shown as per below :

                          Iron side Security Services End-of-Period Spreadsheet For the Year Ended April 30, 2014

                          Adjusted

                          Trial Balance

                          Account Title

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Cash

                          18,000

                          Accounts Receivable

                          37,200

                          Supplies

                          7,500

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          4,800

                          Building

                          240,500

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Building

                          55,200

                          Accounts Payable

                          6,000

                          Salaries Payable

                          1,500

                          Unearned Rent

                          3,000

                          Capital Stock

                          35,000

                          Retained Earnings

                          144,300

                          Dividends

                          10,000

                          Service Fees

                          480,000

                          Rent Revenue

                          25,000

                          Salaries Expense

                          336,000

                          Rent Expense

                          62,500

                          Supplies Expense

                          12,000

                          Depreciation Expense—Building

                          6,000

                          Utilities Expense

                          4,400

                          Repairs Expense

                          3,200

                          Insurance Expense

                          2,800

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          5,100

                          750,000

                          750,000

                          Instructions

                          1. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.

                          2. Journalize the entries that were required to close the accounts at April 30.

                          3. If Retained Earnings has instead decreased $47,500 after the closing entries were posted, and the dividends remained the same, what would have been the amount of net income or net loss?

                          a t accounts adjusting entries financial statements and obj 2 3 closing entries opti 541726

                          A T accounts, adjusting entries, financial statements, and OBJ. 2, 3 closing entries; optional end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet)

                          The unadjusted trial balance of Epicenter Laundry at June 30, 2014, the end of the current Finical year, is shown below.

                          Epicenter Laundry Unadjusted Trial Balance June 30, 2014

                          Debits Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash . .

                          11,000

                          Laundry Supplies

                          21,500

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          9,600

                          Laundry Equipment .

                          232,600

                          Accumulated Depreciation

                          125,400

                          Accounts Payable

                          11,800

                          Capital Stock .

                          40,000

                          Retained Earnings . .

                          65,600

                          Dividends

                          10,000

                          Laundry Revenue

                          232,200

                          Wages Expense .

                          125,200

                          Rent Expense .

                          40,000

                          Utilities Expense

                          19,700

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          5,400

                          475,000

                          475,000

                          The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:

                          1. Laundry supplies on hand at June 30 are $3,600.
                          2. Insurance premiums expired during the year are $5,700.
                          3. Depreciation of laundry equipment during the year is $6,500.
                          4. Wages accrued but not paid at June 30 are $1,100.

                          Instructions

                          1. For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in a T account. Identify the balance as “June 30 Bal.” In addition, add T accounts for Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Laundry Supplies Expense, Insurance Expense, and Income Summary.
                          2. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (1) as needed.
                          3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Identify the adjustments by “Adj.” and the new balances as “Adj. Bal.”
                          4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
                          5. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
                          6. Journalize and post the closing entries. Identify the closing entries by “Clos.”

                          Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

                          the gorman group is a financial planning services firm owned and operated by nicole 541727

                          Financial statements and closing entries

                          The Gorman Group is a financial planning services firm owned and operated by Nicole Gorman. As of October 31, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year, the accountant for The Gorman Group prepared an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet), part of which is shown below.

                          The Gorman Group End-of-Period Spreadsheet For the Year Ended October 31, 2014

                          Adjusted

                          Trial Balance

                          Account Title

                          Dr.

                          Cr.

                          Cash

                          11,000

                          Accounts Receivable

                          28,150

                          Supplies

                          6,350

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          9,500

                          Land

                          75,000

                          Buildings

                          250,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

                          117,200

                          Equipment

                          240,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          151,700

                          Accounts Payable

                          33,300

                          Salaries Payable

                          3,300

                          Unearned Rent

                          1,500

                          Capital Stock

                          25,000

                          Retained Earnings

                          195,000

                          Dividends

                          20,000

                          Service Fees

                          468,000

                          Rent Revenue

                          5,000

                          Salaries Expense

                          291,000

                          Depreciation Expense—Equipment

                          17,500

                          Rent Expense

                          15,500

                          Supplies Expense

                          9,000

                          Utilities Expense

                          8,500

                          Depreciation Expense—Buildings

                          6,600

                          Repairs Expense

                          3,450

                          Insurance Expense

                          3,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          5,450

                          1,000,000

                          1,000,000

                          Instructions

                          1. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
                          2. Journalize the entries that were required to close the accounts at October 31.

                          If the balance of Retained Earnings had instead increased $115,000 after the closing entries were posted, and the dividends remained the same, what would have been the amount of net income or net loss?

                          t accounts adjusting entries financial statements and closing entries optional end o 541728

                          T accounts, adjusting entries, financial statements, and closing entries; optional end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) The unadjusted trial balance of La Mesa Laundry at August 31, 2014, the end of the current finical year, is shown below.

                          La Mesa Laundry Unadjusted Trial Balance August 31, 2014

                          Debits Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash . .

                          3,800

                          Laundry Supplies

                          9,000

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          6,000

                          Laundry Equipment .

                          180,800

                          Accumulated Depreciation

                          49,200

                          Accounts Payable

                          7,800

                          Capital Stock .

                          15,000

                          Retained Earnings . .

                          80,000

                          Dividends

                          2,400

                          Laundry Revenue

                          248,000

                          Wages Expense .

                          135,800

                          Rent Expense .

                          43,200

                          Utilities Expense

                          16,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          3,000

                          400,000

                          400,000

                          The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:

                          1. Wages accrued but not paid at August 31 are $2,200.
                          2. Depreciation of equipment during the year is $8,150.
                          3. Laundry supplies on hand at August 31 are $2,000.
                          4. Insurance premiums expired during the year are $5,300.

                          Instructions

                          1. For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in a T account. Identify the balance as “Aug. 31 Bal.” In addition, add T accounts for Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Laundry Supplies Expense, Insurance Expense, and Income Summary.
                          2. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (1) as needed.
                          3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Identify the adjustments by “Adj.” and the new balances as “Adj. Bal.”
                          4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
                          5. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
                          6. Journalize and post the closing entries. Identify the closing entries by “Clos.”
                          7. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

                          ledger accounts adjusting entries financial statements and closing entries optional 541729

                          Ledger accounts, adjusting entries, financial statements, and closing entries; optional end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) The unadjusted trial balance of Recessive Interiors at January 31, 2014, the end of the current year, is shown below.

                          Recessive Interiors Unadjusted Trial Balance January 31, 2014

                          Debits Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          11 Cash

                          13,100

                          13 Supplies

                          8,000

                          14 Prepaid Insurance

                          7,500

                          16 Equipment

                          113,000

                          17 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          12,000

                          18 Trucks

                          90,000

                          19 Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks

                          27,100

                          21 Accounts Payable

                          4,500

                          31 Capital Stock

                          30,000

                          32 Retained Earnings

                          96,400

                          33 Dividends

                          3,000

                          41 Service Revenue

                          155,000

                          51 Wages Expense

                          72,000

                          52 Rent Expense

                          7,600

                          53 Truck Expense

                          5,350

                          59 Miscellaneous Expense

                          5,450

                          325,000

                          325,000

                          The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:

                          1. Supplies on hand at January 31 are $2,850.
                          2. Insurance premiums expired during the year are $3,150.
                          3. Depreciation of equipment during the year is $5,250.
                          4. Depreciation of trucks during the year is $4,000.
                          5. Wages accrued but not paid at January 31 are $900.

                          Instructions

                          1. For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in the appropriate Balance column of a four-column account and place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column.
                          2. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (3) as needed.
                          3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries, inserting balances in the accounts affected. The following additional accounts from Recessive Interiors’ chart of accounts should be used: Wages Payable, 22; Depreciation Expense—Equipment, 54; Supplies Expense, 55; Depreciation Expense— Trucks, 56; Insurance Expense, 57.
                          4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
                          5. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
                          6. Journalize and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #34 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
                          7. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

                          electro repairs amp service an electronics repair store prepared the unadjusted tria 541662

                          Adjusting entries

                          Electro Repairs & Service, an electronics repair store, prepared the unadjusted trial balance shown below at the end of its first year of operations.

                          Electro Repairs & Service

                          Unadjusted Trial Balance

                          June 30, 2014

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash .

                          13,800

                          Accounts Receivable .

                          90,000

                          Supplies

                          21,600

                          Equipment . .

                          154,800

                          Accounts Payable . .

                          21,000

                          Unearned Fees

                          24,000

                          Capital Stock

                          40,000

                          Retained Earnings .

                          122,000

                          Dividends

                          18,000

                          Fees Earned .

                          393,000

                          Wages Expense

                          126,000

                          Rent Expense

                          96,000

                          Utilities Expense

                          69,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          10,800

                          600,000

                          600,000

                          for preparing the adjusting entries the following data were assembled 541663

                          For preparing the adjusting entries, the following data were assembled:

                          1. Fees earned but unbilled on June 30 were $12,700.

                          2. Supplies on hand on June 30 were $4,175.

                          3. Depreciation of equipment was estimated to be $7,400 for the year.

                          4. The balance in unearned fees represented the June 1 receipt in advance for services to be provided. Only $14,200 of the services was provided between June 1 and June 30.

                          5. Unpaid wages accrued on June 30 were $1,100.

                          6.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the adjusting entries necessary on June 30, 2014.

                          2. Determine the revenues, expenses, and net income of Electro Service & Repairs before the adjusting entries.

                          3. Determine the revenues, expense, and net income of Electro Service & Repairs after the adjusting entries.

                          4. Determine the effect of the adjusting entries on Retained Earnings.

                          good note company specializes in the repair of music equipment and is owned and oper 541664

                          Adjusting entries

                          Good Note Company specializes in the repair of music equipment and is owned and operated by Robin Stahl. On November 30, 2014, the end of the current year, the accountant for Good Note Company prepared the following trial balances:

                          Good Note Company

                          Trial Balances

                          November 30, 2014

                          Unadjusted

                          Adjusted

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash .

                          38,250

                          38,250

                          Accounts Receivable

                          89,500

                          89,500

                          Supplies

                          11,250

                          2,400

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          14,250

                          3,850

                          Equipment .

                          290,450

                          290,450

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          94,500

                          106,100

                          Automobiles

                          129,500

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Automobiles . .

                          54,750

                          62,050

                          Accounts Payable

                          24,930

                          26,130

                          Salaries Payable .

                          8,100

                          Unearned Service Fees .

                          18,000

                          9,000

                          Capital Stock

                          100,000

                          100,000

                          Retained Earnings .

                          224,020

                          224,020

                          Dividends . .

                          75,000

                          75,000

                          Service Fees Earned

                          733,800

                          742,800

                          Salary Expense . .

                          516,900

                          525,000

                          Rent Expense

                          54,000

                          54,000

                          Supplies Expense

                          8,850

                          Depreciation Expense—Equipment . .

                          11,600

                          Depreciation Expense—Automobiles

                          7,300

                          Utilities Expense .

                          12,900

                          14,100

                          Taxes Expense

                          8,175

                          8,175

                          Insurance Expense .

                          10,400

                          Miscellaneous Expense .

                          9,825

                          9,825

                          ,

                          1,250,000

                          1,250,000

                          1,250,000

                          1,250,000

                          Instructions

                          Journalize the seven entries that adjusted the accounts at November 30. None of the accounts were affected by more than one adjusting entry.

                          dickens company is a small editorial services company owned and operated by monica b 541665

                          Adjusting entries and adjusted trial balances

                          Dickens Company is a small editorial services company owned and operated by Monica Baker. On October 31, 2014, the end of the current year, Dickens Company’s accounting clerk prepared the unadjusted trial balance shown below.

                          Dickens Company

                          Unadjusted Trial Balance

                          October 31, 2014

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash .

                          7,500

                          Accounts Receivable .

                          38,400

                          Prepaid Insurance . .

                          7,200

                          Supplies

                          1,980

                          Land .

                          112,500

                          Building

                          150,250

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Building

                          87,550

                          Equipment . .

                          135,300

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          97,950

                          Accounts Payable . .

                          12,150

                          Unearned Rent

                          6,750

                          Capital Stock

                          75,000

                          Retained Earnings .

                          146,000

                          Dividends

                          15,000

                          Fees Earned .

                          324,600

                          Salaries and Wages Expense

                          193,370

                          Utilities Expense

                          42,375

                          Advertising Expense .

                          22,800

                          Repairs Expense

                          17,250

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          6,075

                          750,000

                          750,000

                          The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:

                          1. Unexpired insurance at October 31, $5,400.

                          2. Supplies on hand at October 31, $375.

                          3. Depreciation of building for the year, $6,000.

                          4. Depreciation of equipment for the year, $3,000.

                          5. Rent unearned at October 31, $1,350.

                          6. Accrued salaries and wages at October 31, $2,900.

                          7. Fees earned but unbilled on October 31, $18,600.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the adjusting entries using the following additional accounts: Salaries and Wages Payable; Rent Revenue; Insurance Expense; Depreciation Expense—Building; Depreciation Expense—Equipment; and Supplies Expense.

                          2. Determine the balances of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries, and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

                          at the end of april the first month of operations the following selected data were t 541666

                          Adjusting entries and errors

                          At the end of April, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Shelby Crawford, an attorney:

                          Net income for April

                          $120,000

                          Total assets at April 30

                          750,000

                          Total liabilities at April 30

                          300,000

                          Total stockholders’ equity at April 30

                          450,000

                          In preparing the financial statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:

                          1. Supplies used during April, $2,750.

                          2. Unbilled fees earned at April 30, $23,700.

                          3. Depreciation of equipment for April, $1,800.

                          4. Accrued wages at April 30, $1,400.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the entries to record the omitted adjustments.

                          2. Determine the correct amount of net income for April and the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity at April 30. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effect of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the following. Adjustment (a) is presented as an example.

                          Net Income

                          Total Assets

                          =

                          Total Liabilities

                          +

                          Total Stockholders’ Equity

                          Reported amounts

                          $120,000

                          $750,000

                          $300,000

                          $450,000

                          Corrections:

                          Adjustment (a)

                          -2,750

                          -2,750

                          -2,750

                          Adjustment (b)

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          Adjustment (c)

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          Adjustment (d)

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          Corrected amounts

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          on may 31 2014 the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in prepa 541667

                          Adjusting entries

                          On May 31, 2014, the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in preparing the adjusting entries for Oceanside Realty:

                          1. Fees accrued but unbilled at May 31 are $19,750.

                          2. The supplies account balance on May 31 is $12,300. The supplies on hand at May 31 are $4,150.

                          3. Wages accrued but not paid at May 31 are $2,700.

                          4. The unearned rent account balance at May 31 is $9,000, representing the receipt of an advance payment on May 1 of three months’ rent from tenants.

                          5. Depreciation of office equipment is $3,200.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the adjusting entries required at May 31, 2014.

                          2. Briefly explain the difference between adjusting entries and entries that would be made to correct errors.

                          selected account balances before adjustment for intuit realty at november 30 2014 th 541668

                          Adjusting entries

                          Selected account balances before adjustment for Intuit Realty at November 30, 2014, the end of the current year, are shown below.

                          Debits

                          Credits

                          Accounts Receivable

                          $ 75,000

                          Equipment

                          250,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          $ 12,000

                          Prepaid Rent

                          Supplies

                          Wages Payable

                          Unearned Fees

                          10,000

                          Fees Earned

                          400,000

                          Wages Expense

                          Rent Expense

                          140,000

                          Depreciation Expense

                          Supplies Expense

                          Data needed for year-end adjustments are as follows:

                          a. Supplies on hand at November 30, $550.

                          b. Depreciation of equipment during year, $1,675.

                          c. Rent expired during year, $8,500.

                          d. Wages accrued but not paid at November 30, $2,000.

                          e. Unearned fees at November 30, $4,000.

                          f. Unbilled fees at November 30, $5,380.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the six adjusting entries required at November 30, based on the data presented.

                          2. What would be the effect on the income statement if adjustments (b) and (e) were omitted at the end of the year?

                          3. What would be the effect on the balance sheet if adjustments (b) and (e) were omitted at the end of the year?

                          4. What would be the effect on the “Net increase or decrease in cash” on the statement of cash flows if adjustments (b) and (e) were omitted at the end of the year?

                          crazy mountain outfitters co an outfitter store for fishing treks prepared the follo 541669

                          Adjusting entries

                          Crazy Mountain Outfitters Co., an outfitter store for fishing treks, prepared the following unadjusted trial balance at the end of its first year of operations:

                          Crazy Mountain Outfitters Co.

                          Unadjusted Trial Balance

                          April 30, 2014

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash .

                          11,400

                          Accounts Receivable .

                          72,600

                          Supplies

                          7,200

                          Equipment . .

                          112,000

                          Accounts Payable . .

                          12,200

                          Unearned Fees

                          19,200

                          Capital Stock

                          20,000

                          Retained Earnings .

                          117,800

                          Dividends . .

                          10,000

                          Fees Earned .

                          305,800

                          Wages Expense

                          157,800

                          Rent Expense

                          55,000

                          Utilities Expense

                          42,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          7,000

                          475,000

                          475,000

                          reece financial services co which specializes in appliance repair services is owned 541672

                          Adjusting entries and adjusted trial balances

                          Reece Financial Services Co., which specializes in appliance repair services, is owned and operated by Joni Reece. Reece Financial Services Co.’s accounting clerk prepared the unadjusted trial balance at July 31, 2014, shown below.

                          Reece Financial Services Co.

                          Unadjusted Trial Balance

                          July 31, 2014

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash

                          10,200

                          Accounts Receivable

                          34,750

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          6,000

                          Supplies

                          1,725

                          Land

                          50,000

                          Building

                          155,750

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Building

                          62,850

                          Equipment

                          45,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

                          17,650

                          Accounts Payable

                          3,750

                          Unearned Rent

                          3,600

                          Capital Stock

                          60,000

                          Retained Earnings

                          93,550

                          Dividends

                          8,000

                          Fees Earned

                          158,600

                          Salaries and Wages Expense

                          56,850

                          Utilities Expense

                          14,100

                          Advertising Expense

                          7,500

                          Repairs Expense

                          6,100

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          4,025

                          400,000

                          400,000

                          The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:

                          1) Depreciation of building for the year, $6,400.

                          2) Depreciation of equipment for the year, $2,800.

                          3) Accrued salaries and wages at July 31, $900.

                          4) Unexpired insurance at July 31, $1,500.

                          5) Fees earned but unbilled on July 31, $10,200.

                          6) Supplies on hand at July 31, $615.

                          7) Rent unearned at July 31, $300.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the adjusting entries using the following additional accounts: Salaries and Wages Payable; Rent Revenue; Insurance Expense; Depreciation Expense—Building; Depreciation Expense—Equipment; and Supplies Expense.

                          2. Determine the balances of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

                          at the end of august the first month of operations the following selected data were 541673

                          Adjusting entries and errors

                          At the end of August, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Tucker Jacobs, an attorney:

                          Net income for August

                          $112,500

                          Total assets at August 31

                          650,000

                          Total liabilities at August 31

                          225,000

                          Total stockholders’ equity at August 31

                          425,000

                          In preparing the financial statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:

                          1. Unbilled fees earned at August 31, $31,900.

                          2. Depreciation of equipment for August, $7,500.

                          3. Accrued wages at August 31, $5,200.

                          4. Supplies used during August, $3,000.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the entries to record the omitted adjustments.

                          2. Determine the correct amount of net income for August and the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity at August 31. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effect of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the following. Adjustment (a) is presented as an example.

                          Net Income

                          Total Assets

                          =

                          Total Liabilities

                          +

                          Total Stockholders’ Equity

                          Reported amounts

                          $112,500

                          $650,000

                          $225,000

                          $425,000

                          Corrections:

                          Adjustment (a)

                          +31,900

                          +31,900

                          0

                          +31,900

                          Adjustment (b)

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          Adjustment (c)

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          Adjustment (d)

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          Corrected amounts

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          ____

                          the following is an excerpt from a conversation between sonia lopez and pete lemke j 541676

                          Accrued revenue

                          The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Sonia Lopez and Pete Lemke just before they boarded a flight to Paris on Delta Air Lines. They are going to Paris to attend their company’s annual sales conference. Sonia: Pete, aren’t you taking an introductory accounting course at college? Pete: Yes, I decided it’s about time I learned something about accounting. You know, our annual bonuses are based on the sales figures that come from the accounting department. Sonia: I guess I never really thought about it. Pete: You should think about it! Last year, I placed a $5,000,000 order on December 30. But when I got my bonus, the $5,000,000 sale wasn’t included. They said it hadn’t been shipped until January 9, so it would have to count in next year’s bonus.

                          Sonia: A real bummer!

                          Pete: Right! I was counting on that bonus including the $5,000,000 sale.

                          Sonia: Did you complain?

                          Pete: Yes, but it didn’t do any good. Julie, the head accountant, said something about matching revenues and expenses. Also, something about not recording revenues until the sale is final. I figure I’d take the accounting course and find out whether she’s just messing with me.

                          Sonia: I never really thought about it. When do you think Delta Air Lines will record its revenues from this flight?

                          Pete: Hmmm I guess it could record the revenue when it sells the ticket or when the boarding passes are scanned at the door or when we get off the plane or when our company pays for the tickets or I don’t know. I’ll ask my accounting instructor.

                          Discuss when Delta Air Lines should recognize the revenue from ticket sales to properly match revenues and expenses.

                          several years ago your brother opened magna appliance repairs he made a small initia 541678

                          Adjustments and financial statements

                          Several years ago, your brother opened Magna Appliance Repairs. He made a small initial investment and added money from his personal bank account as needed. He withdrew money for living expenses at irregular intervals. As the business grew, he hired an assistant. He is now considering adding more employees, purchasing additional service trucks, and purchasing the building he now rents. To secure funds for the expansion, your brother submitted a loan application to the bank and included the most recent financial statements (shown below) prepared from accounts maintained by a part-time bookkeeper.

                          Magna Appliance Repairs

                          Income Statement

                          For the Year Ended October 31, 2014

                          Service revenue .

                          $675,000

                          Less: Rent paid

                          $187,200

                          Wages paid .

                          148,500

                          Supplies paid

                          42,000

                          Utilities paid

                          39,000

                          Insurance paid . .

                          21,600

                          Miscellaneous payments

                          54,600

                          492,900

                          Net income

                          $182,100

                          Magna Appliance Repairs

                          Balance Sheet

                          October 31, 2014

                          Assets

                          Cash

                          $95,400

                          Amounts due from customer

                          112,500

                          Truck

                          332,100

                          Total assets

                          $540,000

                          Equities

                          Capital

                          $100,000

                          Retimed earning

                          440,000

                          Total equities

                          $540,000

                          After reviewing the financial statements, the loan officer at the bank asked your brother if he used the accrual basis of accounting for revenues and expenses. Your brother responded that he did and that is why he included an account for “Amounts Due from Customers.” The loan officer then asked whether or not the accounts were adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements. Your brother answered that they had not been adjusted.

                          1. Why do you think the loan officer suspected that the accounts had not been adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements?

                          2. Indicate possible accounts that might need to be adjusted before an accurate set of financial statements could be prepared.

                          the fiscal years for several well known companies are as follows 541689

                          The fiscal years for several well-known companies are as follows:

                          Company

                          Fiscal Year Ending

                          Sears

                          January 30

                          JCPenney

                          January 30

                          Target Corp.

                          January 30

                          Home Depot

                          January 31

                          Tiffany & Co.

                          January 31

                          Limited Brands, Inc.

                          January 31

                          What general characteristic shared by these companies explains why they do not have fiscal years ending December 31?

                          after the accounts have been adjusted at august 31 the end of the fiscal year the fo 541696

                          Closing entries

                          After the accounts have been adjusted at August 31, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Marcy Delivery Services Co.:

                          Retained Earnings

                          $1,400,000

                          Dividends

                          55,000

                          Fees Earned

                          880,000

                          Wages Expense

                          524,000

                          Rent Expense

                          80,000

                          Supplies Expense

                          16,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          9,000

                          Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.

                          the accountant for astaire medical co a medical services consulting firm mistakenly 541653

                          Effects of errors on financial statements

                          The accountant for Astaire Medical Co., a medical services consulting firm, mistakenly omitted adjusting entries for (a) unearned revenue earned during the year ($23,250) and (b) accrued wages ($4,000). Indicate the effect of each error, considered individually, on the income statement for the current year ended August 31. Also indicate the effect of each error on the August 31 balance sheet. Set up a table similar to the following, and record your answers by inserting the dollar amount in the appropriate spaces. Insert a zero if the error does not affect the item.

                          Error(a)

                          Error(b)

                          Over-stated

                          Under-Stated

                          Over-Stated

                          Under-stated

                          1.

                          Revenue for the year would be

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          2.

                          Expenses for the year would be

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          3.

                          Net income for the year would be

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          4.

                          Assets at August 31 would be

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          5.

                          Liabilities at August 31 would be

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          6.

                          Stockholders’ equity at August 31 would be

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          $_____

                          the unadjusted and adjusted trial balances for editorial services co on march 31 201 541656

                          Adjusting entries from trial balances

                          The unadjusted and adjusted trial balances for Editorial Services Co. on March 31, 2014,are shown below.

                          Editorial Services Co.

                          Trial Balances

                          March 31, 2014

                          Unadjusted

                          Adjusted

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash . .

                          8

                          8

                          Accounts Receivable

                          19

                          22

                          Supplies

                          6

                          5

                          Prepaid Insurance .

                          10

                          4

                          Land . .

                          13

                          13

                          Equipment .

                          20

                          20

                          Accumulated Depreciation—

                          4

                          6

                          Accounts Payable .

                          13

                          13

                          Wages Payable

                          0

                          1

                          Capital Stock .

                          15

                          15

                          Retained Earnings

                          31

                          31

                          Dividends . .

                          4

                          4

                          Fees Earned

                          37

                          40

                          Wages Expense

                          12

                          13

                          Rent Expense .

                          4

                          4

                          Insurance Expense

                          0

                          6

                          Utilities Expense . .

                          2

                          2

                          Depreciation Expense

                          0

                          2

                          Supplies Expense .

                          0

                          1

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          2

                          2

                          100

                          106

                          106

                          Journalize the five entries that adjusted the accounts at March 31, 2014. None of the accounts were affected by more than one adjusting entry.

                          the accountant for eva s laundry prepared the following unadjusted and adjusted tria 541657

                          Adjusting entries from trial balances

                          The accountant for Eva’s Laundry prepared the following unadjusted and adjusted trial balances. Assume that all balances in the unadjusted trial balance and the amounts of the adjustments are correct. Identify the errors in the accountant’s adjusting entries, assuming that none of the accounts were affected by more than one adjusting entry.

                          Eva’s Laundry

                          Trial Balances

                          May 31, 2014

                          Unadjusted

                          Adjusted

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Debit Balances

                          Credit Balances

                          Cash .

                          7,500

                          7,500

                          Accounts Receivable .

                          18,250

                          23,250

                          Laundry Supplies

                          3,750

                          6,750

                          Prepaid Insurance*

                          5,200

                          1,600

                          Laundry Equipment . .

                          190,000

                          177,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation—Laundry

                          48,000

                          48,000

                          Accounts Payable

                          9,600

                          9,600

                          Wages Payable

                          1,000

                          Capital Stock . .

                          35,000

                          35,000

                          Retained Earnings

                          75,300

                          75,300

                          Dividends

                          28,775

                          Laundry Revenue

                          182,100

                          182,100

                          Wages Expense

                          49,200

                          49,200

                          Rent Expense . .

                          25,575

                          25,575

                          Utilities Expense .

                          18,500

                          18,500

                          Depreciation Expense

                          13,000

                          Laundry Supplies Expense

                          3,000

                          Insurance Expense

                          600

                          Miscellaneous Expense .

                          3,250

                          3,250

                          350,000

                          350,000

                          358,000

                          351,000

                          the following data in millions are taken from recent financial statements of nike in 541658

                          Vertical analysis of income statement

                          The following data (in millions) are taken from recent financial statements of Nike Inc.:

                          Year 2

                          Year 1

                          Net sales (revenues)

                          $19,014

                          $19,176

                          Net income

                          1,907

                          1,487

                          a. Determine the amount of change (in millions) and percent of change in net income for Year 2. Round to one decimal place.

                          b. Determine the percentage relationship between net income and net sales (net income divided by net sales) for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.

                          c. What conclusions can you draw from your analysis?

                          the following income statement data in millions for dell inc and hewlett packard com 541659

                          Vertical analysis of income statement

                          The following income statement data (in millions) for Dell, Inc., and Hewlett-Packard Company (HP) were taken from their recent annual reports:

                          Dell

                          Hewlett-Packard

                          Net sales

                          $61,494

                          $126,033

                          Cost of goods sold (expense)

                          (50,098)

                          (96,089)

                          Operating expenses

                          (7,963)

                          (18,465)

                          Operating income (loss)

                          $ 3,433

                          $ 11,479

                          1. Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement for Dell. Round to one decimal place.

                          2. Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement for HP. Round to one decimal place.

                          3. Based on (a) and (b), how does Dell compare to HP?

                          selected account balances before adjustment for heartland realty at august 31 2014 t 541661

                          Adjusting entries

                          Selected account balances before adjustment for Heartland Realty at August 31, 2014, the end of the current year, are as follows:

                          Debits

                          Credits

                          Accounts Receivable

                          $ 80,000

                          Equipment

                          150,000

                          Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment

                          $28,000

                          Prepaid Rent

                          6,000

                          Supplies

                          3,000

                          Wages Payable

                          Unearned Fees

                          10,500

                          Fees Earned

                          410,000

                          Wages Expense

                          190,000

                          Rent Expense

                          Depreciation Expense

                          Supplies Expense

                          Data needed for year-end adjustments are as follows:

                          a. Unbilled fees at August 31, $9,150.

                          b. Supplies on hand at August 31, $675.

                          c. Rent expired, $5,000.

                          d. Depreciation of equipment during year, $3,300.

                          e. Unearned fees at August 31, $3,000.

                          f. Wages accrued but not paid at August 31, $3,100.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize the six adjusting entries required at August 31, based on the data presented.

                          2. What would be the effect on the income statement if adjustments (a) and (f) were omitted at the end of the year?

                          3. What would be the effect on the balance sheet if adjustments (a) and (f) were omitted at the end of the year?

                          4. What would be the effect on the “Net increase or decrease in cash” on the statement of cash flows if adjustments (a) and (f) were omitted at the end of the year?

                          during 2009 arctic fans amp blowers has invested 245 000 of extra cash in securities 541581

                          810-168. Investments.

                          During 2009, Arctic Fans& Blowers has invested $245,000 of extra cash in securities. Of the total amount invested, $115,000 was invested in bonds that Arctic plans to hold until maturity (the bonds were issued at par); $55,000 was invested in various equity securities that Arctic plans to hold for an indefinite period of time; and $75,000 was invested in the stock of various companies that Arctic intends to trade to make a short-term profit. At the end of the year, the market value of the held-to-maturity securities was $108,000, the market value of the trading securities was $52,000, and the market value of the available-for-sale securities was $85,000. Use the accounting equation to record all adjustments required at year-end and indicate how the effects of each group of securities will be reported on the financial statements

                          the pops corporation had the following for the year ended december 31 2008 541583

                          P10-24. Prepare an income statement (LO 1)

                          The Pops Corporation had the following for the year ended December 31, 2008.

                          Sales

                          $s75,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          230,000

                          Interest income

                          10,000

                          Gain on sale of equipment

                          9,000

                          Selling and administrative expenses

                          12,000

                          Interest expense

                          5,000

                          Extraordinary gain

                          15,000

                          Loss from discontinued segment operations

                          (10,500)

                          Gain on disposal of discontinued segment

                          28,000

                          Required

                          Assume the corporation is subject to a 30Vo tax rate. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2008.

                          the following balances appeared in the general ledger for hacky sak corporation at f 541584

                          P10-3A. Prepare an income statement. (LO 1)

                          The following balances appeared in the general ledger for Hacky Sak Corporation at fiscal year end September 30, 2008:

                          Selling and administrative expenses

                          $ 2s,000

                          Other revenues and gains

                          50,000

                          Operating expenses

                          75,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          135,000

                          Net sales

                          375,000

                          Other expenses and losses

                          15,000

                          In addition, the following occurred throughout the year.

                          1. On April 10, a tornado destroyed one of the company’s manufacturing plants resulting in an extraordinary loss of $55,000.

                          2. On July 31, the company discontinued one of its unprofitable segments. The loss from operations was $25,000. The assets of the segment were sold at a gain of $15,000.

                          Required

                          a. Assume Hacky Sak’s income tax rate is 40Vo; prepare the income statement for the year ended September3 0, 2008.

                          b. Calculate the earnings per share the company would report on the income statement assuming Hacky Sak had a weighted average of 200,000 shares of common stock outstanding during the year and paid preferred dividends of $5,000.

                          given the information below from a firm s financial statement 541586

                          P10-5A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)

                          Given the information below from a firm’s financial statement

                          2009

                          2008

                          2007

                          Net sales (all on account)

                          $5,003,837

                          $4,934,430

                          Cost of goods sold

                          2,755,323

                          2,804,459

                          Gross profit

                          2,248,514

                          2,129,971

                          Interest expense

                          61,168

                          71,971

                          Income taxes

                          186,258

                          167,239

                          Net income

                          $303,860

                          $272,864

                          Cash and cash equivalents

                          $ 18,623

                          $19,133

                          $ 3,530

                          Accounts receivable less allowance

                          606,046

                          604,516

                          546,314

                          Total current assets

                          1,597,3 77

                          1,547,290

                          1,532,253

                          Total assets

                          4,052,090

                          4,065,462

                          4,035,801

                          Total current liabilities

                          1,189,862

                          1,111,973

                          44,539

                          Long- term liabilities

                          1,153,595

                          1,237,549

                          Total shareholder’s equity*

                          1,698,532

                          1,715,940

                          1,592,180

                          *The firm has no preferred stock.

                          Required

                          a. Calculate the following ratios for 2009 and 2008:

                          1. Current ratio

                          2. Acid-test ratio (assume no short-term investments)

                          3. Working capital

                          4. Accounts receivable turnover ratio

                          5. Debt-to-equity ratio

                          6. Times-interest-earned ratio

                          7. Return on equity

                          8. Gross profit percentage

                          b. Suppose the changes from 2008 to 2009 in each of these ratios were consistent with the direction and size of the change for the past several years. For each ratio, explain what the trend in the ratio would indicate about the company.

                          the following information was taken from the 2008 annual report of presentations 541587

                          P10-6A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)

                          The following information was taken from the 2008 annual report of Presentations

                          At December 31, (in thousands)

                          2008

                          2007

                          ASSETS

                          Current assets

                          Cash

                          $1,617

                          $1,220

                          Accounts receivable

                          1,925

                          3,112

                          Merchandise inventory

                          2,070

                          966

                          Prepaid expenses

                          188

                          149

                          Total current assets

                          5,800

                          5,447

                          Plant and equipment:

                          Buildings net

                          $4457

                          $2,992

                          Equipment net

                          1,293

                          1,045

                          Total plant and equipment

                          $5,750

                          $4,037

                          Total assets

                          $11,550

                          $9,484

                          LIABILITIES

                          Current liabilities

                          Accounts payable

                          $ 1817

                          $ 1,685

                          Notes payable

                          900

                          1,100

                          Total current liabilities

                          2,717

                          2,785

                          Long- term liabilities

                          3,500

                          2,000

                          Total liabilities

                          6,217

                          4,795

                          STOCKHOLDERESQ’ UITY

                          Common stock, no par value

                          3,390

                          3,042

                          Retained earnings

                          1,943

                          1,657

                          Total stockholder’s equity

                          5,333

                          4,699

                          Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

                          $11,550

                          59,484

                          Sales revenue

                          $12,228

                          Cost of goods sold

                          8,751

                          Gross profit on sales

                          3,477

                          Operating expenses:

                          Depreciation-buildings and equipment

                          102

                          Other selling and administrative

                          2,667

                          Total expenses

                          2,769

                          Income before interest and taxes

                          708

                          Interest expense

                          168

                          Income before taxes

                          540

                          Income taxes

                          114

                          Net income

                          $426

                          Required

                          a. Calculate the following ratios for 2008 and 2007 whenever possible.

                          1. Debt-to-equity ratio

                          2. Gross margin percentage

                          3. Current ratio

                          4. Acid-test ratio

                          5. Times-interest-earned ratio

                          b. What do the ratios indicate about the success of Presentations? What additional information would help you analyze the overall performance of this company?

                          the financial statements of for the kitchen include the following items 541588

                          P10-7A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)

                          The financial statements of For the Kitchen include the following items.

                          At June 30, 2007

                          June 30, 2006

                          June 30, 2005

                          Balance sheet :

                          Cash

                          $ 17,000

                          $ 12,000

                          $ 14,000

                          Investments(i n trading securities)

                          10,000

                          16,000

                          20,000

                          Accounts receivable (net)

                          54,000

                          50,000

                          48,000

                          Inventory

                          75,000

                          70,000

                          73,000

                          Prepaid expenses

                          16,000

                          12,000

                          10,000

                          Total current assets

                          172,000

                          160,000

                          165,000

                          Total current liabilities

                          $140,000

                          $ 90,000

                          $75,000

                          Income statement for the

                          June 30, 2007

                          June 30 2006

                          Year ended

                          $420,000

                          $380,000

                          Net credit sales

                          250,000

                          225,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          Required

                          a. Compute the following ratios for the years ended June 30, 2007, and whenever possible for the year ended June 30, 2006. For each, indicate if the direction is favorable or unfavorable for the company.

                          1. Current ratio

                          2. Accounts receivable turnover

                          3. Inventory turnover ratio

                          4. Gross profit percentage

                          b. Suppose the industry average for similar retail stores for the current ratio is 1.7.

                          Does this information help you evaluate For the Kitchen’s liquidity?

                          you are interested in investing in reese company and you have obtained the balance s 541589

                          P10-8A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios, (LO 3)

                          You are interested in investing in Reese Company, and you have obtained the balance sheets for the company for the past 2 years.

                          Reese Company
                          Balance Sheet
                          At June 30, 2007 and 2006

                          2007

                          2005

                          Current assets:

                          Cash

                          $198,000

                          $90,000

                          Accounts receivable net

                          210,000

                          116,000

                          Inventory

                          270,000

                          1 60,000

                          Prepaid rent

                          15,000

                          16,000

                          Total current assets

                          693,000

                          382,000

                          Equipment net

                          280,000

                          250,000

                          Total assets

                          $973,000

                          $642,000

                          Total current liabilities

                          $306,000

                          $223,000

                          Long- term liabilities

                          219,000

                          117,000

                          Total liabilities

                          525,000

                          340,000

                          Common stockholder’s equity

                          150,000

                          90,000

                          Retained earnings

                          298,000

                          212,O00

                          Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

                          $973,000

                          $642,000

                          The following amounts were reported on the income statement for the year ended June 30, 2007.

                          Sales

                          $450,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          215,000

                          Interest expense

                          7,500

                          Net income

                          80,000

                          Required

                          a. Compute as many of the financial statement ratios you have studied as possible with the information provided for Reese Company. Some ratios can be computed for both years and others can be computed for only 1 year.

                          b. Would you invest in Reese Company? Why or why not? What additional information would be helpful in making this decision?

                          each of the following items was found on the financial statements for logan company 541590

                          P10-1B. Discontinued operations and extraordinary item. (LO I)

                          Each of the following items was found on the financial statements for Logan Company for the year ended December 31, 2008.

                          Income from continuing operations

                          85,000

                          Gain on the sale of discontinued segment net of taxes $9,000

                          30,000

                          Loss from operation of discontinued segment net of taxes of $9,750

                          (32,500)

                          Gain on sale of equipment

                          12,000

                          Extraordinary loss from earthquake net of taxes $45,000

                          (150,000)

                          Required

                          a. For each item listed, indicate the financial statement and appropriate section, if applicable, on which each would appear.

                          b. Provide a description of each item and give as many details of each item’s financial statement presentation as possible.

                          c. Based on the data provided, what is Logan Company’s tax rate?

                          the blues corporation had the following for the year ended december 31 2007 541591

                          P102B. Prepare an income statement (LO1)

                          The Blues Corporation had the following for the year ended December 31,2007.

                          Sales

                          $425,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          185,000

                          Interest income

                          8,000

                          Gain on sale of equipment

                          4,000

                          Selling and administrative expenses

                          18,000

                          Interest expense

                          3,000

                          Extraordinary gain

                          25,000

                          Loss from discontinued segment operations

                          (e,s00)

                          Gain on disposal of discontinued segment

                          36,000

                          Required

                          Assume the corporation is subject to a 40Vo tax rate. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31,2007 .

                          the following balances appeared in the general ledger for ski daddle corporation at 541592

                          P10-3B. Prepare an income statement (LO 1)

                          The following balances appeared in the general ledger for Ski Daddle Corporation at fiscal year-end December 3I, 2007.

                          Selling and administrative expenses

                          $ 4s,000

                          Other revenues and gains

                          80,000

                          Operating expenses

                          110,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          185,000

                          Net sales

                          325,000

                          Other expenses and losses

                          8,000

                          In addition, the following occurred throughout the year.

                          1. On August 20, a fire destroyed one of the company’s warehouses resulting in an extraordinary loss of $35,000.

                          2. On October 31, the company discontinued one of its unprofitable segments. The loss from operations was $35,000. The assets of the segment were sold at a gain of $19,000.

                          Required

                          a. Assume Ski Daddle Corporation’s income tax rate is 307o; prepare the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2001.

                          b. Calculate the earnings per share the company would report on the income statement assuming Ski Daddle had 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding during the year and paid preferred dividends of $15,000.

                          here are the income statements from a firm s recent annual report 541593

                          P10-4B. Perform horizontal and vertical analysis. (LO 2)

                          Here are the income statements from a firm’s recent annual report.

                          Year ended December 31 (in millions)

                          2008

                          2007

                          2006

                          Net revenue

                          526,971

                          $25,112

                          $23,512

                          Cost of sales

                          12,379

                          11,497

                          10,750

                          Selling general, and administrative

                          expenses

                          9,460

                          8,958

                          8,574

                          Amortization of intangible assets

                          145

                          138

                          165

                          Other expenses

                          204

                          224

                          355

                          Operating profit

                          4,783

                          4,295

                          3,667

                          Income from investments

                          323

                          280

                          160

                          Interest expense

                          (163)

                          (178)

                          (219)

                          Interest income

                          51

                          36

                          67

                          Income before income taxes

                          4,994

                          4,433

                          3,675

                          Income taxes

                          1,424

                          1,433

                          1,244

                          Net income

                          $ g,szo

                          $ 3,000

                          $ 2,431

                          the following information was taken from the annual report of rom 541594

                          P10-6B. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)

                          The following information was taken from the annual report of ROM’

                          At Decembe3r1
                          (in thousands)
                          2008

                          ASSETS:

                          Current assets:

                          Cash

                          $1,220

                          Accounts receivable

                          3,112

                          Merchandise inventory

                          966

                          Prepaid expenses

                          149

                          Total current assets

                          5,447

                          Plant and equipment:

                          Buildings net

                          2,992

                          Equipment net

                          1,045

                          Total plant and equipment

                          4,037

                          Total assets

                          $9,484

                          LIABILITIES:

                          Current liabilities:

                          Accounts payable

                          $ 1,685

                          Notes payable

                          1,100

                          Total current liabilities

                          2,785

                          Long- term liabilities

                          2,000

                          Total liabilities

                          4,785

                          Stockholder’s Equity

                          Common stock, no par value

                          3,042

                          Retained earnings

                          1,657

                          Total stockholder’s equity

                          4,699

                          Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

                          $9,484

                          Sales of the year

                          10,200

                          Cost of goods sold

                          6,750

                          Total assets at Dec. 31, 2007

                          8,980

                          Total liabilities at Dec. 31, 2007

                          4,535

                          Total stockholder’s equity at Dec. 31, 2007

                          4,445

                          Required

                          a. Calculate the following ratios for 2008:

                          1. Debt-to-equity ratio

                          2. Gross profit percentage

                          3. Current ratio

                          4. Acid-test ratio

                          b. What do the ratios indicate about the success of ROM? What additional information would be useful to help you analyze the overall performance of this company?

                          the financial statements of builder bob s include the following items 541595

                          P10-7B. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)

                          The financial statements of Builder Bob’s include the following items

                          Sept. 30, 2008

                          Sept. 30, 2007

                          At

                          Balance sheet

                          Cash

                          $27,000

                          $22,000

                          Investments (short-term)

                          15,000

                          12,000

                          Accounts receivable (net)

                          44,000

                          40,000

                          Inventory

                          85,000

                          75,000

                          Prepaid rent

                          6,000

                          2,000

                          Total current assets

                          $1 77,000

                          $151, 000

                          Total current liabilities

                          $120,000

                          $ 80,000

                          Income statement for the year ended September 30, 2008

                          Net credit sales

                          $320,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          150,000

                          Required

                          a. Compute the following ratios for the year ended September 30, 2008, and

                          September 30, 2007 . For each, indicate if the direction is favorable or unfavorable for the company.

                          1. Current ratio

                          2. Quick ratio

                          3. Accounts receivable turnover (2008 only)

                          4. Inventory turnover ratio (2008 only)

                          5. Gross margin percentage (2008 only)

                          b. Which financial statement users would be most interested in these ratios?

                          c. Suppose the industry average for similar retail stores for the current ratio is 1.2.

                          Does this information help you evaluate Builder Bob’s liquidity?

                          you are interested in investing in apples and nuts company and you have obtained the 541596

                          P10-8B. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 5)

                          You are interested in investing in Apples and Nuts Company, and you have obtained the balance sheets for the company for the past 2 years

                          Apples and Nuts Company
                          Balance Sheet
                          At December 31, 2008 and 2007

                          2008

                          2007

                          Current assets

                          Cash

                          $873,000

                          $90,000

                          Accounts receivable net

                          $ 98,000

                          216,000

                          Inventory

                          310,000

                          170,000

                          Prepaid rent

                          275,000

                          5,000

                          Total current assets

                          10,000

                          482,000

                          Equipment net

                          693,000

                          258,000

                          Total assets

                          1 80,000

                          $740,000

                          Total current liabilities

                          $206,000

                          $223,000

                          Long- term liabilities

                          219,000

                          217,000

                          Total liabilities

                          425,000

                          440,000

                          Common stockholder’s equity

                          250,000

                          1 90,000

                          Retained earnings

                          1 98,000

                          1 10,000

                          Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

                          $873,000

                          $740,ooo

                          Net income for the year ended December 3L, 2008 was $ 100,000.

                          Required

                          a. Compute as many of the financial statement ratios you have studied as possible with the information from Apples and Nuts Company. (Compute 2008 ratios.)

                          b. Would you invest in this company? Why or why not? What additional information would be helpful in making this decision?

                          the following excerpt is from a conversation between kate purvis the president and c 541600

                          Debits and credits

                          Group Project

                          The following excerpt is from a conversation between Kate Purvis, the president and chief operating officer of Light House Company, and her neighbor, Dot Evers. Dot: Kate, I’m taking a course in night school, “Intro to Accounting.” I was wondering—could you answer a couple of questions for me? Kate: Well, I will if I can. Dot: Okay, our instructor says that it’s critical we understand the basic concepts of accounting, or we’ll never get beyond the first test. My problem is with those rules of debit and credit you know, assets increase with debits, decrease with credits, etc.

                          Kate: Yes, pretty basic stuff. You just have to memorize the rules. It shouldn’t be too difficult. Dot: Sure, I can memorize the rules, but my problem is I want to be sure I understand the basic concepts behind the rules. For example, why can’t assets be increased with credits and decreased with debits like revenue? As long as everyone did it that way, why not? It would seem easier if we had the same rules for all increases and decreases in accounts. Also, why is the left side of an account called the debit side? Why couldn’t it be called something simple like the “LE” for Left Entry? The right side could be called just “RE” for Right Entry. Finally, why are there just two sides to an entry? Why can’t there be three or four sides to an entry? In a group of four or five, select one person to play the role of Kate and one person to play the role of Dot.

                          1. After listening to the conversation between Kate and Dot, help Kate answer Dot’s questions.

                          2. What information (other than just debit and credit journal entries) could the accounting system gather that might be useful to Kate in managing Light House Company?

                          cory neece is planning to manage and operate eagle caddy service at canyon lake golf 541601

                          Transactions and income statement

                          Cory Neece is planning to manage and operate Eagle Caddy Service at Canyon Lake Golf and Country Club during June through August 2014. Cory will rent a small maintenance building from the country club for $500 per month and will offer caddy services, including cart rentals, to golfers. Cory has had no formal training in record keeping.

                          Cory keeps notes of all receipts and expenses in a shoe box. An examination of Cory’s shoe box records for June revealed the following:

                          June 1. Transferred $2,000 from personal bank account to be used to operate the caddy service.

                          1. Paid rent expense to Canyon Lake Golf and Country Club, $500.

                          2. Paid for golf supplies (practice balls, etc.), $750.

                          3. Arranged for the rental of 40 regular (pulling) golf carts and 20 gasoline-driven carts for $3,000 per month. Paid $600 in advance, with the remaining $2,400 due June 20.

                          7. Purchased supplies, including gasoline, for the golf carts on account, $1,000. Canyon Lake Golf and Country Club has agreed to allow Cory to store the gasoline in one of its fuel tanks at no cost.

                          15. Received cash for services from June 1–15, $5,400.

                          17. Paid cash to creditors on account, $1,000.

                          20. Paid remaining rental on golf carts, $2,400.

                          22. Purchased supplies, including gasoline, on account, $850.

                          25. Accepted IOUs from customers on account, $1,800.

                          28. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $395.

                          30. Received cash for services from June 16–30, $4,200.

                          30. Paid telephone and electricity (utilities) expenses, $340.

                          30. Paid wages of part-time employees, $850.

                          30. Received cash in payment of IOUs on account, $1,500.

                          30. Determined the amount of supplies on hand at the end of June, $675.

                          Cory has asked you several questions concerning his financial affairs to date, and he has asked you to assist with his record keeping and reporting of financial data.

                          a. To assist Cory with his record keeping, prepare a chart of accounts that would be appropriate for Eagle Caddy Service. Note: Small businesses such as Eagle Caddy Service are often organized as proprietorships. The accounting for proprietorships is similar to that for a corporation, except that the stockholders’ equity accounts differ. Specifically, instead of the account for Capital Stock, a capital account entitled Cory Neece, Capital is used to record investments in the business. In addition, instead of a dividends account, withdrawals from the business are debited to Cory Neece, Drawing.

                          b. A proprietorship has no retained earnings account.

                          c. Prepare an income statement for June in order to help Cory assess the profitability of Eagle Caddy Service. For this purpose, the use of T accounts may be helpful in analyzing the effects of each June transaction.

                          d. Based on Cory’s records of receipts and payments, compute the amount of cash on hand on June 30. For this purpose, a T account for cash may be useful.

                          e. A count of the cash on hand on June 30 totaled $6,175. Briefly discuss the possible causes of the difference between the amount of cash computed in (c) and the actual amount of cash on hand.

                          the increasing complexity of the current business and regulatory environment has cre 541602

                          Opportunities for accountants

                          The increasing complexity of the current business and regulatory environment has created an increased demand for accountants who can analyze business transactions and interpret their effects on the financial statements. In addition, a basic ability to analyze the effects of transactions is necessary to be successful in all fields of business as well as in other disciplines, such as law. To better understand the importance of accounting in today’s environment, search the Internet or your local newspaper for job opportunities. Then do one of the following:

                          1. Print a listing of one or two ads for accounting jobs. Alternatively, bring to class one or two newspaper ads for accounting jobs.

                          2. Print a listing of one or two ads for non-accounting jobs for which some knowledge of accounting is preferred or necessary. Alternatively, bring to class one or two newspaper

                          two income statements for cornea company are shown below 541631

                          Vertical analysis

                          Two income statements for Cornea Company are shown below.

                          Cornea Company

                          Income Statements

                          For Years Ended December 31

                          2014

                          2013

                          Fees earned

                          $1,640,000

                          $1,300,000

                          Operating expenses

                          869,200

                          715,000

                          Operating income

                          $ 770,800

                          $ 585,000

                          a. Prepare a vertical analysis of Cornea Company’s income statements.

                          b. Does the vertical analysis indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?

                          the following accounts were taken from the unadjusted trial balance of orion co a co 541633

                          Classifying adjusting entries

                          The following accounts were taken from the unadjusted trial balance of Orion Co., a congressional lobbying firm. Indicate whether or not each account would normally require an adjusting entry. If the account normally requires an adjusting entry, use the following notation to indicate the type of adjustment:

                          AE—Accrued Expense

                          AR—Accrued Revenue

                          PE—Prepaid Expense

                          UR—Unearned Revenue

                          To illustrate, the answer for the first account is shown below.

                          Account

                          Answer

                          Accounts Receivable

                          Normally requires adjustment (AR).

                          Capital Stock

                          Cash

                          Interest Expense

                          Interest Receivable

                          Land

                          Office Equipment

                          Prepaid Rent

                          Supplies

                          Unearned Fees

                          Wages Expense

                          to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 3 1 2008 murray c 541510

                          P9-7A. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)

                          To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 3 1, 2008, Murray Company gathered the following information.

                          Dividends paid

                          $ 16,200

                          Purchase of treasury stock

                          40,000

                          Proceeds from bank loan

                          180,000

                          Gain on sale of equipment

                          9,000

                          Proceeds from sale of equipment

                          25,000

                          Proceeds from sale of common stock

                          250,000

                          Required

                          a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          the information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of matt s music company 541511

                          P9-28, Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)

                          The information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of Matt’s Music Company at December 31, 2008 and 2O01.

                          At December 31 2008

                          2007

                          (in thousands)

                          Current assets:

                          Cash

                          $3,500

                          $2,090

                          Accounts receivable

                          2,725

                          2,980

                          Inventory

                          1,050

                          1,300

                          Prepaid insurance

                          520

                          470

                          Total current assets

                          $7,795

                          $6,840

                          Current liabilities:

                          Accounts payable

                          $2,890

                          $1,650

                          Salaries payable

                          1,500

                          3,200

                          Total current liabilities

                          $4,390

                          $4,850

                          Net income for 2008 was $ 211,000. Depreciation expense of $80,000 was including the Operating expenses of the year.

                          Required

                          Use the indirect method to prepare the cash from operations section of the statement of cash flows for Matt’s Music Company for the year ended December 31, 2008

                          the information shown comes from the balance sheets of walker corporation at septemb 541512

                          P9-3B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method (LO5)

                          The information shown comes from the balance sheets of Walker Corporation at September 30, 2008 and 2007.

                          Walker Corporation
                          Balance Sheets (Adapted)
                          September 30, 2008, and September 30, 2007

                          2008

                          2007

                          (in thousands)

                          Current assets:

                          Cash

                          $2,110

                          $1,650

                          Accounts receivable

                          1,254

                          1,977

                          Inventory

                          700

                          656

                          Prepaid insurance

                          157

                          314

                          Total current assets

                          $4,221

                          $4,597

                          Current liabilities:

                          Accounts payable

                          $2,000

                          $2,330

                          Wages payable

                          1,154

                          750

                          Total current liabilities

                          $3,154

                          $3,080

                          Net income for the year ended September 30, 2008, was $146,000. Included in the operating expenses for the year was depreciation expense of $11 2,000.

                          Required

                          Prepare the cash from operating activities section of Walker Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended September 30, 2008. Use the indirect method.

                          ace corporation had the following information available for 2008 541513

                          P9-48. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)

                          Ace Corporation had the following information available for 2008.

                          January 1

                          December 31

                          Accounts receivable

                          $80,000

                          $76,000

                          Prepaid insurance

                          48,000

                          25,000

                          Inventory

                          76,000

                          50,000

                          Ace Corporation reported net income of $130,000 for the year. Depreciation expense, included on the income statement was $20,800.
                          Required

                          Assume this is all the information relevant to the statement of cash flows. Use the indirect method to prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of Ace Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 3 1, 2008

                          to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 3 1 2007 wright c 541514

                          P9-58. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)

                          To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 3 1, 2007, Wright Company gathered the following information.

                          Proceeds from bond issue (face value $100,000)

                          $120,000

                          Amortization of bond premium

                          1,000

                          Dividends declared

                          15,000

                          Dividends paid

                          12,000

                          Purchase of treasury stock

                          50,000

                          Loss on sale of machinery

                          18,000

                          Proceeds from sale of machinery

                          30,000

                          Required

                          a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows

                          b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2008 bowden 541515

                          P9-68. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)

                          To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2008, Bowden

                          Company gathered the following information.

                          Dividends declared

                          $1s,000

                          Dividends paid

                          i2,000

                          Proceeds from sale of treasury stock

                          70,000

                          Repayment of loan principal

                          32,000

                          Payment of interest on loan

                          320

                          Gain on sale of equipment

                          3,500

                          Proceeds from sale of equipment

                          11,000

                          Purchase of equipment

                          75,000

                          Required

                          a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2001 tango com 541516

                          P9-78. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)

                          To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2001, Tango Company gathered the following information.

                          Proceeds from bank loan

                          157,000

                          Gain on sale of equipment

                          12,500

                          Proceeds from sale of equipment

                          35,000

                          Proceeds from sale of common stock

                          100,000

                          Dividends paid

                          t2,400

                          Purchase of treasury stock

                          85,000

                          Required

                          a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          a 5 year comparative analysis of low light company s current ratio and quick ratio f 541546

                          SE10-10. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          A 5-year comparative analysis of Low Light Company’s current ratio and quick ratio follows.

                          2004

                          2005

                          2006

                          2007

                          2008

                          current ratio

                          1.19

                          1.85

                          2.50

                          3.40

                          4.02

                          Acid- test ratio

                          1. i5

                          1.02

                          0.98

                          0.72

                          0.50

                          a. What has been happening to the liquidity of Low Light Company over the 5 years presented?

                          b. Considering both ratios, what does the trend indicate about what has happened to the makeup of Low Light’s current assets over the 5-year period?

                          the following is a 5 year comparative analysis of accent company s return on assets 541548

                          SE10-12. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          The following is a 5-year comparative analysis of Accent Company’s return on assets and return on equity.

                          2005

                          2006

                          2007

                          2008

                          2009

                          Return on assets

                          8%

                          7.5%

                          7.12%

                          6.54%

                          6%

                          Return on equity

                          20%

                          21%

                          21.8%

                          22.2%

                          23%

                          a. What does this analysis tell you about the overall profitability of Accent Company over the S-year period?

                          b. What does this analysis tell you about what has happened to Accent’s amount of debt over the past 5 years?

                          use the income statement from color copy to perform a vertical analysis with sales a 541556

                          E10-4A. Vertical analysis. (LO 2)

                          Use the income statement from Color Copy to perform a vertical analysis with sales as the base.

                          Color Copy Inc.

                          Income Statement

                          For the year ended September 30,2OO7

                          Sales revenue

                          $10,228

                          Cost of goods sold

                          5,75

                          Gross profit

                          $4,477

                          Operating expenses:

                          Depreciation-buildings and equipment

                          $ 100

                          Other selling and administrative

                          2,500

                          Total expenses

                          2,600

                          Income before interest and taxes

                          $ 1,877

                          Interest expense

                          350

                          Income before taxes

                          $1,527

                          Income taxes

                          150

                          Net income

                          1,377

                          calculate the current ratio and the amount of working capital for albert s hotels fo 541557

                          E10-5A. Current ratio and working capital. (LO 3)

                          Calculate the current ratio and the amount of working capital for Albert’s Hotels for the years given in the following comparative balance sheets. Although 2 year c is not much of a trend, what is your opinion of the direction of these ratios?

                          Albert Hotels Inc. Balance Sheet At December 31, 2008 and 2007

                          2008

                          2007

                          Current assets;

                          Cash

                          $98,000

                          $ 90,000

                          Accounts receivable net

                          1 10,000

                          1 16,000

                          Inventory

                          170,000

                          160,000

                          Prepaid expenses

                          18,000

                          16,000

                          Total current assets

                          396,000

                          382,000

                          Equipment net

                          184,000

                          160,000

                          Total assets

                          $580,000

                          $542,000

                          Total current liabilities

                          $206,000

                          $223,000

                          Long- term liabilities

                          1 19,000

                          1 17,000

                          Total liabilities

                          325,000

                          340,000

                          Common stockholder’s equity

                          90,000

                          90,000

                          Retained earnings

                          155,000

                          112,000

                          Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

                          $580,000

                          $542,000

                          zap electronics reported the following for the fiscal years ended january 31 2007 an 541559

                          E10-7A. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          Zap Electronics reported the following for the fiscal years ended January 31, 2007, and January 31, 2006.

                          January3 1

                          2007

                          2006

                          (in thousands)

                          Accounts receivable

                          $ 35,184

                          $ 24,306

                          Inventory

                          106,754

                          113,875

                          Current assets

                          174,369

                          124,369

                          Current liabilities

                          71,616

                          68,001

                          Long- term liabilities

                          12,315

                          35,200

                          Shareholder’s equity

                          121,851

                          198,935

                          Sales

                          712,855

                          580,223

                          Cost of goods sold

                          483,463

                          400,126

                          Interest expense

                          335

                          709

                          Net income

                          11,953

                          4,706

                          Assume all sales are on credit and the firm has no preferred stock outstandings. Calculate the following ratios.

                          a. Current ratio (for both years)

                          b. Accounts receivable turnover ratio (for 2007)

                          c. Inventory turnover ratio (for 2007)

                          d. Debt-to-equity ratio (for both years)

                          e. Return on equity ratio (for 2007)

                          Do any of these ratios suggest problems for the company?

                          evans family grocers reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years 541560

                          E10-8A. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          Evans Family Grocers reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years.

                          December 31

                          2008

                          2007

                          Cash

                          $ 25,000

                          $ 20,000

                          Receivables (net)

                          60,000

                          70,000

                          Merchandise inventory

                          55,000

                          30,000

                          Plant assets

                          280,000

                          260,000

                          Total assets

                          $420,000

                          $380,000

                          Accounts payable

                          $45,000

                          62,000

                          Long-term notes payable

                          $4?9p99

                          100,000

                          Common stock

                          45,000

                          122,000

                          Retained earnings

                          75,000

                          96,000

                          Total Liabilities and Shareholder’s Equity

                          135,000

                          $380,000

                          Net income for the year ended 12/31/08

                          165,000

                          Sales( all sales were on account)

                          450,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          210,000

                          Interest expense

                          1,500

                          Calculate the following for the year ended December 31,2008.

                          a. Current ratio

                          b. Working capital

                          c. Accounts receivable turnover ratio

                          d. Inventory turnover ratio

                          e. Return on assets

                          f. Return on equity

                          furniture showcase reported the following for its fiscal year ended june 30 2008 541561

                          E10-9A. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          Furniture Showcase reported the following for its fiscal year ended June 30, 2008.

                          Sales

                          $530,000

                          Cost of sales

                          300,000

                          Gross margin

                          230,000

                          Expenses*

                          113,000

                          Net income

                          $117,000

                          *Included in the expenses was $12,000 of interest expense.
                          Assume no income tax expense.
                          At the beginning of the year, the company had 50,000 shares of common stock outstanding. At the end of the year, there were 40,000 shares outstanding. The market price of the company’s stock at year-end was $20 per share. The company declared and paid $80,000 of dividends near year-end.

                          Calculate earnings per share, the price-earnings ratio, and times-interest-earned ratio for Furniture Showcase.

                          during 2007 nike has invested 200 000 of extra cash in securities of the total amoun 541567

                          E10-16A: Investments.

                          During 2007, Nike has invested $200,000 of extra cash in securities. Of the total amount invested, $75,000 was invested in bonds that Nike plans to hold until maturity (the bonds were issued at par value); $65,000 was invested in various equity securities that Nike plans to hold for an indefinite period of time; and $60,000 was invested in the stock of various companies that Nike intends to trade to make a short-term profit. At the end of the year, the market value of the held-to-maturity securities was $80,000; the market value of the trading securities was $75,000; and the market value of the available-for-sale securities was $55,000.

                          Use the accounting equation to record all adjustments required at year-end, and indicate how the effects of each group of securities will be reported on the financial statements.

                          use the income statement from designers discount inc to perform a vertical analysis 541571

                          E1-0-48. Vertical analysis. (LO 2)

                          Use the income statement from Designers Discount Inc. to perform a vertical analysis with sales as the base.

                          Designers Discount Inc. Income Statement For the year ended March 28, 2008

                          Sales revenue

                          $16,374

                          Cost of goods sold

                          7,985

                          Gross profit on sales

                          $ 8,389

                          Operating expenses:

                          Depreciation-buildings and equipment

                          $265

                          Other selling and administrative

                          3,750

                          Total expenses

                          4,015

                          Income before interest and taxes

                          $4374

                          Interest expense

                          254

                          Income before taxes

                          $4,120

                          Income taxes

                          1,236

                          Net income

                          $ 2,884

                          crystal cromarties frozen foods reported the following for the fiscal years ended se 541574

                          E10-7B. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          Crystal Cromarties Frozen Foods reported the following for the fiscal years ended September 30,2008, and September 30, 2007

                          September 30

                          2008

                          2007

                          (in millions)

                          Accounts receivable

                          $21,265

                          $13,802

                          Inventory

                          45,692

                          47,682

                          Current assets

                          185,716

                          155,716

                          Current liabilities

                          80,954

                          72,263

                          Long-term liabilities

                          15,251

                          17,852

                          Shareholder’s equity

                          21,871

                          58,035

                          Sales

                          88,455

                          70,223

                          Cost of goods sold

                          60,463

                          52,750

                          Interest expense

                          21.5

                          43.2

                          Net income

                          1,842

                          1,006

                          Assume there is no outstanding preferred stock and all sales are credit sales. Calculate the following ratios.

                          a. Current ratio (for both years)

                          b. Accounts receivable turnover ratio (for 2008)

                          c. Inventory turnover ratio (for 2008)

                          d. Debt-to-equity ratio (for both years)

                          e. Return on equity (for 2008)

                          Do any of these ratios suggest problems for the company?

                          hutson coffee shops reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years 541575

                          E10-88. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          Hutson Coffee Shops reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years.

                          December 31

                          2010

                          2009

                          Cash

                          $ 34,000

                          $ 17,000

                          Receivables(net)

                          85,000

                          80,000

                          Merchandise inventory

                          74,000

                          48,000

                          Fixed assets

                          365,000

                          324,O00

                          Total assets

                          $558,000

                          $469,000

                          Accounts payable

                          65,000

                          83,000

                          Long-term notes payable

                          82,000

                          112,000

                          Common stock

                          175,000

                          144,000

                          Retained earnings

                          235,000

                          130,000

                          Total liabilities and shareholder’s equity

                          $558,000

                          $469,000

                          Net income for the year ended 12/31/1O

                          $115,000

                          Sales(all sales were on account )

                          620,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          284,000

                          Interest expense

                          3,000

                          Calculate the following for the year ended December 31,2010.

                          a. Current ratio

                          b. Working capital

                          c. Accounts receivable turnover ratio

                          d. Inventory turnover ratio

                          e. Return on assets

                          f. Return on equity

                          international imports corporation reported the following for its fiscal year ended 541576

                          E10-98. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)

                          International Imports Corporation reported the following for its fiscal year ended

                          June 30, 2007.

                          Sales

                          $640,000

                          Cost of sales

                          470,000

                          Gross margin

                          170,000

                          Expenses*

                          94,000

                          Net income

                          $ 76,000

                          *Included in the expenses were $9,000 of interest expense and $14,000 of income tax expense.

                          At the beginning of the year, the company had 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding and no preferred stock. At the end of the year, there were 25,000 common shares outstanding and no preferred stock. The market price of the company’s stock at year-end was $15 per share. The company declared and paid $46,000 of dividends near year-end.

                          Calculate earnings per share, the price-earnings ratio, and times-interest-earned ratio for International Imports.

                          kinsey scales invested 164 000 of its extra cash in securities under each of the fol 541580

                          E10-15B: Investments.

                          Kinsey Scales invested $164,000 of its extra cash in securities. Under each of the following independent scenarios (a) calculate the amount at which the investments would be valued for the year-end balance sheet, and (b) indicate how these scenarios should be reported on the other financial statements if at all.

                          1. Al1 the securities were debt securities, with a maturity date in 2 years. Kinsey will hold the securities until they mature. The market value of the securities at year-end was $158,000.

                          2. Kinsey purchased the securities for trading, hoping to make a quick profit. At year-end the market value of the securities was $162,000.

                          3. Kinsey is uncertain about how long it will hold the securities. At year-end the market value of the securities is $167,000

                          the following information applies to computer company 541483

                          E9-9A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO 1,4)

                          The following information applies to Computer Company.

                          Income Statement for the Year Ended December 31,2007

                          Sales

                          $ 20,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          (15,200)

                          Gross margin

                          4,800

                          Rent expense

                          (1,000)

                          Net income

                          $ 3,800

                          1. Accounts receivable started the year with a balance of $1,000 and ended the year with a balance of $3,300

                          2. The beginning balance in accounts payable (to vendors) was 92,000, and the ending balance was zero. Inventory at the end of the year was the same as it was at the beginning of the year (i.e., there was no change in inventory).

                          3. The company started the year with $5,000 of prepaid rent and ended the year with $4,000 of prepaid rent.

                          Determine the following cash flows.

                          a. Cash collected from customers for sales during the year

                          b. Cash paid to vendors for inventory during the year

                          c. Cash paid for rent during the year

                          the following information was taken from tram inc s balance sheets at december 3 1 2 541485

                          E9-11A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)

                          The following information was taken from Tram Inc.’s balance sheets at December 3 1, 2005 and 2006. Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2006, using the indirect method.

                          2006

                          2005

                          Current assets

                          Cash

                          $103,000

                          $99,000

                          Accounts receivable

                          90,000

                          79,000

                          Inventory

                          150,000

                          142,000

                          Prepaid expenses

                          47,000

                          50,000

                          Total current assets

                          $390,000

                          $370,000

                          Current liabilities

                          Accrued expenses payable

                          $ 17,000

                          $ 15,000

                          Accounts payable

                          60,000

                          92,000

                          Total current liabilities

                          $ 77,000

                          $107,000

                          Net income for 2006 was $ 1 85,000. Depreciation expense was $25,000.

                          during the fiscal year ended september 30 2006 napster company engaged in the follow 541487

                          E9-13A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO I, 4)

                          During the fiscal year ended September 30,2006, Napster Company engaged in the following transactions. Using the relevant transactions, prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.

                          a. Paid interest of $7,000

                          b. Collected $175,000 on accounts receivable

                          c. Made cash sales of $128,000

                          d. Paid salaries of $52,000

                          e. Recorded depreciation expense of $27,000

                          f. Paid income taxes of $32,000

                          g. Sold equipment for cash of $152,000

                          h. Purchased new equipment for cash of $41,000

                          i. Made payments to vendors of $62,700

                          j. Paid dividends of$20,000

                          k. Purchased land for cash of $ 1 74,000

                          1. Paid operating expenses of $32,500

                          use the following information for just nuts company to prepare a statement of cash f 541488

                          E9-14A. Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (LO 5, 6)

                          Use the following information for Just Nuts Company to prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

                          Just Nuts Company Balance Sheet
                          June 30

                          2007

                          2006

                          Assets

                          Cash

                          $ 193,000

                          $ 1 20,500

                          Accounts receivable

                          64,000

                          60,000

                          Inventories

                          1 20,000

                          1 75,000

                          Land

                          95,000

                          120,000

                          Equipment

                          250,000

                          180,000

                          Accumulated depreciation

                          (75,000)

                          (45,000)

                          Total assets

                          $647,000

                          $610 ,500

                          Liabilities and Shareholders Equity

                          Accounts payable

                          $ 42,ooo

                          $ 50,000

                          Bonds payable

                          150,000

                          220,000

                          Common stock and additional

                          paid-in capital

                          200,000

                          1 80,000

                          Retained earnings

                          245,000

                          1 60,500

                          Total liabilities and shareholders’

                          equity

                          $647,00

                          $610,500

                          Additional information:

                          a. Net income for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2007, was $95,000.

                          b. The company declared and paid cash dividends.

                          c. The company redeemed bonds payable amounting to $60,000 for cash of $60,000.

                          d. The company issue common stock for $20,000 cash.

                          the following information has been taken from the most recent statement of cash flow 541490

                          E9-16A. Analyze a statement of cash flows. (LO 7)

                          The following information has been taken from the most recent statement of cash flows of Expansion Company:

                          Net cash used by operating activities

                          $(932,000)

                          Net cash provided by investing activities

                          $1,180,500

                          Net cash provided by financing activities

                          $2,107,000

                          a. What information do these subtotals from the statement of cash flows tell you about Expansion Company?

                          b. What additional information would you want to see before you analyze Expansion Company’s ability to generate positive operating cash flows in the future?

                          c. Did Expansion have a positive net income for the period? What information would you like to see to help you predict next year’s net income?

                          for each of the following items tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and 541491

                          E9-1B. Identify cash flows (L.OI )

                          For each of the following items, tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and the section of the statement of cash flows in which the item would appear. (Assume the direct method is used.)

                          Inflow or Outflow

                          Section of the Statement

                          Item

                          a. Cash paid to vendor for supplies

                          b. Purchase of treasury stock

                          c. Principle payment on bonds

                          d. Interest payment on bonds

                          e. Cash paid for salaries

                          f. Cash from issuance of common stock

                          g. Cash dividends paid

                          h. Cash paid for rent and utilities

                          i . Purchase of computer for cash

                          j. Cash paid for company vehicle

                          k. Income taxes paid

                          for each transaction indicate the amount of the cash flow indicate whether each resu 541492

                          E9-2B. Identify cash flows. (LO 1, 4)

                          For each transaction, indicate the amount of the cash flow, indicate whether each results in an inflow or outflow of cash, and give the section of the statement in which each cash flow would appear. Assume the statement of cash flows is prepared using the direct method

                          Inflow or Outflow

                          Section of the Statement

                          Item

                          a. lssued6 60 shares of $0.10 Par

                          common stock for $15 per share.

                          b. Sold $2,500 of inventory, received

                          $1,500 in cash and remaining

                          $1,000o n account

                          c. Purchased a $2,500 computer by

                          Paying cash of $1,000 and signing

                          a short-term note for the

                          other $1,500

                          d. Paid $600 for routine maid

                          Service to clean office

                          e. Paid rent and utility expenses

                          totaling $2,250

                          f. Hired a runner to carry

                          Correspondences between

                          offices and paid her $175

                          g. Repaid the $1,500 short-term

                          note along with $100 interest

                          h. Purchase $1,500 of treasury stock

                          use the income statement for kristen harrison s cosmetics inc for the past year and 541493

                          E9-3B. Prepare cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO 4)

                          Use the income statement for Kristen Harrison’s Cosmetics Inc. for the past year and the information from the comparative balance sheets shown for the beginning and the end of the year to prepare the operating section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method

                          Sales

                          $ 1 50,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          55,000

                          Gross margin

                          95,000

                          Operating expenses

                          Wages

                          $ 3,750

                          Rent

                          1,600

                          Utilities

                          850

                          Insurance

                          175

                          6,375

                          Net income

                          $ 88,625

                          Account

                          Beginning of the Year

                          End of the Year

                          Accounts receivable

                          $ 12,000

                          $ 1o,ooo

                          Inventory

                          18,200

                          19,700

                          Prepaid insurance

                          600

                          200

                          Accounts payable

                          8,000

                          7,400

                          Wages payable

                          725

                          850

                          Utilities payable

                          0

                          -275-

                          given the following information calculate the change in cash for the year 541495

                          E9-58. Calculate change in cash. (LO I, 5)

                          Given the following information, calculate the change in cash for the year.

                          Cash received from sale of company van

                          $ 15,000

                          Cash paid for utilities and rent

                          5,150

                          Cash paid for interest expense during the year

                          10,650

                          Cash paid for purchase of treasury stock

                          25,000

                          Cash collected from customers

                          68,250

                          Cash received from issuance of bonds

                          114,500

                          Cash paid for salaries

                          12,000

                          Cash paid to do a major repair of equipment to prolong its useful life for five more years

                          32,480

                          calculate cash from operating activities 541496

                          E9-68. Calculate cash from operating activities. (LO 2, 5 )

                          a. Cash paid for utilities

                          b. Cash paid for interest

                          c. Cash paid for inventory items

                          d. Cash collected from customers

                          From the Financial Statements for MF Company.

                          Balance Sheet

                          Income Statement

                          Beginning

                          End

                          Amount for the Year

                          of the Year

                          of the Year

                          Sales revenue

                          $314,250

                          Accounts receivable

                          $ 6,500

                          $ 1,200

                          Utilities expense

                          1 8,30

                          Utilities payable

                          1,500

                          2,700

                          Cost of goods sold

                          25,600

                          Inventory

                          7,800

                          6,000

                          Accounts payable

                          1,500

                          2,000

                          Interest expense

                          5,750

                          Interest payable

                          2,400

                          2,300

                          the following information applies to electronics plus inc 541498

                          E9-9B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO 1, 4)

                          The following information applies to Electronics Plus Inc.:

                          Income Statement for the Year Ended June 30, 2010

                          Sales

                          $ 35,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          (20,600)

                          Gross margin

                          14,400

                          Rent expense

                          (1,400)

                          Net income

                          $13,000

                          1. Accounts receivable started the year with a balance of $1,500 and ended the year with a balance of $500.

                          2. The beginning balance in accounts payable (to vendors) was $1,650, and the ending balance was $550. Inventory at the end of the year was the same as it was at the beginning of the year (i.e., there was no change in inventory).

                          3. The company started the year with $3,000 of prepaid rent and ended the year with $1,600 of prepaid rent.

                          Determine the following cash flows

                          a. Cash collected from customers for sales during the year

                          b. Cash paid to vendors for inventory during the year

                          c. Cash paid for rent during the year

                          the following information was taken from fix it company s balance sheets at june 30 541500

                          E9-11B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5 )

                          The following information was taken from Fix-It Company’s balance sheets at June 30, 2O0i and.2008. Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2008′ using the indirect method.

                          2008

                          2007

                          Current assets

                          Cash

                          $105,000

                          $ 95,000

                          Accounts receivable

                          80,000

                          89,000

                          Inventory

                          210,000

                          188,000

                          Prepaid expenses

                          53,000

                          45,000

                          Total current assets

                          $448,000

                          $417,000

                          Current liabilities

                          Accrued expenses payable

                          85,000

                          $ 22,000

                          Accounts payable

                          $ 18,000

                          63,000

                          Total current liabilities

                          $103,000

                          $85,000

                          Net income for the year ended June 30, 2008 was $215,000. Depreciation expense was $30,500.

                          during the fiscal year ended march 31 2008 radio technology inc engaged in the follo 541502

                          E9-13B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO I, 4)

                          During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, Radio Technology Inc. engaged in the following transactions. Using the relevant transactions, prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.

                          a. Paid $130,000 on accounts payable related to operating expenses

                          b. Collected$ 185,000 on accounts receivable

                          c. Made cash sales of $315,000

                          d. Paid salaries of $40,000

                          e. Recorded amortization expense of $15,000

                          f. Declared a2-for-l stock split

                          g. Paid interest on loan in the amount of $21,500

                          h. Repaid principal of loan for $275,000

                          i. Sold equipment for $295,000

                          j. Paid dividends of $15,000

                          k. Purchased a new building for cash of $215,000

                          I. Paid operating expenses of $65,50

                          use the following information for law office products and supplies inc to prepare a 541503

                          E9-148. Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (LO 2, 5)

                          Use the following information for LAW Office Products and Supplies Inc. to prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2007, using the indirect method.

                          LAW Office Products and Supplies Inc. Balance Sheet

                          2007

                          2008

                          Assets

                          Cash

                          $ 55,000

                          $ 23,500

                          Accounts receivable

                          78,000

                          54,000

                          Inventories

                          180,000

                          169,000

                          Land

                          135,000

                          105,000

                          Equipment

                          350,000

                          260,000

                          Accumulated depreciation

                          (90000)

                          (60,000)

                          Total assets

                          $ 708,000

                          $561,500

                          Liabilities and Shareholder’s Equity

                          Accounts payable

                          $ 35,000

                          $23,500

                          Bonds payable

                          185,000

                          215,000

                          Common stock and additional

                          paid-in capital

                          225,0OO

                          175,000

                          Retained earnings

                          263,000

                          131,500

                          Total liabilities and shareholder’s equity

                          $708,000

                          $561,500

                          Additional information:

                          a. Net income for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2007, was $145,000

                          b. The company declared and paid cash dividends.

                          c. The company redeemed bonds payable amounting to $30,000 for cash of $30,000.

                          d. The company issued common stock for $50,000 cash.

                          the following information was taken from the most recent statement of cash flows of 541504

                          E9-168. Analyze a statement of cash flows-( LO 7, 8)

                          The following information was taken from the most recent statement of cash flows of Innovative

                          Electronics Company’

                          Net cash provided by operating activities

                          $ 845,000

                          Net cash used by investing activities

                          $ (530,000)

                          Net cash provided by financing activities

                          $1,675,000

                          a. What information do these subtotals from the statement of cash flows tell you about Innovative Electronics Company?

                          b. what additional information would you want to see before you analyze Innovative Electronics company’s ability to generate positive operating cash flows in the future?

                          c. Did Innovative Electronics have a positive net income for the period? What information would you like to see to help you predict next year’s net income?

                          the information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of m amp s record compa 541505

                          Calculate cash from operating activities-indirect method. (LO 5)

                          The information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of M&S Record Company at December 31,2007 and 2006.

                          (in thousands)

                          Current assets:

                          Cash

                          $3,000

                          52,490

                          Accounts receivable

                          2,325

                          1,700

                          Inventory

                          2,150

                          1,380

                          Prepaid rent

                          320

                          270

                          Total current assets

                          $7,795

                          $5,840

                          Current liabilities:

                          Accounts payable

                          $4,390

                          $4,850

                          Salaries payable

                          $1,80

                          $ 1,050

                          Total current liabilities

                          2,500

                          3,800

                          Net income for 2007 was $356,000. Depreciation expense of $135,00 was including the operating expenses for the year.

                          Required

                          Use the indirect method to prepare the cash from operations section of the statement of cash flows for M&S Record Company for the year ended December 31, 2001.

                          the information shown comes from the balance sheets of tcb company at june 30 2008 a 541506

                          P9-3A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)

                          The information shown comes from the balance sheets of TCB Company at June 30, 2008 and 2007.

                          TCB Company
                          Balance Sheets (Adapted)
                          June 30, 2008, and June 30, 2007

                          (in thousands)

                          2008

                          2007

                          Current assets:

                          Cash

                          $2,11 0

                          $2,6s0

                          Accounts receivable

                          1,254

                          977

                          Inventory

                          730

                          856

                          Prepaid insurance

                          127

                          114

                          Total current assets

                          $4221

                          $4597

                          Current liabilities:

                          Accounts payable

                          $1,054

                          $1,330

                          Wages payable

                          2,100

                          1,750

                          Total current liabilities

                          $3154

                          $3,080

                          Net income for the year ended June 30, 2008, was $86,900. Included in the operating expenses of the year was depreciation expense of $102,000.

                          Required

                          Prepare the cash from operating activities section of TCB Company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2008. Use the indirect method.

                          rollins land corporation had the following information available for 2005 541507

                          P9-4A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)

                          Rollins Land Corporation had the following information available for 2005.

                          Januar1y

                          Decembe3r 1

                          Accounts receivable

                          $ 1 78,000

                          $151,000

                          Prepaid insurance

                          38,000

                          16,000

                          Inventory

                          65,000

                          71,000

                          Rollins Land Corporation reported net income of $295,000 for the year. Depreciation expense, included on the income statement was $26,500.

                          Required

                          Assume this is all the information relevant to the statement of cash flows. Use the indirect method to prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of Rollins Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2005.

                          to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2008 myers com 541508

                          P9-5A. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)

                          To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2008, Myers Company gathered the following information.

                          Loss on sale of machinery

                          $ 8,000

                          Proceeds from sale of machinery

                          50,000

                          Proceeds from bond issue (face value $100,000)

                          80,000

                          Amortization of bond discount

                          1,000

                          Dividends declared

                          25,000

                          Dividends paid

                          15,000

                          Purchase of treasury stock

                          30,000

                          Required

                          a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2005 martin co 541509

                          P9-6A. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)

                          To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31,2005, Martin Company gathered the following information.

                          Gain on sale of equipment

                          $ 4,000

                          Proceeds from sale of equipment

                          10,000

                          Purchase of equipment

                          80,000

                          Dividends declared

                          5,000

                          Dividends paid

                          2,000

                          Proceeds from sale of treasury stock

                          90,000

                          Repayment of loan principal

                          21,000

                          Payment of interest on loan

                          210

                          Required

                          a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.

                          the following balances were shown on the year end balance sheets for 2007 and 2008 f 541410

                          E8-10B. Analyze equity accounts(.L O 1,2,3,5)

                          The following balances were shown on the year-end balance sheets for 2007 and 2008 for High Note Publishing Company. For each item, give the most likely reason for the change from one year to the next.

                          12/31/07

                          12/31/08

                          Explanation

                          Common stock

                          $ 35,000

                          $43,000

                          Paid- in capital

                          $115.000

                          155,000

                          Retained earnings

                          $142,000

                          *$160,500

                          Treasury stock

                          $ (2,125)

                          $ (2,625)

                          answer the following questions using the shareholders equity section of fantasy film 541411

                          E8-11B. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3)

                          Answer the following questions using the shareholders’ equity section of Fantasy Films Corporation’s balance sheet at June 30.

                          Shareholders’ equity

                          Preferred stock, cumulative, 15,000 shares authorized,

                          4,000 shares issued and outstanding

                          $ 420,000

                          Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock

                          40,000

                          Common stock, $0.05 par, 500,000 shares authorized,

                          250,000 shares issued

                          12,500

                          Additional paid-in capital, common stock

                          675,000

                          Retained earnings

                          1,005,000

                          2,152,500

                          Less: Treasury stock (4,000 common shares)

                          (13,000)

                          Total shareholders’ equity

                          $2,139,500

                          a. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?

                          b. On average what was the issue price of the common shares issued?

                          c. What is the par value of the preferred stock?

                          d. If the total annual dividend on preferred stock is $25,200, what is the dividend rate on preferred stock?

                          e. On average, how much per share did the company pay for the treasury stock?

                          on the first day of the fiscal year jkb construction inc had 185 000 shares of 50 pa 541412

                          E8-12B. Record stock transactions (LO I, 2, 3, 4)

                          On the first day of the fiscal year, JKB Construction Inc. had 185,000 shares of $.50 par common stock issued and outstanding, and the retained earnings balance was $165,000.

                          Show each of the following transactions in the accounting equation.

                          a. Issued 15,000 additional shares of common stock for $16 per share

                          b. Distributed a2070 stock dividend

                          c. Issued 10,000 additional shares of common stock for $15 per share

                          d. Declared a cash dividend on outstanding shares of $ 1.10 per share

                          e. Paid the dividend declared in item d

                          f. Purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock for $16 per share

                          g. Sold 250 shares of treasury stock for $18 per share

                          h. Sold 200 shares of treasury stock for $15 per share

                          i. Declared 2-for-l stock split

                          the following account balances can be found in the general ledger of athletics suppl 541413

                          E8-14B. Prepare equity section of the balance sheet. (LO I, 3, 5)

                          The following account balances can be found in the general ledger of Athletics Supply Corporation at year-end. Prepare the shareholder’s equity section of the balance sheet

                          Retained earnings

                          $ 450,000

                          Treasury stock (4,000 common shares at cost)

                          36,000

                          Common stock ($2 par, 500,000 shares authorized,

                          175,000 shares issued)

                          350,000

                          Additional paid-in capital, common stock

                          2,712,500

                          Preferred stock ($8 par value, 8%, 90,000 shares authorized,

                          20,000 shares issued)

                          160,000

                          Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock

                          50,000

                          the following information pertains to the equity accounts of fragrant soap company i 541417

                          P8-34. Analyze and record stock transactions and prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3,4, 5)

                          The following information pertains to the equity accounts of Fragrant Soap Company Inc. L. Contributed capital on January 1, 2007, consisted of 70,000 issued and outstanding shares of common stock with par value of $0.50; additional paid-in capital in excess of par of $350,000; and retained earnings of $500,000.

                          2. During the first quarter of 2007, Fragrant Soap Company issued an additional 10,000 shares of common stock for $6 per share.

                          3. On June 15, the company declared a2-for-l stock split.

                          4. On September 30, the company distributed a I07o stock dividend. The market price of the stock on that date was $5 per share.

                          5. On October 1, the company declared a dividend of $0.25 per share to be paid on October 31.

                          6. Near the end of the year, the company’s CEO decided the company should buy 1,000 shares of its own stock. At that time, the stock was trading for $6 per share in the stock market.

                          7. Net income for 200’7 was $49.500.

                          Required

                          a. Show how each of the transactions would affect the accounting equation.

                          b. Prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2007.

                          on january 1 2007 the expedite corporation s shareholders equity account balances we 541418

                          P8-4A. Record stock transactions, prepare equity section of balance sheet, and calculate ratios.( LO 1,2,3, 5,6)

                          On January 1, 2007, the Expedite Corporation’s shareholders equity account balances were as follows

                          Preferred stock (6Vo, $ 100 par noncumulative,

                          25,000 shares authorized)

                          $ 500,000

                          Common stock ($5 par value, 8,000,000 shares authorized)

                          4,500,000

                          Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock

                          20,000

                          Additional paid-in capital, common stock

                          6,300,000

                          Retained earnings

                          20,380,000

                          Treasury stock-common( 5,000 shares at cost)

                          70,000

                          During 2007, Expedite Corporation engaged in the following transactions

                          Jan.5

                          Issued 10,000 shares of common stock for $15 per share

                          Feb. 9

                          Purchased 2,000 additional shares of common treasury stock at $13 per share

                          June 1

                          Declared the annual cash dividend on preferred stock, payable June 30

                          Dec. I

                          Declared a $0.25 per share cash dividend to common stockholders payable December 31, 2007

                          Net income for the year was $2,330,000

                          Required

                          a. Show each of the transactions in the accounting equation.

                          b. Prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2001.

                          c. Calculate earnings per share and return on common stockholders’ equity.

                          on october l 2006 marble company had 400 000 shares of 2 par common stock issued and 541419

                          P8-5A. Prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 5)

                          On October l,2006,Marble Company had 400,000 shares of $2 par common stock issued and outstanding. The shareholders equity accounts at October 1, 2006, had the following balances

                          Common stock

                          $ 800,000

                          Additional paid-in capital

                          2,400,000

                          Retained earnings

                          9,800,000

                          The following transactions occurred during the fiscal year ended September 30, 2007.

                          1. On October 30, issued 30,000 shares of 970, $100 par, cumulative preferred stock at $102.

                          2. On November 30, reacquired 8,000 shares of common stock for $8.50 per share.

                          3. On December 1, declared a cash dividend of $0.45 per share on the common stock outstanding, payable on December 31,2006, to shareholders of record on November 15.

                          4. Paid dividends to preferred shareholders on December 31, 2006.

                          5. Net income for the year ended September 30, 2001, was $3,875,000.

                          Required

                          Prepare the shareholders equity section of Marble’s balance sheet at September 30,2001.

                          the following information is from the equity sections of the comparative balance she 541420

                          P8-6A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 3′ 5)

                          The following information is from the equity sections of the comparative balance sheets for Wildwood Company.

                          December 31,2007

                          December 31, 2006

                          Common stock ($10 par)

                          $420,000

                          $400’000

                          Additional paid-in-capital

                          325,000

                          306,000

                          Retained earnings

                          55,000

                          51,000

                          Total shareholder’s equity

                          $801,000

                          $757,000

                          Net income for the year ended December 31, 2007, was $70,000.

                          Required

                          a. How many shares of common stock were issued to new shareholders during 2007?

                          b. What was the avera1eis sue price of the stock issued during 2007?

                          c. What was the amount of dividends declared during 2007?

                          d. Did the company have any treasury shares at the end of2007?

                          at december 31 2006 plasma company reported the following on its comparative balance 541421

                          P8-7A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 5)

                          At December 31,2006, Plasma Company reported the following on its comparative balance sheet (amounts in thousands).

                          December 31, 2006

                          December 31, 2005

                          Common stock

                          Authorized: 1,200 shares

                          Issued: 950 shares at 2006

                          $ 475

                          900 shares at 2005

                          $ 450

                          Paid-in capital in excess of par

                          19,000

                          17,550

                          Retained earnings

                          45,500

                          31,300

                          Required

                          a. What is the par value of the company’s common stock?

                          b. Did the company issue any new shares during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2006?

                          c. What was the approximate (average) issue price of the stock issued during the year?

                          d. Did Plasma Company earn net income (loss) during the year? Assuming no dividends were paid, how much was net income (loss)?

                          the following information is from the equity section of the comparative balance shee 541422

                          P8-8A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 3, 4)

                          The following information is from the equity section of the comparative balance sheets of Aloha Cruises Inc.

                          Aloha Cruises Inc. Consolidated Balance Sheets

                          Shareholder’s equity:

                          June 30, 2006

                          June 30, 2005

                          Common stock, $0.10 par value;

                          250,000 shares issued and

                          Shares outstanding at June 30, 2 006;

                          and 220,000 shares issued and

                          Shares outstanding at June 30, 2005.

                          $ 25.0

                          $ 22.0

                          Additional paid-in-capital

                          3,580

                          3,014

                          Retained earnings

                          8,237

                          7,450

                          Treasury stock, at cost,

                          14,200 shares at June 30, 2006,

                          and 12,000 shares at June 30, 2005.

                          213

                          171.6

                          Required

                          a. What was the average issue price per share of the 250,000 shares classified as “issued” at June 30, 2006? (Round the answer to the nearest cent.)

                          b. What was the average issue price of the 30,000 shares of common stock issued during the fiscal year ending June 30, 2006?

                          c. How many shares were outstanding at June 30,2006? How many shares were outstanding at June 30,2005?

                          d. How many shares did the company buy back during the year? What was the average cost of a share of the treasury shares purchased during the year?

                          (Assume no treasury stock was sold during the year.)

                          e. If no dividends were paid, what was net income for the year ending June 30, 2006?

                          simba corporation was started on july 1 2006 the company is authorized to issue 100 541423

                          P8-lB. Account for stock transactions (LO 1)

                          Simba Corporation was started on July 1, 2006. The company is authorized to issue 100,000 shares of 570, $100 par value preferred stock and 1,800,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $2 per share. The following stock transactions took place during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2007.

                          Issued 40,000 shares of common stock for cash at $23.50 per share

                          Issued 10,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $ 101 per share

                          Issued 40,000 shares of common stock for cash at $24.80 per share

                          Issued 7,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $102 per share

                          Issued 25,000 shares of common stock for cash at $25 per share

                          Required

                          a. Show each transaction in the accounting equation.

                          b. Prepare the contributed capital portion of the shareholder’s equity section at June 30,2007.

                          contributed capital on october 1 2006 consisted of 50 000 issued and outstanding sha 541425

                          P8-38. Analyze and record stock transactions and prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3,4, s)

                          The following information pertains to All Batteries Company Inc.

                          L. Contributed capital on October 1,2006, consisted of 50,000 issued and outstanding shares of common stock with par value of $l; additional paid-in capital in excess of par of $250,000; and retained earnings of $400,000.

                          2. During the first quarter of the fiscal year, All Batteries Company issued an additional 20,000 shares of common stock for $8 per share.

                          3. On March 15, the company declared a2-for-1 stock split.

                          4. On June 30, the company distributed a 5Vo stock dividend. The market price of the stock on that date was $6 per share.

                          5. On July 1, the company declared a dividend of $0.50 per share to be paid on July 31.

                          6. During September 2007, All Batteries Company’s CEO decided the company should buy 600 shares of its own stock. At that time, the stock was trading for $7 per share.

                          7. Net income for the year ended September 30, 2007, was $87,500.

                          Required

                          a. Show each of the transactions in the accounting equation.

                          b. Prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at September 30, 2007.

                          on july 1 2006 philbrick company had 500 000 shares of 1 par common stock issued and 541427

                          P8-5B. Prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 5)

                          On July 1, 2006, Philbrick Company had 500,000 shares of $1 par common stock issued and outstanding. The shareholder’s equity accounts at July 1, 2006, had the following balances.

                          Common stock

                          $ 500,000

                          Additional paid-in capital

                          36,500,000

                          Retained earnings

                          22,100,000

                          The following transactions occurred during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2007.

                          1. On July 30, issued 50.000 shares of $ 100 par value, 67o cumulative preferred stock at $103.

                          2. On October 1, reacquired 20,000 shares of common stock for $76 per share.

                          3. On December 1, declared a cash dividend of $2.50 per share on the common stock outstanding, payable on December 31, 2006, to shareholder of record on November 15.

                          4. Paid dividends to preferred shareholders on December 3I,2006.

                          5. Net income for the year ended June 30, 2007, was $5,150,000.

                          Required

                          Prepare the shareholder’s equity section of Philbrick’s balance sheet at June 30, 2007.

                          at june 30 2007 high quality mining company reported the following on its comparativ 541429

                          P8-7B. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO I, 2, 5)

                          At June 30, 2007, High Quality Mining Company reported the following on its comparative balance sheet, which included 2006 amounts for comparison (amounts in millions).

                          June 30 2007

                          June 30 2006

                          Common stock

                          Authorized: 2,500 shares

                          $ 14,500

                          lssued:1 ,450 shares in 2007

                          1,400 shares in 2006

                          $ 14,000

                          Paid-in capital in excess of par

                          4,350

                          2,890

                          Retained earnings

                          15,500

                          14,300

                          Required

                          a. What is the par value of the company’s common stock?

                          b. Did the company issue any new shares during the fiscal ended June 30, 2007?

                          c. What was the approximate (average) issue price of the stock issued during the year?

                          d. Did High Quality Mining Company earn net income (loss) during the year?

                          Assuming no dividends were paid this year, what was net income (loss X)

                          use the following information to answer the next three questions 541453

                          Use the following information to answer the next three questions.

                          The income statement and additional data for Frances Company for the year ended December 31. 2006. Follows

                          Sales revenue

                          $400,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          $165,000

                          Salary expense

                          $ 70,000

                          Depreciation expense

                          $ 55,000

                          Insurance expense

                          $ 20,000

                          Interest expense

                          $ 10,000

                          Income tax expense

                          $ 18,000

                          Net income

                          $ 62,000

                          Accounts receivable decreased by $12,000. Inventories increased by $6,000 and accounts payable decreased by $2,000. Salaries payable increased by $8,000. Prepaid insurance increased by $4,000. Interest expense and income tax expense equal their cash amounts. Frances Company uses the direct method for its statement of cash flows.

                          for each of the following items tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and 541477

                          E9-1A Identify cash flows (L.OI)

                          For each of the following items, tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and the section of the statement of cash flows in which the item would appear. (Assume the direct method is used.)

                          Item

                          Inflow
                          or Outflow

                          Section of
                          the Statement

                          a. Cash collected from customers

                          b. Proceeds from issue of stock

                          c. Interest payment on loan

                          d. Principle payment on loan

                          e. Cash paid for advertising

                          f. Proceeds from sale of treasury stock

                          g. Money borrowed from the local bank

                          h. Cash paid to employees (salaries)

                          i . Purchase of equipment for cash

                          j. Cash paid to vendors for inventory

                          k. Taxes paid

                          for each transaction indicate the amount of the cash flow indicate whether each resu 541478

                          E9-2A. Identify cash flows. (LO 1, 4, 6)

                          For each transaction, indicate the amount of the cash flow, indicate whether each results in an inflow or outflow of cash, and give the section of the statement in which each cash flow would appear. Assume the statement of cash flows is prepared using the direct method.

                          Amount

                          Inflow
                          or Outflow

                          Section of
                          the Statement

                          a. lssued1 00s hares of $2 par common
                          stock for $12 per share

                          b. Borrowed $7,000 from a local bank
                          to expand the business

                          c. Purchased $500 of supplies for $400 cash and the balance on account

                          d. Hireda carpenter to build some book case for the office for $500 cash

                          e. Earned revenue of $19,000 receiving $9,200 cash and the balance on account

                          f. Hired a student to do some typing
                          and paid him $250 cash

                          g. Repaid$ 7,000o f the bank loan along
                          with $250 interest.

                          h. Paid dividends of $600

                          prepare cash from operating activities section of statement of cash flows using the 541479

                          E9-3A. Prepare cash from operating activities section of statement of cash flows using the direct method (.L O 4)

                          Use the income statement for Clark Corporation for past year and the information from the comparative balance sheets shown for the beginning and the end of the year to prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.

                          Sales

                          $ 100,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          35,000

                          Gross margin

                          55,000

                          Operating expenses

                          Wages

                          $ 2,500

                          Rent

                          1,200

                          Utilities

                          980

                          Insurance

                          320

                          5,000

                          Net income

                          $ 60,000

                          Account

                          Beginning of the Year

                          End of the Year

                          Accounts receivable

                          $ 10,000

                          $ 12,000

                          Inventory

                          21,000

                          1 8,500

                          Prepaid insurance

                          575

                          400

                          Accounts payable

                          9,000

                          10,400

                          Wages payable

                          850

                          600

                          Utilities payable

                          150

                          -0-

                          given the following information calculate the change in cash for the year 541480

                          E9-54. Calculate change in cash. (LO 1, 4, 6)

                          Given the following information, calculate the change in cash for the year.

                          Cash received from sale of equipment

                          $ 20,000

                          Cash paid for salaries

                          8,250

                          Depreciation expense for the year

                          12,450

                          Cash received from issue of stock

                          150,000

                          Cash collected from customers

                          87,900

                          Cash received from sale of land

                          14,500

                          Cash paid for operating expenses

                          2,000

                          Cash paid to vendor for inventory

                          32,480

                          use the information given for evans company to calculate 541481

                          E9-6A. Calculate cash from operating activities. (LO 3, 4)

                          Use the information given for Evans Company to calculate

                          a. Cash paid for salaries

                          b. Cash paid for income taxes

                          c. Cash paid for inventory items

                          d. Cash collected from customers

                          e. Cash proceeds from stock issue

                          From the Financial Statements for Evans Company

                          Balance Sheet

                          Income Statement
                          Amount for the Year

                          Beginning
                          of the Year

                          End
                          of the Year

                          Sales revenue

                          $ 85,600

                          Accounts receivable

                          $ 8,700

                          $ 10,000

                          Salary expense

                          21, 400

                          Salaries payable

                          2,300

                          2,100

                          Cost of goods sold

                          24,300

                          Inventory

                          4,800

                          8,000

                          Accounts payable

                          2,500

                          3,000

                          Income tax expense

                          28,500

                          Income taxes payable

                          7,400

                          8,500

                          Common stock and additional

                          paid-in capital

                          N/A

                          630,000

                          718,000

                          Prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows and determine the method used. (LO 2, 4, 6)

                          Use the information from E9-6A to calculate the cash flow from operations for Evans Company.

                          Based on the information provided, which method of preparing the statement of cash flows does Evans use

                          can someone please help me with accounting 540659

                          please i need someone to explain me the cash budget and income statement please i need help

                          Document Preview:

                          Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.36 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.36 PM.png Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.38 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.38 PM.png Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.40 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.40 PM.png Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.42 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.42 PM.png Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.44 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.44 PM.png Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.48 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.48 PM.png Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.55 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.28.55 PM.png Archive copy/Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.29.01 PM.png __MACOSX/Archive copy/._Screen Shot 2014-03-13 at 11.29.01 PM.png

                          Attachments:

                          dry quick dq is a medium sized private manufacturing company located near timmins 540725

                          Dry Quick (DQ) is a medium-sized, private manufacturing company located near Timmins, Ontario. DQ has a June 30 year-end. The Chief Financial Officer (CFO) believed DQ had outgrown its audit firm and asked your firm, Poivre & Sel (P&S), to perform the annual audit. It is now August 2, 2010. P&S performed the necessary client acceptance procedures and is currently working on the year-end audit of DQ. However, the senior on the engagement has recently become ill and will be unable to complete the file. You, CA, have been asked to take over the senior role on the audit. The following information has been provided to help you familiarize yourself with the client: information on DQ (Exhibit I), a draft income statement prepared by management in accordance with Canadian Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) (Exhibit II), notes from your firm’s meetings with management and the Board Chair (Exhibit 111), and excerpts from the current year audit file (Exhibit IV).

                          The following week, the audit partner on the file calls you into his office, “Now that you’ve had the audit file for a week, can you let me know what issues you’ve identified and what is left to be done, including a list of outstanding audit procedures. In addition, the Board Chair is curious to see what our management letter is likely to contain, so please prepare a first draft for me.”

                          hickory company manufactures two products 14 000 units of product y and 6 000 units 540731

                          Hickory Company manufactures two products – 14,000 units of Product Y and 6,000 units of Product Z.The company uses a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor-hours.It is a considering implementing an activity-based costing (ABC) costing to allocate all of its manufacturing overhead to their products using four cost pools.The following additional information is available for the company as a whole and for Products Y and Z.

                          Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Total Activity Cost Pool Total Amount of Activity Allocation Base
                          Machining Machine-hours $ 200,000.00 10,000
                          Machine setups Number of setups $ 100,000.00 200
                          Inspection Number of inspections $ 50,000.00 25,000
                          General factory Direct Labor-hours $ 300,000.00 12,000
                          $650,000.00
                          Activity Measure Total Amount of the Activity Allocation Base for All Units of Product Y Total Amount of the Activity Allocation Base for All Units of Product Z Total Amount of Activity Allocation Base
                          Machine-hours 7,000 3,000 10,000
                          Number of setups 50 150 200
                          Number of Inpections 12,000 13,000 25,000
                          Direct Labor-hours 8,000 4,000 12,000
                          Direct Costs for Products Y & Z:
                          Direct Costs: Total Cost for All units Produced of Product Y Total Cost for All units Produced of Product Product Z
                          Direct Material $100,000.00 $ 110,000.00
                          Direct Labor $50,000.00 $ 60,000.00
                          Number of Finished Units Produced

                          1. The company’s plantwide overhead rate.

                          2. Using the traditional plantwide overhead rate , the amount of manufacturing overhead cost allocated to Product Y and Product Z.

                          3. Total product cost for Product Y and Z under the traditional plantwide overhead rate system.

                          4. Total product cost per unit for Product Y and Product Z under the traditional plantwide overhead rate system.

                          5. The company switches to an ABC costing system for allocating overhead to product Y and product Z.

                          Calculate the overhead activity rate for the four cost pools (machining, machine setups, inspections

                          and general factory)

                          6. Using the ABC system, calculate total manufacturing overhead cost assigned to Product Y.

                          7. Using the ABC system, calculate total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Z.

                          8. Total product cost for Product Y and Z under the Activity based costing system?

                          9. Total product cost per unit for Product Y and Product Z under Activity Based Costing

                          system.

                          10. Which product was overcosted when using the Plantwide rate, in comparison to ABC Costing?

                          11. Which product was undercosted when using the Plantwide rate, in comparison to ABC Costing?

                          14,000 6,000

                          a company has an overhead application rate of 123 of direct labor costs 540740

                          A company has an overhead application rate of 123% of direct labor costs. How much overhead would be allocated to a job if it required total labor costing $25,000?
                          $15,375.
                          $20,325.
                          $307,500.
                          $25,000.
                          $30,750.

                          2-

                          Use the following information about the current year’s operations of a company to calculate the cash paid for merchandise.
                          Cost of good sold $ 238,000
                          Merchandise inventory, January 1 66,800
                          Merchandise inventory, December 31 68,200
                          Accounts payable, January 1 65,200
                          Accounts payable, December 31 71,800
                          $246,000.
                          $243,200.
                          $230,000.
                          $238,000.
                          $232,800.

                          3-

                          A machine with a cost of $142,000 and accumulated depreciation of $97,000 is sold for $56,000 cash. The amount that should be reported as a source of cash under cash flows from investing activities is:
                          $45,000.
                          Zero. This is an operating activity.
                          $11,000.
                          $56,000.
                          Zero. This is a financing activity.
                          4-
                          The Goods in Process Inventory account for AB Manufacturing follows. Compute the cost of jobs completed and transferred to Finished Goods Inventory.
                          Goods in Process Inventory


                          Beginning balance 5,200
                          Direct materials 47,800
                          Direct labor 30,300
                          Applied overhead 16,500 ? Finished goods




                          Ending balance 10,300

                          The cost of units transferred to finished goods is:
                          $94,600.
                          $99,800.
                          $98,000.
                          $89,500.
                          $110,100.

                          5-

                          The Goods in Process Inventory account of a manufacturing company that uses an overhead rate based on direct labor cost has a $4,809 debit balance after all posting is completed. The cost sheet of the one job still in process shows direct material cost of $2,100 and direct labor cost of $900. Therefore, the company’s overhead application rate is:
                          43%.
                          50%.
                          201%.
                          86%.
                          233%.
                          6-
                          Estimated overhead and direct labor costs for the year were $114,500 and $124,700, respectively.
                          During the year, actual overhead was $107,100 and actual direct labor cost was $117,000. The entry to close the over- or underapplied overhead at year-end, assuming an immaterial amount, would include(Round predetermined overhead rate to nearest whole percentage.):
                          A debit to Cost of Goods Sold for $540.
                          A credit to Cost of Goods Sold for $540.
                          A debit to Goods in Process Inventory for $540.
                          A credit to Finished Goods Inventory for $540.
                          A credit to Factory Overhead for $540.

                          7-

                          In preparing a company’s statement of cash flows for the most recent year on the indirect method, the following information is available:
                          Net income for the year was $ 62,000
                          Accounts payable decreased by 28,000
                          Accounts receivable decreased by 35,000
                          Inventories increased by 15,000
                          Cash dividends paid were 16,000
                          Depreciation expense was 40,000
                          Net cash provided by operating activities was:
                          $94,000.
                          $78,000.
                          $54,000.
                          $150,000.
                          $40,000.
                          8
                          Ajax Company accumulated the following account information for the year:
                          Beginning raw materials inventory $ 6,900
                          Indirect materials cost 2,900
                          Indirect labor cost 5,900
                          Maintenance of factory equipment 3,700
                          Direct labor cost 7,900
                          Using the above information, total factory overhead costs would be:
                          $9,600.
                          $20,400.
                          $18,500.
                          $15,700.
                          $12,500.
                          9-
                          A company had net cash flows from operations of $85,200, cash flows from financing of $360,000, total cash flows of $324,000, and average total assets of $2,400,000. The cash flow on total assets ratio equals:
                          3.75%.
                          3.55%.
                          13.50%.
                          15.00%.
                          26.30%.

                          10-

                          Ajax Company accumulated the following account information for the year:
                          Beginning raw materials inventory $ 6,900
                          Indirect materials cost 2,900
                          Indirect labor cost 5,900
                          Maintenance of factory equipment 3,700
                          Direct labor cost 7,900
                          Using the above information, total factory overhead costs would be:

                          11-

                          Juliet Corporation has accumulated the following accounting data for the year:
                          Finished goods inventory, January 1 $ 2,200
                          Finished goods inventory, December 31 3,000
                          Total cost of goods sold 8,200
                          The cost of goods manufactured for the year is:
                          $11,200.
                          $9,000.
                          $10,400.
                          $6,000.
                          $5,200.

                          12-

                          Salaries expense $ 176,000
                          Salaries payable, January 1 7,200
                          Salaries payable, December31 12,200
                          $171,000.
                          $183,200.
                          $176,000.
                          $163,800.
                          $181,000.

                          13 Typical cash flows from investing activities include each of the following
                          except:

                          Payments to acquire held-to maturity securities of other entities, except cash equivalents.
                          Proceeds from the sale of equipment.
                          Proceeds from collecting the principal amount of notes receivable arising from intercompany transactions.
                          Payments to purchase property, plant and equipment or other productive assets (excluding inventory).
                          Proceeds from collecting the principal amount of notes receivable arising from customer sales.

                          14-

                          Trenton reports net income of $247,000 for the year ended December 31, Year 2. It also reports $95,100 depreciation expense and a $5,850 gain on the sale of equipment. Its comparative balance sheet reveals a $38,900 decrease in accounts receivable, a $17,450 increase in accounts payable, and a $13,650 decrease in wages payable. Calculate the net cash provided (used) in operating activities using the indirect method.
                          $344,050.
                          $406,250.
                          $384,800.
                          $378,950.
                          $283,950.

                          A cash equivalent is an investment that:

                          Is highly liquid.
                          All of the choices are correct.
                          Generally is within 3 months of its maturity date.
                          Is sufficiently close to its maturity date so its market value is unaffected by interest rate changes.
                          Is readily convertible to a known amount of cash.

                          Bottom of Form Top of Form A cash equivalent is an investment that:

                          Is highly liquid.
                          All of the choices are correct.
                          Generally is within 3 months of its maturity date.
                          Is sufficiently close to its maturity date so its market value is unaffected by interest rate changes.
                          Is readily convertible to a known amount of cash.

                          Bottom of Form

                          Note: need a detailed explanation

                          Attachments:

                          accounting questions if a firm had sales of 50 000 during a period 540770

                          If a firm had sales of 50,000 during a period and sales returns and allowances of 4,000 its nets sales were 54,000 50,000 46,000 4,000 On Dec. 31, prior to adjustment, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of 200. An age analysis of the accounts receivable produces an estimate of 1,000 of probable losses from uncollectible accounts. The adjusting entry needed to record the estimated losses from uncollectible accounts is made for 800.00 1,000 1,200 200.

                          Document Preview:

                          If a firm had sales of 50,000 during a period and sales returns and allowances of 4,000 its nets sales were 54,000 50,000 46,000 4,000 On Dec. 31, prior to adjustment, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of 200. An age analysis of the accounts receivable produces an estimate of 1,000 of probable losses from uncollectible accounts. The adjusting entry needed to record the estimated losses from uncollectible accounts is made for 800.00 1,000 1,200 200.00 A firm reported sales of 300,000 during the year and has a balance of 20,000 in its accounts receivable account at year-end. Prior to adj. allowance for doubtful accounts has a credit balance of 300. The firm estimated its losses from uncollectible accounts to be one half of 1 percent of sales. The entry to record the estimated losses from uncollectible accounts will include a credit to Allowance for doubtful accounts for A debit to interest income and a credit to notes payable A debit to interest payable and a credit to interest expense A debit to interest expense and a credit to cash A debit to interest expense and a credit to interest payable The adjusting entry to record accrued interest on a note payable requires A debit to interest income and a credit to notes payable A debit to interest payable and a credit to interest expense A debit to interest expense and a credit to cash A debit to interest expense and a credit to interest payable When a company issues a promissory note, the accountant records an entry that includes a credit to note payable for The face value of the note The face value of the note plus the interest that will accrue The face value less the interest that will accrue The maturity value of the note Amounts that a business must pay in the future are known a. accounts receivable b. accounts payable c. stock d. expense The balance sheet shows The results of business operations All revenues and expenses The amount of net income or loss The financial position of a business at…

                          Attachments:

                          accounting 540831

                          Exercise 20-14

                          Johnson Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.

                          Current Machine New Machine
                          Original purchase cost $15,040 $24,810
                          Accumulated depreciation $6,950 _
                          Estimated annual operating costs $24,790 $19,760
                          Useful life 5 years 5 years

                          If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $10,260. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after 5 years.

                          Prepare an incremental analysis.
                          (Enter negative amounts using either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)

                          Retain
                          Machine
                          Replace
                          Machine
                          Net Income
                          Increase
                          (Decrease)
                          Operating costs $ $ $
                          New machine cost
                          Salvage value (old)
                          Total $ $ $

                          Should the current machine be replaced?

                          The current machine should beretainedreplaced.

                          Exercise 20-2

                          Gruden Company produces golf discs which it normally sells to retailers for $6.87 each. The cost of manufacturing 22,800 golf discs is:

                          Materials $11,628
                          Labor 32,148
                          Variable overhead 22,572
                          Fixed overhead 46,512
                          Total $112,860

                          Gruden also incurs 5% sales commission ($0.34) on each disc sold.
                          McGee Corporation offers Gruden $5 per disc for 5,300 discs. McGee would sell the discs under its own brand name in foreign markets not yet served by Gruden. If Gruden accepts the offer, its fixed overhead will increase from $46,512 to $51,412 due to the purchase of a new imprinting machine. No sales commission will result from the special order.

                          Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.(Enter negative amounts using either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)

                          Reject
                          Order
                          Accept
                          Order
                          Net Income
                          Increase
                          (Decrease)
                          Revenues $ $ $
                          Materials
                          Labor
                          Variable overhead
                          Fixed overhead
                          Sales commissions
                          Net income $ $ $

                          LINK TO TEXT
                          Should Gruden accept the special order?

                          Gruden shouldacceptrejectthe special order.

                          Exercise 20-6

                          Jobs, Inc. has recently started the manufacture of Tri-Robo, a three-wheeled robot that can scan a home for fires and gas leaks and then transmit this information to a mobile phone. The cost structure to manufacture 20,000 Tri-Robos is as follows.

                          Cost
                          Direct materials ($42 per robot) $840,000
                          Direct labor ($41 per robot) 820,000
                          Variable overhead ($8 per robot) 160,000
                          Allocated fixed overhead ($25 per robot) 500,000
                          Total $2,320,000

                          Jobs is approached by Tienh Inc., which offers to make Tri-Robo for $106 per unit or $2,120,000.

                          Assume that $320,000 of the fixed overhead cost can be reduced (avoided). Prepare incremental analysis.(Enter negative amounts using either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)

                          Make Buy Net Income
                          Increase
                          (Decrease)
                          Direct materials $ $ $
                          Direct labor
                          Variable overhead
                          Fixed overhead
                          Purchase price
                          Total annual cost $ $ $

                          Determine whether Jobs should accept this offer.
                          YesNo

                          LINK TO TEXT
                          Assume that none of the fixed overhead can be reduced (avoided). However, if the robots are purchased from Tienh Inc., Jobs can use the released productive resources to generate additional income of $320,000. Prepare incremental analysis.(Enter negative amounts using either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)

                          Make Buy Net Income
                          Increase
                          (Decrease)
                          Direct materials $ $ $
                          Direct labor
                          Variable overhead
                          Fixed overhead
                          Opportunity cost
                          Purchase price
                          Totals $ $ $

                          Determine whether Jobs should accept this offer.
                          YesNo

                          deglman manufacturing direct labor and overhead 540838

                          Deglman Manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production on the basis of direct labor costs. On January 1, 2012, Job No. 50 was the only job in process. The costs incurred prior to January 1 on this job were as follows: direct materials $20,000, direct labor $12,000, and manufacturing overhead $16,000. As of January 1, Job No. 49 had been completed at a cost of $90,000 and was part of finished goods inventory. There was a $15,000 balance in the Raw Materials Inventory account.

                          During the month of January, Deglman Manufacturing began production on Jobs 51 and 52, and completed Jobs 50 and 51. Jobs 49 and 50 were also sold on account during the month for $122,000 and $158,000, respectively. The following additional events occurred during the month.

                          1.

                          Purchased additional raw materials of $90,000 on account.

                          2.

                          Incurred factory labor costs of $70,000. Of this amount $16,000 related to employer payroll taxes.

                          3.

                          Incurred manufacturing overhead costs as follows: indirect materials $17,000; indirect labor $20,000; depreciation expense on equipment $19,000; and various other manufacturing overhead costs on account $16,000.

                          4.

                          Assigned direct materials and direct labor to jobs as follows.

                          Job No.

                          Direct Materials

                          Direct Labor

                          50

                          $10,000

                          $ 5,000

                          51

                          39,000

                          25,000

                          52

                          30,000

                          20,000

                          Instructions

                          (a)

                          Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for 2012, assuming Deglman Manufacturing estimates total manufacturing overhead costs of $980,000, direct labor costs of $700,000, and direct labor hours of 20,000 for the year.

                          (b)

                          Open job cost sheets for Jobs 50, 51, and 52. Enter the January 1 balances on the job cost sheet for Job No. 50.

                          (c)

                          Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of raw materials, the factory labor costs incurred, and the manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month of January.

                          (d)

                          Prepare the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to production. In assigning manufacturing overhead costs, use the overhead rate calculated in (a). Post all costs to the job cost sheets as necessary.

                          (e)

                          Total the job cost sheets for any job(s) completed during the month. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the completion of any job(s) during the month.

                          (f)

                          Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the sale of any job(s) during the month.

                          (g)

                          What is the balance in the Finished Goods Inventory account at the end of the month? What does this balance consist of?

                          (h)

                          What is the amount of over- or underapplied overhead?

                          amortization of intangibles 541314

                          Amortization of Intangibles. On January 1 of the current year, Palm Corporation purchases the net assets of Vicki’s unincorporated business for $600,000. The tangible net assets have a $300,00 book value and a $400,000 FMV. The purchase agreement states that Vicki will not compete with Palm Corporation by starting a new business in the same area for A PERIOD OF FIVE YEARS. The stated consideration received by Vicki for the covenant not to compete is $50,000. Other intangibles assets included in the purchase agreement are as follows:

                          Goodwill: $70,000

                          Patents (12-year remaining legal life):$30,000

                          Customer list:$50,000

                          1. How would Vicki’s assets be recorded for tax purposes by Palm Corporation?

                          2. What is the amortization amount for each intangible asset in the current year?

                          pets mart reported the following information on the financial statements included wi 541389

                          E8-lA. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO I, 5)

                          Pets Mart reported the following information on the financial statements included with its 2004 annual report. Were any new shares of common stock issued between February 1, 2004, and January 30, 2005? Did the company report a net income for the year ended January 30, 2005? Explain how You know

                          (dollars in thousands)

                          Jan. 30, 2005

                          Feb. 1, 2004

                          Common stock, par value $0’0001

                          Authorized:2 50,000,000 shares;

                          Issued and outstanding 149,517,000 shares

                          15

                          at Jan. 30, 2005

                          144,813,000 shares

                          14

                          at February 1 ,2004

                          Paid- in capital

                          792,400

                          705,265

                          Retained earnings

                          286,380

                          132,544

                          framer company has 4 000 shares of 9 100 par cumulative preferred stock outstanding 541393

                          E8-6A. Distribute dividend between preferred and common shareholders. (LO 2)

                          Framer Company has 4,000 shares of 9%, $100 par, cumulative preferred stock outstanding and 10,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding. The company began operations on January 1, 2008. The cash dividends declared and paid during each of the first 3 years of Framer’s operations are shown. Calculate the amounts that went to the preferred and the common shareholders (SHs) each year.

                          Total Dividends

                          Dividends to

                          Year

                          Paid

                          Preferred SHs

                          2008

                          $120,000

                          2009

                          50,000

                          201 0

                          80,000

                          jazz company had the following stockholders equity section on the december 31 2007 b 541394

                          E8-7A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO l, 2)

                          Jazz Company had the following stockholders’ equity section on the December 31, 2007, balance sheet

                          Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par, cumulative

                          $1,250,000

                          Common stock, $2 par value

                          800,000

                          Paid-in capital in excess of par, common stock

                          3,500,000

                          Retained earnings

                          3,461,000

                          Total

                          $9,017,000

                          a. How many shares of common stock are classified as issued?

                          b. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?

                          c. How many shares of preferred stock are outstanding?

                          d. What was the average selling price of a share of common stock?

                          e. If $150,000 of dividends was declared and there were no dividends in arrears, how much of the dividend would go to the common shareholders

                          quicksilver corporation is authorized to issue both preferred and common stock 541395

                          E8-8A. Record stock transactions. (LO 1, 2, 3)

                          Quicksilver Corporation is authorized to issue both preferred and common stock. Quicksilver’s preferred stock is $200 par, 5% preferred stock. During the first month of operations, the company engaged in the following transactions related to its stock. Show each of the following transactions in the accounting equation

                          Jan. 1

                          Issued 30,000 shares of $1 par value common stock for cash at $51 per share

                          Jan. 10

                          Issued 1,000 shares of preferred stock at par

                          Jan. 15

                          Purchased 2,000 shares of common stock to be held in the treasury for $53 per share

                          Jan.20

                          Issued 40,000 shares $1 par value common stock for cash at $56 per share

                          Jan.21

                          Sold 1,500 shares of the treasury stock purchased on the 15th for $56 per share

                          Jan. 31

                          Declared a $25,000 dividend

                          the following balances were shown on the year end balance sheets for 2006 and2007 fo 541396

                          E8-10A. Analyze equity accounts. (LO 1,2, 3, 5)

                          The following balances were shown on the year-end balance sheets for 2006 and2007 for Columbia Company. For each item, give the most likely reason for the change from one year to the next.

                          12/31/06

                          12/31/07

                          Common stock

                          $ 45,000

                          $ 50,000

                          Paid-in-capital

                          $200,000

                          $230,000

                          Retained earnings

                          $182,500

                          *$200,000

                          Treasury stock

                          $ (3,450)

                          $ (5,450)

                          answer the following questions using the shareholders equity section of camp corpora 541397

                          E8-11A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3)

                          Answer the following questions using the shareholders’ equity section of Camp Corporation’s balance sheet at December 31.

                          Shareholders’ equity

                          Preferred stock, cumulative, 10,000 shares authorized,

                          3,000 shares issued and outstanding

                          $ 300,000

                          Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock

                          30,000

                          Common stock, $0.10 par,750,000 shares authorized,

                          600,000 shares issued

                          60,000

                          Additional paid-in capital, common stock

                          234,000

                          Retained earnings

                          975,000

                          1,599,000

                          Less: Treasury stock (8,000 common shares)

                          (85,200)

                          Total shareholders equity

                          $1,513,800

                          a. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?

                          b. On average, what was the issue price of the common shares issued?

                          c. What is the par value of the preferred stock?

                          d. If the total annual dividend on preferred stock is $24,000, what is the dividend rate on preferred stock?

                          e. On average, how much per share did the company pay for the treasury stock?

                          on the first day of the fiscal year zenith corporation had 1 90 000 shares of 1 par 541398

                          E8-12A. Record stock transactions (L.O I,2, 3,4)

                          On the first day of the fiscal year, Zenith Corporation had 1 90,000 shares of $ 1 par common stock issued and outstanding and the retained earnings balance was $350,000. Show how each of the following transactions would affect the accounting equation.

                          a. Issued 10,000 additional shares of common stock for $15 per share b. Distributed a I07o stock dividend

                          c. Issued 5,000 additional shares of common stock for $14 per share

                          d. Declared a cash dividend on outstanding shares of $ 1.20 per share

                          e. Paid the dividend declared in item d

                          f. Purchased 500 shares of treasury stock for $15 per share

                          g. Sold 200 shares of treasury stock for $17 per share

                          h. Sold 250 shares of treasury stock for $14 per share

                          i. Declared 2-foy1, stock split

                          the following financial information is available for cable corporation at the end of 541400

                          E8-15A. Calculate return on equity and earnings per share. (LO 6)

                          The following financial information is available for Cable Corporation at the end of its two most recent fiscal years. The company has no preferred stock. Calculate (1) return on equity and (2) earnings per share. What do the ratios indicate about the company’s performance during the year?

                          (amounts in thousands)

                          2006

                          2005

                          Weighted average common shareholder’s equity

                          $1,328

                          $1,150

                          Dividends declared for common shareholder’s

                          500

                          485

                          Net income

                          2,015

                          1,422

                          Average number of common shares outstanding during the year

                          2,18

                          1,95

                          analyze the following transactions and indicate the dollar increase or decrease each 541401

                          E8-16A. Analyze effects of equity transactions on financial statements(.L O 1,2, 3,4, 5)

                          Analyze the following transactions and indicate the dollar increase(*) or decrease(-) each has on the balance sheet. If there is an overall change in shareholder’s equity also indicate whether contributed capital, retained earnings, or treasury stock is affected. If the transaction has no effect on the balance sheet, enter NA for that item. The first row is filled in for you as an example

                          Shareholders Equity Sect ion

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          Equity

                          Affected

                          issued 1,000 shares of $1 par

                          Contributed

                          common stock at par

                          + 1,000

                          + 1,000

                          capital

                          Issued 1,500 shares of $1 par

                          common stock for $14

                          Declared a cash dividend

                          of $.25 per share

                          Paid the $.25 cash dividend

                          Purchased2 00 shares of

                          treasury stock for $17 per share

                          Sold 100 shares of treasury stock

                          for $17 per share

                          Distributed a 1070 common

                          stock dividend

                          Announced a 2-for-1 stock split

                          Issued 2,000 shares of $100 par,

                          47o noncumulative preferred stock

                          outback steakhouse reported the following information on the financial statement is 541403

                          E8-1B. Analyze equity section of balance sheet (.L O 1, 5)

                          Outback Steakhouse reported the following information on the financial statement is included with its 2005 annual report. Were any new shares of common stock issued during the year end December 31, 2005? Did the company report a net income for the year ended December 31 2005? Explain how you know.

                          (in thousands except per share amounts)

                          December 31 , 2005

                          December 31, 2004

                          Common stock, par value $0.01

                          Authorized: 200,000 shares;

                          Issued: 78,750 shares at Dec. 31,2005;

                          78,750 shares at Dec. 31, 2004

                          788

                          788

                          Outstanding: 74,854 shares at Dec. 31, 2005

                          73,767 shares at Dec. 31, 2004

                          Additional paid-in capital

                          291,0 35

                          271,109

                          Retained earnings

                          1,104,423

                          1,025,447

                          rich land inc had a net income of 315 000 for the year ended june 30 2008 on july 15 541407

                          E8-5B. Analyze effects of dividends on financial statements. (LO 2)

                          Rich Land Inc. had a net income of $315,000 for the year ended June 30,2008. On July 15, 2008, the board of directors met and declared a dividend of $0.25 per share for each of the 500,000 outstanding shares of common stock. The board voted to make the actual distribution on September to all shareholders of record as of August 1. What is (a) the date of declaration, (b) the date of record, and (c) the date of payment? If Rich Land Inc. were to prepare a balance sheet on July 30, how would the dividends be reported (if at all X E8-68. Distribute dividend between preferred and common shareholders. (LO 2)

                          Law ever Electronics Inc. has 8,000 shares of $150 par, l27o cumulative preferred stock outstanding and 15,000 shares of $2 par value common stock outstanding. The company began operations on January 1, 2007. The cash dividends declared and paid during each of the first 3 years of Lawver’s operations are shown below. Calculate the amounts that went to the preferred shareholders and the common shareholders (SHs) each year

                          Year

                          Total Dividends Paid

                          Dividends to Preferred SHs

                          Dividends to Common SHs

                          2007

                          $1s0,000

                          2008

                          125,000

                          2009

                          175,000

                          market street music corporation had the following stockholders equity section on the 541408

                          E8-78. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2)

                          Market Street Music Corporation had the following stockholders’ equity section on the December 31.2007. balance sheet

                          Preferred stock, $ 150 par, 6% cumulative

                          $2,250,000

                          Common stock, $1 par value

                          400,000

                          Paid-in capital in excess of par, common stock

                          1,020,000

                          Retained earnings

                          5,325,000

                          Total

                          $8,995,000

                          a. How many shares of common stock are classified as issued?

                          b. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?

                          c. How many shares of preferred stock are outstanding?

                          d. What was the average selling price of a share of common stock?

                          e. If $175,000 of dividends was declared and there were $35,000 dividends in arrears, how much of the dividend would go to the common shareholders?

                          for almost a year west company has been changing its manufacturing process from a tr 540554

                          Ethics and JIT Implementation

                          For almost a year, WEST Company has been changing its manufacturing process from a traditional to a JIT approach. Management has asked for employees’ assistance in the transition and has offered bonuses for suggestions that cut time from the production operation. Don Hanley and Jerome Obbo each identified a time-saving opportunity and turned in their suggestions to their manager, Sam Knightly. Knightly sent the suggestions to the committee charged with reviewing employees’ suggestions, which inadvertently identified them as being Knightly’s own. The committee decided that the two suggestions were worthy of reward and voted a large bonus for Knightly. When notified of this, Knightly could not bring himself to identify the true authors of the suggestions.

                          When Hanley and Obbo heard about Knightly’s bonus, they confronted him with his fraudulent act and expressed their grievances. He told them that he needed the recognition to be eligible for an upcoming promotion and promised that if they kept quiet about the matter, he would make sure that they both received significant raises.

                          Required

                          1. Should Hanley and Obbo keep quiet? What other options are open to them?

                          2. How should Knightly have dealt with Hanley’s and Obbo’s complaints?

                          obtain a copy of a recent annual report of a publicly held organization in which you 540555

                          Management Information

                          Obtain a copy of a recent annual report of a publicly held organization in which you have a particular interest. (Copies of annual reports are available at your campus library, at a local public library, on the Internet, or by direct request to an organization.) Assume that you have just been appointed to a middle management position in a division of the organization you have chosen. You are interested in obtaining information that will help you better manage the activities of your division, and you have decided to study the contents of the annual report in an attempt to learn as much as possible. You particularly want to know about the following: (1) size of inventory maintained; (2) ability to earn income; (3) reliance on debt financing; (4) types, volume, and prices of products or services sold; (5) type of production process used; (6) management’s long-range strategies; (7) success (profitability) of the division’s various product lines; (8) efficiency of operations; and (9) operating details of your division.

                          1. Write a brief description of the organization and its products or services and activities.

                          2. Based on a review of the financial statements and the accompanying disclosure notes, prepare a written summary of information pertaining to items 1 through 9 above.

                          3. Can you find any of the information in which you are interested in other sections of the annual report? If so, which information, and in which sections of the report is it?

                          4. The annual report also includes other types of information that you may find helpful in your new position. In outline form, summarize this additional information.

                          you examined your new employer s annual report and found some useful information 540556

                          Management Information Needs

                          you examined your new employer’s annual report and found some useful information. However, you are interested in knowing whether your division’s products or services are competitive, and you were unable to find the necessary information in the annual report.

                          1. What kinds of information about your competition do you want to find?

                          2. Why is this information relevant? (Link your response to a particular decision about your organization’s products or services. For example, you might seek information to help you determine a new selling price.)

                          3. From what sources could you obtain the information you need?

                          4. When would you want to obtain this information?

                          5. Create a report that will communicate your findings to your superior.

                          the registrar s office of mainland college is responsible for maintaining a record o 540557

                          Report Preparation

                          The registrar’s office of Mainland College is responsible for maintaining a record of each student’s grades and credits for use by students, instructors, and administrators.

                          1. Assume that you are a manager in the registrar’s office and that you recently joined a team of managers to review the grade-reporting process. Explain how you would prepare a report of grades for students’ use and the same report for instructors’ use by answering the following questions:

                          a. Who will read the grade report?

                          b. Why is the grade report necessary?

                          c. What information should the grade report contain?

                          d. When is the grade report due?

                          2. Why does the information in a grade report for students’ use and in a grade report for instructors’ use differ?

                          3. Visit the registrar’s office of your school in person or through your school’s website. Obtain a copy of your grade report and a copy of the form that the registrar’s office uses to report grades to instructors. Compare the information that these reports supply with the information you listed. Explain any differences.

                          4. What can the registrar’s office do to make sure that its grade reports are effective in communicating all necessary information to readers?

                          mcdonald s is a leading competitor in the fast food restaurant business 540558

                          Management Information Needs

                          McDonald’s is a leading competitor in the fast-food restaurant business. One component of McDonald’s marketing strategy is to increase sales by expanding its foreign markets. At present, McDonald’s restaurants operate in over 100 countries. In making decisions about opening restaurants in foreign markets, the company uses quantitative and qualitative financial and nonfinancial information. The following types of information would be important to such a decision: the cost of a new building (quantitative financial information), the estimated number of hamburgers to be sold in the first year (quantitative nonfinancial information), and site desirability (qualitative information). Suppose you are a member of McDonald’s management team that must decide whether to open a new restaurant in England. Identify at least two examples each of the (a) quantitative financial, (b) quantitative nonfinancial, and (c) qualitative information that you will need before you can make a decision.

                          working in a group of four to six students select a local business 540559

                          Performance Measures and the Balanced Scorecard

                          Working in a group of four to six students, select a local business. The group should become familiar with the background of the business by interviewing its manager or accountant. Each group member should identify several performance objectives for the business and link each objective with a specific stakeholder’s perspective from the balanced scorecard. (Select at least one performance objective for each perspective.) For each objective, ask yourself, “If I were the manager of the business, how would I set performance measures for each objective?” Then prepare an email stating the business’s name, location, and activities and your linked performance objective and perspectives. Also list possible measures for each performance objective. In class, members of the group should compare their individual emails and compile them into a group report by having each group member assume a different stakeholder perspective (add government and community if you want more than four perspectives). Each group should be ready to present all perspectives and the group’s report on performance objectives and measures in class.

                          given the following information compute the ending balances of the materials invento 540563

                          Cost Flow in a Manufacturing Organization

                          Given the following information, compute the ending balances of the Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, and Finished Goods Inventory accounts:

                          Materials Inventory, beginning balance

                          $ 23,000

                          Work in Process Inventory, beginning balance

                          25,750

                          Finished Goods Inventory, beginning balance

                          38,000

                          Direct materials purchased

                          85,000

                          Direct materials placed into production

                          74,000

                          Direct labor costs

                          97,000

                          Overhead costs

                          35,000

                          Cost of goods manufactured

                          123,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          93,375

                          Document Flows in a Manufacturing Organization

                          Identify the document needed to support each of the following activities in a manufacturing organization:

                          1. Placing an order for direct materials with a supplier

                          2. Recording direct labor time at the beginning and end of each work shift

                          3. Receiving direct materials at the shipping dock

                          4. Recording the costs of a specific job requiring direct materials, direct labor, and overhead

                          5. Issuing direct materials into production

                          6. Billing the customer for a completed order

                          7. Fulfilling a request from the Production Scheduling Department for the purchase of direct materials

                          indicate whether each of the following costs for a bicycle manufacturer is a product 540570

                          Cost Classifications

                          Indicate whether each of the following costs for a bicycle manufacturer is a product or a period cost, a variable or a fixed cost, a value-adding or a non value adding cost, and, if it is a product cost, a direct or an indirect cost of the bicycle:

                          Cost Classification

                          Example

                          Product or Period

                          Variable or Fixed

                          Value-Adding or Non value-Adding

                          Direct or Indirect

                          Bicycle tire

                          Product

                          Variable

                          Value-adding

                          Direct

                          1. Depreciation on office computer

                          2. Labor to assemble bicycle

                          3. Labor to inspect bicycle

                          4. Internal auditor’s salary

                          5. Lubricant for wheels

                          treetop corp makes irrigation sprinkler systems for tree nurseries ramsey roe treeto 540573

                          Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold

                          Treetop Corp. makes irrigation sprinkler systems for tree nurseries. Ramsey Roe, Treetop’s new controller, can find only the following partial information for the past year:

                          Oak Division

                          Loblolly Division

                          Maple Division

                          Spruce Division

                          Direct materials used

                          $3

                          $ 7

                          $ g

                          $ 8

                          Total manufacturing costs

                          6

                          d

                          h

                          14

                          Overhead

                          1

                          3

                          2

                          j

                          Direct labor

                          a

                          6

                          4

                          4

                          Ending work in process inventory

                          b

                          3

                          2

                          5

                          Cost of goods manufactured

                          7

                          20

                          12

                          l

                          Beginning work in process inventory

                          2

                          e

                          3

                          k

                          Ending finished goods inventory

                          2

                          6

                          i

                          9

                          Beginning finished goods inventory

                          3

                          f

                          5

                          7

                          Cost of goods sold

                          c

                          18

                          13

                          9

                          Using the information given, compute the unknown values. List the accounts in the proper order, and show subtotals and totals as appropriate.

                          presented below are incomplete inventory and income statement data for to liver corp 540575

                          Missing Amounts—Manufacturing

                          Presented below are incomplete inventory and income statement data for To liver Corporation. Determine the missing amounts.

                          Cost of Goods Sold

                          Cost of Goods Manufactured

                          Beginning Finished Goods Inventory

                          Ending Finished Goods Inventory

                          1.

                          $ 10,000

                          $12,000

                          $ 1,000

                          ?

                          2.

                          $140,000

                          ?

                          $45,000

                          $60,000

                          3.

                          ?

                          $89,000

                          $23,000

                          $20,000

                          the data presented below are for a retail organization and a manufacturing organizat 540576

                          Inventories, Cost of Goods Sold, and Net Income

                          The data presented below are for a retail organization and a manufacturing organization.

                          1. Fill in the missing data for the retail organization:

                          First Quarter

                          Second Quarter

                          Third Quarter

                          Fourth Quarter

                          Sales

                          $9

                          $ e

                          $15

                          $ k

                          Gross margin

                          a

                          4

                          5

                          1

                          Ending merchandise inventory

                          5

                          f

                          5

                          m

                          Beginning merchandise inventory

                          4

                          g

                          h

                          5

                          Net cost of purchases

                          b

                          7

                          9

                          n

                          Operating income

                          3

                          2

                          i

                          2

                          Operating expenses

                          c

                          2

                          2

                          4

                          Cost of goods sold

                          5

                          6

                          j

                          11

                          Cost of goods available for sale

                          d

                          12

                          15

                          15

                          2. Fill in the missing data for the manufacturing organization:

                          First Quarter

                          Second Quarter

                          Third Quarter

                          Fourth Quarter

                          Ending finished goods inventory

                          $a

                          $ 3

                          $ h

                          $ 6

                          Cost of goods sold

                          6

                          3

                          5

                          1

                          Operating income

                          1

                          3

                          1

                          m

                          Cost of goods available for sale

                          8

                          d

                          10

                          13

                          Cost of goods manufactured

                          5

                          e

                          i

                          8

                          Gross margin

                          4

                          f

                          j

                          7

                          Operating expenses

                          3

                          g

                          5

                          6

                          Beginning finished goods inventory

                          b

                          2

                          3

                          n

                          Sales

                          c

                          10

                          k

                          14

                          waltz company manufactures music boxes seventy percent of its products are standard 540577

                          Documentation

                          Waltz Company manufactures music boxes. Seventy percent of its products are standard items produced in long production runs. The other 30 percent are special orders with specific requests for tunes. The latter cost from three to six times as much as the standard product because they require additional materials and labor.

                          Reza Seca, the controller, recently received a complaint memorandum from Iggy Paulo, the production supervisor, about the new network of source documents that has been added to the existing cost accounting system. The new documents include a purchase request, a purchase order, a receiving report, and a materials request. Paulo claims that the forms create extra work and interrupt the normal flow of production.

                          Prepare a written memorandum from Reza Seca to Iggy Paulo that fully explains the purpose of each type of document.

                          the pattia winery is one of the finest wineries in the country 540579

                          Unit Cost Determination

                          The Pattia Winery is one of the finest wineries in the country. One of its famous products is a red wine called Old Vines. Recently, management has become concerned about the increasing cost of making Old Vines and needs to determine if the current selling price of $10 per bottle is adequate. The winery wants to achieve a 25 percent gross profit on the sale of each bottle. The information on the next page is given to you for analysis.

                          1. Compute the unit cost per bottle for materials, labor, and overhead.

                          2. How would you advise management regarding the price per bottle of wine?

                          3. Compute the prime costs per unit and the conversion costs per unit.

                          Batch size

                          10,550 bottles

                          Costs

                          Direct materials

                          Olen Millot grapes

                          $22,155

                          Chancellor grapes

                          9,495

                          Bottles

                          5,275

                          Total direct materials costs

                          $36,925

                          Direct labor

                          Pickers/loaders

                          $ 2,110

                          Crusher

                          422

                          Processors

                          8,440

                          Bottler

                          13,293

                          Total direct labor costs

                          $24,265

                          Overhead

                          Depreciation–equipment

                          $ 2,743

                          Depreciation–building

                          5,275

                          Utilities

                          1,055

                          Indirect labor

                          6,330

                          Supervision

                          7,385

                          Supplies

                          9,917

                          Repairs

                          1,477

                          Miscellaneous

                          633

                          Total overhead costs

                          $34,815

                          Total production costs

                          $96,005

                          the overhead costs that lucca industries inc used to compute its overhead rate for t 540581

                          Computation of Overhead Rate

                          The overhead costs that Lucca Industries, Inc., used to compute its overhead rate for the past year are as follows:

                          Indirect materials and supplies

                          $ 79,200

                          Repairs and maintenance

                          14,900

                          Outside service contracts

                          17,300

                          Indirect labor

                          79,100

                          Factory supervision

                          42,900

                          Depreciation–machinery

                          85,000

                          Factory insurance

                          8,200

                          Property taxes

                          6,500

                          Heat, light, and power

                          7,700

                          Miscellaneous overhead

                          5,760

                          Total overhead costs

                          $346,560

                          The allocation base for the past year was 45,600 total machine hours. For the next year, all overhead costs except depreciation, property taxes, and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 10 percent. Depreciation should increase by 12 percent, and property taxes and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 20 percent. Plant capacity in terms of machine hours used will increase by 4,400 hours.

                          1. Compute the past year’s overhead rate. (Carry your answer to three decimal places.)

                          2. Compute the overhead rate for next year. (Carry your answer to three decimal places.)

                          compumatics specializes in the analysis and reporting of complex inventory costing p 540582

                          Computation and Application of Overhead Rate

                          Compumatics specializes in the analysis and reporting of complex inventory costing projects. Materials costs are minimal, consisting entirely of operating supplies (DVDs, inventory sheets, and other recording tools). Labor is the highest single expense, totaling $693,000 for 75,000 hours of work last year. Overhead costs for last year were $916,000 and were applied to specific jobs on the basis of labor hours worked. This year the company anticipates a 25 percent increase in overhead costs. Labor costs will increase by $130,000, and the number of hours worked is expected to increase by 20 percent.

                          1. Determine the total amount of overhead anticipated this year.

                          2. Compute the overhead rate for this year. (Round your answer to the nearest cent.)

                          3. During April of this year, 11,980 labor hours were worked. Calculate the overhead amount assigned to April production.

                          management 220 assignment 7 540599

                          Management 220 Assignment 7 Due Date: March 12, 2014 ***To be completed in Excel using Excel formulas and functions for calculations*** QUESTION 1 Problem 9-12 Pages 385. Approximate time to complete: 30 minutes. ***Note: equations, identification of units/$ and number formatting must be shown in order to receive marks*** References: Solutions posted on D2L: E9-1 to E9-7; Review Problems pp. 376 -380; in class examples posted to D2L Marks: Required 1: 5 marks (one mark for each item accompanied by the correct description) Required 2: 3 marks (one mark for each item accompanied by the correct description) Required 3: 13 marks (10 marks for cash budget up to “Excess (deficiency) of cash available over disbursements”, 3 marks for financing portion of budget)

                          Document Preview:

                          Management 220 Assignment 7 Due Date: March 12, 2014 ***To be completed in Excel using Excel formulas and functions for calculations*** QUESTION 1 Problem 9-12 Pages 385. Approximate time to complete: 30 minutes. ***Note: equations, identification of units/$ and number formatting must be shown in order to receive marks*** References: Solutions posted on D2L: E9-1 to E9-7; Review Problems pp. 376 -380; in class examples posted to D2L Marks: Required 1: 5 marks (one mark for each item accompanied by the correct description) Required 2: 3 marks (one mark for each item accompanied by the correct description) Required 3: 13 marks (10 marks for cash budget up to “Excess (deficiency) of cash available over disbursements”, 3 marks for financing portion of budget)

                          breakeven analysis 540625

                          Prepare breakeven analysis and a C-V-P analysis planning future sales using the information below.

                          Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales

                          Write Company has a maximum capacity of 200,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs are $12 per unit. Fixed overhead is $600,000 per year. Variable selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $23 per unit.

                          Required

                          1. What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?
                          2. How many units must Write Company sell to earn a profit of $240,000 per year?
                          3. A strike at one of the company’s major suppliers has caused a shortage of materials, so the current year’s production and sales are limited to 160,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is planning to reduce fixed costs to $841,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $23 per unit.
                            • a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution margin of the first 30,000 units sold?
                            • b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 130,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $210,000 this year?

                          check tasks 540626

                          MSc IBM, MSc IBF, MBA, MBA (Finance), MSc Accounting & Finance, MSc Risk Management Strategic and Financial Decision-making Assignment 2013/2014 Goodway plc is a holding company owning shares in various subsidiary companies. Its directors are currently considering several projects which will increase the range of the business activities undertaken by Goodway plc and its subsidiaries. The directors would like to use discounted cash flow techniques in their evaluation of these projects but as yet no weighted average cost of capital (WACC) has been calculated.

                          Document Preview:

                          MSc IBM, MSc IBF, MBA, MBA (Finance), MSc Accounting & Finance, MSc Risk Management Strategic and Financial Decision-making Assignment 2013/2014 Goodway plc is a holding company owning shares in various subsidiary companies. Its directors are currently considering several projects which will increase the range of the business activities undertaken by Goodway plc and its subsidiaries. The directors would like to use discounted cash flow techniques in their evaluation of these projects but as yet no weighted average cost of capital (WACC) has been calculated. Lord Harris Tweed, the Managing Director, has called a meeting of the directors to discuss the calculation and use of the weighted average cost of capital as the discount rate for future capital investment decisions. Shilpa Gohal, the Finance Manager, has been asked to draw up some relevant figures for the calculation of the company’s weighted average cost of capital, as shown below. Goodway plc has an authorised share capital of 10 million 25p ordinary shares, of which 8 million have been issued. The current ex div market price per ordinary share is £1.10, a dividend of 11.4p per share having been paid recently. The company’s project analyst has calculated that 12% is the most appropriate after-tax cost of equity capital. Extracts from the latest balance sheets for the group are given below: Goodway plc???(£000s)??Issued share capital?2,000??Share premium?1,960??Reserves?3,745??Shareholders’ funds?7,705??Minority interests?895??3% irredeemable loan stock?1,400??9% redeemable loan stock?1,500??6% unsecured loan stock?2,000??Bank loans?1,540??Total non-current liabilities?6,440?? All debt interest is payable annually and all the current year’s payments will be made shortly. The current cum interest market prices for £100 nominal value stock are £31.60 and £103.26 for the 3% and 9% loan stock respectively. Both the 9% loan stock and the 6% unsecured loan stock are redeemable at par in ten years’ time….

                          Attachments:

                          accouting test question 540649

                          Dimitri Company, a manufacturer of small tools, provided the following information from its accounting records for the year ended December 31, 2012.

                          Inventory at December 31, 2012 (based on physical count of goods
                          in Dimitri’s plant, at cost, on December 31, 2012) $1,530,800
                          Accounts payable at December 31, 2012 1,306,600
                          Net sales (sales less sales returns) 8,156,500

                          Additional information is as follows.

                          1. Included in the physical count were tools billed to a customer f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012. These tools had a cost of $31,610and were billed and recorded at $40,610. The shipment was on Dimitri’s loading dock waiting to be picked up by the common carrier.
                          2. Goods were in transit from a vendor to Dimitri on December 31, 2012. The invoice cost was $76,610, and the goods were shipped f.o.b. shipping point on December 29, 2012.
                          3. Work in process inventory costing $30,610was sent to an outside processor for plating on December 30, 2012.
                          4. Tools returned by customers and held pending inspection in the returned goods area on December 31, 2012, were not included in the physical count. On January 8, 2013, the tools costing $32,610were inspected and returned to inventory. Credit memos totaling $47,610were issued to the customers on the same date.
                          5. Tools shipped to a customer f.o.b. destination on December 26, 2012, were in transit at December 31, 2012, and had a cost of $26,610. Upon notification of receipt by the customer on January 2, 2013, Dimitri issued a sales invoice for $42,610.
                          6. Goods, with an invoice cost of $27,610, received from a vendor at 5:00 p.m. on December 31, 2012, were recorded on a receiving report dated January 2, 2013. The goods were not included in the physical count, but the invoice was included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012.
                          7. Goods received from a vendor on December 26, 2012, were included in the physical count. However, the related $56,610vendor invoice was not included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012, because the accounts payable copy of the receiving report was lost.
                          8. On January 3, 2013, a monthly freight bill in the amount of $8,610was received. The bill specifically related to merchandise purchased in December 2012, one-half of which was still in the inventory at December 31, 2012. The freight charges were not included in either the inventory or in accounts payable at December 31, 2012.

                          Prepare a schedule of adjustments as of December 31, 2012, to the initial amounts per Dimitri’s accounting records.
                          (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter either with a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -15,000 or in parenthesis, e.g. (15,000).)

                          accouting test question 540652

                          The Outdoor Manufacturing Company produces sporting equipment. The company maintains a single raw materials inventory account for both direct and indirect materials. The following information came from the factory ledger accounts for December:

                          Raw Materials, December 1

                          $ 45,500

                          Work in Process, December 1

                          125,000

                          Finished Goods, December 1

                          175,000

                          Raw materials purchases (during December)

                          623,000

                          Direct labor

                          435,000

                          Repairs and maintenance

                          37,200

                          Indirect materials

                          16,700

                          Utilities

                          63,200

                          Indirect labor

                          38,200

                          Supervisors’ salaries

                          18,300

                          Raw Materials, December 31

                          43,600

                          Work in Process, December 31

                          135,000

                          Finished Goods, December 31

                          150,000

                          Compute the cost of direct materials used during the month of December.

                          the following unit costs were determined by dividing the total costs of each compone 540525

                          The Value Chain

                          The following unit costs were determined by dividing the total costs of each component by the number of products produced. From these unit costs, determine the total cost per unit of primary processes and the total cost per unit of support services.

                          Research and development

                          $ 1.40

                          Human resources

                          1.45

                          Design

                          0.15

                          Supply

                          1.10

                          Legal services

                          0.50

                          Production

                          4.00

                          Marketing

                          0.80

                          Distribution

                          0.90

                          Customer service

                          0.65

                          Information systems

                          0.85

                          Management accounting

                          0.20

                          Total cost per unit

                          $12.00

                          indicate whether each of the following management activities in a community hospital 540532

                          The Management Process

                          Indicate whether each of the following management activities in a community hospital is part of planning (PL), performing (PE), evaluating (E), or communicating (C):

                          1. Leasing five ambulances for the current year

                          2. Comparing the actual number with the planned number of patient days in the hospital for the year.

                          3. Developing a strategic plan for a new pediatric wing

                          4. Preparing a report showing the past performance of the emergency room

                          5. Developing standards, or expectations, for performance in the hospital admittance area for next year

                          6. Preparing the hospital’s balance sheet and income statement and distributing them to the board of directors

                          7. Maintaining an inventory of bed linens and bath towels

                          8. Formulating a corporate policy for the treatment and final disposition of hazardous waste materials

                          9. Preparing a report on the types and amounts of hazardous waste materials removed from the hospital in the last three months

                          10. Recording the time taken to deliver food trays to patients

                          john jefferson is the sales manager for sunny greeting cards inc at the beginning of 540533

                          Report Preparation

                          John Jefferson is the sales manager for Sunny Greeting Cards, Inc. At the beginning of the year, the organization introduced a new line of humorous birthday cards to the U.S. market. Management held a strategic planning meeting on August 31 to discuss next year’s operating activities. One item on the agenda was to review the success of the new line of cards and decide if there was a need to change the selling price or to stimulate sales volume in the five sales territories. Jefferson was asked to prepare a report addressing those issues and to present it at the meeting. His report was to include the profits generated in each sales territory by the new card line only.

                          On August 31, Jefferson arrived at the meeting late and immediately distributed his report to the strategic planning team. The report consisted of comments made by seven of Jefferson’s leading sales representatives. The comments were broad in scope and touched only lightly on the success of the new card line. Jefferson was pleased that he had met the deadline for distributing the report, but the other team members were disappointed in the information he provided.

                          Using the four w’s for report presentation, comment on Jefferson’s effectiveness in preparing his report.

                          edward ortez has just opened a company that imports fine ceramic gifts from mexico a 540535

                          The Planning Framework

                          Edward Ortez has just opened a company that imports fine ceramic gifts from Mexico and sells them over the Internet. In planning his business, Ortez did the following:

                          1. Listed his expected expenses and revenues for the first six months of operations

                          2. Decided that he wanted the company to provide him with income for a good lifestyle and funds for retirement

                          3. Determined that he would keep his expenses low and generate enough revenues during the first two months of operations so that he would have a positive cash flow by the third month

                          4. Decided to focus his business on providing customers with the finest Mexican ceramics at a favorable price

                          5. Developed a complete list of goals, objectives, procedures, and policies relating to how he would find, buy, store, sell, and ship goods and collect payment

                          6. Decided not to have a retail operation but to rely solely on the Internet to market the products

                          7. Decided to expand his website to include ceramics from other Central American countries over the next five years Match each of Ortez’s actions to the components of the planning framework: goal, mission, strategic objectives, tactical objectives, operating objectives, business plan, and budget.

                          edward ortez recently opened his own company 540536

                          The Value Chain

                          Edward Ortez recently opened his own company. He has been thinking of ways to improve the business. Here is a list of the actions that he will be undertaking:

                          1. Engaging an accountant to help analyze progress in meeting the objectives of the company

                          2. Hiring a company to handle payroll records and employee benefits

                          3. Developing a logo for labeling and packaging the ceramics

                          4. Making gift packages by placing gourmet food products in ceramic pots and wrapping them in plastic

                          5. Engaging an attorney to write contracts

                          6. Traveling to Mexico himself to arrange for the purchase of products and their shipment back to the company

                          7. Arranging new ways of taking orders over the Internet and shipping the products

                          8. Keeping track of the characteristics of customers and the number and types of products they buy

                          9. Following up with customers to see if they received the products and if they are happy with them

                          10. Arranging for an outside firm to keep the accounting records

                          11. Distributing brochures that display the ceramics and refer to the website Classify each of Ortez’s actions as one of the value chain’s primary processes— research and development, design, supply, production, marketing, distribution, or customer service—or as a support service—human resources, legal services, information systems, or management accounting. Of the 11 actions, which are the most likely candidates for outsourcing? Why?

                          the reports that follow are from a grocery store 540538

                          Management Reports

                          The reports that follow are from a grocery store. Which report would be used for financial purposes, and which would be used for activity-based decision making? Why?

                          Salaries

                          $ 1,000

                          Scan grocery purchases

                          $ 3,000

                          Equipment

                          2,200

                          Stock fruit

                          1,000

                          Freight

                          5,000

                          Bake rye bread

                          500

                          Supplies

                          800

                          Operate salad bar

                          2,500

                          Use and occupancy

                          1,000

                          Stock can goods

                          2,000

                          Collapse cardboard boxes

                          1,000

                          Total

                          $10,000

                          Total

                          $10,000

                          as shown in the data that follow a producer of ceiling fans has determined the unit 540539

                          The Value Chain

                          As shown in the data that follow, a producer of ceiling fans has determined the unit cost of its most popular model. From these unit costs, determine the total cost per unit of primary processes and the total cost per unit of support services.

                          Research and development

                          $ 5.00

                          Human resources

                          4.50

                          Design

                          1.50

                          Supply

                          1.00

                          Legal services

                          0.50

                          Production

                          4.50

                          Marketing

                          2.00

                          Distribution

                          2.50

                          Customer service

                          6.50

                          Information systems

                          1.80

                          Management accounting

                          0.20

                          Total cost per unit

                          $30.00

                          the following are excerpts from a conversation between two managers about their comp 540540

                          Comparison of ABM and JIT

                          The following are excerpts from a conversation between two managers about their companies’ management systems. Identify the manager who works for a company that emphasizes ABM and the one who works for a company that emphasizes a JIT system.

                          Manager 1: We try to manage our resources effectively by monitoring operating activities. We analyze all major operating activities, and we focus on reducing or eliminating the ones that don’t add value to our products.

                          Manager 2: We’re very concerned with eliminating waste. We’ve designed our operations to reduce the time it takes to move, store, queue, and inspect materials. We’ve also reduced our inventories by buying and using materials only when we need them.

                          tim s bargain basement sells used goods at very low prices 540541

                          The Balanced Scorecard

                          Tim’s Bargain Basement sells used goods at very low prices. Tim has developed the following business objectives:

                          1. To buy only the inventory that sells

                          2. To have repeat customers

                          3. To be profitable and grow

                          4. To keep employee turnover low Tim also developed the following performance measures:

                          5. Growth in revenues and net income per quarter

                          6. Average unsold goods at the end of the business day as a percentage of the total goods purchased that day

                          7. Number of unemployment claims

                          8. Percentage of customers who have shopped in the store before Match each of these objectives and performance measures with the four perspectives of the balanced scorecard: financial perspective, learning and growth perspective, internal business processes perspective, and customer perspective.

                          your college s overall goal is to add value to the communities it serves in light of 540542

                          The Balanced Scorecard

                          Your college’s overall goal is to add value to the communities it serves. In light of that goal, match each of the following stakeholders’ perspectives with the appropriate objective:

                          Perspective

                          Objective

                          1. Financial (investors)

                          a. Adding value means that the faculty engages in meaningful teaching and research.

                          2. Learning and growth (employees)

                          b. Adding value means that students receive their degrees in four years.

                          3. Internal business processes

                          c. Adding value means that the college has winning sports teams.

                          4. Customers

                          d. Adding value means that fund-raising campaigns are successful.

                          katrina storm went to work for nola industries five years ago 540543

                          Ethical Conduct

                          Katrina Storm went to work for NOLA Industries five years ago. She was recently promoted to cost accounting manager and now has a new boss, Vickery Howe, the corporate controller. Last week, Storm and Howe went to a two-day professional development program on international accounting standards changes. During the first hour of the first day’s program, Howe disappeared and Storm didn’t see her again until the cocktail hour. The same thing happened on the second day. During the trip home, Storm asked Howe if she had enjoyed the conference. She replied: “Katrina, the golf course was excellent. You play golf. Why don’t you join me during the next conference? I haven’t sat in on one of those sessions in ten years. This is my R&R time. Those sessions are for the new People. My experience is enough to keep me current. Plus, I have excellent people to help me as we adjust our accounting system to the international changes being implemented.”

                          Does Katrina Storm have an ethical dilemma? If so, what is it? What are her options? How would you solve her problem? Be prepared to defend your answer.

                          clothing industries inc is deciding whether to expand its line of women s clothing c 540545

                          Report Preparation

                          Clothing Industries, Inc. is deciding whether to expand its line of women’s clothing called Sami Pants. Sales in units of this product were 22,500, 28,900, and 36,200 in 2010, 2011, and 2012, respectively. The product has been very profitable, averaging 35 percent profit (above cost) over the three-year period. The company has 10 sales representatives covering seven states in the North. Production capacity at present is about 40,000 pants per year. There is adequate plant space for additional equipment, and the labor needed can be easily hired and trained.

                          The organization’s management is made up of four vice presidents: the vice president of marketing, the vice president of production, the vice president of finance, and the vice president of management information systems. Each vice president is directly responsible to the president, Jefferson Henry.

                          Required

                          1. What types of information will Henry need before he can decide whether to expand the Sami Pants line?

                          2. Assume that one report needed to support Henry’s decision is an analysis of sales, broken down by sales representative, over the past three years. How would each of the four w’s pertain to this report? 3. Design a format for the report described in requirement 2

                          reigle electronics is a manufacturer of cell phones a highly competitive business 540546

                          The Value Chain

                          Reigle Electronics is a manufacturer of cell phones, a highly competitive business. Reigle’s phones carry a price of $99, but competition forces the company to offer significant discounts and rebates. As a result, the average price of Reigle’s cell phones has dropped to around $50, and the company is losing money. Management is applying value chain analysis to the company’s operations in an effort to reduce costs and improve product quality. A study by the company’s management accountant has determined the following per unit costs for primary processes:

                          Primary Process

                          Cost per Unit

                          Research and development

                          $ 2.50

                          Design

                          3.50

                          Supply

                          4.50

                          Production

                          6.70

                          Marketing

                          8.00

                          Distribution

                          1.90

                          Customer service

                          0.50

                          Total cost

                          $27.60

                          To generate a gross margin large enough for the company to cover its overhead costs and earn a profit, Reigle must lower its total cost per unit for primary processes to no more than $20. After analyzing operations, management reached the following conclusions about primary processes:

                          • Research and development and design are critical functions because the market and competition require constant development of new features with “cool” designs at lower cost. Nevertheless, management feels that the cost per unit of these processes must be reduced by 10 percent.

                          • Six different suppliers currently provide the components for the cell phones. Ordering these components from just two suppliers and negotiating lower prices could result in a savings of 15 percent.

                          • The cell phones are currently manufactured in Mexico. By shifting production to China, the unit cost of production can be lowered by 20 percent.

                          • Most cell phones are sold through wireless communication companies that are trying to attract new customers with low-priced cell phones. Management believes that these companies should bear more of the marketing costs and that it is feasible to renegotiate its marketing arrangements with them so that they will bear 35 percent of the current marketing costs.

                          • Distribution costs are already very low, but management will set a target of reducing the cost per unit by 10 percent.

                          • Customer service is a weakness of the company and has resulted in lost sales. Management therefore proposes increasing the cost per unit of customer service by 50 percent.

                          Required

                          1. Prepare a table showing the current cost per unit of primary processes and the projected cost per unit based on management’s proposals for cost reduction.

                          2. Will management’s proposals for cost reduction achieve the targeted total cost per unit? What further steps should management take to reduce costs? Which steps that management is proposing do you believe will be the most difficult to accomplish?

                          3. What are the company’s support services? What role should these services play in the value chain analysis?

                          medic products company mpc is known for developing innovative and high quality produ 540547

                          The Value Chain and Core Competency

                          Medic Products Company (MPC) is known for developing innovative and high-quality products for use in hospitals and medical and dental offices. Its latest product is a nonporous, tough, and very thin disposable glove that will not leak or split and molds tightly to the hand, making it ideal for use in medical and dental procedures. MPC buys the material it uses in making the gloves from another company, which manufactures it according to MPC’s exact specifications and quality standards. MPC makes two models of the glove—one white and one transparent—in its own plant and sells them through independent agents who represent various manufacturers. When an agent informs MPC of a sale, MPC ships the order directly to the buyer. MPC advertises the gloves in professional journals and gives free samples to physicians and dentists. It provides a product warranty and periodically surveys users about the product’s quality.

                          Required

                          1. Briefly explain how MPC accomplishes each of the primary processes in the value chain.

                          2. What is a core competency? Which one of the primary processes would you say is MPC’s core competency? Explain your choice.

                          howski associates is an independent insurance agency that sells business automobile 540548

                          The Balanced Scorecard and Benchmarking

                          Howski Associates is an independent insurance agency that sells business, automobile, home, and life insurance. Maya Howski, senior partner of the agency, recently attended a workshop at the local university in which the balanced scorecard was presented as a way of focusing all of a company’s functions on its mission. After the workshop, she met with her managers in a weekend brainstorming session. The group determined that Howski Associates’ mission was to provide high-quality, innovative, risk-protection services to individuals and businesses. To ensure that the agency would fulfill this mission, the group established the following

                          objectives:

                          • To provide a sufficient return on investment by increasing sales and maintaining the liquidity needed to support operations

                          • To add value to the agency’s services by training employees to be knowledgeable and competent

                          • To retain customers and attract new customers

                          • To operate an efficient and cost-effective office support system for customer agents

                          To determine the agency’s progress in meeting these objectives, the group established the following performance measures:

                          • Number of new ideas for customer insurance

                          • Percentage of customers who rate services as excellent

                          • Average time for processing insurance applications

                          • Number of dollars spent on training

                          • Growth in revenues for each type of insurance

                          • Average time for processing claims

                          • Percentage of employees who complete 40 hours of training during the year

                          • Percentage of new customer leads that result in sales

                          • Cash flow

                          • Number of customer complaints

                          • Return on assets

                          • Percentage of customers who renew policies

                          • Percentage of revenue devoted to office support system (information systems, accounting, orders, and claims processing)

                          Required

                          1. Prepare a balanced scorecard for Howski Associates by stating the agency’s mission and matching its four objectives to the four stakeholder perspectives: the financial, learning and growth, internal business processes, and customer perspectives. Indicate which of the agency’s performance measures would be appropriate for each objective.

                          2.Howski Associates is a member of an association of independent insurance agents that provides industry statistics about many aspects of operating an insurance agency. What is benchmarking, and in what ways would the industry statistics assist Howski Associates in further developing its balanced scorecard?

                          taylor zimmer is the controller for value corporation he has been with the company f 540549

                          Professional Ethics

                          Taylor Zimmer is the controller for Value Corporation. He has been with the company for 17 years and is being considered for the job of chief financial officer. His boss, who is the current chief financial officer and former company controller, will be Value Corporation’s new president. Zimmer has just discussed the year-end closing with his boss, who made the following statement during their conversation: “Taylor, why are you being so inflexible? I’m only asking you to postpone the $2,500,000 write-off of obsolete inventory for 10 days so that it won’t appear on this year’s financial statements. Ten days! Do it. Your promotion is coming up, you know. Make sure you keep all the possible outcomes in mind as you complete your year-end work. Oh, and keep this conversation confidential— just between you and me. Okay?”

                          Required

                          1. Identify the ethical issue or issues involved.

                          2. What do you believe is the appropriate solution to the problem? Be prepared to defend your answer.

                          daisy flowers recently purchased yardworks inc a wholesale distributor of equipment 540550

                          Report Preparation

                          Daisy Flowers recently purchased Yardworks, Inc., a wholesale distributor of equipment and supplies for lawn and garden care. The organization, which is headquartered in Baltimore, has four distribution centers that service 14 eastern states. The centers are located in Boston, Massachusetts; Rye, New York; Reston, Virginia; and Lawrenceville, New Jersey. The company’s profits for 2010, 2011, and 2012 were $225,400, $337,980, and $467,200, respectively. Shortly after purchasing the organization, Flowers appointed people to the following positions: vice president, marketing; vice president, distribution; corporate controller; and vice president, research and development. Flowers called a meeting of this management group. She wants to create a deluxe retail lawn and garden center that would include a large, fully landscaped plant and tree nursery. The purposes of the retail center would be (1) to test equipment and supplies before selecting them for sales and distribution and (2) to showcase the effects of using the company’s products. The retail center must also make a profit on sales.

                          Required

                          1. What types of information will Flowers need before deciding whether to create the retail lawn and garden center?

                          2. To support her decision, Flowers will need a report from the vice president of research and development analyzing all possible plants and trees that could be planted and their ability to grow in the places where the new retail center might be located. How would each of the four w’s pertain to this report?

                          3. Design a format for the report in requirement 2.

                          soft spot is a manufacturer of futon mattresses soft spot s mattresses are priced at 540551

                          The Value Chain

                          Soft Spot is a manufacturer of futon mattresses. Soft Spot’s mattresses are priced at $60, but competition forces the company to offer significant discounts and rebates. As a result, the average price of the futon mattress has dropped to around $50, and the company is losing money. Management is applying value chain analysis to the company’s operations in an effort to reduce costs and improve product quality. A study by the company’s management accountant has determined the following per unit costs for primary processes and support services:

                          Primary Process

                          Cost per Unit

                          Research and development

                          $ 5.00

                          Design

                          3.00

                          Supply

                          4.00

                          Production

                          16.00

                          Marketing

                          6.00

                          Distribution

                          7.00

                          Customer service

                          1.00

                          Total cost per unit

                          $42.00

                          Support Service

                          $ 2.00

                          Human resources

                          5.00

                          Information services

                          1.00

                          Management accounting

                          $ 8.00

                          Total cost per unit

                          To generate a gross margin large enough for the company to cover its overhead costs and earn a profit, Soft Spot must lower its total cost per unit for primary processes to no more than $32.00 and its support services to no more than $5.00. After analyzing operations, management reached the following conclusions about primary processes and support services:

                          • Research and development and design are critical functions because the market and competition require constant development of new features with “cool” designs at lower cost. Nevertheless, management feels that the cost per unit of these processes must be reduced by 20 percent.

                          • Ten different suppliers currently provide the components for the futons. Ordering these components from just two suppliers and negotiating lower prices could result in a savings of 15 percent.

                          • The futons are currently manufactured in Mali. By shifting production to China, the unit cost of production can be lowered by 40 percent.

                          • Management believes that by selling to large retailers like Wal-Mart it is feasible to lower current marketing costs by 25 percent.

                          • Distribution costs are already very low, but management will set a target of reducing the cost per unit by 10 percent.

                          • Customer service and support to large customers are key to keeping their business. Management therefore proposes increasing the cost per unit of customer service by 20 percent.

                          • By outsourcing its support services, management projects a 20 percent drop in these costs.

                          sports products company spc is known for developing innovative high quality shoes fo 540552

                          The Value Chain and Core Competency

                          Sports Products Company (SPC) is known for developing innovative high quality shoes for lacrosse. Its latest patented product is a tough, all-weather, and very flexible shoe. SPC buys the material it uses in making the shoes from another company, which manufactures it according to SPC’s exact specifications and quality standards. SPC makes two models of the shoe—one white and one black—in its own plant. SPC sells them through independent distributors who represent various manufacturers. When a distributor informs SPC of a sale, SPC ships the order directly to the buyer. SPC advertises the shoes in sports magazines and gives free samples to well-known lacrosse players who endorse its products. It provides a product warranty and periodically surveys users about the product’s quality.

                          Required

                          1. Briefly explain how SPC accomplishes each of the primary processes in the value chain.

                          2. What is a core competency? Which one of the primary processes would you say is SPC’s core competency? Explain your choice.

                          resource college is a liberal arts school that provides local residents the opportun 540553

                          The Balanced Scorecard and Benchmarking

                          Resource College is a liberal arts school that provides local residents the opportunity to take college courses and earn bachelor’s degrees. Yolanda Howard, the school’s provost, recently attended a workshop in which the balanced scorecard was presented as a way of focusing all of an organization’s functions on its mission. After the workshop, she met with her administrative staff and college deans in a weekend brainstorming session. The group determined that the college’s mission was to provide high-quality courses and degrees to individuals to add value to their lives. To ensure that the college would fulfill this mission, the group established the following objectives:

                          • To provide a sufficient return on investment by increasing tuition revenues and maintaining the liquidity needed to support operations

                          • To add value to the college’s courses by encouraging faculty to be lifelong learners

                          • To retain students and attract new students

                          • To operate efficient and cost-effective student support systems To determine the college’s progress in meeting these objectives, the group established the following performance measures:

                          • Number of faculty publications

                          • Percentage of students who rate college as excellent

                          • Average time for processing student applications

                          • Number of dollars spent on professional development

                          • Growth in revenues for each department

                          • Average time for processing transcript requests

                          • Percentage of faculty who annually do 40 hours of professional development

                          • Percentage of new student leads that result in enrollment

                          • Cash flow

                          • Number of student complaints

                          • Return on assets

                          • Percentage of returning students

                          • Percentage of revenue devoted to student services systems (registrar, computer services, financial aid, and student health)

                          Required

                          1. Prepare a balanced scorecard for Resource College by stating the college’s mission and matching its four objectives to the four stakeholder perspectives: the financial, learning and growth, internal business processes, and customer perspectives.

                          2. Indicate which of the college’s performance measures would be appropriate for each objective.

                          unfortunately it cannot tell the financial manager which of the three possible outco 540129

                          The financial manager of the Variable Corporation has looked into the department’s crystal ball and estimated the earnings per share for Variable under three possible outcomes. This crystal ball is a bit limited, for it can only make projections regarding the earnings per share and the probability that each will occur. Unfortunately, it cannot tell the financial manager which of the three possible outcomes will occur. The data provided by the crystal ball indicates:

                          Economic Environment

                          Probability

                          Earnings per Share

                          Good

                          50%

                          $10.00

                          OK

                          20%

                          $5.00

                          Bad

                          30%

                          $1.00

                          Help the financial manager assess this data by calculating the expected earnings per share and the standard deviation of earnings per share for Variable Corporation.

                          the lou zer corporation generated a net operating loss of 5 000 in 2001 assume that 540133

                          The Lou Zer Corporation generated a net operating loss of $5,000 in 2001. Assume that the current tax law allows the loss to be carried back three years to reduce previous years’ taxes and that previous tax returns reveal the following information:

                          Tax Year

                          Taxable Income

                          Taxes Paid

                          2000

                          $1,000

                          $400

                          1999

                          $2,000

                          $800

                          1998

                          $3,000

                          $1,200

                          1997

                          $2,000

                          $800

                          a. What is the amount of tax refund that Lou Zer can apply for as a result of the 2001 loss?

                          b. How would your answer differ if the tax law permitted the loss to be carried back only two years?

                          the beta an indicator of an asset s systematic risk assigned to general stuff s comm 540134

                          General Stuff is a food processing company that manufactures a wide variety of food products, including pasta, cereal, juice beverages, and confectionery goods. In addition to food processing, General Stuff has acquired a small, regional restaurant chain within the past year. The management of General Stuff believes that the most profitable course would be to expand the restaurant chain to become a major player in the national market. To do this, however, requires cash—which General Stuff doesn’t have quite enough of right now. General Stuff’s management has determined that it needs to raise $1 million in capital next year beyond the funds generated internally.

                          General Stuff had revenues of around $1.2 billion in the last fiscal year and revenues are expected to increase at a rate of 8% per year for the next five years if the restaurant chain is expanded as planned. The vast majority (80%) of the revenues are currently from the food processing business, but it is expected that the restaurant chain will provide up to 40% of General Stuff’s revenues within three years. General Stuff’s net profit margin last year was 5%, but the typical net profit margin for retail food businesses is 10%. General Stuff’s return on assets last year was 25% and return on equity was 40%.

                          The beta (an indicator of an asset’s systematic risk) assigned to General Stuff’s common stock by a major financial analysis service was 1.2 prior to its acquisition of the restaurant chain. The beta was revised upward slightly to 1.3 following this acquisition.

                          Other firms in the food processing industry have capital structures comprising 40% debt and 60% equity, though the use of debt ranges from a low of 15% to a high of 72%. Firms in the retail food industry have capital structures of 45% debt and 55% equity, ranging from 35% to 70% debt.

                          a. Compare General Stuff’s capital structure with that of the industry.

                          b. Provide a recommendation for the amount of debt and equity

                          General Stuff should issue to support the expansion program.

                          List any assumptions you have made in your analysis. Briefly discuss additional information that would be useful in making a recommendation.

                          the seminole company wishes to apply the miller orr model to manage its cash investm 540148

                          The Seminole Company wishes to apply the Miller-Orr model to manage its cash investment. Seminole’s management has collected the following estimates:

                          Cost per transaction

                          = $200

                          Variance of daily cash flows

                          = $10,000

                          Opportunity cost of cash, per day

                          = 0.05%

                          Seminole management has figured, based on their experience dealing with the cash flows of the company, that there should be a cushion— a safety stock—of cash of $20,000. Calculate the following:

                          a. the lower limit

                          b. the return point

                          c. the upper limit

                          consider the following five different lock box arrangements 540152

                          Consider the following five different lock box arrangements:

                          Float Reduction,

                          Opportunity

                          Annual

                          Bank Fee

                          Arrangement

                          in Days

                          Cost per Year

                          Collections

                          for Lockbox

                          A

                          3

                          10%

                          $1,000,000

                          $500

                          B

                          5

                          10%

                          1,000,000

                          600

                          C

                          5

                          10%

                          1,000,000

                          1,500

                          D

                          4

                          12%

                          500,000

                          500

                          E

                          3

                          5%

                          1,200,000

                          500

                          a. For each arrangement, calculate the benefits from using the lock box system.

                          b. Considering the bank fee for each arrangement, which lock box systems are attractive?

                          what is the effective annual cost of credit to its customers if el cheapo changes it 540168

                          The El Cheapo Company typically has $1 million of sales each year and a contribution margin of 20%. El Cheapo is considering offering its customers a 1% discount if they pay within five days of the sale otherwise full payment is due within 20 days.

                          a. What is the effective annual cost of credit to its customers if El Cheapo changes its policy and customers pay on the net day?

                          b. If sales are expected to increase to $2 million per year when this discount is instituted and if 30% of its customers are predicted to take advantage of this discount, what is the cost of the discount to El Cheapo?

                          c. What contribution margin would El Cheapo need to insure a 20% profit margin on those accounts paid within five days (ignoring any costs of carrying accounts receivable)?

                          what is the cost to uo of changing its discount 540169

                          UO, Inc., is evaluating its present credit policy and is concerned that it may not be offering terms that are competitive. Presently, they offer terms of 1/10, net 30, with 50% of its customers paying within the discount period and the remainder paying within the net period. UO’s credit department has projected that if the terms were changed to 2/10, net 30, without changing the 25% contribution margin, annual credit sales will increase from $20 million to $30 million, with 75% of customers paying within ten days and the remainder paying within the net period. This change will decrease its days of credit from 20 to 15 days. UO’s opportunity cost for its accounts receivable investment is 15% before taxes.

                          a. What is the cost to UO of changing its discount?

                          b. What is the change in the carrying cost of accounts receivable for UO?

                          c. Should UO change its discount? Explain.

                          hurricane s management estimates that hurricane needs 100 000 units per month each t 540170

                          Hurricane, Inc. is evaluating its management of inventory. Hurricane’s management estimates that Hurricane needs 100,000 units per month. Each time it places an order to replenish inventory, it costs Hurricane $50. It costs approximately $5 per month to carry one unit.

                          a. If Hurricane orders 20,000 units each time it places an order, what are the ordering costs per month?

                          b. If Hurricane Company orders 20,000 units each time it places an order, what are the holding costs of inventory per month?

                          c. What is the economic order quantity for Hurricane? How do the inventory costs change if Hurricane orders 1,000 units more than the EOQ each time? How do the inventory costs change if Hurricane orders 1,000 units less than the EOQ each time?

                          consider the following information from financial statements with dollar amounts in 540171

                          Consider the following information from financial statements, with dollar amounts in millions:

                          Corporation

                          Inventory

                          Cost of Goods Sold

                          Primary Product

                          A

                          $816

                          $2,761

                          Drugs and health care

                          B

                          2,141

                          3,975

                          Tobacco products

                          C

                          1,147

                          17,932

                          Oil and gasoline

                          D

                          707

                          3,915

                          Food, soup

                          E

                          1,595

                          6,506

                          Computers

                          F

                          494

                          3,727

                          Food, cereal

                          Source: Standard & Poors Compustat PC Plus CD- Rom

                          a. Calculate the inventory turnover for each firm.

                          b. Calculate the number of days of inventory for each firm.

                          c. Why might the inventory turnovers and number of days of inventory differ among these firms?

                          the floppy disk company currently extends credit to its customers offering a discoun 540174

                          The Floppy Disk Company currently extends credit to its customers, offering a discount of 4% if the account is paid within 20 days, otherwise the full amount is due 40 days from the date of purchase. It is considering changing its credit terms to offer more incentive to its customers to pay early. It is proposing increasing its discount to 6%if accounts are paid within 20 days. Its contribution margin is 25% and its before-tax opportunity cost of funds is 15%.

                          a. Calculate the cost of trade credit to Floppy’s customers that choose to pay on the net day under the present credit terms.

                          b. Calculate the cost of trade credit to Floppy’s customers that choose to pay on the net day under the proposed credit terms.

                          c. If Floppy’s sales are expected to increase by $5 million under these new credit terms and the percentage of customers paying within 10 days increases from 20% to 30%, what is the cost of the change in the discount for the Floppy Disk Company?

                          what is the effective interest rate on its current credit terms 540175

                          The I. Krueger Company is evaluating its credit terms. Currently, the I. Krueger Company allows its customers to pay in 30 days and gives the customers a 2% discount if they pay in within five days.

                          a. What is the effective interest rate on its current credit terms?

                          b. If I. Krueger moves the discount period from five days to three days (leaving the amount of the discount the same), what would be the effective interest rate that it charges credit customers that pay in 30 days?

                          c. If I. Krueger changes only the discount rate from 2% to 3% (leaving the discount period the same), what would be the effective interest rate that it charges its credit customers that pay in 30 days?

                          d. If I. Krueger changes the discount rate from 2% to 3% and changes the discount period from five to three days, what would be the effective interest rate that it charges its credit customers that pay in 30 days?

                          the teeny tiny toy company often referred to as the 3t company manufactures toys wit 540176

                          The Teeny Tiny Toy Company (often referred to as the 3T Company) manufactures toys with themes tied to recent movie releases. 3T’s sales in the last fiscal year were $3 billion and sales have been growing at a rate of 5% per year. Sales are seasonal, with the peak sales in August of each year. 3T’s fiscal year ends in January. The forecasted sales for 3T for the next fiscal year, in millions, are:

                          Month

                          Estimated Sales

                          Month

                          Estimated Sales

                          February

                          $150

                          August

                          $450

                          March

                          160

                          September

                          370

                          April

                          170

                          October

                          320

                          May

                          230

                          November

                          300

                          June

                          250

                          December

                          230

                          July

                          380

                          January

                          140

                          Sales for December and January of the most recent fiscal year are $215 million and $130 million, respectively. 3T’s gross and contribution margins were 30% and 40%, respectively, in the last fiscal year. No change in margins is expected in the next fiscal year. 3T sells its goods to retail stores on credit, with terms of 4/30, net 90. Under the present credit terms, 30% of its customers pay within 30 days, 60% pay within 60 days, and the rest pay within 90 days. 3T is considering changing its credit policy to stimulate sales.

                          Based an examination of competitors’ terms, if they alter the policy to 4/60, net 90, 3T management anticipates increasing sales by 10%, but collections are expected to slow down: Only 10% of its sales on credit will be paid within 30 days, 80% paid within 60 days, and the rest paid within 90 days.

                          The costs of administering and collecting accounts receivables is expected to increase by $200,000 since the customer base will be increased and credit will be extended to slower-paying customers.

                          The cost of carrying accounts receivable (that is, the opportunity cost) is 10%.

                          a. Estimate the effect that the change in the credit policy would have on monthly sales and accounts receivable. Graph monthly sales and accounts receivable for each month in the next fiscal year.

                          b. Prepare a recommendation regarding the change in the credit policy.

                          Be sure to list any assumptions that are necessary and discuss the benefits and costs associated with a change in 3T’s credit policy.

                          if the prime rate is 12 apr which arrangement is less costly for cash poor 540198

                          The Cash Poor Company is considering using its $1 million of accounts receivable to secure financing for the next month. Cash Poor has approached two financing firms, each offering different arrangements. Firm A is willing to lend Cash Poor 75% of the face value of the receivables at 60 basis points above the prime rate. Firm B is willing to factor Cash Poor’s receivables, advancing 75% of the receivables, collecting a fee up front of 1% of all receivables, and charging interest at 30 basis points above the prime rate. In the case of Firm A’s arrangement, Cash Poor continues with its evaluation and collection of credit, but in the case of Firm B’s arrangement, Firm B performs all the credit functions, saving Cash Poor an estimated $10,000 over the next month. If the prime rate is 12% APR, which arrangement is less costly for Cash Poor?

                          classify each of the following companies as mature growing or downsizing based on th 540249

                          Classify each of the following companies as mature, growing, or downsizing based on these cash flows:

                          Cash Flow from

                          Cash Flow from (for)

                          Cash Flow from (for)

                          Company

                          Operations

                          Investing Activities

                          Financing Activities

                          A

                          $550,345,890

                          $(300,532,400)

                          $(232,221,891)

                          B

                          $33,114,893

                          $(145,231,879)

                          $120,133,155

                          C

                          $2,900,311

                          $3,000,200

                          $(5,444,656)

                          D

                          $1,918,777

                          $(5,506,990)

                          $3,899,231

                          calculate the amount of free cash flow for gap inc for the year ended january 31 199 540253

                          Calculate the amount of free cash flow for Gap Inc., for the year ended January 31, 1998. State any assumptions that you make in your calculations.

                          Gap Inc., Statement of Cash Flows, in thousands

                          CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES

                          Net earnings

                          $53,901

                          Adjustments to reconcile net earnings to net cash provided by operating

                          activities

                          Depreciation and amortization

                          269,706

                          Tax benefit from exercise of stock options by employees and from vesting

                          of restricted stock

                          23,682

                          Deferred income taxes

                          (13,706)

                          Change in operating assets and liabilities

                          Merchandise inventory

                          (156,091)

                          Prepaid expenses and other

                          (44,736)

                          Accounts payable

                          63,532

                          Accrued expenses

                          107,365

                          Income taxes payable

                          (8,214)

                          Deferred lease credits and other long-term liabilities

                          69,212

                          Net cash provided by operating activities

                          $844,651

                          CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

                          Net maturity (purchase) of short-term investments

                          174,709

                          Net purchase of long-term investments

                          (2,939)

                          Net purchase of property and equipment

                          (465,843)

                          Acquisition of lease rights and other assets

                          19,779

                          Net cash used for investing activities

                          (313,852)

                          CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

                          Net increase in notes payable

                          44,462

                          Net issuance of long-term debt

                          495,890

                          Issuance of common stock

                          30,653

                          Net purchase of treasury stock

                          (593,142)

                          Cash dividends paid

                          (79,503)

                          Net cash used for financing activities

                          (101,640)

                          Gap Inc., Income Statement, in thousands

                          Net sales

                          $6,507825

                          Costs and expenses

                          Cost of goods sold and occupancy expenses

                          4,021,541

                          Operating expenses

                          1,635,017

                          Net interest income

                          (2,975)

                          Earnings before income taxes

                          $842,242

                          Income taxes

                          320,341

                          Net earnings

                          $533,901

                          assume that the lease is a net lease that any tax benefits are realized in the year 540316

                          The Mietet Company is considering the acquisition of a machine that costs $1 million if bought today. The company can buy or lease the machine. If it buys the machine, the machine would be depreciated as a 3-year MACRS asset and is expected to have a salvage value of $10,000 at the end of the 5-year useful life. If leased, the lease payments are $250,000 each year for four years, payable at the beginning of each year. Mietet’s marginal tax rate is 35% and the cost of capital is 12%.

                          Assume that the lease is a net lease, that any tax benefits are realized in the year of the expense, and that there is no investment tax credit.

                          a. Calculate the depreciation for each year in the case of the purchase of this machine.

                          b. Calculate the direct cash flows from leasing initially and for each of the five years.

                          c. Calculate the adjusted discount rate.

                          d. Calculate the value of the lease.

                          the rendilegping company is considering the acquisition of a machine that costs 100 540317

                          The Rendilegping Company is considering the acquisition of a machine that costs $100,000 if bought today. The company can buy or lease the machine. If it buys the machine, the machine would be depreciated as a 3-year MACRS asset and is expected to have a salvage value of $5,000 at the end of the 5-year useful life. If leased, the lease payments are $24,000 each year for four years, payable at the beginning of each year. The marginal tax rate of the Rendilegping Company is 30% and the cost of capital is 15%. Use the MACRS rates as provided in Question 19 and assume that the lease is a net lease, that any tax benefits are realized in the year of the expense, and that there is no investment tax credit.

                          a. Calculate the depreciation for each year in the case of the purchase of this machine.

                          b. Calculate the direct cash flows from leasing initially and for each of the five years.

                          c. Calculate the adjusted discount rate.

                          d. Calculate the value of the lease.

                          e. Calculate the amortization of the equivalent loan.

                          organizations stake out different strategic positions to add value and achieve succe 540521

                          Strategic Positioning

                          Organizations stake out different strategic positions to add value and achieve success. Some strive to be low-cost leaders like Wal-Mart, while others become the high-end quality leaders like Whole Foods Market. Identify which of the following organizations are low-cost leaders (C) and which are quality leaders (Q):

                          1. Tiffany & Co.

                          6. Rent-a-Wreck

                          2. Yale University

                          7. Hertz Rental Cars

                          3. Local community college

                          8. Pepsi-Cola

                          4. Lexus

                          9. Store-brand soda

                          5. Kia

                          indicate whether each of the following management activities in a department store i 540522

                          The Management Process

                          Indicate whether each of the following management activities in a department store is part of planning (PL), performing (PE), evaluating (E), or communicating (C):

                          1. Completing a balance sheet and income statement at the end of the year

                          2. Training a clerk to complete a cash sale

                          3. Meeting with department managers to develop performance measures for sales personnel

                          4. Renting a local warehouse to store excess inventory of clothing

                          5. Evaluating the performance of the shoe department by examining the significant differences between its actual and planned expenses for the month

                          6. Preparing an annual budget of anticipated sales for each department and the entire store

                          the baker company is considering an investment of 1 million the investment is expect 539878

                          The Baker Company is considering an investment of $1 million. The investment is expected to produce the following cash flows:

                          Year

                          Cash Flow

                          Year 1

                          $400,000

                          Year 2

                          $300,000

                          Year 3

                          $300,000

                          Year 4

                          $400,000

                          a. What is the annual return on Baker Company’s investment if it invests $1 million?

                          b. What is the most the Baker Company would invest so that the return on its investment is at least 10%?

                          the common company has paid the following dividends during the past four years of 539887

                          The Common Company has paid the following dividends during the past four years of:

                          Year

                          Dividend per Share

                          1997

                          $2.00

                          1998

                          $2

                          1999

                          $2

                          2000

                          $3

                          If dividends are expected to grow at the same rate as the past four years and the required rate of return on Common common is 10%, what is the expected price of a share of Common common at the end of 2000?

                          burlington northern santa fe inc paid the following dividends per share dps on its c 539893

                          Burlington Northern Santa Fe, Inc., paid the following dividends per share (DPS) on its common stock:

                          Year

                          DPS

                          Year

                          DPS

                          Year

                          DPS

                          1984

                          $1.10

                          1988

                          $2.20

                          1992

                          $1.20

                          1985

                          $1.45

                          1989

                          $1.20

                          1993

                          $1.20

                          1986

                          $2

                          1990

                          $1.20

                          1994

                          $1.20

                          1987

                          $2

                          1991

                          $1.20

                          1995

                          $1.20

                          Source: Value Line Investment Survey, Edition 2 (March 22, 1996) p. 285.

                          Calculate the average annual growth rate in dividends from:

                          a. 1984 through 1987

                          b. 1984 through 1991

                          c. 1984 through 1995

                          on january 1 1981 the huntington railroad company issued 100 million of 95 8 bonds d 539906

                          On January 1, 1981, the Huntington Railroad Company issued $100 million of 95_8 bonds due 2020. Interest is paid semiannually in January and June of each year. These bonds are callable according to the following schedule:

                          1990–2000 at 103.0

                          2001–2005 at 102.0

                          2006–2010 at 101.0

                          2011–2015 at 100.5

                          2016–2020 at 100.0

                          These bonds are also convertible into shares of stock, with each $1,000 face value bond convertible into 15 shares of Huntington common stock. Huntington common stock paid a dividend of $2 per share in 1997. Its dividends are expected to grow at a rate of 10% per year for the years 1998–2002 and then slow to a rate of 5% per year thereafter. The current required rate of return on Huntington common stock is 14%.

                          The current yield (i.e., annual interest/market price) on the Huntington bonds is 7.5%. Interest rate recasts for the next six years are as follows:

                          1998

                          8.00%

                          2001

                          8.75%

                          1999

                          8.50%

                          2002

                          9.00%

                          2000

                          8.50%

                          2003

                          9.00%

                          All indications are that yields will remain at 9% through 2020.

                          a. Calculate the yield-to-call for the Huntington bonds for each year from today, the end of 1997, to maturity. Plot the yield-to-call against time.

                          b. Forecast the stock price of Huntington common stock for each year from 1998 through 2020. Plot the predicted stock price against time.

                          c. Based on the yield and dividend growth forecasts, at what point in the future would it be profitable to convert the Huntington bonds into stock? Explain the basis of your decision. What other factors enter into this decision?

                          a manufacturing firm banner products is seeking to raise 50 million by issuing a sev 540043

                          A manufacturing firm, Banner Products, is seeking to raise $50 million by issuing a seven-year bond. The CFO is seeking fixed-rate financing. However, Banner Products’ investment banker has informed the CFO that it could synthetically create a fixed-rate bond at a lower cost if it issued floating-rate bonds and used an interest rate swap. If the fixed rate bonds are issued, the interest rate that Banner Products must offer is 9%. If floating-rate bonds are issued, the rate would be three-month LIBOR plus 200 basis points. The swap would be a seven-year swap that pays quarterly with a notional amount of $50 million. In the swap, Banner Products would pay 6.7% and receive three-month LIBOR.

                          a. Diagram the payments that must be made by Banner Products if it issues a floating-rate bond and at the same time enters into the swap.

                          b. What is the rate on the synthetic fixed-rate bond created and compare this rate to that of a fixed-rate bond that Banner Products could have issued?

                          c. What risk is Banner Products exposed to by creating a synthetic fixed-rate bond?

                          suppose that chuckie munchies company is seeking to raise 60 million for the next fi 540044

                          Suppose that Chuckie Munchies Company is seeking to raise $60 million for the next five years on a fixed-rate basis. The firm’s investment banker indicates that if bonds with a maturity of five years are issued, the interest rate on the issue would have to be 9%.

                          At the same time, there are institutional investors willing to purchase a bond whose annual interest rate is based on the actual performance of the S&P 500 stock market index. Specifically, the company can issue a five-year bond whose coupon rate is equal to the S&P 500 minus 250 basis points. A . If Chuckie Munchies Company issued a bond whose coupon rate is tied to the S&P 500, what risk is it facing?

                          b. Suppose that the company’s investment banker indicates that the firm can enter into a five-year equity swap with a notional amount of $60 million on the following terms:

                          ¦One party will pay a fixed-rate of 8.7%.

                          ¦The other party will pay a rate equal to the actual performance of the S&P 500 minus 280 basis points (with the minimum interest rate equal to zero).

                          How can Chuckie Munchies Company’s CFO use the equity swap to create a bond structure tied to the S&P 500 so as to lower its funding cost?

                          the pact company is evaluating its outstanding bond issue in light of a recent drop 540049

                          The Pact Company is evaluating its outstanding bond issue in light of a recent drop in interest rates. Currently, it has $200 million of 8% coupon bonds (paid semiannually) outstanding that mature in five years and have a maturity value of $1,000 each. The bonds are callable at 106 at any time. Their outstanding bonds are priced to yield 6% on a bond-equivalent basis (i.e., a six-month yield of 3%) and the treasurer believes that if the bonds could retire the existing bonds, they could issue new bonds at par with a 6% coupon rate.

                          Pact Company’s marginal tax rate is 40%.

                          a. What is the total market value of the outstanding bonds?

                          b. Should Pact Company buy the outstanding bonds in the open market or call in the bonds at this point in time assuming no flotation costs for new bonds issued? Why?

                          c. If there are no flotation costs, what is the face value of new 6% bonds that must be issued to refund the existing bonds?

                          d. Should Pact refund the 8% bonds?

                          the buffett restaurant company currently has 100 million of 9 coupon bonds outstandi 540050

                          The Buffett Restaurant Company currently has $100 million of 9% coupon bonds outstanding. These bonds pay interest semiannually, mature in ten years, and are callable at 102. Buffett also has $100 million of 81/2% coupon bonds outstanding. These bonds pay interest semiannually, have ten years remaining to maturity, and are callable at 101. Both issues of bonds are trading to yield 6%.

                          a. What is the market value of Buffett’s outstanding bonds?

                          b. If Buffett is considering retiring both issues, should it buy the bonds in the open market or call the bonds? Explain.

                          c. Suppose that Buffett can issue new bonds with a 6% coupon Ignoring flotation costs, what is the face value of these new bonds that must be issued to replace each of Buffett’s two outstanding issues?

                          the foster corporation has paid dividends on common stock over the ten years as foll 540071

                          The Foster Corporation has paid dividends on common stock over the ten years as follows:

                          Year

                          Dividends

                          Earnings

                          1994

                          $3,000

                          $5,000

                          1995

                          3,100

                          5,100

                          1996

                          3,200

                          4,500

                          1997

                          3,300

                          5,400

                          1998

                          3,500

                          5,500

                          1999

                          3,725

                          5,300

                          2000

                          3,975

                          5,200

                          2001

                          4,200

                          5,600

                          2002

                          4,500

                          5,800

                          During this ten-year period, there were 1,000 common shares outstanding.

                          a. What are the dividends per share for each year?

                          b. What is the dividend payout for each year?

                          c. How would you describe the dividend policy of Foster Corporation?

                          sun trek corporation is the leading u s producer of equipment for aerospace sun trek 540083

                          Sun Trek Corporation is the leading U. S. producer of equipment for aerospace. Sun Trek currently has over 60,000 shares of common stock outstanding. The price of a share of stock at the end of 1997 was $42, but the stock traded in the range of $35 to $42 during 1997. Sun Trek earnings and dividends are expected to grow at a rate of 10% each year over the next few years. In anticipation of the increased rate of growth, Sun Trek board of directors declared a 2 for 1 stock split, effective in March, 1998.

                          Its earnings per share (EPS) and dividends per share (DPS) over the period from 1983 through 1997 (based on per-split shares) a represented in following table.

                          Year

                          DPS

                          EPS

                          Year

                          DPS

                          EPS

                          Year

                          DPS

                          EPS

                          1983

                          $0.38

                          $1.14

                          1988

                          0.45

                          $1.01

                          1993

                          $0.55

                          1.53

                          1984

                          0.43

                          1.31

                          1989

                          0.45

                          0.61

                          1994

                          0.55

                          1.51

                          1985

                          0.45

                          0.94

                          1990

                          0.45

                          0.46

                          1995

                          0.59

                          1.49

                          1986

                          0.45

                          0.61

                          1991

                          0.45

                          –0.68

                          1996

                          0.60

                          1.28

                          1987

                          0.45

                          0.91

                          1992

                          0.45

                          1.40

                          1997

                          0.60

                          1.46

                          a. Describe Sun Trek’s dividend policy in terms of dividends per share and dividend payout. Provide graphs to illustrate Sun- Trek’s policy.

                          b. What stock price change, if any, do you expect when the shares are split in March of 1998? Explain.

                          c. Discuss the reasoning behind Sun Trek’s splitting its shares. Do you agree with Sun Trek’s board’s decision to split the shares?

                          Explain.

                          d. Suppose that there is a difference of opinion regarding Sun Trek’s future growth, with estimates of future growth ranging from 5% to 14%, and a median estimate of 10%. Considering the difference of opinion on Sun Trek’s future growth, discuss the wisdom of splitting its shares.

                          the george corporation is considering raising new funds by either issuing preferred 540098

                          The George Corporation is considering raising new funds by either issuing preferred stock or issuing additional common shares. The preferred stock alternative consists of issuing $20 million of $25 par, 5% preferred stock. The common stock alternative consists of issuing 1 million new shares at $20 per share. The George Corporation currently has 4 million shares outstanding. The expected net profits of the George Corporation for the next few years are the following:

                          Year

                          Net Profit

                          One year from now

                          $5.4 million

                          Two years from now

                          6.0 million

                          Three years from now

                          4.2 million

                          Four years from now

                          5.0 million

                          Calculate George’s earnings available for common stock and earnings per share for each year and each alternative financing arrangement.

                          consider the information on the three firms a b and c 540109

                          Consider the information on the three firms A, B, and C:

                          Capital

                          Firm A

                          Firm B

                          Firm C

                          Debt

                          $1,000

                          $2,000

                          $3,000

                          Equity

                          $3,000

                          $2,000

                          $1,000

                          a. Calculate the debt ratio for each firm.

                          b. Calculate the debt-to-assets ratio for each firm.

                          the chew z corporation is considering three possible financing arrangements to raise 540110

                          The Chew-Z Corporation is considering three possible financing arrangements to raise $10,000 of new capital. Currently, the capital structure of Chew-Z consists of no debt and $10,000 of equity.

                          There are 500 shares of common stock currently outstanding, selling at $20 per share. The Chew-Z is expected to generate $12,000 of earnings before interest and taxes next period. It is expected that the interest rate on any debt would be 10%. The three possible financing alternatives are:

                          Alternative 1: Finance completely with new equity.

                          Alternative 2: Finance using 50% debt and 50% new equity.

                          Alternative 3: Finance completely with new debt.

                          a. Calculate the following items for each alternative, assuming that there are no taxes on corporate income:

                          ¦ Earnings to owners

                          ¦ Earnings per share

                          ¦ Distribution of income between creditors and shareholders

                          b. Calculate the following items for each alternative, assuming that the marginal rate of tax on corporate income is 40%:

                          ¦ Earnings to owners

                          ¦ Earnings per share

                          ¦ Distribution of income among creditors, shareholders, and the government

                          the financial manager of the variable corporation has looked into the department s c 540111

                          The financial manager of the Variable Corporation has looked into the department’s crystal ball and estimated the earnings per share for Variable under three possible outcomes. This crystal ball is a bit limited, for it can only make projections regarding the earnings per share and the probability that each will occur. Unfortunately, it cannot tell the financial manager which of the three possible outcomes will occur. The data provided by the crystal ball indicates:

                          Economic Environment

                          Probability

                          Earnings per Share

                          Good

                          50%

                          $10.00

                          OK

                          20%

                          $5.00

                          Bad

                          30%

                          $1.00

                          Help the financial manager assess this data by calculating the expected earnings per share and the standard deviation of earnings per share for Variable Corporation.

                          the lou zer corporation generated a net operating loss of 5 000 in 2001 540115

                          The Lou Zer Corporation generated a net operating loss of $5,000 in 2001. Assume that the current tax law allows the loss to be carried back three years to reduce previous years’ taxes and that previous tax returns reveal the following information:

                          Tax Year

                          Taxable Income

                          Taxes Paid

                          2000

                          $1,000

                          $400

                          1999

                          $2,000

                          $800

                          1998

                          $3,000

                          $1,200

                          1997

                          $2,000

                          $800

                          a. What is the amount of tax refund that Lou Zer can apply for as a result of the 2001 loss?

                          b. How would your answer differ if the tax law permitted the loss to be carried back only two years?

                          general stuff is a food processing company that manufactures a wide variety of food 540116

                          General Stuff is a food processing company that manufactures a wide variety of food products, including pasta, cereal, juice beverages, and confectionery goods. In addition to food processing, General Stuff has acquired a small, regional restaurant chain within the past year. The management of General Stuff believes that the most profitable course would be to expand the restaurant chain to become a major player in the national market. To do this, however, requires cash—which General Stuff doesn’t have quite enough of right now.

                          General Stuff’s management has determined that it needs to raise $1 million in capital next year beyond the funds generated internally.

                          General Stuff had revenues of around $1.2 billion in the last fiscal year and revenues are expected to increase at a rate of 8% per year for the next five years if the restaurant chain is expanded as planned. The vast majority (80%) of the revenues are currently from the food processing business, but it is expected that the restaurant chain will provide up to 40% of General Stuff’s revenues within three years. General Stuff’s net profit margin last year was 5%, but the typical net profit margin for retail food businesses is 10%. General Stuff’s return on assets last year was 25% and return on equity was 40%.

                          The beta (an indicator of an asset’s systematic risk) assigned to General Stuff’s common stock by a major financial analysis service was 1.2 prior to its acquisition of the restaurant chain. The beta was revised upward slightly to 1.3 following this acquisition. Other firms in the food processing industry have capital structures comprising 40% debt and 60% equity, though the use of debt ranges from a low of 15% to a high of 72%. Firms in the retail food industry have capital structures of 45% debt and 55% equity, ranging from 35% to 70% debt.

                          a. Compare General Stuff’s capital structure with that of the industry.

                          b. Provide a recommendation for the amount of debt and equity

                          General Stuff should issue to support the expansion program.

                          List any assumptions you have made in your analysis. Briefly discuss additional information that would be useful in making a recommendation.

                          indicate which of the following errors each considered individually would cause the 539398

                          Effect of errors on trial balance

                          Indicate which of the following errors, each considered individually, would cause the trial balance totals to be unequal:

                          a. A fee of $21,000 earned and due from a client was not debited to Accounts Receivable or credited to a revenue account, because the cash had not been received.

                          b. A receipt of $11,300 from an account receivable was journalized and posted as a debit of $11,300 to Cash and a credit of $11,300 to Fees Earned.

                          c. A payment of $4,950 to a creditor was posted as a debit of $4,950 to Accounts Payable and a debit of $4,950 to Cash.

                          d. A payment of $5,000 for equipment purchased was posted as a debit of $500 to Equipment and a credit of $500 to Cash.

                          e. Payment of a cash dividend of $19,000 was journalized and posted as a debit of $1,900 to Salary Expense and a credit of $19,000 to Cash.

                          Indicate which of the preceding errors would require a correcting entry.

                          the following preliminary unadjusted trial balance of ranger co a sports ticket agen 539399

                          Errors in trial balance

                          The following preliminary unadjusted trial balance of Ranger Co., a sports ticket agency, does not balance:

                          Ranger Co.

                          Unadjusted Trial Balance

                          August 31, 2014

                          Debit Balance

                          Credit Balance

                          Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          77,600

                          Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          37,750

                          Prepaid Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          12,000

                          Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          19,000

                          Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          29,100

                          Unearned Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          10,800

                          Capital Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          40,000

                          Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          70,000

                          Dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          13,000

                          Service Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          385,000

                          Wages Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          213,000

                          Advertising Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          16,350

                          Miscellaneous Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          18400

                          273,700

                          668,300

                          When the ledger and other records are reviewed, you discover the following:

                          1) the debits and credits in the cash account total $77,600 and $62,100, respectively;

                          2) a billing of $9,000 to a customer on account was not posted to the accounts receivable account;

                          3) a payment of $4,500 made to a creditor on account was not posted to the accounts payable account;

                          4) the balance of the unearned rent account is $5,400;

                          5) the correct balance of the equipment account is $190,000;

                          6) each account has a normal balance.

                          Prepare a corrected unadjusted trial balance.

                          the following errors occurred in posting from a two column journal 539400

                          Effect of errors on trial balance

                          The following errors occurred in posting from a two-column journal:

                          1. A credit of $6,000 to Accounts Payable was not posted.

                          2. An entry debiting Accounts Receivable and crediting Fees Earned for $5,300 was not posted.

                          3. A debit of $2,700 to Accounts Payable was posted as a credit.

                          4. A debit of $480 to Supplies was posted twice.

                          5. A debit of $3,600 to Cash was posted to Miscellaneous Expense.

                          6. A credit of $780 to Cash was posted as $870.

                          7. A debit of $12,620 to Wages Expense was posted as $12,260.

                          Considering each case individually (i.e., assuming that no other errors had occurred), indicate: (a) by “yes” or “no” whether the trial balance would be out of balance; (b) if answer to (a) is “yes,” the amount by which the trial balance totals would differ; and (c) whether the Debit or Credit column of the trial balance would have the larger total. Answers should be presented in the following form, with error (1) given as an example:

                          (a)

                          (b)

                          ( c)

                          Error

                          Out of Balance

                          Difference

                          Larger Total

                          1.

                          yes

                          $6,000

                          Debit

                          identify the errors in the following trial balance all accounts have normal balances 539401

                          Errors in trial balance

                          Identify the errors in the following trial balance. All accounts have normal balances.

                          Mascot Co.

                          Unadjusted Trial Balance

                          For the Month Ending July 31, 2014

                          Debit Balance

                          Credit Balance

                          Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          36,000

                          Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          Prepaid Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          18,000

                          112,600

                          Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          375,000

                          Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          53,300

                          Unearned Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          Salarires Payable

                          7,500

                          Capital Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          100,000

                          Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          197,200

                          Dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          17,000

                          Service Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          682,000

                          Wages Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          396,800

                          Advertising Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          73,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          11,600

                          273,700

                          1,189,300

                          the following data in millions are taken from the financial statements of target 539404

                          Horizontal analysis of income statement

                          The following data (in millions) are taken from the financial statements of Target

                          Recent

                          Year

                          Prior

                          Year

                          Revenue

                          $67,390

                          $65,357

                          Operating expenses

                          62,138

                          60,684

                          Operating income

                          $ 5,252

                          $ 4,673

                          a. For Target Corporation, determine the amount of change in millions and the percent of change (round to one decimal

                          place) from the prior year to the recent year for:

                          1. Revenue

                          2. Operating expenses

                          3. Operating income

                          a. What conclusions can you draw from your analysis of the revenue and the total operating expenses?

                          the following data in millions were taken the financial statements of walmart stores 539405

                          Horizontal analysis of income statement

                          The following data (in millions) were taken the financial statements of Walmart Stores, Inc.

                          Recent

                          Year

                          Prior

                          Year

                          Revenue

                          $421,849

                          $408,085

                          Operating expenses

                          396,307

                          384,083

                          Operating income

                          $ 25,542

                          $ 24,002

                          a. For Walmart Stores, Inc., determine the amount of change in millions and the percent of change (round to one decimal place) from the prior year to the recent year for:

                          a. Revenue

                          b. Operating expenses

                          c. Operating income

                          b. Comment on the results of your horizontal analysis in part (a).

                          c. Based upon Exercise 2-23, compare and comment on the operating results of Target and Walmart for the recent year.

                          lynn cantwell an architect organized cantwell architects on july 1 2014 during the m 539406

                          Entries into T accounts and trial balance

                          Lynn Cantwell, an architect, organized Cantwell Architects on July 1, 2014. During the month, Cantwell Architects completed the following transactions:

                          a. Issued capital stock to Lynn Cantwell in exchange for $25,000.

                          b. Paid July rent for office and workroom, $2,750.

                          c. Purchased used automobile for $30,000, paying $4,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.

                          d. Purchased office and computer equipment on account, $9,000.

                          e. Paid cash for supplies, $1,600.

                          f. Paid cash for annual insurance policies, $2,400.

                          g. Received cash from client for plans delivered, $11,150.

                          h. Paid cash for miscellaneous expenses, $300.

                          i. Paid cash to creditors on account, $3,500.

                          j. Paid installment due on note payable, $550.

                          k. Received invoice for blueprint service, due in August, $1,500.

                          l. Recorded fee earned on plans delivered, payment to be received in August, $17,300.

                          m. Paid salary of assistant, $2,200.

                          n. Paid gas, oil, and repairs on automobile for July, $815.

                          Instructions

                          a. Record the above transactions directly in the following T accounts, without journalizing: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Automobiles, Equipment, Notes Payable, Accounts Payable, Capital Stock, Professional Fees, Rent Expense, Salary Expense, Blueprint Expense, Automobile Expense, and Miscellaneous Expense. To the left of the amount entered in the accounts, place the appropriate letter to identify the transaction.

                          b. Determine account balances of the T accounts. Accounts containing a single entry only (such as Prepaid Insurance) do not need a balance.

                          c. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Cantwell Architects, as of July 31, 2014.

                          d. Determine the net income or net loss for July.

                          on january 1 2014 alicia masingale established leopard realty which completed the fo 539407

                          Journal entries and trial balance

                          On January 1, 2014, Alicia Masingale established Leopard Realty, which completed the following transactions during the month:

                          a. Alicia Masingale transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business in exchange for capital stock, $23,500.

                          b. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000.

                          c. Purchased supplies on account, $1,800.

                          d. Paid creditor on account, $675.

                          e. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $16,750.

                          f. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $1,000, and miscellaneous expenses, $800.

                          g. Paid office salaries, $2,150.

                          h. Determined that the cost of supplies used was $925.

                          i. Paid dividends, $1,600.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize entries for transactions (a) through (i), using the following account titles: Cash, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Capital Stock, Dividends, Sales Commissions, Rent Expense, Office Salaries Expense, Automobile Expense, Supplies Expense, Miscellaneous Expense. Explanations may be omitted.

                          2. Prepare T accounts, using the account titles in (1). Post the journal entries to these accounts, placing the appropriate letter to the left of each amount to identify the transactions. Determine the account balances, after all posting is complete. Accounts containing only a single entry do not need a balance.

                          3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of January 31, 2014.

                          4. Determine the following:

                          a. Amount of total revenue recorded in the ledger.

                          b. Amount of total expenses recorded in the ledger.

                          c. Amount of net income for January.

                          5. Determine the increase or decrease in retained earnings for January.

                          on june 1 2014 ellie hopkins established an interior decorating business first class 539408

                          Journal entries and trial balance

                          On June 1, 2014, Ellie Hopkins established an interior decorating business, First-Class Designs.

                          During the month, Ellie completed the following transactions related to the business:

                          June 1. Ellie transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business in exchange for capital stock, $21,500.

                          1. Paid rent for period of June 1 to end of month, $4,200.

                          6. Purchased office equipment on account, $8,500.

                          8. Purchased a used truck for $28,000, paying $3,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.

                          10. Purchased supplies for cash, $1,800.

                          12. Received cash for job completed, $9,000.

                          June 15. Paid annual premiums on property and casualty insurance, $2,700.

                          23. Recorded jobs completed on account and sent invoices to customers, $13,650.

                          24. Received an invoice for truck expenses, to be paid in July, $975.

                          Enter the following transactions on Page 2 of the two-column journal.

                          29. Paid utilities expense, $2,480.

                          29. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $750.

                          30. Received cash from customers on account, $7,800.

                          30. Paid wages of employees, $5,100.

                          30. Paid creditor a portion of the amount owed for equipment purchased on June 6, $4,250.

                          30. Paid dividends, $3,000.

                          Instructions

                          1. Journalize each transaction in a two-column journal beginning on Page 1, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.) Explanations may be omitted.

                          11 Cash 31 Capital Stock

                          12 Accounts Receivable 33 Dividends

                          13 Supplies 41 Fees Earned

                          14 Prepaid Insurance 51 Wages Expense

                          16 Equipment 53 Rent Expense

                          18 Truck 54 Utilities Expense

                          21 Notes Payable 55 Truck Expense

                          22 Accounts Payable 59 Miscellaneous Expense

                          2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts, inserting appropriate posting references as each item is posted. Extend the balances to the appropriate balance columns after each transaction is posted.

                          3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for First-Class Designs as of June 30, 2014.

                          4. Determine the excess of revenues over expenses for June.

                          5. Can you think of any reason why the amount determined in (4) might not be the net income for June?

                          the financial statements of company m and its subsidiary s are shown here in m 539424

                          The financial statements of company M and its subsidiary S are shown here (in € m).

                          Balance sheet

                          Assets

                          M

                          S

                          Equity and liabilities

                          M

                          S

                          Tangible and intangible fixed assets

                          100

                          30

                          Equity and share capital

                          40

                          10

                          Investment in subsidiary S

                          16

                          Reserves

                          80

                          10

                          Other investments

                          5

                          Net earnings

                          10

                          5

                          Current assets

                          200

                          70

                          Debt

                          191

                          75

                          Total

                          321

                          100

                          Total

                          321

                          100

                          Income statement

                          M

                          S

                          -Sales

                          200

                          90

                          -Purchases of raw materials

                          100

                          50

                          -Change in inventories

                          2

                          -Other external services

                          25

                          20

                          -Personnel costs

                          40

                          8

                          -Interest and other financial Charges

                          10

                          1

                          + Interest, dividends and other financial income

                          3

                          -Exceptional costs

                          9

                          + Exceptional income

                          2

                          -Corporate income tax

                          11

                          4

                          = Net income

                          10

                          5

                          Draw up the consolidated accounts for the group MþS in the following circumstances:

                          (a) M has an 80% stake in S (full consolidation).

                          (b) M has a 50% stake in S (proportional consolidation).

                          (c) M has a 20% stake in S (equity method consolidation).

                          (N.B.: It is assumed that there are no flows between M and S.)

                          what are your conclusions 539521

                          Calculate the leverage effect for each year. What are your conclusions?

                          €m

                          1

                          2

                          3

                          4

                          5

                          Shareholders’ equity

                          100

                          115

                          320

                          300

                          240

                          Long- and medium-term debt

                          123

                          180

                          540

                          640

                          680

                          Financial expense before tax

                          11

                          18.5

                          29

                          63

                          83

                          Net income

                          14

                          16

                          (20)

                          (60)

                          (40)

                          Tax rate

                          35%

                          35%

                          35%

                          35%

                          35%

                          draw up the cash flow schedule for the project on the basis of straight line depreci 539631

                          The following investment project is submitted to you:

                          · project: extension of an industrial plant;

                          · purchase of equipment € 20m;

                          · setup costs €1.5m;

                          · useful life 8 years;

                          • e residual value 0;
                          • e increase in working capital € 2.5m

                          The project will result in an increase in EBITDA of € 3m per year, over the 8 years during which the new asset is used. The equipment is depreciated over 5 years. The corporate income tax rate is 40%:

                          (a) Draw up the cash flow schedule for the project, on the basis of straight-line

                          depreciation.

                          (b) Calculate each of the two cases:

                          · net present value at 10%;

                          · the internal rate of return of the project.

                          a company is planning to replace a machine with a new better performing one the figu 539632

                          A company is planning to replace a machine with a new, better performing one. The figures for the investment are as follows:

                          · Purchase of new machine:

                          • cost € 2m;

                          · useful life 5 years, residual value nil;

                          · linear depreciation over 5 years;

                          · savings on charges € 0.8m per year.

                          · Sale of second-hand machine:

                          · purchase cost € 1.5m (machine bought the previous year);

                          · linear depreciation over 5 years (residual value is nil);

                          · net book value today € 1.2m;

                          · potential sale price € 1.0m.

                          If the tax rate on profits and capital gains/losses is 40%, what is the ‘‘value” for the company of the new machine the company is planning to buy (this company’s required rate of return is 12%)?

                          Calculate the net present value and the internal rate of return of the planned

                          investment.

                          calculate the average accounting return on the project the payback ratio the net pre 539636

                          A large oil company has been invited to get involved in a project to build a parking facility in the centre of Frankfurt. The project includes a 450-car public parking lot, a 200-car garage and a petrol station covering 1,000m2. It will take 1 year to build, and a 30-year concession to run the facility will be granted by the municipality (after construction has been completed). Total capital expenditure will be € 8,400,000 and working capital will be nil. The annual income statement for the project after the construction looks like this:

                          Charges

                          Revenues

                          Operating

                          670,000

                          Parking places

                          1,680,000

                          Depreciation and amortisation

                          280,000

                          Garage

                          770,000

                          Income tax expense

                          1,000,000

                          Petrol station

                          800,000

                          Net profits

                          1,300,000

                          3,250,000

                          3,250,000

                          Calculate the average accounting return on the project, the payback ratio, the net present value at 10% and the internal rate of return. Is the average accounting return equal to the average of the annual returns on the project?

                          draw up the cash flow schedule for the contemplated investment 539637

                          A year ago, Robin plc invested in a machine to improve the manufacturing of one of its products. It has just discovered that a new machine has come onto the market which would improve performance more than the one it bought. That machine cost € 8,000 a year ago, and is depreciated on a straight-line basis over 8 years (the same period as its useful life after which it will be scrapped). If it were sold now, the company would get around € 5,000 (tax credit on the capital loss would be 40%).

                          The new machine costs € 11,000 and would be depreciated for € 10,500 on a straightline basis over its useful life, estimated at 7 years. It could be sold at the end of its useful life for € 500 which is what its book value would be.

                          The company is hoping to produce 100,000 units of its product annually for the next 7 years. With the equipment currently in use, the company’s per-unit cost price breaks down as follows: € 0.14 per unit in direct labour costs, € 0.10 for raw materials and € 0.14 in general costs. The new machine will enable the company to cut direct labour costs to € 0.12 per unit produced. The cost of raw materials will drop to € 0.09 per unit thanks to a reduction in waste. General costs will remain € 0.14 per unit. All other factors will remain unchanged – in particular, supplies, energy consumed and maintenance costs. Profits are taxed at 40%.

                          (a) Draw up the cash flow schedule for the contemplated investment.

                          (b) Calculate the payback ratio on this investment.

                          bad debts currently only account for 1 2 of debts which policy should the company in 539638

                          Pincer plc is hoping to increase sales by granting its customers longer payment

                          periods. Its annual sales currently stand at € 1m and it gives its customers an average of 30 days to pay.

                          (a) The company made the following assumptions when defining its customer credit policy.

                          Extension of payment period (days)

                          Increase in sales (€)

                          15

                          400,000

                          30

                          600,000

                          45

                          700,000

                          60

                          750,000

                          The sales price of a manufactured unit is € 4 and the cost price is € 3.2, including € 1 in fixed costs. What policy should the company introduce if it requires a 20% return (before tax) on its capital invested (its inventories are financed through supplier credit)?

                          (b) Pincer has also made the following forecasts for bad debts:

                          Extension of payment period (days)

                          Bad debts (sales, %)

                          15

                          2

                          30

                          4.5

                          45

                          7

                          60

                          12

                          Bad debts currently only account for 1.2% of debts. Which policy should the

                          company introduce?

                          how much did wpp pay for tempus the total price for 100 of the shares 539639

                          In the summer of 2001, the UK advertising group WPP got involved in a stock market battle with Havas Advertising for Tempus, a company listed on the London Stock Exchange. Havas Advertising offered shareholders 541 pence per share, before WPP increased its offer to 555 pence per share. WPP’s offer was accepted. Tempus’s share capital was divided into 77 million shares. Before the takeover bid, WPP held 17 million Tempus shares (22% of the company’s share capital) that it had bought up on the market over the years at an average price of 240 pence per share.

                          (a) How much did WPP pay for Tempus (the total price for 100% of the shares)?

                          (b) How much did Havas Advertising and WPP value the shareholders’ equity of

                          Tempus at?

                          (c) Do you think that the fact that WPP already held 22% of the share capital of

                          Tempus which it had acquired relatively cheaply gave it the option of paying

                          more for the rest of the shares?

                          the financial statements at the end of wolverine realty s first month of operations 539350

                          Missing amounts from financial statements

                          The financial statements at the end of Wolverine Realty’s first month of operations are as follows:

                          Wolverine Realty

                          Income Statement

                          For the Month Ended April 30, 2014

                          Fees earned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (a)

                          Expenses:

                          Wages expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $300,000

                          Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          100,000

                          Supplies expense . . . . . .

                          (b)

                          Utilities expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          20,000

                          Miscellaneous expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          25,000

                          Total expenses . . . . . . .

                          475,000

                          Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $275,000

                          Wolverine Realty

                          Retained Earnings Statement

                          For the Month Ended April 30, 2014

                          Retained earnings, April 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (c)

                          Net income for April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (d)

                          Less dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          125,000

                          Increase in retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (e)

                          Retained earnings, April 30, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (f )

                          Wolverine Realty

                          Balance Sheet

                          April 30, 2014

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $462,500

                          Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $100,000

                          Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          12,500

                          Stockholders’ Equity

                          Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          150,000

                          Capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $375,000

                          Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (g)

                          Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (h)

                          Total stockholders’ equity . . . . . . . .

                          (i)

                          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

                          $ (j)

                          Wolverine Realty

                          Statement of Cash Flows

                          For the Month Ended April 30, 2014

                          Cash flows from operating activities:

                          Cash received from customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (k)

                          Deduct cash payments for expenses and payments to creditors . . . . .

                          (387,500)

                          Net cash flows from operating activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $(l)

                          Cash flows used for investing activities:

                          Cash payments for acquisition of land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (m)

                          Cash flows from financing activities:

                          Cash received from issuing capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (n)

                          Deduct cash dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (o)

                          Net cash flows from financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (p)

                          Net increase (decrease) in cash and April 30, 2014, cash balance . . . . . . .

                          $(q)

                          Instructions

                          By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (q).

                          amy austin established an insurance agency on march 1 of the current year and comple 539351

                          Transactions

                          Amy Austin established an insurance agency on March 1 of the current year and completed the following transactions during March:

                          a. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $50,000 in exchange for capital stock.

                          b. Purchased supplies on account, $4,000.

                          c. Paid creditors on account, $2,300.

                          d. Received cash from fees earned on insurance commissions, $13,800.

                          e. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $5,000.

                          f. Paid automobile expenses for month, $1,150, and miscellaneous expenses, $300.

                          g. Paid office salaries, $2,500.

                          h. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $2,700; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $1,300.

                          i. Billed insurance companies for sales commissions earned, $12,500.

                          j. Paid dividends, $3,900.

                          Instructions

                          1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:

                          Assets

                          -Liabilities+

                          Stockholder’s Equity

                          Account

                          Accounts

                          Capital

                          Fees

                          Rent

                          Salaries

                          Auto

                          Misc.

                          cash+ Receivable + Supplies

                          Payable

                          +

                          Stock

                          Dividends

                          +

                          Earned

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          2. Briefly explain why the issuance of capital stock and revenues increased stockholders’ equity, while dividends and expenses decreased stockholders’ equity.

                          3. Determine the net income for March.

                          4. How much did March’s transactions increase or decrease retained earnings?

                          on april 1 2014 maria adams established custom realty maria completed the following 539352

                          Transactions; financial statements

                          On April 1, 2014, Maria Adams established Custom Realty. Maria completed the following transactions during the month of April:

                          1. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $24,000 in exchange for capital stock.

                          2. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $3,600.

                          3. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $1,350, and miscellaneous expenses, $600.

                          4. Purchased office supplies on account, $1,200.

                          5. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $19,800.

                          6. Paid creditor on account, $750.

                          7. Paid office salaries, $2,500.

                          8. Paid dividends, $3,500.

                          9. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $300; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $900.

                          Instructions

                          1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          +

                          Stockholder’s equity

                          Cash + Supplies

                          Accounts Payable

                          +

                          Capital Stock

                          Dividends

                          +

                          Sales Commissions

                          Rent Expense

                          Salaries Expense

                          Auto Expense

                          Supplies Expense

                          Misc. Expense

                          2. Prepare an income statement for April, a retained earnings statement for April, and a balance sheet as of April 30.

                          bev s dry cleaners is owned and operated by beverly zahn a building and equipment ar 539353

                          Transactions; financial statements

                          Bev’s Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Beverly Zahn. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets, liabilities, and capital stock of the business on November 1, 2014, are as follows: Cash, $39,000; Accounts Receivable, $80,000; Supplies, $11,000; Land, $50,000; Accounts Payable, $31,500; Capital Stock, $50,000. Business transactions during November are summarized as follows:

                          a. Beverly Zahn invested additional cash in exchange for capital stock with a deposit of $21,000 in the business bank account.

                          b. Purchased land adjacent to land currently owned by Bev’s Dry Cleaners to use in the future as a parking lot, paying cash of $35,000.

                          c. Paid rent for the month, $4,000.

                          d. Charged customers for dry cleaning revenue on account, $72,000.

                          e. Paid creditors on account, $20,000.

                          f. Purchased supplies on account, $8,000.

                          g. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning revenue, $38,000.

                          h. Received cash from customers on account, $77,000.

                          i. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for November (to be paid on December 10), $29,450.

                          j. Paid the following: wages expense, $24,000; truck expense, $2,100; utilities expense, $1,800; miscellaneous expense, $1,300.

                          k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $11,800; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $7,200.

                          l. Paid dividends, $5,000.

                          Instructions

                          1. Determine the amount of retained earnings as of November 1.

                          2. State the assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity as of November 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.

                          3. Prepare an income statement for November, a retained earnings statement for November, and a balance sheet as of November 30.

                          4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for November.

                          the financial statements at the end of atlas realty s first month of operations are 539354

                          Missing amounts from financial statements

                          The financial statements at the end of Atlas Realty’s first month of operations are shown below.

                          Atlas Realty

                          Income Statement

                          For the Month Ended May 31, 2014

                          Fees earned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $400,000

                          Expenses:

                          Wages expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (a)

                          Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          48,000

                          Supplies expense . . . . . .

                          17,600

                          Utilities expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          14,400

                          Miscellaneous expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          4,800

                          Total expenses . . . . . . .

                          288,000

                          Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $(b)

                          Atlas Realty

                          Retained Earnings Statement

                          For the Month Ended May 31, 2014

                          Retained earnings, May 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (c)

                          Net income for April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (d)

                          Less dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          ( e)

                          Increase in retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (f)

                          Retained earnings, May 31, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (g)

                          Atlas Realty

                          Balance Sheet

                          May 31, 2014

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $123,200

                          Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $48,000

                          Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          12,800

                          Stockholders’ Equity

                          Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (h)

                          Capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $(j)

                          Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ (i)

                          Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (k)

                          Total stockholders’ equity . . . . . . . .

                          (l)

                          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

                          $ (m)

                          Atlas Realty

                          Statement of Cash Flows

                          For the Month Ended May 31, 2014

                          Cash flows from operating activities:

                          Cash received from customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $(n)

                          Deduct cash payments for expenses and payments to creditors . . . . .

                          (252,800)

                          Net cash flows from operating activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $(o)

                          Cash flows used for investing activities:

                          Cash payments for acquisition of land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (120,000)

                          Cash flows from financing activities:

                          Cash received from issuing capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ 160,000

                          Deduct cash dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (64,000)

                          Net cash flows from financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          (p)

                          Net increase (decrease) in cash and May 31, 2014, cash balance . . . . . . .

                          $(q)

                          Instructions

                          By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (q).

                          Peyton Smith enjoys listening to all types of music and owns countless CDs. Over the years, Peyton has gained a local reputation for knowledge of music from classical to rap and the ability to put together sets of recordings that appeal to all ages.

                          During the last several months, Peyton served as a guest disc jockey on a local radio station. In addition, Peyton has entertained at several friends’ parties as the host deejay.

                          On June 1, 2014, Peyton established a corporation known as PS Music. Using an extensive collection of music MP3 files, Peyton will serve as a disc jockey on a fee basis for weddings, college parties, and other events. During June, Peyton entered into the following transactions:

                          June 1. Deposited $4,000 in a checking account in the name of PS Music in exchange for capital stock.

                          2. Received $3,500 from a local radio station for serving as the guest disc jockey for June.

                          2. Agreed to share office space with a local real estate agency, Pinnacle Realty. PS Music will pay one-fourth of the rent. In addition, PS Music agreed to pay a portion of the salary of the receptionist and to pay one-fourth of the utilities. Paid $800 for the rent of the office.

                          4. Purchased supplies from City Office Supply Co. for $350.Agreed to pay $100 within 10 days and the remainder by July 5, 2014.

                          6. Paid $500 to a local radio station to advertise the services of PS Music twice daily for two weeks.

                          8. Paid $675 to a local electronics store for renting digital recording equipment.

                          12. Paid $350 (music expense) to Cool Music for the use of its current music demos to make various music sets.

                          13. Paid City Office Supply Co. $100 on account.

                          16. Received $300 from a dentist for providing two music sets for the dentist to play for her patients.

                          22. Served as disc jockey for a wedding party. The father of the bride agreed to pay $1,000 in July.

                          25. Received $500 for serving as the disc jockey for a cancer charity ball hosted by the local hospital.

                          29. Paid $240 (music expense) to Galaxy Music for the use of its library of music demos.

                          30. Received $900 for serving as PS disc jockey for a local club’s monthly dance.

                          30. Paid Pinnacle Realty $400 for PS Music’s share of the receptionist’s salary for June.

                          30. Paid Pinnacle Realty $300 for PS Music’s share of the utilities for June.

                          30. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand is $170. Therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $180.

                          30. Paid for miscellaneous expenses, $415.

                          30. Paid $1,000 royalties (music expense) to National Music Clearing for use of various artists’ music during the month.

                          30. Paid dividends of $500.

                          Instructions

                          1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:

                          Assets

                          -Liabilities+

                          Stockholder’s Equity

                          Account

                          Accounts

                          Capital

                          Fees

                          Rent

                          Salaries

                          Auto

                          Misc.

                          cash+ Receivable + Supplies

                          Payable

                          +

                          Stock

                          Dividends

                          +

                          Earned

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          2. Prepare an income statement for PS Music for the month ended June 30, 2014.

                          3. Prepare a retained earnings statement for PS Music for the month ended June 30, 2014.

                          4. Prepare a balance sheet for PS Music as of June 30, 2014.

                          colleen fernandez president of rhino enterprises applied for a 175 000 loan from fir 539355

                          Ethics and professional conduct in business

                          Group Project

                          Colleen Fernandez, president of Rhino Enterprises, applied for a $175,000 loan from First Federal Bank. The bank requested financial statements from Rhino Enterprises as a basis for granting the loan. Colleen has told her accountant to provide the bank with a balance sheet. Colleen has decided to omit the other financial statements because there was a net loss during the past year. In groups of three or four, discuss the following questions:

                          1. Is Colleen behaving in a professional manner by omitting some of the financial statements?

                          2. a. What types of information about their businesses would owners be willing to provide bankers? What types of information would owners not be willing to provide?

                          b. What types of information about a business would bankers want before extending a loan?

                          c. What common interests are shared by bankers and business owners?

                          on january 1 2013 dr marcie cousins established health wise medical a medical practi 539356

                          Net income

                          On January 1, 2013, Dr. Marcie Cousins established Health-Wise Medical, a medical practice organized as a corporation. The following conversation occurred the following August between

                          Dr. Cousins and a former medical school classmate,

                          Dr. Avi Abu, at an American Medical Association convention in Seattle.

                          Dr. Abu: Marcie, good to see you again. Why didn’t you call when you were in Miami? We could have had dinner together.

                          Dr. Cousins: Actually, I never made it to Miami this year. My husband and kids went up to our Vail condo twice, but I got stuck in Jacksonville. I opened a new consulting practice this January and haven’t had any time for myself since.

                          Dr. Abu: I heard about it . . . Health . . . something . . . right?

                          Dr. Cousins: Yes, Health-Wise Medical. My husband chose the name.

                          Dr. Abu: I’ve thought about doing something like that. Are you making any money? I mean, is it worth your time?

                          Dr. Cousins: You wouldn’t believe it. I started by opening a bank account with $25,000, and my July bank statement has a balance of $80,000. Not bad for six months—all pure profit.

                          Dr. Abu: Maybe I’ll try it in Miami! Let’s have breakfast together tomorrow and you can fill me in on the details. Comment on Dr. Cousins’ statement that the difference between the opening bank balance ($25,000) and the July statement balance ($80,000) is pure profit.

                          lisa duncan a junior in college has been seeking ways to earn extra spending money a 539357

                          Transactions and financial statements

                          Lisa Duncan, a junior in college, has been seeking ways to earn extra spending money. As an active sports enthusiast, Lisa plays tennis regularly at the Phoenix Tennis Club, where her family has a membership. The president of the club recently approached Lisa with the proposal that she manage the club’s tennis courts. Lisa’s primary duty would be to supervise the operation of the club’s four indoor and 10 outdoor courts, including court reservations.

                          In return for her services, the club would pay Lisa $325 per week, plus Lisa could keep whatever she earned from lessons. The club and Lisa agreed to a one-month trial, after which both would consider an arrangement for the remaining two years of Lisa’s college career. On this basis, Lisa organized Serve-N-Volley. During September 2014, Lisa managed the tennis courts and entered into the following transactions:

                          a) Opened a business account by depositing $950.

                          b) Paid $300 for tennis supplies (practice tennis balls, etc.).

                          c) Paid $275 for the rental of video equipment to be used in offering lessons during September.

                          d) Arranged for the rental of two ball machines during September for $250. Paid $100 in advance, with the remaining $150 due October 1.

                          e) Received $1,750 for lessons given during September.

                          f) Received $600 in fees from the use of the ball machines during September.

                          g) Paid $800 for salaries of part-time employees who answered the telephone and took reservations while Lisa was giving lessons.

                          h) Paid $290 for miscellaneous expenses.

                          i) Received $1,300 from the club for managing the tennis courts during September.

                          j) Determined that the cost of supplies on hand at the end of the month totaled $180; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $120.

                          k) Withdrew $400 for personal use on September 30.

                          As a friend and accounting student, you have been asked by Lisa to aid her in assessing the venture.

                          1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          +

                          Owner’s Equity

                          Cash + Supplies

                          =

                          Accounts Payable

                          +

                          Lisa Duncan, Capital

                          Lisa Duncan, Drawing

                          +

                          Fees Earned

                          Salaries Expense

                          Rent Expense

                          Supplies Expense

                          Misc. Expense

                          1. Prepare an income statement for September.

                          2. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for September. The statement of owner’s equity for a proprietorship is similar to the retained earnings statement for a corporation. The balance of the owner’s capital as of the beginning of the period is listed first. Any investments made by the owner during the period are then listed and the net income (net loss) is added (subtracted) to determine a subtotal. From this subtotal, the owner’s withdrawals are subtracted to determine the increase (decrease) in owner’s equity for the period. This increase ( decrease) is then added to (subtracted from) the beginning

                          3. Owner’s equity to determine the owner’s equity as of the end of the period.

                          4. Prepare a balance sheet as of September 30.

                          5.

                          a. Assume that Lisa Duncan could earn $10 per hour working 30 hours a week as a waitress. Evaluate which of the two alternatives, working as a waitress or operating Serve-N-Volley, would provide Lisa with the most income per month.

                          b. Discuss any other factors that you believe Lisa should consider before discussing a long-term arrangement with the Phoenix Tennis Club.

                          by satisfying certain specific requirements accountants may become certified as publ 539358

                          Certification requirements for accountants

                          By satisfying certain specific requirements, accountants may become certified as public accountants (CPAs), management accountants (CMAs), or internal auditors (CIAs). Find the certification requirements for one of these accounting groups by accessing the appropriate Internet site listed below.

                          Site

                          Description

                          Accounting Institute For Success

                          This site lists the address and/or Internet link for each state’s board of accountancy. Find your state’s requirements.

                          http://www.imanet.org

                          This site lists the requirements for becoming a CMA.

                          http://www.theiia.org

                          This site lists the requirements for becoming a CIA.

                          amazon com an internet retailer was incorporated and began operation in the mid 90s 539359

                          Cash flows

                          Amazon.com, an Internet retailer, was incorporated and began operation in the mid-90s. On the statement of cash flows, would you expect Amazon.com’s net cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities to be positive or negative for its first three years of operations? Use the following format for your answers, and briefly explain your logic.

                          First Year

                          Second Year

                          Third Year

                          Net cash flows from operating activities

                          negative

                          Net cash flows from investing activities

                          Net cash flows from financing activities

                          the now defunct enron corporation once headquartered in houston texas provided produ 539360

                          Financial analysis

                          The now defunct Enron Corporation, once headquartered in Houston, Texas, provided products and services for natural gas, electricity, and communications to wholesale and retail customers. Enron’s operations were conducted through a variety of subsidiaries and affiliates that involved transporting gas through pipelines, transmitting electricity, and managing energy commodities. The following data were taken from Enron’s financial statements:

                          In millions

                          Total revenues

                          $100,789

                          Total costs and expenses

                          98,836

                          Operating income

                          1,953

                          Net income

                          979

                          Total assets

                          65,503

                          Total liabilities

                          54,033

                          Total stockholders’ equity

                          11,470

                          Net cash flows from operating activities

                          4,779

                          Net cash flows from investing activities

                          (4,264)

                          Net cash flows from financing activities

                          571

                          Net increase in cash

                          1,086

                          The market price of Enron’s stock was approximately $83 per share when the prior financial statement data were taken. Before it went bankrupt, Enron’s stock sold for $0.22 per share.

                          Review the preceding financial statement data and search the Internet for articles on Enron Corporation. Briefly explain why Enron’s stock dropped so dramatically.

                          two income statements for fuller company are shown on the following page 539382

                          Horizontal analysis

                          Two income statements for Fuller Company are shown on the following page

                          Fuller Company

                          Income Statements

                          For Years Ended December 31

                          2014

                          2013

                          Fees earned

                          $680,000

                          $850,000

                          Operating expenses

                          541,875

                          637,500

                          Net income

                          $138,125

                          $212,500

                          Prepare a horizontal analysis of Fuller Company’s income statements.

                          two income statements for paragon company are shown below 539383

                          Horizontal analysis

                          Two income statements for Paragon Company are shown below.

                          Paragon Company

                          Income Statements

                          For Years Ended December 31

                          2014

                          2013

                          Fees earned

                          $1,416,000

                          $1,200,000

                          Operating expenses

                          1,044,000

                          900,000

                          Net income

                          $372,000

                          $300,000

                          Prepare a horizontal analysis of Paragon Company’s income statements.

                          inners cape interiors is owned and operated by gina kissel an interior decorator in 539385

                          Chart of accounts

                          Inners cape Interiors is owned and operated by Gina Kissel, an interior decorator. In the ledger of Inners cape Interiors, the first digit of the account number indicates its major account classification (1—assets, 2—liabilities, 3—stockholders’ equity, 4—revenues, 5—expenses). The second digit of the account number indicates the specific account within each of the preceding major account classifications. Match each account number with its most likely account in the list below. The account numbers are 11, 12, 13, 21, 31, 32, 33, 41, 51, 52, and 53.

                          Accounts Payable

                          Land

                          Accounts Receivable

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          Capital Stock

                          Retained Earnings

                          Cash

                          Supplies Expense

                          Dividends

                          Wages Expense

                          Fees Earned

                          leadco school is a newly organized business that teaches people how to inspire and i 539386

                          Chart of accounts

                          LeadCo School is a newly organized business that teaches people how to inspire and influence others. The list of accounts to be opened in the general ledger is as follows:

                          Accounts Payable

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          Accounts Receivable

                          Rent Expense

                          Capital Stock

                          Retained Earnings

                          Cash

                          Supplies

                          Dividends

                          Supplies Expense

                          Equipment

                          Unearned Rent

                          Fees Earned

                          Wages Expense

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          List the accounts in the order in which they should appear in the ledger of LeadCo School and assign account numbers. Each account number is to have two digits: the first digit is to indicate the major classification (1 for assets, etc.), and the second digit is to identify the specific account within each major classification (11 for Cash, etc.).

                          the following table summarizes the rules of debit and credit for each of the items a 539387

                          Rules of debit and credit

                          The following table summarizes the rules of debit and credit. For each of the items (a) through (l), indicate whether the proper answer is a debit or a credit.

                          Increase

                          Decrease

                          Normal Balance

                          Balance sheet accounts:

                          Asset

                          (a)

                          (b)

                          Debit

                          Liability

                          (c)

                          Debit

                          (d)

                          Stockholders’

                          Capital Stock

                          Credit

                          (e)

                          (f )

                          Retained Earnings

                          (g)

                          (h)

                          Credit

                          Dividends

                          Debit

                          Credit

                          (i)

                          Income statement

                          Revenue

                          (j)

                          (k)

                          Credit

                          Expense

                          (l)

                          Credit

                          Debit

                          on may 22 2014 hillcrest co purchased 6 180 of supplies on account in hillcrest co s 539391

                          Journalizing and posting

                          On May 22, 2014, Hillcrest Co. purchased $6,180 of supplies on account. In Hillcrest Co.’s chart of accounts, the supplies account is No. 15, and the accounts payable account is No. 21.

                          a. Journalize the May 22, 2014, transaction on page 19 of Hillcrest Co.’s two-column journal. Include an explanation of the entry.

                          b. Prepare a four-column account for Supplies. Enter a debit balance of $1,500 as of May 1, 2014. Place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column.

                          c. Prepare a four-column account for Accounts Payable. Enter a credit balance of $16,750 as of May 1, 2014. Place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column.

                          d. Post the May 22, 2014, transaction to the accounts.

                          e. Do the rules of debit and credit apply to all companies?

                          the following selected transactions were completed during january of the current yea 539392

                          Transactions and T accounts

                          The following selected transactions were completed during January of the current year:

                          1. Billed customers for fees earned, $48,600.

                          2. Purchased supplies on account, $1,975.

                          3. Received cash from customers on account, $31,400.

                          4. Paid creditors on account, $1,350.

                          a. Journalize the above transactions in a two-column journal, using the appropriate number to identify the transactions. Journal entry explanations may be omitted.

                          b. Post the entries prepared in (a) to the following T accounts: Cash, Supplies, Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Fees Earned. To the left of each amount posted in the accounts, place the appropriate number to identify the transactions.

                          c. Assume that the unadjusted trial balance on January 31 shows a credit balance for Accounts Receivable. Does this credit balance mean an error has occurred?

                          grand canyon tours co is a travel agency the nine transactions recorded by grand can 539396

                          Identifying transactions

                          Grand Canyon Tours Co. is a travel agency. The nine transactions recorded by Grand Canyon Tours during April 2014, its first month of operations, are indicated in the following T accounts:

                          Cash

                          Equipment

                          Dividends

                          (1)

                          75,000

                          (2)

                          4,000

                          (3)

                          25,000

                          (9)

                          5,000

                          (7)

                          11,000

                          (3)

                          3,000

                          (4)

                          2,700

                          (6)

                          9,000

                          (9)

                          5,000

                          Accounts Receivable

                          Accounts Payable

                          Service Revenue

                          (5)

                          19,500

                          (7)

                          11,000

                          (6)

                          9,000

                          (3)

                          22,000

                          (5)

                          19,500

                          Supplies

                          Capital Stock

                          Operating Expenses

                          (2)

                          4,000

                          (8)

                          2,000

                          (1)

                          75,000

                          (4)

                          2,700

                          (8)

                          2,000

                          Indicate for each debit and each credit: (a) whether an asset, liability, stockholders’ equity, dividends, revenue, or expense account was affected and (b) whether the account was increased (+) or decreased (–). Present your answers in the following form, with transaction (1) given as an example:

                          Account Debited

                          Account Credited

                          Transaction

                          Type

                          Effect

                          Type

                          Effect

                          (1)

                          assets

                          +

                          Stockholder’s equity

                          +

                          the accounts in the ledger of leaf co as of december 31 2014 are listed in alphabeti 539397

                          Trial balance

                          The accounts in the ledger of Leaf Co. as of December 31, 2014, are listed in alphabetical order as follows. All accounts have normal balances. The balance of the cash account has been intentionally omitted.

                          Accounts Payable

                          $ 23,500

                          Notes Payable

                          $ 50,000

                          Accounts Receivable

                          38,100

                          Prepaid Insurance

                          6,400

                          Capital Stock

                          8,000

                          Rent Expense

                          36,000

                          Cash

                          ?

                          Retained Earnings

                          42,000

                          Dividends

                          16,000

                          Supplies

                          3,200

                          Fees Earned

                          538,000

                          Supplies Expense

                          9,000

                          Insurance Expense

                          6,000

                          Unearned Rent

                          13,500

                          Land

                          40,000

                          Utilities Expense

                          18,000

                          Miscellaneous Expense

                          12,000

                          Wages Expense

                          476,800

                          Prepare an unadjusted trial balance, listing the accounts in their normal order and inserting the missing figure for cash.

                          a summary of cash flows for sunset travel service for the year ended april 30 2014 i 539317

                          Statement of cash flows

                          A summary of cash flows for Sunset Travel Service for the year ended April 30, 2014, is shown below.

                          Cash receipts:

                          Cash received from customers

                          $1,500,000

                          Cash received from issuing capital stock

                          75,000

                          Cash payments:

                          Cash paid for operating expenses

                          1,215,000

                          Cash paid for land

                          240,000

                          Cash paid for dividends

                          66,000

                          The cash balance as of May 1, 2013, was $220,000. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Sunset Travel Service for the year ended April 30, 2014.

                          a summary of cash flows for sentinel travel service for the year ended august 31 201 539318

                          Statement of cash flows

                          A summary of cash flows for Sentinel Travel Service for the year ended August 31, 2014, is shown below.

                          Cash receipts:

                          Cash received from customers

                          $734,000

                          Cash received from issuing

                          36,000

                          Cash payments:

                          Cash paid for operating expenses

                          745,600

                          Cash paid for land

                          50,000

                          Cash paid for dividends

                          18,000

                          Prepare a statement of cash flows for Sentinel Travel Service for the year ended August 31, 2014.

                          the following is a list of well known companies 539321

                          Types of businesses

                          The following is a list of well-known companies.

                          1. Alcoa Inc.

                          2. Boeing

                          3. Caterpillar

                          4. Citigroup Inc.

                          5. CVS

                          6. Dow Chemical Company

                          7. eBay Inc.

                          8. FedEx

                          9. Ford Motor Company

                          10. Gap Inc.

                          11. H&R Block

                          12. Hilton Hospitality,

                          13. Procter & Gamble

                          14. SunTrust

                          15. Walmart Stores, Inc.

                          a. Indicate whether each of these companies is primarily a service, merchandise, or manufacturing business. If you are unfamiliar with the company, use the Internet to locate the company’s home page or use the finance Web site of Yahoo.

                          b. For which of the preceding companies is the accounting equation relevant?

                          ozark sports sells hunting and fishing equipment and provides guided hunting and fis 539323

                          Business entity concept

                          Ozark Sports sells hunting and fishing equipment and provides guided hunting and fishing trips. Ozark Sports is owned and operated by Eric Griffith, a well-known sports enthusiast and hunter. Eric’s wife, Linda, owns and operates Lake Boutique, a women’s clothing store. Eric and Linda have established a trust fund to finance their children’s college education. The trust fund is maintained by Missouri State Bank in the name of the children, Mark and Steffy.

                          a. For each of the following transactions, identify which of the entities listed should record the transaction in its records.

                          Entities

                          L

                          Lake Boutique

                          M

                          Missouri State Bank

                          O

                          Ozark Sports

                          X

                          None of the above

                          1. Linda authorized the trust fund to purchase mutual fund shares.

                          2. Linda purchased two dozen spring dresses from a St. Louis designer for a special spring sale.

                          3. Eric paid a breeder’s fee for an English springer spaniel to be used as a hunting guide dog.

                          4. Linda deposited a $2,000 personal check in the trust fund at Missouri State Bank.

                          5. Eric paid a local doctor for his annual physical, which was required by the workmen’s compensation insurance policy carried by Ozark Sports.

                          6. Eric received a cash advance from customers for a guided hunting trip.

                          7. Linda paid her dues to the YWCA.

                          8. Linda donated several dresses from inventory for a local charity auction for the benefit of a women’s abuse shelter.

                          9. Eric paid for dinner and a movie to celebrate their twelfth wedding anniversary.

                          10. Eric paid for an advertisement in a hunters’ magazine.

                          b. What is a business transaction?

                          mega concepts is a motivational consulting business at the end of its accounting per 539326

                          Accounting equation

                          Mega Concepts is a motivational consulting business. At the end of its accounting period, December 31, 2013, Mega Concepts has assets of $1,250,000 and liabilities of $475,000. Using the accounting equation and considering each case independently, determine the following amounts:

                          a. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2013.

                          b. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2014, assuming that assets increased by $225,000 and liabilities increased by $110,000 during 2014.

                          c. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2014, assuming that assets decreased by $300,000 and liabilities increased by $90,000 during 2014.

                          d. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2014, assuming that assets increased by $550,000 and liabilities decreased by $135,000 during 2014.

                          e. Net income (or net loss) during 2014, assuming that as of December 31, 2014, assets were $1,500,000, liabilities were $375,000, and no additional capital stock was issued or dividends paid.

                          the following selected transactions were completed by reuben s delivery service duri 539331

                          Transactions

                          The following selected transactions were completed by Reuben’s Delivery Service during October:

                          1. Received cash from owner in exchange for capital stock, $20,000.

                          2. Purchased supplies for cash, $900.

                          3. Paid rent for October, $3,000.

                          4. Paid advertising expense, $2,500.

                          5. Received cash for providing delivery services, $23,100.

                          6. Billed customers for delivery services on account, $41,750.

                          7. Paid creditors on account, $4,500.

                          8. Received cash from customers on account, $36,200.

                          9. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $175 and $725 of supplies had been used during the month.

                          10. Paid dividends, $1,000.

                          Indicate the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation by listing the numbers identifying the transactions, (1) through (10), in a column, and inserting at the right of each number the appropriate letter from the following list:

                          a. Increase in an asset, decrease in another asset.

                          b. Increase in an asset, increase in a liability.

                          c. Increase in an asset, increase in stockholders’ equity.

                          d. Decrease in an asset, decrease in a liability.

                          e. Decrease in an asset, decrease in stockholders’ equity.

                          angela howard operates her own catering service summary financial data for july are 539332

                          Nature of transactions

                          Angela Howard operates her own catering service. Summary financial data for July are presented in equation form as follows. Each line designated by a number indicates the effect of a transaction on the equation. Each increase and decrease in stockholders’ equity, except transaction (5), affects net income.

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          +

                          Stockholders’ Equity

                          Cash

                          + Supplies +

                          Land

                          Accounts Payable

                          +

                          Capital Stock

                          +

                          Retained Earning

                          +

                          Fees Earned

                          Expenses

                          Bal.

                          30,000

                          2,000

                          80,000

                          12,000

                          30,000

                          70,000

                          1.

                          +33,000

                          +33,000

                          2.

                          –20,000

                          +20,000

                          3.

                          –24,000

                          -24,000

                          4.

                          +1,000

                          +1,000

                          5.

                          –3,000

                          6.

                          –6,000

                          –1,800

                          -6,000

                          7.

                          -18,00

                          Bal.

                          10,000

                          1,200

                          100,000

                          7,000

                          30,000

                          70,000

                          33,000

                          -25,800

                          a. Describe each transaction.

                          b. What is the amount of the net decrease in cash during the month?

                          c. What is the amount of the net increase in stockholders’ equity during the month?

                          d. What is the amount of the net income for the month?

                          e. How much of the net income for the month was retained in the business?

                          net income and stockholders equity for four businesses 539334

                          Net income and stockholders’ equity for four businesses

                          Four different corporations, Juliet, Kilo, Lima, and Mike, show the same balance sheet data at the beginning and end of a year. These data, exclusive of the amount of stockholders’ equity, are summarized as follows:

                          Total Assets

                          Total Liabilities

                          Beginning of the year

                          $ 600,000

                          $150,000

                          End of the year

                          1,125,000

                          500,000

                          On the basis of the above data and the following additional information for the year, determine the net income (or loss) of each company for the year. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during the year.)

                          Juliet: No additional capital stock was issued, and no dividends were paid.

                          Kilo: No additional capital stock was issued, but dividends of $55,000 were paid.

                          Lima: Additional capital stock of $100,000 was issued, but no dividends were paid.

                          Mike: Additional capital stock of $100,000 was issued, and dividends of $55,000 were paid.

                          one item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income s 539338

                          Missing amounts from balance sheet and income statement data

                          One item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for the following four different corporations:

                          Freeman

                          Heyward

                          Jones

                          Ramirez

                          Beginning of the year:

                          Assets

                          $ 900,000

                          $490,000

                          $115,000

                          (d)

                          Liabilities

                          360,000

                          260,000

                          81,000

                          $120,000

                          End of the year:

                          Assets

                          1,260,000

                          675,000

                          100,000

                          270,000

                          Liabilities

                          330,000

                          220,000

                          80,000

                          136,000

                          During the year:

                          Additional issuance of

                          (a)

                          150,000

                          10,000

                          55,000

                          Dividends

                          75,000

                          32,000

                          (c)

                          39,000

                          Revenue

                          570,000

                          (b)

                          115,000

                          115,000

                          Expenses

                          240,000

                          128,000

                          122,500

                          128,000

                          Determine the missing amounts, identifying them by letter. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during the year.)

                          financial information related to ebony interiors for february and march 2014 is as f 539339

                          Balance sheets, net income

                          Financial information related to Ebony Interiors for February and March 2014 is as follows:

                          February 28, 2014

                          March 31, 2014

                          Accounts payable

                          $310,000

                          $400,000

                          Accounts receivable

                          800,000

                          960,000

                          Capital stock

                          200,000

                          200,000

                          Cash

                          320,000

                          380,000

                          Retained earnings

                          ?

                          ?

                          Supplies

                          30,000

                          35,000

                          a. Prepare balance sheets for Ebony Interiors as of February 28 and March 31, 2014.

                          b. Determine the amount of net income for March, assuming that no additional capital stock was issued and no dividends were paid during the month.

                          c. Determine the amount of net income for March, assuming that no additional capital stock was issued but dividends of $50,000 were paid during the month.

                          each of the following items is shown in the financial statements of exxon mobil corp 539340

                          Financial statements

                          Each of the following items is shown in the financial statements of Exxon Mobil Corporation.

                          1. Accounts payable

                          2. Cash equivalents

                          3. Crude oil inventory

                          4. Equipment

                          5. Exploration expenses

                          6. Income taxes payable

                          7. Investments

                          8. Long-term debt

                          9. Marketable securities

                          10. Notes and loans payable

                          11. Notes receivable

                          12. Operating expenses

                          13. Prepaid taxes

                          14. Sales

                          15. Selling expenses

                          a. Identify the financial statement (balance sheet or income statement) in which each item would appear.

                          b. Can an item appear on more than one financial statement?

                          c. Is the accounting equation relevant for Exxon Mobil Corporation?

                          a summary of cash flows for ethos consulting group for the year ended may 31 2014 is 539342

                          Statement of cash flows

                          A summary of cash flows for Ethos Consulting Group for the year ended May 31, 2014, is shown below.

                          Cash receipts:

                          Cash received from customers

                          $637,500

                          Cash received from issuing capital stock

                          62,500

                          Cash payments:

                          Cash paid for operating expenses

                          475,000

                          Cash paid for land

                          90,000

                          Cash paid for dividends

                          17,500

                          The cash balance as of June 1, 2013, was $58,000.

                          Prepare a statement of cash flows for Ethos Consulting Group for the year ended May 31, 2014.

                          we sell realty organized august 1 2014 is owned and operated by omar farah how many 539343

                          Financial statements

                          We-Sell Realty, organized August 1, 2014, is owned and operated by Omar Farah. How many errors can you find in the following statements for We-Sell Realty, prepared after its first month of operations?

                          We-Sell Realty

                          Income Statement

                          August 31, 2014

                          Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          Expenses:

                          $140,000

                          Office salaries expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $87,000

                          Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          18,000

                          Automobile expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          7,500

                          Miscellaneous expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          2,200

                          Supplies expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          1,150

                          Total expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          115,850

                          Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ 25,000

                          Omar Farah

                          Retained Earnings Statement

                          August 31, 2013

                          Retained earnings, August 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $0

                          Less dividends during August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

                          10,000

                          $(10,000)

                          Additional issuance of capital stock on August 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? ?

                          15,000

                          $5,000

                          Net income for August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          25,000

                          Retained earnings, August 31, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $30,000

                          Balance Sheet

                          For the Month Ended August 31, 2014

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $ 8,900

                          Accounts receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $38,600

                          Accounts payable

                          22,350

                          Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          4,000

                          Stockholders’ Equity

                          Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          30,000

                          Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

                          $31,250

                          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity . .

                          $72,600

                          the home depot inc is the world s largest home improvement retailer and one of the l 539344

                          Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity

                          The Home Depot, Inc., is the world’s largest home improvement retailer and one of the largest retailers in the United States based on net sales volume. The Home Depot operates over 2,200 Home Depot® stores that sell a wide assortment of building materials and home improvement and lawn and garden products.

                          The Home Depot recently reported the following balance sheet data (in millions):

                          Year 2

                          Year 1

                          Total assets

                          $40,125

                          $40,877

                          Total stockholders’ equity

                          18,889

                          19,393

                          a. Determine the total liabilities at the end of Years 2 and 1.

                          b. Determine the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity for Year 2 and Year 1.Round to two decimal places.

                          c. What conclusions regarding the margin of protection to the creditors can you draw from (b)?

                          lowe s companies inc a major competitor of the home depot in the home improvement bu 539345

                          Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity

                          Lowe’s Companies Inc., a major competitor of The Home Depot in the home improvement business, operates over 1,700 stores. Lowe’s recently reported the following balance sheet data (in millions):

                          Year 2

                          Year 1

                          Total assets

                          $33,699

                          $33,005

                          Total liabilities

                          15,587

                          13,936

                          a. Determine the total stockholders’ equity as of at the end of Years 2 and 1.

                          b. Determine the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to two decimal places.

                          c. What conclusions regarding the risk to the creditors can you draw from (b)?

                          d. Using the balance sheet data for The Home Depot in Exercise 1-26, how does the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity of Lowe’s compare to that of The Home Depot?

                          on june 1 of the current year bret eisen established a business to manage rental pro 539346

                          Transactions

                          On June 1 of the current year, Bret Eisen established a business to manage rental property. He completed the following transactions during June:

                          a. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $30,000 in exchange for capital stock.

                          b. Purchased office supplies on account, $1,200.

                          c. Received cash from fees earned for managing rental property, $7,200.

                          d. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $3,000.

                          e. Paid creditors on account, $750.

                          f. Billed customers for fees earned for managing rental property, $5,000.

                          g. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charges) for month, $600, and miscellaneous expenses, $300.

                          h. Paid office salaries, $1,800.

                          i. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $700; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $500.

                          j. Paid dividends $1,500.

                          Instructions

                          1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:

                          Assets

                          -Liabilities+

                          Stockholder’s Equity

                          Account

                          Accounts

                          Capital

                          Fees

                          Rent

                          Salaries

                          Auto

                          Misc.

                          cash+ Receivable + Supplies

                          Payable

                          +

                          Stock

                          Dividends

                          +

                          Earned

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          Expense

                          2. Briefly explain why issuance of capital stock and revenues increased stockholders’ equity, while dividends and expenses decreased stockholders’ equity.

                          3. Determine the net income for June.

                          4. How much did June’s transactions increase or decrease retained earnings?

                          following are the amounts of the assets and liabilities of oriental travel agency at 539347

                          Financial statements

                          Following are the amounts of the assets and liabilities of Oriental Travel Agency at December 31, 2014, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year. The retained earnings was $400,000 on January 1, 2014, the beginning of the current year. During the current year, dividends of $25,000 were paid.

                          Accounts payable

                          $ 115,000

                          Miscellaneous expense

                          $ 7,000

                          Accounts receivable

                          370,000

                          Rent expense

                          150,000

                          Capital stock

                          50,000

                          Supplies

                          20,000

                          Cash

                          210,000

                          Supplies expense

                          14,000

                          Fees earned

                          1,100,000

                          Utilities expense

                          79,000

                          Land

                          300,000

                          Wages expense

                          490,000

                          Instructions

                          1. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31, 2014.

                          2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the current year ended December 31, 2014.

                          3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2014.

                          4. What item appears on both the retained earnings statement and the balance sheet?

                          on october 1 2014 kevin bosley established sunrise realty kevin completed the follow 539348

                          Transactions; financial statements

                          On October 1, 2014, Kevin Bosley established Sunrise Realty. Kevin completed the following transactions during the month of October:

                          1. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $18,000 in exchange for capital stock.

                          2. Purchased office supplies on account, $3,200.

                          3. Paid creditor on account, $1,800.

                          4. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $36,750.

                          5. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000.

                          6. Paid dividends, $3,000.

                          7. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $2,500, and miscellaneous expenses, $1,200.

                          8. Paid office salaries, $3,750.

                          9. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $1,550; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $1,650.

                          Instructions

                          1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:

                          Assets

                          Liabilities

                          +

                          Stockholder’s equity

                          Cash + Supplies

                          Accounts Payable

                          +

                          Capital Stock

                          Dividends

                          +

                          Sales Commissions

                          Rent Expense

                          Salaries Expense

                          Auto Expense

                          Supplies Expense

                          Misc. Expense

                          2. Prepare an income statement for October, a retained earnings statement for October, and a balance sheet as of October 31.

                          d lite dry cleaners is owned and operated by joel palk a building and equipment are 539349

                          Transactions; financial statements

                          D’Lite Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Joel Palk. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets, liabilities, and capital stock of the business on July 1, 2014, are as follows: Cash, $45,000; Accounts Receivable, $93,000; Supplies, $7,000; Land, $75,000; Accounts Payable, $40,000; Capital Stock, $60,000. Business transactions during July are summarized as follows:

                          a. Joel Palk invested additional cash in exchange for capital stock with a deposit of $35,000 in the business bank account.

                          b. Paid $50,000 for the purchase of land adjacent to land currently owned by D’Lite Dry Cleaners as a future building site.

                          c. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning revenue, $32,125.

                          d. Paid rent for the month, $6,000.

                          e. Purchased supplies on account, $2,500.

                          f. Paid creditors on account, $22,800.

                          g. Charged customers for dry cleaning revenue on account, $84,750.

                          h. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for July (to be paid on August 10), $29,500.

                          i. Paid the following: wages expense, $7,500; truck expense, $2,500; utilities expense, $1,300; miscellaneous expense, $2,700.

                          j. Received cash from customers on account, $88,000.

                          k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $5,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $3,600.

                          l. Paid dividends, $12,000.

                          Instructions

                          1. Determine the amount of retained earnings as of July 1 of the current year.

                          2. State the assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity as of July 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.

                          3. Prepare an income statement for July, a retained earnings statement for July, and a balance sheet as of July 31.

                          4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for July.

                          byp18 2 the condensed income statement for the sally and terry partnership for 2012 539066

                          BYP18-2 The condensed income statement for the Sally and Terry partnership for 2012 is as follows.

                          SALLY AND TERRY COMPANY
                          Income Statement
                          For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

                          Sales (200,000 units)

                          $1,200,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          800,000

                          Gross profit

                          400,000

                          Operating expenses

                          Selling

                          $280,000

                          Administrative

                          160,000

                          440,000

                          A cost behavior analysis indicates that 75% of the cost of goods sold are variable, 50% of the selling expenses are variable, and 25% of the administrative expenses are variable.

                          Instructions

                          (Round to nearest unit, dollar, and percentage, where necessary. Use the CVP income statement format in computing profits.)

                          (a) Compute the break-even point in total sales dollars and in units for 2012.

                          (b) Sally has proposed a plan to get the partnership “out of the red” and improve its profitability. She feels that the quality of the product could be substantially improved by spending $0.25 more per unit on better raw materials. The selling price per unit could be increased to only $6.25 because of competitive pressures. Sally estimates that sales volume will increase by 30%. What effect would Sally’s plan have on the profits and the break-even point in dollars of the partnership? (Round the contribution margin ratio to two decimal places.)

                          (c) Terry was a marketing major in college. He believes that sales volume can be increased only by intensive advertising and promotional campaigns. He therefore proposed the following plan as an alternative to Sally’s: (1) Increase variable selling expenses to $0.79 per unit, (2) lower the selling price per unit by $0.30, and (3) increase fixed selling expenses by $35,000. Terry quoted an old marketing research report that said that sales volume would increase by 60% if these changes were made. What effect would Terry’s plan have on the profits and the break-even point in dollars of the partnership?

                          (d) Which plan should be accepted? Explain your answer.

                          byp18 3 the coca cola company hardly needs an introduction 539067

                          BYP18-3 The Coca-Cola Company hardly needs an introduction. A line taken from the cover of a recent annual report says it all: If you measured time in servings of Coca-Cola, “a billion Coca-Cola’s ago was yesterday morning.” On average, every U.S. citizen drinks 363 8-ounce servings of Coca-Cola products each year. Coca-Cola’s primary line of business is the making and selling of syrup to bottlers. These bottlers then sell the finished bottles and cans of Coca-Cola to the consumer. In the annual report of Coca-Cola, the information shown below was provided.

                          THE COCA-COLA COMPANY

                          Management Discussion

                          Our gross margin declined to 61 percent this year from 62 percent in the prior year, primarily due to costs for materials such as sweeteners and packaging. The increases [in selling expenses] in the last two years were primarily due to higher marketing expenditures in support of our Company’s volume growth. We measure our sales volume in two ways: (1) gallon shipments of concentrates and syrups and (2) unit cases of finished product (bottles and cans of Coke sold by bottlers).

                          Instructions

                          Answer the following questions.

                          (a) Are sweeteners and packaging a variable cost or a fixed cost? What is the impact on the contribution margin of an increase in the per unit cost of sweeteners or packaging? What are the implications for profitability?

                          (b) In your opinion, are marketing expenditures a fixed cost, variable cost, or mixed cost to The Coca-Cola Company? Give justification for your answer.

                          (c) Which of the two measures cited for measuring volume represents the activity index as defined in this chapter? Why might Coca-Cola use two different measures?

                          byp18 4 ganong bros ltd located in st stephen new brunswick is canada s oldest 539068

                          BYP18-4 Ganong Bros. Ltd., located in St. Stephen, New Brunswick, is Canada’s oldest independent candy company. Its products are distributed worldwide. In 1885, Ganong invented the popular “chicken bone,” a cinnamon flavored, pink, hard candy jacket over a chocolate center. The home page of Ganong, listed below, includes information about the company and its products.

                          Address: www.ganong.com/retail/chicken_bones.html , or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel

                          Instructions

                          Read the description of “chicken bones” and answer the following.

                          (a) Describe the steps in making “chicken bones.”

                          (b) Identify at least two variable and two fixed costs that are likely to affect the production of “chicken bones.”

                          byp18 6 jimmy hester is an accountant for advanced company early this year jimmy mad 539070

                          BYP18-6 Jimmy Hester is an accountant for Advanced Company. Early this year, Jimmy made a highly favorable projection of sales and profits over the next 3 years for Advanced Company’s hot-selling computer PLEX. As a result of the projections Jimmy presented to senior management, the company decided to expand production in this area. This decision led to dislocations of some plant personnel who were reassigned to one of the company’s newer plants in another state. However, no one was fired, and in fact the company expanded its work force slightly. Unfortunately, Jimmy rechecked his computations on the projections a few months later and found that he had made an error that would have reduced his projections substantially. Luckily, sales of PLEX have exceeded projections so far, and management is satisfied with its decision. Jimmy, however, is not sure what to do. Should he confess his honest mistake and jeopardize his possible promotion? He suspects that no one will catch the error because sales of PLEX have exceeded his projections, and it appears that profits will materialize close to his projections.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

                          (b) Identify the ethical issues involved in this situation.

                          (c) What are the possible alternative actions for Jimmy? What would you do in Jimmy’s position?

                          byp18 7 the purchase of a new car is one of your biggest personal expenditures 539071

                          BYP18-7 The purchase of a new car is one of your biggest personal expenditures. It is important that you carefully analyze your options. Suppose that you are considering the purchase of a hybrid vehicle. Let’s assume the following facts: The hybrid will initially cost an additional $3,000 above the cost of a traditional vehicle. The hybrid will get 40 miles per gallon of gas, and the traditional car will get 30 miles per gallon. Also, assume that the cost of gas is $3 per gallon.

                          Instructions

                          Using the facts above, answer the following questions.

                          (a) What is the variable gasoline cost of going one mile in the hybrid car? What is the variable cost of going one mile in the traditional car?

                          (b) Using the information in part (a), if “miles” is your unit of measure, what is the “contribution margin” of the hybrid vehicle relative to the traditional vehicle? That is, express the variable cost savings on a per-mile basis.

                          (c) How many miles would you have to drive in order to break even on your investment in the hybrid car?

                          (d) What other factors might you want to consider?

                          the following information is available for chap company 539075

                          The following information is available for Chap Company.

                          Sales

                          $350,000

                          Cost of goods sold

                          $120,000

                          Total fixed expenses

                          $60,000

                          Total variable expenses

                          $100,000

                          Which amount would you find on Chap’s CVP income statement?

                          (a) Contribution margin of $250,000.

                          (b) Contribution margin of $190,000.

                          (c) Gross profit of $230,000.

                          (d) Gross profit of $190,000.

                          e19 7 quick auto has over 200 auto maintenance service outlets nationwide it provide 539124

                          E19-7 Quick Auto has over 200 auto-maintenance service outlets nationwide. It provides primarily two lines of service: oil changes and brake repair. Oil change–related services represent 65% of its sales and provide a contribution margin ratio of 20%. Brake repair represents 35% of its sales and provides a 60% contribution margin ratio. The company’s fixed costs are $16,000,000 (that is, $80,000 per service outlet).

                          Instructions

                          (a) Calculate the dollar amount of each type of service that the company must provide in order to break even.

                          (b) The company has a desired net income of $60,000 per service outlet. What is the dollar amount of each type of service that must be provided by each service outlet to meet its target net income per outlet?

                          a firm reported the following cash flows 539126

                          A firm reported the following cash flows:

                          Year

                          1999

                          2000

                          2001

                          2002

                          2003

                          2004

                          Average

                          S&P500

                          +21.4%

                          -5.7%

                          -12.8%

                          -21.9%

                          +26, 4%

                          +9.0%

                          +2.7%

                          Cash Flows

                          +$2, 864

                          +$1, 666

                          -$1, 040

                          +$52

                          +$1, 478

                          -$962

                          +$997

                          (Note that the cash flows are close to nothing in 2002 and even negative in 2004, the latter preventing you from computing percent changes in cash flows.) What cost of capital would you recommend for this firm?

                          construct a pro forma for the following firm a 3 year project costs 150 year 1 and p 539165

                          Construct a pro forma for the following firm: A 3-year project costs $150 (year 1), and produces $70 in year 1, $60 in year 2, and $55 in year 3. Depreciation, both real and financial, is 3 years. Projects of this riskiness (and with this term structure of project payoffs) have an 18% cost of capital. The marginal corporate income tax rate is 40%.

                          a) Assume that the firm is 100% equity financed. Construct the pro forma, and compute expected project cash flows.

                          b) Compute the Project IRR.

                          c) Compute the project NPV.

                          d) Assume that this firm expects to receive an extra bonus of $2 in years 2 and 3 from a benevolent donor.

                          What would be the project’s cash flows and IRR now?

                          For the remaining questions, assume that the firm instead has a capital structure financing $50 in debt raised in year 1 at a 10% (expected) interest rate. There is no interest paid in year 1, Justin year’s 2 and 3. The principal is repaid in year 3.

                          e) Construct the pro forma now. What is the IRR of this project?

                          f) From the pro forma, what is the NPV of the debt-financed project?

                          g) Compute the NPV via the APV method.

                          h) Via the APV method, how much would firm value be if the firm would have taken on not$50 but $40 in debt (assuming the same interest rate of 10%)?

                          i) How much money must the equity provide in year 1? What is the debt ratio of the firm? Does it stay constant over time? Is this a good candidate firm for the WACC method?

                          interstate delivery service is owned and operated by katie wyer the following select 539311

                          Transactions

                          Interstate Delivery Service is owned and operated by Katie Wyer. The following selected transactions were completed by Interstate Delivery Service during May:

                          1. Received cash in exchange for capital stock, $18,000.

                          2. Paid advertising expense, $4,850.

                          3. Purchased supplies on account, $2,100.

                          4. Billed customers for delivery services on account, $14,700.

                          5. Received cash from customers on account, $8,200.

                          Indicate the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation elements (Assets, Liabilities, Stockholders’ Equity Capital Stock, Dividends, Revenue, and Expense). Also indicate the specific item within the accounting equation element that is affected. To illustrate, the answer to (1) is shown below.

                          (1) Asset (Cash) increases by $18,000; Stockholders’ Equity (Capital Stock) increases by $18,000.

                          e18 4 cottonwood furniture corporation incurred the following costs 539038

                          E18-4 Cottonwood Furniture Corporation incurred the following costs.

                          1. Wood used in the production of furniture.

                          2. Fuel used in delivery trucks.

                          3. Straight-line depreciation on factory building.

                          4. Screws used in the production of furniture.

                          5. Sales staff salaries.

                          6. Sales commissions.

                          7. Property taxes.

                          8. Insurance on buildings.

                          9. Hourly wages of furniture craftsmen.

                          10. Salaries of factory supervisors.

                          11. Utilities expense.

                          12. Telephone bill.

                          Instructions

                          Identify the costs above as variable, fixed, or mixed.

                          e18 8 green forever provides environmentally friendly lawn services for homeowners 539042

                          E18-8 Green Forever provides environmentally friendly lawn services for homeowners. Its operating costs are as follows.

                          Depreciation

                          $1,500 per month

                          Advertising

                          $200 per month

                          Insurance

                          $2,000 per month

                          Weed and feed materials

                          $13 per lawn

                          Direct labor

                          $12 per lawn

                          Fuel

                          $2 per lawn

                          Green Forever charges $60 per treatment for the average single-family lawn.

                          Instructions

                          Determine the company’s break-even point in (a) number of lawns serviced per month and (b) dollars.

                          the san marcos inn is trying to determine its break even point 539043

                          The San Marcos Inn is trying to determine its break-even point. The inn has 50 rooms that it rents at $60 a night. Operating costs are as follows.

                          Salaries

                          $7,200 per month

                          Utilities

                          $1,500 per month

                          Depreciation

                          $1,200 per month

                          Maintenance

                          $300 per month

                          Maid service

                          $8 per room

                          Other costs

                          $28 per room

                          Instructions

                          Determine the inn’s break-even point in (1) number of rented rooms per month and (2) dollars

                          naylor company has the following information available for september 2012 539045

                          Naylor Company has the following information available for September 2012.

                          Unit selling price of video game consoles

                          $ 400

                          Unit variable costs

                          $ 270

                          Total fixed costs

                          $52,000

                          Units sold

                          620

                          Instructions

                          (a) Prepare a CVP income statement that shows both total and per unit amounts.

                          (b) Compute Naylor’s break-even point in units.

                          (c) Prepare a CVP income statement for the break-even point that shows both total and per unit amounts.

                          e18 17 hardwood seating co a manufacturer of chairs had the following data for 2012 539051

                          E18-17 Hardwood Seating Co., a manufacturer of chairs, had the following data for 2012.

                          Sales

                          2,400 units

                          Sales price

                          $40 per unit

                          Variable costs

                          $14 per unit

                          Fixed costs

                          $19,500

                          Instructions

                          (a) What is the contribution margin ratio?

                          (b) What is the break-even point in dollars?

                          (c) What is the margin of safety in dollars and as a ratio?

                          (d) If the company wishes to increase its total dollar contribution margin by 40% in 2013, by how much will it need to increase its sales if all other factors remain constant?

                          p18 1a stephen thorne owns the fredonia barber shop 539052

                          P18-1A Stephen Thorne owns the Fredonia Barber Shop. He employs five barbers and pays each a base rate of $1,000 per month. One of the barbers serves as the manager and receives an extra $500 per month. In addition to the base rate, each barber also receives a commission of $5.50 per haircut. Other costs are as follows.

                          Advertising

                          $200 per month

                          Rent

                          $900 per month

                          Barber supplies

                          $0.30 per haircut

                          Utilities

                          $175 per month plus $0.20 per haircut

                          Magazines

                          $25 per month

                          Stephen currently charges $10 per haircut.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Determine the variable cost per haircut and the total monthly fixed costs.

                          (b) Compute the break-even point in units and dollars.

                          (c) Prepare a CVP graph, assuming a maximum of 1,800 haircuts in a month. Use increments of 300 haircuts on the horizontal axis and $3,000 on the vertical axis.

                          (d) Determine net income, assuming 1,900 haircuts are given in a month.

                          p18 2a lyman company bottles and distributes livit a diet soft drink 539053

                          P18-2A Lyman Company bottles and distributes Livit, a diet soft drink. The beverage is sold for 50 cents per 16-ounce bottle to retailers, who charge customers 75 cents per bottle. For the year 2012, management estimates the following revenues and costs.

                          Net sales

                          $1,800,000

                          Selling expenses—variable

                          $70,000

                          Direct materials

                          430,000

                          Selling expenses—fixed

                          65,000

                          Direct labor

                          352,000

                          Administrative expenses—variable

                          20,000

                          Manufacturing overhead—variable

                          316,000

                          Administrative expenses—fixed

                          60,000

                          Manufacturing overhead—fixed

                          283,000

                          Instructions

                          (a) Prepare a CVP income statement for 2012 based on management’s estimates.

                          (b) Compute the break-even point in (1) units and (2) dollars.

                          (c) Compute the contribution margin ratio and the margin of safety ratio. (Round to nearest full percent.)

                          (d) Determine the sales dollars required to earn net income of $238,000.

                          p18 3a giere manufacturing s sales slumped badly in 2012 539054

                          P18-3A Giere Manufacturing’s sales slumped badly in 2012. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 600,000 units of product: Net sales $2,400,000; total costs and expenses $2,540,000; and net loss $140,000. Costs and expenses consisted of the amounts shown below.

                          Total

                          Variable

                          Fixed

                          Cost of goods sold

                          $2,100,000

                          $1,440,000

                          $660,000

                          Selling expenses

                          240,000

                          72,000

                          168,000

                          Administrative expenses

                          200,000

                          48,000

                          152,000

                          $2,540,000

                          $1,560,000

                          $980,000

                          Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2013.

                          1. Increase unit selling price 20% with no change in costs, expenses, and sales volume.

                          2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $150,000 to total salaries of $60,000 plus a 5% commission on net sales.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.

                          (b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action.

                          (Round all ratios to nearest full percent.) Which course of action do you recommend?

                          p18 4a julie milroy is the advertising manager for value shoe store 539055

                          P18-4A Julie Milroy is the advertising manager for Value Shoe Store. She is currently working on a major promotional campaign. Her ideas include the installation of a new lighting system and increased display space that will add $34,000 in fixed costs to the $270,000 currently spent. In addition, Julie is proposing that a 5% price decrease ($40 to $38) will produce a 20% increase in sales volume (20,000 to 24,000). Variable costs will remain at $22 per pair of shoes. Management is impressed with Julie’s ideas but concerned about the effects that these changes will have on the break-even point and the margin of safety.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the current break-even point in units, and compare it to the break-even point in units if Julie’s ideas are used.

                          (b) Compute the margin of safety ratio for current operations and after Julie’s changes are introduced. (Round to nearest full percent.)
                          (c) Prepare a CVP income statement for current operations and after Julie’s changes are introduced. Would you make the changes suggested?

                          p18 4b beth howard is the advertising manager for payless shoe store 539061

                          P18-3B Denton Manufacturing had a bad year in 2011. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 60,000 units of product: Net sales $1,500,000; total costs and expenses $1,890,000; and net loss $390,000. Costs and expenses consisted of the amounts shown below.

                          Total

                          Variable

                          Fixed

                          Cost of goods sold

                          $1,350,000

                          $930,000

                          $420,000

                          Selling expenses

                          420,000

                          65,000

                          355,000

                          Administrative expenses

                          120,000

                          55,000

                          65,000

                          $1,890,000

                          $1,050,000

                          $840,000

                          Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2012.

                          1. Increase unit selling price 40% with no change in costs, expenses, and sales volume.

                          2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $200,000 to total salaries of $30,000 plus a 4% commission on net sales.

                          3. Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 50:50.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.

                          (b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action. Which course of action do you recommend?

                          the may 10 2004 edition of the wall street journal includes an article 538906

                          The May 10, 2004, edition of the Wall Street Journalincludes an article by Evan Ramstad entitled “A Tight Squeeze” (page R9).

                          Instructions

                          Read the article and answer the following questions.

                          (a) What is Proview‘s profit margin on computer monitors? Why is the profit margin so thin on computer monitors?

                          (b) What are some of the steps that Proview International has taken to control costs?

                          (c) Why does the company continue to build tube-based monitors even as many consumers are moving away from them?

                          (d) Mr. Wang’s final comment is, “Every aspect of the business is important, but the most important is cost.” Why does he feel this way?

                          diane barone was a good friend of yours in high school and is from your home town 538907

                          Diane Barone was a good friend of yours in high school and is from your home town. While you chose to major in accounting when you both went away to college, she majored in marketing and management. You have recently been promoted to accounting manager for the Snack Foods Division of Melton Enterprises, and your friend was promoted to regional sales manager for the same division of Melton. Diane recently telephoned you. She explained that she was familiar with job cost sheets, which had been used by the Special Projects division where she had formerly worked. She was, however, very uncomfortable with the production cost reports prepared by your division. She emailed you a list of her particular questions:

                          1. Since Melton occasionally prepares snack foods for special orders in the Snack Foods Division, why don’t we track costs of the orders separately?

                          2. What is an equivalent unit?

                          3. Why am I getting four production cost reports? Isn’t there one Work in Process account?

                          Instructions

                          Prepare a memo to Diane. Answer her questions, and include any additional information you think would be helpful. You may write informally, but do use proper grammar and punctuation.

                          hollins inc a manufacturer of computer chips employs activity based costing 538948

                          Hollins, Inc., a manufacturer of computer chips, employs activity-based costing. The budgeted data for each of the activity cost pools is provided below for the year 2012.

                          Estimated

                          Expected Use of

                          Activity Cost Pools

                          Overhead

                          Cost Drivers per Activity

                          Ordering and receiving

                          $90,000

                          12,000 orders

                          Etching

                          480,000

                          60,000 machine hours

                          Soldering

                          1,760,000

                          440,000 labor hours

                          For 2012, the company had 11,000 orders and used 50,000 machine hours, and labor hours totaled 500,000. What is the total overhead applied?

                          spin cycle company uses three activity pools to apply overhead to its products 538951

                          Spin Cycle Company uses three activity pools to apply overhead to its products. Each activity has a cost driver used to allocate the overhead costs to the product. The activities and related overhead costs are as follows: Product design $40,000; Machining $300,000; and Material handling $100,000. The cost drivers and expected use are as follows.

                          Expected Use of Cost Drivers

                          Activities

                          Cost Drivers

                          per Activity

                          Product design

                          Number of product changes

                          10

                          Machining

                          Machine hours

                          150,000

                          Material handling

                          Number of set ups

                          100

                          (a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each activity. (b) Classify each of these activities as unit-level, batch-level, product-level, or facility-level.

                          flynn industries has three activity cost pools and two products it expects to produc 538953

                          Flynn Industries has three activity cost pools and two products. It expects to produce 3,000 units of Product BC113 and 1,500 of Product AD908. Having identified its activity cost pools and the cost drivers for each pool, Flynn accumulated the following data relative to those activity cost pools and cost drivers.

                          Estimated

                          Expected Use of Cost

                          Product

                          Product

                          Activity Cost Pool

                          Cost Drivers

                          Overhead

                          Drivers per Activity

                          BC113

                          AD908

                          Machine setup

                          Setups

                          $16,000

                          40

                          25

                          15

                          Machining

                          Machine hours

                          110,000

                          5,000

                          1,000

                          4,000

                          Packing

                          Orders

                          30,000

                          500

                          150

                          350

                          Using the above data, do the following:

                          (a) Prepare a schedule showing the computations of the activity-based overhead rates per cost driver.

                          (b) Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost to the two products.

                          (c) Compute the overhead cost per unit for each product. (Round to nearest cent.)

                          (d) Comment on the comparative overhead cost per product.

                          wilkins inc has two types of handbags standard and custom 538956

                          Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company’s operations.

                          Standard

                          Custom

                          Direct labor costs

                          $50,000

                          $100,000

                          Machine hours

                          1,000

                          1,000

                          Setup hours

                          100

                          400

                          Total estimated overhead costs are $270,000. Overhead cost allocated to the machining activity cost pool is $170,000, and $100,000 is allocated to the machine setup activity cost pool.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the overhead rate using the traditional (plantwide) approach.

                          (b) Compute the overhead rates using the activity-based costing approach.

                          (c) Determine the difference in allocation between the two approaches.

                          american fabrics has budgeted overhead costs of 990 000 538958

                          American Fabrics has budgeted overhead costs of $990,000. It has allocated overhead on a plantwide basis to its two products (wool and cotton) using direct labor hours which are estimated to be 450,000 for the current year. The company has decided to experiment with activity-based costing and has created two activity cost pools and related activity cost drivers. These two cost pools are: Cutting (cost driver is machine hours) and Design (cost driver is number of setups). Overhead allocated to the Cutting cost pool is $360,000 and $630,000 is allocated to the Design cost pool. Additional information related to these pools is as follows.

                          Wool

                          Cotton

                          Total

                          Machine hours

                          100,000

                          100,000

                          200,000

                          Number of setups

                          1,000

                          500

                          1,500

                          Instructions

                          (a) Determine the amount of overhead allocated to the wool product line and the cotton product line using activity-based costing.

                          (b) What amount of overhead would be allocated to the wool and cotton product lines using the traditional approach, assuming direct labor hours were incurred evenly between the wool and cotton? How does this compare with the amount allocated using ABC in part (a)?

                          altex inc manufactures two products car wheels and truck wheels 538959

                          Altex Inc. manufactures two products: car wheels and truck wheels. To determine the amount of overhead to assign to each product line, the controller, Robert Hermann, has developed the following information.

                          Car

                          Truck

                          Estimated wheels produced

                          40,000

                          10,000

                          Direct labor hours per wheel

                          1

                          3

                          Total estimated overhead costs for the two product lines are $770,000.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the overhead cost assigned to the car wheels and truck wheels, assuming that direct labor hours is used to allocate overhead costs.

                          (b) Hermann is not satisfied with the traditional method of allocating overhead because he believes that most of the over he costs relate to the truck wheel product line because of its complexity. He therefore develops the following three activity cost pools and related cost drivers to better understand these costs.

                          Expected Use of

                          Estimated Overhead

                          Activity Cost Pools

                          Cost Drivers

                          Costs

                          Setting up machines

                          1,000 setups

                          $220,000

                          Assembling

                          70,000 labor hours

                          280,000

                          Inspection

                          1,200 inspections

                          270,000

                          Compute the activity-based overhead rates for these three cost pools.

                          (c) Compute the cost that is assigned to the car wheels and truck wheels product lines using an activity-based costing system, given the following information.

                          Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product

                          Car

                          Truck

                          Number of setups

                          200

                          800

                          Direct labor hours

                          40,000

                          30,000

                          Number of inspections

                          100

                          1,100

                          (d) What do you believe Hermann should do?

                          shady lady sells window coverings to both commercial and residential customers 538960

                          Shady Lady sells window coverings to both commercial and residential customers. The following information relates to its budgeted operations for the current year.

                          Commercial

                          Residential

                          Revenues

                          $300,000

                          $480,000

                          Direct material costs

                          $30,000

                          $50,000

                          Direct labor costs

                          100,000

                          300,000

                          Overhead costs

                          85,000

                          215,000

                          150,000

                          500,000

                          Operating income (loss)

                          $85,000

                          ($20,000)

                          The controller, Peggy Kingman, is concerned about the residential product line. She cannot understand why this line is not more profitable given that the installations of window coverings are less complex for residential customers. In addition, the residential client base resides in close proximity to the company office, so travel costs are not as expensive

                          on a per client visit for residential customers. As a result, she has decided to take a closer look at the overhead costs assigned to the two product lines to determine whether a more accurate product costing model can be developed. Here are the three activity cost pools and related information she developed:

                          Activity Cost Pools

                          Estimated Overhead

                          Cost Drivers

                          Scheduling and travel

                          $105,000

                          Hours of travel

                          Setup time

                          70,000

                          Number of setups

                          Supervision

                          60,000

                          Direct labor cost

                          Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product

                          Commercial

                          Residential

                          Scheduling and travel

                          1,000

                          500

                          Setup time

                          450

                          250

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the activity-based overhead rates for each of the three cost pools, and determine the overhead cost assigned to each product line.

                          (b) Compute the operating income for each product line, using the activity-based overhead rates.

                          (c) What do you believe Peggy Kingman should do?

                          healthy products inc uses a traditional product costing system to assign overhead co 538968

                          Healthy Products, Inc., uses a traditional product costing system to assign overhead costs uniformly to all products. To meet Food and Drug Administration requirements and to assure its customers of safe, sanitary, and nutritious food, Healthy engages in a high level of quality control. Healthy assigns its quality-control overhead costs to all products at a rate of 17% of direct labor costs. Its direct labor cost for the month of June for its low-calorie dessert line is $65,000. In response to repeated requests from its financial vice president, Healthy’s management agrees to adopt activity-based costing. Data relating to the low-calorie dessert line for the month of June are as follows.

                          Number of Cost

                          Overhead

                          Drivers Used

                          Activity Cost Pools

                          Cost Drivers

                          Rate

                          per Activity

                          Inspections of

                          material received

                          Number of pounds

                          $0.80 per pound

                          6,000 pounds

                          In-process inspections

                          Number of servings

                          $0.33 per serving

                          10,000 servings

                          FDA certification

                          Customer orders

                          $12.00 per order

                          420 orders

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the quality-control overhead cost to be assigned to the low-calorie dessert product line for the month of June: (1) using the traditional product costing system (direct labor cost is the cost driver), and (2) using activity-based costing.

                          (b) By what amount does the traditional product costing system undercost or overcost the low-calorie dessert line?

                          (c) Classify each of the activities as value-added or non–value-added.

                          kinnard electronics manufactures two home theater systems the elite which sells 538976

                          Kinnard Electronics manufactures two home theater systems: the Elite which sells for $1,400, and a new model, the Preferred, which sells for $1,100. The production cost computed per unit under traditional costing for each model in 2012 was as follows.

                          Traditional Costing

                          Elite

                          Preferred

                          Direct materials

                          $600

                          $320

                          Direct labor ($20 per hour)

                          100

                          80

                          Manufacturing overhead ($35 per DLH)

                          175

                          140

                          Total per unit cost

                          $875

                          $540

                          In 2012, Kinnard manufactured 20,000 units of the Elite and 10,000 units of the Preferred. The overhead rate of $35 per direct labor hour was determined by dividing total expected manufacturing overhead of $4,900,000 by the total direct labor hours (140,000) for the two models. Under traditional costing, the gross profit on the models was: Elite $525 ($1,400 _ $875), and Preferred $560 ($1,100 _ $540). Because of this difference, management is considering phasing out the Elite model and increasing the production of the Preferred model. Before finalizing its decision, management asks Kinnard’s controller to prepare an analysis using activity-based costing (ABC). The controller accumulates the following information about overhead for the year ended December 31, 2012.

                          Expected

                          Activity-

                          Use of

                          Based

                          Estimated

                          Cost

                          Overhead

                          Activity

                          Cost Driver

                          Overhead

                          Drivers

                          Rate

                          Purchasing

                          Number of orders

                          $ 775,000

                          25,000

                          $31

                          Machine setups

                          Number of setups

                          580,000

                          20,000

                          29

                          Machining

                          Machine hours

                          3,100,000

                          100,000

                          31

                          Quality control

                          Number of inspections

                          445,000

                          5,000

                          89

                          The cost drivers used for each product were:

                          Cost Driver

                          Elite

                          Preferred

                          Total

                          Purchase orders

                          11,250

                          13,750

                          25,000

                          Machine setups

                          11,000

                          9,000

                          20,000

                          Machine hours

                          40,000

                          60,000

                          100,000

                          Inspections

                          2,750

                          2,250

                          5,000

                          Instructions

                          (a) Assign the total 2012 manufacturing overhead costs to the two products using activitybased costing (ABC).

                          (b) What was the cost per unit and gross profit of each model using ABC costing?

                          (c) Are management’s future plans for the two models sound? Explain.

                          luxury furniture designs and builds factory made premium wood armoires for homes 538977

                          Luxury Furniture designs and builds factory-made, premium, wood armoires for homes. All are of white oak. Its budgeted manufacturing overhead costs for the year 2012 are as follows.

                          Overhead Cost Pools

                          Amount

                          Purchasing

                          $ 45,000

                          Handling materials

                          50,000

                          Production (cutting, milling, finishing)

                          130,000

                          Setting up machines

                          85,000

                          Inspecting

                          60,000

                          Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)

                          80,000

                          Utilities

                          100,000

                          Total budget overhead costs

                          $550,000

                          For the last 4 years, Luxury Furniture has been charging overhead to products on the basis of materials cost. For the year 2012, materials cost of $500,000 were budgeted. Jim Brigham, owner-manager of Luxury Furniture, recently directed his accountant, Bob Borke, to implement the activity-based costing system that he has repeatedly proposed. At Jim Brigham’s request, Bob and the production foreman identify the following cost drivers and their usage for the previously budgeted overhead cost pools.

                          Expected

                          Use of

                          Overhead Cost Pools

                          Activity Cost Drivers

                          Cost Drivers

                          Purchasing

                          Number of orders

                          500

                          Handling materials

                          Number of moves

                          5,000

                          Production (cutting, milling, finishing)

                          Direct labor hours

                          65,000

                          Setting up machines

                          Number of setups

                          1,000

                          Inspecting

                          Number of inspections

                          4,000

                          Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)

                          Number of components

                          40,000

                          Utilities

                          Square feet occupied

                          50,000

                          Debbie Steiner, sales manager, has received an order for 12 luxury armoires from Thom’s Interior Design. At Debbie’s request, Bob prepares cost estimates for producing 12 armoires so Debbie can submit a contract price per armoire to Thom’s. He accumulates the following data for the production of 12 armoires.

                          Direct materials

                          $5,200

                          Direct labor

                          $3,500

                          Direct labor hours

                          200

                          Number of purchase orders

                          3

                          Number of material moves

                          32

                          Number of machine setups

                          4

                          Number of inspections

                          20

                          Number of components

                          640

                          Number of square feet occupied

                          320

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate using traditional costing with materials cost as the basis.

                          (b) What is the manufacturing cost per armoire under traditional costing?

                          (c) What is the manufacturing cost per armoire under the proposed activity-based costing? (Prepare all of the necessary schedules.)

                          (d) Which of the two costing systems is preferable in pricing decisions and why?

                          p17 5b smith and jones is a law firm that serves both individuals and corporations 538979

                          P17-5B Smith and Jones is a law firm that serves both individuals and corporations. A controversy has developed between the partners of the two service lines as to who is contributing the greater amount to the bottom line. The area of contention is the assignment of overhead. The individual partners argue for assigning overhead on the basis of 30% of direct labor dollars, while the corporate partners argue for implementing activity-based costing. The partners agree to use next year’s budgeted data for purposes of analysis and comparison. The following overhead data are collected to develop the comparison.

                          Expected

                          Expected Use

                          Use of

                          of Cost Drivers

                          Estimated

                          Cost

                          per Service

                          Activity Cost Pool

                          Cost Driver

                          Overhead

                          Drivers

                          Corporate

                          Individual

                          Employee training

                          Direct labor dollars

                          $120,000

                          $1,600,000

                          $900,000

                          $700,000

                          Typing and

                          Number of reports/

                          secretarial

                          forms

                          60,000

                          2,000

                          500

                          1,500

                          Computing

                          Number of minutes

                          130,000

                          40,000

                          17,000

                          23,000

                          Facility rental

                          Number of employees

                          100,000

                          25

                          14

                          11

                          Travel

                          Per expense reports

                          70,000

                          Direct

                          48,000

                          22,000

                          $480,000

                          Instructions

                          (a) Using traditional product costing, compute the total overhead cost assigned to both services (individual and corporate) of Smith and Jones.

                          (b) (1) Using activity-based costing, prepare a schedule showing the computations of the activity-based overhead rates (per cost driver).

                          (2) Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost pool to each service based on the use of the cost drivers.

                          (c) Classify each of the activities as a value-added activity or a non–value-added activity.

                          (d) Comment on the comparative overhead for the two service lines under both traditional costing and ABC.

                          there are many resources available on the web to assist people in time management 538986

                          There are many resources available on the Web to assist people in time management. Some of these resources are designed specifically for college students.

                          Instructions

                          Go to http://www.dartmouth.edu/~acskills/videos/video_tm.html (or do an Internet search of Dartmouth’s time-management video). Watch the video and then answer the following questions.

                          (a) What are the main tools of time management for students, and what is each used for?

                          (b) At what time of day are students most inclined to waste time? What time of day is the best for studying complex topics?

                          (c) How can employing time-management practices be a “liberating” experience?

                          (d) Why is goal-setting important? What are the characteristics of good goals, and what steps should you take to help you develop your goals?

                          be18 5 presto corp has collected the following data concerning its maintenance costs 539023

                          BE18-5 Presto Corp. has collected the following data concerning its maintenance costs for the past 6 months.

                          Units Produced

                          Total Cost

                          July

                          18,000

                          $32,000

                          August

                          32,000

                          48,000

                          September

                          36,000

                          55,000

                          October

                          22,000

                          38,000

                          November

                          40,000

                          65,000

                          December

                          38,000

                          62,000

                          Compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high-low method.

                          be18 6 determine the missing amounts 539024

                          BE18-6 Determine the missing amounts.

                          Unit Selling
                          Price

                          Unit Variable
                          Costs

                          Contribution
                          Margin per Unit

                          Contribution
                          Margin Ratio

                          1.

                          $640

                          $384

                          (a)

                          (b)

                          2.

                          $300

                          (c)

                          $90

                          (d)

                          3.

                          (e)

                          (f)

                          $320

                          25%

                          18 1 dousman company reports the following total costs at two levels of production 539031

                          18-1 Dousman Company reports the following total costs at two levels of production.

                          5,000 Units

                          10,000 Units

                          Indirect labor

                          $ 3,000

                          $ 6,000

                          Property taxes

                          7,000

                          7,000

                          Direct labor

                          27,000

                          54,000

                          Direct materials

                          22,000

                          44,000

                          Depreciation

                          4,000

                          4,000

                          Utilities

                          3,000

                          5,000

                          Maintenance

                          9,000

                          11,000

                          Classify each cost as variable, fixed, or mixed.

                          18 2 colter company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost using uni 539032

                          18-2 Colter Company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using units produced as the activity level.

                          Units Produced

                          Total Cost

                          March

                          10,000

                          $18,000

                          April

                          9,000

                          16,650

                          May

                          10,500

                          18,750

                          June

                          8,800

                          16,200

                          July

                          9,500

                          17,100

                          (a) Compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high-low method.

                          (b) Estimate the total cost if the company produces 8,500 units.

                          harrelson company manufactures pizza sauce through two production departments 538872

                          Harrelson Company manufactures pizza sauce through two production departments: Cooking and Canning. In each process, materials and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. For the month of April, the work in process accounts show the following debits.

                          Cooking

                          Canning

                          Beginning work in process

                          $ –0–

                          $ 4,000

                          Materials

                          21,000

                          9,000

                          Labor

                          8,500

                          7,000

                          Overhead

                          31,500

                          25,800

                          Costs transferred in

                          53,000

                          Instructions

                          Journalize the April transactions.

                          the ledger of custer company has the following work in process account 538873

                          The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.

                          5/1

                          Balance

                          3,590

                          5/31

                          Transferred out

                          ?

                          5/31

                          Materials

                          5,160

                          5/31

                          Labor

                          2,740

                          5/31

                          Overhead

                          1,380

                          5/31

                          Balance

                          ?

                          Production records show that there were 400 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,400 units started, and 1,500 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,040 and conversion costs of $1,550. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.

                          Instructions

                          (a) How many units are in process at May 31?

                          (b) What is the unit materials cost for May?

                          (c) What is the unit conversion cost for May?

                          (d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?

                          (e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory?

                          schrager manufacturing company has two production departments cutting and assembly 538874

                          Schrager Manufacturing Company has two production departments: Cutting and Assembly. July 1 inventories are Raw Materials $4,200, Work in Process—Cutting $2,900, Work in Process—Assembly $10,600, and Finished Goods $31,000. During July, the following transactions occurred.

                          1. Purchased $62,500 of raw materials on account.

                          2. Incurred $60,000 of factory labor. (Credit Wages Payable.)

                          3. Incurred $70,000 of manufacturing overhead; $40,000 was paid and the remainder is unpaid.

                          4. Requisitioned materials for Cutting $15,700 and Assembly $8,900.

                          5. Used factory labor for Cutting $33,000 and Assembly $27,000.

                          6. Applied overhead at the rate of $18 per machine hour. Machine hours were Cutting 1,680 and Assembly 1,720.

                          7. Transferred goods costing $67,600 from the Cutting Department to the Assembly Department.

                          8. Transferred goods costing $134,900 from Assembly to Finished Goods.

                          9. Sold goods costing $150,000 for $200,000 on account.

                          Instructions

                          Journalize the transactions. (Omit explanations.)

                          in wayne company materials are entered at the beginning of each process work in proc 538875

                          In Wayne Company, materials are entered at the beginning of each process. Work in process inventories, with the percentage of work done on conversion costs, and production data for its Sterilizing Department in selected months during 2012 are as follows.

                          Beginning

                          Ending

                          Work in Process

                          Conversion

                          Units

                          Work in Process

                          Conversion

                          Month

                          Units

                          Cost%

                          Transferred Out

                          Units

                          Cost%

                          January

                          –0–

                          9,000

                          2,000

                          60

                          March

                          –0–

                          12,000

                          3,000

                          30

                          May

                          –0–

                          16,000

                          7,000

                          80

                          July

                          –0–

                          10,000

                          1,500

                          40

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the physical units for January and May.

                          (b) Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for each month.

                          the cutting department of cassel manufacturing has the following production and cost 538876

                          The Cutting Department of Cassel Manufacturing has the following production and cost data for July.

                          Production

                          Costs

                          1. Transferred out 12,000 units.

                          Beginning work in process

                          $ –0–

                          2. Started 3,000 units that are 60% complete as to conversion costs and 100% complete as to materials at July 31.

                          Materials

                          45,000

                          Labor

                          16,200

                          Manufacturing overhead

                          18,300

                          Materials are entered at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred uniformly during the process.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Determine the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs.

                          (b) Compute unit costs and prepare a cost reconciliation schedule.

                          the blending department of luongo company has the following cost and production data 538878

                          The Blending Department of Luongo Company has the following cost and production data for the month of April.

                          Costs:

                          Work in process, April 1

                          Direct materials: 100% complete

                          $100,000

                          Conversion costs: 20% complete

                          70,000

                          Cost of work in process, April 1

                          $170,000

                          Costs incurred during production in April

                          Direct materials

                          $ 800,000

                          Conversion costs

                          365,000

                          Costs incurred in April

                          $1,165,000

                          Units transferred out totaled 17,000. Ending work in process was 1,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for the month of April.

                          (b) Compute the unit costs for the month.

                          (c) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in ending work in process.

                          kostrivas company has gathered the following information 538879

                          Kostrivas Company has gathered the following information.

                          Units in beginning work in process

                          0

                          Units started into production

                          40,000

                          Units in ending work in process

                          6,000

                          Percent complete in ending work in process:

                          Conversion costs

                          40%

                          Materials

                          100%

                          Costs incurred:

                          Direct materials

                          $72,000

                          Direct labor

                          $81,000

                          Overhead

                          $101,000

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.

                          (b) Determine the unit costs of production.

                          (c) Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.

                          overton company has gathered the following information 538880

                          Overton Company has gathered the following information.

                          Units in beginning work in process

                          20,000

                          Units started into production

                          164,000

                          Units in ending work in process

                          24,000

                          Percent complete in ending work in process:

                          Conversion costs

                          60%

                          Materials

                          100%

                          Costs incurred:

                          Direct materials

                          $101,200

                          Direct labor

                          $164,800

                          Overhead

                          $184,000

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.

                          (b) Determine the unit costs of production.

                          (c) Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.

                          the polishing department of harbin manufacturing company has 538881

                          The Polishing Department of Harbin Manufacturing Company has the following production and manufacturing cost data for September. Materials are entered at the beginning of the process.

                          Production: Beginning inventory 1,600 units that are 100% complete as to materials vand 30% complete as to conversion costs; units started during the period are 38,400; ending inventory of 5,000 units 10% complete as to conversion costs.

                          Manufacturing costs: Beginning inventory costs, comprised of $20,000 of materials and $43,180 of conversion costs; materials costs added in Polishing during the month, $177,200; labor and overhead applied in Polishing during the month, $125,680 and $257,140, respectively.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs for the month of September.

                          (b) Compute the unit costs for materials and conversion costs for the month.

                          (c) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in process.

                          the cutting department of keigi manufacturing has the following production and cost 538887

                          The Cutting Department of Keigi Manufacturing has the following production and cost data for August.

                          Production

                          Costs

                          1. Started and completed 8,000 units.

                          Beginning work in process

                          $ –0–

                          2. Started 2,000 units that are 40%

                          Materials

                          45,000

                          completed at August 31.

                          Labor

                          14,700

                          Manufacturing overhead

                          16,100

                          Materials are entered at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred uniformly during the process. Keigi Manufacturing uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent units.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Determine the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs.

                          (b) Compute unit costs and show the assignment of manufacturing costs to units transferred out and in work in process.

                          the smelting department of polzin manufacturing company has the following production 538888

                          The Smelting Department of Polzin Manufacturing Company has the following production and cost data for September. Production:Beginning work in process 2,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 20% complete as to conversion costs; units started and finished 9,000 units; and ending work in process 1,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.

                          Manufacturing costs: Work in process, September 1, $15,200; materials added $60,000; labor and overhead $132,000. Polzin uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent units.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for the month of September.

                          (b) Compute the unit costs for the month.

                          (c) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in process.

                          the ledger of hannon company has the following work in process account 538889

                          The ledger of Hannon Company has the following work in process account.

                          3/1

                          Balance

                          3,680

                          3/31

                          Transferred out

                          3/31

                          Materials

                          6,600

                          3/31

                          Labor

                          2,500

                          3/31

                          Overhead

                          1,150

                          3/31

                          Balance

                          ?

                          Production records show that there were 800 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,200 units started, and 1,500 units transferred out. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process. Hannon uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent units.

                          Instructions

                          Answer the following questions.

                          (a) How many units are in process at March 31?

                          (b) What is the unit materials cost for March?

                          (c) What is the unit conversion cost for March?

                          (d) What is the total cost of units started in February and completed in March?

                          (e) What is the total cost of units started and finished in March?

                          (f) What is the cost of the March 31 inventory?

                          the welding department of majestic manufacturing company has the following productio 538890

                          The Welding Department of Majestic Manufacturing Company has the following production and manufacturing cost data for February 2012. All materials are added at the beginning of the process. Majestic uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent

                          units.

                          Beginning work in process

                          $ 32,175

                          Beginning work in process

                          15,000 units,

                          Costs transferred in

                          135,000

                          10% complete

                          Materials

                          57,000

                          Units transferred out

                          50,000

                          Labor

                          35,100

                          Units transferred in

                          64,000

                          Overhead

                          68,400

                          Ending work in process

                          25,000,

                          20% complete

                          Instructions

                          Prepare a production cost report for the Welding Department for the month of February. Transferred-in costs are considered materials costs.

                          rosenthal company manufactures bowling balls through two processes 538892

                          Rosenthal Company manufactures bowling balls through two processes: Molding and Packaging. In the Molding Department, the urethane, rubber, plastics, and other materials are molded into bowling balls. In the Packaging Department, the balls are placed in cartons and sent to the finished goods warehouse. All materials are entered at the beginning of each process. Labor and manufacturing overhead are incurred uniformly throughout each process. Production and cost data for the Molding Department during June 2012 are presented below.

                          Production Data

                          June

                          Beginning work in process units

                          –0–

                          Units started into production

                          22,000

                          Ending work in process units

                          2,000

                          Percent complete—ending inventory

                          40%

                          Cost Data

                          Materials

                          $198,000

                          Labor

                          53,600

                          Overhead

                          112,800

                          Total

                          $364,400

                          Instructions

                          (a) Prepare a schedule showing physical units of production.

                          (b) Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.

                          (c) Compute the unit costs of production.

                          (d) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred and in process for June.

                          (e) Prepare a production cost report for the Molding Department for the month of June.

                          seagren industries inc manufactures in separate processes furniture for homes 538893

                          Seagren Industries Inc. manufactures in separate processes furniture for homes. In each process, materials are entered at the beginning, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the first process in making two products in two different manufacturing plants are as follows.

                          Cutting Department

                          Plant 1

                          Plant 2

                          Production Data—July

                          T12-Tables

                          C10-Chairs

                          Work in process units, July 1

                          –0–

                          –0–

                          Units started into production

                          19,000

                          16,000

                          Work in process units, July 31

                          3,000

                          500

                          Work in process percent complete

                          60

                          80

                          Cost Data—July

                          Work in process, July 1

                          $ –0–

                          $ –0–

                          Materials

                          380,000

                          288,000

                          Labor

                          234,200

                          110,000

                          Overhead

                          104,000

                          96,700

                          Total

                          $718,200

                          $494,700

                          Instructions

                          (a) For each plant:

                          (1) Compute the physical units of production.

                          (2) Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.

                          (3) Determine the unit costs of production.

                          (4) Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.

                          (b) Prepare the production cost report for Plant 1 for July 2012.

                          rivera company has several processing departments 538894

                          Rivera Company has several processing departments. Costs charged to the Assembly Department for November 2012 totaled $2,280,000 as follows.

                          Work in process, November 1

                          Materials

                          $79,000

                          Conversion costs

                          48,150

                          $127,150

                          Materials added

                          1,589,000

                          Labor

                          225,920

                          Overhead

                          337,930

                          Production records show that 35,000 units were in beginning work in process 30% complete as to conversion costs, 660,000 units were started into production, and 25,000 units were in ending work in process 40% complete as to conversion costs. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process.

                          Instructions

                          (a) Determine the equivalent units of production and the unit production costs for the Assembly Department.

                          (b) Determine the assignment of costs to goods transferred out and in process.

                          (c) Prepare a production cost report for the Assembly Department.

                          wilbury company manufactures a nutrient everlife through two manufacturing processes 538897

                          Wilbury Company manufactures a nutrient, Everlife, through two manufacturing processes: Blending and Packaging. All materials are entered at the beginning of each process. On August 1, 2012, inventories consisted of Raw Materials $5,000, Work in Process—Blending $0, Work in Process—Packaging $3,945, and Finished Goods $7,500. The beginning inventory for Packaging consisted of 500 units, two-fifths complete as to conversion costs and fully complete as to materials. During August, 9,000 units were started into production in Blending, and the following transactions were completed.

                          1. Purchased $25,000 of raw materials on account.

                          2. Issued raw materials for production: Blending $18,930 and Packaging $9,140.

                          3. Incurred labor costs of $25,770.

                          4. Used factory labor: Blending $15,320 and Packaging $10,450.

                          5. Incurred $36,500 of manufacturing overhead on account.

                          6. Applied manufacturing overhead at the rate of $28 per machine hour. Machine hours were Blending 900 and Packaging 300.

                          7. Transferred 8,200 units from Blending to Packaging at a cost of $44,940.

                          8. Transferred 8,600 units from Packaging to Finished Goods at a cost of $67,490.

                          9. Sold goods costing $62,000 for $90,000 on account.

                          Instructions

                          Journalize the August transactions.

                          steiner corporation manufactures water skis through two processes 538898

                          Steiner Corporation manufactures water skis through two processes: Molding and Packaging. In the Molding Department, fiberglass is heated and shaped into the form of a ski. In the Packaging Department, the skis are placed in cartons and sent to the finished goods warehouse. Materials are entered at the beginning of both processes. Labor and manufacturing overhead are incurred uniformly throughout each process. Production and cost data for the Molding Department for January 2012 are presented below.

                          January

                          Production Data

                          –0–

                          Beginning work in process units

                          50,000

                          Units started into production

                          2,500

                          Ending work in process units

                          40%

                          Percent complete—ending inventory

                          Cost Data

                          Materials

                          $510,000

                          Labor

                          92,500

                          Overhead

                          150,000

                          Total

                          $752,500

                          Instructions

                          (a) Compute the physical units of production.

                          (b) Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.

                          (c) Compute the unit costs of production.

                          (d) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in process.

                          (e) Prepare a production cost report for the Molding Department for the month of January.

                          florida beach company manufactures suntan lotion called surtan 538904

                          Florida Beach Company manufactures suntan lotion, called Surtan, in 11-ounce plastic bottles. Surtan is sold in a competitive market. As a result, management is very cost-conscious. Surtan is manufactured through two processes: mixing and filling. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process, and labor and manufacturing overhead occur uniformly throughout each process. Unit costs are based on the cost per gallon of Surtan using the weighted-average costing approach.

                          On June 30, 2012, Mary Ritzman, the chief accountant for the past 20 years, opted to take early retirement. Her replacement, Joe Benili, had extensive accounting experience with motels in the area but only limited contact with manufacturing accounting. During July, Joe correctly accumulated the following production quantity and cost data for the Mixing Department. Production quantities:Work in process, July 1, 8,000 gallons 75% complete; started into production 100,000 gallons; work in process, July 31, 5,000 gallons 20% complete. Materials are added at the beginning of the process. Production costs:Beginning work in process $88,000, comprised of $21,000 of materials costs and $67,000 of conversion costs; incurred in July: materials $573,000, conversion costs $765,000. Joe then prepared a production cost report on the basis of physical units started into production. His report showed a production cost of $14.26 per gallon of Surtan. The management of Florida Beach was surprised at the high unit cost. The president comes to you, as Mary’s top assistant, to review Joe’s report and prepare a correct report if necessary.

                          Instructions

                          With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.

                          (a) Show how Joe arrived at the unit cost of $14.26 per gallon of Surtan.

                          (b) What error(s) did Joe make in preparing his production cost report?

                          (c) Prepare a correct production cost report for July.